CONTENTS
SECTION-1
SECTION-2
SECTION-3
Chapter-1
SECTION-4
Chapter-1
Chapter-2
Chapter-3
SECTION-5
Chapter-1
Chapter-2
Chapter-3
Chapter-4
Chapter-5
SECTION-6
Chapter-1
Chapter-2
Chapter-3
Chapter-4
Chapter-5
Chapter-6
Chapter-7
Chapter-8
Chapter-9
Chapter-10
Chapter-11
Chapter-12
SECTION-7
SECTION-8
SECTION-9
SECTION-10
Chapter-1
Chapter-2
Chapter-3
Chapter-4
Chapter-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
BID DOCUMENT NO.: REC-145
FOR 66kV GIS SUBSTATION MATERIAL
GENERAL
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF POWER TRANSFORMER
25/31.5 MVA, 66/11kV Power Transformer
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF SWITCH-GEAR
72.5 KV GIS
198, 120, 30 & 9 KV Gapless Surge Arrestor
11 KV 15 Panel Board 1250 Amp
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF PROTECTIVE GEAR
245, 72.5, & 12kV NCT
245 &72.5 kV CVT
220 kV & 66 kV C& R PANELS for substations having substation automation
system
Sub-Station Automation System
Inter-utility Metering System
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF ELEC. AND MECH. AUX.
415 V ACDB
220V and 48V VRLA DC Battery
220V DC Battery charger
DCDB
Fire fighting equipments
66KV XLPE Cable
11kV XLPE Cable
LT Power Cable
Air Conditinging System
200KVA 11/0.4KV Station T/F
13.608MVAR 11kV Automatic Capacitor Bank
Armoured Control Cable
SWITCHYARD ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
STEEL STRUCTURE
CIVIL WORKS
PLCC Equipment & Protection Coupler
Line Traps
Coupling Device
48 V Battery Charger
HF Cable 150 Ohm (Balanced)
LIST OF DRAWINGS
SECTION-1 (GENERAL)
1.0
1.1
66kV GIS SECTOR-21-D, Faridabad
The scope of this Project is to establish 66kV Gas Insulated Substation (GIS) at
Sector-21- D, Faridabad with complete automation and civil work configuration. The
intent of this specification covers the following:
The specification includes the design, engineering, manufacture, fabrication, testing at
1.2
manufacturers works, delivery, unloading at site, storage, erection, testing and
commissioning at site of the complete 66kV switchyard including:
Indoor 66kV SF6 gas insulated metal enclosed switchgear (GIS), Two 25/31.5MVA,
66/11kV Power Transformer, one 200KVA 11/0.433kV LT Transformers, 11kV VCB
Panels, 11kV Automated Switched Capacitor banks, Fire Extinguishers, Testing
equipment’s, associated civil works including soil investigation, internal roads, drains,
necessary buildings etc., 66kV XLPE copper Power Cables, 11kV XLPE Aluminium
Power Cables, Indoor & outdoor End Termination Boxes, Substation Automation with
Relay & Protection, Communication (Converter) equipments and other electrical and
mechanical auxiliary systems on turnkey basis. Bidder shall also ensure GIS
compatibility for line feeder and provide the ancillary equipment required for the
same. For connecting 66kV GIS with primary of transformers, lines bidder will use
XLPE copper Power Cables along with cable termination for both end and flexible
ACSR zebra conductor, structures etc. as per GELO. For connecting 11kV side of
66/11kV Transformer bidder will use 11kV XLPE Aluminium Power Cables and as per
GELO drawing no. HGD-3C/579.
1.3. The supply will include all supporting structures, auxiliary equipments, mechanical
linkages, SF6 gas piping, auxiliary circuits wiring, interlocking devices, current and
voltage transformers, cable end boxes and SF6 bus ducts.
1.4. Support structure required for installation and commissioning of above equipments
shall be provided by the bidder/manufacturer.
1.5. It is the intent of this specification to describe primary features, materials, and design
& performancerequirements and to establish minimum standards for the work.
1.6. The specification is not intended to specify the complete details of various practices of
manufactures/ bidders. But to specify the requirements with regard to performance,
durability and satisfactory operation under the specified site conditions.
1.7. Whenever a material or article is specified or described by the name of a particular
brand, manufacturer or trade mark, the specific item shall be understood as
establishing type, function and quality desired. Products of other manufactures may
also be considered, provided sufficient information is furnished so as to enable the
purchaser to determine that the products are equivalent to those named.
1.8. Any deviation or variation from the scope requirement and/or intent of this
specification shall be clearly mentioned under Deviation Schedule of the Bid Proposal
Sheets irrespective of the fact that such deviation/variation may be standard practice
or a possible interpretation of the specification by the bidder. Except for the
deviation/variations which are accepted by the purchaser before the award of the
contract, it will be the responsibility of the bidder to fully meet the intent and the
requirements of the specification within the quoted price. No other departure from the
specification except for the declared deviation indicated by the bidder in his proposal
shall be considered. The interpretation of the purchaser in respect of the scope,
details and services to be performed by the bidder shall be binding, unless specifically
clarified otherwise by the purchaser in writing before the award of contract.
1.9. The drawings enclosed with the specification are preliminary drawings for bidding
purpose only and subject to changes that may be necessary during detailed
engineering after award, keeping the basic parameters as specified.
1.10
1.10.1
Scope of Work
Design, Engineering, manufacture, testing, supply on CIP basis, transportation to site
including port and custom clearance if required, insurance, storage, testing and
commissioning of following items:-
a)
66kV System
The 72.5kV SF6 Gas Insulated Switchgear for three phase system shall have
double bus bar arrangement with 7 bays (2 No. 25/31.5MVA Transformer,
1 No. bus-coupler and 4 nos. feeder bays. Space for 3 Nos. future bays (1
No. 66/11kV T/F and 2No. line bays) shall be kept in GIS hall for adding
future bays and jointing plugs required for connecting GIS of different
makes. The SF6 Gas Insulated Switchgear rated for 66kV, 3-phase, 50Hz,
31.5kA fault level shall be of the indoor metal-enclosed type, comprising of
following items.
Unit Qty
1 72.5kV, 1250A, single 3 – φ or three 1 –φ, SF6 gas Set
2
insulated, metal enclosed bus bars arrangement,
consisting of 1250A single 3 – φ or three 1 –φ SF6 gas
insulated switchgears, each Bus Bar comprising of :Bus
bar enclosures running through the length of the
i)
switchgear to interconnect each of the circuit breaker bay
modules in double main bus system.
ii) Three, 2-core, single phase voltage transformers/ PTs.
iii) 1250A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group operated
isolator/disconnector and one, 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole,
group operated earthing switch with manual and motor driven
operating mechanisms.
iv) 1250A, One high speed fault make 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single
pole, group operated earthing switches, complete with manual
and motor driven operating mechanisms.
v) Each GIS compartment with gas monitoring device, pressure
switch etc. as required.
vi) Terminal boxes/ Local Control Cubicle.
vii) Interconnecting wiring/ piping.
viii) Grounding, support structures and platforms.
2
1
72.5kV, 800A, single 3 – φ or three 1 –φ, Bus coupler Set
bay module, consisting of 800A single 3 – φ or three 1
–φ SF6 gas insulated switchgears, comprising of:
i) 800A, One 3 – φ or three 1 –φ, SF6 gas insulated circuit
breaker, complete with operating mechanism.
ii) Three,3-core,single phase current transformers (600-300-150/
1-1-1A)
iii) Two sets of isolator/disconnector switches each of 800A, One
3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group operated
isolator/disconnector switches each with 3 – φ or three 1 – φ,
single pole, group operated earthing switch and complete with
manual and motor driven operating mechanisms.
iv) Each GIS compartment with gas monitoring device, pressure
switch etc. as required.
v) Terminal boxes/ Local Control Cubicle.
vi) Interconnecting wiring/ piping.
vii) Grounding, support structures and platforms.
3
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
4.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
72.5kV, 800A, single 3 – φ or three 1 –φ, Transmission SET
line feeder circuit breaker bay modules, consisting of
800A single 3 – φ or three 1 –φ SF6 gas insulated
switchgears, each comprising of:800A, One 3 – φ or three 1 –φ, SF6 gas insulated circuit
breaker, complete with operating mechanism for outgoing
feeder.
Three, 66kV LAs
Three, 3-core, single phase current transformers
(600-300-150/1-1-1A)
800A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group operated
isolator/disconnector without earthing switch, complete with
manual and motor driven operating mechanisms.
800A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group operated
isolator/disconnector with one, 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single
pole, group operated earthing switch, complete with manual
and motor driven operating mechanisms.
800A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group operated
isolator/disconnector with one normal and one high speed fault
make 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group operated
earthing switches, complete with manual and motor driven
operating mechanisms.
Each GIS compartment with gas monitoring device, pressure
switch etc. as required.
Terminal boxes/ Local Control Cubicle.
Interconnecting wiring/ piping.
Grounding, support structures and platforms.
72.5kV, 400A, single 3 – φ or three 1 –φ, Transformer Set
feeder circuit breaker bay modules, consisting of 400A
single 3 – φ or three 1 –φ SF6 gas insulated switchgears,
for 66/11kV transformer, each comprising of: One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, SF6 gas insulated circuit breaker,
complete with operating mechanism for incomer bay from
66/11kV transformer.
Three, 3-core, single phase current transformers (300-150/11-1A).
400A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group operated
isolator/disconnector without earthing switch, complete with
manual and motor driven operating mechanisms.
400A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group operated
isolator/disconnector with one, 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single
pole, group operated earthing switch, complete with manual
and motor driven operating mechanisms.
400A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group operated
isolator/disconnector with two earthing switches each
4
2
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
comprising of one 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group
operated earthing switches complete with manual and motor
driven operating mechanisms.
vi) Each GIS compartment with gas monitoring device, pressure
switch etc. as required.
vii) Local Control Cubicle.
viii) Interconnecting wiring/ piping.
ix) Grounding, support structures and platforms.
5
66kV XLPE copper Cable 4X1C (800mm2) along with one no. spare
cablecoated with fire retardant Paint for each Line feeder bay with
GIS with termination kit for both end for all four cables.
6
66kV XLPE copper Cable 4X1C (400mm2) along with one no. spare
cable coated with fire retardant Paint for connecting 66kV side of
66/11kV transformer with GIS with GIS with termination kit for both end
for all four cables.
2x25/31.5 MVA, 66/11 kV T/Fs along with all accessories and mandatory spares.
All type of Neutral CT’s, Surge Arrestors, CVTs for line with their terminal connectors &
mandatory spares.
Lightning protection.
Complete Sub-Station automation including Hardware & Software.
Complete 66kV C&R Panels and 11 kV VCB Panels with SEMs on each T/F I/C VCB Panel.
Associated mechanical & electrical auxiliaries & EOT cranes & mechanical operated crane
etc.
1.1kV grade power & Armoured (FRLS) control copper cables along with complete
accessories for switchgear, metering and protection equipments
Substation structures for sub-station towers & beams and equipment structures.
Insulator strings, hardware clamps and connectors, junction box, copper lug, glands &
PVC ferrules for control cabling, fibrecleats, aluminum clamps, bolts, nuts, washers etc.
for fixing control cables in trenches, galvanized iron trays & clamps, ACSR conductor, GS
earth wire, spares. Cables supporting angles/channels, buried cable trenches & outdoor
trenches with channels with trench covers.
C-wedge connector & equipment interconnections shall be suitable for Single/Triple
Zebra Conductor.
Complete lighting and illumination of the switchyard, GIS cum Control room Building,
receptacles etc. as per technical specification/BOM.
Air Conditioning system as per specification in Section-6, Chapter-12 & Ventilation
system for GIS hall-AHU. The requirement of ventilation system shall be as per Annexure
V and separate room for air handling unit to be provided adjacent/inside (as per space
availability) GIS hall however their design will be in scope of bidder as per requirement.
(i) The multi- level building should accommodate 66kV GIS Hall (at ground floor) and
control room (at first floor) along with intermediate floor. The height of intermediate
floor should be provided enough, for free movement of man power.
(ii) The entry of power cable should be made independently transformer wise, to be
provided in multilayer type trays for proper/easy maintenance purpose.
(iii) The detailed design/drawing of multilevel control room building for proposed
substation will be submitted by firm for approval.
The tentative floor wise plan for multilevel GIS building is as under:-
p)
q)
r)
s)
t)
u)
v)
w)
x)
y)
z)
Grounding system of the substation i.e. complete Earth mat lying will be
designed/quoted for soil resistivity of 50Ωm. In case soil resistivity is more than 50Ωm
then the earth mat will be designed for actual soil resistivity. The payment of extra
material to be used for earth mat shall be made on pro rata basis & equipotential mat
beneath the floor of GIS building as per IEEE/tech. specification/IS./IEC etc.
Complete fire - fighting equipment.
One set of 220V 100 AH DC battery with battery charger & DCDB along with associated
accessories.
415V LT A.C. DB 300A along with associated accessories.
1X200 KVA 11/0.4 kV station T/Fs for auxiliary supplies.
Providing 2 No. 13.608 MVAR 11 kV Automatically Switched Capacitor Bank along with
allied equipment (1 no. capacitor bank for each 66/11kV T/F is to be provided)
Cable support structure for 66kV XLPE cable for each bay shall be of Galvanized steel
and shall be designed along with civil foundation by the successful bidder after award of
the contract.
The supply, installation, erection, testing and commissioning of PLCC equipment for this
end will be in scope of bidder. The shifting of Wave Trap/CVT/protection coupler/PLCC
terminal etc. if required for matching purpose will be in scope of bidder.
Mandatory Spares, Special Equipments for testing and maintenance.
Recommended spare parts, maintenance tools and other equipment necessary for
maintenance purposes for fifteen years of trouble free service other than those specified
as mandatory spares.
Any other equipment/material required to complete the specified scope.
1.10.2 Civil Works
a) Foundation for S/Stn main gantry/steel structures and equipments as per drawings
attached.
b) Foundation for 2 No. 25/31.5MVA transformer including associated radiator. Complete
in all respects as per approved T/F, substation transformer, 2 No. 13.608MVAR 33kV
Capacitor Bank with allied equipments complete as per technical specifications. The
successful bidder shall submit foundation design & drawings as per approved
equipment drawing for approval before execution.
c) Foundation for lighting poles, junction box, panels & control cubicles of equipments
(wherever required) without any extra cost to HVPNL.
d) RCC outdoor cable trenches along with RCC covers, cable racks, trench culverts
crossings the road, drainage system including drainage pipes, manholes with RCC covers
whenever required, installation of pump, cable etc. complete. The design/drawings shall
be evolved by the successful bidder and got approved from employer before execution.
e) Laying of roads leading to switch yard, switch house & GIS buildings (as applicable)
from HUDA/PWD/village road including earth filling for road and berms, if required and
PCC in front, rear or side (as applicable) of the switch house building for parking as per
drawings attached. The above shall be as per GELO/CLO/site requirement.
f)
Provision of one/two pipe(s) culvert of suitable dia. as per technical specifications on
approach road leading to switch yard & switch house/GIS building from
HUDA/PWD/village road (as per site requirement).
g) Fencing & Boundary wall for the S/Stn. along with main entrance gates as per drawings
attached.
h) Site surfacing including leveling, dressing, compaction, laying of lean concrete/PCC in
areas under scope of contract/wherever required in the switchyard area as per site
requirement.
i) The weed growth/ tree cutting shall be responsibility of the contractor. Contractor may
note that purchaser shall not pay any compensation for any loss or damage to the
properties or for tree cutting due to contractor’s works.
j) Construction of Control room building as per HVPNL drawings. For GIS building, the
successful bidder has to develop architectural & structural/foundation drawings and shall
submit the same to HVPNL before execution. Both the building shall include indoor cable
trenches, all services such as lighting, sanitary, drainage, RW pipes, collection tank,
soakage pit, etc. Collection tank & soakage pit shall be required if HUDA’s sewerage
system is not in place.
k) The GIS halls dimensions and functional details given in GELO are minimum since the
detailed engineering is in scope of successful bidder, nothing extra on account of
increased area/size of GIS halls shall be paid.
l) Cutting/Filling of earth to required depth including leveling, dressing, compaction etc. in
S/Stn. including switchyard and roads wherever required to achieve required formation
level as decided by employer.
Construction
of one no. rain harvesting system (rechargeable bore/well) for entire subm)
station including control room/GIS buildings and yard for collection of water from switch
house/GIS buildings and yard. The disposal/drainage scheme for draining rain water
shall include open drains, RCC pipes, inspection chambers, manholes, RCC covers where
ever required, settlement tank, sum pit-cum-pump chamber with pump motor, GI
Suction delivery pipes, electric control panels, cables etc. complete in all respects. The
bidder shall evolve design and drawing for rechargeable well, settlement tank, sump pitcum-pump chamber and drainage scheme and got the same approved before execution.
n) All civil works associated with construction of buildings, indoor/outdoor equipment/tower
foundations, erection of EOT crane, indoor/outdoor cable trenches, drains, services, anti
fire wall, rechargeable well, sump pit-cum pump chamber, settlement tank, septic tanks
etc. are in the scope of successful bidder.
1.10.3 The Switchgear shall be complete with all necessary terminal boxes, SF6 gas filling,
interconnecting power and control wiring, pressure switches, grounding connections,
gas monitoring equipment and piping, support structures etc.
1.10.4 The work to be done under this specification comprises the provision of all labour,
plant, equipment and material and the performance of all work necessary for the
complete installation and commissioning of switchyard on turnkey basis. It is hereby
required that the contractor should provide all apparatus, appliances, material and
labour etc. not specifically mentioned or included, but are necessary to complete the
entire work or any portion of the work in compliance with the requirements implied in
this specification is deemed to be included in the scope of contractor.
1.10.5 The contractor shall be fully responsible for:Complete project management
i)
Design and engineering of entire work of (GIS+AIS) Substation including supply of
ii)
complete documentation i.e. design drawings, design memorandums, O&M manuals
for all works which shall be identified at the time of contract.
Insulation coordination including studies for selection of metal oxide surge arrestors,
iii)
parameters, location for complete switchyard. The specifications and quantity
provided else where are indicative only. The final quantities shall be worked out
during detailed engineering of insulation coordination.
The quality of all materials and workmanship of the complete work.
iv)
The Contractor shall be responsible for detailed design and engineering of overall
v)
system, sub-systems, elements, system facilities, equipments, auxiliary services, etc.
It shall include proper definition and execution of all interfaces with systems,
equipment, material and services of purchaser for proper and correct design,
performance and operation of the project.
Contractor
shall provide complete engineering data, drawings, reports, manuals, etc.
vi)
for purchaser’s review, approval and records.
vii) The scope shall also include the design and engineering as per details elaborated
elsewhere in this specification.
viii) The Contractor shall carry out earth resistivity measurements at the substation site(s)
(based on four electrode method).
For all structural works, the contractor shall prepare all fabrication drawings.
ix)
The Contractor shall be responsible for design, engineering, manufacture, testing &
x)
inspection at manufacturer’s works, supply transportation, insurance, delivery at site,
unloading, storage, in plant transportation at site, complete erection & supervision,
site testing & inspection, and successful commissioning of all equipment and material
listed at ‘Bill of Quantities’ enclosed as Annexure-A1(ii) to E1(ii) of this section,
detailed elsewhere in specification and as shown on the tender drawings. Any item
though not specifically mentioned, but is required to complete the project works in all
respects for its safe, reliable, efficient and trouble free operation shall also be taken to
be included, and the same shall be supplied and erected by the Contractor without
extra cost unless it is explicitly excluded elsewhere in the specifications.
All consumables, wastages and damages shall be to the account of contractor.
xi)
xii) The contractor shall construct, erect and install all equipment and material required
for completion of substation(s) covered under the project. He shall be responsible for
provision of all labor, tools and tackles and supervisory staff for safe, reliable, proper
and correct erection of all equipment required for successful completion of the
substation(s).
xiii) The tools and plant shall include, but not limited to, special hoisting equipment,
cranes, slings, consumables and all other articles and supplies as required.
xiv) The contractor shall ensure periodic cleaning of work site and removal of all waste
material, packaging material, surplus earth and left-over and their proper disposal.
xv) The contractor has to employ suitable manpower and supervision personnel. The
contractor is solely and fully responsible for the safety of personnel and materials. Any
damages to the existing facilities shall be made good by the contractor at no extra
cost to the purchaser. The contractor shall coordinate with site personnel for
arranging shut down for interconnection with the existing systems, if required.
xvi) The contractor shall be responsible for the overall management and supervision of
works. He shall experiences, skilled, knowledgeable and competent personnel for all
phase of the project, so as to provide the purchaser with a high quality system.
xvii) The contractor’s supervisory personnel shall provide operation and maintenance
assistance during the warranty period.
xviii) A Project execution schedule called Master Network (MNW) in the form of PERT
chart/network shall be prepared by the contractor for purchaser’s approval. The MNW
shall identify milestones of key event for each work/ component in the areas of
engineering, procurement, manufacturer, dispatch, erection and commissioning. It
shall indicate interfaces and inputs required to be given by Purchaser.
xix)
The scope includes testing and commissioning of all equipment, subsystems and
systems of the project and putting them into successful commercial operation. The
scope shall include but not limited to the requirements given elsewhere in
the specification.
xx) The contractor shall be responsible to provide all necessary testing and commissioning
personnel, tools and plant, testing equipment, etc. All expenses for carrying out the
routine tests as specified in relevant standard shall be to contractor’s account.
However the expenses w.r.t. purchaser/purchaser’s representative for
witnessing these tests which contractor shall take into account shall be as
follows:For Inspections/tests to be carried out for equipment offered from within
a)
purchaser’s country.
All tour expenses shall be borne by purchaser.
For inspections/tests to be carried out for equipment offered from outside
b)
purchaser’s country:It is envisaged that inspection/testing of all such equipment shall be witnessed. Each
inspection shall be carried out by a team of 3 to 4 engineers nominated by the
purchaser. Their To & Fro travel expenditure from purchaser’s country to the place of
inspection/testing shall be borne by the bidder including all boarding and lodging
charges.
xxii)
The contractor shall identify all interface issues with purchaser and other agencies,
and shall be responsible for such interfacing, coordination and exchange of all
necessary information.
a) The approach road up to the GIS substation area shall be provided by the Purchaser.
All internal roads (if any) shall have to be constructed by the contractor.
b) Bidder will solely be responsible for obtaining statuary clearances for providing
temporary connections for construction of power and water. The contractor shall
arrange for necessary meters etc. and shall pay applicable energy and water charges
as per applicable rates to the concerned authorities.
xxiii) Contractor shall make his own necessary arrangements for the following and for those
listed anywhere else in this specification.
a)
Construction power supply at all work areas.
Provision of water supply arrangement.
b)
c)
Construction office and store (open and covered)
Construction workshop and material/field testing laboratory
d)
e)
Boarding & lodging arrangement for their personnel.
f)
Fire protection and security arrangements during construction stage.
g)
Any other requirements of the Haryana Government and as per the
purchaser’s rules, regulations and practices.
h)
the contractor shall make his own necessary arrangements like diesel
generator sets, water etc., at his own cost so that progress of work is
not affected and Employer shall in no case be responsible for any delay
in works because of non-availability of power, water etc.
i)
Provide labour license as per Govt. Rules.
1.10.6
SF6 gas filling & evacuating plant with gas cylinders shall be supplied by the bidder as
per Bid Price Schedules and shall be utilized by the bidder for commissioning. The
contractor would be required to hand over the same in good working condition with
enough gas for one charging of complete system with 20% extra gas as indicated
in mandatory spares of relevant Bid Price Schedule.
EOT crane shall be provided in 66KV GIS building for GIS equipment handling during
1.10.7
installation, commissioning and maintenance etc. Crane lifting capacity shall be
1.10.8
1.10.9
2.0
3.0
4.0
adequate to handle the heaviest package of GIS but shall not be less than 5 tonnes for
66kV System. The crane shall also be provided with speed drive mechanism. Further,
the mechanical operated crane for uplifting the equipments from ground floor to first
floor should be provided adjacent to multi storey building &adequate to handle the
heaviest equipment (lying at first floor i.e. control room) but shall not be less than 2
tonnes. The same should be provided as per site requirement for handling during
maintenance (i.e. to & fro of equipments from outside the ground floor to first floor) as
per relevant IS & confirming to safety norms.
Supply, erection, testing and commissioning of all items of work required to make the
66kV bays fully functional.
Bidder shall submit along with the bid and also during detailed engineering the
computation and calculation for enclosure loss and details about the measures taken to
reduce losses so as to limit the temperature rise of enclosure as per the requirement of
clause 4.37 of section: GIS.
Mandatory Maintenance Equipment
The Bidder shall include in his scope mandatory maintenance equipment as specified
The prices of these shall be indicated in respective schedules. These would be
considered in bid evaluation.
A List of mandatory maintenance equipment is given at Annexure-A-1 to G-1, of
this section. The Owner reserves the right to buy any or all of these. The Bidder
shall furnish the itemized and total prices for this equipment in the offer.
In Compliance with the requirements of Bid documents, the prices for mandatory
maintenance equipment must be given separately, and shall be used for bid
evaluation purposes. All mandatory maintenance equipment shall be delivered at
site.
Commissioning spares
The bidder shall supply spares, which he expects to consume during installation,
testing and commissioning of system. The quantity of these spares shall be decided
based on his previous experience, such that site works shall not be hampered due to
non-availability of these spares. Bidder shall submit a complete list of such spares
along with the bid, the cost of which shall be deemed to have been included in the
lump sum proposal price of the package. The unused commissioning spares may be
left at the site for use by the purchaser, if so agreed at a cost to be negotiated.
No mandatory or recommended spares will be used during the commissioning of
the equipment/plant before take over by the purchaser.
Recommended spares
In addition to the mandatory maintenance equipment, the bidder shall also provide a
list of recommended spares giving unit prices and total prices for 5 years of normal
operation of equipment in the relevant schedule of the BPS. The Purchaser reserves
the right to buy any or all the recommended spares. The recommended spares parts
shall be delivered at the site(s). The list of recommended spares to be furnished by
the bidder should also contain the following:
a)
b)
4.1
Population of each item installed along with reference drawing number.
Service life expectancy of each item.
c)
Offer validity period.
Price of recommended spares will not be used for evaluation of bids. The price of
these spares will remain valid for a period of not less than 120 days after the date on
which the validity of main bid expires. The prices of any recommended spares shall be
subject to review by the purchaser and shall be finalized after mutual discussions.
5.0
6.0
6.1
7.0
8.0
9.0
9.1
9.2
10.0
11.0
Tools & Tackles
The Bidder shall also supply at each substation site one set of all special tool and
tackles, etc. which are required by the purchaser’s maintenance staff to maintain the
works successfully at no extra cost. The list of such tools and tackles shall be enclosed
with the offer.
Training of purchaser’s Personnel
(a) Training at Manufacturer’s works:
The successful bidder shall arrange for training of 2 persons of the employer at the
manufacturer’s works of GIS for 5 working days in Design, manufacturing and testing
of GIS being supplied. The traveling, lodging, boarding & visa arrangement including
all expenses shall be made by the successful bidder for the above training.
(b) Training at Site:
The successful bidder shall arrange for training of 5 persons including operating field
staff of Employer for five working days at each GIS sub-station in operation and
maintenance of GIS. The expenses for training including traveling, lodging, boarding
of the trainer shall be borne by the successful bidder.
The detailed design shall be submitted for approval by the employer, during detailed
engineering.
SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES
The detailed description of various items/equipment and civil works are indicated at
Annexure – I to V & Schedule A1,B1,C1, D1, E1, F1, G1. The bill of quantity of
major equipment is also indicated and wherever the quantities are not indicated the
bidder is required to compute the quantity. Bidder is required to indicate unit rate
and total price of the items under a particular head in bid proposal sheets. Bidder
should include all such items in the bid proposal sheets, which may not be specifically
mentioned but are essential for the execution of the contract.
SOIL DATA
The earth resistivity for 66 kV Substation Sector-21-D, Faridabad shall be ascertained
by the bidder himself.
Physical and Other Parameters
Location of the Substations
The location of the substations is in Faridabad for Sector 21-D Faridabad.
Meteorological data
The meteorological data of the substation is indicated at Annexure-III. However, for
design purpose, ambient temperature should be considered as 50° C.
Basic Reference Drawings
For 66/11kV voltage level, Double bus-switching scheme (GIS) layout arrangement
shall be used. The Single line diagram and layout arrangements are attached with
bidding documents Annexure-IV, which shall be further engineered by the bidder. The
dimensions of GIS rooms are indicative; Bidder may increase the dimensions of
building as per requirement (with the provision of service bay).
DRAWING
1. The bidder shall maintain inter equipment distances, bay length, bay width etc
in accordance with the enclosed general/electrical layouts of the substation,
while doing so the bidder will ensure that the statutory electrical clearances
required for substation are maintained. (Annexure-IV).
2. The drawing enclosed gives the basic scheme, layout of substation, substation
buildings, associated service etc. In case of any discrepancy between the
drawing and text of specification the bidder is advised to get these clarified
before submission of bid. No claim what-so-ever on this score shall be
entertained after award of contract.
3. The bidder shall adopt HVPNL design of galvanized steel structure for tower,
beam and equipment supporting structures for /66/11kV S/Stn.
12.0
In case of any discrepancy between the drawings and text of specification, the
requirements of text shall prevail in general. However, the Bidder is advised to
get these clarified from Employer.
In case of any discrepancy between Section-GTR and individual sections for
various equipments, requirement of individual equipment section shall prevail.
Specific Requirement
The bidder shall be responsible for safety of human and equipment during the
working. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to co-ordinate and obtain
Electrical Inspector’s clearance before commissioning. Any additional items,
modification due to observation of such statutory authorities shall be provided by the
Contractor at no extra cost to the Employer.
Notes:
13.0
a) The bidder or his authorized representative should visit the site of works and its
surroundings to obtain himself at his responsibility and expenses, all information
regarding general site characteristics, accessibility, infrastructure details and factual
position in respect of scope of work viz-a-viz GELO drg. attached with the bid
document. Any alteration/addition envisage in the document must be got clarified
before submission of the bid.
b) No extra payment shall be made on account of any change in the layout drgs.
required for providing DSLP as per Rezvik method.
ANNEXURE-I
66kV SUB-STATION
Sr.
No.
Name of
S/Stn.
1
66kV GIS
Sector21-D,
Faridabad
Scope of Work
The specification includes the design, engineering,
manufacture, fabrication, testing at manufacturers works,
delivery, unloading at site, storage, erection, testing and
commissioning at site of the complete 66kV switchyard
including:
Indoor 66kV SF6 gas insulated metal enclosed switchgear
(GIS), Two 25/31.5MVA, 66/11kV Power Transformer, one
200KVA 11/0.433kV LT Transformers, 11kV VCB Panels,
11kV Automated Switched Capacitor banks, Fire
Extinguishers, Testing equipment’s, associated civil works
including soil investigation, internal roads, drains, necessary
buildings etc., 66kV XLPE copper Power Cables, 11kV XLPE
Aluminium Power Cables, Indoor & outdoor End Termination
Boxes, Substation Automation with Relay & Protection,
Communication (Converter) equipments and other electrical
and mechanical auxiliary systems on turnkey basis. Bidder
shall also ensure GIS compatibility for line feeder and
provide the ancillary equipment required for the same. For
connecting 66kV GIS with primary of transformers, lines
bidder will use XLPE copper Power Cables along with cable
termination for both end and flexible ACSR zebra conductor,
structures etc. as per GELO. For connecting 11kV side of
66/11kV Transformer bidder will use 11kV XLPE Aluminium
Power Cables and as per GELO drawing no. HGD-3C/579.
For detailed BOQ for S.no.1 refer Annexures A1,B1,C1, D1, E1, F1, G1
Scheme
Double bus
bar (66 kV,
with Bus
coupler)
ANNEXURE-II
LOCATION OF SUB-STATIONS
Sr. No.
1.
Name of Substation
66kV GIS S/Stn.Sector-21-D, Faridabad
Nearest Rail Head
Faridabad
ANNEXURE-III
METEOROLOGICAL DATA
1.1
Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory
continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:
i)
Location
ii)
Max. Ambient air temp. (deg. C)
50
iii)
Min ambient air temp.
-2.5
iv)
Daily average air temp. (deg. C)
35
v)
Average no. of Thunder storm days per Annum
45
vi)
Maximum Relative Humidity (%)
100
vii)
Minimum Relative Humidity (%)
26
viii)
Average annual rain fall (mm)
900
ix)
Max. wind pressure (kg/sq m)
195
x)
xi)
Max. altitude above mean sea level (meters)
Isoceraunic level (days/year)
1000
45
xii)
Seismic level
(horizontal acceleration)
Average no. of rainy days per Annum
0.3 g
xiii)
In the state of Haryana
(deg. C)
120
NOTE: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conductive to rust and fungus growth.
The climate conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient condition.
Smoke is also present in the atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occurs during
June to October.
ANNEXURE-IV
Sr. No.
1.
Name of Substation
66kV GIS S/Stn.Sector-21-D, Faridabad
GELO DRAWING NO
HGD-3C/579
ANNEXTURE V
VENTILATION SYSTEM FOR GIS HALL
Each GIS hall shall have an independent ventilation system. Each ventilation
system shall consist of two 100% capacity systems, one operating and one standby.
To ensure that the air being supplied to the GIS hall is free from dust particles, a
minimum two stage dust filtration process shall be supplied. This shall consist of
at least the following:
1) Pre Filters: To remove dust particles down to 10 micron in size with at least 95%
efficiency.
2) Fine Filters: To remove dust particles down to 5 microns in size with at least 99%
efficiency.
All the filters shall be panel type. Easy access should be available to the filters for
replacement/ cleaning.
The ventilation of the GIS hall shall be of a positive pressure type with minimum 4
air changes per hour. The pressure inside the GIS hall shall be maintained 5 mm
of Water above the atmospheric pressure. Fresh outdoor air shall be filtered
before being blown into the GIS hall by the air fans to avoid dust accumulation on
components present in the GIS hall. Each GIS hall shall be provided with
motorized exhaust dampers with local control.
EQUIPMENTS/MATERIALSTO BE SUPPLIED AND ERECTED FOR 66 KV
GIS SUB-STATION Sector 21- D, Faridabad
a)
Annexure-A1
66kV System
The 72.5kV SF6 Gas Insulated Switchgear for three phase system shall have
double bus bar arrangement with 7 bays (2 No. 25/31.5MVA Transformer,
1 No. bus-coupler and 4 nos. feeder bays. Space for 3 No. future bays (1 No.
66/11kV T/F and 2No. line bays) shall be kept in GIS hall for adding future
bays and jointing plugs required for connecting GIS of different makes. The
SF6 Gas Insulated Switchgear rated for 66kV, 3-phase, 50Hz, 31.5kA fault
level shall be of the indoor metal-enclosed type, comprising of following
items.
Unit Qty
1
2
72.5kV, 1250A, single 3 – φ or three 1 –φ, SF6 Set
gas insulated, metal enclosed bus bars
arrangement, consisting of 1250A single 3 –
φ or three 1 –φ SF6 gas insulated switchgears,
each Bus Bar comprising of :i Bus bar enclosures running through the length of
the switchgear to interconnect each of the circuit
breaker bay modules in double main bus system.
ii Three, 2-core, single phase voltage transformers/
PTs.
iii 1250A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group
operated isolator/disconnector and one, 3 – φ or
three 1 – φ, single pole, group operated earthing
switch with manual and motor driven operating
mechanisms.
iv 1250A, One high speed fault make 3 – φ or three 1
– φ, single pole, group operated earthing switches,
complete with manual and motor driven operating
mechanisms.
v Each GIS compartment with gas monitoring device,
pressure switch etc. as required.
vi Terminal boxes/ Local Control Cubicle.
vii Interconnecting wiring/ piping.
viii Grounding, support structures and platforms.
2
1
72.5kV, 800A, single 3 – φ or three 1 –φ, Bus Set
coupler bay module, consisting of 800A
single 3 – φ or three 1 –φ SF6 gas insulated
switchgears, comprising of:
i 800A, One 3 – φ or three 1 –φ, SF6 gas insulated
circuit
breaker,
complete
with
operating
mechanism.
ii Three,3-core,single phase current transformers(600300-150/1-1-1A)
iii Two sets of isolator/disconnector switches each of
iv
v
vi
vii
3
i
ii
iii
iv
v
vi
vii
viii
ix
x
4.
i
ii
800A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group
operated isolator/disconnector switches each with 3
– φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group operated
earthing switch and complete with manual and
motor driven operating mechanisms.
Each GIS compartment with gas monitoring device,
pressure switch etc. as required.
Terminal boxes/ Local Control Cubicle.
Interconnecting wiring/ piping.
Grounding, support structures and platforms.
72.5kV, 800A, single 3 – φ or three 1 –φ, SET
Transmission line feeder circuit breaker bay
modules, consisting of 800A single 3 – φ or
three 1 –φ SF6 gas insulated switchgears,
each comprising of:800A, One 3 – φ or three 1 –φ, SF6 gas insulated
circuit breaker, complete with operating mechanism
for outgoing feeder.
Three, 66kV LAs
Three, 3-core, single phase current transformers
(600-300-150/1-1-1A)
800A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group
operated isolator/disconnector without earthing
switch, complete with manual and motor driven
operating mechanisms.
800A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group
operated isolator/disconnector with one, 3 – φ or
three 1 – φ, single pole, group operated earthing
switch, complete with manual and motor driven
operating mechanisms.
800A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group
operated isolator/disconnector with one normal and
one high speed fault make 3 – φ or three 1 – φ,
single pole, group operated earthing switches,
complete with manual and motor driven operating
mechanisms.
Each GIS compartment with gas monitoring device,
pressure switch etc. as required.
Terminal boxes/ Local Control Cubicle.
Interconnecting wiring/ piping.
Grounding, support structures and platforms.
72.5kV, 400A, single 3 – φ or three 1 –φ, Set
Transformer feeder circuit breaker bay
modules, consisting of 400A single 3 – φ or
three 1 –φ SF6 gas insulated switchgears, for
66/11kV transformer, each comprising of: One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, SF6 gas insulated circuit
breaker, complete with operating mechanism for
incomer bay from 66/11kV transformer.
Three, 3-core, single phase current transformers
4
2
iii
iv
v
vi
vii
viii
ix
5(a)
(b)
6(a)
(b)
(300-150/1-1-1A).
400A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group
operated isolator/disconnector without earthing
switch, complete with manual and motor driven
operating mechanisms.
400A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group
operated isolator/disconnector with one, 3 – φ or
three 1 – φ, single pole, group operated earthing
switch, complete with manual and motor driven
operating mechanisms.
400A, One 3 – φ or three 1 – φ, single pole, group
operated isolator/disconnector with two earthing
switches each comprising of one 3 – φ or three 1 –
φ, single pole, group operated earthing switches
complete with manual and motor driven operating
mechanisms.
Each GIS compartment with gas monitoring device,
pressure switch etc. as required.
Local Control Cubicle.
Interconnecting wiring/piping.
Grounding, support structures and platforms.
66kV XLPE copper Cable 1XC (400mm2) along
with one no. spare cable coated with fire
retardant Paint for connecting 66kV side of
66/11kV transformer with GIS.
Termination kit for both ends for 66kV XLPE
copper Cable 1XC (400mm2).
66kV XLPE copper Cable 1XC (800mm2) along
with one no. spare cable coated with fire
retardant Paint for each Line feeder bay.
Termination kit for both ends for 66kV XLPE
copper Cable 1XC (800mm2).
Mtrs
400
Nos.
16
Mtrs
800
Nos.
32
66KV GIS SECTOR-21-D, Faridabad
ANNEXURE-B1
BILL OF QUANTITIES
Sr.No. DESCRIPTION
UNIT
Qty.
1
25/31.5MVA, 66/11 kV Power T/F along with10% extra T/F oil
No.
2
2
220V 100 AH Battery
Set
1
3
66 kV Surge Arrestor
No.
6
4
11kV Surge Arrestor
No.
6
5
66 kV NCT For 66/11kV T/F (300-150/1A)
No.
2
6
11 kV NCT For 66/11T/F (1800-900/5A)
No.
2
7
66 kV CVT For Line
No.
4
8
66kV C&R Panels
i Ckt breaker control panel without auto reclose & line protection Set
Panel
4
ii Ckt breaker control panel without auto reclose and Transformer Set
of 66/11kV protection Panel
2
iii Ckt breaker control panel without auto reclose & Bus coupler Set
protection panel
1
9
Time synchronization equipment
No.
1
10
11 kV 15 Panel Board (1250A) with one SEM on each T/F I/C
Panel (including one no. bus coupler panel)
Set
2
11
11 kV Power Cable XLPE 1C x630mm2 coated with fire retardant
Paintfor T/F to 11kV incomer with termination kit for both ends
(4 runs per phase and 2 runs per phase for each 11kV I/C)
Mtr.
2000
11 kV Power Cable XLPE 1C x630mm2 coated with fire retardant Mtr.
Paintfor bus coupler of T-1 to Bus Coupler of T-2 with
termination kit for both ends (2 runs per phase for each 11kV
Bus Coupler)
100
12
11 kV Power Cable XLPE 3C x 400sq mm coated with fire
retardant Paint for Capacitor Bank with termination kit for both
ends(2 runs)
Mtr.
400
13
11 kV Power Cable XLPE 3C x 50 sq mm coated with fire
Mtr.
retardant Paint for station T/F with termination kit for both ends
100
14
13.608 MVAR 11 kV rating Capacitor Bank with 11 kV L&E Set
Switch, RVTs and 11KV LA, reactor etc. as per technical
specification.
2
15
220 V 100 AH Battery charger
Set
1
16
220 V 100 AH D.C.D.B.
Set
1
17
415 V LT AC Distribution Board 300 A
No.
1
18
11/0.4 kV Station T/F 200 KVA
No.
1
19
EOT-Crane as per clause 1.10.7 Section-1 and Clause 24.0 of
GIS Specification.
No.
1
Mechanical Operated Crane as per clause 1.10.7 section-1
No.
1
20
1.1 kV Copper Control Cable armoured (FRLS) for 66kV bays & Lot
11kV side of sizes 7CX4mm2, 2CX4mm2, 4CX4mm2, 2CX6mm2,
16CX2.5mm2, 10CX2.5mm2, 7CX2.5mm2, 3CX2.5mm2 etc.
including junction box (as per Section-6 of copper control cable
specification and Section-7 of Switchyard Erection).
Lot
21
650/1100 Volts 3.5 core 240 mm2 aluminium power cable from
Aux. T/F to ACDB
Lot
Lot
22
650/1100 Volt 3.5 core 70 mm2 aluminium cable for oil filtration
set.
Lot
Lot
23
650/1100 Volt 4 core 16 mm2 armoured (FRLS) copper power
cable for MLDB etc and other cable required as per contract for
66kV bays.
Lot
Lot
24
Grounding system of the substation. Earthing Mat Material. The Lot
earth mat will be designed/quoted for soil resistivity of 50Ωm.
In case soil resistivity is more than 50Ωm then the earth mat
will be designed for actual soil resistivity. The payment of extra
material to be used for earth mat shall be made on pro rata
basis. The approximate area of earth mat to be laid is given in
the corresponding columns of the substations. However, item
will remain a Lot item.
25
Fire Fighting equipments as per section-6
i
22.5 Kg Capacity FE CO2 type, Trolley Mounted
No
4
ii
25 Kg Capacity FE DCP type, Trolley Mounted
No
4
iii
DCP 10 Kg Capacity, Wall mounted
No
4
iv
FE CO2 6.5 Kg Capacity, Wall mounted
No
2
v
DCP 5 Kg Capacity, Wall mounted
No
2
vi
Foam Type 9 Litre Capacity, Wall mounted
No
1
vii
Water CO2 9 Litre, Wall mounted
No
1
viii
Fire Buckets (12 No.s with stand in one set)
Set
2
26
Supply and installation of 1x400 watt HPSV lamps with all No
accessories for Complete lighting of outdoor Switch yard area
including all accessories, cables etc. as per clause 16.0 of
section 7 of the specifications.
10
27
Complete lighting of road and street by providing 1x150W HPSV No
lamps on tubular steel poles at a distance of 15meter along the
roads and streets including all accessories, cables etc. as per
clause 16.0 of section 7 of the specification.
8
28
Supply and installation of post top lantern 70W HPSV Lamps
with all complete accessories at the entrance gate of substation.
4
29
Supply and installation of fluorescent tube fitting (2 x 40W) on No
tubular steel poles along with boundary wall at a distance of 30
meter including all accessories, cables etc. as per clause 16.0 of
section 7 of the specification.
10
30
High wall type split AC unit of 2 Ton capacity for computer Nos.
room and specifically C&R Panel room (as per technical
5
900
sq meter
(approx.,)
specification)
31
Complete Substation automation system for 66/11 kV substations including
hardware (for present bays) and software (for present & future bays) along with
associated equipments for the following bays (bay as defined in the technical
specification, sec-sub-station automation system) as per technical specification
a)
66 kV (presently A bays &B for future)
Nos.
A=7,
B=3
32
Testing of IUM System at NABL accredited lab
Lot
Lot
66KV GIS SECTOR-21-D, Faridabad ANNEXURE –C1
Sr.
No
DESCRIPTION
UNIT Quantity
1
66 kV bolted type single suspension string assembly with No.
6 numbers ANTI FOG type disc insulators (E&M strength
9000 kg) per string with all hardware accessories
including ball & socket connections and suspension clamp
set suitable for single Zebra ACSR. Alternatively the
bidder may quote silicon polymer composite insulator
string in place of Disc Insulators (type of insulator
whether disc or polymer insulator to be identified at the
time of bidding and quoted accordingly which will not be
altered at later stage by the bidder).
6
2
Bolted type 11kV Single tension string assembly with 3
numbers Anti FOG type disc insulators (E&M strength
9000 kg) per string with all hardware accessories
including ball & socket connections and tension clamp
sets suitable for triple Zebra Conductor. Alternatively the
bidder may quote silicon polymer composite insulator
string in place of Disc Insulators (type of insulator
whether disc or polymer insulator to be identified at the
time of bidding and quoted accordingly which will not be
altered at later stage by the bidder).
12
3
C-Wedge connectors matching with conductor size.
Lot
Lot
4
Spacers suitable for triple zebra conductor
Lot
Lot
5
Copper lugs glands, PVC ferrules for control cabling.
L/S
L/S
6
Fibre cleats, Aluminium clamps, bolts, nuts, washers etc
for fixing control cables in trenches
L/S
L/S
7
Galvanized iron perforated tray with side coupler plate
bolts, nuts, washers and clamps etc. of size 75x25x2
mm, 150X25X2mm, 100X25X2mm etc. & G.I. Conduits
of 50mm/100mm dia from equipment to main trench as
per Section-7, Switchyard erection.
L/S
L/S
Painted lattice type steel trays of adequate size as per
site requirement for laying control and power cables
from panels (placed on top floor) to GIS & Transformers
and for 11kV Outgoing cables & other cables identified
as per site requirement confirming to Section-7 & 9.
L/S
L/S
8
ACSR Zebra Conductor(approx)
Mt
300
9
10
7/3.15 Earthwire
Lot
Lot
Lot
Lot
U-bolt 20mm dia
The quantities given in Annexure C-I is approx. and for evaluation purpose,
however, the payment shall be made as per actual on the basis of unit
price/Lot.
66KV GIS SECTOR-21-D, Faridabad ANNEXURE D1
Schedules of items for associated steel structure works to be quoted for each
substation as applicable. The bidder is required to estimate the quantities and furnish
the unit rate for each item/ works and the total price for each item in the bid proposal
sheets. The list may not be exhaustive, and the bidder may modify/ append the same
as required.
Sr.
No
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
Quantity
Item for associated structure work
‘Lattice type steel structure for 66kV GIS S/Stn.Sector-21-D, Faridabad. Supply
of material, preparation of fabrication drawing, galvanizing and delivery of
lattice type steel structure for tower and beams for 66/11kV switchyard
fabricated from steel conforming to IS:2062 including nuts-bolts gusset plates
foundation bolts and other accessories as per drawings supplied by the owner.
1.
Main S/Stn. Tower and beam
i
Tower type CT-4 (HW/ST-5199)
No.
2
ii
Tower type CT-5 (HW/ST-5195)
No.
2
iii
Beam type CB-6 (HW/ST-5200)
No.
2
iv
Tower type DT-2 (HW/ST-5210)
No.
2
v
Tower type DT-3 (HW/ST-5211)
No.
2
vi
Beam type DB-2X (HTD/ST-154)
No.
2
2.
Equipment Supporting Structure
i
66 kV NCT Drg. No. HTD/ST-145
No.
2
ii
66 kV CVT Drg. No. HTD/ST-66
No.
4
iii
66 kV Surge Arrestor Drg. No. HTD/ST-89R
No.
6
iv
11 kV NCT Drg. No. HTD/ST-88
No.
2
v
66kV Cable structure of galvanized iron along
with foundation to be designed by bidder as
per site requirement/size of cable
No.
24
Bill of quantities in respect of PLCC equipment
Annexure-E1
Sr.
No
Line sections
PLC
terminals
(No.)
1
LILO of 66kV
D/C line from
220kV Palla66kV NH-3 D/C
line
Total
2/220kV
Palla
2/Sector21-D,
Faridabad
0
Wave Trap
(630A)
LTU
(Set.)
48V
Battery &
Battery
Charger
(120AH)
HF cable
(kms.
Approx.)
4/Sector21-D,
Faridabad
4/Sector21-D,
Faridabad
1/Sector21-D,
Faridabad
1.0
0
0
1
1.0
Note: The wave trap will be provided by HVPNL & erection of the same will be
covered in the scope of firm at 66kV GIS S/Stn. Sector-21-D, Faridabad.
Further, the PLC & LTU termianls will be dismantled from 66kV NH-3 S/Stn.
Faridabadand same will be erected at 66kV S/Stn. GIS Sector-21-D, Faridabad
(This will be the part of scope to be covered by firm).
ANNEXURE-F1
Furniture Description
i)
Executive
Room
UNIT
Executive Table:
No.
(1800mmx900mm) (Wooden)
Executive Chair:
(Revolving mid No.
back type)
Visitor’s Chair
ii)
Computer
Room
66kV GIS
Sector-21 D,
Faridabad
1
1
No.
4
(Revolving mid No.
1
Visitor’s Chair:
No.
4
Steel Almirah
LengthxWidthxHeight in mm
(1016x560x1980)
No.
1
Recta work station of size
1200mmx 600 mm, 25 mm thick
work top with 3 drawer pedestal
alongwith keyboard tray and CPU
trolley. And partitions of thickness
53 mm and of height 1200 mm.
No.
1
Executive Chair:
back type)
ANNEXURE-G1
MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT & SPARES AT Sector 21- D, Faridabad
Sr.
No.
1.0
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
2.0
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
xii.
xiii.
Description
Equipments for maintenance
Portable circuit breaker operation analyzer.
Digital Micro-Ohm meter for contact resistance
measurement Ranges (0-100 ohm)
(0-1 milliohm)
(0-10 milliohm).
Dew Point meter
Portable partial discharge monitoring system for GIS.
Digital Earth resistance meter.
5 kV Automated insulation resistance tester.
SF-6 Gas filling and evacuating plant
SF-6 Gas leak detector (Portable)
Tools for gas handling
LT DC Leakage detector from control cabinets and LT
cables
Common Spares, Maintenance and Testing Tools
(66 KV)
SF6 Gas pressure relief devices
Pressure gauges (of each type) along with coupling
device
Rubber Gaskets, “ o” Rings and seals for SF6 Gas
Molecular filter for SF6 Gas with filter bags
Quantity
1 Set
1 Set
1 Set
1 Set
1No.
1No.
1 Set
1Set
1 Set
1No.
3 No.
1 Set
1 Set each type
1 Set
20% of
total weight
1 No. each type
1 Set each type
20%
1 Set each type
Density Monitors for SF6 Gas
All types of Control Valves for SF6 Gas
SF6 Gas of total gas requirement
Enclosures, Insulators & main circuit to replace on each
phase, any compartment of Busbar or bay
Covers with all accessories necessary to close a
compartment in case of dismantling of any part of the
enclosure to ensure the sealing of this compartment (as
applicable)
For 3 Phase Enclosure
2No
For Single phase enclosure
3No
Locking device to keep the Disconnectors (Isolators) and
Earthing switches in close or open position in case of
removal of the driving Mechanism
Bus Support insulator of each type for 3 phase/single
phase enclosure
Pipe length (Copper or Steel as applicable) for SF6 Circuit
ofeach type
SF6 to air bushing (66 KV of each type & rating)
1 set
5%
of
population
1 Set
1 No each
total
3.0
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS (66 KV)
Complete Circuit Breaker pole of each type & rating
complete with interrupter, main circuit, enclosure and
Marshalling Box with operating mechanism
Fixed, moving and arcing contacts including insulating
nozzles, (3 Nos. of each type)
Rubber gaskets, `O' rings and seals for SF6 gas of each
type
Trip coil assembly with resistor as applicable, 3 Nos. of
each type
Closing coil assembly with resistor as applicable, 3 Nos.
of each type
Molecular filter for SF6 gas with filter bags
3 No
1 Set
1 Set
2 Set
2 Set
10 % of total
quantity used
SF6 Pressure gauge cum switch OR Density monitors and 1 Set
pressure switch as applicable, 3 Nos. of each type
Coupling device for pressure gauge cum switch/ for 1 Set
connecting Gas handling plant, 3 Nos. of each type
Corona rings if applicable
1 Set
Relays, Power contactors, push buttons, timers & MCBs 1 Set
etc of each type & rating
xi.
xii.
xiii.
xiv.
xv.
xvi.
Closing assembly/ valve, 3 Nos. of each type Set
2 Set
Trip assembly/ valve, 3 Nos. of each type
2 Set
Auxiliary switch assembly, 3 Nos. of each type
1 Set
xvii.
Spring operated closing mechanism, 1 No. of each type,
if applicable
Terminal Pad & connectors
Isolators , E/Switch & High Speed E/Switch (66
KV)
Complete set of 3 nos. of single phase / one no. of 3phase dis-connector including main circuit, enclosure,
driving mechanism.
3 nos. of single phase / one no. of 3-phase Earthing
switch including main circuit, enclosure, driving
mechanism.
Copper contact fingers for dis-connector male & female
contact – for one complete (3 phase) dis-connector of
each type and rating.
Copper contact fingers for earthing switch male & female
contacts, for one complete (3 phase) earthing switch of
each type and rating
Open / Close contactor assembly, timers, key interlock
for one complete (3 phase) dis-connector and (3 phase)
earthing switch of each type and rating
xviii.
4.0
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
Operation Counter, 3 Nos. of each type
1 Set
Rupture disc, 3 Nos. of each type
1 Set
Windoscope/ Observing window, 3 Nos. of each type, if 1 Set
applicable
1 Set
1 Set
1 Set
1 Set
1 Set
1 Set
1 Set
vi.
vii.
Push button switch.-each type, as applicable
1
Limit switch and Aux. Switches for complete 3 phase
equipment
a) For isolator
3
b) For earth switch
1
viii. Rotor housing bearing assembly for complete 3 phase
equipment
a) For isolator
2
b) For earth switch
1
Motor
with
gear
assembly
for
complete
3
phase
ix.
equipment
a) For isolator
3
b) For earth switch
1
1
x. Corona shield rings as applicable
xi. Hinge pins for complete 3 phase equipment
a) For isolator
3
b) For earth switch
1
Bearings
for
complete
3
phase
equipment
xii.
a) For isolator
5
b) For earth switch
1
xiii. Interlocking coil with resistors, timers, key interlock for 1
complete 3 phase
xiv. Relays, Power contactors, resistors, fuses, push buttons
& MCBs
a) For isolator
3
b) For earth switch
1
Terminal
pad
and
connectors
(complete
for
one
3
phase
xv.
equipment)
a) For isolator
2
b) For earth switch
1
xvi. Aux. switch assembly (complete) with 10 NO & 10 NC OR 1
more contacts
xvii. 72.5 kV, 1250 A, 3 – φ or 1 –φ high speed fault making 1
grounding switch, Internal parts complete with all
necessary gaskets mounting hardware etc.
xviii. 72.5 kV, 1250 A, 3 – φ or 1 –φ high speed fault making 1
grounding switch operating mechanism complete with
all necessary gaskets connecting apparatus.
5.0
Current Transformer
i. 66kV 1 ph CT ratio 600-300-150/1-1-1A complete with all 6
gaskets and mounting hardware
ii. 66kV 1 ph CT ratio 600-300-150/0.577-1-1A complete 3
with all gaskets and mounting hardware
2
iii. Secondary Bushing of each type ( for 66kV CT )
6.0
Voltage Transformer/PT(66 KV)
1
i. 66kV, 1-phase VT as per technical specifications
complete with all gaskets and mounting hardware.
Note: All the rubber spare parts shall be vacuum impregnate
Set
Sets
Set
Sets
Set
Sets
Set
Set
Sets
Set
Sets
Set
Set
Sets
Set
Sets
Set
Set
Set
Set
Nos.
Nos.
Sets
Nos.
SECTION 2
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIRMENTS
1.
GENERAL
1.1
This section stipulates the general technical requirements under the contract
and will form integral part of the technical specification.
1.2
The provisions under this specification are intended to supplement
requirement for the materials, equipments and services covered under this
specification and is not exclusive. However, in case of conflict between
requirements specified in this section and requirements specified in other
sections the requirements specified- under respective sections shall hold
good.
2.0
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
2.1
The bidders shall submit the technical requirements, data and information as
per the technical data sheets provided in the Volume III of bid documents.
2.2
The bidders shall furnish catalogues, engineering data, technical information,
design document, drawings etc fully in conformity with the technical
specification.
2.3
It is recognised that the contractor may have standardised on the use of
certain components, materials, processes or procedures different than those
specified herein. Alternate proposals offering similar equipment based on the
manufacturer's standard practice will also be considered provided such
proposals meet the specified designs, standard and performance requirements
and are acceptable to the employer. Unless brought out clearly, the Bidder
shall be deemed to conform to this specification scrupulously, All deviations
from the specification shall be clearly brought out in the respective schedule of
deviations. Any discrepancy between the specification and the catalogues or
the bid, if not clearly brought out in the schedule, will not be considered as
valid deviation.
2.4
Wherever a material or article is specified or defined by the name of a
particular brand, manufacturer or vendor, the specific name mentioned shall
be understood as establishing type, function and quality and not as limiting
competition.
2.5
Equipment furnished shall be complete in every respect with all mountings,
fittings, fixtures and standard accessories normally provided with such
equipment and/or needed for erection, completion and safe operation of the
equipment as required by applicable codes though they may not have been
specifically detailed in the technical specifications unless include in the list of
exclusions. Materials and components not specifically stated in the
specification but which are necessary for commissioning and satisfactory
operation of the switchyard shall be deemed to be included in the scope of the
1
specification. All similar standard components/parts of similar standard
equipment provided, shall be inter changeable with one another.
2.6
Unless brought out clearly in the respective schedule of deviations, it will be
considered that, the bid proposal scrupulously conforms compliance to the
specification. The bidder must bring out all the deviations in the bid proposal.
2.7
In case there is a discrepancy between the data offered equipment and
catalogue furnished, and unless the deviations are brought out clearly in the
Technical Deviation Schedule, the equipment will be deemed to conform
compliance to the specification scrupulously.
3.0
STANDARDS
3.1
The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered,
manufactured, built tested and commissioned in accordance with the Acts,
Rules, Laws and Regulations of India.
3.2
The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform to latest
issue with all amendments of standard specified under Annexure B of this
section as well as under respective Sections/Chapters of the specification.
3.3
In addition to meeting the specific requirement called for in the respective
sections of the Technical Specification, the equipment shall also conform to
the general requirement of the relevant standards and shall form an internal
part of the specification.
3.4
The Bidder shall note that standards mentioned in the specification are not
mutually exclusive or complete in themselves, but intend to compliment each
other.
3.5
The Contractor shall also note that list of standards presented in this
specification is not complete. Wherever necessary the list of standards shall of
the specification shall take precedence.
3.6
When the specific requirements stipulated in the specification exceed or differ
than those required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the
specification shall take precedence.
3.7
Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better
performance than that specified in the standards referred shall also be
accepted.
3.8
In case governing standards for the equipment is different from IS or IEC, the
salient points of difference shall be clearly brought out in additional information
schedule of Vol. III alongwith English language version of standard or relevant
shall be subject to Employer's approval.
2
4.
SERVICES TO BE PERFORMED BY THE EQUIPMENT BEING FURNISHED
4.1
The 220/132/33 kV system is being designed to limit the switching surge over
voltage and the power frequency over voltage within limits of IEC. The
equipment furnished under this specification shall perform all its functions and
operate satisfactorily with out showing undue strain, re-strike etc. under such
over voltage conditions and in system where line lengths would extend up to
200 km.
4.2
All equipments shall also perform satisfactorily under various Electromechanical and meteorological conditions of the site of installation.
4.3
All the Equipment shall be able to withstand all external and internal
mechanical, thermal and electromechanical forces due to various factor like
wind load, temperature variation, short circuit etc for the equipment.
4.4
The bidder shall design the various forces for terminal connectors of the
equipment are required to withstand.
4.5
The equipment shall also comply to the following:
4.6
4.7
4.7.1
S.NO.
1.
2.
3.
4.
i)
ii)
iii)
5.
6.
a)
All outdoor EHV equipments shall be suitable for hot line washing.
b)
To facilitate erection of equipment, all items to be assembled as site
shall be "match marked".
c)
All piping, if any between equipment control cabinet operating
mechanism to marshalling box of the equipment shall bear proper
identification to facilitate the connection at site.
Operating times of circuit breakers, protective relays and PLCC equipment have
been specified in respective sections.
EHV equipments and system shall be designed to meet the following major technical
parameters as brought out hereunder.
System Parameter
Description of parameters
System operating voltage
Rated frequency
No. of phase
Rated Insulation levels
Full wave impulse withstand voltage(1.2/50
micro sec.)
Switching impulse withstand voltage (250/
2500 micro sec.) dry and wet
One minute power frequency dry and wet
withstand voltage (rms)
Corona extinction voltage
Max. Radio interference voltage for
frequency
Between 0.5 MHz and 2 MHz 156kV rms
for
220kV system & 92 kV rms for 132kV
220 kV
220 kV
50Hz
66 kV
66 kV
50Hz
11 kV
11 kV
50Hz
3
3
3
1050kVp
325kVp
75kVp
-
-
-
460kV
140kV
28kV
-
-
156kV
1000 micro volt
500 micro
volt
3
system.
Minimum creepage distance
25
mm/kV
(6125 mm)
25 mm/kV
(1813 mm)
25 mm/kV (300
mm)
2100 mm
800 mm
280 mm
2100 mm
ii)
5000 mm
iii) Sectional clearances
Rated
short
circuit
current
for
1
sec.
40 kA for AIS
9.
800 mm
140 mm
3000 mm
31.5 kA
3000 mm
26.2 kA
10. System neutral earthing
Solidly
earthed
Solidly earthed
7.
8.
i)
Min. clearances
Phase to phase (for Rod–conductor
configuration)
and
(for
conductor
configuration)
Phase to earth
duration
4.7.2
(A)
1
50kA for GIS
Solidly earthed
Major Technical Parameters
The major technical parameters of the equipments are given below. For other parameters
and features respective technical sections should be referred.
25/31.5MVA 66/11KV Power Transformer
Maximum Continuous Capacity (MVA)
2
Rated Voltage (kV)
3
4
5
Percentage Impedance
Vector Group
Insulation level
Lightning Impulse withstand voltage (KVp)
Power Frequency withstand voltage(KV rms)
i)
ii)
(B)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
a)
b)
6.
ONAF
31.5
LV
11
LV
95
100
FOR 245 kV & 72.5 kV CT/CVT/SA
220 kV
Rated voltage kV (rms)
245
Rated frequency (Hz)
50
No. of Poles
3
Design ambient temperature (°C)
50
Rated insulation levels :
Full wave impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 micro sec.)
between line terminals and ground for CVT and ± 1050 kVp
arrester housing
One minute power frequency dry and wet withstand voltage
between line terminals and ground for CVT and 460
arrester housing (kV rms)
Max. radio interference voltage (microvolts) for 1000 for CVT
frequency between 0.5 MHz and 2 MHz in all 500 for SA (at
positions of the equipments.
156 kVrms)
Minimum creepage distance Phase to
ground (mm)
8. System neutral earthing
9. Seismic acceleration
10. Partial discharge for :Surge arrester at 1.05 COV
For CVT
7.
ONAN
25
HV
66
10% at 31.5MVA Base
YYO
HV
325
140
6125
66 kV
72.5
50
3
50
11 kV
12.1
50
3
50
±325 kVp
±75 kVp
140
28
-
500
(at 92 kV
rms)
1813
300
-- Effectively earthed--- 0.3g horizontal --
<50pc
<10pc
<50pc
<10pc
<50pc
<10pc
4
5.0
ENGINEERING DATA
5.1
The furnishing of engineering data by the Contractor shall be in accordance
with the schedule for each set of equipment as specified in the technical
specifications.
5.2
The review of these data by the Employer will cover only general conformance
of the data to the specifications and documents, interfaces with the equipment
provided under the specifications, external connections and of the dimensions
which might affect substation layout. This review by the Employer may not
indicate a through review of all dimensions, quantities and accuracy of the
information submitted. This review and/or approval by the Employer shall not
be considered by the Contractor, as limiting any of his responsibilities and
liabilities for mistakes and deviation from the requirements, specified under
these specifications and documents.
5.3
All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after final process including
review and approval by the Employer shall from part of the Contract Document
and the entire works performed under these specifications shall be performed
in strict conformity, unless otherwise expressly requested by the Employer in
Writing.
6.0
DOCUMENTS
6.1
LIST OF DOCUMENTS
6.1.1 The bidder must furnish a detailed list of drawings/documents along with the
bid proposal which he intends to submit to the Employer after awarded of the
contract.
6.1.2 The supplier shall necessarily submit all the drawings/ documents unless
anything is waived.
6.1.3 The supplier shall submit 6 (six) sets of drawings/design documents/test
reports as may be required for the approval of the Employer.
6.2
All engineering data submitted by the Contractor after final process including
review and approval by the Employer shall from part of the Contract Document
and the entire works performed under these specifications shall be performed
in strict conformity, unless otherwise expressly requested by the Employer in
Writing.
6.3
DRAWINGS
6.3.1
All drawing submitted by the Contractor including those submitted at the time
of bid shall be in sufficient detail to indicate the type, size, arrangement,
material description, Bill of Materials, weight of each component, break-up for
packing and shipment, the external connections, fixing arrangement required,
the dimensions required for installation and interconnections with other
5
equipments and materials, clearances and spaces required for installation and
interconnection between various portions of equipments and any other
information specifically requested in the specifications.
Each drawing submitted by the Contractor shall be clearly marked with the
name of the Employer, the unit designation, the specifications title, the
specification number and the name of the Project. If standard catalogue pages
are submitted, the applicable items shall be indicated therein. All titles, noting,
markings and writings on the drawing shall be in English. All the dimensions
should be in metric units.
6.3.3 Further work by the Contractor shall be in strict accordance with these drawing
and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the
Employer if so required.
6.4
All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior
to the approval of the drawing shall be at the Contractor's risk. The Contractor
may make any changes in the design which are necessary to make the
equipment conform to the provisions and intent of the Contract and such
changes will again be subject to approval by the Employer. Approval of
Contractor's drawing or work by the Employer shall not relieve the contractor
of any of his responsibilities and liabilities under the Contract.
6.3.2
6.5
APPROVAL PROCEDURE
The scheduled dates for the submission of these as well as for, any
data/information to be furnished by the Employer would be discussed and
finalised at the time of award. The supplier shall also submit six (6) copies of
all drawings/design documents/test report for approval of the Employer. The
following schedule shall be followed generally for approval.
i)
Approval/comments/by
employer on initial submission
Within 4 weeks of receipt.
ii)
Resubmission
Within 3 (three) weeks
(whenever from date of
comments
required)
including both ways postal
time.
iii)
Approval or comments
Within 3 weeks of receipt of
resubmission
iv)
Furnishing
copies
3 weeks from the date of last
approval.
of
distribution
Note: The contractor may please note that all resubmission must incorporate
all comments given in the submission by the Employer failing which the
submission of documents is likely to be returned.
6.6
The drawing which are required to be referred frequently during execution
should be submitted on cloth lined paper.
6
6.7
6.7.1
6.7.2
OTHER REQUIREMENTS OF DOCUMENTATION
One set of 4microfilm and 8 sets of all drawing per substation plus one set and
four sets of all drawing for HVPN head office shall be furnished after approval
of drgs. Microfilms submitted should be compatible with 35 mm microfilming
system.
The manufacturer shall also submit one video cassette (VHS-PAL) per
substation and one for HVPN head office highlighting installation and
maintenance techniques/requirements of Circuit Breaker & Isolators.
6.7.3
On completion of the entire works, the supplier shall also furnish eight bound
sets of all as built drawings, duly signed by the site in-charge along with 1 set
of microfilms. Computer CD/DVD for each substation and HVPN head office
containing all "as-built drawing in Auto-Cad version 12 or better shall also be
submitted".
6.7.4
8 copies of instruction/operation manuals per sub station and HVPN head
office shall also be furnished. The instruction Manuals shall contain full details
of drawing of all equipment being supplied under this contract, their exploded
diagrams with complete instruction for storage, handing, erection,
commissioning, testing, operation, trouble shooting, servicing and overhauling
procedures.
6.7.5
After approval of test reports, 6(six) bound sets containing all
drawings/manuals, type and routine test report etc. along with sub-vendor’s
test reports for all bought out assemblies/components/parts including internal
wiring diagrams and exploded diagrams of assemblies/ parts, shall be
furnished.
6.8
If after the commissioning and initial operation of the substation, the instruction
manuals require any modifications/additions/changes, the same shall be
incorporated and the updated final instruction manual in the form of one (1)
reproducible original and twelve( 12) copies shall be submitted by the
Contractor to the Employer.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Employers, twelve(12) sets of spare part
catalogue.
7.0
7.1
COLOUR SCHEME AND CODES
The contractor shall propose parts a color scheme for the those equipments
/Items for which the colour scheme has not been specified in the specification,
for the approval of Employer. The decision of Employer shall be final. The
scheme shall include:
Finishing colour of Indoor equipment.
-
Finishing colour of Outdoor equipment.
-
Finishing colour of all cubicals.
-
Finishing colour of various auxiliary system equipment including piping.
7
-
Finishing colour of various building items.
7.2
All steel structures, plates etc shall be hot dip galvanised or painted with noncorrosive paint on a suitable primer as per the provisions of the respective
Section. It may be noted that normally all Employer's electrical equipment in
Employer's switchyard are painted with shade 631 of IS-5 and Employer will
prefer to follow the same for this project also. All the indoor cubicles shall be of
same colour scheme and for other miscellaneous items colour scheme will be
approved by the Employer.
8.0
MATERIAL/ WORKMANSHIP
8.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
8.1.1 Where the specification does not contain characteristics with reference to
workmanship, equipment, materials and component of the covered Equipment,
it is understood that the same must be new, of highest ,grade of the best
quality of their kind, conforming to the best engineering practice and suitable
for the purpose for which they are intended.
8.1.2 The equipment must be new, of highest grade, the best quality of their kind, to
best engineering practice and latest state of ardent in accordance with
purpose for which they are intended and to ensure satisfactory performance
throughout the service life.
8.1.3 Incase where the equipment, material or components are indicated in the
specification as "similar" to any special standard, the employer shall decide
upon the question of similarly. When required by the specification or required
by the employer the supplier shall submit, for approval, all the information
concerning the material or components supplied, installed or used without
such approval shall run the risk of subsequent rejection, it being understood
that the cost as well as the time delay associated with the rejection shall be
borne by the Supplier.
8.1.4 The design of the work shall be such that installation, future expansions,
replacement and general maintenance may be undertaken with a minimum of
time and expenses. Each component shall be designed to be consistent with
its duty and suitable factors of safety, subject to mutual agreements and shall
be used throughout the design. All joints and fastenings shall be devised;
constructed and documented so that the component part shall be accurately
positioned and retained to fulfil their require function. In general, screw threads
shall be standard metric threads. The use of other thread forms will only be
permitted when prior approval has been obtained from the Employer.
8.1.5 Whenever possible, all similar part of the works shall be made to gauge and
shall also be made interchangeable with similar parts. All spare parts shall be
interchangeable with, and shall be made of the same material and
workmanship as the corresponding parts of the equipment supplied under
specification. Where feasible, common component units shall be Employed in
different pieces of the equipment in order to minimize spare parts stocking
8
requirements. All equipment of the same type and rating shall be physically
and electrically interchangeable.
8.1.6 All material and equipment shall be. installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation(s). Only first-class work in accordance with
the best modern practice will be accepted. Installation shall be constructed as
being the erection of equipment at its permanent location. This, unless
otherwise specified, shall include unpacking, cleaning and lifting into position,
grouping, leveling, aligning, coupling of or bolting down to previously installed
equipment bases/ foundation, performing the alignment check and final
adjusting prior to initial operation, testing and commissioning in accordance
with the manufacturer's tolerances and instruction and the specification. All
factory assembled rotating machinery shall be checked for alignment and
adjustments made as necessary to re-establish the manufacturer's limits
suitable guards shall be provided for the protection of personnel on all
exposed rotating and/or moving machine parts and shall be designed for easy
installation and removal for maintenance purpose. The spare equipment( s)
shall be installed at designated location and tested for healthiness.
8.1.7 The Supplier shall apply oil and grease of the proper specification to suit the
machinery, as is necessary for the installation of the equipment. Lubricants
used for installation purpose shall be drained out and the system flushed
through where necessary for applying the lubricant required for operation. The
Supplier shall apply all operational lubricants to the equipment installed by
him.
8.1.8 All oil, grease and other consumable used in the Works/Equipment shall be
purchased in India unless the Supplier has any special requirement for the
specific application of a type of oil or grease not available in India. In such is
the case he shall declare in the proposal, where such oil or grease is available.
He shall help Employer in establishing equivalent India make and Indian
supplier. The same shall be applicable to other consumable too.
8.1.9 A cast iron or welded steel base plate shall be provided for all rotating
equipment which are to be installed on a concrete base unless otherwise
agreed to by the Employer. Each base plate shall support the units and its
drive assembly, shall be of design with pads for anchoring the units and shall
have a raised up all around and shall have threaded in air connections, if so
required.
8.2
PROVISION FOR EXPOSURE TO HOT HUMID CLIMATE
Outdoor equipment supplied under the specification shall be suitable for
service and storage under tropical conditions of high temperature, high
humidity, heavy rainfall and environment favorable to the growth of fungi and
mildew. The indoor equipments located in non-aircollditioned areas shall also
be same type.
9
8.2.1 SPACE HEATERS
8.2.1.1
The heater shall be suitable for continuous operation at 240 V as supply
voltage. On-off switch and fuse shall be provided.
8.2.1.2
One or more adequately rated permanently or thermostatically
connected heater'shall be supplied to prevent condensation in any
compartment. The heaters shall be installed in the lower portion of the
compartment and electrical connection shall be made from below the heaters
to minimize deterioration of supply wire insulation. The heaters shall be
suitable to maintain the compartment temperature to prevent condensation.
This shall be demonstrated by tests.
8.2.1.3
The heaters shall be suitably designed to prevent any contact between
the heater wire and the air and shall consist of coiled resistance wire centered
in a metal sheath and completely encased in a highly compacted powder of
magnesium oxide or other material having equal heat conducting and electrical
insulation properties, or they shall consist of resistance wire wound on a
ceramic and completely covered with a ceramic material to prevent any
contact between the wire and the air. Alternately, they shall consist of a
resistance wire mounted into a tubular ceramic body and embedded in
vitreous gale. The surface temperature of the heater shall be restricted wire is
wound on a tubular ceramic body and embedded in vitreous glaze. The
surface temperature of the heaters shall be restricted to a value which will not
shorten the life of the heater sheaths or that of insulated wire or other
component in the compartments.
8.2.2 FUNGISTATIC VARNISH
Besides the space heaters, special moisture and fungus resistant varnish shall
be applied to parts which may be subjected or predisposed to the formation of
fungi due to the presence or deposit of nutrient substances. The varnish shall
not be applied to any surface of part where the treatment will interfere with the
operation or performance of the equipment. Such surfaces or parts shall be
protected against the application of the varnish.
8.2.3 VENTILATION OPENING
In order to ensure adequate ventilation, compartments shall have ventilation
openings provided with fine wire mesh of brass or galvanized steel to prevent
the entry if insects and to reduce to a minimum the entry of dirt and dust.
Outdoor compartment openings shall be provided with shutter type blinds.
8.2.4 DEGREE OF PROTECTION
The enclosures of the control cabinets, junction boxes and marshalling boxes
to be installed shall provide degree of protection as detailed here under:
a)
Installed outdoor: 1 – 55
10
b)
Installed indoor in air conditioned area :1-31
c)
Installed in covered are : 1 – 52
d)
Installed indoor in non-airconditioned area where possibility of entry of
water is limited: 1-41
The degree of protection shall be in accordance with IS: 13947(Part-l) or IEC947 (part-I). Type test report for degree of protection test, on each type of the
box shall be submitted for approval.
9.
RATING PLATES, NAME PLATES AND LABELS
9.1
Each main and auxiliary item of substation is to be permanently attached to it
in a conspicuous position a rating plate of non-corrosive material upon which is
to be engraved manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, equipment name,
type or serial number together with details of the loading condition under which
the item of substation in question has been designed to operate, and such
diagram plates as may be required by the employer. The rating plates of each
equipment shall be according to IEC requirement.
9.2
All such nameplates instruction plates, rating plates shall be bilingual with
Hindi inscription first followed by English. Alternatively two separate plates one
with Hindi and the other English Instruction may be provided.
10.
FIRST FILL OF CONSUMABLE, OIL AND LUBRICANT
All the first fill consumable such as oil, lubricant, filling compounds, touch up
paints, soldering/brazing material for all copper piping of circuit breakers and
essential chemicals etc. which will be required to put the equipment covered
under the scope of the specifications, into successful operation, shall be
furnished by the Contractor unless specification excluded under the exclusions
in these specifications and documents
DESIGN IMPROVEMENTS
11.
11.1
The bidder may note that the equipments offered by him in the bid only shall
be acceptable, however, the Purchaser or the Supplier may propose changes
in the specification of the equipment or quality thereof and if the parties agreed
upon any such changes, the specification shall be modified accordingly.
11.2
If any such agreed upon change is such that if affects the price. and schedule
of completion, the parties shall agree in writing as to the extent of any change
in the price and/or schedule of the completion before the contractor proceeds
with the change. Following such agreement, the provision thereof, shall be
deemed to have been amended accordingly.
12.
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROGRAMME
12.1
To ensure that the equipment and services under the scope of this contract
whether manufactured or performed within the contractor's Work or at his
Subcontractor's premises or at the Employer's site or at any other place of
11
work are in accordance with the specification, the Contractor shall adopt
suitable quality assurance programme to control such activities at all points
necessary. Such programme shall be outlined by the contractor and shall be
finally accepted by the employer after discussions before the award of
contract. A quality assurance programme of the contractor shall generally
covered the following:
a)
His Organization structure for the management and implementation of
the proposed quality assurance programme:
b)
Qualification data for bidder's key personnel:
c)
Documentation control System:
d)
The procedure for purchases of material, parts components and
selection of subcontractor’s services including vendor analysis,. source,
inspection, incoming raw material inspection, verification of material
purchases etc:
e)
System for shop manufacturing and ,site erection control including
process controls and fabrication and assembly control:
f)
Control and non-conforming items and system for corrective actions:
g)
Inspection and test procedure both for manufacture and field activities:
h)
Control of calibration and testing of measuring instruments and field
activities:
i)
System for indication and appraisal of inspection status:
j)
System for quality audits:
k)
System for authorising release of manufactured product to the
Purchaser:
l)
System for maintenance of records:
m)
System for handling storage and delivery: and
n)
A quality plan detailing out the specific quality control measures and
procedures adopted for controlling the quality characteristics relevant to
each item of equipment furnished and/or services ordered.
The Employer or his duly authorised representative reserves the right to
carry out quality audit and quality surveillance of the system and
procedure of the Contractor/his vendor's quality management and
control activities.
12.2
QUALITY ASSURANCE DOCUMENTS
12
The contractor shall be required to submit the following quality Assurance
Documents within three weeks after despatch of the equipment.
a)
All Non-destructive Examination procedures, stress relief and weld
repair procedure actually used during fabrication and report including
radiography interpretation reports.
b)
Welder identification list, listing welder’s and welding operator
qualification procedure and welding identification symbols.
c)
Welder and Welding operator qualification certificate.
d)
Raw material test reports on components as specified by the
specification and lor agreed to in the quality plan.
e)
Stress relief time temperature chart/oil impregnation til)1e temperature
chart.
f)
Factory test results for testing required as per applicable codes/
mutually agreed quality plan/ standards referred in the technical
specification.
g)
The quality plan with verification of various customer inspection
points(CAP) as mutually agreed and methods used to verify the
inspection and testing points in the quality plan were performed
satisfactory.
13.
13.1
INSPECTION, TESTING & INSPECTION CERTIFICATE
The Employer his duly authorised representative and/or outside inspection
agency acting on behalf of the Employer shall have at all reasonable times
free access to the Contractor's premises or Works and shall have the power at
all reasonable times to inspect and examine the material and the
Workmanship of the Works during its manufacture or erection and if part of the
works during its manufacturing or erection and if the part of works being
manufactured or assembled at other premises or works, the contractor shall
obtain for the Engineer and for his duly authorised representative permission
to inspect as if the work were manufactured or assembled on the Contractor
own premises or works, Inspection may be made at any stage of manufacture,
despatch or at site at the option of the Employer and equipment if found
unsatisfactory due to bad workmanship or quality, material is liable to be
rejected.
13.2
All equipment being supplied shall conform to valid type tests as per IEC/IS &
same shall not be older than 7 years as on the date of bid opening and shall
be subject to routine tests in accordance with relevant standards.
13.3
The Contractor shall give the Employer/Inspector thirty(30) days written notice
of any material being ready for testing alongwith work test certifi!:ate. Such
tests shall be to the Contractor's account except for the expenses of the
13
Inspector. The Engineerllnspector, unless witnessing of the tests is virtually
waived, will attend such tests with thirty(30) days of the date of which the
equipment is notified as being ready for tests/inspection, failing which the
contractor may proceed with the test which shall be deemed to have been
made in the Inspector's presence and he shall forthwith forward to the
Inspector duly certified copies of tests in triplicate.
13.4
13.5
The Employer or Inspector shall, within fifteen (15) days from the date of
inspection as defined here in give notice in writing to the contractor, of any
objection to any drawings and all any equipment and workmanship which in
his opinion is not in accordance with the contract. The Contractor shall give
due consideration to such objections and shall either made the modifications
that may be necessary to meet the said objections or shall confirm in writing to
the Engineer/Inspector giving reasons therein, that no modifications are
necessary to comply with the Contract.
When the, factory tests have been completed at the Contractor's or Subcontractor's Works the Employer/Inspector shall issue a certificate to this effect
within fifteen (15) days after completion of tests but if the tests are not
witnessed by the Employer/Inspector, the certificate shall be issued within
fifteen(15) days of receipt of the contractor's Test certificate by the
Engineer/Inspector. Failure of the Engineer/Inspector to issue such a
certificate shall not prevent the Contractor from proceeding with the Works.
The completion of these tests or the issue of the certificate shall not bind the
employer to accept the equipment should, it, on further tests after erection be
found not to comply with the Contract. The equipment shall be dispatched to
site only after approval of test reports and issuance of MICA by the Employer.
13.6
In all cases where the Contract provides for tests whether at the premises or at
the works of the contractor or of any Sub-Contractor. The Contractor except
where otherwise specified shall provide free of charge such items as labour,
material electrically, field water, stores, apparatus and instruments as may be
reasonably demanded by the Employer/Inspector or his authorised
representative to carry out effectively such tests of the equipment in
accordance with the contractor and shall give facilities to the
Employerllnspector or to his authorised representative to accomplish testing.
13.7
The inspection by Employer and issue of Inspection Certificate thereon shall in
no way limit the liabilities and responsibilities of the Contractor in respect of the
agreed quality assurance programme forming a part of the contractors.
13.8
The Employer will have the right of having at his own expenses any other
test(s) of reasonable nature carried out at Contractor premises or at site of in
any other place in addition of aforesaid type and routine tests, to satisfy that
the material comply with the specification.
13.9
The Employer reserves the right for getting any field tests conducted on the
completely assembled equipment at site.
14.
TESTS
14
14.1
CHARGING
On completion of erection of the equipment and before charging, each item of
the equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and then inspected jointly by the
Employer and the Contractor for correctness and completeness of installation
and acceptability for charging, leading to initial pre-commissioning tests at site.
The list of pre-commissioning tests to be performed shall be included in the
Contractor's quality assurance programme.
14.2
COMMISSIONING TESTS
14.2.1 The available instrumentation and control equipment will be used during such
tests and the Employer will calibrate, all such measuring equipment and
devices as far as practicable. However un measurable parameters shall be
taken into account in a reasonable manner by the Employer for the
requirement of these tests. The tests will be conducted at the specified load
points and as near the specified cycle condition as practicable. The employer
will apply proper corrections in calculation, to take into account conditions
which do not correspond to the specified condition.
14.2.2 Any special equipment, tools and tackles required for the successful
completion of the Commissioning Tests shall be provided by the Contractor,
free of cost.
14.2.3 The specified tests to be conducted on equipment have been brought out in
the respective chapters of the technical specification.
14.3
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining statutory clearances from the
concerned authorities for commissioning the equipment and the switchyard.
However, necessary fee shall be paid by employer.
15.
PACKING AND SHIPPING
All the equipment shall be suitably protected, coated, covered or boxes and
crated to prevent damage or deterioration during transit, handling and storage
at site till the time of erection. While packing all the materials, the limitation
from the point of view of availability of Railway wagon sizes in India should be
taken account. The Contractor shall be responsible for any loss or damage
during transportation, handling and storage due to improper packing. Employer
takes no responsibility of the wagons.
16.
PROTECTION
All coated surfaces shall be protected against abrasion, impact, discoloration
and any other damages. All exposed threaded portions shall be suitably
protected with either a metallic or a non-metallic protecting device. All ends of
all valves and pilings and conduit equipment connections shall be properly
sealed with suitable devices to protect them form damage. The parts which are
likely to get rusted, due to exposure to weather should also be properly treated
and protected in a suitable manner.
15
17.
PAINTING AND FINISHING OF METAL SURFACES
17.1
GENERAL
All metal surfaces shall be subjected to treatment for anti-corrosion protection.
All ferrous surfaces for external use shall be hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication. High tensile steel nuts and bolts and spring washers shall be
electro-galvanized to service condition. All steel conductors including those
used for earthing/grounding (above ground level) shall also be galvanized
according to 1S: 2629.
17.2
HOT DIP GALVANIZING
17.2.1 The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 610g/sq.m and minimum
thickness of coating shall be 85 microns for all items thicker than 6mm. For
items lower than 6mm thickness requirement of coating thickness shall be as
per relevant A5TM.
17.2.2 The galvanized surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniform thick
coating of zinc, firmly adhering to the surface of steel;. The finished surfaces
shall be clean and smooth and shall be free from defects liked is colour
patches, are spots, unevenness of coating, plate which is loosely attached to
the steel globules, spiky deposits, blistered surface, flaking or peeling off, etc.
The presence of any of these defects notices on visual or microscopic
inspection shall render the material liable to rejection.
17.2.3 After galvanizing, no drilling or welding shall be performed on the galvanized
parts of the equipment excepting that nuts may be threaded after galvanizing.
Sodium dichromate treatment shall be provided to avoid formation of white rust
after hot dip galvanization.
17.2.4 The galvanized steel shall be subjected to six one minute dips in copper
sulphate solution as per IS-2633.
17.2.5 Sharp edges with radii less than 2.5mm shall be able to withstand four
immersions of the standard price test. All other coating shall withstand six
immersions. The following galvanizing tests should essentially be performed
as per relevant Indian Standards.
Coating
-
Uniformity of zinc
-
Adhesion test
-
Mass of Zinc
16
17.2.6 Galvanized material must be transported properly to ensure that galvanized
surfaces are not damaged during transit. Application of zinc rich paint at site
shall not be allowed.
17.3
PAINTING
17.3.1 All sheet steel work shall be digressed, pickled, phosphated in accordance
with the IS-6005 "code of practice for phosphating iron and sheet". All surfaces
which will not be easily accessible after shop assembly shall before hand to be
treated and protected for the life of the equipment. The surface which are to be
finished painted after installation, shall be shop painted with atleast two coats
of primer. Oil, grease, dirt and swart shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion
cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed
by washing with running water, rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and
drying.
17.3.2 After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water
followed by final rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and over drying. The
phosphate coating shall be sealed with application of two coats may be "flash
dried" while the second coat shall be stoved.
17.3.3 After application of the primer, two coats of finishing synthetic enamel paint
shall be applied, each coat followed by stoving. The second finishing coat shall
be applied after inspection of first coat of painting.
17.3.4 The exterior color of the paint shall be as per shade No.:631 of IS-5 and inside
shall be glossy white. Each coat of primer and finishing paint shall be of
slightly different shade to enable inspection of the painting. A small quantity of
finishing paint shall be supplied for minor touching up required at site after
installation of the equipments.
17.3.5 In case the bidder proposes to follow his own standard surface finish and
protection procedures or any other established painting procedures, like
electrostatic painting etc. the procedure shall be submitted alongwith the bids
for employer's review & approval.
18.
18.1
HANDILING, STORING AND INSTALLTION
In accordance with the specific installation instructions as shown on
manufacturer's drawings or as directed by the employer or his representative,
the contractor shall unload, store, erect, install, wire test and place into
commercial use all the electrical equipment included in the contract.
Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workmanlike manner so that it is level,
plumb, square and properly aligned and oriented. Commercial use of
switchyard equipment means completion of all site tests specified and
energisation at rate voltage.
18.2
Contractor may engage manufacturer's engineer to supervise the unloading,
transportation to site, storing, testing and commissioning of the various
equipment being procured by them separately. Contractor shall unload,
transport, store, erect, test and commission the equipment as per instructions
17
of the manufacturer's supervisory Engineer(s) and shall extend full cooperation
to them,.
18.3
In case of any doubt/misunderstanding as to the correct interpretation of
manufacture's drawing or instruction, necessary clarifications shall be obtained
from the Employer: Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to the
equipment consequent to not following manufacturer's drawing/instructions
correctly.
18.4
Where assemblies are supplied in more than one section, Contractor shall
make all necessary mechanical and electrical connections between section
including the connection between buses. Contractor shall also do necessary
adjustments/alignments necessary for proper operation of circuit breakers,
isolators and their operating mechanisms. All components shall be protected,
testing and commissioning. Any equipment damaged due to negligence or
carelessness or otherwise shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own
expense.
18.5
Supplier shall be responsible for examining all the shipment and notify the
Employer immediately of any damage, shortage, discrepancy etc. for the
purpose of Employer's information only. The supplier shall submit to the
Employer every week a report detailing all the receipts for any shortages or
damages in transit, handling and/or in storage and erection of the equipment
at Site. Any demurrage, wharfage and other such charges claimed by the
transporters, railways etc. shall be to the account of the Supplier.
18.6
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the equipment material unit the
same is handed over to the Employer in an operating condition after
commissioning. Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the
equipment material while in storage as well as after erection unit taken over by
Employer, as well as protection of the same against theft, element of nature,
corrosion, damages etc.
18.7
Where material/equipment is unloaded by Employer before the Contractor
arrives at site or even when he is site. Employer by right can hand over the
same to Contractor and there upon it will be the responsibility of Contractor to
store the material in an orderly and proper manner.
18.8
The Supplier shall be responsible for making suitable indoor storage facilities,
to store all equipment which require indoor storage.
18.9
The words 'erection' and 'installation' used in the specification are
synonymous.
18.10 Exposed live parts shall be placed high enough above ground to meet the
requirements of electrical and other statutory safety codes.
18
19.
PROTECTIVE GUARD
Suitable guards shall be provided for protection of personnel on all exposed
rotating and/ or moving machine parts. All such guards with necessary spares
and accessories shall be designed for easy installation and removal for
maintenance purpose.
20.
DESIGN CO-ORDINATION
20.1
The Contractor shall be responsible for the selection and design of appropriate
equipments to provide the best co-ordinate performance of the entire system.
The basic design requirements are detailed out in this Specification. The
design of various components, sub-assemblies and assemblies shall be so
done so that it facilitates easy field assembly and maintenance.
20.2
The Contractor has to coordinate designs and termination with the agencies (If
any)who are Consultants/Contractor for the Employer. The names of agencies
shall be intimated to the successful bidders.
21.
DESIGN CO-ORDINATION MEETING
The Contractor will be called upon to attend design co-ordination meeting with
the Engineer, other Contractor's and the Consultants of Employer (If any)
during the period of Contract. The Contractor shall attend such meeting at his
own cost as and when required and fully cooperate with such person and
agencies involved during those discussions.
22.
TOOLS AND TACKELS
The Contractor shall supply with the equipment one complete set of all special
tools and tackles for the erection, assembly,dis-assembly and maintenance of
the equipment. However, these tools and tackles shall be separately, packed
and brought on to Site.
23.
EQUIPMENT BASES
A cast iron or welded steel base.plate shall be provided for all rotating
equipment which is to be installed on a concrete base unless otherwise agreed
to by the Employer. Each base plate shall support the unit and its drive
assembly, shall be of a neat design with pads for anchoring the units, shall
have a raised lip all around, and shall have threaded drain connections.
24.
FACILITIES TO BE PROVIDED BY THE BIDDER
24.1
The sub-station auxiliary supply is met through a system indicated having the
following parameters. The auxiliary power for station supply including the
equipment drive, cooling system of any equipment, air-conditioning, lighting
etc shall be designed for the specified Parameters as under. The DC supply
19
for the instrumentation and PLCC system shall also conform the parametres
as indicated in the following.
Normal
Voltage
Variation
In Voltage
Frequency
In Hz
Phase
/ Wire
Neutral
Connection
415 V
+ 10%
- 15%
50:1:5%
3
4 wire
Solid
Earthed
240 V
+ 10%
- 15%
50:1:5%
1
2 wire
Solid
Earthed
220 V
190 to
220
DC
2 wire
Isolated
System
Combined variation of voltage and frequency shall be limited to +/- 10%. Fault
level for AC and DC system shall be 20 kA for 1 sec and 4 kA for 1 sec
respectively.
25.
SUPPORT STRUCTURE
25.1
The support structures should be hot dip galvanised with minimum 610
gram/m2 net of Zinc.
25.2
In case of any deviation in this regard the bid is liable to be rejected.
25.3
Support structure shall meet the following mandatory requirements.
25.4
The minimum vertical distance from the bottom of the lowest porcelain part of
the bushing, porcelain enclosures or supporting insulators to the bottom of the
equipment base, where it rests on the foundation pad shall be 2.55 meters.
25.5
The design calculations taking into account the environmental conditions of the
substations shall be furnished for sizing of the structures.
26.
CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS INCLUDING TERMINAL CONNECTORS
26.1
All power clamps and connectors shall conform to IS:5561 & NEMA CC1 and
shall be made of materials listed below:
a)
For connecting Tarantulla
/ACSR conductors
The Fired ‘C’ wedge connector, as per
clause 1.4.4 of section 7
b)
For
connecting
conductors
ACSR
Aluminium
alloy
casting
conforming to designation A6
of IS:617 and shall be tested
for all test as per IS:617
c)
For connecting equipment
Bimetallic connectors made
20
terminals made of copper
with ACSR conductors
from aluminium alloy casting,
conforming to designation A6
of IS 617 with 2mm thick
bimetallic liner and shall
tested as per IS:617
d)
For connecting GI shield wire
Galvanised mild steel
e)
i) Bolts, nuts & plain washer
galvanised
ii) Spring washers for items
'a' to 'c'
i) Electro galvanisation for
sizes Plain, washers below
M12, for others hot dip
galvanised.
ii) Electro-galvanised mild
steel suitable for at least
service condition-3 as per IS:
1573
26.2
Each equipment shall be supplied with the necessary terminals and
connectors, as required by the ultimate design for the particular installation.
The conductor termination of equipment shall be suitable for Triple/Twin/
single Zebra/ Twin Tarantulla Conductor with 330/250mm Sub Conductor
spacing. The requirement regarding external RIV as specified for any
equipment shall include its terminal fittings and the equipment shall be factory
tested with the connectors in position. If corona rings are required to meet
these requirements they shall be considered as part of that equipment and
included in the scope of work.
26.3
Where copper to aluminium connections are required, are required, bi-metallic
clamps shall be used, which shall be properly designed to ensure that any
deterioration of the connection is kept to a minimum and restricted to parts
which are not current carrying or subjected to stress. The design details of the
joint shall be furnished to the employer by the supplier.
26.4
Low voltage connectors, grounding connectors and accessories for grounding
all equipment as specified in each particular case, are also included in the
scope of work.
26.5
No current carrying part of any of any clamp shall be less than 12 mm thick. All
ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised. Copper alloy liner of minimum 2 mm
thickness shall be cast integral with aluminium body for Bi-metallic clamps.
26.6
Lateral load deflection test shall be carried out as an acceptance test. The test
procedure and accepted norms shall be mutually discussed and agreed to.
26.7
All casting shall be free blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All
sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
26.8
Clamp shall be designed to carry the same current as the conductor and the
temperature rise shall be equal or less than that of the conductor at the
21
specified with respect to the specified reference ambient temperature, shall
also be indelibly marked on each component of the clamp/connector, except
on the hardware.
26.9
All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have
minimum contact resistance.
26.10 Clamps and connectors shall be designed to be corona controlled. RIV level
for 220 kV/ 132 kV system shall not be more then 1000/ micro volts
respectively at the specified test voltage as per IS/NEMA.
26.11 TESTS
Clamps and connectors shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to
routine tests as per IS:5561.
27.
27.1
CONTROL CABINETS, JUNCTION BOXES, TERMINAL BOXES &
MARSHALLING BOXES FOR OUTDOOR EQUIPMENT
All type of boxes, cabinets etc. shall generally conform to & be tested in
accordance with IS-5039/IS-8623, IEC-439, as applicable, and the clauses
given below.
27.2
Control cabinet, junction boxes, Marshalling boxes & terminal boxes shall be
made of sheet steel or aluminium and shall be dust, water and vermin proof.
Sheet used shall be least 2.0 mm cold rolled or 2.5 mm hot rolled. The box
shall be properly braced to prevent wobbling. There shall be sufficient
reinforcement to provide level surfaces, resistance to vibrations and rigidity
during transportation and installation. In case of aluminum enclosed box the
thickness of aluminum shall be such that it provides adequate rigidity and long
life as comparable with sheet of specified thickness.
27.3
The enclosures of the control cabinets, junction boxes, terminal boxes
&marshalling boxes shall provide a degree of protection of not less than Ip 55
as per IS: 2147 . The bidder shall offer type tested (IP:55) Marshalling kiosk
and type test report for degree of protection test each type of box shall be
furnished for arrival. After protection degree test of marshalling kiosk, 2.0 kV
r.m.s for 1 (one) minute, insulation resistance and functional test should have
been conducted. In case these tests have not been carried out during IP55
test, then the contractor shall carry out the IP-55 test alongwith these tests, at
his cost.
Cabinet/boxes shall be free standing floor mounting type, wall mounting type
or pedestal mounting type as per requirements.
27.4
27.5
All door, removable covers and plates shall be gasketed all around with
suitably profiled EPDM gaskets. The gasket shall be tested in the presence of
Employers representative. The quality of gasket shall be such that it does not
get damaged/cracked during the years of the equipment or its major overhaul
whichever is earlier. All gasketed surfaces shall be smooth straight and
reinforced of necessary to minimize distortion and to make a tight seal.
22
27.6
Ventilating Louvers, if provided, shall have screen and filters. The screen shall
be fine wire mesh made of brass or GI wires.
All boxes/cabinets shall be designed for the entry of cables from bottom by
means of weather proof and dust-proof connection. Boxes and cabinet shall be
designed with generous clearances to avoid interference between the wiring
entering from below and any terminal blocks or accessories mounted within
the base of the marshalling kiosk/box shall be provided for this purpose along
with the proper blanking plates. Necessary number of cable glands shall be
supplied and fitted on this gland plate. The gland shall project at lest 25mm
above gland plate to prevent entry of moisture in cable crutch. Gland plate
shall have provision for some future glands to be provided later, if required.
The Nickel plated glands shall be dust proof, screw on & double compression
type and made of brass. The gland shall have provision for securing armour of
the cable separately and shall be provided with earthing tag. The glands shall
conform to BS:6121.
27.7
A 240V, single phase, 50Hz, 15 amp AC plug and socket shall be provided the
cabinet with ON-OFF switch for connection of hand lamps. Plug and socket
shall be of industrial grade.
27.8
For illumination of control cabinet a 20 Watts fluorescent tube or 15 Watts CFL
shall be provided.
27.9
All control switches shall be of rotary switch type and Toggle/piano switches
shall not be provided.
27.10 EARTHING
Positive earthing of the cabinet shall be ensured by providing two separate
earthing pads. The earth wire shall be terminated on to the earthing pad and
secured by the use of star of self etching washer. Earthing of hinged door shall
be done by using a separate earth wire.
27.11 TESTS
a)
b)
The marshalling kiosks shall be subject to routine tests as per 18:5039
The following routine tests shall also be conducted:
i)
Check for wiring
ii)
Visual and dimension check
Marshalling kiosks shall be provided with danger plate and a diagram showing
the numbering/connection/ferruling by pasting the same on the inside of the
door.
28.
AUXILIARY SWITCHES
The auxiliary switch shall confirm to the following type tests:
23
a)
Electrical endurance test -A minimum of 2000 operation for 2A DC with
a time constant examination of mV drop/visual defects/temperature rise
test.
b)
Mechanical endurance test. A minimum of operations as specified in the
relevant ISS with a subsequent checking of contact pressure tesUvisual
examination.
c)
Heat run test on contacts.
29.
TERMINAL BLOCKS AND WIRING
29.1
Control and instrument leads from the switchboards or from other equipment
will be brought to terminal boxes or control cabinets in conduits. All interphase and external connections to equipment or to control cubicles will be
made through terminal blocks.
29.2
Terminal blocks shall be 1100 v grade and have continuous rating to carry the
maximum expected current on the terminals. Those shall be of moulded piece
complete with insulated barriers stud type terminals, washers, nuts and lock
nuts. Screw clamp, overall insulated, insertion type, rail mounted terminals can
be used in place of stud type terminals. But preferably the terminal blocks shall
be non-disconnecting stud type equivalent to Elmex type CATM4, Phoenix
cage clamp type of Wedge or equivalent. The insulating material of terminal
block shall be nylon 6.6 which shall be free of halogens, fluorocarbons etc.
29.3
Terminal block for current transformer and voltage transformer secondary
leads shall be provided with test links and isolating facilities. The current
transformer secondary leads shall also be provided with short circuiting and
earthing facilities.
29.4
The terminal shall be that maximum contact area is achieved when a cable is
terminated. The terminal shall have a locking characteristic to prevent cable
from escaping from the terminal clamp unless it is done intentionally.
29.5
The conducting part in contact with cable shall preferably be tinned or silver
plated however Nickel plated copper or zinc plated steel shall also be
acceptable.
29.6
The terminal blocks shall be of extensible design.
29.7
The terminal blocks shall have locking arrangement to prevent its escape from
the mounting rails.
29.8
The terminal blocks shall be fully enclosed with removable covers of
transparent, non deteriorating type plastic material. Insulating barriers shall be
provided between the terminal blocks. These barriers shall not hinder the
operator from carrying out the wiring without removing the barriers.
24
29.9
Unless otherwise specified terminal blocks shall be suitable for connecting the
following conductors on each side.
a)
All circuits except CT
circuits
Minimum of 2.5
copper flexible
b)
All CT circuits copper
flexible.
Minimum of 4 sq.mm.
sq.mm
29.10 The arrangements shall be in such a manner so that it is possible to safely
connect or disconnect terminals on live circuits and replace fuse links when
the cabinet is live.
29.11 At least 20 % spare terminals shall be provided on each panel/cubicle/box and
these spare terminals shall be uniformly distributed on all terminals rows.
29.12 There shall be a minimum clearance of 250 mm between the First/bottom row
of terminal block and the associated cable gland plate. Also the clearance
between two rows of terminal blocks shall be a minimum of 150 mm.
29.13 The Supplier shall furnish all wire, conduits and terminals for the necessary
inter-phase electrical connection (where applicable) as well as between
phases and common terminal boxes or control cabinets. The wiring required in
these items shall be run in metallic ducts or shielded cables in order to avoid
surge over-voltage either transferred though the equipment or due to
transients induced from the EHV circuits.
29.14 All input and output terminals of each control cubicle shall be tested for surge
withstand capability and transverse modes. The supplier shall also provide all
necessary to achieve an impulse withstand level at the cable interfaces of the
cable interfaces of equipment.
30.
LAMPS AND SOCKETS
30.1
LAMPS
All incandescent lamps shall use a socket base as per IS-1258, except in the
case of signal lamps.
30.2
SOCKETS
All sockets (convenience outlets) shall be suitable to accept both 5 A &15 A
pin round Standard Indian plugs. They shall be switched sockets with shutters.
30.3
HAND LAMP
A 240 Volts, single phase, 50 Hz AC plug point shall be provided in the interior
of each cubicle with ON-OFF Switch for connection of hand lamps.
30.4
INTERIOR LIGHTING
25
Each panel shall be provided with a fluorescent lighting fixture of Standard
Indian type or compact fluorescent tube rates for 240 Volts, single phase, 50
Hz supply for the interior illumination of the panel during maintenance. The
Fitting shall be controlled by the respective panel door switch.
30.5
SWITCHES AND FUSES
30.5.1 Each control panel shall be provided with necessary arrangements for
receiving, distributing, isolating and fusing of DC and AC supplies for various
control, signaling, lighting and space heater circuits. The incoming and subcircuits shall be separately provided with switch fuse units. Selection of the
main and Sub-circuit fuse rating shall be such as to ensure selective clearance
of sub-circuit faults. Potential circuits for relaying and metering shall be
protected by fuses.
30.5.2 All fuses be of HRC cartridge type conforming to IS:9228 mounted on plug-in
type fuse bases. Miniature circuit breakers with thermal protection and alarm
contacts will also be accepted. AII'accessible live connection to fuse bases
shall be adequately shrouded. Fuses shall have operation indicators for
indicating blown fuse condition. Fuses carrier base shall have imprints of the
fuse rating and voltage.
31.
BUSHINGS, HOLLOW COLUMN INSULATORS, SUPPORT INSULATORS:
31.1
Bushing shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with IS:2099 &IEC:
137 while hollow column insulators shall manufactured and tested in
accordance with IEC 233/18 5621. The support insulators shall be
manufactured and tested as per IS 2544/1EC 168 and IEC 273. The Insulators
shall also conform to IEC 815 as applicable.
The bidder may also offer composite silicon insulator, conforming to IEC-11
09.
31.2
Support insulators, bushings and hollow column insulators shall be
manufactured from high quality porcelain. Porcelain used shall be
homogeneous, free from lamination, cavities and other flaws or imperfections
that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be thoroughly
vilified tough and impervious to moisture.
31.3
Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown in colour, free from blisters,
burrs and similar other defects.
31.4
Support insulators/bushings/hollow column insulators shall be designed to
have ample insulation ,mechanical and rigidity for the conditions under which
they will be used.
31.5
When operating at rated voltage there shall be no electric discharge between
the conductors and busing which would causes corrosion or injury to
conductors, insulators or supports by the formation of substances produced by
26
chemical action. No radio interference shall be caused
insulators/bushings when operating at the normal rated voltage.
by
the
31.6
Bushing porcelain shall be robust and capable of withstanding the internal
pressures likely to occur in service. The design and location of clamps and the
shape and the strength of the porcelain flange securing the bushing to the tank
shall be such that there is no risk of fracture. All portions of the assembled
porcelain enclosures and support other than gaskets, which may in any way
be exposed to the atmosphere shall be composed of completely non
hygroscopic material such as metal as metal or glazed porcelain.
31.7
All iron parts shall be hot dip galvanised and all joints shall be air tight. Surface
of joints shall be trued up porcelain parts by grinding and metal parts by
machining. Insulator/bushing design shall be such as to ensure a uniform
compressive pressure on the joints.
31.8
TESTS
Bushing hollow column insulators and support insulators shall conform to type
tests and shall be subjected to routine tests in accordance with IS:2099 & IS:
2544.
31.9
Technical parameters of bushing/Hollow column insulators/support
insulators:
220 kV 132 kV 66 kV 33 kV
System System System System
32.
a)
Rates Volatge (kV)
b)
245
145
72.5
36
Inpulse withstand voltage (dry 1050
and wet) (kVp)
650
325
170
c)
Power frequency with stand 460
volatge (dry and wet (kV) (rms))
275
140
80
d)
Total creepage distance (mm)
----------------25 mm per KV---------------
e)
Pollution
Class – III heavy (as per IEC 71) and
as specified in section 2 for all class of
equipment.
f)
Insulator shall also meet requirement of and IEC-815 as applicable
having alternate long and short sheds.
MOTORS
Motors shall be "Squirrel Cage" three phase induction motors of sufficient size
capable of satisfactory operation for the application and duty as required for
the driven equipment and conform to type tests and shall be subjected to
27
routine tests as per applicable standards. The motors shall be of approved
make.
32.1
ENCLOSURES
a)
Motor to be installed outdoor without enclosure shall have hose proof
enclosure equivalent to IP 55 as per IS:4691. For motors to be installed
indoor Le, inside a box, the motor enclosure, shall be dust proof
equivalent to IP 44 as per IS: 4691.
b)
Two independent earthing points shall be provided on opposite sides of
the motor for bolted connection of earthing conductor.
c)
Motors shall have drain plugs so located that they will drain water
resulting from condensation or other causes from all pockets in the
motor casing.
d)
Motor weighing more than 25 kg. shall be provided with eyebolts, lugs
or other means to facilitate lifting.
33.
RATING PLATES, NAME PLATES AND LABELS
a)
Each main and auxiliary item of equipment is to have permanently
attached to it in a conspicuous position a rating plate of non-corrosive
material upon which is to be engraved manufacturer's name, year of
manufacture, equipment, type or serial number together with details of
loading conditions under which the item of equipment in question has
been designed to opera'te and such diagram plates as may be required
by the Employer. The rating plate shall conform to lEG requirement.
b)
All such name plates, instruction plates rating plates etc. shall be in
bilingual with Hindi inscription first followed by English. Alternatively,
two separate plates one with Hindi & the other with English inscription
may be provided.
28
RADIO INTERFERENCE VOLTAGE (RIV) TEST
1.
GENERAL
Unless otherwise stipulated, all equipment together with its associated
connectors, Where applicable, shall be tested for measurement of radio
interference voltage (RIV).
2.
TEST LEVELS
The test voltage levels for measurement of external RIV are listed under the
relevant clauses of the specification.
3.
TEST METHOD FOR RIV
3.1
RIV tests shall levels for according to measuring as per International SpecialCommittee on ratio Interference (CISPR)Publication 16-1 (1993) Part-1. The
measuring circuit shall preferably be tuned to frequency with 10 % of 0.5 MHz
but other frequency being recorded. The results shall be in microvolts.
3.2
Alternatively, RIV tests shall be in accordance with NEMA standard Publication
No.107-1964, except otherwise noted herein.
3.3
In measurement, RIV, temporary additional external shielding may be
provided. In measurements of RIV only standard fitting of identical type
supplied with the equipment and a simulation of the connections as used in the
actual installation will be permitted in the vicinity within 3.5 meters of terminals.
3.4
Ambient noise shall be measured before and after each series of tests to
ensure that there is no ambient noise level. If variation is present, the lowest
ambient noise level will form basis for the measurements. RIV levels shall be
measured at increasing voltages 85%, 100%, 115% and 130% of the specified
RIV test voltage for all equipment unless otherwise specified.
3.5
The metering instruments shall be as per CISPR recommendation or
equivalent device so long as it has been used by other testing authorities.
29
LIST OF STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL STANDARDS
INDIAN ELECTRICITY RULES
IS-5
Colors for Ready Mixed Paints and Enamels
IS-335
Insulating Oil for Transformers and 8witchgear
IS-375
Marketing and Arrangement for Bus-bars, Main Connection &
Auxiliary Winding
IS-617
Aluminium and Aluminium alloy & Ingots and Castings for General
Engineering Purposes
IS-1448
Methods of Test for Petroleum and its Products.
IS-2071
Measuring Devices
IS-2147
Degree of Protection Provided by Enclosures of for Low voltage
switch gear and control Gear
IS-2165
Phase-to-Phase Insulation Co-ordination, Principles and Rules
IS-2362
Determination of Water by the Karl fisher Method
IS-3043
Codes of practice for earning
IS-3202
Code of Practice for climate proofing of electrical equipment
IS-3637
Gas Operated Relays
IS-6103
Methods of Test for specific resistance (Resistivity) of Electrical
Insulating Liquids
IS-6104
Method of Test for Interfacial Tension of Oil against Water by the
Ring Method.
IS-6262
Method for Determination of Electric strength of insulating liquids.
IS-6792
Method for Radio interference Tests on High Voltage Insulators
IEC-214
On-Load Tap-Changers
IEC-289
Reactors
IEC-354
Loading Guide for Oil Immersed power transformers.
IEC-551
Determination of Transformer and reactor Sound levels
30
ANSI-C57, 12, 80
General requirements for Distribution, Power and Regulating
Transformers.
ANSI-C57, 12, 90
Test Code for Distribution, Power and Regulation Transformers.
ANSI-C57, 16
Terminology & Test Code for current limiting Reactors.
ANSI-C57,21
Requirements Terminology and Test Code for Shunt Reactors
Rates over 500 KVA.
ANSI-C57, 92
Guide for loading Oil-Immersed Power Transformer upto and
including 100 MVA with 55oC or 65oC Winding Rise
ANSI-CG, IEEE-4
Standard Techniques for high Voltage Testing
NEMA-TR-1
Transformers, Regulators and Reactors
IS-4379
Identification of the Contents of Industrial Gas Cylinders
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
IEC-56
High Voltage Alternating Currenrt Circuit Breakers IS 13118
IEC-427
Synthetic Testing of high voltage alternating current circuit
breakers
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS, VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS AND COUPLING
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
IS-2705
Current Transformers
IS-3156
Voltage Transformers
IS-7311
Coupling capacitor and capacitor divider
IEC-185
Current transformers
IEC-186A
Voltage Transformers
IEC-186B
Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers
IEC-44
Instrument Transformers measurement of Partial discharges
IEC-481
Requirements for instrument transformers
ANSI-C93.1
Requirements for power line carrier coupling capacitor
BUSHING
31
IS-2099
Bushing for alternating Voltages above 1000V
IEC-137
Insulated Bushings for Alternating voltages above 1000 V
SURGE ARRESTERS
IS-3070
Lightning arrestors for alteranting current systems: Metal (part-3) oxide
lightning arrestors without gaps.
IEC 99-4
Metal oxide urge arresters without gaps
CUBICLES AND PANELS & OTHER RELATED EQUIPMENTS
IS:722
AC Electricity Meters (P1 to P9)
IS 1248
Direct acting indicating anaogne electrical measuring instruments
their accessories.
IS-722, IS-1248,
IS-3231, 3231
(PO-3) Electrical relays for power system protection.
IEC-68.2.2
Basic environmental testing proceduresPart 2: Test B: Dry heat
IEC-529
Degree of Protection provided by enclosures
IEC-158
Low Voltage control gear, contractors
IEC-439
Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
ANSI-C37.20
Switchgear assemblies, incluidng metal enclosed bus.
ANSI-C37.50
Test Procedures for low voltage alternating current power circuit
breakers
ANSI-C39
Electric Measuring instrument.
ANSI-C83
Components for electric equipment
IS:8623
Specification for sugar NEMA-AB-Molded Case circuit and systems
LT SWITCHGEAR
IS:8623
Specification for factory built assemblies of Switchgear & Control gear for
voltages upto and including 1000 V AC/ 1200V DC
IS:4237
General requirements for switchgear and control gear for ves not
exceeding 1000 V.
IS-2147
Degree of protection provided by enclosuers for low voltage switchgear
and control gear.
32
IS:3202
Conde of practice for climate proofing of electrical equipment.
IS:3072
Code of practice for installation and maintenance of switchgear
IS:8544
AC motor starters of voltage not exceeding 1000 Volts
IS:4064
Air-break switches, air break dis-connctorsm air break dis-connectors
and fuse combination unit for voltages not exceeding 1000V AC or
1200V DC.
IS:3231
Electrical relays for power system protection.
IS:1248
Electricity indicating instruments
IS:722
AC Electricty meters.
IS:375
Marking and arrangements of bus bars.
IS:9224
HRC Cartridge fuses (Part II)
IS:6875
Switches and push-buttons
IS:6005
Code of practice of phosphating iron and steel
IS:5082
Wrought Aluminium and Aluminium alloys for elctrical purposes.
DISCONNECTING SWITCHES
IEC-129
Alternating Current Dis-connectors (Isolators) and Earthing switches
IS-9921
Isolators
IEC-265
High voltage switches
ANSI-C37.32
Schedule of prefered Ratings, manufacturing specification and
application guide of high voltage air swicthes, bus supports and
switch accessories.
ANSI-C37.34
Test code for high voltage air switches
NEMA-SG6
Power switching equipment.
PROTECTION AND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
IEC-51
Recommendations for Direct acting indicating analogue electrical
measuring instruments and their accessories.
IEC-255
Electrical relays
33
IEC-297
Dimensions of mechanical structures of the 482.6mm (19 inches) series.
IEC-359
Expression of the performance of electrical & electronic measuring
equipment.
IEC-387
Symbols for Alternating-Current Electricity meters
IEC-447
Man machibne interface/ MM-Alternating principles
IEC-521
Class 0.5, 1 and 2 alternating current wall hour meters
IEC-547
Modular plug-in unit and standard 19-inch rack mounting unit based on
NIM standard (for electronic nuclear instruments)
ANSI-81
Screw threads.
ANSI-B18
Bolts and Nuts
ANSI-C37.1
ANSI-C37.2
Relays, Station controls etc.
Manual and automatic station control, supervisory and associated
telemetering equipment.
ANSI-C37.2
Relays and relay system associated with electric power apparatus.
ANSI-C39.1
Requirements for electrical analog indicating instrumnets.
MOTORS
IS-325
IS-4691
Three phase induction motors
Degree of protection provided by enclsoure for rotating
electrical machinery
IEC-34
Rotating electrical machines
IEC-68 (P1 to P5)
Environmental testing
IEC-326 (P1 to P2)
Printed boards.
MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS
IS-1363
Hexagon headbolts, screws and nuts of product grade C.
IS-1364
Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of products grades A and B
IS-3138
Hexagonal Bolts and nuts (M42 to M150)
IS-898
Fasteners: Bolts, screws and studs
34
CLAMPS AND CONNECTORS
IS:2121
Fitting for aluminium and steel cored aluminium conductors for
overhead power lines.
IS:731
Porcelain insulators for overheadpower line with a nominal voltage
than 1000 V
IS:2486
Insulator fitting for overhead power lines with a nominal voltage
greater than 1000 V
IEC-120
Dimensions of Ball and socket couplings of string insulator units.
IEC-137
Insulated turning for alternating voltages above 1000 V.
IEC-168
Tests on indoor and outdoor post insulators of glass for system with
nominal voltages greater than 1000 V.
IEC-233
Tests on Hollow insulators for use in electrical equipment.
IEC-273
Characteristics of indoor and outdoor post insulators for systems with
nominal voltage greater than 1000 V.
IEC-305
Insulators for overhead lines with nominal volt above 1000 V-ceramic
or glass mull units for AC system characteristics of string insulator
units of the cap and pin type.
IEC-372
Locking devices for ball and socket couplings of string insulator units
dimensions and tests
IEC-383
Insulators for overhead lines with a nominal voltage above 1000 V.
IEC-433
Characteristics of string insulator units of the long rod type.
IEC-471
Dimensions of Clevis and tongue coupling of string insulator units
ANSI-C29
Wet Process procelain insulators
ANSI-C29.1
Test Methods for electrical power insulators
ANSI-C29.2
For insulators, wet-process procelain and toughened glass suspension
type.
ANSI-C29.8
For wet-process porcelain insulators apparatus, post-type.
ANSI-G.8
Iron and steel hardware
ASTM A-153
Zinc Coatring (Hot-Dip) on iron and steel hardware
35
STRAIN AND RIGID BUS-CONDUCTOR
IS-2678
Dimensions & tolerances for wrought aluminium and aluminium
alloys.
IS-5082
Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars, Roads, tubes and
sections for electrical purposes.
ASTM-B 230-82
Aluminium 1350 H19 Wire for eletrical purposes
ASTM-B 221-81
Concentric – lay – stranded, aluminium 1350 conductors
ASTM-B 221
Aluminium – Alloy extruded bard, road, wire shape.
ASTM-B 236-83
Aluminium bars for electrical purpose (Bus-bars)
ASTM-B 317-83
Aluminium – Alloy extruded bar, rod, pipe and structural shapes for
electrical purposes (Bus Conductors)
BATTERY CHARGERS
IS:3895
Mono-Crystaline Semiconductor Rectifier Cells and stacks
IS:4540
Mono-crystalline semiconductor rectifier assemblies and equipment
IS:6619
Safety code for semiconductor rectifier equipment.
IS:2026
Power Transformer
IS:2959
AC Contractors for voltage not exceeding 1000 Volts
IS:1248
Indicating Instruments
IS:2208
HRC Fuses
IS:4064
Air break switches, air break disconnectors & fuse combination
units for voltage not exceeding 1000V Ac or 1200V DC.
IS:2147
Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage
switchgear and controlgear.
IS:6005
Code of practice for phosphating of Iron and steel.
IS:3231
Electrical relays for power system protection
IS:3842
Electrical relay for AC systems.
IS:5
Colors for ready mix paints.
36
BATTERY
IS:1651
Stationary Cella and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type (with Tubular
Positive Plates).
IS:1652
Stationary Cella and Batteries, Lead-Acid Type (with Plant Positive
Plates).
IS:1146
Rubber and plastic containers for Lead-Acid Batteries
IS:6071
Synthetic separators for Lead-Acid batteries.
IS:266
Specification for Sulphuric Acid.
IS:1069
Specification of water for storage batteries
IS:3116
Specification for sealing compound for lead-acid batteries
IS:1248
Indicating Instruments
WIRE AND CABLES
IS-694
PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto and including 1100
Volts.
IS-1255
Code of practice for installation and maintenance of power cables
upto and including 33 kV rating.
IS-1554
PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables (part 1) for working
voltage upto and including 1100 V Part (2) for working voltage from
3.3 upto including 11 kV.
IS-1753
Aluminium conductors for insulated cables
IS-2982
Copper conductors in insulated cables and cords.
IS-3961
Recommended current rating for cables.
IS-3975
Mild steel wires, formed wires and tapes for armouring of cables
IS-5831
PVC insulated and sheath of electric cables
IS-6380
Elastomeric insulating and sheath of electric cables.
IS-7098
Cross linked polythylene insulated PVC sheathed cables for
working voltage upto and including 1100 volts.
Part (2) Cross-linked polythyle insulated PVC sheathed cables for
working voltage from 3.3 kV upto and including 33 kV.
37
IS-8130
Conductors for insulated electrical cables and flexible cords.
IS-10418
Specification for drums for electrical cables.
IEC-96
Radio Frequency cables
IEC-183
Guide to the selection of High Voltage Cables.
IEC-189
Low frequency cables and wires with PVC insulation and PVC
Sheath
IEC-227
Polyvinyl Chloride insulated cables of rated voltages upto and
including 450/750 V.
IEC-228
Conductors of insulated cables.
IEC-230
Implulse tests on cables and their accessories.
IEC-287
Calculation of the continuous current rating of cables (100% load
factor).
IEC-304
Standard colors for insulation for low frequency cables and wires.
IEC-331
Fire resisting characteristics of Electric cables.IEC-332
IEC-332
Tests on electric cables under fire conditions
IEC-502
Extruded solid dielectric insulated power cable for rates voltages
from 1 kV upto 30 kV.
IEC-754
Tests on gases evolved during combustion of eledtric cables.
NEMA-WC1
Asbestos and asbestos-varnished cloth and asbestosthermoplastic insulated wire and cable
NEMA-WC2
Steel armour and associated covering for impregnated paper
insulated cables
NEMA-WC3
Rubber insulated wire and cable for transmission and distribution of
electrical energy.
NEMA-WC5
Thermoplastic insulated wire and cable for the transmission and
distribution of electric energy.
NEMA-WC7
Cross linked thermo setting polyethylene insulated wire and cable
for the transmission and distribution of electrical energy.
NEMA-WC8
Ethylene-propylene-rubber insulated wire and cable for the
transmission and distribution of electrical energy.
38
NEMA-W67
Cross linked thermo setting polyethyle
IS-659
Safety code for air conditioning
IS-1391
Room air conditioners.
IS-6272
Industrial cooling fans.
GALVANIZING
IS-209
Zinc Ingot.
IS-2629
Recommended practice for Hot-Dip galvanizing on iron and steel.
IS-2629
Methods for testing uniformity of coating of zinc coating articles.
ASTM-a-123
Specification for zinc (Hot galvanizing) coatings on prodicts
fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates,
bars and strips.
ASTM-A-153
Speciufication for Zinc coating (Hot Dip) on iron and steel hardware
ASTM-A-239
Test method for locating the thinnest. Spot in a Zinc (galvanised)
coating on iron and steel articles by the preece test (Copper
sulfated dip).
FIRE PROTECTION
IS-554
Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are
required on the threads.
IS-638
Sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion jointing.
IS-778
Copper alloy gate, globe and check values for water works
purposes.
IS-780
Sluice valves for water-works purposes(50 to 300 mm size)
IS-1536
Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water gas and
sewage.
IS-1538(1993)
IS-1703(1989)
Cast iron fitting for pressure pipes for water gas and sewage.
Copper aloy bar values (horizontal plunger type) for water supply
fittings.
Colour code for identification of pipe lines.
Dimensions for pipe threads for fastening purposes.
IS-2379(1990)
IS-2643 (P1 to
P3 : 1990)
IS-2685(1992)
Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of
sluice valves.
39
IS-2906(1990)
Specification for sluice valves for water works purposes (350 to
1200 mm size)
IS-3589(1991)
Seamers or eclectically welded steel pipes for water, gas and
sewage (168.3 to 2032 mm outside diameter).
IS-4038(1990)
Foot valves for water works purposes
IS-4927(1991)
Unlined flax canvas hose for fire fighting.
IS-5321-(P1 and
P2 1991) -
Swing check type reflux (non-return) valves
13095 (1991)
Butterfly valves for general purposes
STEEL STRUCTURES
IS-228
Method of chemical analysis of pig iron, cast iron and plain carbon
and low alloy steels.
IS-802
Code of practice for use of structural steel in overhead
transmission line towers.
IS-806
Code of practice for use of steel tubes in general building
construction.
IS-808
Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam column channel and angle
sections.
IS-814
Covered electrodes for manual arc welding of carbon manganese
steel
IS-816
Code of practice for use of metal arc welding for general
construction in mild steel.
IS-817
Code of practice for training and testing of metal arc welders. Part
1 : Manual metal arc welding
IS-875
Code of practice for design loads (other than earthquake) for
buildings and structures.
IS-1161
Steel tube for structural purposes.
IS-1182
Recommended practice for radiographic examination of fusion
welded but joints in steel plates.
IS-1363
Hexagonal head bolts, screws and nuts of products grade C.
IS-1364
Hexagon head bolts, screw & nuts of products grade A and B.
40
IS-1367
Technical supply condition for threaded steel fasteners
IS-1599
Method for bend test.
IS-1608
Method for tensile testing of steel products.
IS-1893
Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures
IS-1978
Line pipe
IS-2062
Steel for general structural purposes
IS-2595
Code of practice for Radiographic testing
IS-3063
Single built rectangular section spring washers for bolts, nuts and
screws.
IS-3664
Code of practice for ultra sonic pulse echo testing by contact and
immersion methods.
IS-7205
Safety code for erection of structural steel work.
IS-9595
Recommendations for metal arc welding of iron and carbon
managese steels.
ANSI-B18.2.1
Inch series square and Hexagonal bolts and screws.
ANSI-B18.2.2
Square and hexagonal nuts
ANSI-G8.14
Round head bolts
OTHER CIVIL WORKS STANDARDS
IS-269
33 grade ordinary portland cement
IS-2721
Galvanized steel chain link fence fabric.
IS-278
Galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing
IS-383
Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete.
IS-432
Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-dawn steel wire
for concrete reinforcement
IS-456
Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
IS-516
Method of test for strngth of concrete
IS-800
Code of practice for general construction in steel
41
IS-806
Steel tubes for structural purposes
IS-1172
Basic requirements for water supply, drainage and sanitation
IS-1199
Method of sampling and analysis of concrete
IS-1566
Hard-dawn steel wire fabricated concrete reinforcement
IS-1742
Building drainage
IS-1785
Plain hard-drawn steel wire for pre stressed concrete
IS-1786
High strength deformed and wires for concrete reinforcement
IS-1811
Method of sampling Foundry sands.
IS-1893
Criteria for earthquake resistant design of structures.
IS-2062
Steel for general structural purposes
IS-2065
Code of practice for water supply in buildings
IS-2090
High tension steel bars used in prestressed concrete
IS-2140
Standard galvanised steel wire for fencing
IS-2470
Code of practice for installation of septic tanks
IS-2514
Concrete vibrating tables
IS-2645
Integral cement waterproofing compounds
IS-3025
Method of sampling and test physical chemical for water waste
water.
IS-4091
Code of practice for design and construction of foundations for
transmission line tower and poles
IS-4111
Code of practice for ancillary structure in sewerage system
IS-4990
Plywood for concrete shuttering work
IS-5600
Seweage and drainage pimps
42
SECTION-3
CHAPTER-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
25/31.5 MVA, 66/11 kV POWER TRANSFORMERS
1.0
SCOPE:
a) This specification covers the Design, Engineering, manufacture, testing, supply on CIP basis,
transportation to site, insurance, storage, testing of 31.5 MVA 66/11 kV Power Transformers.
b) All drawings, schedules and annexures appended to this specification shall form part of the
specification and supplement the requirements specified. The equipment/materials offered by
the bidder shall be complete in all respects and whether called for specifically or not, all
accessories, hardware and services required for normal satisfactory operation of the system
shall be deemed to be included in unit rates quoted. Design and manufacture shall also be
such that equipment/accessories of the same type and rating would be interchangeable.
2.0
Specific reference in this specification and documents to any material by trade name, make
or catalogue number shall be construed as establishing standard of quality and performance
and not as limiting competition. All equipment/accessories offered shall also be of proven
design and manufacture. The make of all accessories and hardware shall be subject to
purchaser’s approval.
Codes & Standards :
All standards, specifications and codes of practice referred to herein shall be the latest
editions including all applicable official amendments and revisions as on date of opening of
bid. The following standard and codes shall be applicable:
IS : 5
Colour for ready mix paints.
IS : 325
Three phase induction motors
IS : 335
New insulating oils for transformer.
BS:148/IEC:296
IS : 375
Marking & arrangement of switch-gear bus bars main
connections and auxiliary wiring.
IS : 1866
Code of practice for maintenance of insulation oil.
IS : 2026 & IEC : 76
Specification Power transformers
IS : 2099 & 3347
Bushing for alternative voltages above 1000 volts
IS : 2147
Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage
switchgear and control gear
IS : 2705
Current transformer
IS : 3637
Gas operated relay.
IS : 3639
Fittings and accessories for Power Transformers
IS : 6600 & IEC : 354
Guide for loading of oil immersed transformers
IS : 8468 & IEC : 214
On load tap changer.
IS : 5561
Electric power connectors
IS : 617
Aluminium Alloy grade.
IS : 2629
Recommended practice for hot dip galvanising
IS : 8478
On load tap changer application guide.
IS : 8603
Dimensions for porcelain transformer bushings for use in heavily
polluted atmosphere (36 kV Class) Dimensions for oil filled
porcelain transformer bushings for use in medium polluted
atmosphere.
IS : 9434
Guide for sampling and analysis of free and dissolved gas in oil
filled equipment.
IS : 10028
Code of practice for selection, installation and maintenance of
transformers
IS : 12676
Dimensions for OIP insulated condenser bushings
CBIP
Manual on transformer
3.0
4.0
4.1
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
4.2.8
4.2.9
Equipment complying with other internationally accepted standard will also be considered if
these ensure performance and constructional features equivalent or superior to standard
listed above. In such a case, the bidder shall clearly indicate the standards adopted, furnish a
copy in English of the latest revision of standard alongwith copies of all official amendments
and revisions in force as on date of opening of bid and clearly bring out the salient features
for comparison.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :
The transformers are required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions:
3.1
Max. Temperature
500 C
3.2
Min. Temperature
- 2.50 C
3.3
Max. Relative Humidity
100%
3.4
Min. Relative Humidity
26%
3.5
Average number of rainy days per annum
nearly 120 days
3.6
Average annual rainfall
900 m
3.7
Average number of dust storm days per annum
35
3.8
Isoceraunic level
45
3.9
Max. wind pressure
195-kg-sq.m
3.10
Altitude above mean sea level
Less than 1000 m.
TYPE AND RATING
The transformer shall be of two winding 3-phase oil immersed core type with ONAN/ONAF
cooling suitable for outdoor service as step down transformers.
These transformers shall not be provided with the tertiary delta winding.
The ratings and other characteristics which are not covered elsewhere shall be, as detailed in
following clauses :
Max. continuous capacity :
a)
ONAN
25 MVA
b)
ONAF
31.5 MVA
Number of phases
3
Frequency
50 Hz
s(± 5%)
Rated Voltage :
a)
HV side.
66 kV
b)
LV side.
11 kV
Connections :
a)
HV side.
Star
b)
LV side.
Star
Vector group
YYO
%age Impedance
10% at 31.5 MVA base
ON load taps on HV side.
a)
Insulation level
i)
Impulse withstand test voltage.
ii)
Power frequency withstand voltage.
b)
Insulation level of Bushings.
Impulse voltage.
Power frequency voltage.
4.2.10 Creepage Distance :
a)
Total
5.0
5.1
+5% to –15% in steps of 1.25% each
66 kV
11 kV
325 kV (P)
95 kV (P)
140 kV
38 kV
(rms)
(rms)
325 kV(P)
140 kV
(rms)
95 kV(P)
38 kV
(rms)
25 mm per kV corresponding to
highest system voltage i.e.72.5 kV
50% of the total creepage distance
b)
Protected
GENERAL DESIGN OF TRANSFORMER :
The transformer and accessories shall be so designed as to facilitate inspection cleaning and
repairs. The requirement of Indian Electricity Rules shall be kept in view.
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
5.17
5.18
5.19
The design shall ensure satisfactory operation under severe working conditions due to
fluctuating load of steel furnaces and voltage variations in the system including those due to
short circuits. The transformers shall be designed so as to minimize the risk of accidental
short circuits caused by animals, birds or vermins.
The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all
those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the equipment keeping in view the
requirements of Indian Electricity Rules.
All material used shall be of the best quality and of class most suitable for working under
specified conditions and shall withstand the atmospheric conditions and temperature
variations without undue deterioration or distortion or setting up of undue stress in any part
thereof.
Cast iron shall not be used for any parts other than the large valve bodies.
Corresponding parts liable to be replaced shall be interchangeable.
All taper pins to be used in the mechanism shall be split type as per latest edition of IS :
2393.
All mechanism should be rust and corrosion proof. Means shall be provided for lubrications of
moving parts not immersed in oil.
The construction shall be such as to avoid air or water pockets. Special care shall be
exercised to reduce noise and vibration to the minimum level.
Steel bolts of suitable finish will be used for diameters above 6 mm brass bolts or studs used
for electrical connections shall not be of less than 6 mm diameter. On outdoor equipment, all
bolts, nuts and washers in contact with current carrying non-ferrous parts shall be phosphor
bronze.
All nuts, bolts and pins shall be locked except those, which are external to the transformer. If
bolts and nuts are so placed as to be inaccessible by means of ordinary spanners, suitable
special spanners shall be provided by the supplier.
Labels shall be provided for all apparatus like relays, switches, fuses etc. housed in any
cubicle or marshalling kiosks. These shall be of in corrodible material with matt/satin finish
and permanent lettering. Labels mounted on black surface shall have white letters and
danger notices shall have red lettering on a white background. The labels shall be secured
by means of brass screws or rust protected steel screws.
Surface in contact with oil shall not be galvanized or cadmium plated.
Before painting, all un-galvanized parts shall be cleaned, made free from rust, scale and
grease and external wrought surfaces smoothened (filled with metal deposition). The interior
of the tank and other oil filled chambers shall be cleaned by shot blasting or any other
suitable method.
All external surfaces shall be given three coats of paints except for nuts, bolts and washers
which may be given one coat after assembly transformer at works. The final coat shall be
glossy oil and weather proof, non fading paint of shade 631 of IS : 5.
The interior of mechanism chambers and kiosks shall be given 3 coats of paint, the final coat
being of a light colored anti-condensation mixture.
The outer most radial spacers of the winding shall be locked in position by means of vertical
strips so that the same cannot fall off/got displaced.
Proper & complete tightening of the nuts of the coil clamping bolts must be ensured by the
manufacturers. The nuts of all the coil clamping bolts will be tightened to designed value and
the job be carried out with torque spanners.
The devices used for locking the nuts of coil clamping bolts must be of such a quality and
such care should be taken first in tightening the nuts and next in locking them in position so
that the arrangement does not become loose due to stresses caused by short circuits and
fluctuating loads etc.
The noise level shall not be more than 5 dB above NEMA standard publication TR:1.
The transformers shall be designed to have short circuit rating of five seconds as per IS:2026.
6.0
7.0
7.1
7.2
7.3
8.0
9.0
10.0
10.1
10.2
10.3
[
10.4(a)
INSULATING OIL :
Sufficient insulating oil of Napthenic type (made from Naphthenic crude) in which paraffinic
content should be less than 50% and aromatic content 4 to 12% conforming to BS:
148/IEC:296 class-1 shall be supplied for first filling of each transformer. Particular attention
shall be paid to deliver the oil at site free from moisture and of uniform quality through out in
non-returnable steels drums. The quantity of oil for first filling of each transformer shall be
stated in tender along-with trade mark of the oil to be supplied. Use of inhibitors in oil shall
not be resorted to. 10% extra oil of the total quantity of oil shall be supplied along with the
transformer.
LIMIT OF TEMPERATURE RISE
With the above climatic conditions, given in clause-3 each transformer shall be capable of
operating continuously on any tap at their normal rating without exceeding following
temperature rises :
i)
350 C in oil by thermometer.
ii)
450 C in winding by resistance.
iii)
Winding gradient i.e. the difference between average winding and average oil
temperature not to exceed 130 C.
iv)
Temperature of hot spot in winding not to exceed 950C when calculated over max.
Annual weighted average temperature of 400 C
The limits of temperature rise mentioned above will have to be satisfied by the manufacturer
by carrying out the heat run test at the lowest negative tap. This test shall be carried out by
feeding 1.1 times the total losses at 750 C at highest current tap.
OVERLOAD CAPACITY & CONTINUOUS RATING.
The safe over load capacity of the transformer and the duration of overload under maximum
temperature conditions without any damage to the winding or harmful effects on the
insulation shall be clearly stated in the tender which must be as per IEC-354/IS:6600, guide
for loading of oil immersed transformer.
IMPEDANCE:
The transformer shall have 10% impedance on 31.5 MVA base with tolerance as per
IS:2026/Part-1 (1983). Impedance shall include positive and zero sequence and shall be
expressed in terms of the branches of the star connected equivalent diagram, all on the
same kVA base and range shall be given for each branch of the equivalent circuit in turn.
The percentage impedance on normal tap should be 10% and on extreme taps i.e at tap
No.1 it should be 10.3% and on tap No.17 it should be 9.5%. Percentage tolerance allowed
at extreme tap be as applicable to normal tap.
FREQUENCY:
The transformer shall be suitable for continuous operation with a +/-5% frequency variation
from a normal of 50 Hz without exceeding the temperature rise as specified in Clause 7.1
above.
FLUX DENSITY, CORE CONSTRUCTION AND INSPECTION
The transformer should be so designed that the working flux density should not exceed 1.57
Tesla at normal voltage, frequency.
Tenders with higher flux density than specified limit shall not be considered.
The core shall be built up with thin laminations of high grade. non-ageing, low loss, high
permeability cold rolled super grain oriented silicon steel. Known as MOH High B Grade or
superior grade CRGO steels of maximum 0.27 mm or low lamination thickness especially
suitable for transformer core.
(i)Bidder should have in house core cutting facility for proper monitoring & control on quality
and also to avoid any possibility of mixing of prime material with defective/second grade
material. The purchaser may witness the core-cutting operation. In case the in house core
cutting facility for core cutting is not available then the same shall be carried out in the
presence of the representative of HVPN.
(ii)Inspection call notice for the purpose should be accompanied with the following documents
as applicable as a proof toward use of Prime core materials :a) Invoice of supplier.
b) Mills test certificates.
c) Packing list.
d) Bill of loading.
e) Bill of entry certificates by customs.
Core material shall be directly procured either from the manufacturer or through their
accredited marketing organisation of repute and not through any agent.
10.4(b)After being sheared, the laminations shall be treated to remove all burrs. They shall be
coated with a baked enamel insulation coating. The insulation shall be inert to the action of
hot transformer oil and shall be perfectly adhesive. Paper and varnish insulation shall not be
accepted. Particulars of proposed insulation shall be stated in the tender. Laminations shall
be checked for burrs during stage inspection.
10.5
10.6
10.7
10.8
The core shall be rigidly clamped and/or bolted to ensure adequate mechanical strength and
to prevent vibrations during operation. The bolts used in the assembly of the core shall be
suitably insulated and the clamping structure shall be constructed that the eddy currents will
be minimum.
Construction of the core shall be such that number of steps in the limb and yoke shall be
matching and dimensionally identical to minimize the effect of cross fluxing and better
mechanical strength.
The core shall be provided with Lugs suitable for lifting the complete core and coil assembly
of transformer. The Core & coil shall be fixed in the tank such that its shifting will not occur
when the transformer in moved or when a short circuit occurs.
The design of magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharge development of
short circuit paths within itself or to the earthing clamping structure and the production of flux
components at right angles to the plane of the lamination which may cause local heating.
10.9
Every care shall be exercised in the selection treatment and handling of core steel to ensure
that the laminations are flat and that finally assembled core is free from distortions.
10.10 The supporting frame work of the core shall be so designed as to avoid the presence of
pockets which would prevent complete emptying of the tank through the drain valve or cause
trapping of air during filling.
10.11 Oil ducts where necessary should be formed across the plane of the lamination and be given
a suitable slope to assist oil circulation. The overall design of core and winding should be
such that free flow of oil is not obstructed.
10.12 The frame work and clamping arrangement shall be earthed by connecting to the tank body
through a copper strip. Yoke bolt area should be compensated if bolts are used for fastening
of the core.
10.13 The insulation of core to bolts and core to clamp plates shall be able to withstand a voltage of
2 KV RMS for one minute.
10.14 Core and windings shall be capable of withstanding shocks during transport, installation,
service and adequate provision shall be made to prevent movement of core and winding
relative to tank during these conditions.
10.15 All steel sections used for supporting the core shall be thoroughly sand blasted after cutting
drilling and welding.
10.16 All the CRGO vendors having BIS certification and approval from PGCIL shall be considered.
10.17 The tenderers should indicate the maximum flux density allowable continuously as well as for
time intervals of 1 minute and 5 secs. and the limit of flux density at which core material used
by them saturates.
10.18 The name of the core material must be mentioned in the tender. The successful tenderer
shall be required to furnish magnetization curves of the core material/design calculations and
such other data/documents deemed fit by the Purchaser for being satisfied that flux density is
as desired.
10.19 Purchaser shall inspect the built-up core for verification of flux density for which all facilities
shall be provided. The purchaser shall inspect/test the core material for various tests as per
relevant IEC/IS to ensure quality. Core may also be inspected during horizontal assembly,
built-up assembly.
NOTES :
i) The above flux density has been specified to meet with the over fluxing of the core due to
temporary over voltage of the order of 31% for l min, 44%for 5 sec. that may appear
abnormal conditions such as those following sudden loss of large loads.
ii) Yoke bolt area and flitch plate areas shall not be counted in the net core area if these are
provided for fastening core.
iii) The design of limb and yoke shall be so co-ordinate that there is no cross fluxing at the
joints.
iv) The tenderer shall ensure that the CRGO supplier should have BIS certification.
11.0 SUPPRESSION OF HARMONICS:
The transformer shall be so designed as to suppress the harmonics voltage specially the 3rd
& 5th, to eliminate wave form distortion and interference with communication circuits due to
higher frequency disturbances. Percentage of harmonics at normal voltage and at maximum
system voltage shall be stated in the tender.
12.0 WINDING:
12.1 The 66 kV winding shall have graded insulation whereas all other windings shall be fully
insulated and the neutral points shall be insulated as amended in IS:2026.
12.2 The transformers shall be capable of operation without danger on any particular tapping at
the rated KVA when the voltage may vary by +/- 10% of the voltage corresponding to the
tapping.
12.3 The windings and connections as well as the insulations material shall not soften ooze,
shrink or collapse during service.
12.4 No strip conductor wound on edge shall have a width exceeding six times its thickness. The
conductors shall be transposed at sufficient intervals to minimize eddy currents and equalize
the current and temperature distribution along the windings.
12.5 The windings and connections shall be properly brazed to withstand shocks during
transportation or transient conditions during service.
12.6 The adequate pre-shrinkage of the coil assembly using pre-compressed press board material
having low moisture content for the radial spacer blocks shall be ensured by the
manufacturers so that there is no displacement of the radial spacer blocks due to frequent
short circuits on the transformers.
12.7 All windings after being wound and all fibrous hygroscopic materials used in the construction
of the transformer shall be dried under vacuum and impregnated with hot oil.
In addition to this the drying process be sufficiently extended for proper stabilization of the
coil assembly. More than one cycle of soaking in oil followed by re-tightening of the coil
assembly should be adopted.
12.8 The coil clamping rings wherever used shall preferably be of flat insulated steel laminations.
Axial laminated material except bakelised paper shall not be used.
12.9 The clamping arrangement shall exert equal pressure on all columns of spacers of the
transformer windings built of sections or disc-coils separated by spacers. In no case, spiral
winding will be used either for HV or LV windings.
12.10 The radial spacer blocks must be made of pre-compressed pressboard material. Which will
not soften out while in contact with oil or fray out into fibers or edges. The slots should be so
dimensioned that the blocks will not come out of the slots.
Uniform distribution of coil clamping force shall be designed by using an adequately large
number of coil clamping bolts and by transferring the clamping force from clamping bolts to
the clamping plates through intermediate members which can spread the clamping force over
a large area.
12.11 All joints shall be brazed/crimped considering the vibrations due to short circuits and load
fluctuations.
13.0 CURRENT DENSITY:
The transformer shall be so designed that the current density at any tap should not exceed
250 Amp./cm. Sq. in HV and regulating winding and 200Amp./cm. Sq. in LV winding.
[
The purchaser shall be at liberty to inspect built-up winding for its quality, weight of copper,
insulation and overall weight of coil assembly. The size of conductor used for different
windings shall also be checked during stage inspection to check the current density vis-à-vis
guaranteed values.
14.1 TANK CONSTRUCTION :
14.1.1 The tank shall be fabricated of a suitable grade steel and strong enough to allow the lifting of
complete transformer with oil by means of a crane or jacks and transported to site without
over-straining the joints etc.
14.1.2 The main tank body shall be capable of withstanding a vacuum of 100.64 kNm2 (760 mm of
Hg.)
14.1.3 The base shall be so designed as to allow the transformer to be moved by skidding without
any injury.
14.1.4 All channeled constructions and stiffeners shall be designed to avoid retention of water.
14.1.5 The tank construction shall be free of air pockets. Where such pockets cannot be avoided,
vent pipes of 15-mm internal diameter shall be provided to vent gases into the main
expansion pipes. In case of short branch pipes, however, minimum diameter may be taken
as 6mm.
14.1.6 All joints other than those, which may have to be broken, shall be welded. When required
they shall be double welded. All bolted joints to the tank shall be fitted with suitable oil tight
gaskets, which shall give satisfactory service under the operating conditions and guaranteed
temperature rise conditions. Special attention shall be given to the methods of making hot oil
tight joints between the tank and the cover and also, between the cover and the bushings
and all other out-lets to ensure that the joints can be remade satisfactorily at site and with
ease by semi-skilled labour.
14.1.7 Suitable lifting lugs for lifting the transformer filled with oil shall be provided on the tank.
14.1.8 Four jacking lugs shall be provided to enable the transformer complete with oil to be lifted or
lowered by means of jacks. The lugs shall be fitted at a minimum height (excluding under
base if detachable) of 300mm for transformer upto 10 tonnes weight and of 500 mm for
transformer above 10 tonnes weights.
14.1.9 The transformer shall be provided with detachable steel flanged wheels of 250 mm dia and
suitable for moving transformer complete with oil. These shall be bi-directional and mounted
on swivels which may be turned through 900 when the tank is jacked up and capable of being
locked in position paralled to and at right angles to the longitudinal axis. The wheel be
suitable for standard gauge track of 1676mm.
14.1.10 The Transformer tank should be designed in such a way that over all length of transformer
does not exceed 7 meters.
14.2
TANK COVER:
14.2.1 The tank cover shall be of bolted type and of adequate strength so as not to distort, when
lifted. Suitable inspection cover shall be provided with lifting arrangements to give access to
bushings, winding connections or testing the earth connections. The weight of each
inspection cover shall not exceed 25 Kg.
14.2.2 Pockets shall be provided in the position of Max. oil temperature at CMR for fitting a
thermometer and for bolts of oil and winding temperature indicators. The thermometer
pockets shall be fitted with a captive screwed cap to prevent ingress of water.
14.2.3 Suitable No. of jacking bolts shall be provided on tank cover, inspection covers/windows
including OLTC.
14.3 CONSERVATOR TANK, OIL GUAGE AND BREATHER :
14.3.1 An adequate conservator tank complete with sump and drain valves shall be provided in such
a position as not to obstruct the electrical connections to the transformer.
14.3.2 If the sump is formed by extending the feed pipe inside the conservator, this extension shall
be atleast 25mm.
14.3.3 One end of the conservator shall be bolted type to facilitate cleaning.
14.3.4 The conservator shall be provided with a magnetic oil level gauge.
14.3.5 The oil connections from the transformer tank to the conservator shall be at rising angle of 3
to 9 degrees to the horizontal upto Buchholz relay. The inside diameter of the pipe shall be 80
mm. the buchholz relay will have suitable valves on its both side so as to facilitate its testing
at site as well as cut off oil supply to the transformer.
14.3.6 The conservator shall be provided with oil preservation system, which should be suitable
either to remove moisture continuously from air entering the air space with which they are
connected or may not allow direct contact of atmospheric air with oil during operation, in
addition to silica gel breather.
14.4 VALVES:
14.4.1 The transformers shall be provided with a filter valve of 50 mm size mounted on top of the
main tank oil circulations and one drain valve of 80 mm size with plug. The conservator shall
have drain plug of 25 mm size.
14.4.2 Three robust sampling valves with spouts suitable for taking samples of top middle and
bottom oil shall be provided. The top and middle sampling valves shall be brought down by
internal pipe connections. Suitable nameplates shall be affixed to the sampling valves. The
sampling device shall not be fitted on the filter valve.
14.4.3 Two – air release plug of 15 mm shall be provided.
14.4.4 Plugs shall be supplied for all valves opening to atmosphere.
14.4.5 All valves shall comply with the latest edition of IS:3639.
14.5 PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICES:A suitable pressure relief device of 6” dia shall be provided on the main tank and of 3” dia
shall be provided on OLTC for rapid release of any pressure in transformers which may
endanger the equipment. The device(s) shall operate at static pressure of less than hydraulic
test pressure for transformers tank OLTC chamber. If the device is mounted on tank cover, it
shall be fitted with a skirt projecting 25 mm inside the tank and of such construction as to
avoid gas accumulation.
In addition to pressure relief device(s) the provision of explosion vent should also be made
and the diaphragm shall be situated above max. oil level.
14.6 EARTHING TERMINAL:14.6.1 Two earthing pads suitable for connecting 50x8 mm mild steel flat shall be provided at
positions close to the two diagonally opposite bottom corners of tank. These grounding
terminal shall be suitable for bolted connection. Two earthing terminal shall also be provided
each on marshalling box an any other equipment mounted separately.
14.7 JOINTS AND GASKETS:14.7.1 All gaskets used for making oil tight joints shall be of granulated cork bonded with synthetic
rubber. Metal tops shall be provided for preventing over compression wherever compressible
gaskets are provided.
14.8 RATING AND DIAGRAM PLATES:14.8.1 Each transformer shall carry a diagram plate showing internal connections, voltage vector
relationship of different windings, plan view of the transformers showing physical relationship
of the terminals and no load voltage for each tap.
14.8.2 Each transformers shall be provided with a rating plate & diagram as specified in IS:2026.
14.8.3 I. R. values along with oil temperature at the time of testing at manufacturer’s works shall be
indicated on rating plate or separate plate, to be provided on transformers.
14.9 THERMOSYPHON FILTER ARRANGEMENT
Thermosyphon filter arrangement shall be provided on the transformer for preserving the
quality of Transformer Oil. The filter assembly shall be mounted on the Transformer as well
as ground supported and connected with pipes and shut off valves. Suitable instructions
required to be followed for commissioning, dismantlement & maintenance of the filter
arrangement, re-generation and storage of the adsorbent etc. must be included in the
instruction manual. A detailed drawing showing internal arrangement, shall also be required
to be submitted. Suitable capacity pump (alongwith motor) shall also be provided to boost
circulation of oil. The pump and motor should not be in main pipe line. It should be in bypass
pipe line having suitable valve to isolate from main pipe line. The main pipe line should have
two shut off valves at the bottom.
NOTE : The pump and motor should be weather proof(Flow well Type).
The oil & sorbent capacity required in the Thermosyphon Filter is as under: (i)
Quantity of oil
2.0% of total oil by weight.
(ii)
Quantity of adsorbent
1.25% of total oil by weight.
15.0
15.1
COOLING PLANT:Detachable radiators shall be fitted on the main tank with machined flanged outlet and inlet.
Each radiator shall be provided with 19 mm drain plug at bottom and 19 mm air release plug
at the top. Valves shall be provided on the tank at each point of connection to radiators.
15.2 In case separate cooler banks are used, they shall be suitable for mounting on a flat concrete
base. These shall be provided with a valve (25mm) at each point of connection to the
transformers tank, removable blanking plates to blank off main oil connections to each cooler.
Thermometer pockets with captive screwed cap at inlet and outlet of each separate cooler,
filter value at top and bottom and air release plug of 15 mm shall be provided.
15.3 The motor blowers shall be direct driven suitable for continuous out door operation and
complete with necessary air dusting. These shall be mounted independently from the radiator
and in case, these are radiator mounting type use shall be made of some anti-vibration
means. Care shall be taken that the lower unit is capable of being removed without disturbing
the radiator structure. The blades shall be suitably painted and shall not be of hollow
sections. Suitably painted wire mesh guards with mesh not greater than 25 mm shall be
provided to prevent accidental contact with the blades.
15.4 MOTORS:15.4.1 The motor shall be squirrel cage totally enclosed weatherproof type suitable for direct starting
and for continuous running from 415/240 volts, three phase/single phase 50 HZ supply. The
motors shall comply with IS as applicable for continuous rated machine.
15.4.2 All motors shall be capable of continuous operation at frequency 50 Hz with variation of “5%
and 415/240 V AC” 10% variation of the normal voltage without injurious over heating.
15.4.3 All motors shall have ball or roller bearing with hexagonal nipples for greasing. In case of
vertical spindle, motor shall have bearing capable of withstanding thrust, due to weight of the
moving parts.
15.4.4 Varnished cambric or glass insulator shall be used for connections from stator winding to the
terminal suitable for external wiring. The motor terminals shall be of stud type and totally
enclosed.
15.5 COOLER CONTROL:15.5.1 Each motor or group of motors shall be provided with a 3 pole electrically operated contractor
with control gear for motor operation by hand and automatically through winding temperature
indicator. Provision shall be made for over load protection but no volt release coil shall not be
provided.
15.5.2 All connection shall be so arranged as to allow either individual or collective operation of the
motors. Alarm indication (audio and visual) for failure of fans and to indicate failure of power
supply shall be provided.
15.5.3 The control equipment shall be installed in the marshalling box as specified in CL:23 in a
readily accessible position.
15.5.4 The alarm indication for failure of power supply and failure of individual fans be provided
through independent non trip alarm scheme to be wired on the remote tap change control
cubicle conforming to the following:i. The closing of an initiating contact shall actuate a buzzer and will be accompanied by a flag
indication on the concerned auxiliary relay.
ii. The closing of an initiating contact shall glow a lamp, which will not reset until the fault has
been cleared.
iii. It shall be possible to silence the buzzer by pressing ‘Accept’ push button. If, after canceling
the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, the same fault persists the buzzer shall be
suppressed.
iv. If after canceling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, some other fault takes
place, the alarm accompanied by flat indication on appropriate auxiliary relay shall take
place.
v. If after canceling the alarm and after resetting the visual signal, the same fault appears or
some other fault take place, the alarm, flag indication and non-trip lamp indication shall
reappear as usual.
vi. The non-trip alarm acceptance shall be by means of push button and resetting of visual
signal may also preferably be done through a push button.
vii. Means shall be provided for test checking the lamp and alarm circuit at frequent intervals.
viii. The equipment shall be suitable for 220 Volt DC operation.
Static facia annunciator conforming to the foregoing requirements of non-trip alarm scheme
too would be acceptable.
16.0 VOLTAGE CONTROL (ON LOAD TYPE) :
16.1 The transformers shall be provided with voltage control equipment of the tap changing type
for varying its effective transformation ratio while the transformers are on loan and without
producing phase displacement.
16.2 Equipment for ‘local’ an ‘remote’ electrical and ‘local’ manual operation shall be provided and
shall comply with the following conditions. Local/remote switch may be housed in remote
control panel or in tap changer drive mechanism.
16.2.1 It shall not be possible to operate the electric drive when the manual operating gear in use.
16.2.2 It shall not be possible for any two electric controls to be in operation at the same time.
16.2.3 The equipment suitable for supervisory control and indication on a multi way switch, makebefore break having one fixed contact for each tap position, shall be provided and wired to
the tap changer drive gear. This switch shall be provided in addition to any, which may be
required for remote tap change position indication purpose. Supervisory indication shall also
be provided in the form of contacts to close on. “Tap change incomplete” condition. All other
components of the supervisory gear, if required be specified separately.
16.2.4 Operation from the local or remote control switch shall cause one tap movement only. The
control switch shall be returned to the ‘neutral’ position between successive operations.
16.2.5 All Electrical control switches on the local operation gear shall be clearly labeled in a suitable
manner to indicate the direction of tap changing.
16.2.6 The local control switches shall be mounted, in the drive gear housing.
16.3 The equipment shall be so arranged as to ensure that when a tap change has commenced, it
shall be competed independent to the operation of the control relays or switches. In case of
failure of the auxiliary supply while the tap change is in progress or any other contingency
such as stuck tap changer, adequate means shall be provided to safe guard the transformers
and its auxiliary equipment.
16.4 Suitable apparatus shall be provided for each transformer to give indications as follows:16.4.1 To give indication, mechanically at the transformer and electrically at the remote control
cubicle of the position of tap in use.
16.4.2 To give an indication at the remote control cubicle that a tap change is in progress, by means
of an illuminated lamp.
16.5
For remote control, the switches, tap position indicator, etc shall be supplied duly mounted on
remote control cubicle.
16.6 All relays and operating devices shall be operated correctly at any voltage between the limits
specified in the relevant ISS.
16.7 The tap changing mechanism shall be mounted in the oil tank or compartment mounted in an
accessible position on the transformer.
16.8 Any non-oil filled compartment shall be adequately ventilated, Thermostatically controlled
heaters shall be provided in the driving mechanism chamber and in the marshalling box. All
contactors & auxiliary relay coils or other parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion
or deterioration due to condensation, fungi etc.
16.9 The tap changer contacts which are not used for making or breaking current like separate
selector switch contacts inside main transformer tank where tap changer construction permits
such as arrangement. In case of on load tap changer having separate compartment for
selector contacts the oil in such compartment shall be maintained under conservator head by
means of pipe connection from the highest point of the chamber to the conservator. Such
pipe connection shall be controlled by suitable valve and shall be arranged so that any gas
leaving the chamber will pass into the gas oil actuated relay. A separate buchholz relay may
be provided for this compartment.
16.10 It shall not be possible for the oil in these compartments of the tap change equipment which
contain contacts used for making or breaking current, to mix with the oil in the compartments
containing contacts and not used for making or breaking current.
16.11 Any ‘DROP DOWN’ tanks associated with the tap changing apparatus shall be fitted with
guide rods to control the movement during lifting or lowering operations. The guide rods shall
be so designed as to take support of the associated tank when in the fully lowered position
with oil. Lifting gear fitted to ‘Drop Down’ tanks shall include suitable device to prevent runaway during lifting & lowering operations.
They shall be provided with adequate breathing arrangement. The tap changer shall be
mounted in such a way that the cover of the transformer can be lifted without removing
connections between windings and tap changer.
16.12 Each compartment in which the oil is not maintained under conservator head shall be
provided with a suitable direct reading oil gauge.
16.13 The alternating supply for electrical operation of the control and indicating gear shall be
standard 415 Volts, three-phase, 3 Wire, 50 HZ. alongwith 240 Volts single phase, 2 wire 50
HZ, subject to a variation of + 5 percent so that the equipment offered can withstand
variation in AC.
16.14 Limit switches shall be provided to prevent over-running of the mechanism and except where
modified in clause 16.15 shall be directly connected in the circuit of the operating motor. In
addition a mechanical stopper or other approved device shall be provided to prevent overrunning of the mechanism under any condition.
16.15 Limit switches may be connected in the control circuit of the operating motor provided that a
mechanical de-clutching mechanism is incorporated.
16.16 Thermal devices or other means like motor circuit breakers with shunt trip coil shall be
provided to protect the motor and control circuits. All relays, switches, fuses, etc. shall be
mounted in the marshalling box or driving gear housing. These shall be clearly marked for
purpose of identification. They shall withstand the viberation associated with tap changer
gear operation.
16.17 The control circuits shall operate at 110V single phase to be supplied from a transformer
having a ratio of 415 0r 240/55-0-55 V with the center point earthed through a removable link
mounted in tap changer drive.
16.18 The whole of the apparatus shall be of robust design and capable of giving satisfactory
service under conditions to be met in service including frequent operation.
16.19 A five-digit counter shall be fitted to the tap changing mechanism to indicate the number of
operations completed by the equipment.
16.20 A permanently legible lubrication chart shall be fitted within the driving mechanism chamber,
where applicable.
16.21 The indigenous make OLTC (Internal/External) suitable for 66 kV voltage class & current
rating 350 Amp. should be duly. Type tested from CPRI or other Govt. Test House or reputed
lab abroad to the extent the facilities of Type test available in CPRI.
17.0 PARALLEL OPERATION:
17.1 In addition to individual control of tap changer, provision shall be made to enable parallel
operation of the tap changer when one unit is running in parallel with another similar unit of
same rating.
17.2 Suitable selector switch and controls shall be provided so that any transformer of the group
can at a time be selected as master, follower or independent. Arrangement shall be made
that only one of the transformers can be selected as master at a time.
17.3 An out of step device shall an indicating lamp be provided for each transformer indicating out
of step condition by an indicating lamp and buzzer. It shall be arranged to prevent further tap
changing when transformers in a group operating in parallel control are one tap out of step.
18.0 BUSHING INSULATORS AND TERMINALS:
18.1 Transformer shall be fitted with bushing insulators as follows:L.V. Bushing: 36kV class oil communicating type porcelain bushing of 2000 Amp. rating with
suitable arcing horns.
LV-N Bushing: 36kV class oil communicating type porcelain bushing of 2000 Amp. rating but
without arcing horns.
HV Bushing: 72.5 kV class. Condenser bushing of 800 Amp. rating with arcing horns.
HV-N Bushing: 36kV class oil communicating type porcelain bushing of 630 Amp. rating but
without arcing horns.
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
18.6
18.7
18.8
19.0
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
19.7
20.0
20.1
20.2
The characteristics of the bushings shall be in accordance with IS: 2099 and
IS: 3347.
The bushing insulators except for neutral bushing shall be provided with adjustable arcing
horns and the bidder shall furnish calibration gap to decide actual gap setting.
A continuous flexible pull through lead suitably sweated to the end of winding copper shall be
connected to the connector in the helmet of the 66 kV Bushing. The bushings may be filled
with oil, which may not be in communication with the oil in transformer.
All porcelain shall be free from defects and thoroughly vitrified with a smooth, hard and
uniform brown glaze. It should be capable of satisfactory use under the climatic conditions
as specified in clause-3.0.
In case of paper insulation care shall be taken to prevent ingress of moisture and a final coat
of non-hygroscopic varnish shall be given to them.
All clamps and fittings made of malleable iron or steel shall be galvanized as per IS: 2629.
The bushing flanges shall not be of re-entrant shape, which may trap air.
Bi-metallic terminal connectors shall be supplied suitable for single 0.4 Sq. inch ACSR Zebra
conductor for HV side, LV Neutral & HV Neutral. For LV side the terminal connectors shall be
suitable for triple 0.4 sq. inch ACSR ZEBRA conductor. The take off for H.V & L.V
connectors will be Vertical and for H.V Neutral and L.V. Neutral, it should be suitable for
horizontal take off.
The connectors shall have six number bolts provided with check nuts & washers. The
connectors shall have rating corresponding to those equipment or higher and shall be
designed most liberally with a higher factor of safety to comply in all respects with
temperatures rise. Resistance, tensile strength short-circuit withstand capability tests as
specified in IS: 5561-1970 or amendment thereof (Latest edition). Aluminum alloy used in
the manufacture of bimetallic connectors shall conform to designation Grade 4600 of IS: 6171975. The steel bolts, nuts washers and check nuts shall be hot dip galvanized marked with
ISI certification mark or of GKW make.
TEMPERATURE INDICATING DEVICES:
All transformers shall be provided with a dial type thermometer for indicating oil temperature.
The indicator shall be fitted with a pointer to register maximum temp recorded and adjustable
set of mercury contact for alarm and trip.
In addition, all the transformer shall be provided with a dial type Hot Spot winding
temperature indicator in HV and LV winding. The indicator shall have a pointer to register
maximum temperature reached and four sets of adjustable mercury contacts for alarm trip for
automatic control of fans. The static remote repeater (for winding temperature indicator)
suitable for flush mounting shall be installed on remote tap change control cubicle.
The temperature indicators shall be housed in marshalling box.
The alarm (mercury) contact of WTI & OTI shall be adjustable between 500C to 1000C where
as their trip (mercury) contacts shall be adjustable between 600C and 1200C. The
temperature differential between opening & closing of these mercury contacts shall not be
more than 100C.
The mercury contacts used for controlling cooling plant motors shall be adjustable to close
between 500C and 1000C. The temperature differential between opening & closing of this
mercury contact shall be between 100C to 150C.
All contacts should be accessible on removal of the cover adjustable to scale. It shall also be
possible to move the pointers by hand for checking the operation of contacts and associated
equipment.
In addition each transformer shall be provided with a dial type thermometer for indicating the
ambient temperature.
GAS AND OIL ACTUATED RELAYS:
The transformer shall be provided with a gas and oil actuated relay fitted with alarm and trip
contacts for main tank & a oil surge relay for its OLTC as per IS 3637.
Each such relay shall be provided with a test cock to take a flexible connection for checking
relay operation.
20.3
20.4
20.5
21.0
21.1
21.2
21.3
21.4
21.5
22.0
22.1
22.2
22.3
22.4
22.5
22.6
22.7
23.0
A machined surface shall be provided on top of checking mounting angles in the pipe crosslevel of relay and its setting.
The pipe work shall be such as to allow any gas formed in the tank to pass through the relay.
The oil circuit through the relay shall not form a parallel delivery path with any circulating oil
pipe, nor shall be tied into or connected through the pressure relief vent.
Adequate clearance between oil pipe work and live metal parts shall be provided.
MARSHALING BOX:
A sheet steel (of 10 SWG size) vermin proof well ventilated and weather proof marshaling
box of suitable construction shall be provided for the transformer auxiliary apparatus. The box
shall have domed or sloping roofs. Ventilation louvers, suitably padded with felt shall also be
provided. It shall be painted as per Cl.5.14.
The marshaling box shall accommodate temperature indicators. Local electrical control of tap
changer (if same cannot be housed in motor drive housing.), control & protection equipment
for cooling plant, terminal boards and gland plants for cable etc. The equipment shall be
mounted on panels and panels wiring shall be done at the back for interconnections.
The temperature indicators shall be mounted at about 1600mm from ground level.
A metal clad heater with thermostat, controlled by a waterproof rotary switch on the outside of
the both, shall be provided.
The incoming cables shall enter from the bottom with gland plate not less than 450mm from
the base of the box. Care shall be taken to avoid ingress of water from the cable trench.
CONTROL CONNECTIONS, INSTRUMENTS WIRING, TERMINAL BOARD AND FUSES:
All cables and wiring shall be suitable for use under the conditions as specified in Clause 3.0.
Any wiring liable to come in contact with oil shall be of oil resisting insulation. The bare ends
of stranded wire shall be sweated together to prevent oil from creeping along the wire.
The instrument and panel wiring shall be run in PVC or non-rusting metal cleats of limited
compression type.
The box wiring shall be as per relevant ISS. All wiring shall be of stranded copper of 660V
grade and size not less than 4 sq. mm. For CT leads and not less than 2.5 sq. mm. for other
connections. The panels wires and multi core cable shall bear ferrules of white insulation
material with indelible marking in black and as per relevant ISS. Same ferrule number shall
not be used on wires in different circuits. Double ferrules may be provided where a change in
number is required.
Stranded wires shall be terminated with tinned Ross Courtney terminals, washers or crimped
tubular lugs. Separate washers shall be used for each wire. Wire shall not be jointed/tied
between terminal points.
Where apparatus is mounted on panels all metal cases shall be separately earthed by
copper wire of strip not less than 2.5 sq. mm. The screens of screened pairs of multi core
cables shall be earthed at one end of the cable only.
All terminal boards shall be of stud-type & mounted obliquely towards the rear door and
these boards shall be spaced not less than 100mm apart. Suitable insulation barriers shall be
provided between adjacent connections. No live metal shall be exposed at the back of
terminal boards.
All fuses shall be of cartridge type and fuses and links shall be properly labelled.
EQUALIZATION FORMULA:
The losses at principal tap of each transformer shall be stated in the tender ONAF rating at
full load at 750C.
For the purpose of arriving at comparable prices, the iron, copper and auxiliary losses shall
be capitalised as per capitalization formula given below:
=3,86,700( Wi + 0.45 Wc + 0.45 Wp)
Where
Wi
=
Iron (No load) Losses
Wc
=
Copper (Load Losses)
Wp
=
Auxiliary Losses
The maximum sealing of component and weightage average losses shall be as per clause
24.0 and no positive tolerance shall be allowed on these values
In case losses of the T/F are found to be higher then the specified values at any stage within
three years from the date of commissioning the capaitalized value of excess losses, as compare
to the specified value shall be recovered as per following capitalization formula:Amount recoverable (Rs.)= 3,86,700(Wi + 0.45 Wc + 0.45Wp)
24.0
Losses:The losses of each transformer shall be stated in the tender for OFAF rating at principal tap
(at full load at 75 deg. C) which shall be less than:Sr. No.
1
2
3
4
24.1
Type of Losses
No Load Losses
Load Losses
Auxiliary Losses
Maximum weighted average losses
31.5 MVA, 66/11 KV T/F
17.70 KW (Max)
118.00 KW(Max)
2.00 KW (Max)
65KW
Noise level
:
80 dB
Transformer offers shall be rejected if audible sound level is higher than max. 80 dB.
25.0
25.1
TESTS:
ROUTINE TESTS:
All routine tests shall be carried out on each transformer as per IS-2026/IEC-76.
25.2 TYPE TEST:
Following type tests and over load withstand capacity test (as per IEC-354) shall be carried
out on one of units ordered on the successful bidder as per IEC-76/ISS:2026.
i. Temp. rise test (Along with DGA test before and after temp. rise test).
ii. Impulse voltage withstand test with chopped impulse on any one phase.
iii. Power drawn by cooling fans/oil pumps as perISS:2026.
25.3
In addition, the following tests shall be carried out on the transformer tank.
25.3.1 OIL LEAKAGE TEST:
All tanks and oil filled compartments shall be tested for oil tightness by being completely filled
with oil of viscosity not greater than that of insulating oil to IS:335 at ambient temperature and
subjected to a pressure equal to normal pressure plus 35KN/M2 (5Ibs/Sq. inch.) measured at
the base of the tank. This pressure shall be maintained for period not less than 12 hours,
during which period no leakage shall occur.
25.3.2 Following tests shall be carried out on each Transformer as reference test.
i)
Measurement of tan delta and capacitance of T/F Winding and bushings at 5 kV &
10 kV.
ii)
Magnetic balance test.
iii)
Magnetising current at low voltage.
iv)
Measurement of percentage impedance at all taps at low voltage.
25.3.3 TRANSFORMER OIL:
Sufficient quantity (along with 10% extra) of insulating oil of napthenic type (as per Clause-6
of specification) conforming to BS:148/IEC-296 Class-1 shall be put up for inspection, at least
3 weeks before putting up the transformer for testing/inspection, at sub-supplier works as per
IS:335/BS/IEC. One sample of the oil shall also be got tested from CPRI or any other Govt.
approved testing house. The inspected oil shall be dispatched to site as per dispatch
instructions of purchaser.
25.3.4 SHORT CIRCUIT TEST
Short circuit test in accordance with latest IS-2026 Part (5) clause 4.2, IEC-60076-5 and CEA
regulation-2010 shall be got conducted on one of the units of each voltage and capacity at
any test Agencies where facilities exist in the presence of Purchaser's representative.
However, in case of those manufacturers who have already got short circuit test in
accordance with Cl. 4.2 of IS-2026 Part(5) or latest edition conducted during the last 7 years
on same design and capacity of the Transformer, fresh short circuit test is not required to be
conducted. The bidder in such a case shall submit the copy of type test report along with the
bid. If this test is not conducted by the firm earlier, then charges for this test shall be borne by
the bidder.
The warranty in case of Power Transformer shall be 18 months from the date of
commissioning or 24 months from the date of receipt whichever is earlier. All other
stipulations of Warranty Clause as per Schedule-D of purchase regulation shall remain
same
25.3.5 The purchaser reserves the right to have any other, reasonable test carried out at his
expense either before shipment or at site to ensure that the transformer complies with the
requirement of this specification.
25.4 STAGE INSPECTION :
Stage inspection of built up core (in horizontal/vertical position), windings, tank and radiators
shall be carried-out as detailed below:a.
CORE:
i.
Measurement of flux Density.
ii.
No Load Loss Measurement by providing dummy oils.
iii.
Tests of CRGO sample taken from the core shall be carried-out for Carlite test
(Resistance Measurement), Watt Loss Test, Lamination Thickness & Aging
Tests.
iv.
Physical inspection for quality of workmanship.
v.
Slitting/Cutting of core.
b.
WINDINGS :
i.
Measurement of cross-sectional area for current density.
ii.
Measurement of weight of bare copper/cover by resistance methods.
iii.
The purity test of copper for winding shall be got conducted on sample of
copper for assessing its quality, from two independent NABL accredited
laboratories.
c.
TANK :
i.
Vacuum Test
One transformer tank out of the lot shall be subjected to vacuum pressure of
100.64 kN (760 mm of Hg.). the tanks to be designed for full vacuum shall be
tested at an internal pressure of 3.33 KN/M2 (25mm of Hg.) for one hour.
The permanent deflection of flat plates after the vacuum has been released
shall not exceed the values given below without affecting the performance of
the transformer.
Horizontal length of flat plate(mm).
Permanent deflection (mm)
Upto & including 750
5.0
751-1250
6.5
1251-1750
8.0
1751-2000
9.5
2001-2250
11.0
2251-2500
12.5
2501-3000
16.0
above 3000
19.0
ii.
d.
NOTE:
a.
b.
c.
d.
26.0
26.1
26.1.1.
26.1.2
26.2
PRESSURE TEST:
One transformer out of the lot shall be subjected to the pressure
corresponding to twice the normal head of oil or normal pressure plus
35KN/M2 (which ever is lower) measured at the base of the tank and
maintained for one hour. The permanent deflection of flat plates after removal
of excess pressure shall not exceed the figures specified as above.
RADIATORS:
Radiators shall be routine type tested at sub-supplier’s works as per relevant
standard. Test reports are required to be supplied at the time of final
inspection.
The insulation resistance values of the transformer windings will be recorded
at the time of carrying out routine tests, for 20 seconds, one minute, two
minutes with the help of 5000V motorised meggar (preferably
EVERSHED/AVO & VIGNOLE MAKE). The polarisation index values (ratio of
120/20-Sec. Value) will be accordingly calculated and recorded in the test
certificates and it should not be less than 1.5.
Dissolved gas analysis test shall be got carried out before and after heat run
test at CPRI Bangalore.
Capacitance and Tan Delta values for each transformer and condenser
bushings will be taken and recorded in the test certificates at 5 kV & 10 kV.
Insulation resistance value of condenser bushings shall also be recorded.
Lightening impulse test with the chopped wave applications as per clause 13
of IS:2026/1981 (Part-III) amended upto date. This test will be carried out on
one of the limbs of HV and LV winding with positive polarity.
e.
The tenderer should clearly indicate the testing facilities available with them
and tests, which are to be arranged outside.
Supplier shall submit in-house test certificates at lest 15 days in advance for final
testing of T/F. for testing T/F: all measuring instruments shall be of highest efficiency
and best quality. These shall be got calibrated from NPL/Govt. Agency and be got
sealed by calibrating agency. HVPN reserves the right to calibrate the instruments in
the manner it desires.
Losses shall be measured with 3-wattmeter method only. Resistance shall be taken
with Double-Kelvin Bridge. Losses can be measured directly from CTs and PTs and
not through the panel. Ratio of the measuring instrument shall be such that the
multiplying factor is the minimum.
All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the purchaser before despatching the
material. Test certificates in quadruplicate will be submitted to the purchaser for
approval. No material shall be despatched without prior inspection and approval of
test certificates unless otherwise agreed to. Type and routine test certificates of all
bought out items from recognised testing agency shall be submitted for approval
before commencing supplies. OLTC scheme including the master follower functioning
shall also be checked. Only fully assembled transformer including mounting of
radiators shall be put-up for inspection.
DRAWINGS:
The following drawings shall be supplied as part of the tender.
Outline dimensional drawing of transformer and accessories.
Bushing and terminal connectors drawings.
The successful bidder shall submit final version of drawings complete in all respects in
quadruplicate within 15 days of placement of order for purchaser's approval. The
purchaser shall communicate his comments/ approval on the drawings to the supplier
within one month of their receipt. The manufacturer shall, if so required by the
purchaser, modify the drawings and resubmit the same for purchaser's approval
within two weeks of receipt of comments. Such duly revised drawings will be
approved by the purchaser within two weeks of their receipt.
After receipt of purchaser's approval to drawings, the manufacturer will submit five
sets of all approved drawings and five sets of manual of instructions to our Design
Office.
26.2.1
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
26.2.2
26.2.3
26.2.4
26.2.5
26.2.6
26.2.7
26.2.8
26.2.9
26.2.10
26.2.11
One set of all the approved drawings and manual of instructions will be
supplied along with each equipment without which the supply will not be
considered as complete supply.
Outline general arrangement drawings showing plan, front elevation & side elevation
with all fittings and accessories etc. The following information must be specifically
included on drawings:Make of transformer oil.
Electrical clearances, minimum as well as actual.
The no. of radiator headers, number of radiator element in each header.
Small sketch showing un-tanking details.
Thickness of transformer tank bottom, sides & top plates.
Type, shade and shade No. and thickness of transformer paints.
Roller, rail gauge sketch.
Weight of oil, bare copper weight windings core, un-tanking mass, transportation
mass and dimensions etc.
Detailed drawing of bushings showing plan, elevation, terminal details, mounting
details make and type number incorporating electrical characteristics, description of
various parts, total creepage & protected creepage distance, weight of oil, total weight
of bushing, dimensions, short time current rating etc.
Drawing showing HV & LV windings with arrangement of insulation and terminal
connections.
Schematic control and wiring diagram for auxiliary equipment like OLTC control gear,
cooler control gear, marshaling kiosk. Detailed write-up for schematic shall also be
supplied.
Combined rating & diagram plate.
Valve schedule plate.
Core assembly drawing with flux density calculations.
Interconnection diagram between OLTC panel, drive mechanism and marshalling
kiosk.
Detailed calculations showing short circuit withstand capacity due to radial and axial
forces during short circuit also calculation for thermal withstand capability during short
circuit will be supplied.
Cable arrangement on the transformers.
Drawings showing connection of HV, LV lead with the respective bushing and their
place of storage during transportation.
1.
2.
2.
FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
Each transformer shall be complete with the following fittings and accessories:
One 150mm (16”) dial type indicating thermometer (OTI) of robust construction mounted on
the side of the transformer at a convenient height to read the temperature of oil and fitted
with alarm and trip contacts. Provision in the OTI for connection to repeater in RTCC shall
also be provided.
2 Nos. 150mm dial type winding hot spot temperature indicators (WTI) one each placed in
HV & LV winding, as described below.
“It shall be indicating type responsive to the combination of top oil temperature and winding
current calibrated to follow the hot spot temperature of transformer winding. The device shall
have on additional pointer to register the highest temperature reached. Each winding
temperature indicator should have four sets of contacts. Two contacts of one of the WTI shall
be used for trip and alarm purpose, wiring of which will go to the main control and relay panel
of the transformer (External control cables from the marshalling box to the C&R panel to be
provided by the purchaser).
[
Third set of contacts shall be spare. Provision in the WTI for connection to repeater in RTCC
shall also be provided.
The contacts of each WTI should be adjustable to close between 600C to 120 0C and shall
reopen when the temperature has fallen by 100C-150C. However, supplier should mention in
the their manuals the actual adjustable settings of these contacts.”
Repeater for both WTIs shall also be provided in the RTCC Panel.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
One conservator alongwith 2 no. shut off valves, oil surge relay, breather connecting pipe
etc. exclusively for OLTC.
One pressure relief valve/device (PRV) of minimum 6 inch size for main tank and
1 No. PRV for OLTC of size 3 inch (approx.) with provision for trip contacts.
Inspection covers with jacking bolts in the top cover plate of the tank.
One drain valve with plug or blanking flange at the bottom of the tank size 80 mm.
One filter valve each at top & bottom of transformer tank size 50mm
Three oil sampling valves for taking samples of top, middle and bottom oil.
Set of lifting lugs/jacking lugs and eyebolts on all parts for ease of handling.
One double float gas/oil surge detecting (Buchholz) relay in the pipe connecting the
conservator with tank, complete with alarm and tripping contacts to detect accumulation of
gas and sudden changes of oil pressure, complete with shut off valves on conservator side
as well as tank side. Th size of shut off valve shall be 80 mm.
Two grounding terminals on diagonally opposite bottom corners of tank. However, if
provided on the length side of tank, then these grounding terminal shall be out side the rail
gauge.
One ONAN cooling equipment comprising of suitable radiators with shut off valves, air
release and drain plugs.
One ONAF cooling equipment comprising of fan motors with auto & manual control.
Skids and pulling eyes on both sides.
One marshalling box housing dial type thermometers for winding and oil temperature
indicators, heater, fan, control switches with fan fail alarm and complete wiring and local/auto
selector switch, and supply isolating switches with HRC fuses.
Two thermometer pockets for mercury in glass thermometer.
A set of universal type bi-metallic multi-bolt double grooved conductor clamps each capable
of receiving single ACSR Zebra/ double ACSR ZEBRA conductor respectively for HV side LV
side.
Suitable bi-metallic flexible connectors for neutral terminals.
Suitable size bi-directional wheels for 1676 mm rail gauge in both direction-4 No.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
One OLTC alongwith remote control panel with each transformer complete with wiring, oil
surge relay etc.
a)
OLTC conservator pipe and valve diameter should be 25mm.
c)
The height of RTCC panel should be 2312 mm & shade of paint should be of 631 of
IS:5.
The following plates in English shall be fixed to the transformer tank at about 1750-mm
above ground level:
a)
Rating Plate bearing data as specified in IS: 2026/1977. It must contain insulation
levels of various windings, impedance at tap 1/5/17 & short circuit duration.
b)
Terminal marking plate showing the internal connections and voltage vector
relationship of various windings in accordance with IS: 2026/1977 (Latest Edition).
c)
Valve schedule plate showing the location and function of all valves and air release
cocks/plugs.
A plate showing the rated no load voltage at various taps shall be affixed on the RTCC in
order to facilitate the operator in deciding the tap position on which the transformer is to be
operated corresponding to the incoming voltage.
Oil conservator (for main tank) fitted with flexible separator (as oil preservative system)
complete with magnetic type oil level gauge, filling hole and cap, drain valve-size 19mm, shut
off valve, inter connecting pipes etc. Magnetic type oil level gauge shall be provided with low
oil level alarm contacts and a dial showing minimum, maximum and normal oil level. The
gauge shall be readable from the transformer base level. Silica gel breather with oil seal,
shall be fitted as already prescribed. Breather should be made of see through material. One
drain pipe upto floor level with one valve may be provided.
One No. ladder with provision for anti-climbing.
Any other item which is not included above but it is essential for the satisfactory operation of
the equipment.
1.0
2.0
FOR 66KV GIS SECTOR-21-D, FARIDABAD
SECTION- 4 (Chapter – 1)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
SF6 GAS INSULATED METAL ENCLOSED SWITCHGEAR (GIS)
RATED 72.5kV
General Characteristics
The SF6 gas insulated metal enclosed switchgear shall be totally safe against inadvertent
touch of any of its live constituent parts. It should be designed for indoor (as specified)
application with meteorological conditions at site as per Section Project. All parts of the
switchgear should be single phase/three phase enclosed for 66kV GIS (1250A for feeder &
Transformer modules and 2000A for bus coupler & bus bar bay module). However the type
of enclosure whether single or three phase at each voltage level to be identified by the
bidder at the time of bidding and quoted accordingly which will not be altered at later stage.
The arrangement of gas sections or compartments shall be such as to facilitate future
extension of any make on either end without any drilling, cutting or welding on the existing
equipment. To add equipment, it shall not be necessary to move or dislocate the existing
switchgear bays. The design should be such that all parts subjected to wear and tear are
easily accessible for maintenance purposes. The equipment offered shall be protected
against all types of voltage surges and any equipment necessary to satisfy this
requirement shall be deemed to be included
The required overall parameters of GIS are as follows:S. Technical Particulars
66 kV System
No
a) Rated Voltage
72.5 kV (rms)
b) Rated frequency
50 HZ
c) Grounding
Solidly Earthed
d) Rated power frequency withstand Voltage
170 kV (rms)
(1min) line to earth
e) Impulse withstand BIL (1.2/50/mic. Sec) Line to
±325 kVp
earth
f) Rated switching impulse Voltage (Peak ) line to
-earth
g) Rated short time withstand current for 1s (rms)
31.5 kA
h) Rated peak withstand current
80 kA (peak)
i) Guaranteed maximum gas losses for complete installation as well as for all individual
sections in %age shall be As per IEC- 62271- 203
j) Seismic level shall be considered as Zone- IV, as per IS-1893, Year- 2002
The metal-enclosed gas insulated switchgear, including the operating devices, accessories
and auxiliary equipment forming integral part thereof, shall be designed, manufactured,
assembled and tested in accordance with the IEC-62271-203 publications including their
parts and supplements as amended or revised to date.
Reference Standards
The metal-enclosed gas-insulated switchgear, including the operating devices,
accessories and auxiliary equipment forming integral part thereof, shall be designed,
manufactured, assembled and tested in accordance with the following International
Electro-technical Commission (IEC) Publications including their parts and supplements as
amended or revised to date:
IEC 62271-203 Gas Insulated metal-enclosed switchgear for rated voltages above
52KV.
IEC 60376
New sulphur hexafluoride
IEC 62271- 100 High voltage alternating current Circuit breakers
IEC 60694
Common clauses for high voltage Switchgear and control-gear
standards
IEC 62271-102 Alternating current disconnectors (isolators) and earthing switches.
1
IEC 61128
3.0
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
4.0
4.1
Alternating current disconnectors. Bus-transfer current switching by
disconnectors.
IEC 61129
Alternating current earthing switches. Induced current switching
IEC 66044-1
Current transformers
IEC 66044-2
Voltage transformers
IEC 60137
Bushings for alternating voltages above 1000 V
IEC 60859
Cable connections for gas-insulated switchgear
IEC 60480
Guide to checking of sulphur hexafluoride taken from electrical
equipment
IEC 60099-1/4
Non-linear resistor type arresters for AC systems
IEC 60439
Factory-built assemblies of low-voltage switchgear and control gear.
IEC 60427
Report on synthetic testing of high-voltage alternating-current circuit
breaker.
IEEE 80(2000)
IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation grounding.
CIGRE-44
Earthing of GIS- an application guide.(Electra no.151,Dec’93)
The components and devices which are not covered by the above standards shall conform
to, and comply with, the latest applicable standards, rules, codes and regulations of the
internationally recognized standardizing bodies and professional societies as may be
approved by the Employer. The manufacturer shall list all applicable standards, codes etc.
and provide copies thereof for necessary approval.
In case the requirements laid down herein differ from those given in above standard in any
aspect the switchgear shall comply with the requirements indicated herein in regard
thereto.
Definitions
Assembly
Assembly refers to the entire completed GIS equipment furnished under contract.
Bay
Bay refers to the area occupied by one Circuit Breaker and associated equipments used to
protect one feeder/line/bus coupler in double bus scheme.
Compartment
When used in conjunction with GIS equipment, compartment refers to a gas tight volume
bounded by enclosure walls and gas tight isolating barriers.
Enclosure
When used in conjunction with GIS equipment, enclosure refers to the grounded metal
housing or shell which contains and protects internal Power system equipment (breaker,
disconnecting switch, grounding switch, voltage transformer, current transformer surge
arresters, interconnecting bus etc.)
Manual Operations
Manual operation means operation by hand without using any other source of Power.
Module
When used in conjunction with GIS equipment, module refers to a portion of that
equipment. Each module includes its own enclosure. A module can contain more than one
piece of equipment, for example, a module can contain a disconnecting switch and a
grounding switch.
Reservoir
When used in conjunction with GIS equipment reservoir refers to a larger gas tight volume.
General Design & Safety Requirement
It is understood that each manufacturer has own particular GIS design concept and it is not
the purpose of this specification to impose unreasonable restrictions. However, in the
interest of safety, reliability and maintainability, the switchgear offered shall meet the
following minimum requirements stipulated herein.
The GIS assembly shall consist of separate modular compartments e.g. Circuit Breaker
compartment, Bus bar compartment filled with SF6 Gas and separated by gas tight
partitions so as to minimize risk to human life, allow ease of maintenance and limit the
effects of gas leaks failures & internal arcs etc. These compartments shall be such that
2
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
maintenance on one bus- bar/compartment may be performed without de-energising the
adjacent bus-bar/feeders. These compartments shall be designed to minimize the risk of
damage to adjacent sections and protection of personnel in the event of a failure occurring
within the compartments. Rupture diaphragms with suitable deflectors shall be provided to
prevent uncontrolled bursting of pressures developing within the enclosures under worst
operating conditions, thus providing controlled pressure relief in the affected compartment.
The workmanship shall be of the highest quality and shall conform to the latest modern
practices for the manufacture of high technology machinery and electrical switchgear.
The switchgear, which shall be of modular design, shall have complete phase isolation.
The conductors and the live parts shall be mounted on high graded epoxy resin insulators.
These insulators shall be designed to have high structural strength and electrical dielectric
properties and shall be shaped so as to provide uniform field distribution and to minimize
the effects of particle deposition either from migration of foreign particles within the
enclosures or from the by-products of SF6 breakdown under arcing conditions.
Gas barrier insulators and support insulators shall have the same basis of design. The
support insulators shall have holes on both sides for proper flow of gas.
Gas barrier insulators shall be provided so as to divide the GIS into separate
compartments. They shall be suitably located in order to minimize disturbance in case of
leakage or dismantling. They shall be designed to withstand any internal fault thereby
keeping an internal arc inside the faulty compartment. Due to safety requirement for
working on this pressurized equipment, whenever the pressure of the adjacent gas
compartment is reduced, it should be ensured by the bidder that adjacent compartment
would remain in service with reduced pressure. The gas tight barriers shall be clearly
marked on the outside of the enclosures.
The material and thickness of the enclosures shall be such as to withstand an internal
flash over without burn through for a period of 500 ms at rated short time withstand
current. The material shall be such that it has no effect of environment as well as from the
by-products of SF6 breakdown under arcing condition.
Each section shall have plug- in or easily removable connection pieces to allow for easy
replacement of any component with the minimum of disturbance to the remainder of the
equipment.
The material used for manufacturing the switchgear equipment shall be of the type,
composition and have physical properties best suited to their particular purposes and in
accordance with the latest engineering practices. All the conductors shall be fabricated of
aluminum/ copper tubes of cross sectional area suitable to meet the normal and short
circuit current rating requirements. The finish of the conductors shall be smooth so as to
prevent any electrical discharge. The conductor ends shall be silver plated and fitted into
finger contacts or tulip contacts. The contacts shall be of sliding type to allow the
conductors to expand or contract axially due to temperature variation without imposing any
mechanical stress on supporting insulators.
Each pressure filled enclosure shall be designed and fabricated to comply with the
requirements of the applicable pressure vessel codes and based on the design
temperature and design pressures as defined in IEC-62271-203/ IEC-62271-200.
The manufacturer shall guarantee that the pressure loss within each individual gas-filled
compartment shall not be more than half percent (0.5%) per year.
Each gas-filled compartment shall be equipped with static filters, density switches, filling
valve and safety diaphragm. The filters shall be capable of absorbing any water vapour
which may penetrate into the enclosures as well as the by-products of SF6 during
interruption. Each gas compartment shall be fitted with separate non-return valve
connectors for evacuating & filling the gas and checking the gas pressure etc.
The switchgear line-up when installed and operating under the ambient conditions shall
perform satisfactorily and safely under all normal and fault conditions. Even repeated
operations up to the permissible servicing intervals under 100% rated and fault conditions
shall not diminish the performance or significantly shorten the useful life of the switchgear.
Any fault caused by external reasons shall be positively confined to the originating
3
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
4.22
4.23
compartment and shall not spread to other parts of the switchgear. The internal
components shall be maintenance free for at least 10 years. Routine replacements of
insulating gas shall not be required in intervals of less than ten years.
The thermal rating of all current carrying parts shall be minimum for one sec for the rated
symmetrical short – circuit current.
The switchgear shall be of the free standing, self-supporting with easy accessibility to all
the parts during installation & maintenance with all high-voltage equipment installed inside
gas-insulated metallic and earthed enclosures. It shall be suitably sub-divided into
individual arc and gas-proof compartments at least for :
a) Bus bars
b) Intermediate compartment
c) Circuit breakers & Line Lightning Arrestors
d) Bus/Line disconnectors
e) Voltage Transformers
f)
Gas Insulated bus section between GIS and XLPE cable/overhead conductor
g) Gas Insulated bus section between GIS & Transformer
The bus enclosure should be sectionalized in a manner that maintenance work on any bus
disconnector (when bus and bus disconnector are enclosed in a single enclosure) can be
carried out by isolating and evacuating the small effected section and not the entire bus.
The arrangement of the individual switchgear bays shall be such so as to achieve optimum
space- saving, neat and logical arrangement and adequate accessibility to all external
components.
It is required that the three phases of each switchgear bay be arranged side by side. The
arrangement of the equipment offered must provide adequate access for operation, testing
and maintenance.
Local Control & Substation Automation System:Separate control cubicle including gas monitoring kiosk shall be provided for each bay
which shall be installed near the switchgear for local control & monitoring of respective
switchgear bay. Each LCC shall contain the local control, interlocking, operation and
indication devices for the associated GIS feeder bay.
The LCC shall be free-standing / integrated with the GIS switchgear. A general
arrangement drawing showing the installation position shall be submitted with the quotation.
Local control cubicle for GIS shall be equipped with suitable hardware & software for
remote control operation and conform to the bay level controller as detailed in Section:
Substation Automation System.
All the elements shall be accessible without removing support structures for routine
inspections and possible repairs. The removal of individual enclosure parts or entire
breaker bays shall be possible without disturbing the enclosures of neighboring bays.
It should be impossible to unwillingly touch live parts of the switchgear or to perform
operations that lead to arcing faults without the use of tools or brute force.
In case of any repair or maintenance on one busbar, disconnectors, the other busbar/other
equipments should be live and in service.
All interlocks that prevent potentially dangerous mal-operations shall be constructed such
that they can not be operated easily, i.e. the operator must use tools or brute force to override them.
In general the contours of energized metal parts of the GIS and any other accessory shall
be such, so as to eliminate areas or points of high electrostatic flux concentrations. The
surfaces shall be smooth with no projection or irregularities which may cause visible
corona. No corona shall be visible in complete darkness which the equipment is subjected
to specified test voltage. There shall be no radio interference from the energized
switchgear at rated voltage.
The enclosure shall be of continuous design and shall meet the requirement as specified in
clause no. 10 (special considerations for GIS) of IEEE- 80, Year- 2000.
The enclosure shall be sized for carrying induced current equal to the rated current of the
4
Bus. The conductor and the enclosure shall form the concentric pair with effective
shielding of the field internal to the enclosure.
4.24 The fabricated metal enclosures shall be of Aluminium alloy having high resistance to
corrosion, low electrical loses and negligible magnetic losses. All joint surfaces shall be
machined and all castings shall be spot faced for all bolt heads or nuts and washers. All
screws, bolts, studs and nuts shall conform to metric system. The other type of nonmagnetic enclosures may be considered.
4.25 The breaker enclosure shall have provision for easy withdrawal of the interrupter
assemblies. The removed interrupter assembly must be easily and safely accessible for
inspection and possible repairs.
4.26 The enclosure shall be designed to practically eliminate the external electromagnetic field
and thereby electrodynamic stresses even under short circuit conditions.
4.27 The elbows, bends, cross and T-sections of interconnections shall include the insulators
bearing the conductor when the direction changes take place in order to ensure that live
parts remain perfectly centered and the electrical field is not increased at such points.
4.28 The Average Intensity of electromagnetic field shall not be more than 50 µ Tesla. The
contractor shall furnish all calculations and documents in support of the above during
detailed engineering.
4.29 The Bidder shall furnish the following information regarding the loosely distributed metallic
particles within the GIS encapsulation.
a) Calculations of critical field strength for specific particles of defined mass and
geometry.
b) The methodology and all the equipment for electrical partial discharge (PD) detection
and/or acoustic detection methods, including that mentioned in the specification
elsewhere.
4.30 The switchgear shall have provision for connection with ground mat risers. This provision
shall consist of grounding pads to be connected to the ground mat riser in the vicinity of
the equipment.
4.31 The ladders and walkways shall be provided wherever necessary for access to the
equipment. A portable ladder with adjustable height may also be supplied to access to the
equipment.
4.32 Wherever required, the heaters shall be provided for the equipment in order to ensure the
proper functioning of the switchgear at specified ambient temperatures. The heaters shall
be rated for 230V AC supply and shall be complete with thermostat, control switches and
fuses, connected as a balanced 3-phase 4-wire load. The possibility of using heaters
without thermostats in order to achieve the higher reliability may be examined by the
bidder and accordingly included in the offer but it shall be ensured by the bidder that the
temperature rise of different enclosures where heating is provided should be within safe
limits as per relevant standards. One copy of the relevant extract of standard to which the
above arrangement conforms along with cost reduction in offer. If any, shall also be
furnished along with the offer. The heaters shall be so arranged and protected as to create
no hazard to adjacent equipment from the heat produced.
4.33 The enclosure & support structure shall be designed that a mechanic 1780 mm in height
and 80Kg in weight is able to climb on the equipment for maintenance.
4.34 The sealing provided between flanges of two modules / enclosures shall be such that long
term tightness is achieved.
4.35 Alarm circuit shall not respond to faults for momentary conditions. The following indications
including those required elsewhere in the specifications shall be generally provided in the
alarm and indication circuits.
4.35.1 Gas Insulating System:
a) Loss of Gas Density.
b) Loss of Heater power(if required)
c) Any other alarm necessary to indicate deterioration of the gas insulating system.
4.35.2 Operating System:
a) Low operating pressure
5
4.36
4.37
4.38
4.39
4.40
5.0
6.0
b) Loss of Heater power
c) Loss of operating power
d) Loss of control
e) Pole Disordance
The equipment will be operated under the following ambient conditions:
a) The ambient temperature varies between 0oC and 50oC. However, for design
purposes, ambient temperature should be considered as 50oC.
b) The humidity will be about 95% (indoors)
c) The elevation is less than 1000 meters.
Temperature rise of current carrying parts shall be limited to the values stipulated in IEC694, under rated current and the climatic conditions at site. The temperature rise for
accessible enclosure shall not exceed 20oC above the ambient temperature of 50oC. In the
case of enclosures, which are accessible but need not be touched during normal
operation, the temperature rise limit may be permitted upto 30oC above the ambient of
50oC.
In case of any internal arc fault regardless whether it occurs in a bus bar section, a bus bar
isolator or the circuit breaker, repair works should be possible without shutting down the
substation; at least one busbar and the undisturbed feeder should remain in operation. It
should be possible to remove and replace a fully assembled circuit breaker without
interfering the operation of the adjacent feeder. All circuit breakers should be
interchangeable.
The GIS equipments shall be arranged in such a manner that in case of maintenance
works on any of the equipment, at least one bus bar should be available for operation.
Inter bay width shall be sufficient to allow access to all drive mechanisms and other
termination boxes without the need of dismantling other apparatuses.
These conditions shall be taken into account by the supplier in the design of the
equipment.
Bellows or Compensating Units:Adequate provision shall be made to allow for the thermal expansion of the conductors and
of differential thermal expansion between the conductors and the enclosures. The bellows
shall be metallic (preferably of stainless steel) of following types or other suitable
equivalent arrangement shall be provided wherever necessary.
1) Lateral / Vertical mounting units: These shall be inserted, as required, between
sections of busbars, on transformer and XLPE cable etc. Lateral mounting shall be
made possible by a sliding section of enclosure and tubular conductors.
2) Axial compensators: These shall be provided to accommodate changes in length of
busbars due to temperature variations.
3) Parallel compensators: These shall be provided to accommodate large linear
expansions and angle tolerances.
4) Tolerance compensators: These shall be provided for taking up manufacturing, site
assembly and foundation tolerances.
5) Vibration compensators: These bellow compensators shall be provided for absorbing
vibrations caused by the transformers when connected to SF6 switchgear by oil- SF6
bushings.
6) The electrical connections across the bellows or compensating units shall be made
by means of suitable connectors.
Indication and Verification of Switch Positions
Indicators shall be provided on all circuit breakers, isolators and earth-switches, which
shall clearly show whether the switches are open or closed. The indicators shall be
mechanically coupled directly to the main contact operating drive rod or linkages and shall
be mounted in a position where they are clearly visible from the floor or the platform in the
vicinity of the equipment.
Windows shall also be provided with all isolators and earth switches so that the switch
contact positions can be verified by direct visual inspection.
6
7.0
8.0
9.0
Pressure Relief Devices
Pressure relief devices shall be provided in the gas sections to protect the main gas
enclosures from damage or distortion during the occurrence of abnormal pressure
increase or shock waves generated by internal electrical fault arcs (preferably in downward
direction).
Pressure relief shall be achieved either by means of diaphragms or plugs venting directly
into the atmosphere in a controlled direction.
If the pressure relief devices vent directly into the atmosphere, suitable guards and
deflectors shall be provided. Contractor shall submit to the Employer the detailed criteria
design regarding location of pressure relief devices/rupture diaphragms.
Pressure Vessel Requirements
The enclosure shall be designed for the mechanical and thermal loads to which it is
subjected in service. The enclosure shall be manufactured and tested according to the
pressure vessel code (ASME/CENELEC code for pressure Vessel.)
Each enclosure has to be tested as a routine test at 1.5 times the design pressure for one
minute. The bursting strength of Aluminium castings has to be at least 5 times the design
pressure. A bursting pressure test shall be carried out at 5 times the design pressure as a
type test on each type of enclosure.
Grounding
The grounding system shall be designed and provided as per IEEE-80-2000 and CIGRE44 to protect operating staff against any hazardous touch voltages and electro-magnetic
interferences. As the area involved is small, contractor has to take special measures for
the same.
The GIS supplier shall define clearly what constitutes the main grounding bus of the GIS.
The GIS supplier must supply the entire material for grounding bus of GIS viz. conductor,
clamps, joints, operating and safety platforms etc. The GIS supplier is also required to
supply all the earthing conductors and associated hardware material for the following:
1)
Connecting all GIS equipment, enclosures, control cabinets, supporting structure
etc. to the ground bus of GIS.
2)
Grounding of transformer and other outdoor switchyard equipments/ structures etc.
The enclosure of the GIS may be grounded at several points so that there shall be
grounded cage around all the live parts. A minimum of two nos. of grounding connections
should be provided for each of circuit breaker, transformer terminals, cable terminals,
surge arrestors, earth switches and at each end of the bus bars. The grounding continuity
between each enclosure shall be effectively interconnected with Cu/ Al bonds of suitable
size to bridge the flanges. In case the bidder does not offer external bonding, the bidder
shall demonstrate that the connectivity offered by them between each enclosure is
effective and does not require external bonding. Further similar design should have been
in service for offered voltage. Subassembly to subassembly bonding shall be provided to
provide gap & safe voltage gradients between all intentionally grounded parts of the GIS
assembly & between those parts and the main grounding bus of the GIS.
Each marshalling box, local control panel, power and control cable sheaths and other non
current carrying metallic structures shall be connected to the grounding system of GIS via
connections that are separated from GIS enclosures.
The grounding connector shall be of sufficient mechanical strength to withstand
electromagnetic forces as well as capable of carrying the anticipated maximum fault
current without overheating. At least two grounding paths shall be provided to connect
each point to the main grounding bus. Necessary precautions should be under taken to
prevent excessive currents from being induced into adjacent frames, structures of
reinforcing steel and to avoid establishment of current loops via other station equipment.
All flexible bonding leads shall be tinned copper. All connectors, for attaching flexible
bonding leads to grounding conductors and grounding conductors to support structures
shall be tinned bronze with stainless steel or tinned bronze hardware.
The contractor shall provide suitable measure to mitigate transient enclosure voltage
caused by high frequency currents caused by lightning strikes, operation of surge arrestor,
7
ph./ earth fault and discharges between contacts during switching operation. The
grounding system shall ensure safe touch & step voltages in all the enclosures. The
contractor shall provide suitable barrier of non- linear resistor/ counter discontinued SF6/
Air termination, SF6/ Transformer termination, SF6/ HV cable bushing etc. to mitigate
transient enclosure voltage.
The bidders shall provide lightening mast/GS shield wire at suitable place for protection of
whole sub-station including transformers, GIS cum control room building etc. The bidder
shall submit detailed proposal for grounding system of whole substation including indoor
and outdoor equipments with earthmat using 40mm diameter MS rod for approval of
purchaser. The risers shall be GS flat of size 75X12mm above ground level.
The bidder shall submit detailed proposal for grounding system for approval of purchaser.
Any provision to be made in the building design to take care of earthing requirement shall
also be clearly spelt-out.
10
Circuit Breakers
General
SF6 gas insulated metal enclosed circuit breakers (for 66kV) shall comply with the latest
revisions of IEC- 62271-100 & relevant IEC except to the extent explicitly modified in the
specification and shall meet with requirements specified. Circuit breakers shall be
equipped with the operating mechanism. SF6 Circuit breakers shall be of self blast / single
pressure (puffer) type. Complete circuit breaker with all necessary items for successful
operation shall be supplied. The circuit breakers shall be designed for high speed single
and three phase reclosing with an operating sequence and timing as specified.
10.1 Duty Requirements
Circuit breaker shall be C2 – M2 – E1 class as per IEC 62271-100. Circuit breaker shall
meet the duty requirements for any type of fault or fault location also for line charging and
dropping when used on 66kV effectively grounded system and perform make and break
operations as per the stipulated duty cycles satisfactorily.
10.2 The circuit breaker shall be capable of:
i.
Interrupting line/cable charging current as per IEC without re-strikes and without use
of opening resistors.
ii.
Clearing short line fault (Kilometric faults) with source impedance behind the bus
equivalent to symmetrical fault current specified.
iii.
Breaking 25% the rated fault current at twice the rated voltage under phase
opposition condition.
iv.
The breaker shall satisfactorily withstand the high stresses imposed on them during
fault clearing, load rejection and re-energisation of lines with trapped charges.
10.3
Total Break Time
The total break time shall not be exceeded under any of the following duties:
i.
Test duties T10,T30,T60,T100 (with TRV as per IEC- 62271-100 )
ii.
Short line fault L90, L75 (with TRV as per IEC-62271-100 )
The Bidder may please note that total break time of the breaker shall not be exceeded
under any duty conditions specified such as with the combined variation of the trip coil
voltage (70-110%), hydraulic pressure and SF6 gas pressure etc. While furnishing the
proof for the total break time of complete circuit breaker, the bidder may specifically bring
out the effect of non simultaneity between poles and show how it is covered in the total
break time.
The values guaranteed shall be supported with the type test reports.
10.4 Constructional Features
The features and constructional details of breakers shall be in accordance with
requirements stated hereunder:
10.4.1 Contacts
All making and breaking contacts' shall be sealed and free from atmospheric effects.
Contacts shall be designed to have adequate thermal and current carrying capacity for the
duty specified and to have a life expectancy so that frequent replacement due to excessive
8
10.4.2
10.4.3
10.4.4
10.4.5
10.4.6
10.4.7
10.5
10.5.1
10.5.2
burning will not be necessary. Provision shall be made for rapid dissipation of heat
generated by the arc on opening.
Any device provided for voltage grading to damp oscillations or, to prevent re-strike prior to
the complete interruption of the circuit or to limit over voltage on closing, shall have a life
expectancy comparable of that of the breaker as a whole.
Breakers shall be so designed that when operated within their specified rating, the
temperature of each part will be limited to values consistent with a long life for the material
used. The temperature rise shall not exceed that indicated in IEC-62271-100 under
specified ambient conditions.
For C.B’s, the gap between the open contacts shall be such that it can withstand atleast
the rated phase to ground voltage for eight hours at zero pressure above atmospheric level
of SF6 gas due to its leakage. The breaker should be able to withstand all dielectric
stresses imposed on it in open condition at lockout pres-sure continuously (i.e. 2 pu power
frequency voltage across the breaker continuously)
For C.B’s In the interrupter assembly there shall be an adsorbing product box to minimize
the effect of SF6 decomposition products and moisture. The material used in the
construction of the circuit breakers shall be such as to be fully compatible with SF6 gas
decomposition products.
Provisions shall be made for attaching an operational analyzer to record travel, speed and
making measurement of operating timings etc. after installation at site.
Static Contact Resistance Meter and Dynamic Contact Resistance Meter shall also be
provided along with CB operational analyzer.
Operating Mechanism
General Requirements:
a) Circuit breaker shall be operated by spring charged mechanism or hydraulic
mechanism or a combination of spring and hydraulic mechanism. The mechanism
shall be housed in a dust proof cabinet and shall have IP: 42 degree of protection.
b) The operating mechanism shall be strong, rigid, not subject to rebound or to critical
adjustments at site and shall be readily accessible for maintenance.
c) The operating mechanism shall be suitable for high speed reclosing and other duties
specified. During reclosing the breaker contacts shall close fully and then open. The
mechanism shall be anti-pumping and trip free (as per IEC definition) under every
method of closing.
d) The mechanism shall be such that the failure of any auxiliary spring will not prevent
tripping and will not cause trip or closing operation of the power operating devices.
e) A mechanical indicator shall be provided to show open and close position of the
breaker. It shall be located in a position where it will be visible to a man standing on
the ground level with the mechanism housing closed. An operation counter shall also
be provided in the central control cabinet.
f) Working parts of the mechanism shall be of corrosion resisting material, bearings
which require grease shall be equipped with pressure type grease fittings. Bearing
pin, bolts, nuts and other parts shall be adequately pinned or locked to prevent
loosening or changing adjustment with repeated operation of the breaker.
g) The bidder shall furnish detailed operation and maintenance manual of the
mechanism alongwith the operation manual for the circuit breaker.
Control
a) The close and trip circuits shall be designed to permit use of momentary-contact
switches and push buttons.
b) Each breaker pole / breaker shall be provided with two (2) independent tripping
circuits, valves, pressure switches, and coils each connected to a different set of
protective relays.
c) The breaker shall normally be operated by remote electrical control. Electrical
tripping shall be performed by shunt trip coils. However, provisions shall be made for
local electrical control. For this purpose a local/remote selector switch and close and
trip control switch/push buttons shall be provided in the breaker central control
9
cabinet.
d) The trip coil shall be suitable for trip circuit supervision during both open and close
position of breaker.
e) Closing coil and associated circuits shall operate correctly at all values of voltage
between 85% and 110% of the rated voltage. Shunt trip and associated circuits shall
operate correctly under all operating conditions of the circuit breaker upto the rated
breaking capacity of the circuit breaker and at all values of supply voltage between
70% and 110% of rated voltage.
If additional elements are introduced in the trip coil circuit their successful operation
and reliability for similar applications on circuit breakers shall be clearly brought out in
the additional information schedules. In the absence of adequate details the offer is
likely to be rejected.
f) Density meter contacts and pressure switch contacts shall be suitable for direct use
as permissive in closing and tripping circuits. Separate contacts have to be used for
each of tripping and closing circuits. If contacts are not suitably rated and multiplying
relays are used then fail safe logic/schemes are to be employed. DC supplies for all
auxiliary circuit shall be monitored and for remote annunciations and operation
lockout in case of dc failures.
g) The auxiliary switch of the breaker shall be positively driven by the breaker operating
rod.
10.5.3 Spring operated Mechanism
a) Spring operated mechanism shall be complete with motor in accordance with Section
GTR. Opening spring and closing spring with limit switch for automatic charging and
other necessary accessories to make the mechanism a complete operating unit shall
also be provided.
b) As long as power is available to the motor, a continuous sequence of the closing and
opening operations shall be possible. The motor shall have adequate thermal rating
for this duty.
c) After failure of power supply to the motor one close open operation shall be possible
with the energy contained in the operating mechanism.
d) Breaker operation shall be independent of the motor which shall be used solely for
compressing the closing spring. Facility for manual charging of the closing spring
shall also be provided. The motor rating shall be such that it required preferably not
more than 60 seconds for full charging of the closing spring.
e) Closing action of circuit breaker shall compress the opening spring ready for tripping.
f) When closing springs are discharged after closing a breaker, closing springs shall
automatically be charged for the next operation and an indication of this shall be
provided in the local and remote control cabinet.
g) Provisions shall be made to prevent a closing operation of the breaker when the
spring is in the partial charged condition.
h) Mechanical interlocks shall be provided in the operating mechanism to prevent
discharging of closing springs when the breaker is in the closed position.
i) The spring operating mechanism shall have adequate energy stored in the operating
spring to close and latch the circuit breaker against the rated making current and also
to provide the required energy for the tripping mechanism in case the tripping energy
is derived from the operating mechanism.
10.5.4 Hydraulically Operated Mechanism :
a) Hydraulically operated mechanism shall comprise of operating unit with power
cylinder, control valves, high and low pressure reservoir, motor etc.
b) The hydraulic oil used shall be fully compatible for the temperature range to be
encountered during operation.
c) The oil pressure switch controlling the oil pump and pressure in the high pressure
reservoir shall have adequate no. of spare contacts, for continuous monitoring of low
pressure, high pressure etc. at switchyard control room.
d) The mechanism shall be suitable for at-least two close open operations after failure
10
of AC supply to the motor starting at pressure equal to the lowest pressure of auto
reclose duty plus pressure drop for one close open operation.
e) The mechanism shall be capable of operating the circuit breaker correctly and
performing the duty cycle specified under all conditions with the pressure of hydraulic
operated fluid in the operating mechanism at the lowest permissible pressure before
make up.
f) Trip lockout shall be provided to prevent operations of the circuit breaker below the
minimum specified hydraulic pressure. Alarm contacts for lost of Nitrogen shall also
be provided.
g) All hydraulic joints shall have no oil leakage under the site conditions and joints shall
be tested at factory against oil leakage.
10.6 Additional Data To Be Furnished Alongwith The Offer or during detailed engineering
after receipt of order:
a) Drawing showing contacts in close, arc initiation, full arcing, arc extinction and open
position.
b) Data on capabilities of circuit breakers in terms of time and number of operations at
duties ranging from 100 fault currents to load currents of the lowest possible value
without requiring any maintenance or checks.
c) Curves supported by test data indicating the opening time under close open
operation with combined variation of trip coil voltage and hydraulic pressure.
10.7 Tests
10.7.1 In accordance with the requirements stipulated under Section GTR the circuit breaker
alongwith its operating mechanism shall conform to the type tests as per IEC-62271-100.
10.7.2 Routine Tests
Routine tests as per IEC: 62271-100 shall be performed on all circuit breakers.
In addition to the mechanical and electrical tests specified by IEC, the following shall also
be performed.
Speed curves for each breaker shall be obtained with the help of a suitable operation
analyzer to determine the breaker contact movement during opening, closing, autoreclosing and trip free operation under normal as well as limiting operating conditions
(control voltage, pneumatic pressure etc.). The tests shall show the speed of contacts
directly at various stages of operation, travel of contacts, opening time, closing time,
shortest time between separation and meeting of contacts at break make operation etc.
This test shall also be performed at site for which the necessary operation analyzer
alongwith necessary transducers, cables, console etc. shall be furnished as mandatory
maintenance equipment.
The test for getting signature of the dynamic contact resistance measurement shall also be
carried out at factory. The test result shall be treated as reference signature for condition
monitoring in future.
10.7.3 Technical Parameters - Circuit Breaker
S.No. Technical Particulars
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Rated voltage kV (rms)
Rated frequency (Hz)
No. of poles
Type of circuit breaker
Rated continuous current (A) at
an ambient temperature of
50o C
Rated short circuit capacity
66 kV System
72.5
50
3
SF6 insulated
1250/800/400A
31.5 kA with %age of DC
component as per IEC62271- 100
corresponding to
minimum opening
conditions as specified.
11
g)
Symmetrical interrupting
capability kA (rms)
h) Rated short circuit making
current kAp
i)
Short time current carrying
capability for one second
kA(rms)
j)
Rated line charging interrupting
current at 90 deg. Leading
power factor angle(A rms)
(The breaker shall be able to
interrupt the rated line charging
current with test voltage
immediately before opening
equal to the product of U/√3
and 1.4 as per IEC- 62271-100)
k) First pole to clear factor
l)
Rated break time as IEC (ms)
Total break time (ms)
m) Total closing time (ms)
n) Rated operating duty cycle
o) Rated insulation levels
i) Full wave impulse with stand voltage (1.2/50 µ sec.)
- between line terminals and
ground
- between terminals with
circuit breaker open
ii) One minute power frequency withstand voltage
- between line terminals and
ground
- between terminals with
circuit breaker open
p) Max. radio interference
voltage for frequency
between 0.5 MHz and 2 MHz
q) Max. difference in the
instants of closing/opening of
contacts (ms) between poles
r) Trip coil and closing coil
voltage
s)
Auxiliary Contacts Auxiliary
switch shall also comply with
requirements
as
given.
Independent
single
pole
reversible contacts (from NO to
NC & vice versa)
i)
ii)
Rating of Auxiliary contacts
Breaking capacity of Aux.
Contacts.
t)
System neutral earthing
31.5
80
31.5
As per IEC
As per IEC
60
65
65
O-0.3s-CO-3 min-CO
± 325 kVp
± 375 kVp
As per IEC
As per IEC
< 500 Micro volts (at
92 kV rms)
As per IEC
220V DC with variation
as specified in Sec.
GTR
Each CB pole shall be
provided with an
auxiliary switch with
20% of spare - NO and
20% spare NC contact
for use in future with
due provision to add
more if required.
10A at 220 V DC
2A DC with the circuit
time constant of not
less than 20 ms
Solidly Earthed
12
11.0
11.1
11.2
11.2.1
11.2.2
11.2.3
11.2.4
11.2.5
Disconnectors (Isolators)
General
Disconnectors shall be of the single-pole, group operated type, installed in the switchgear
to provide electrical isolation of the circuit breakers, the transformers, double bus and
transmission lines/cables. The disconnectors shall conform to IEC- 62271-102 and shall
have the following ratings as specified
Technical Parameter
S.
Particulars
66kV
No
a)
Rated voltage (rms) Un
72.5 kV
b)
Rated frequency
50 Hz
c)
System earthing
Solidly
Earthed
d)
Type
SF6 insulated
1250/800/400A
e)
Rated continuous current (A) at 50o C ambient
temp.
f)
Rated short time withstand current of isolator and
31.5 kA for 1
earth switch
Sec
g)
Rated dynamic short circuit withstand current
80 kAp
withstand current of isolator and earth switch
h)
Rated insulation level:
One minute power freq. Withstand voltage:
To earth :
As per IEC
Across isolating distance
As per IEC
i)
Rated insulation levels; 1.2/50 µ sec. Lighting
impulse withstand voltage (+ve or –ve polarity)
To earth:
± 325 kVp
Across isolating distance
± 375 kVp
j)
Rated mechanical terminal load
As per IEC
k)
No. of spare auxiliary contacts on each isolator
6 NO and 6NC
l)
No. of spare auxiliary contacts on each earthing
6 NO and 6NC
switch
m)
Max. radio interference voltage for frequency
< 500 Micro
between 0.5MHz and 2MHz
volts (at 92
kV rms)
Construction & Design
The three pole group operated/common operating mechanism disconnectors shall be
operated by electric motor suitable for use on 220V DC system and shall be equipped with
a manual operating mechanism for emergency use. The motor shall be protected against
over current and short circuit.
Disconnectors shall be designed as per relevant IEC. These shall be suitable to make and
break the charging currents during their opening and closing. They shall also be able to
make and break loop current which appears during transfer between bus bars. The contact
shielding shall also be designed to prevent restrikes and high local stresses caused by
transient recovery voltages when these currents are interrupted.
The disconnecting switches shall be arranged in such a way that all the three phases
operate simultaneously. All the parts of the operating mechanism shall be able to
withstand starting torque of the motor mechanism without damage until the motor overload
protection operates.
It shall be possible to operate the disconnecting switches manually by cranks or
handwheels. The contacts shall be both mechanically and electrically disconnected during
the manual operation.
The operating mechanisms shall be complete with all necessary linkages, clamps,
13
11.2.6
11.2.7
11.2.8
11.2.9
11.2.10
11.2.11
11.2.12
11.2.13
11.2.14
11.2.15
11.2.16
11.2.17
11.2.18
11.2.19
11.2.20
12.0
12.1
couplings, operating rods, support brackets and grounding devices. All the bearings shall
be permanently lubricated or shall be of such a type that no lubrication or maintenance is
required.
The opening and closing of the disconnectors shall be achieved by either local or remote
control. The local operation shall be by means of a two-position control switch located in
the bay module control cabinet.
Remote control of the disconnectors from the control room shall be made by means of
remote/local transfer switch.
The disconnector operations shall be inter-locked electrically with the associated circuit
breakers in such a way that the disconnector control is inoperative if the circuit breaker is
closed.
Each disconnector shall be supplied with auxiliary switch having six normally open and six
normally closed contacts for future use and provision shall be made to add more if required
over and above those required for switchgear interlocking and automation purposes. The
auxiliary switch contacts are to be continuously adjustable such that, when required, they
can be adjusted to make contact before the main switch contacts.
The signaling of the closed position of the disconnector shall not take place unless it is
certain that the movable contacts will reach a position in which the rated normal current,
peak withstand current and short-time withstand current can be carried safely.
The signaling of the open position of the disconnector shall not take place unless the
movable contacts have reached such a position that the clearance between the contacts is
at least 80 percent of the rated isolating distance.
All auxiliary switches and auxiliary circuits shall be capable of carrying a current of at least
10 A DC continuously.
The auxiliary switches shall be capable of breaking at least 2A in a 220V DC circuit with a
time constant of not less than 20 milliseconds.
The disconnectors and safety grounding switches shall have a mechanical key (pad
locking key) and electrical inter-locks to prevent closing of the grounding switches when
isolator switches are in the closed position and to prevent closing of the disconnectors
when the grounding switch is in the closed position.
The local control of the Isolator and high-speed grounding switches from the bay module
control panel should be achieved from the individual control switches with the remote/local
transfer switch set to local.
All electrical sequence interlocks will apply in both remote and local control modes.
Each disconnector shall have a clearly identifiable local, positively driven mechanical
position indicator, together with position indicator on the bay module control cabinet and
provisions for taking the signals to the control room. The details of the inscriptions and
colouring for the indicator are given as under :
SIGN
COLOUR
Open or ‘O’
Green
Open position
Closed or ‘I’
Red
Closed position
All the disconnecting switches shall have arrangement allowing easy visual inspection of
the travel of the switch contacts in both open and close positions, from the outside of the
enclosure.
The disconnecting switches shall be provided with rating plates and shall be accessible for
inspection.
The disconnecting switches shall be capable of being padlocked in both the open and
closed positions with the operating motor automatically disengaged. The padlocking device
shall be suitable for a standard size lock with a 10 mm shank. The padlock must be visible
and directly lock the final output shaft of the operating mechanism. Integrally mounted lock
when provided shall be equipped with a unique key for such three phase group. Master
key is not permitted.
Safety Grounding Switches
Three-pole, group operated / common operating mechanism disconnectors, safety
grounding switches shall be operated by electric motor for use on 220V DC ungrounded
14
system and shall be equipped with a manual operating mechanism for emergency use.
The motor shall be protected against over-current and short circuit.
12.2 Each safety grounding switch shall be electrically interlocked with its associated
disconnector and circuit breaker such that it can only be closed if both the current breaker
and disconnector are in open position. Safety grounding switch shall also be mechanically
key interlocked with its associated disconnector.
12.3 Each safety grounding switch shall have clearly identifiable local positive driven
mechanical indicator together with position indicator on the bay module control cabinet and
provision for taking the signal to Control room.
12.4 The details of the inscription and colouring for the indicator are given as under
SIGN
COLOUR
Open or ‘O’
Green
Open position
Closed or ‘I’
Red
Closed position
12.5 Interlocks shall be provided so that manual operation of the switches or insertion of the
manual operating device will disable the electrical control circuits.
12.6 Each ground switch shall be fitted with auxiliary switches having six normally open and six
normally closed contacts for use by others& provision shall also be made to add more if
required in future, over and above those required for local interlocking and position
indication purposes.
12.7 Provision shall be made for padlocking the ground switches in either the open or closed
position.
12.8 All portions of the grounding switch and operating mechanism required for grounding shall
be connected together utilizing flexible copper conductors having a minimum crosssectional area of 50 sq. mm.
12.9 The main grounding connections on each grounding switch shall be rated to carry the full
short circuit rating of the switch for 1 sec. and shall be equipped with a silver - plated
terminal connector suitable for steel strap of adequate rating for connection to the
grounding grid.
12.10 The safety grounding switches shall conform to the requirements of IEC - 62271- 102
12.11 Mechanical position indication shall be provided locally at each switch and remotely at
each bay module control cabinet/ substation automation system.
12.12 The rated Induced Current and Voltage for earth switches for both electrostatic and
electromagnetic coupling shall be as per IEC 62271-102.
13.0 High Speed Make Proof Grounding Switches
13.1 Grounding switches located at the beginning of the feeder bay modules shall be of the high
speed, make proof type and will be used to discharge the respective charging currents, in
addition to their safety grounding function. These grounding switches shall be capable of
interrupting the inductive currents and to withstand the associated TRV.
13.2 Single phase switches shall be provided with operating mechanism suitable for operation
from a 220V DC.
13.3 The switches shall be fitted with a stored energy closing system to provide fault making
capacity.
13.4 The short circuit making current rating of each ground switch shall be at least equal to its
peak withstand current rating. The switches shall have inductive/ capacitive current
switching capacity as per IEC-62271-102.
13.5 Each high speed make proof grounding switch shall have clearly identifiable local positive
driven mechanical indicator together with position indicator on the bay module control
cabinet and provision for taking the signal Control Room.
13.6 The details of the inscription and colouring for the indicator shall be as under:SIGN
COLOUR
Open or ‘O’
Green
Open position
Closed or ‘I’
Red
Closed position
13.7 High speed ground switch operation should be possible locally from the bay module
control cabinet, or remotely from the control room in conjunction with opening of the
15
13.8
13.9
13.10
13.11
13.12
13.13
13.14
14.0
14.1
A)
B)
C)
D)
associated disconnector.
These high speed grounding switches shall be electrically interlocked with their associated
circuit breakers and disconnectors so that the grounding switches can not be closed if the
circuit breakers and disconnectors are closed.
Interlocks shall be provided so that the insertion of the manual operating devices will
disable the electrical control circuits.
Each high speed ground switch shall be fitted with auxiliary switches having six NO & six
NC auxiliary contacts for use by others & provision shall also be made to add more if
required in future, over and above these required for local interlocking and position
indication. All contacts shall be wired to terminal blocks in the local bay control cabinet.
Provision shall be made for padlocking the ground switches in their open or closed
position.
All portion of the grounding switches and operating mechanism required for connection to
ground shall be connected together utilizing copper conductor having minimum crosssectional area of 100 sq. mm.
The main grounding connection on each grounding switch shall be rated to carry the short
time withstand current rating of the switch for 1 sec. and shall be equipped with a silver
plated terminal connector suitable for steel strap of adequate design for connection to the
grounding grid.
The high speed make proof grounding switches shall confirm to the requirements of IEC62271-102.
The rated Induced Current and Voltage for earth switches for both electrostatic and
electromagnetic coupling shall be as per IEC 62271-102.
Instrument Transformers
Current Transformers
General:
i. The current transformers and accessories shall conform to IEC: 60044-1 and other
relevant standards except to the extent explicitly modified in the specification.
ii. The Principle parameters shall be as per clause 14.4.1.
Ratios and Characteristics
The number, rating, ratios, accuracy class, etc. for the individual current transformers
secondary cores shall be in accordance with Table I – A , II – A , I – B, II – B & III - B.
Where multi-ratio current transformers are required the various ratios shall be obtained by
changing the effective number of turns on the secondary winding.
Rating and Diagram Plates
Rating and diagram plates shall be as specified in the IEC specification incorporating the
PO No, Date and year of manufacture. The general knee point voltage formula and rated
continuous thermal current shall also be marked on the name plate.
The diagram plates shall show the terminal markings and the relative physical
arrangement of the current transformer cores with respect to the primary terminals (P1 &
P2).
The position of each primary terminal in the current transformer SF6 gas section shall be
clearly marked by two plates fixed to the enclosure at each end of the current transformer.
Constructional Details:
a)
The current transformers incorporated into the GIS will be used for protective
relaying and metering and shall be of metal- enclosed type. All the current
transformers shall have effective electromagnetic shields to protect against high
frequency transients.
b)
Each current transformer shall be equipped with a marshalling box with terminals for
the secondary circuits, which are connected to the local control cubicle. The
star/delta configuration and the inter connection to the protection panels will be done
at the CT terminal block located in the local control cubicle.
c)
Current transformers guaranteed burdens and accuracy class are to be intended as
simultaneous for all cores.
16
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
14.2
A)
B)
C)
D)
E)
F)
14.3
The rated extended primary current shall be 125% at all ratios.
The instrument security factor at all ratios shall be as per table I – A, II – A, I – B, II-B
& III – B for metering cores wherever aux CT’s/Reactors are allowed in the CT’s
then all parameters specified shall have to be met treating auxiliary CT’s as an
integral part of the CT’s. The aux CT’s/Reactors shall preferably be built in
construction of the CT’s.
The wiring diagram, for the interconnections of the three single phase CTs shall be
provided inside the marshalling box.
Provisions shall be made for primary injection testing either within CT or outside.
Electromagnetic shields to be provided against high frequency transients typically 130 MHz.
Voltage Transformers
General
The voltage transformers shall conform to IEC- 60044-2 and other relevant standards
except to the extent explicitly modified in the specification.
Voltage transformers shall be of the electromagnetic type with SF6 gas insulation. The
earth end of the high voltage winding and the ends of the secondary winding shall be
brought out in the terminal box. The Principle parameters shall be as per clause 14.4.2.
Ratios and Characteristics
The rating, ratio, accuracy class, connection etc. for the voltage transformers shall be in
accordance with Table III – A & IV– B .
Rating and diagram plates
Rating and diagram plate shall be provided complying with the requirements of the IEC
specification incorporating the PO No., Date and year of manufacture and including turns
ratio, voltage ratio, burden, connection diagram, rated continuous and short time voltage
factor etc.
Secondary Terminals, Earthing and Fuses/MCBs
The beginning and end of each secondary winding shall be wired to suitable terminals
accommodated in a terminal box mounted directly on the voltage transformer section of
the SF6 switchgear.
All terminals shall be stamped or otherwise marked to correspond with the marking on the
diagram plate. Provision shall be made for earthing of the secondary windings inside the
terminal box.
The transformer shall be able to sustain full line to line voltage without saturation of
transformer.
Constructional Details of Voltage Transformers:
a)
The voltage transformers shall be located in a separate bay module on the bus and
will be connected phase to ground and shall be used for protection, metering and
synchronization.
b)
The voltage transformers shall be of inductive type, nonresistant and shall be
contained in their own-SF6 compartment, separated from other parts of installation.
The voltage transformers shall be effectively shielded against high frequency
electromagnetic transients.
c)
Voltage transformer’s secondary shall be protected by HRC cartridge type
fuses/MCBs for all the windings. In addition fuses/MCBs shall be provided for the
protection and metering windings for fuse monitoring scheme. The secondary
terminals of the VT’s shall be terminated to the stud type non-disconnecting terminal
blocks in the secondary boxes via the fuse/MCB.
d)
The voltage transformer should be thermally and dielectrically safe when the
secondary terminals are loaded with the guaranteed thermal burdens.
e)
The diagram for the interconnection of the VTs shall be provided inside the
marshalling box.
Tests
Current and voltage transformers shall conform to type tests and shall be subjected to
17
routine test in accordance with IEC.
14.4 Principle Parameters:
14.4.1 Current Transformers
S.
No
a)
b)
c)
Particulars
66kV
Rated voltage Un
Rated frequency
System neutral earthing
d)
Rated short time thermal current
e)
f)
j)
Rated dynamic current
Rated insulation levels
i)1.2/50 micro second impulse voltage
ii)1 Minute power frequency withstand voltage
One minute power frequency
withstand voltage between
secondary terminal & earth
Maximum temperature rise over an ambient
temperature of 50o C
Radio interference voltage at 1.1 Un/√3 and
frequency range 0.5 to 2 MHz
Partial discharge level as per IEC
72.5kV (rms)
50 Hz
Solidly
Earthed
31.5 kA for 1
second
80 kAp
k)
Rated continuous thermal current
g)
h)
i)
14.4.2 Voltage Transformers
S.
Particulars
No
a) Rated voltage Un
b) Rated frequency
c) System neutral earthing
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
15.0
A)
System fault level ( for 1 second)
Rated insulation levels
i)1.2/50 micro second impulse voltage
ii)1 Minute power frequency withstand voltage
One minute power frequency withstand voltage
between secondary terminal & earth
Radio interference voltage at 1.1 Un/√3 and
frequency range 0.5 to 2 MHz
Rated voltage factor
±325 kVp
170 kV (rms)
5kV (rms)
As per IEC
60044-1
< 500 Micro
volts
≤10 pico
coulomb
125% on all
taps
66kV
72.5kV (rms)
50 Hz
Solidly
Earthed
31.5 kA
±325 kVp
170 kV (rms)
3kV (rms)
< 500 µV
1.2
continuous &
1.5 for 30secs
≤10 pC
As per IEC
60044-2
Partial discharge level as per IEC(pico coulomb)
Maximum temperature rise over an ambient
temperature of 50o C
Outdoor Bushings
General
Outdoor bushings, for the connection of conventional external conductors to the SF6 metal
enclosed switchgear, shall be provided where specified and shall conform to the
requirements given in GTR.
The dimensional and clearance requirements for the metal enclosure will be the
responsibility of the manufacturer and their dimensions must be coordinated with the
18
B)
C)
D)
E)
16.0
switchgear.
Bushings shall generally be in accordance with the requirements of IEC publication 60137
as applicable.
Insulation levels and creepage distances
All bushings shall have an impulse and power frequency withstand level that is greater
than or equal to the levels specified for GIS.
The creepage distance over the external surface of outdoor bushings shall not be less than
25 mm/kV.
Bushing types and fitting
Condenser type bushings will be preferred but alternative types can also be considered.
Liquid filled bushings shall be provided with liquid level gauges clearly visible from ground
level, preferably of the direct reading prismatic type or the magnetic type. Other types of
liquid level gauges will only be accepted if specifically approved.
Mechanical forces on bushing terminals
Outdoor bushings must be capable of withstanding cantilever forces due to weight of
conductor, wind force and short circuit forces etc. Design calculations in support of the
cantilever strength chosen shall be submitted for Employers review and approval.
The major parameters of the bushings shall be as follows:S.
Particulars
66kV
No
a)
Rated voltage (kV)
72.5kV
b)
Rated current
1250/800/400A
c)
Lightning impulse withstand voltage (kVp)
325
d)
One minute power frequency withstand voltage kV (rms)
170
e)
Minimum total creepage distances (mm)
1815
Surge Arrestors
The surge arrestors shall confirm in general to latest IEC – 60099 – 4. The technical
specification of the surge arrestor is placed as under:4.0
SYSTEM PARAMETERS:
The Surge Arrestors offered under this specification shall
conform to the parameters given below:
Sl.
Particulars
System
Voltage
(KV rms)
No.
66
1.
Nominal system voltage (kV rms)
66
2.
Highest system voltage (kV rms)
72.5
3.
1.2/50 microsecond impulse voltage withstand level
a) Transformers and Reactors (kVp)
325
b) Other equipment and lines (kVp)
325
4.
Minimum prospective symmetrical fault current for 1 31.5
second at Arrestor location (kA rms)
5.
Anticipated levels of Temporary over voltage and its
duration
a) Voltage (p.u.)
1.5/1.2
b) Duration (Seconds)
1/10
6.
System frequency(Hz)
50 ± 2.5 C/S
7.
Neutral Grounding
E.E*
8.
Number of Phases
Three
*E/E = Effectively earth
19
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
SURGE ARRESTORS
Sl. Particulars
System voltage wise requirement
of parameters(kV)
No.
66
1. Rated Arrestor Voltage
60
2. M.C.O.V. (kV rms)
49
3. Nominal discharge current corresponding to
10KA
8/20 microsec wave shape (kA rms)
4. Long duration discharge class
3
5. Max. Switching Surge kV(P) Protective level
140
voltage at 1000 Amp.
6. Max. residual voltage kV(P) for nominal
170
discharge current 10 KA with 8/20 micro
second wave
7. Max.residual voltage kV(P) steep fronted
186
current impulse of 10 KA.
16.1
INSULATION CO-ORDINATION AND SELECTION OF SURGE ARRESTOR
The contractor shall be fully responsible for complete insulation co-ordination of switchyard
including GIS. Contractor shall carry out detailed studies and design calculations to evolve
the required parameters locations, energy capability etc. of surge arrestors such that
adequate protective margin is available between peak impulse, surge and power
frequency discharge voltages and BIL of the protected requirement. The locations of surge
arrestors shown in single line diagram are indicative only. If the bidders feel that at some
more locations the surge arrestors are required to be provided the same should also be
included in the offer.
The contractor shall perform all necessary studies. The report shall detail the limits of all
equipment parameters which could affect the insulation co-ordination .The report shall also
detail the characteristics of the surge arrestor and shall demonstrate that the selected
arrestor’s protective and withstand levels, discharge and coordinating currents, and
arrestor ratings and comply with the requirement of this specification.
The contractor shall also consider in the studies the open circuit breaker condition, fast
transients generated by slow operation of disconnecting switches. The study report and
design calculations shall be submitted for Owner’s approval.
17. 66 kV GIS BUILDING (If applicable):
a) The buildings shall house 66 KV Gas Insulated Switchgear (GIS) separately and other
associated equipments inside in each of the GIS building.
b) The bidder shall submit the design & construction proposal of the building along with
necessary information, data, and drawings in the techno- commercial bid according to the
complete requirements.
c) The plot plan of floor for 66 KV GIS building is enclosed. The dimension given is for
reference only and may vary according to requirement of the equipment to be installed
inside. The bidder shall finalize the dimensions according to the equipment offered by
them providing enough space & access for erection, operation and maintenance.
18.0 Seismic Design Criteria:
The equipment shall be designed for operation in seismic zone for earthquake resistance.
The seismic loads are due to the horizontal and vertical acceleration which may be
assumed to act non concurrently. Seismic level Zone- IV, as per new IS- 1893, Year-2002
has to be considered for the design of equipment. The seismic loads shall be equal to
static loads corresponding to the weight of the parts multiplied by the acceleration. The
equipments along with its parts shall be strong enough and sufficiently well connected to
20
19.0
20.0
21.0
21.1
resist total operating stresses resulting from the forces in normal operation but in case of
abnormal condition shall also resist with forces superimposed due to earthquakes. The
copies of type test reports for similar rated equipment, if tested earlier, should be furnished
along with the tender. If the equipment has not been type tested earlier, design
calculations of simulated parameters should be furnished along with the offer.
To prevent the movement of GIS sub assemblies i.e. various bay modules during the
earthquake, suitable devices shall be provided for fixing the sub assemblies to the
foundation. The contractor shall supply necessary bolts for embedding in the concrete
foundation. The fixing of GIS sub assemblies to the foundation shall be designed to withstand the seismic events. It will also be ensured that the special devices as well as bolts
shall not be over stressed. The details of the devices used and the calculations for
establishing the adequacy shall be furnished by the supplier and shall be subject to the
purchase’s approval.
Partial Discharge Monitoring System & Dew Point Meter etc
Static Contact Resistance Meter and Dynamic Contact Resistance Meter, CB operational
Analyzer, SF6 Gas Detector Meter, Portable P.D meter & Dew point meter shall be offered
as per relevant schedule of BPS and shall be considered for evaluation of bid. The
specifications are enclosed at Annexure A.
Quality of SF6 Gas
a)
The SF6 gas insulated metal-clad switchgear shall be designed for use with SF6 gas
complying with the recommendations of IEC 376, 376A & 376B, at the time of the
first charging with gas. All SF6 gas supplied as part of the contract shall comply with
the requirements of IEC as above as a minimum & should be suitable in all respects
for use in the switchgear under all operating conditions.
b)
The high pressure cylinders in which SF6 gas is supplied & stored at site shall
comply with the requirements of following standards & regulations:
IS: 4379
Identification of the contents of industrial gas cylinders.
IS : 7311
Seamless high carbon steel cylinders for permanent & high pressure
liquefiable gases. The cylinders shall also meet Indian Boilers
Regulations. (Mandatory)
c)
Test
SF6 gas shall be tested for purity, dew point, air, hydrolysable fluorides and water
contents as per IEC: 376, 376A & 376B and test certificates shall be furnished to the
Employer indicating all test results as per IEC standards for each lot of SF6 gas.
Further site tests for moisture, air con-tent, flash point and dielectric strength to be
done during commissioning of GIS. Gas bottles should be tested for leakage during
receipt at site.
d)
The successful bidder after award of contract shall indicate diagnostic test methods
for checking the quality of gas in the various sections during service. The method
proposed shall, as a minimum check the moisture content & the percentage of purity
of the gas on annual basis.
e)
The successful bidder after award of contract shall also indicate clearly the precise
procedure to be adopted by maintenance personnel for handling equipment that are
exposed to the products of arcing in SF6 Gas so as to ensure that they are not
affected by possible irritants of the skin and respiratory system. Recommendations
shall be submitted for suitable protective clothing, method of disposal of cleaning
utensils and other relevant matters.
f)
The successful bidder after award of contract shall also indicate the details and type
of filters used in various gas sections, and should also submit the operating
experience with such filters.
SF6 Gas Monitoring Devices and Alarm Circuits
Dial type temperature compensated gas density or density monitoring devices with
associated pressure gauge will be provided. The devices shall provide continuous &
automatic monitoring of the state of the gas & a separate device shall be provided for each
gas compartment so that each compartment can be monitored simultaneously as follows:-
21
21.2
22.0
Compartments except circuit breaker
a)
Gas Refill level
This will be used to annunciate the need for the gas refilling. The contractor shall
provide contact for remote indication.
b)
'Zone Trip' level
This is the minimum level at which the manufacturer will guarantee the insulation
rating of the assembly. Contacts shall be in accordance with requirement.
Circuit Breakers
a)
'Gas Refill' level
This will be used to annunciate the need for gas refilling. The contractor shall provide
a contact for remote indication.
b)
'Breaker Block' level
This is the minimum gas density at which the manufacturer will guarantee the rated
fault interrupting capability of the breaker. At this level the breaker block contact shall
operate & the trip-ping & closing circuit shall be blocked.
c)
'Zone Trip' level
This is the minimum level at which the manufacturer will guarantee the insulation
rating of the assembly. Contacts shall be in accordance with requirement.
The bidder should furnish temperature v/s pressure curves for each setting of density
monitor along with details of the monitoring device.
It shall be possible to test all gas monitoring relays/devices without de-energizing the
primary equipment & without reducing pressure in the main section. Plugs & sockets
shall be used for test purposes. It shall also damp the pressure pulsation while filling
the gas in service, so that flickering of the pressure switch contacts does not take
place.
a)
Gas Leakage
The maximum gas leakage shall not exceed 0.5% (half percent) per year for the
whole equipment and for any individual gas compartment separately.
b)
Gas Supply
The contractor shall include the supply of all SF6 gas necessary for filing & putting
into operation the complete switchgear installation being supplied. In addition 20% of
total gas requirement shall be supplied in separate cylinders as spare requirement,
over & above the requirement of gas for successful commissioning. Pl. refer list of
mandatory spares in this connection.
Gas Filling and Evacuating Plant
All the plant necessary for filling and evacuating the SF6 gas in the switchgear shall be
supplied with the contract to enable any maintenance work to be carried out. This shall
include all the necessary gas cylinders for temporarily storing the evacuated SF6 gas. The
capacity of the temporary storage facilities shall at least be sufficient for storing the
maximum quantity of gas that could be removed when carrying out maintenance or repair
work on the switchgear and associate equipment of at least one complete bay.
Where any item of the filling and evacuating plant is of such a weight that it cannot easily
be carried by maintenance personnel, it shall be provided with lifting hooks for lifting and
moving with the overhead cranes.
The minimum capacity of evacuation plant will be as under :
Vacuum Pump: 40 M3/Hour(Nominal suction pressure)
Compressor: 15 M3/Hour(Delivery)
The capacity of the plant should be such that it is capable of excavation/ filling of maximum
quantity of gas contained in a compartment could be removed/ filled within 30 minutes
while carrying out maintenance/ repair work.
The evacuation equipment shall be provided with all the necessary pipes, couplings,
flexible tubes and valves for coupling up to the switchgear for filling or evacuating all the
gases.
The gas compartments shall preferably be fitted with permanent non-return valves through
which the gas is pumped into or evacuated form the compartments.
22
23.0
24.0
25.0
26.0
27.0
28.0
Details of the filling and evacuating plant that will be supplied, as well as the description of
the filling and evacuating procedures shall be provided along with the bid.
SF6 GIS to XLPE Cable Termination (if applicable)
The underground XLPE cables are to be connected to GIS by the interfacing of XLPE
cable sealing end to GIS Cable termination enclosure for making connection (as
applicable) XLPE cables. This interface section shall be designed in a manner which will
allow ease of operation and maintenance.
The SF6 GIS to XLPE cable termination shall conform to IEC-859 (latest edition). The
provision shall be made for a removable link. The gap created when the link is removed
should have sufficient electric strength to withstand the switchgear high voltage site tests.
The bidder may suggest alternative arrangements to meet these requirements. The corona
rings/stress shields for the control of electrical field in the vicinity of the isolation gap shall
be provided by the GIS manufacturer.
All supporting structures for the connections between the XLPE cable sealing ends and the
GIS shall be supplied by the supplier. The supplier may specify alternative connecting &
supporting arrangements for approval of the purchaser.
The opening for access shall be provided in each phase terminal enclosures as necessary
to permit removal of connectors to isolate the XLPE cables to allow carrying out the
insulation tests. The typical arrangement drawing of interconnecting cables from GIS bay
module to XLPE cable termination end shall be submitted along with offer.
Electric Overhead Crane (If Applicable)
EOT Crane of suitable capacity shall be provided for erection & maintenance of largest
GIS component/assembly. The crane shall consist of all special requirements for erection
& maintenance of GIS equipments.
The crane shall be possible to be operated through the cable & through the pendant
control, which shall be easily accessible from the floor of GIS building.
EOT crane for 66kV GIS shall be of 5T capacity. The crane shall also be provided with
speed drive mechanism (frequency drive mechanism).
Painting of Enclosure
All enclosures shall be painted externally as per manufacturer’s painting procedure. The
painting procedures as followed shall be enclosed with the bid.
Heaters
Wherever required, heaters shall be provided to prevent moisture condensation. Heaters
are not allowed in side the main circuit.
Identification & Rating Plate
Each bay shall have a nameplate showing
a)
A listing of the basic equipment from air entrance bushing to air entrance bushing
(such as a breaker, disconnectors grounding switches, current transformers, voltage
transformers, Line Lightning Arrestors and bushings).
b)
A schematic diagram indicating their relative locations.
c)
HVPNL Contract Number.
Each module will have its own Identification & rating plate.
The rating plate marking for each/individual equipment like circuit breaker, disconnectors,
grounding switches, Line Lightning Arrestors, current transformer, voltage transformers etc
shall be as per their relevant IEC.
TRANSPORT OF EQUIPMENT TO SITE.
The contractor shall be responsible for the loading, transport, handling and offloading of all
equipment and materials from the place of manufacture or supply to site. The contractor
shall be responsible to select and verify the route, mode of transportation and make all
necessary arrangement with the appropriate authorities as well as determining any
transport restrictions and regulations imposed by the government and other local
authorities. All transport packages containing critical units viz Circuit breakers,
23
29.0
disconnectors, earthswitches, surge arrestors and bus sections exceeding 3 metres length
shall be provided with sufficient number of electronic impact recorders ( on returnable
basis ) during transportation to measure the magnitude and duration of the impact in all
three directions. The acceptance criteria and limits of impact in all three directions which
can be withstood by the equipment during transportation and handling shall be submitted
by the contractor during detailed engineering. The recording shall commence in the factory
and must continue till the units reach site. The data of electronic impact recorders shall be
downloaded at site and a soft copy of it shall be handed over to Engineer – in –charge.
Further, within three weeks the contractor shall communicate the interpretation of the data.
PACKING, STORAGE AND UNPACKING.
All the equipment shall be carefully packed for transport by sea, rail and road in such a
manner that it is protected against the climatic conditions and the variations in such
conditions that will be encountered enroute from the manufacturer’s works to the site.
The SF6 metalclad equipment shall be shipped in the largest factory assembled units that
the transport and loading limitations and handling facilities on site will allow to reduce the
erection and installation work on site to a minimum.
Where possible all items of equipment or factory assembled units shall be boxed in
substantial crates or containers to facilitate handling in a safe and secure manner. Should
the units be considered too large for packing in crates, they shall be suitably lagged and
protected to prevent damage to any part, particularly small projections, during transport
and handling. Special lugs or protective supports shall be provided for lifting to prevent
slings and other lifting equipment from causing damage. Each crate, container or shipping
unit shall be marked clearly on the outside to show where the weight is bearing and the
correct position for the slings.
Each individual piece to be shipped, whether crate, container or large unit, shall be marked
with a notation of the part or parts contained therein.
Special precautions shall be taken to protect any parts containing electrical insulation
against the ingress of moisture. This applies particularly to the metal clad equipment of
which each gas section shall be sealed and pressurized prior to shipping. Either dry
nitrogen/air or dry SF6 gas shall be used and the pressure shall be such as to ensure that,
allowing for reasonable leakage, it will always be greater than the atmospheric pressure for
all variations in ambient temperature and the atmospheric pressure encountered during
shipment to site and calculating the pressure to which the sections shall be filled to ensure
positive pressure at all times during shipment. The type of gas, the maximum pressure to
which sections will be filled prior to shipment and the minimum allowable pressure during
shipment shall be advised prior to dispatch.
All banking plates, caps, seals, etc., necessary for sealing the gas sections during
shipment to site shall be provided as part of the contract and shall remain the property of
HVPNL. If considered necessary, blanking plates or other sealing devices shall be
provided with facilities for measuring the gas pressure and recharging at any time during
the transport period. Any seals, gaskets, ‘O’ rings, etc. that may be used as part of the
arrangement for sealing off gas sections for shipment of site, shall not be used in the final
installation of the equipment at site. Identification serial numbers shall be stamped into the
blanking plates, etc., and on the switchgear equipment to which they are fitted so that they
can easily be identified and refitted should it ever be necessary to ship sections of the
switchgear back to the manufacturer’s works for repair.
Valves and other gas couplings associated with the switchgear gas systems shall be
adequately protected against damage from any bumps or physical blows. They shall also
be capped to prevent ingress of dirt or moisture or damage to any coupling, pipes, threads
or special fittings. Any explosion vents and other pressure relief devices shall be suitably
sealed and protected to prevent accidental exposure of the sealed sections during
shipment to site.
For bus ducts involving male and female joints of the current carrying conductor, the same
24
shall be transported in disassembled condition to avoid any damage during transit. All
bright parts liable to rust shall receive a coat of anti rusting composition and shall be
suitably protected.
The contractor will be able to use the available storage areas at site.
The contractor shall ensure that during the period between arrival at site and erection, all
materials and parts of the contract works are suitably stored in such approved manner as
to prevent damage by weather, corrosion, insects, vermin or fungoral growth. The scope of
providing the necessary protection, storing off the ground, as required etc. is included in
the works to be performed by the contractor.
The equipment shall only be unpacked or removed from the containers immediately prior
to being installed. They shall not be left lying unnecessarily in open crates or containers.
Special precautions shall be taken when gas sections which have been sealed and
pressurized for shipping are opened up to reduce the ingress of dirt and atmospheric
moisture to a minimum. Whenever possible this shall only be done immediately prior to
installation and if any section is to be left outside for any length of time after being opened,
it shall be resealed and pressurized with either dry nitrogen/air or SF6 gas until required.
25
TABLE I – A
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV TRANSFORMER CT FOR 25/31.5 MVA T/F
(300-150/0.577-1-1)
No. OF CORES = 3
Core Application
No.
1
1
2
3
Current
Ratio (A)
2
3
DIFFERENTIAL
300-150/0.577
PROTECTION
REF PROTECTION 300-150/1
OVER CURRENT
PROTECTION
300-150/1
Maximum A.L.F
Exciting
Current
(mA)
Output Accuracy Formula
for
burden class
minimum knee(VA)
as per
point voltage At
IEC 185
CT
Secondary
resistance
at
750C at 300A tap
(Volt)
4
5
6
7
8
-
PS
40(RCT+4)
30 at VK/2
-
-
PS
40(RCT+4)
30 at VK/2
-
25
5P
-
-
10
TABLE II – A
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV LINE CT
(600-300-150/1-1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 3
Core Application
No.
1
1
2
3
2
Current
Ratio (A)
3
DISTANCE
600-300-150/1
PROTECTION
OVER
600-300-150/1
CURRENT &
EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION
METERING
600-300-150/1
Output Accuracy Formula for minimum
burden class
knee point voltage
At CT Secondary
(VA)
as per
resistance at 750C at
IEC 185
300A tap (Volt)
4
5
6
Maximum A.L.F./
Exciting I.S.F.
Current
(mA)
7
8
-
PS
80(RCT+4)
40 atVK/2
-
15
5P
-
-
ALF 10
20
0.2S
-
-
ISF<5 for
ratio 150/1,
ISF<10 for
ratio 300/1,
ISF<20 for
ratio 600/1
NOTE:
1. CT secondary terminals of Line CT shall be brought out in two separate terminal boxes. Box -1
for Core 1& 2and Box 2 for core 3. The second box (Box – 2) shall be provided with proper
sealing facility.
2. The provision of auxiliary CT’s is not acceptable in 66kV line CT as these are to be used for
commercial metering.
26
TABLE III – A
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV BUS COUPLER CT
(600-300-150/1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 2
Core Application
No.
1
2
Current
Ratio (A)
3
Output Accuracy Formula for minimum
burden class
knee point voltage
(VA)
as per
At CT Secondary
IEC 185
resistance at 750C at
300A tap (Volt)
4
5
6
Maximum A.L.F./
Exciting I.S.F.
Current
(mA)
7
8
1
OVER
600-300-150/1
CURRENT &
EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION
15
5P
-
-
ALF 10
2
METERING
20
0.2S
-
-
ISF<5 for
ratio 150/1,
ISF<10 for
ratio 300/1,
ISF<20 for
ratio 600/1
600-300-150/1
27
TABLE I – B
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
(PT)
Sl.
No.
Particulars
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rated Primary voltage
Type
No. of Secondaries
Rated voltage factor
5.
Rated voltage (volts)
6.
7.
8.
9.
Application
Accuracy
Output burden (VA)
Percentage voltage error &
phase displacement (minutes)
for respective specified accuracy
classes.
Requirement
66/√3kV
Single phase
2
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
Secondary-I
Secondary-II
110/√3
110/√3
Protection & Measurement
Protection
1/3P
3P
250
25
As per ISS/IEC
Note:- Each winding shall fulfill its respective specified accuracy requirement within
its specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an
output of any value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the
other winding in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its
equivalent IEC.
28
1.0
2.0
3.0
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
i.
ii.
iii.
ANNEXTURE A
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SPECIAL EQUIPMENTS
This part of the document covers detailed technical requirement for the diagnostic
tools complete with associated components and accessories including required
software for storage of data and interpretation of results etc.
DEW POINT METER
The meter shall be capable of measuring the due point of SF6 Gas of the Circuit
Breaker/ GIS equipment. It should be portable and adequately protected for outdoor
use. The meter shall be provided with due point hygrometer with digital indication to
display the due point temperature in degree C., degree F or PPM. It should be
capable of measuring the corresponding pressure at which due point is being
measured.
The measurement and use of the instrument must be simple, direct without the use
of any other material/ chemical like dry ice/ acetone etc. It should be suitable for
operation on 220 Volts AC mains supply.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION:
1.
Measuring Range: Upto-100 º C dew point.
2.
Accuracy : ± 2 º C.
3.
Display: 4 digit LCD, 0.5 inch high.
DIGITAL MICRO-OHM METER FOR CONTACT RESISTANCE MEASUREMENT
(As per Annexure A)
CIRCUIT BREAKER OPERATIONAL ANALYSER
General : Main Equipment
The Computer Aided CB Analyzer system comprising of CB operation unit,
programme unit, travel analyzer unit & analysis software should be capable to
perform close, open, close-open, open-close, open-close, open operation on CB
under test, with a facility to introduce time delays between composite operation.
The CB Analyzer should be capable to measure, record and analyze the CB
operation timing.
The CB Analyzer should be able to measure and record current rise and fall of
tripping coils as well as of closing coils of all three poles of CB simultaneously.
The CB Analyzer should be capable to measure and record travel and speed of
movement of operating mechanism of CB.
The CB Analyzer should be capable to measure and record dynamic contact
resistance of main and arcing contacts of CB with injection of minimum 100 Amp.
DC current.
The CB Analyzer should be capable to measure pole discrepancy timing.
The CB Analyzer should be capable of measuring contact closing & opening timing
up to four (04) main and four (04) no. PIR contact.
The CB Analyzer should be capable to calculate and print all contact closing &
opening tuning in tabular form also.
Suitable mounting kits for transducers and sensors, alongwith sensor cable of
suitable length should be supplied with CB analyzer system.
Test leads with suitable clamp and connectors and having length suitable for leads
with suitable clamp and connectors and having length suitable for connection to EHV
CBs should be supplied with CB Analyzer system for
Necessary custom built travel transformer cum fixtures suitable for mounting on
BHEL/ABB/CGL/Siemens/ALSTOM (66 KV and above) makes of CBs, to monitor
travel related parameters like contact gap. Contact insertion, over travel etc. should
be supplied with CB Analyzer.
System Operation hardware/software, peripherals and analysis software.
The test report for recording motion should provide test results both in form of curve
and tables. The tables should consist of calculated CB parameters such as
closing/opening speed etc.
The entry of various data/parameters (pertaining to CB) be possible using built in
display of menu.
The battery backup and real time clock should be provided for automatic date and
29
time functions.
a)
The computer aided analysis software should have sampling frequency upto
40 KHz or more.
b)
The analyzer should be capable to record transient phenomenon for a duration
at least 500 ms.
v.
The binary channel accuracy and analogue channel accuracy should be suitable
meet all desired functions(stated above)
vi.
The CB analyzer should be provided with facility of down loading data to a IBM
compatible PC. Also the CB analyzer should be provided with facility of down
loading data to Laptop to be provided with portable partial discharge monitor for GIS.
vii.
The printer provided with CB analyzer should be preferably a plain paper printer.
viii.
The computer aided CB analysis software should be supported with suitable report
generation.
ix.
It should be possible to change scale factor of time axis to enable enlarged view of
part of diagram.
x.
It should be possible to change amplitude scale to make best use of available space.
xi.
It should be possible to study on speed curve, the damping and speed variations at
CB opening and closing time.
xii.
The CB analyzer should be supplied with portable memory bank to store test result
taken by test kit to enable further down loading to centrally located PC.
xiii.
Window based PC down loading software should be provided with CB analyzer to
facilities downloading test result from memory bank to PC where it can be analyzed
and stored in proper directory/file.
It should be possible to compare present results with previous one. The feature of
xiv.
Zooming the graph and moving the cursors on graph, thereby indicating
instantaneous values of test parameters should also be provided.
xv.
The latest version of CB analyzer system (hardware’s and software’s) to be supplied
and time to time updating of software should be offered.
xvi.
As and when required, technical support for analysis of critical test result to be
offered, on regular basis.
Other Essential Requirements.
The CB analyzer should operate on power supply of 220 volts (± 10%) at 50 Hz
i.
(±5%) frequency.
The CB analyzer should be capable of working in high electro-magnetic and
ii.
electrostatic conditions.
iii.
The CB analyzer should be capable of functioning accurately in environmental
condition of temperature 0° to 50° C and humidity (RH) up to 95 %( noncondensing).
iv.
The CB analyzer should be portable so as to facilitate moment from one site to other
and supplied with suitable transportation case.
v.
The supplier should have adequate after sale service facility.
As per ISO: 9001 requirement, celebration certificates for each instrument should be
vi.
supplied.
vii.
Installation :
a) Indoor/outdoor
b) The equipment should be portable easy to handle robust and sturdy, for field
applications.
4.0
SF6 GAS LEAK DETECTOR
The SF6 gas leak detector shall comprise of circuit breaker operation unit,
programme unit, travel analyzer, analyzer software and transducers and other
accessories.
4.1 The detector shall be free from induced voltage effects.
4.2 The sensing probe shall be such that it can reach all the points on the breaker where
leakage is to be sensed.
5.0
PORTABLE PARTIAL DISCHARGE MONITOR FOR GIS
5.1
GENERAL
The equipment shall be used for detecting different types of defects in Gas Insulated
Stations(GIS) such as Particles, Loose shields and Partial Discharges as well as for
detection of Partial discharges in other types of equipment such as Cable Joints,
iv.
30
CTs and PTs.
It shall be capable for measuring PD in charged GIS environment as EHV which
shall have bandwidth in order of 10 KHz – 500 KHz with possibility to select a wide
range of intermediate bandwidths for best measurement results. The principal of
operation shall be on acoustic technique and the method of measurement shall be
non-intrusive. The instrument is able to detect partial discharges in cable joints,
terminations, CTs and PTs etc., with the hot sticks.
5.1.2
Detection and measurement of PD and bouncing particles shall be displayed on built
in large LCD display and the measurement shall be stored in the instrument and
further downloadable to a PC for further analysis to locate actual source of PD such
as free conducting particles, floating components, voids in spacers, particle on
spacer surfaces etc.
5.2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION:
5.2.1. Measurement shall be possible in noisy environment.
5.2.2. Stable reading shall be possible in presence of vibrations within complex GIS
assemblies, which can produce signals similar to PD.
5.2.3. Equipment should have necessary synchronizing circuits to obtain PD correlation
with power cycle and power frequency.
5.2.4. The equipment shall be battery operated with built-in-battery charger. It shall also be
suitable for 230V AC/50 Hz input.
5.2.5. Measurement shall be possible in the charged switchyard in the presence of
EMI/EMC. Supplier should have supplied similar detector for GIS application to other
utilities. Performance certificate and the list of users shall be supplied along with the
offer.
5.2.6. Instrument shall be supplied with standard accessories i.e., re-locatable sensors with
mounting arrangements, connecting cables (duly screened) to sensors, Lap-top
(i5/i7 or higher version fully compatible with PD measurement device & CB Analyser
with required software’s), diagnostic software, carrying case, rechargeable battery
pack with charger suitable for 230V AC, 50Hz supply connecting cables (duly
screened) to view in storage.
5.2.7. The function of software shall be covering the following:
Data recording, storage and retrieval in computer
−
Data base analysis
−
Template analysis for easy location of fault inside the GIS
−
Evaluation of PD measurement i.e, Amplitude, Phase Synchronization etc.
−
Evaluation of bouncing/loose particles with flight time and estimation on size
−
of particle.
Report generation
−
5.2.8. To prove the suitability in charged switchyard condition, practical demonstration shall
be conducted before acceptance.
5.2.9. Supplier shall have “Adequate after sales service” facility in India.
5.2.10. Necessary training may be accorded to personnel to make use of the kit for locating
PD sources inside the GIS
5.2.11. Instrument shall be robust and conform to relevant standard.
6.0
SPECIFICATION FOR
DIGITAL EARTH RESISTANCE METER (As per
Annexure B)
5.1.1
7.0
8.0
5 kV AUTOMATED INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTER (As per Annexure C)
DC LEAKAGE TESTER
31
ANNEXURE-‘A’
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF CONTACT RESISTANCE/
MICRO OHM METER
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.0
SCOPE:
1.1
This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, inspection &
testing at manufacturer’s work before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at the
discretion of Purchaser of various testing equipment listed in the schedule of
requirements at Annexure-A.
1.2
Unless specifically excluded from the offer, all fittings and accessories, not
specifically stated in this specification but which are necessary for satisfactory operation
of the scheme or to complete the work in a good workman like manner shall be deemed
to have been included in the scope of supply of the Bidder.
1.3
The Demonstration of the equipment in live EHV switchyard upto 400kV S/Stn.
and satisfactory performance as per GTP requirement i.e. the consistency and
repeatability of test results shall be the criteria of acceptability of successful bidder
thereafter part-II (price bid) of the tender shall be opened.
2.0
SERVICE CONDITIONS:
Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
Location
IN THE STATE OF HARYANA
Max. ambient air temp (0C)
50
0
Min. ambient air temp ( C)
-2.5
Max. relative humidity (%)
100
Min. relative humidity (%)
26
Average annual rainfall (mm).
900
Max. Wind pressure (kg/sq.m)
195
Max.Altitude above mean sea level (meters)
1000
Isoceraunic level (days/year)
50
Seismic level (horizontal acceleration)
0.3g
Note: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth.
The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions.
3.0
MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP:
All the materials used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best
quality obtainable of their respective kinds and whole of the work shall be of the highest
class, well finished and of approved design and make. Castings shall be free from blowholes, flaws, cracks or other defects and shall be smooth grained and of true
dimensions and forms.
4.0
DEPARTURE FROM THE SPECIFICATIONS:
Should the tenderer wish to depart from provision of this specification either on
account of a manufacturing practice or for any other reasons, he will draw specific
attention to the proposed points of departure on the prescribed performa (enclosed) at
Annexure-B in his tender and submit such full information, drawings & specifications as
will enable the merit the merit of his proposal to be appreciated.
32
In the event of contractor drawings, specification and table etc. disagreeing with
this specification during the execution of the contract, this specification shall be held
binding unless the departures have been fully recorded as required above.
5.0
SITE DEMONSTRATION:-
The successful bidder(s) will be required to demonstrate the performance of their
offered equipment(s) at four locations in Haryana so as to familiarize the purchaser’s
Engineers/technicians for use of a given testing equipment. These demonstrations will
be free of charge & will be planned soon after the supplies are made so as to make use
of the testing equipments. Apart from the detailed demonstration at site, the supplier
shall also have to arrange necessary training to HVPNL engineers.
6.0
NAME PLATE:
An easily accessible engraved or painted name plate shall be provided on each
equipment. It must include purchase order No., supplier’s reference No. & item number
as per purchase order.
7.0
INSPECTION AT MANUFACTURERS WORKS:
7.1
All equipment shall be subject to routine tests according to the relevant
standards and to such other tests as may be required to ensure that all equipment is
satisfactory and in accordance with this specification. The Purchaser reserves the right
to witness all the tests, unless dispensed with in writing by the purchaser.
7.2
The supplier shall give sufficient advance intimation at least 15 days notice to the
purchaser to enable him to depute his representative for witnessing the tests to prove
the test equipment.
8.0
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:
(i)
(ii)
Supply Voltage
Frequency
(iii)
The testing set shall be capable of working in hostile condition of electrostatic
field prevailing in charged HV/EHV Substations up to 400 kV of high voltage and
of high interference environment.
9.0
DOCUMENTATION:
:
:
Single Phase AC, 230 Volt +10%
50 Hz + 3%
The supplier shall furnish nicely printed and bound volumes of the instruction
manuals in English language, prior to the dispatch of the equipment. The
instruction manual shall contain step by step instructions for all operational &
maintenance requirements for all the testing equipments. If should also include
the GA & detailed schematic drawings including internal wiring diagram of the
various equipments to facilitate its repair at site incase of any defect.
The number of sets of instruction manuals to be supplied shall be as under: i)
Two sets for CE/MM, HVPNL, Panchkula
ii)
Five sets separately bound for each item for SE/M&P-Cum-Carrier Circle,
HVPNL, Delhi & five sets for SE/M&P-Cum-Carrier Circle, HVPNL, Ambala.
33
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF CONTACT RESISTANCE METER/MICRO OHM METER
GENERAL:- The instrument should be capable of measuring contact resistance of EHV circuit
breakers, isolators, Bus Bar joints & connectors/jumpers etc. ranging from few micro Ohms to
few hundred milli Ohms, by applying continuous D.C. current min. 100 Amps. From a constant
current source built in inside the instrument; having digital read out of the value of resistance
measured and test current using microprocessor based control logic & precision
instrumentation.
The instrument should be capable of carrying out the measurement in live EHV switchyards
having high electrostatic & electromagnetic interference. The size (cross sectional area) of test
lead should be suitable to carry out Min. 100 Amps. Current or higher continuously without
appreciable rise in temp. The Clamp & connectors should also be suitable for accurate
measurement of contact resistance of specimen.
Technical Specs:
1. The instrument should provide direct reading of the resistance of specimen & test current.
2. Test current: Min. 100 Amps. (or higher), continuous variation, regular or in steps.
3. Resistance:
Range
0 to 1999 micro Ohm
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Resolution
0.1 Micro
Ohm or
better
Accuracy
± 1% or
better
Display: Digital Readout
Test Lead Length : 15 Meter long
Input Power: Mains operated; 230 Volts (nominal) ±10%, 50Hz±3%
Memory :
On Board of upto 100 test results.
Interface:
PC Interface and Inbuilt Printer
Environment: a) Operating Temp. Range: 00 to 500 C
b) Operating R.H.: at least upto 90% (non condensing)
Calibration Facility i.e. Standard Shunt (of accuracy better than equipment) should be
provided with test kit as additional attachment.
Calibration certificate for complete range of test instrument should not be older than 2
months shall be supplied with it.
Successful demonstration in live EHV switchyard is criteria for acceptability.
Kit should be able to make measurement of contact resistance safely while keeping
both the sides of breakers grounded and with jumper connected.
Accessories:- 2 Nos. of certified Shunts of value 75µΩ and 500 µΩ each of sufficient
current cap to check accuracy of kit during testing should be provided.
Safety : Should meet the requirement of EN61010-1 and EN61326
Equipment shall be portable.
34
ANNEXURE-B
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF PORTABLE
DIGITAL EARTH RESISTANCE TESTER
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.0
SCOPE:
1.1
This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, inspection &
testing at manufacturer’s work before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at the
discretion of Purchaser of various testing equipment listed in the schedule of
requirements at Annexure-A.
1.2 Unless specifically excluded from the offer, all fittings and accessories, not
specifically stated in this specification but which are necessary for satisfactory operation
of the scheme or to complete the work in a good workman like manner shall be deemed
to have been included in the scope of supply of the Bidder.
1.3
The Demonstration of the equipment in live EHV switchyard upto 400kV S/Stn.
and satisfactory performance as per GTP requirement i.e. the consistency and
repeatability of test results shall be the criteria of acceptability of successful bidder
thereafter part-II (price bid) of the tender shall be opened.
2.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS:
Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
Location
IN THE STATE OF HARYANA
50
Max. ambient air temp (0C)
0
Min. ambient air temp ( C)
-2.5
Max. relative humidity (%)
100
Min. relative humidity (%)
26
Average annual rainfall (mm).
900
Max. Wind pressure (kg/sq.m)
195
Max.Altitude above mean sea level (meters)
1000
Isoceraunic level (days/year)
50
Seismic level (horizontal acceleration)
0.3g
Note: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth.
The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions.
3.0 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP:
All the materials used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best
quality obtainable of their respective kinds and whole of the work shall be of the highest
class, well finished and of approved design and make. Castings shall be free from blowholes, flaws, cracks or other defects and shall be smooth grained and of true
dimensions and forms.
35
4.0
DEPARTURE FROM THE SPECIFICATIONS:
Should the tenderer wish to depart from provision of this specification either on
account of a manufacturing practice or for any other reasons, he will draw specific
attention to the proposed points of departure on the prescribed performa (enclosed) at
Annexure-B in his tender and submit such full information, drawings & specifications as
will enable the merit the merit of his proposal to be appreciated.
In the event of contractor drawings, specification and table etc. disagreeing with
this specification during the execution of the contract, this specification shall be held
binding unless the departures have been fully recorded as required above.
5.0
SITE DEMONSTRATION:-
The successful bidder(s) will be required to demonstrate the performance of their
offered equipment(s) at four locations in Haryana so as to familiarize the purchaser’s
Engineers/technicians for use of a given testing equipment. These demonstrations will
be free of charge & will be planned soon after the supplies are made so as to make use
of the testing equipments. Apart from the detailed demonstration at site, the supplier
shall also have to arrange necessary training to HVPNL engineers.
7.0
NAME PLATE:
An easily accessible engraved or painted name plate shall be provided on each
equipment. It must include purchase order No., supplier’s reference No. & item number
as per purchase order.
7.0
INSPECTION AT MANUFACTURERS WORKS:
7.1
All equipment shall be subject to routine tests according to the relevant
standards and to such other tests as may be required to ensure that all equipment is
satisfactory and in accordance with this specification. The Purchaser reserves the right
to witness all the tests, unless dispensed with in writing by the purchaser.
7.2
The supplier shall give sufficient advance intimation at least 15 days notice to the
purchaser to enable him to depute his representative for witnessing the tests to prove
the test equipment.
8.0
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:
(i)
(ii)
Supply Voltage
Frequency
(iii)
The testing set shall be capable of working in hostile condition of electrostatic
field prevailing in charged HV/EHV Substations up to 400 kV of high voltage and
of high interference environment.
9.0
DOCUMENTATION:
:
:
Single Phase AC, 230 Volt +10%
50 Hz + 3%
The supplier shall furnish nicely printed and bound volumes of the instruction
manuals in English language, prior to the dispatch of the equipment. The
instruction manual shall contain step by step instructions for all operational &
maintenance requirements for all the testing equipments. If should also include
the GA & detailed schematic drawings including internal wiring diagram of the
various equipments to facilitate its repair at site incase of any defect.
36
The number of sets of instruction manuals to be supplied shall be as under: i)
Two sets for CE/MM, HVPNL, Panchkula
ii)
Five sets separately bound for each item for SE/M&P-Cum-Carrier Circle,
HVPNL, Delhi & five sets for SE/M&P-Cum-Carrier Circle, HVPNL, Ambala.
10.0
A.
PORTABLE DIGITAL EARTH RESISTANCE TESTER
Digital earth resistance tester shall be suitable for accurate measurement of
earth resistance of electrical installations and soil resistivity. The tester should be
free from the effect of AC earth stray & electrolytic fields as the same is to be
used in the live switchyard up to 400 kV. The tester should be powered by rechargeable battery. Low battery indication be provided enabling the user to
charge it by connecting it to 230Volt, 50 Hz main supply. (The supply is subject
to + 10% fluctuation in voltage and + 3% fluctuation in frequency).
The instrument shall have range of 0-20 K ohms with a resolution of 0.01 ohm.
The accuracy of the instrument shall be + 2% of selected range.
1.
The instrument should be supplied along with its measurement leads (Red-15m,
Yellow-10m, Green-5m), earth spikes (2 Nos.), charging leads, battery charger
and a metal carrying case for safe transportation.
2.
The output voltage = 30V peak minimum (at a test frequency different from 50Hz
to avoid electro magnetic interference.
The indication of high noise and high resistance of spikes (current & potential)
provided in test instrument.
Comply with testing requirements set by international standards.
Measurement should not be influenced by electrostatic/electromagnetic
interference present in EHV switchyards.
Measurement of disturbance voltage be provided.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Should be able to perform fall of potential and clamp on technique in same kit for
earth resistance measurement along with soil resistivity and touch potential. The
size of clamp shall be such that it can measure for earthing flats of size 75x12
mm2.
8.
In-built printer or printer port for external printer connection/PC interface and
having inbuilt memory for atleast 100 measurements.
B)
Technical Specifications:
Sr.
No.
1.
2.
3.
Parameters
Data
Earth Resistance
Range
Accuracy (At Temp. 230
C
Test Frequency
0.01 Ohm to 20 K Ohms (Auto ranging and
digital)
±2% upto 200 ohm, ±3% above 200ohm
100 Hz to 150 Hz maximum output voltage :
≤50 Volts
37
4.
Display
Digital LCD/Key Pad
5.
Environmental
Conditions
6.
EMC
7.
IP Rating
Operating Temp. : Upto 500 C
Operating R.H.: Upto 90% (at 400 C), non
condensing
In accordance with IEC-61326 (including
amendment No. 1)
IP54
C)
Power Supply:
a)
Rechargeable Battery/Cells
b)
Charger: Internal/External
c)
Charger: Suitable for 230 Volts. Single Phase 50 Hz, AC supply.
d)
Other essential requirements:
1.
The calibration certificate should not be older than 2 months from the date
of supply of test kit (for entire range).
2.
The earth testing kit should be supplied complete in all respect i.e. with
suitable spikes and test leads, clamps for stakes less measurement etc.
3.
The acceptable criteria of the equipment
demonstration in live EHV switchyard.
4.
Test kit shall be hand held/portable and carrying case shall be provided.
5.
The test kit shall be compatible for EMC/EMI/Safety environment
requirement as per IEC.
shall
be
successful
38
ANNEXURE-‘C’
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF SELF DIAGNOSTIC 5 KV
DIGITAL INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTER
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1.0
SCOPE:
1.1
This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, inspection &
testing at manufacturer’s work before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at the
discretion of Purchaser of various testing equipment listed in the schedule of
requirements at Annexure-A.
1.2 Unless specifically excluded from the offer, all fittings and accessories, not
specifically stated in this specification but which are necessary for satisfactory operation
of the scheme or to complete the work in a good workman like manner shall be deemed
to have been included in the scope of supply of the Bidder.
1.3
The Demonstration of the equipment in live EHV switchyard upto 220kV S/Stn.
and satisfactory performance as per GTP requirement i.e. the consistency and
repeatability of test results shall be the criteria of acceptability of successful bidder
thereafter part-II (price bid) of the tender shall be opened.
2.0 SERVICE CONDITIONS:
Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
Location
IN THE STATE OF HARYANA
0
50
Max. ambient air temp ( C)
Min. ambient air temp (0C)
-2.5
Max. relative humidity (%)
100
Min. relative humidity (%)
26
Average annual rainfall (mm).
900
Max. Wind pressure (kg/sq.m)
195
Max.Altitude above mean sea level (meters)
1000
Isoceraunic level (days/year)
50
Seismic level (horizontal acceleration)
0.3g
Note: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth.
The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions.
3.0 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP:
All the materials used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best
quality obtainable of their respective kinds and whole of the work shall be of the highest
class, well finished and of approved design and make. Castings shall be free from blowholes, flaws, cracks or other defects and shall be smooth grained and of true
dimensions and forms.
39
4.0
DEPARTURE FROM THE SPECIFICATIONS:
Should the tenderer wish to depart from provision of this specification either on
account of a manufacturing practice or for any other reasons, he will draw specific
attention to the proposed points of departure on the prescribed performa (enclosed) at
Annexure-B in his tender and submit such full information, drawings & specifications as
will enable the merit the merit of his proposal to be appreciated.
In the event of contractor drawings, specification and table etc. disagreeing with
this specification during the execution of the contract, this specification shall be held
binding unless the departures have been fully recorded as required above.
5.0
SITE DEMONSTRATION:-
The successful bidder(s) will be required to demonstrate the performance of their
offered equipment(s) at four locations in Haryana so as to familiarize the purchaser’s
Engineers/technicians for use of a given testing equipment. These demonstrations will
be free of charge & will be planned soon after the supplies are made so as to make use
of the testing equipments. Apart from the detailed demonstration at site, the supplier
shall also have to arrange necessary training to HVPNL engineers.
6.0
NAME PLATE:
An easily accessible engraved or painted name plate shall be provided on each
equipment. It must include purchase order No., supplier’s reference No. & item number
as per purchase order.
7.0
INSPECTION AT MANUFACTURERS WORKS:
7.1
All equipment shall be subject to routine tests according to the relevant
standards and to such other tests as may be required to ensure that all equipment is
satisfactory and in accordance with this specification. The Purchaser reserves the right
to witness all the tests, unless dispensed with in writing by the purchaser.
7.2
The supplier shall give sufficient advance intimation at least 15 days notice to the
purchaser to enable him to depute his representative for witnessing the tests to prove
the test equipment.
8.0
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:
(i)
(ii)
Supply Voltage
Frequency
(iii)
The testing set shall be capable of working in hostile condition of electrostatic
field prevailing in charged HV/EHV Substations up to 220 kV of high voltage and
of high interference environment.
9.0
DOCUMENTATION:
:
:
Single Phase AC, 230 Volt +10%
50 Hz + 3%
The supplier shall furnish nicely printed and bound volumes of the instruction
manuals in English language, prior to the dispatch of the equipment. The
instruction manual shall contain step by step instructions for all operational &
maintenance requirements for all the testing equipments. If should also include
40
the GA & detailed schematic drawings including internal wiring diagram of the
various equipments to facilitate its repair at site incase of any defect.
The number of sets of instruction manuals to be supplied shall be as under: i)
Two sets for CE/MM, HVPNL, Panchkula
ii)
Five sets separately bound for each item for SE/M&P-Cum-Carrier Circle,
HVPNL, Delhi & five sets for SE/M&P-Cum-Carrier Circle, HVPNL, Ambala.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF DIGITAL HIGH VOLTAGE 5 KV INSULATION
RESISTANCE TESTER
Sr.
Parameters
Data
No.
1.
Test Voltage (DC V)
50V to 1KV in steps of 10V , 1kV to 5kV in steps
of 25V with fixed ranges of 500, 1000, 2.5kV and
5KV
2.
Insulation Resistance
0 to 1 TΩ
Measuring Ranges (AutoRange)
3.
Accuracy
±5% of reading
4.
Capacitance measuring
10nF to 25 uF with accuracy of ±10%
range
5.
Current measuring range
±0.01nA to 5mA with accuracy of ±5%
6.
Timer Range
0 to 99 minutes
7.
Testing parameters
IR, PI, DAR,
8.
Guarding
2% error guarding 500 k Ohm leakage with 100
M Ohm load
9.
IP Rating
IP65
10.
Storage
On board storage of measurement with time
stamping upto 100 results or more
11.
Dimensions
Should be portable
12.
Weight (Battery Included)
Approx. 10Kg
13.
Power Source
In Built Rechargeable Battery (Li ion) with 6 Hrs
continuous testing at 5Kv with 100 MΩ load
and shall be operational on main and battery
individually and simultaneously. BATTERY
SHALL MEET IEC 62133
14.
Accessories
Test leads 15 meters each (good insulation)+
large clips, software, screened USB Cable.
Features:• Microprocessor controlled with advanced safety features.
• Display and sound warning if external voltage is present
• Continuous Battery monitoring.
• Auto-Ranging/Auto Power –off
• Built –in –Carrying case, test leads in separate pouch.
• Real-time bar graph display on test voltage and voltage decay during discharge
• Audible and visual message displayed if external voltage is present
• Large LCD
• Automatic Calculation of P.I., DAR.
• Should display direct reading of test voltage across the test piece when test is in
progress.
41
• Should meet safety requirement of EN 61010-1 and EMC requirement of
6EN61326-1.
• Should work in presence of high interference of switch yard up to 220KV.
• Should have PC interface for transfer of Data.
• Instrument should have Cat-IV 600 V Safety.
• Shall have self auto calibration feature at the time of starting or calibration box of
suitable value decayed resistance of 5 kV shall be supplied with testing equipment.
• The testing equipment shall work satisfactorily in presence of noise i.e.
electromagnetic/electrostatic or any other interference in live switchyard upto
220kV S/Stns. and shall provide suitable noise rejection upto level of 4mA or less
with filter option enabling the testing equipment to work satisfactorily in live
switchyard of 220kV level having high interference (substation will be as per
selection of HVPNL).
42
Section – 4, Chapter – 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
SURGE ARRESTORS (LIGHTNING ARRESTORS)
1.0
1.1
1.2
2.0
2.1
Note:
i.)
ii.)
2.2
3.0
3.1
a)
b)
c)
SCOPE:
This specification provides for the design, engineering, manufacture, assembly, stage
testing, inspection and testing before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site
of Metal Oxide (gapless) 198 kV, 120 kV, 60 kV, 30 kV & 9 kV Surge Arrestors complete
with discharge counter, insulating base and other accessories for all rating arresters
except 9 kV & 30 kV surge arrester as specified hereunder.
It is not the intent to specify completely herein all the details of design and construction of
Surge Arrestors. However, Surge Arrestors shall conform in all respects to the high
Standard of design and workmanship and be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation up to Bidder's guarantee in a manner acceptable to HVPNL. The
Arrestors offered shall be complete with all parts, necessary for their effective and trouble
free operation. Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply,
irrespective of whether they are specifically brought out in the commercial order or not.
STANDARDS:
The Surge Arrestors shall conform to the latest editions and amendments available at the
time of supply, of the standards listed hereunder.
Sl.
Standard Title
No.
Ref. No.
1.
IEC:99-4
Specification Part-4 for Surge Arrestors without gap for AC system.
2.
IS:3070
Specification for Lightning Arrestors for alternating current system
(Part-III)
3.
IS: 2629
Recommended practice for hot dip galvanizing of iron and steel.
4.
IS: 2633
Method for testing uniformity of coating on zinc coated articles.
5.
IS:5621
Specification for large hollow porcelain for use in electrical
installation.
6.
IS:2147
Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage
switchgear and control.
7.
Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.
For the purpose of this specification all technical terms used hereinafter shall have the
meaning as per IEC/ISS specification.
For the parameters of the Arrestor which are not specified in IEC specification for Surge
Arrestors, the provisions of IS: 3070 (Part-I) shall be applicable.
Surge Arrestors meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which
ensure equal or better quality than the standards mentioned above shall also be
acceptable. Where the equipment offered by the Bidder conforms to other standards,
salient points of difference between the standards adopted and the specified standards
shall be clearly brought out in the offer. Four (4) copies of the reference standards in
English language shall be furnished along with the offer.
SERVICE CONDITIONS:
As per section-1 Vol-II
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY:
The equipment offered under this specification shall be suitable for the following auxiliary
power supplies.
Power Devices (like drive motors)
415V, 3 Phase, 4 wire 50 Hz, neutral
grounded AC supply
AC Control and protective devices, lighting 240V, single space, 2 wire 50 Hz,
fixtures, space heaters
neutral grounded AC supply
DC alarm, control and protective devices
220V, DC 2-Wire
Each of the foregoing supplies shall be made available by the HVPNL at the terminal point
for each equipment for operation of accessories and auxiliary equipment. Bidder’s scope
-1-
i.)
ii.)
4.0
5.0
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
shall include supply of interconnecting cables, terminal boxes, etc., The above supply
voltages may vary as below and all devices shall be suitable for continuous operation over
entire range of voltages.
AC Supply-voltage+10%&-15% frequency + 5%
DC Supply-15% to +10%
SYSTEM PARAMETERS:
The Surge Arrestors offered under this specification shall conform to the parameters given
below:
Sl.
Particulars
System Voltage (KV rms)
No.
220
132
66
33
11
1.
Nominal system voltage (kV rms) 220
132
66
33
11
2.
Highest system voltage (kV rms) 245
145
72.5
36
12
3.
1.2/50
microsecond
impulse
voltage withstand level
a) Transformers and Reactors (kVp) 900
550
325
170
75
b) Other equipment and lines (kVp)
1050
650
325
170
75
4.
Minimum prospective symmetrical 40
31.5
31.5
26.3
18.4
fault current for 1 second at
Arrestor location (kA rms)
5.
Anticipated levels of Temporary
over voltage and its duration
a) Voltage (p.u.)
1.5/1.2
1.5/1.2
1.5/1.2 1.5/1.2 1.5/1.2
b) Duration (Seconds)
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
1/10
6.
System frequency(Hz)
--------------------- 50 ± 2.5 C/S ---------------------7.
Neutral Grounding
E.E*
E.E*
E.E*
E.E*
E.E*
8.
Number of Phases
----------------------- Three -------------------*E/E = Effectively earth
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:
The Surge Arrestors shall conform to the technical requirements as per Annexure-II.
The energy handling capability of each rating of Arrestor offered, supported by calculations,
shall be furnished in the offer.
The Surge Arrestors shall be fitted with pressure relief devices and arc diverting ports and
shall be tested as per the requirements of IEC specification for minimum prospective
symmetrical fault current as specified in Clause 4.0 (4).
The grading ring on each complete Arrestor for proper stress distribution shall be provided
if required for attaining all the relevant technical parameters.
PROTECTIVE LEVELS:
The basic insulation levels and switching impulse withstand levels of the lines and
equipment to be protected, have been specified in clause 4.0, "Principal Parameters". The
protective characteristics of the Arrestors offered shall be clearly specified in the schedule
of guaranteed technical particulars.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
The materials and components not specifically stated in this specification but which are
necessary for satisfactory operation of the equipment are deemed to be included in the
scope of supply unless specifically excluded.
Unless otherwise brought out separately by the Bidder in the schedule of deviations the
Surge Arrestors offered shall conform to the specification scrupulously. All deviations from
the specification shall be brought out in the schedule of deviations. The discrepancies
between the specification and the catalogues or literature submitted as part of the offer
shall not be considered as valid deviations unless specifically brought out in the schedule
of deviations.
Any deviation which has not been specifically brought out in the schedule of deviations of
the Bid Proposal Sheets, shall not be given effect to. The deviations brought out in the
-2-
5.6.4
5.6.5
5.6.6
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.8
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.3
5.8.4
5.8.5
5.9
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.10
5.10.1
5.10.2
5.10.3
5.11
schedule shall be supported by authentic documents, standards and other references.
Each individual unit of Surge Arrestor shall be hermetically sealed and fully protected
against ingress of moisture. The hermetic seal shall be effective for the entire life time of
the Arrestor and under the service conditions as specified. The Bidder shall furnish
sectional view of the Arrestor, showing details of sealing employed.
The Bidder shall furnish in the offer, a sectional view of pressure relief device employed in
the Surge Arrestors offered.
The Surge Arrestors shall be suitable for hot line washing.
CONSTRUCTION:
All the units of Arrestors of same rating shall be inter changeable without adversely
affecting the performance.
The Surge Arrestors shall be suitable for pedestal type mounting.
All the necessary flanges, bolts, nuts, clamps etc., required for assembly of complete
Arrestor with accessories and mounting on support structure to be supplied by the HVPNL,
shall be included in Bidder's scope of supply.
The drilling details for mounting the Arrestor on HVPNL's support shall be supplied by the
Contractor.
The minimum permissible separation between the Surge Arrestor and any earthed object
shall be indicated by the Bidder in his offer.
PORCELAIN HOUSING:
All porcelain housings shall be free from lamination cavities or other flaws affecting the
maximum level of mechanical and electrical strengths.
The porcelain shall be well vitrified and nonporous.
The Creepage distance of the Arrestor housing shall be as per Annexure-I.
The porcelain petticoat shall be preferably of self-cleaning type (Aerofoil design). The
details of the porcelain housing such as height, angle of inclination, shape of petticoats,
gap between the petticoats, diameter (ID and OD) etc., shall be indicated by the Bidder in
his offer in the form of a detailed drawing.
The Arrestor housing shall conform to the requirements of IEC/ISS specification.
GALVANISATION, NICKEL PLATING ETC.:
All ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanised as per IS:2629 as
amended from time to time., Tinned copper/brass lugs shall be used for internal wiring of
discharge counter. Screws used for electrical connections shall be either made of brass or
nickel plated.
Ground terminal pads and name plate brackets shall be hot dip galvanised.
The material shall be galvanised only after completing all shop operations.
ACCESSORIES AND FITTINGS:
Discharge counters shall be provided for the Arrestors except for 9 kV and 30 kV Arresters.
The discharge counter shall be provided with milli-ammeter for measuring the leakage
current and shall not require any DC or AC Aux. supply. It shall be suitable for outdoor use.
The installation of discharge counter shall not adversely affect the Arrestor performance.
The discharge counter shall register operation whenever lightning or any other type of
surge strikes the Surge Arrestor.
All necessary accessories and Earthing connection leads between the bottom of the
Arrestor and the discharge counter shall be in the Bidder's scope of supply. The
connecting lead between discharge counter and Surge Arrestor shall be of copper flexible
tape of size 25x4 mm and minimum of 1.5 meter length. The discharge counter shall be so
designed that the readings of discharges recorded by the counter and the readings of milli–
ammeter shall be clearly visible through an inspection window to a person standing on
ground. The minimum height of HVPNL's support shall be 2.5 Meters. Terminal connector
conforming to IS: 5561 shall be supplied along with the arrester.
Each Surge Counter shall have terminals of robust construction for connection to Earthing
lead and these shall be suitably arranged so as to enable the incoming and outgoing
connections to be made with minimum bends.
-3-
5.11.1
Suitable grounding terminal shall be provided for earthing of surge arrestors up to water
level. Proper functioning of the Surge counter with Surge Arrestor shall be ensured by the
Bidder.
5.12
NAME PLATE:
The arrestor shall be provided with non-corrosive legible name plate indelibly marked with
the following information:
1. Haryana Vidyut Prasaran Nigam Ltd.
2. Order No.
3. Manufacturer's name or trade mark and identification of the Arrestor being supplied.
4. Rated voltage.
5. Maximum continuous operating voltage.
6. Type.
7. Rated Frequency.
8. Nominal discharge current.
9. Long duration discharge class.
10. Pressure relief current in kA rms.
11. Year of manufacture.
6.0
TESTS:
6.1
TYPE TESTS:
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven years
old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited
laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accredited body or witnessed by HVPN or
another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for
approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
i.)
Insulation withstand test.
ii.) Residual voltage test.
iii.) Long duration current impulse withstand test.
iv.) Operating duty test.
v.) Pressure relief test.
vi.) Test of arrestor dis-connector.
vii.) Artificial pollution test on porcelain housed arrestors.
viii.) Temperature cycle test on porcelain housed arrestors.
ix.) Porosity test on porcelain house arrestors.
x.) Galvanising test on exposed ferrous metal parts.
6.2
ROUTINE TESTS:
As per quality assurance program (QAP).
6.3
ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS:3070 (PART-III) 1993 shall
be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with
in writing by the HVPNL.
i.)
Measurement of power frequency reference voltage.
ii.) Lightening impulse residual voltage test.
iii.) Partial discharge test.
6.4
SURGE MONITOR
The following routine test shall be performed in the presence of HVPNL’s representative:
i.)
Tests for satisfactory operation of surge counter while discharging surges.
ii.) Test for correctness of leakage current meter before and after the passage of surges.
iii.) Visual examination tests.
7.0
INSPECTION:
The inspection may be carried out by the HVPNL at any stage of manufacture. The
7.1
successful Bidder shall grant free access to the HVPNL's representative at all times to the
works and all other places of manufacture, where equipment are being manufactured and
the Contractor shall provide all facilities without extra charges, for unrestricted inspection of
the Contractor's works, raw materials, manufacture of the equipment., all the accessories
-4-
and for conducting necessary test as detailed herein.
The Contractor shall keep the HVPNL informed in advance, about the manufacturing
program so that arrangement can be made for inspection.
No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the material has been
7.3
satisfactorily inspected and tested.
The HVPNL reserves the right to insist for witnessing the acceptance/routine testing of the
7.4
bought out items.
The Contractor shall submit their internal inspection report containing manufacturer's test
7.5
certificates before offering the material for inspection.
7.6
The acceptance of any quantity of equipment shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and shall not prevent
subsequent rejection if such equipment are later found to be defective.
8.0
DOCUMENTATION:
8.1
The successful bidder shall submit four sets of following drawings for HVPNL approval.
List of drawings:i.)
General outline drawings of the complete Arrestors with technical parameters.
ii.) Drawing showing clearance from grounded and other live objects and between adjacent
poles of Surge Arrestors, required at various heights of Surge Arrestors.
iii.) Drawings showing details of pressure relief devices.
iv.) Detailed drawing of discharge counters along with the wiring and schematic drawing of
discharge counter and meter.
v.) Outline drawing of insulating base.
vi.) Details of grading rings, if used.
vii.) Mounting details of Surge Arrestors.
viii.) Details of line terminal and ground terminals.
ix.) Volt-time characteristics of Surge Arrestors.
x.) Details of galvanising being provided on different ferrous parts.
xi.) The detailed dimensional drawing of porcelain housing such as ID, OD, thickness and
insulator details such height, profile of petticoats, angle of inclination and gap between
successive petticoats, total Creepage distance etc.,
NOTE: All above drawings should bear a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping the
approval of drawings by HVPNL.
7.2
-5-
ANNEXURE - I
(Surge Arrestors)
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR METAL OXIDE
(GAPLESS) SURGE ARRESTORS
System voltage wise requirement of parameters(kV)
Particulars
220
132
66
33
11
Rated Arrestor Voltage
198
120
60
30
9
M.C.O.V. (kV rms)
168
104
49
25
7
Installation
----------------------- Outdoor ----------------------Class
-------------------- Station Class ------------------Type of construction for 10 kA
--------- Single Column, Single Phase---------rated Arrestor.
Nominal
discharge
current
10KA
10KA
10KA
10KA
10KA
corresponding to 8/20 microsec
wave shape (kA rms)
Min. discharge capability.
5 KJ/kV (Referred to rated arrester voltage
corresponding to Min. discharge characteristics)
Type of mounting
----------------------- Pedestal ---------------------Connection
P/E
P/E
P/E
P/E
P/E
(Between phase to earth P/E)
(Between phase to phase P/P)
Long duration discharge class
3
3
3
2
1
Max. Switching Surge kV(P)
455
280
140
70
21
Protective level voltage at 1000
Amp.
Max. residual voltage kV(P) for
550
340
170
85
25
nominal discharge current 10 KA
with 8/20 micro second wave
Max.residual voltage kV(P) steep
600
372
186
93
28
fronted current impulse of 10 KA.
Minimum pros-symmetrical fault
40
31.5
31.5
26.3
18.4
current for pressure relief test (kA
rms)
a) Terminal Connector suitable for
---------------Single Tarantula--------------------AAC conductor size
b) Take off
Vertical Vertical
Vertical
Vertical
Vertical
Voltage
(kV
rms)
(corona
Rated voltage of the Arrestor
extinction)
Maximum
radio
Interference
------------------------ 500 -------------------------voltage
(Microvolt)
when
energized at MCOV
Whether insulating base and
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
discharge
counter
with
milli-ammeter are required.
Minimum creepage distance of
6125
3625
1813
900
300
Arrestor housing (mm)
-6-
SECTION-4
CHAPTER-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
11 kV SWITCHGEAR PANELS VACUUM TYPE
1250 AMP RATING
1.0
SCOPE:
This specification covers the design, manufacture, assembly, testing at manufacturer's
works before despatch, supply and delivery F.O.R. destination as per schedule of
requirement (Annexure 'B') of Vacuum Type, 15 Panel 11 kV Switch boards including
11kV bus coupler having normal current rating of 1250 Amps. with rupturing capacity
of 500 MVA.
2.0
STANDARDS:
The switchgear panels shall comply in all respects the requirement laid down in the
latest editions of IS: 13118-1991, IS: 3427 & IS: 3231.
3.0
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions:
Max. temperature
500C
Min. Temperature
-2.50C
Max. relative humidity
100%
Min. relative humidity
26%
Average number of rainy days per
Nearly 120 days/annum.
Average annual rainfall
900mm
Average number of dust storm days
35 per annum.
Isoceraunic level
45
Max. wind pressure
195 kg/Sq.mt.
Altitude above mean sea level
Less than 1000 mts.
3.11
Auxiliary Power Supply:Auxiliary electrical equipment shall be suitable for operation on the following supply
system:-
a)
Power devices
(like drive motors)
b)
DC alarm, control and
protective devices
i)
c)
Lighting
415 V, 3 phase 4 wire 50Hz, neutral grounded AC supply
220V DC, underground 2 wire for 220 KV 132 KV &
66 KV Sub-Station.
245 V, single phase, 50 Hz AC Supply.
Each of the foregoing supplies shall be made available by the purchaser at the terminal
point for each circuit breaker for operation of accessories and auxiliary equipment.
Bidders scope include supply of interconnecting cables terminal boxes etc. The above
supply voltage may vary as below and all devices shall be suitable for continuous
operation over the entire range of voltages.
i) AC Supply
ii) DC Supply
voltage + 10% & -15 %, frequency ± 5%
± 10%
1
4.0
TYPE & RATING:
The panels 11 kV switchgear panels shall comprise of 11 kV Vacuum Type circuit
breakers, instrument panels and instrument transformers etc. suitable for indoor use.
The equipment shall be totally enclosed in a metal clad cubicle, dust and vermin proof
with necessary isolation arrangement. Each panel shall be easily extensible on either
side and should be complete with necessary internal copper connections, small
wiring, L.T. fuses and supporting frame work with bolts to secure it to the floor. The
Circuit Breakers shall be draw out type in horizontal position.
Principal parameters
4.1
4.2
The breakers shall have the following ratings:
Type
Vacuum
No of poles
3
4.3
Nominal system voltage
11 kV
4.4
Highest system voltage
12 kV
4.5
Rated frequency
50 +/- 1.5 Hz
4.6
Rated continuous current
rating at an ambient
temp. as specified in
IS : 13118-1991
(Latest edition)
4.7
Symmetrical breaking
capacity
500 MVA
4.8
Impulse withstand test
voltage
75 kV (Peak)
4.9
One minute power
frequency withstand
test voltage
28 kV (rms)
4.10
Short time current
rating
Not less than 26.2 kA current
corresponding to 500 MVA for 1 sec.
4.11
System neutral
Solidly earthed.
5.0
GENERAL DESIGN OF SWITCHGEAR PANELS :
5.1
OPERATING MECHANISM:
The vacuum type circuit breaker shall be draw out type & trip free. The VCBs shall be
suitable for operation from 220 V DC auxiliary supply. The operating mechanism shall
be motor operated spring charged type. There shall be provision(s) for manual
charging of closing spring and emergency hand trip. The motor used for the purpose
will be suitable for 240 V AC as well as for 220 V DC.
1250 Amp for incoming & bus coupler and 400 Amp
for outgoing feeders.
2
The operating mechanism shall work satisfactorily at 85 % - 110 % of rated supply
voltage. The VCB shall have 2 normally open & 2 normally-closed auxiliary contacts
over & above the ones required for various control & supervision circuits.
5.2
INSTRUMENT PANELS :
Each unit shall have its own instrument panel provided at the top & complete with
small wiring connections from relays, instrument transformers, metering instruments,
indicating instruments, selector switches & circuit breaker control switch. All wiring
shall be carried out by using stranded single annealed copper conductor insulated
with poly vinyl chloride insulation suitable for 650 V service and in accordance with
IS:732-1963. CT/PT circuit shall use wire of not less than 4.0 mm2 cross-sectional
area whereas control/alarm/supervision circuit shall use wire of not less than 2.5 mm2
cross-sectional area.
All wires will be continuous from one terminal to the other and, also will have no
Tee-junction enroute. The connections shall be securely made with the help of
connecting lugs duly crimped on to the copper conductor. The meters and relays shall
be mounted in a convenient position so as to be readily accessible for inspection or
repair. The terminal board provided in the instrument panel of VCBs will be made of
moulded dielectric having brass studs, washers, holding nuts & locking nuts. All
holding nuts shall be secured by locking nuts. The connection studs shall project 6
mm from the lock nut surface. NO OTHER TYPE OF TERMINAL BOARD IS
ACCEPTABLE. The panels shall have a degree of protection of IP-4x. The leads from
metering CTs shall be directly terminated at TTB & there from at the KWH meter/SEM
with a provision to seal TTB and KWH meter/SEM. The said CT leads will be
concealed to prevent their tempering enroute. Similarly PT leads from secondary box
of the PT to TTB & there from to energy meter including inter panel PT leads will also
be concealed to prevent their tempering. The mode & extent of concealing the
metering leads of CTs & PTs to prevent their tempering (by unscrupulous operating
personnel) will be discussed & mutually agreed upon with the successful bidder(s).
TTB used on the instrument panel should be suitable for front connections.
Earthing of current free metallic parts or metallic bodies of the relays/switches
mounted on the instrument panel and metal enclosed switchgear shall be done by a
suitably sized copper conductor. Earth bus made of 25x3 mm bare copper flat will be
extended through entire length of 11 kV switch-board with suitable provision to
connect it to the sub-station earth at the extremities. The earthing arrangement will
meet with the requirements laid down in IS : 3427 read with its latest amendment.
5.3
VACUUM INTERRUPTER:
The Vacuum interrupter of 12 kV minimum 26.2 kA short time current rating, 2000
Amp. normal current rating capable of withstanding minimum 100 full short circuit
operations as per test duty 1 to 5 of IEC-56. Vacuum Interrupters for incomers & bus
coupler as well as outgoing shall be of same type. These vacuum interrupters shall be
of approved make only.
5.4
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER:
The secondary voltage & current rating of the instrument transformers shall match
with the metering or protective equipment. The CTs shall have ratio & accuracy class
as mentioned in the schedule of requirement. The CTs shall be wound/ring type in
accordance with their ratings. The terminal boards associated with
differential CTs, REF CTs & over current/earth fault protection CTs will be of
disconnecting type having short circuiting facility &thus facilitate secondary testing of
3
concerned protective relay without disturbing the associated small wiring. Interchangeability of housing of CTs from one panel to another must be ensured.
A resin cast potential transformers shall be provided on the Incoming side of each
panel set & shall be star/star connected as per attached Schedule of Requirement
“Annexure-‘A’.
The neutral point of star connected secondary windings of instrument transformers
shall be earthed to the main earth bus referred to in the concluding paragraph of
clause 5.2. Multiple earthing of any instrument transformers shall be avoided.
5.5
BUS - BARS:
All the panels shall be provided with one set of 3 phase 1250 Amps. heat shrunk PVC
Sleeves insulated Main electrolytic copper bus bars for all switchboards and shall be
connected in a separate moisture and vermin proof sheet metal chamber. The
bus-bars connections & insulator supports shall be mechanically strung & rigidly
supported so as to withstand the stresses generated by vibrations, variations in
temperature and due to severe short circuits.
The bus bars shall be Heat shrunk PVC Sleeves insulated type and supported on
insulators at short intervals keeping adequate clearance as per IE rules between bus
bars and earth. The bus bar chamber shall be provided with inspection covers with
gaskets & bus bar shutters. Provision shall be made for future extension of bus bar &
switch board.
5.6
LIMIT OF TEMPERATURE RISE:
The temperature rise of the current carrying parts shall not exceed the permissible
limits above the ambient temperature as per relevant standards (latest edition).
However, the reference maximum ambient temperature may be taken as 500C.
5.7
BUSHING INSULATORS:
These shall comply with the latest issue of IS : 2099 in all respects.
5.8
DISCONNECTORS OF CIRCUIT BREAKER & THEIR INTERLOCKS:
All disconnectors (isolators) of the 11 kV VCBs & interlocks between different pieces
of apparatus provided for reasons of safety & for convenience of operation of
switchgear shall meet with the requirement of IS:3427-1969 read with its latest
amendment. Efficient mechanical interlocking shall be provided to meet the following
conditions
i)
It shall be possible to insert/withdraw the breaker only after circuit breaker has
been opened.
ii)
It shall be possible to insert/withdraw the breaker only when it is fully open
position as well as it is in Isolated/test position.
iii)
It shall not be possible to remove the breaker until the moveable plug unit
having secondary connections has been withdrawn.
iv)
It shall not be possible to replace in position moveable plug unit unless the
circuit breaker has been racked in.
v)
Provision of shutters or locks shall be made to prevent access to bus bar
chambers and receptacles when the circuit breaker is withdrawn.
vi)
Provision shall be made for locking the circuit breaker closing mechanism in
open position.
4
vii)
5.9
Provision shall be made for locking the circuit breaker closing mechanism of
bus coupler when it is charged from one side only i.e. either from bus side or
outgoing side.
CABLE BOXES:
Each 11 kV incoming VCB & 11kV bus coupler shall be provided with cable boxes
suitable for receiving 2 sets of cable each comprising 3 nos 630 mm2, 11 kV single
core XLPE, outer PVC sheathed cables. Accordingly, joining kits and sealing material
shall be provided for 2 sets of cables. The 11kV Capacitor controlling VCB (panel with
CT ratio 800-400/5A) shall be provided with 2 sets of cable boxes suitable to receive
2x3 core 11kV XLPE PVC sheathed cable of size upto 400mm2. The 11 kV station
transformer VCB shall be provided with cable boxes suitable to receive 3 core, 11 kV,
XLPE cables of size upto 50 mm2 (panel with CT ratio 60-30/5 A). Each cable box
shall have vertical entry from below. These cable boxes shall be complete in all
respects including cable glands of requisite size. The cable boxes should only be
either heat shrinkable or push on type. The cable boxes for outgoing panels are not in
the scope of this specification.
5.9 A EARTHING TRUCK:
One no. earthing trolley should be provided for each incomer panel. Earthing trolley
must be full fault make type device which is capable of making fault at 65.5 KA(peak)
and carry 26.2 KA for one second. The earthing truck for incoming panel must be so
designed that it is impossible to earth a live circuit.
5.10
SUPERVISION SCHEME :
5.10.1 Instrument panels on each of the 11 kV VCB covered by this specification shall be
provided with the following indicating lamps/relay:Circuit breaker `open'
Green
Circuit breaker `close'
Red
Auto trip
White
Circuit breaker spring charged
Blue
For monitoring of trip circuit both in pre-close and post- close position of the circuit
breaker, 1 no. automatic trip circuit supervision relay will be provided on each of the
11 kV (incoming) instrument panel. In case of trip circuit becoming faulty, the
operation of this relay shall be accompanied by visual and audio annunciation in
accordance with clause 5.10.1 of the specification.
However, the trip circuit of each of the 11 kV outgoing/bus coupler/capacitor/Stn. VCB
will be monitored `on demand' with the help of an indicating lamp & a push button
both when the VCB is `open & closed'. The lamp will be `amber' coloured.
Circuit breaker `close' & `open' lamps will be wired so as to be on 240 V AC under
`normal' condition. These lamps will be switched over to 220 V DC automatically
in the event of failure of 240 V AC supply. Each of 11 kV (incoming) instrument panel
will be equipped with a suitable relay for the purpose.
5.11 ALARM SCHEME :
5.11.1 NON TRIP ALARM SCHEME:
Each of 11 kV (incoming) panel will be provided with a non-trip alarm scheme
comprising suitable auxiliary relay (rated for 220 V DC), accept push button, reset
push button & a buzzer. It will cater to non-trip condition such as trip circuit faulty &
5
PT secondary fuses blow `off'. The non-trip alarm scheme will meet with the following
requirements: i)
The closing of an initiating contact shall actuate a buzzer and will be
accompanied by a flag indication on the concerned auxiliary relay.
ii)
The closing of an initiating contact shall glow a lamp which will not reset until
the fault has cleared.
iii)
It shall be possible to silence the buzzer by pressing `accept' push button. If
after cancelling the alarm but before resetting the visual signal, the same fault
persists the buzzer shall be suppressed.
iv)
If after canceling the alarm but before resetting visual signal some other fault
takes place, the alarm accompanied by flag indication on appropriate auxiliary
relay shall take place.
v)
If after canceling the alarm and after resetting the visual signal, the same fault
appears or some other fault take place, the alarm, flag indication and non-trip
lamp indication shall reappear as usual.
vi)
The non-trip alarm acceptance shall be by means of a push button and
resetting of visual signal may also preferably be done through a push button.
vii)
Means shall be provided for test checking the lamp and alarm circuit at
frequent intervals.
viii)
The equipment shall be suitable for 220 Volts DC operation.
5.11.2.
TRIP ALARM SCHEME:
Trip commands due to operation of protective relay on any of 11 kV VCB constituting
the switchboard will trip the concerned VCB. Its auxiliary contact will actuate a bell
(provided in each of the 11 kV incoming VCB) & will be cancelled by the associated
circuit breaker control handle. Auto trip lamp will glow on the concerned 11 kV VCB &
there will be flag indication on the concerned protective relay.
5.12
PT FUSE FAIL ALARM SCHEME:
Each of the 11 kV (incoming) instrument panel is to be provided with a relay to
monitor the fuses on the secondary side of 11 kV metering PT. The failure of any of
secondary fuse on the 11 kV PT will be accompanied by visual & audio
indication in accordance with clause 5.10.1 of the specification. None of the 11 kV
outgoing/capacitor/Stn. VCB will be provided with fuses & inter-circuit PT leads may
run from one bus wire board to the other.
METERING SCHEME:
Each of the 11 kV VCB will be provided with a suitably sealed ammeter (additional
dials, if any, required to cover all the taps of the CTs shall be included at the time of
bidding) with a selector switch facilitating measurement of phase currents as well as
unbalance current. The coil of ammeter shall be rated for 5 Amp. The instrument shall
be of moving iron spring controlled type of industrial grade `A' classification having
accuracy class 1.0 & shall conform to IS:1248(1968).
5.13.
5.13.1
6
5.13.2
Each of the 11 kV (incoming) VCB will be provided with a suitably sealed voltmeter
with a selector switch. The selector switch shall facilitate the measurement of phase
to phase & phase to neutral voltage of all the three phases one by one. The coil of the
voltmeter shall be rated for 110 V (phase to phase). The instrument shall be of moving
iron spring controlled type of industrial grade `A' classification with accuracy class 1.0
& shall conform to IS:1248(1968).
5.13.3
Each of the 11 kV VCB except the 11 kV capacitor VCB & Incomer VCBs will be
equipped with a three-phase four-wire Electronic KWH meter as per Annexure-‘D’.
11kV incomer VCB will be equipped with SEM as per Annexure-‘C’.
5.13.4
Each of the 11 kV (incoming) VCB will be provided with a power factor meter. The PF
meter having a range of 0.5Lag - one - 0.5lead shall be of 2 element type suitable for
use on three phase three wire unbalanced system. It shall be rated for 5 A CT
secondary & 110 V (phase to phase) available from 11 kV PT mounted on each of the
11 kV incoming VCB. The instrument shall be iron-cored dynamometer type having
accuracy class 1.0.
N.B.
Routine test certificates of all the indicating & integrating instruments will be submitted
alongwith the routine test certificates of 11 kV switchgear.
5.14
CONTROL SCHEME :
5.14.1
The instrument panel of each of the 11 kV VCB will be equipped with a circuit breaker
control handle of pistol grip type with spring return to neutral position and having bell
alarm cancellation contacts. The control handle shall be so designed that after being
operated to `close' a VCB the operation can not be repeated until the control handle
has been turned to `trip' position making it impossible to perform two closing operation
consecutively.
5.14 .2 The rating of the control handle shall be suitable for the duty imposed by the closing
and opening mechanism of VCB. The moving and fixed contacts shall be of such a
shape & material to ensure good contact and long life under service operating duty.
All contacts shall be readily renewable.
5.14.3 The number of contacts in the control handle will be decided by the bidder keeping in
view the requirements of this specification. Two pairs of contacts shall be kept spare.
The total number of contacts proposed to be provided shall be stated in the bid.
5.14.4 Safety against inadvertent operation due to light touch on the control handle shall be
ensured.
5.15
PROTECTION SCHEME:
5.15.1 FOR INCOMING PANELS:
The back up protection shall be in the form of a combined over current and earth fault
relay(two over current and one earth fault). The relay shall be housed in draw out
flush mounting case.
7
This shall be triple pole having Inverse Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) characteristics
with a 3/10 time current curve i.e. the relay operating time shall be 3 second at 10
times the plug setting at TMS 1. The outer element of the relay shall be arranged for
over current protection and shall have a setting range of 50-200 % of 5 A (The relay
for station transformer shall have a setting range of 20-80 % of 5 A) and adjustable in
suitable equal steps by means of a plug board. The central element shall be used for
earth fault protection with a setting range of 20-80 % of 5 A adjustable in suitable
equal steps by means of a plug board (for station transformer panels, the setting
range shall be 10-40% of 5 A ) Each of the three elements shall be fitted with shunt
reinforcing unit with hand reset operation indicator.
5.15.2 FOR OUTGOING FEEDERS & BUS COUPLER PANELS:
Each outgoing feeder panel shall be provided with a triple pole IDMTL type combined
over current and earth fault relay (two over current and one earth fault element)
conforming to the technical specification stated in the clause : 5.14.1 above and one
set of triple pole instantaneous relay (high set element) in the form of two over current
and one earth fault element.
The outer element of the relay shall be arranged for over current protection and shall
have a setting range of 500-2000 % of 5 A (The relay for station transformer shall
have a setting range of 200-800 % of 5 A) and adjustable in suitable steps.
The central element shall be used for earth fault protection with a setting range of
200-800 % of 5 A (The relay for station transformer shall have setting range of
100-400 % of 5 A) adjustable in suitable steps.
The relay shall have low transient over reach with a high pick-up/ drop of ratio. The
relay will be connected in series with the triple pole combined over-current and earth
fault relay referred to above and shall be so wired so as to take this (instantaneous)
out, if so desired by the purchaser at any time during operation of the equipment.
5.15.3 FOR CAPACITOR PANEL:
Each capacitor panel shall be provided with the following relays for protection of
capacitor banks:i)
ii)
Triple pole non-directional IDMTL type combined over current & earth fault
relay (two over current & one earth fault element) conforming to the technical
specification stated in clause 5.14.1 above.
1 no. inverse time over voltage relay with setting range 100 % to 130 % of
110 V available from 11 kV PT mounted in the 11 kV (incoming) VCB along
with auxiliary transformers(for external mounting) of ratio 110/103.5 to 116.5 V
(in steps of one volt) to be used for compensating the error of over voltage
relay.
iii)
1 no. inverse time under voltage relay with setting range of 50 % to 90 % of
110 V (phase to phase connections).
iv)
1 no. neutral displacement rely with settings 5.4, 7.5, 12.5 & 20 volts and to be
fed from open delta winding of three phase (11000//3/(110//3) Volts. Residual
voltage transformer (Residual voltage transformer is not a part of this
8
specification). The bidders offering relays with different settings than above
shall technically justify their offer.
v)
5.15.4
a)
b)
N.B.
5.16
6.0
6.1
10 minute timer to ensure that the capacitor bank is fully discharged once it
has been switched "OFF" before it can be switched "ON" again.
COMMUNICATION COMPATIBILTY OF RELAYS
All relays shall conform to the requirements of IS:3231/IEC-60255/IEC 61000 or other
applicable standards. Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi-flush mounting on the
front with connections from the rear. All protective relays shall be in draw out or plug-in
type modular cases with proper testing facilities. Necessary test plugs/test handles
shall be supplied loose and shall be included in contractor’s scope of supply.
All main protective relays (viz over current and earth fault, Restricted Earth Fault, Over
voltage and neutral displacement) shall be numerical type and communication
protocol shall be as per IEC 61850. Further, the test levels of EMI as indicated in IEC
61850 shall be applicable to these.
For numerical relays, the scope shall include the following:
Necessary software and hardware to up/down load the data to/from the relay from/to
personal computer installed in the substation. However, the supply of PC is not
covered under this clause.
The relay shall have suitable communication facility for future connectivity to SCADA.
The relay shall be capable of supporting IEC 61850 protocol (with optical port).
The relay shall be suitable for 220 V DC auxiliary supply. The relay cover & case
shall be dust proof, water proof & vermin proof. Operating indicators shall be provided
on all protective relays/ on their immediate auxiliary units to indicate the type of fault &
phase/phases involved. It shall be possible to reset the operation indication without
opening the relay case. The routine test certificates of all protective & auxiliary relays
will be submitted along with routine test certificates of 11 kV switchgear covered by
the specification.
D.C. FAIL ALARM SCHEME:
A suitable relay for monitoring the DC supply to the 11 kV switchboard shall be
mounted on each of the 11 kV incoming instrument panel. The operation of DC fail
scheme shall be accompanied by visual (indicating lamp on the instrument panel) &
audio (ringing of hooter) annunciation. It shall be possible to silence the hooter by
pressing the `accept' push button while the lamp shall continue to glow till the fault
has been attended to & DC supply restored. A DC fail `Test' push button may be
provided to test the lamp circuit of the scheme.
TEST
All routine tests shall be carried out in accordance with IS : 13118-1991 (latest edition
thereof).
TYPE TESTS
The equipment offered should be type tested. Type test report should not be more
than seven years old, reckoned from the date of bid opening, in respect of the
following tests, carried out in accordance with ISS-13118/IEC-56, from Govt./ Govt.
approved test house, shall be submitted along with bid:
i)
Impulse with-stand voltage tests.
ii)
Power frequency voltage dry & wet tests on main circuits.
iii)
Short circuit with stand capability tests.
iv)
Mechanical endurance tests.
v)
Temperature rise test
9
However Mechanical endurance tests and Temperature rise test conducted at Firm’s
works in the presence of representative of any of the SEBs/State Power Utilities shall
also be acceptable.
The remaining type test report as per clause 6.0 of ISS-13118/IEC-56 shall be
submitted by the successful bidder with in three month from the date of placement of
Purchase Order. These type test reports will also be from Govt./ Govt. approved test
house & shall not be more than seven years old reckoned from the date of placement
of order.
Voltage transformers & current transformers shall comply with the type tests as
stipulated in the latest version of IS : 3156 & IS: 2705 respectively. The reports of all
type tests conducted shall be supplied. The 11 kV VCB & associated CTs & PTs shall
be subjected to routine tests as specified in the latest version of the relevant ISS in
the presence of purchaser's representative, if so desired by the purchaser. The
routine test certificates of bought out components such as relays, switches, indicating
instruments, KWH Meter & SEM will also be presented to HVPNL's inspecting officer
who will forward them to the purchaser alongwith his inspection report for the main
equipment. All test reports should be got approved from the purchaser before
despatch of equipment.
7.0
DRAWINGS:
In addition to any other drawing which the tenderer may like to furnish to explain the
merits of his proposal, following drawings shall be submitted with the tender in
quadruplicate :
i
Principal dimensional details of 11 kV Switchgear.
ii
General arrangement of 15 Panel 11kV switchboard including its foundation
details.
iii
Schematic drawings of control, metering & protection circuits in respect of
11kV incoming VCB, 11kV bus coupler, 11kV outgoing VCB including station
transformer VCB & 11 kV capacitor VCB along with detailed write-up.
iv
Drawing showing height of 11 kV bus bars & arrangement of bus bars
v
Vacuum interrupter drawing.
The successful bidder shall submit final version of drawings complete in all respects in
quadruplicate within 15 days of placement of order for purchaser's approval. The
purchaser shall communicate his comments/ approval on the drawings to the supplier
within one month of their receipt. The manufacturer shall, if so required by the
purchaser, modify the drawings and resubmit the same for purchaser's approval
within two weeks of receipt of comments. Such duly revised drawings will be
approved by the purchaser within two weeks of their receipt.
After receipt of purchaser's approval to drawings, the manufacturer will submit five
sets of all approved drawings and five sets of manual of instructions to our Design
Office.
One set of all the approved drawings and manual of instructions will be
supplied along with each equipment without which the supply will not be
considered as complete supply.
10
In order to ensure timely receipt of all the drawings, literature & reproducibles etc., the
purchase section of MM organization will issue despatch instruction for despatch of
11 kV switchgear.
8.0
SPECIAL TOOLS:
The tenderer shall separately quote for a set of special tools, if so required, for erection
and maintenance of the switchgear panels.
9.0
DEVIATION FROM SPECIFICATION:
Should the tenderer wish to deviate from the provisions of the specification either on
account of manufacturing practice, or any other reasons, he shall draw attention to the
proposed point of deviation in the tender and submit such full information drawing and
specification so that merits of his proposal may be fully understood. The specification
shall be held binding unless the deviation have been fully recorded as required above.
10.0 TRAINING FACILITIES: VOID
11.0 GUARANTEED AND OTHER TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:
These particulars shall be furnished strictly as per Annexure-A. Any deviation from
this specification shall be clearly brought out separately.
11
ANNEXURE -'A'
SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENT
VACUUM TYPE 15 PANELS, 11 kV SWITCH BOARDS AND EACH SWITCH BOARD
COMPRISING OF THE FOLLOWING:1.01.
1 NO. INCOMING PANEL EQUIPPED AS BELOW:
-1 No.
Triple pole 500 MVA, 11 kV 1250 A draw out type vacuum circuit breaker fitted with
arc control device, interlocks, auxiliary switches isolating contacts, emergency hand
trip device, mechanical `ON' & `Off' indicator and motor operated spring charged
mechanism.
-1 Set
Bus bars 3 phase 1250 A. Cable boxes located at the rear of the unit for receiving
2 set of power cables each comprising 3 no. single core 630 mm2 11 kV XLPE PVC
sheathed cables & complete in all respect with jointing kits etc. as per clause 5.9 of
the specification.
-3 No.
CTs of ratio 1800-900/0.577-5 A with first core for differential protection having a
minimum knee point voltage equal to 40 RCT (neglecting lead resistance) and the 2nd
core for REF protection having a minimum knee point voltage of 92(RCT)V on 1800 A
tap where RCT secondary winding resistance. These CTs shall conform to accuracy
class PS of ISS:2705 (Part-IV) and shall have Magnetising current as low as possible
but in no case exceeding the value corresponding to class 5 P of IS:2705 (Part-III).
-3 No.
CTs of 1800-900/5 A of 15 VA output and 5P10 accuracy for over current and earth
fault protection & Ampere meter etc.
-3 No.
CTs of 1800-900/1 A of 15 VA output, accuracy class 0.2S and ISF less than 5 for
SEM.CT secondary terminals shall be brought out in weather proof sealable terminal
box & shall be connected to SEM through TTB. Both TTBs and SEM shall be sealable
type.
-1 No.
3 phase star/star connected resin cast voltage transformer as per IS: 3156
(Part-II)1965 complete with HT & LT fuses, isolating plugs and sockets for HT & LT
copper connectors, current limiting resistances as per following specifications:Sr.No.
Core
Ratio
VA Burden
Accuracy
1.
Core-I
11000/√3/110/√3
100VA
1/3p
2.
Core-II
11000/√3/110/√3
10VA
0.2
CT Secondary terminal of metering core i.e. Core-II shall be brought out in whether
proof terminal box and shall be connected to SEM through TTB. Both TTBs and SEM
shall be sealable type.
-1 set
Vermin and dust proof fitments.
-1 NO.
INSTRUMENT PANEL MOUNTED ON TOP AND EQUIPPED AS BELOW:
-1 No.
Ammeter with selector switch as per clause: 5.13.1 of the specification.
-1 No.
Voltmeter with selector switch as per clause: 5.13.2 of the specification.
-1 No.
PF meter with TTB as per clause: 5.13.4 of the specification.
12
-1 Set
Triple pole combined over current and earth fault IDMTL relay as per clause: 5.15.1 of
the specification.
-1 Set
Over voltage relay for incomer panels only.
-1 No.
Tripping relay with hand reset contacts suitable for 220 V DC auxiliary supply.
-4 No.
Indicating lamps with fittings to indicate breaker `open', `close', `auto trip' & spring
charged as per clause 5.10 of the specification.
-1 No.
Automatic trip circuit supervision scheme as per clause 5.10 of the specification.
-1 No.
PT fuse alarm scheme as per clause 5.12 of the specification.
-1 No.
DC fail alarm scheme as per clause 5.16 of the specification.
-1 No.
Circuit breaker control handle as per clause 5.14 of the specification.
-1 No.
Alarm equipment for non-trip & trip fault annunciation as per clause 5.11.1 & 5.11.2 of
the specification.
-1 No.
Cubicle illumination lamp with door operated ON/OFF switch.
-1 No.
15 A power socket with switch.
-1 No.
Anti-condensation tubular space heater suitable for connection to 240 V AC supply
with a thermostat & a miniature circuit breaker.
-1 No.
Special Energy Meter as per specification attached (Annexure-‘C’).
1.02 8 N0. OUTGOING FEEDER PANELS EACH COMPRISING OF:
-1 No.
Triple pole 400 A, 500 MVA 11 kV circuit breaker fitted with Arc control devices,
interlock arrangement, auxiliary switches, isolating contacts, emergency hand trip
device, mechanical ON & OFF indicator & motor operated spring charged mechanism
operate at 220 V DC.
-1 Set
Bus bars 3 phase 1250 A.
-1 No.
Trifurcating main cable box for receiving 3 core XLPE PVC sheathed cable upto 400
mm2 size & complete in all respects with cable glands and jointing kits etc. as per
clause 5.9 of the specification.
-3 No.
CTs of ratio 300-150/5-5 A with first core of 15 VA output & 5P10 accuracy for O/C &
E/F protection & second core 15 VA output & accuracy class 1.0 for metering.
-1 No.
Anti-condensation tubular space heater for connection to 240V AC supply with a
thermostat & a miniature circuit breaker.
-1 Set
Vermin proof & dust proof fitments.
-1 No.
Instrument panel mounted on top & equipped as below:13
-1 No.
Ammeter with selector switch as per clause: 5.13.1 of specification.
-1 No.
KWH meter with TTB as per clause: 5.13.3 & 5.2 of the specification.
-1 set
Triple pole combined 2 O/C & 1 E/F IDMTL relay supplemented with triple pole
instantaneous relay (high set element) in the form of 2 O/C & 1 E/F as per clause :
5.14.2 of the specification.
-1 No.
Tripping relay with hand reset contacts suitable for 220V DC auxiliary supply.
-4 No.
Indicating lamps with fittings to indicate breaker `open', `close', `auto-trip' & 'spring
charged' as per clause 5.10 of the specification.
-1 No.
Indicating lamp with fittings & push button switch to indicate trip circuit healthy in
pre-close & post-close conditions as per clause: 5.10 of the specification.
-1 No.
Circuit breaker control handle as per clause: 5.14 of the specification.
-1 No.
Cubicle illumination lamp with door operated ON/OFF switch.
-1 No.
15 A power socket with switch.
-1 No.
Anti-condensation tubular heater suitable for connection to 240 V AC supply with a
thermostat & a miniature circuit breaker.
1.03
2 NO. OUTGOING FEEDER PANELS:
Similar to item 1.02 but with the following cable box/CTs: -
-1 No.
Trifurcating main cable box for receiving 3 core XLPE, PVC sheathed cable upto 400 mm2
size and complete with cable glands and jointing kits etc. as per clause: 5.8 of the
specification.
-3 No.
CTs of ratio 400-200/5/5 A with first core of 15 VA output & class 5P10 accuracy for O/C &
E/F protection & second core of 15 VA output & accuracy class 1.0 for metering.
1.04
1 NO. PANEL FOR CAPACITOR BANK:
The capacitor controlling breaker should be suitable to meet all conditions required for
capacitor operation & should be suitable for controlling capacitive current upto 800A at
11 kV which is equivalent to 15 MVAR approx. & equipped similar to item No. 1.02
except KWH meter but with the following changes/additions:
-3 No.
CTs of ratio 800-400/5A output & 5P10 accuracy for over current & earth fault
protection.
-
Protection scheme including closing circuit interlock timer shall be as per clause: 5.15.3
of the specification.
1.05
1 NO. STATION TRANSFORMER FEEDER PANEL:
Similar to item No. 1.02 but with the following cable box & CTs:-
14
-1 No.
Trifurcating main cable box for receiving 3 core XLPE cable upto 50 mm2 size &
complete in all respect as per clause: 5.8 of the specification.
-3 No. CTs of ratio 60-30/5-5 A with first core of 15 VA output & class 5P10 accuracy
for O/C & E/F protection & second core of 15 VA output & accuracy class 1.0 for
metering.
1.06
1 No. INCOMING PANEL EQUIPPED EXACTLY IDENTICAL TO ITEM 1.01 DETAILED
ABOVE
NOTE:
The panels at Sr. No. 1.01 (incoming panels) shall be placed adjacent to the both sides
of the 11kV bus coupler and further all the outgoings panels, capacitor panel & station
transformer panel will be adjusted on both sides of the aforesaid incomer panels/site
requirement. Provision shall be made to split the 12 panels boards into two parts each
having an incoming panel at its end with complete non-trip alarm, trip alarm &
protection schemes.
1.07 1 N0. BUS COUPLER OUTGOING FEEDER PANEL EACH COMPRISING OF:
-1 No.
Triple pole 1250 A, 500 MVA 11 kV circuit breaker fitted with Arc control devices,
interlock arrangement, auxiliary switches, isolating contacts, emergency hand trip
device, mechanical ON & OFF indicator & motor operated spring charged mechanism
operate at 220 V DC.
-1 Set
Bus bars 3 phase 1250 A.
-1 No.
Trifurcating main cable box for receiving single core XLPE PVC sheathed cable upto
630 mm2 size & complete in all respects with cable glands and jointing kits etc. as per
clause 5.9 of the specification.
-3 No.
CTs of ratio 1800-900/5 A with first core of 15 VA output & 5P10 accuracy for O/C &
E/F protection & second core 15 VA output & accuracy class 1.0 for metering.
-1 No.
Anti-condensation tubular space heater for connection to 240V AC supply with a
thermostat & a miniature circuit breaker.
-1 Set
Vermin proof & dust proof fitments.
-1 No.
Instrument panel mounted on top & equipped as below:-
-1 No.
Ammeter with selector switch as per clause: 5.13.1 of specification.
-1 set
Triple pole combined 2 O/C & 1 E/F IDMTL relay supplemented with triple pole
instantaneous relay (high set element) in the form of 2 O/C & 1 E/F as per clause :
5.14.2 of the specification.
-1 No.
Tripping relay with hand reset contacts suitable for 220V DC auxiliary supply.
-4 No.
Indicating lamps with fittings to indicate breaker `open', `close', `auto-trip' & 'spring
charged' as per clause 5.10 of the specification.
-1 No.
Indicating lamp with fittings & push button switch to indicate trip circuit healthy in
pre-close & post-close conditions as per clause: 5.10 of the specification.
15
-1 No.
Circuit breaker control handle as per clause: 5.14 of the specification.
-1 No.
Cubicle illumination lamp with door operated ON/OFF switch.
-1 No.
15 A power socket with switch.
-1 No.
Anti-condensation tubular heater suitable for connection to 240 V AC supply with a
thermostat & a miniature circuit breaker.
2.
11 kV INCOMING & OUTGOING FEEDER VCBs.
2.1
11 kV incoming VCBs equipped exactly identical to the item 1.01 detailed above.
2.2
11 kV outgoing VCBs equipped identical to either 1.02 or 1.03 detailed above. The
precise split up will be intimated to the successful bidder.
2.3
11kV Outgoing bus coupler equipped identical to 1.08 detailed above.
NOTE :
These incoming & outgoing panels' bus orientation, physical dimension and auxiliary
wiring etc. shall be such that these can be connected with the already installed/running
11 kV switchgear.
16
HARYANA VIDYUT PRASARAN NIGAM LTD.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
245kV, 145kV, 72.5kV ,36kV
&12kV NCTs
E:\DATA AFTER
- Copy.doc
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014
CT-1
CONTENTS
CLAUSE NO.
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
TITLE
SCOPE
STANDARDS
SERVICE CONDITIONS
PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
TESTS
DOCUMENTATION
PAGE NO.
3
3
4
4
6
9
10
ANNEXURES
I.
COREWISE DETAILS FOR
A-(i)
B-(i)
C-(i)
C-(ii)
D-(i)
D-(ii)
D-(iii)
E-(i)
E-(ii)
E-(iii)
245kV NCTs (450-300/1A)
145kV NCTs (250-150-100/1A)
72.5kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCTs (1500-1000/1A)
72.5kV NCTs (300-200-150/1A) FOR 66/11kV T/Fs
36kV T/F I/C NCTs (1000-600-400/5A) FOR 132/33KV T/F WITH 26.3KA STC
36kV T/F I/C NCTs (2000-1000/5A) FOR 220/33KV T/F ITH 26.3KA STC
36kV T/F NCT (100-50/5A) FOR 4 MVA 33/11KV T/F WITH 26.3KA STC
12kV NCTs (1800-900/5A) FOR 25/31.5 MVA
12kV NCTs (1200-900/5A) FOR 12.5/16 MVA & 16/20 MVA
12kV NCTs (300-150/5A) FOR 4 MVA 33/11KV T/F
12
12
13
13
14
14
14
15
15
15
II.
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
16
E:\DATA AFTER
- Copy.doc
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014
CT-2
E:\DATA AFTER
- Copy.doc
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014
CT-3
1.0
SCOPE
1.1
This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, testing of out-door
instrument transformers alongwith terminal connectors for protection and metering services
in different 400/220/132/66kV S/Stns. in the state of Haryana.
1.2
It is not the intent to specify herein complete / all details of the design and construction of
equipment. However the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering design and workmanship and shall be acceptable to the purchaser, who will
interpret the meanings of drawings and specifications and shall have the power to reject any
work or material, which in his judgement is not in accordance therewith. The equipment
offered shall be complete with all components necessary for its effective and trouble free
operation. Such components shall deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of
whether those are specifically brought out in this specification and or the commercial order
or not.
2.0
STANDARDS
Unless otherwise specified elsewhere in this specification the rating as well as performance
and testing of the instrument transformers shall conform but not limited to the latest
revisions and amendments available at the time of placement of order of all the relevant
standards as listed hereunder.
2.1
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS :
Sr. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Standard No.
IS:2165
IS:2705
(I to IV)
IS:2099
IS:3347
IS:2071
IS:335
IS:2147
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
IS:2633
IS:4800
IS:5561
IS:11065
IEC 44-1
13.
IEC-270
(or IS:11322)
IEC-44(4)
IEC-171
IEC-60
IEC-8263
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
E:\DATA AFTER
- Copy.doc
IS:5621
Title
Insulation Co-ordination for equipment of 100kV and above.
Current Transformers.
Bushings for alternating voltages above 1000Volts.
Dimensions of porcelain transformer bushings.
Method of High Voltage Testing.
Insulating oil for transformers Switchgears.
Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage
switchgear and control.
Method of testing hot dipped galvanized articles.
Enameled round winding wires.
Terminal connectors.
Drawings.
Current Transformers.
Partial Discharge Measurement
Instrument Transformer measurement of PDs.
Insulation co-ordination.
High voltage testing techniques.
Method for RIV test on high voltage insulators.
Indian Electricity Rules 1956.
Hollow porcelain insulators.
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014
CT-4
2.2
Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards, which ensure
equal or better performance than the standards mentioned above, shall also be considered.
When the equipment offered by the supplier conforms to other standards salient points of
difference between standards adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall
be clearly brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with
authentic translation in English shall be furnished alongwith the offer.
3.0
3.1
SERVICE CONDITIONS:
Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory
continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Location
IN THE STATE OF HARYANA
Max. ambient air temp(OC)
50
Min. ambient air temp (0C)
-2.5
Maximum Relative humidity (%)
100
Minimum Relative humidity (%)
26
Average annual rainfall (mm)
900
Max. wind pressure (Kg/sq.m.)
195
Max. altitude above mean sea level 1000
(meters)
9.
Isoceraunic level (days/year)
50
10.
Seismic
level
(horizontal 0.3g
acceleration)
Note : Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth. The
climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions. Smoke is also
present in the atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occurs during June to October.
4.0
PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:
The current transformers covered in this specification shall meet the technical requirements
listed hereunder.
PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS:
Sr.
No.
Item
420kV
1.
Type
of
installation.
2.
3.
Type of Mounting
Suitable for system
Frequency
Highest
system
Voltage (KV rms)
Minimum Neutral CT
Insulating Voltage
Current Ratio A/A
Line CT
4.
5.
6.
a.
E:\DATA AFTER
- Copy.doc
C.T./
245kV
145kV
72.5kV
36kV
12kV
Single phase, dead/live tank, oil filled, Hermetically sealed, outdoor type.
Steel Structures
50 Hz
420
245
145
72.5
36
12
-
33
15
15
15
8.66
2000-1000500/1-1-1-1-1
1200-800-400/
1-1-1-1-1,
2000-1000/1-11-1-1
600-300-150/
1-1-1
600-300-150/
1-1-1
400-300/5-1
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014
CT-5
-
b.
Transformer CT
2000-1000500/1-1-1-1-1
450-300/0.5771-1-1-1
250-150-100/
0.577-1-1-1
300-200150/0.577-1-1
Sr.
No.
Item
400kV
245kV
145kV
c.
Transformer Incomer CT
-
900-600-300/11-1-1-1
750500/
0.577-1-1-1
d.
e.
Capacitor CT
NCT
-
f.
Bus Coupler/Tie CT
7.
Method of Earthing the
Solidly Earthed
System
Rated
Continuous
125% for all taps
Thermal current
Ratio taps
The tapings shall be only on secondary winding.
Acceptable
limit
of
As per IS:2705 or equivalent IEC
temperature rise above
the specified ambient
temperature
for
continuous operation at
rated current.
Acceptance
partial
As per IS:11322-1985 or equivalent IEC
discharge level at 1.1
times the rated voltage.
1.2/50 microsecond lightning impulse withstand voltage (kVp)
1425
1050
650
325
170
CTs
170
95
95
95
NCTs
1 minute dry & wet power frequency withstand Voltage primary (kV rms)
630
460
275
140
70
CTs
70
38
38
38
NCTs
3
Power frequency over
voltage
withstand
requirement
for
secondary winding (kV
rms) (for 1 minute)
Min. creepage distance of porcelain housing (mm)
10500
6125
3625
1815
900
CTs
900
440
440
440
NCTs
40
40
31.5
31.5
Rated
short
time
26.3
withstand
current
(kArms) for 1 Second.
100
100
78.75
78.75
65.75
Rated
Dynamic
withstand current (kAp)
4.0
Maximum
Creepage
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
a.
b.
13.
a.
b.
14.
15.
a.
b.
16.
17.
18.
E:\DATA AFTER
Copy.doc
2000-1000500/1-1-1-1-1
-
72.5kV
100-50/5-5
1500-1000/
0.577-1-1-1
-
-
450-300/1
250-150-100/1
300-200150/1, 15001000/1
2400-1200/
1-1-1-1, 1200800-400/1-1-11-1
750-500/1-1A,
600-300-150/ 11-1
1500-1000/11A, 600-300150/ 1-1-1
-
36kV
12kV
2000-1000/
0.577-5-5-1,
1000-600400/0.577-5-5-1
400-300/5-1A
2000-1000/5,
1000-600-400/5,
100-50/5
-
2000-1000/5
1800900/5,
1200900/5,
300150/5
-
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 -
CT-6
75
28
250
18.4
46
Factor
5.0
5.1
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS :
The insulation of the instrument transformer shall be so designed that the internal insulation shall
have higher electrical withstand capability than the external insulation. The designed dielectrics
withstand values of external and internal insulation's shall be clearly brought out in the guaranteed
technical particulars. The dielectric withstand values specified in this specification are meant for fully
assembled instrument transformers.
5.2
PORCELAIN HOUSING:
5.2.1.
The details of location and type of joint, if provided on the porcelain, shall be furnished by the
Supplier alongwith the offer. The housing shall be made of homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high
mechanical and dielectric strength, glazing of porcelain shall be uniform brown or dark brown colour
with a smooth surface arranged to shed away rain water or condensed water particles (fog).
5.2.2
Details of attachment of metallic flanges to the porcelain shall be brought out in the offer. Nuts and
bolts or screws used for fixation of the interfacing porcelain bushings for taking out terminals shall
be provided on flanges cemented to the bushings and not on the porcelain.
5.3
METAL TANK:
The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints so as to minimize possible
locations of oil leakage. The metal tanks shall be made out of mild steel/stainless steel/aluminum
alloy, depending on the requirement. Welding in horizontal plane is to be avoided as welding at this
location may give way due to vibrations during transport resulting in oil leakage. Supplier has to
obtain specific approval from purchaser for any horizontal welding used in the bottom tank. The
castings of base, collar etc, shall be diecast and tested before assembly to detect cracks and voids
if any.
5.4
SURFACE FINISH :
The ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanized or shall be coated with atleast
two coats of Zinc Rich Epoxy painting. All nuts, Bolts and washers shall be of stainless steel.
5.5
INSULATING OIL:
Insulating oil required for first filling of the instrument transformer shall be covered in Supplier's
scope of supply. The oil shall meet the requirements of latest edition IS:335 or equivalent IEC.
5.6
5.6.1
PREVENTION OF OIL LEAKAGE & ENTRY OF MOISTURE:
The supplier shall ensure that the sealing of instrument transformer is properly achieved. In this
connection the arrangement provided by the Supplier at various locations including the following
ones shall be described, supported by sectional drawings.
i) Locations of emergence of primary and secondary terminals.
ii) Interface between porcelain housing and metal tank/s.
iii) Cover of the secondary terminal box.
5.7
GASKETS:
For gasketed joints, wherever used nitrile butyl rubber gaskets shall be used. The gasket shall be
fitted in properly machined groove with adequate space for accommodating the gasket under
compression.
E:\DATA AFTER
Copy.doc
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 -
CT-7
5.8
E:\DATA AFTER
OIL LEVEL INDICATORS:
Instrument transformers shall be provided with oil sight window (Prismatic Type) at suitable location
so that the oil level is clearly visible with naked eye to an observer standing at ground level.
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 - Copy.doc
CT-8
5.9
EARTHING:
Metal tank of instrument transformer shall be provided with two separate earthing terminals for
bolted connection to 50x8mm MS flat to be provided by the Purchaser for connection to station earth
mat.
5.10
LIFITING AND TRANSPORTATION ARRANGEMENTS:
Instrument transformer shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement to lift the entire unit. The
lifting arrangement shall be clearly shown in the general arrangement drawing. Lifting arrangement
(lifting eye) shall be positioned in such a way as to avoid any damage to the porcelain housing or
the tanks during lifting for installation/transport. Necessary string guides, if required shall be offered
which shall be removable type. The CT/NCT shall be so constructed that it can be easily transported
to site within the allowable transport limitation and in horizontal position, if the transport limitations
so demand.
5.11
NAME PLATE:
The instrument transformer shall be provided with non-corrosive, legible name plate with the
information specified in relevant standards, duly engraved/punched on it. In addition to these the
following specific points shall also be marked on the name plate.
P.O. No. with date and (item No, if any)
Connection diagram.
Rated continuous thermal current.
General knee point voltage formula.
The size of nameplate and its location on the equipment should be such that it is clearly readable
with naked eyes while standing on ground.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
5.12
5.12.1
5.12.2.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
5.13
E:\DATA AFTER
TERMINAL CONNECTORS:
Suitable terminal connectors of type 4” IPS Aluminium tube for 400kV CTs (Rigid type for one side
and expansion type for other side) and suitable terminal connectors for connecting twin tarantulla
for 220kV T/F I/C CTs, 220kV B/C CT (2400-1200/1-1-1-1A),220kV Line CT (2000-1000/1-1-1-11A), 33kV B/C CTs, 33kV T/F I/C CT (2000-1000/0.577-5-5-1A), 33kV T/F I/C NCT (2000-1000/5A),
132kV B/C CT(750-500/1-1A), 66kV B/C CT(1500-1000/1-1A), 66kV T/F I/C CT, 66kV T/F I/C NCT
& single Tarantulla conductor for 220kV T/F, Line/B.C CTs, 220kV NCTs, 132kV T/F I/C CT, 33kV
Line cum Capacitor CT (400-300/5-1A) meant for 220/33kV T/F, twin ACSR Zebra for 33kV T/F I/C
CT (1000-600-400/0.577-5-5-1A), 33kV T/F I/C NCT (1000-600-400/5A) meant for 40/50MVA
132/33kV T/F & for Single ACSR Zebra for remaining CTs/NCTs shall be supplied. Suitable terminal
earth connectors for earthing connections shall also be provided.
The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements:
Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS:5561 or equivalent IEC.
All castings shall be free from blowholes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All sharp edges and
corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
No part of a clamp shall be less than 10mm thick.
All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized conforming to IS:2633 or equivalent IEC.
For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum 2mm thickness shall be cast integral with
aluminium body.
Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper/ aluminium sheets.
All current carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum contact resistance.
Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the requirements stipulated in
IS:5561 or equivalent IEC.
INTERNAL INSULATION:
Enamel, if used for conductor insulation, shall be polyvinyl acetate type and shall meet the
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 - Copy.doc
CT-9
requirements of IS:4800 or equivalent IEC. Polyester enamel shall not be used. Double cotton
cover, if used, shall be suitably covered to ensure that it does not come in contact with oil.
5.14
TEMPERATURE RISE:
The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed maximum temperature rise
specified in IS:2705 or equivalent IEC. However, the permissible temperature rise is for a maximum
ambient temperature of 50o C.
5.15
PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE:
Suitable arrangement shall be made for compensation of variation in the oil volume due to ambient
variation and to take care of internal abnormal pressures. The pressure variation shall be kept within
limits, which do not impair the tightness of the instrument transformer. A pressure relief device
capable of releasing abnormal internal pressure shall be provided.
5.16
SECONDARY TERMINAL BOXES:
The CT secondary terminals except for CTs with metering core having accuracy class 0.2S shall be
brought out in a weather proof terminal box. The terminal box shall be provided with removable
gland plate.
In case of CTs, with metering core having accuracy class 0.2S, CT secondary terminals shall be
brought out in two separate weatherproof terminal boxes.
In the first box, all the terminals of cores of CTs except metering core having accuracy class 0.2S
shall be brought out. The terminal box shall be provided with removable gland plate.
5.17
The terminal of metering core having accuracy class 0.2S CTs, shall be brought out in the second
terminal box. This shall also be provided with a removable gland plate. This terminal box shall be
provided with proper sealing facility.
The terminal box/boxes shall be dust and vermin proof. The dimensions of the terminal box/boxes
and its/their openings shall be adequate to enable easy access and working space with use of
normal tools.
POLARITY :
Polarity shall be indelibly marked on each primary and secondary terminal. Facility shall be provided
for short-circuiting and grounding of the secondary terminals inside the terminal box.
5.18
OIL FILLING AND DRAIN VALVES:
The instrument transformers shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing and thereafter
hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing and to prevent air and moisture from entering the tanks.
Sealing type oil filling and/or oil sampling cocks shall be provided with facility to reseal the same.
The method adopted for hermetic sealing shall be described in the offer.
5.19
INSTRUMENT SECURITY FACTOR:
For all type of CTs, the instrument security factor at all ratios shall be less than 5 for metering core.
If any, auxiliary CTs / reactor are used in the CTs then all the parameters specified shall have to be
met treating auxiliary CTs as integral part of the current transformer.
5.20
PRIMARY WINDING:
The design density for short circuit current as well as conductivity of the metal used for primary
winding shall meet the requirement of IS:2705 or equivalent IEC. The supplier shall in his offer
furnish detailed calculations for selection of winding cross-sections.
5.21
E:\DATA AFTER
SECONDARY WINDING:
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 - Copy.doc
CT-10
Suitably insulated wire of electrolytic grade shall be used for secondary windings. Type of insulation
used shall be described in the offer. For multi ratio design, suitable tapping shall be provided on
secondary winding only. Ratio tap selection through primary side shall not be acceptable.
5.22
CORE:
The exciting current of the CT shall be as low as possible. The supplier shall furnish alongwith his
offer the magnetization curve/s for all the core/s. The cores shall be of high grade, non-ageing
electrical silicon laminated steel of low hysterisis loss and high permeability to ensure high accuracy
at both normal and over current.
5.23
PRIMARY TERMINALS:
For 400kV CT, 220 kV Line CT (2000-1000/1-1-1-1-1A), 220kV Bus Coupler CT (2400-1200/1-1-11A), 66kV T/F I/C CT (1500-1000/0.577-1-1-1A), 66kV T/F I/C NCT (1500-1000/1A), 66kV B/C CT
(1500-1000/1-1A), 33kV T/F I/C CT (2000-1000/0.577-5-5-1A & 1000-600-400/0.577-5-5-1A), 33kV
T/F I/C NCT (2000-1000/5A & 1000-600-400/5A) & 33kV Bus Coupler CT the primary terminal shall
be made out of rods of not less than 40mm dia. copper or equivalent as per IS/IEC and for
remaining CTs/NCTs the primary terminals shall be made out of rods not less than 30mm dia.
copper or equivalent as per ISS\IEC.
5.24
DEVIATION FROM SPECIFICATION:
Any deviation from the specification shall be clearly brought out separately. In the absence of any
specific mention, it shall be implied that the equipment offered is entirely according to this
specification.
5.25
TEST TAP:
The 72.5 kV and above voltage level, instrument transformers shall be provided with suitable test
tap for measurement of tests such as partial discharges etc. in factory as well as at site. Provision
shall be made of a screw on cap for solid and secured earthing of the test tap connection, when not
in use. A suitable caution plate shall be provided duly fixed on the cover of the secondary terminal
box indicating the purpose of the test tap and necessity of its solid earthing as per prescribed
method before energizing the equipment.
NOTE:-
The Overall Tolerance for dimensions, Quantity of Oil, Weight, etc should be +5% max. The
General Tolerance should be as per ISS. Tolerance for Mounting Dimension should be +5mm.
6.0
6.1
TESTS:
TYPE TESTS
The equipment offered should be fully type tested. In case, the equipment of the type and design
offered has already been type tested, the supplier shall furnish 4 sets of type test reports alongwith
the offer. The type test reports should not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of
bid opening and the type test should have been carried out in accordance with ISS2705(1992)/equivalent IEC from Govt./ Govt. approved test house.
However, temperature rise test although covered under type tests will be got conducted by the
supplier on one piece of total ordered quantity of each type, at his premises in the presence of the
inspecting officer of the purchaser, without any extra charges. The purchaser reserves the right to
demand repetition of some or all the type tests in the presence of purchaser's representative.
6.2
ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS:
i)
E:\DATA AFTER
All acceptance including Tan Delta test and routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards
shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of purchaser's representative, unless dispensed
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 - Copy.doc
CT-11
ii)
with in writing by the Purchaser.
Immediately after finalisation of the programme of routine /acceptance testing, the Supplier shall
give sufficient advance intimation to the Purchaser to enable him to depute his representative for
witnessing the testing.
7.0
DOCUMENTATION:
7.1
All drawings shall conform to international standards organisation (ISO) `A' series of drawing
sheet/Indian Standards Specification IS:11065. All drawings shall be in ink and suitable for
microfilming. If drawings are computerized than all drawings shall be nicely printed. All dimensions
and data shall be in S.I.Units.
7.2
List of drawings:
a)
b)
c)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment.
Graphs showing the performance of equipment's in regard to magnetisation characteristics; ratio &
phase angle curves, ratio correction factor curves.
Sectional views showing:
General Constructional Features.
Materials/Gaskets/Sealing used.
The insulation & the winding arrangements, method of connection of the primary / secondary
winding to the primary/ secondary terminals etc.
No. of Turns, Cross-Sectional Area, Current density of Primary and secondary windings.
Porcelain used and its dimensions.
Arrangement of terminals and details of connection studs provided.
Name plate.
Schematic drawing.
Detailed drawing of pressure release device with detailed literature.
Terminal connector drawing.
NOTE:-
All above drawings should bear a minimum space (14X10cm) for stamping the approval of
drawings by the purchaser.
7.3
The bidder shall submit four sets of final versions of complete and correct equipment drawings
except 7.2 (b) above (actual of which shall be supplied at the time of inspection) for purchaser’s
approval alongwith bid in a sealed envelope. The purchaser shall communicate his
comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within 21 days from the date of issue of LOI.
The submission of complete and correct readable drawings for approval is the responsibility of the
bidder/supplier. The supplier shall, if so required by the purchaser, modify the drawings and
resubmit four copies of the modified drawings for purchaser’s approval within two weeks from the
date of purchaser’s comments. Then, the purchaser shall approve the revised drawings within two
weeks from the date of its receipt.
The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved drawings and
no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the purchaser. All manufacturing and
fabrication work in connection with the equipment prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the
supplier's risk.
7.4
7.5
E:\DATA AFTER
The successful bidder shall also supply one set of nicely bound all the approved drawings &
instruction manual containing handling, installation, testing and commissioning of equipment at the
time of despatch of material to the consignee with each equipment for our field staff without which
the supply will not be considered as complete supply. In addition, 5 sets of such bound
manuals and final approved drawings shall be supplied for reference & record in our design office
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 - Copy.doc
CT-12
alongwith one good quality soft copy (CD) of approved drawings and instruction manuals, if
computerized.
7.6
Approval of drawings / work by Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of his responsibility and
liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the latest revision of applicable
standards, rules and codes of practices. The equipment shall conform in all respects to high
standards of engineering, design, workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time
of ordering and purchaser shall have the power to reject any work or material which in his
judgement is not in full accordance therewith.
NOTE :-
(i) In case the equipment offered by the Supplier does not meet with the requirement of
technical specification the offer of the firm shall not be considered.
(ii) Supplier shall provide special label on the LIVE Tank CTs and its packing for caution in
handling the CTs carefully.
E:\DATA AFTER
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 - Copy.doc
CT-13
ANNEXURE I-A(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV NEUTRAL CTs
(450-300/1A)
NUMBER OF CORE - 1
Application
Current Accuracy Formula for minimum
Ratio (A) class
knee-point voltage at CT
as per
Secondary resistance at
IEC 185
750C at 300Atap(Volt)
1
2
REF PROTECTION
3
450-300/1
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
4
PS
Minimum
Insulation
Voltage
(kV)
5
14(RCT+2)
6
30 @ VK/2
33
ANNEXURE I-B(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV NEUTRAL CT
(250-150-100/1A)
No. OF CORE= 1
Core Application
No.
1
1
2
REF
PROTECTION
E:\DATA AFTER
Current
Ratio (A)
Output
burden
(VA)
Accurac
y class
as per
IEC 185
3
4
5
250-150100/1
-
PS
Formula for minimum
knee-point voltage
At CT Secondary
resistance at 750C at
100A tap (Volt)
6
20 (RCT+1)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
Minimum
Insulatio
n Voltage
(kV)
7
30 @ VK/2
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 - Copy.doc
CT-14
8
15
E:\DATA AFTER
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 - Copy.doc
CT-15
ANNEXURE I-C(i)
(COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCT
(1500-1000/1A)
No. OF CORES= 1
Core Application
No.
1
1
Current
Ratio (A)
2
Output
burden
(VA)
3
REF PROTECTION
Accuracy
class
as per
IEC 185
4
5
-
PS
1500-1000/1
Formula for min
knee point voltage
At CT Secondary
res. at 750C at
1000A tap (Volt)
6
14
(RCT+2)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
Minimum
Insulatio
n Voltage
(kV)
7
8
30 @ VK/2
15
ANNEXURE-I C(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5 kV NEURAL CT FOR 66/11kV T/Fs
(300-200-150/1)
No. OF CORE = 1
Core
No.
Application
Current
Ratio (A)
Output
burden
(VA)
1
2
3
4
1.
REF
PROTECTION
300-200150/1
-
E:\DATA AFTER
Maximum
exciting
current
(mA)
Minimum
Insulation
voltage
(kV)
5
Formula
for
minimum knee
point voltage at
CT
secondary
resistance at 750
at 300A tap (Volt)
6
7
8
PS
20 (RCT+1)
30 @ Vk/2
15
Accuracy
class as
per
IEC
185
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 - Copy.doc
CT-16
ANNEXURE-I-D(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCT FOR 40/50MVA 132/33kV T/F
AND OTHER RATINGS OF 132/33KV T/Fs WITH 26.3KA STC
(1000-600-400/5)
No. OF CORES = 1
Core Application
No.
1
Current
Ratio (A)
2
1
Output
burden
(VA)
3
REF
PROTECTION
1000-600-400/5
Accuracy
class as
Per IEC
185
4
5
-
PS
Formula for minimum
knee point voltage
At CT Secondary
resistance at 750C at
400A tap (Volt)
6
100 (RCT+1)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
Minimum
Insulation
Voltage
(kV)
7
8
75@ VK/2
15
ANNEXURE-I-D(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCT FOR 220/33KV T/F WITH
26.3KA STC
(2000-1000/5)
No. OF CORES = 1
Core Application
No.
1
1
Current
Ratio (A)
2
Output
Burden
(VA)
3
REF
PROTECTION
2000-1000
/5
Accuracy
class
as per
IEC 185
4
5
Formula for minimum
knee-point voltage At
CT Secondary
resistance at 750C at
2000A tap (Volt)
6
-
PS
100 (RCT+1)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
Minimum
Insulatio
n Voltage
(kV)
7
8
75@ VK/2
15
ANNEXURE-I-D(iii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER NCT WITH 26.3KA STC
FOR 4 MVA 33/11kV T/F
(100-50/5)
No. OF CORE = 1
Core Application
No.
1
1
E:\DATA AFTER
Current
Ratio (A)
2
3
REF
PROTECTION
100-50/5
Accuracy
class
as per
IEC 185
4
PS
Formula for minimum
knee-point voltage At CT
Secondary resistance at
750C at 100A tap (Volt)
5
100 (RCT+1)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
6
75@ VK/2
Minimum
Insulatio
n Voltage
(kV)
7
15
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 - Copy.doc
CT-17
ANNEXURE-I E(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 12 kV NEUTRAL CT FOR 25/31.5 MVA T/F
(1800-900/5)
No. OF CORE = 1
Maximum
exciting
current
(mA)
Minimum
Insulation
voltage
(kV)
4
Formula for minimum
knee point voltage at
CT
secondary
resistance at 750 at
1800A tap (Volt)
5
6
7
PS
95 (RCT+1)
75@ Vk/2
8.66
Core
No.
Application
Current
Ratio (A)
Accuracy
class
as
per
IEC
185
1
2
3
1.
REF
PROTECTION
1800-900/5
ANNEXURE I-E(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 12kV NEUTRAL CT FOR 12.5/16 MVA & 16/20 MVA T/F
(1200-900/5)
No. OF CORE = 1
Core Application
No.
1
1
Current
Ratio (A)
2
3
REF
PROTECTION
1200-900/5
Accuracy
class
as per
IEC 185
4
PS
Formula for minimum
knee-point voltage At CT
Secondary resistance at
750C at 1200A tap (Volt)
5
95 (RCT+1)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
6
Minimum
Insulatio
n Voltage
(kV)
7
75@ VK/2
8.66
ANNEXURE I-E(iii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 12kV NEUTRAL CT for 4MVA 33/11kV T/F
(300-150/5)
No. OF CORE = 1
Core Application
No.
1
1
E:\DATA AFTER
Current
Ratio (A)
2
3
REF
PROTECTION
300-150/5
Accuracy
class
as per
IEC 185
4
PS
Formula for minimum
knee-point voltage At CT
Secondary resistance at
750C at 300A tap (Volt)
5
95 (RCT+1)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
6
75@ VK/2
Minimum
Insulatio
n Voltage
(kV)
7
8.66
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 - Copy.doc
CT-18
ANNEXURE-II
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
(To be filled in by the Supplier separately for each type and voltage rating).
1.
Manufacturer's Name
2.
Type/Installation.
3.
Conforming to standard.
4.
Rated voltage.
5.
Rated frequency.
6.
Detail of cores.
*Core No.
I
6.1
Purpose of cores.
6.2
Rated Secondary Current.
6.3
Class of accuracy.
6.4
Accuracy limit factor.
6.5
Formula governing minimum
II
III
IV
V
knee point voltage at CT
Secondary resistance corrected
to 75 C.
6.6
Instrument security factor.
6.7
Secondary limiting voltage.
6.8
Maximum Secondary resistance
corrected to 75 C.
6.9
Rated burden.
6.10
Exciting current
for Distance protection
core at Vk, for Bus
Bar protection core & REF Core at
E:\DATA AFTER
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 - Copy.doc
CT-19
Vk/2. and for differential protection
Core at Vk/4
* No. of cores as per applicability for a particular type of current
7.
Rated primary current.
8.
Rated short time withstand
current (kA rms) for
1 second duration.
9.
Rated dynamic withstand
current (kA peak).
10.
Rated continuous thermal current (pu).
11.
One minute power
frequency withstand
voltage (kV rms)
a) Dry
b) Wet
12.
1.2/50 micro-second
impulse withstand voltage (kV peak)
13.
One minute power
frequency withstand
voltage of secondary
winding (kV rms)
14.
Minimum creepage
distance (mm)
15.
Maximum creepage factor.
16.
Winding
a)
b)
No. of primary turns
Primary amp. turns
E:\DATA AFTER
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 - Copy.doc
CT-20
(Dynamic condition)
c)
Current density
d)
Area of Cross-section & material
i)
ii)
Primary turns
Secondary turns
17.
I.S. to which the oil conforms.
18.
Weight of oil (kg).
19.
Quantity of oil (Ltrs)
20.
Total weight (kg).
21.
Maximum shipping weight (kg)
22.
Overall dimension.
23.
Mounting details.
24.
Maximum permissible
temperature rise of
winding when referred
to maximum ambient
temperature of 50 C
in terms of clause 7.2
(Table 2 of IS:2705
Part-1-1992 ) or
Equivalent IEC
E:\DATA AFTER
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-1 NCT spec- November 2014 - Copy.doc
CT-21
HARYANA VIDYUT PRASARAN NIGAM
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
420kV CVTs, 245kV, 145kV & 72.5kV CAPACITOR
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS & POTENTIAL
TRANSFORMERS
AND 36kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS
E:\DATA AFTER
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov, 2012.doc
CONTENTS
----------------------------------------------------------------------------CLAUSE NO. TITLE
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------1.0
SCOPE
PAGE NO.
3
2.0
STANDARDS
3
3.0
SERVICE CONDITIONS
4
4.0
PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS
4
5.0
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
5
6.0
TESTS
10
7.0
DOCUMENTATION
11
ANNEXURES
I.
COREWISE DETAILS FOR
A-(i)
420kV CVTs
13
B-(i)
245kV CVTs
14
B-(ii)
245kV PTs
15
C-(i)
145kV CVTs
16
C-(ii)
145kV PTs WITH METERING CORE
17
D -(i)
72.5kV CVTs
18
D-(ii)
72.5kV PTs
19
E (i)
36kV PTs
20
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
OF CVTs
21
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
OF PTs
-----------------------------------------------------------------------
23
II. A
II. B
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT
& CVT-Nov, 2012.doc
1.0
SCOPE :
1.1
This specification provides for design, engineering, manufacture, testing of
outdoor instrument transformers alongwith terminal connectors for protection
and metering services in different 420/220/132/66kV S/Stn. in Haryana.
It is not the intent to specify completely herein all details of the design and
construction of equipments. However the equipment shall conform in all
respects to high standards of engineering design and workmanship and shall
be acceptable to the purchaser, who will interpret in a manner the meanings
of drawings and specifications and shall have the power to reject any work or
material, which in his judgement is not in accordance therewith. The
equipment offered shall be complete with all components necessary for its
effective and trouble free operation. Such components shall be deemed to
be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether those are specifically
brought out in this specification and or the commercial order or not.
1.2
2.0
STANDARDS:
Sl.No. Standard No.
1.
IS : 3156
(Part-I to Part-III)
2.
IS : 3156 (Part-IV)
3.
IS : 2099
4.
IS : 3347
5.
IS : 2071
6.
IS : 335
7.
IS : 2165
8.
IS : 2147
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
IEC- 186
IEC - 186A
IEC - 270
IS - 5561
IS -4800
IEC- 44 (4)
IEC-171
IEC - 358
IEC-60
IEC-8263
IS: 9348
IS: 2633
IS: 11065
2.2
IS: 5621
Title.
Voltage transformer
Capacitor Voltage Transformer
High Voltage porcelain bushing.
Dimensions of porcelain transformer bushings
Method of High Voltage Testing
Insulating oil for transformers and switchgears
Insulation Co-ordination for equipments of 100 kV and
above.
Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low
voltage switchgear and control.
Voltage Transformers
First supplement to IEC publication 186
Partial discharge Measurement
Terminal Connectors
Enameled round winding wires
Instrument Transformer measurement of PDs
Insulation Co-Ordination
Coupling capacitor divider.
High Voltage testing techniques.
Method for RIV test on high voltage insulators.
Coupling capacitors and capacitor dividers
Methods of testing hot dipped galvanized articles
Drawings.
Indian Electricity Rules 1956
Hollow porcelain insulators.
Equipment meeting with the requirements of other authoritative standards,
which ensure equal or better performance than the standards mentioned
above, shall also be considered. When the equipment offered by the supplier
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT
& CVT-Nov, 2012.doc
conforms to other standards salient points of difference between standards
adopted and the standards specified in this specification shall be clearly
brought out in the relevant schedule. Four copies of such standards with
authentic translation in English shall be furnished alongwith the offer.
3.0
SERVICE CONDITIONS :
Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:i) Location
IN THE STATE OF HARYANA
°
ii) Max. ambient air temp( C)
50
-2.5
iii) Min. ambient air temp (°C)
iv) Maximum Relative humidity (%)
100
v) Minimum Relative humidity (%)
26
vi) Average annual rainfall (mm)
900
vii) Max. wind pressure (Kg/sq.m.)
195
viii)Max. altitude above mean sea level (meters)
1000
ix) Isoceraunic level (days/year)
50
x) Seismic level (horizontal acceleration)
0.3g.
Note :
Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus
growth. The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in
ambient conditions. Smoke is also present in the atmosphere. Heavy
lightening also occur during June to October.
4.0
PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS :
The capacitor voltage transformers and potential transformers covered in this
specification shall meet the technical requirements listed hereunder.
PRINCIPAL TECHNICAL PARAMETERS:
Sl.
No.
1.
Type/Installation
2.
Type of mounting
3.
Highest system
voltage (kV rms)
Suitable
for
system frequency
Rated
primary
voltage (kV rms
No. of Secondary
Cores
&
Secondary
Voltage (Volts)
PT
4.
5.
6.
i)
Item
Specification
420kV
245kV
145kV
72.5kV
36kV
Single Phase, Oil filled,Self cooled, Hermetically sealed
Outdoor type _____
-----Steel structure---------420
245
145
72.5
36
66/√3
33/√3
50 Hz
400/√3
-
220/√3
Core I,II
110/√3
132/√3
Core I,II,III
110/√3
Core I,II
110/√3
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT
& CVT-Nov, 2012.doc
Core I,II
110/√3
ii)
CVT
7.
Method of earthing
the system
1.2/50
microsecond
lightning impulse
withstand voltage
(kVp)
1 Minute dry & wet
power frequency
withstand voltage
primary (kV rms)
Min.
creepage
distance
of
porcelain housing
(mm)
Creepage factor
(max.)
Rated
voltage
factor
Equivalent
capacitance
at
power frequency
for carrier coupling
for CVT (PF)
Resultant
high
frequency
capacitance
for
CVT (PF)
One minute power
frequency
withstand voltage
for
secondary
winding (kV rms)
Max. temperature
rise over ambient
of 50°C
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
5.0
5.1
5.1.1
Core I,II,III
110/√3
Core I,II, III
110/√3
Core I,II, III
110/√3
Core I,II
110/√3
-
Solidly earthed
1425
1050
650
325
170
630
460
275
140
70
10500
6125
3625
1815
900
4.0
1.2 continuous and 1.5 for 30 seconds
8800+10%
-5%
N.A
8800 in carrier frequency range of 40 KHz N.A to 500 KHz with
variation in capacitance as contained in IEC-358 (i.e- 20% & +50%)
3.0
As per IS:3156 or equivalent IEC
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:
Common for all CVTs & PTs
The insulation of the instrument transformers shall be so designed that the
internal insulation shall have higher electrical withstand capability than the
external insulation. The designed dielectric withstand values of external and
internal insulations shall be clearly withstand values specified in this
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT
& CVT-Nov, 2012.doc
5.1.2
5.1.2.1
5.1.2.2
5.1.3
5.1.4
5.1.5
5.1.6
5.1.6.1
i)
ii)
iii)
5.1.7
5.1.8
5.1.9
guaranteed technical particulars. The dielectric withstand values specified in
this specification are meant for fully assembled instrument transformers.
Porcelain Housing :
The details of location and type of joint, if provided on the porcelain, shall be
furnished by the supplier alongwith the offer. The housing shall be made of
homogeneous, vitreous porcelain of high mechanical and dielectric strength,
glazing of porcelain shall be of uniform brown or dark brown colour with a
smooth surface arranged to shed away rain water or condensed water
particles (fog).
Details of attachment of metallic flanges to the porcelain shall be brought out
in the offer. Nuts and bolts or screws used for fixation of the interfacing
porcelain bushings for taking out terminals, shall be provided on flanges
cemented to the bushings and not on the porcelain.
METAL TANK:
The metal tanks shall have bare minimum number of welded joints so as to
minimise possible locations of oil leakage. The metal tanks shall be made
out of mild steel/Stainless steel/aluminium alloy, depending on the
requirement. Welding in horizontal plane is to be avoided as welding at ths
location may give way due to vibratins during transport resulting in oil
leakage. Supplier has to obtain specific approval from purchaser for any
horizontal welding used in the bottom tank.
Surface Finish:
The ferrous parts exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanised or shall
be coated with atleast two coats of zinc rich epoxy painting. All nuts, bolts
and washers shall be made out of stainless steel.
Insulating Oil:
Insulating oil required for first filling of the instrument transformer shall be
covered in supplier's scope of supply. The oil shall meet the requirements of
latest edition IS:335 or equivalent IEC.
Prevention of Oil leakages and Entry of Moisture:
The supplier shall ensure that the sealing of instrument transformer is
properly achieved. In this connection the arrangement provided by the
supplier at various locations including the following ones shall be described,
supported by sectional drawings.
Locations of emergence of primary and secondary terminals.
Interface between porcelain housing and metal tanks.
Cover of the secondary terminal box.
GASKETS:
For gasketed joints, wherever used nitrile butyl rubber gaskets shall be used.
The gasket shall be fitted in properly machined groove with adequate space
for accommodating the gasket under compression.
Oil level indicators:
Instrument transformers shall be provided with oil sight window (Prismatic
Type) at suitable location so that the oil level is clearly visible with naked eye
to an observer standing at ground level.
EARTHING:
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT
& CVT-Nov, 2012.doc
Metal tank of the instrument transformer shall be provided with two separate earthing
terminals for bolted connection to 50X8mm MS flat to be provided by the Purchaser for
connection to station earth-mate.
LIFTING & TRANSPORTATION ARRANGEMENTS:
Instrument transformer shall be provided with suitable lifting arrangement, to lift the
entire unit. The lifting arrangement shall be clearly shown in the general arrangement
drawings. Lifting arrangement (lifting eye) shall be positioned in such a way so as to
avoid any damage to the porcelain housing or the tanks during lifting for
installation/transport. If necessary, string guides shall be offered which shall be of
removable type. The instrument transformers shall be so constructed that it can be
easily transported to site within the allowable transport limitation and in horizontal
position, if the transport limitations so demand.
5.1.10
5.1.11
NAME PLATE:
The instrument transformer shall be provided with non-corrosive, legible name plate
with the information specified in relevant standards, duly engraved/punched on it. In
addition to these P.O. NO.& Connection diagram shall also be marked in rating plate.
5.1.12
TERMINAL CONNECTORS:
Suitable terminal connectors of type 4” IPS Aluminium tube for 400kV CVTs and
suitable terminal connectors for connecting single Tarantulla conductor for 220kV
CVTs/PTs & for Single ACSR Zebra in 132kV, 66kV CVTs/PTs & 33kV PTs shall be
supplied. Suitable terminal earth connectors for earthing connections shall also be
provided.
The terminal connectors shall meet the following requirements:
Terminal connectors shall be manufactured and tested as per IS:5561 or equivalent
IEC.
All castings shall be free from blow holes, surface blisters, cracks and cavities. All
sharp edges and corners shall be blurred and rounded off.
No part of a clamp shall be less than 10mm thick.
All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized conforming to IS:2633 or equivalent IEC.
For bimetallic connectors, copper alloy liner of minimum 2mm thickness shall be cast
integral with aluminium body.
Flexible connectors shall be made from tinned copper/aluminium sheets.
All currents carrying parts shall be designed and manufactured to have minimum
contact resistance.
Connectors shall be designed to be corona free in accordance with the requirements
stipulated in IS: 5561 or equivalent IEC.
5.1.12.1
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
5.1.13
INSULATION:
Enamel, if used for conductor insulation, shall be polyvinyl acetate type or amide emide
type and shall meet the requirements of IS:4800 or equivalent IEC. Polyester enamel
shall not be used. Double cotton cover, if used, shall be suitably covered to ensure
that it does not come in contact with oil.
5.1.14
TEMPERATURE RISE:
The temperature rise on any part of equipment shall not exceed maximum temperature
rise specified in IS:3156 or equivalent IEC. However, the permissible temperature rise
indicated is for a maximum ambient temperature of 50°C.
OIL FILLING & DRAIN VALVES:
5.1.15
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
5.1.16
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
The instrument transformers shall be vacuum filled with oil after processing and
thereafter hermetically sealed to eliminate breathing and to prevent air and
moisture from entering the tanks, sealing type oil filling and/or oil sampling cocks shall
be provided with facility to reseal the same. The method adopted for hermetic sealing
shall be described in the offer.
PRESSURE RELIEF DEVICE:
Suitable arrangement shall be made to accommodate the expansion and contraction of
oil due to temperature variation. The pressure variation shall be kept within limits
which do not impair the tightness of the instrument transformer. A pressure relief
device capable of releasing abnormal internal pressure shall be provided.
CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT):
The CVTs comprising of a capacitor divider unit and electromagnetic unit shall be
single phase, oil filled hermetically sealed, self cooled, outdoor type and suitable for
direct line connection without any fuse and isolating switches, These CVTs are
required to be used on interlinking substations in Haryana power system for the
purpose of protection, synchronising, interlocking, carrier coupling and metering. CVTs
shall be suitable for connecting the carrier terminals to single circuit and double circuit
transmission lines for phase to phase coupling for power line carrier, voice
communication, telemetering & teleprinting services.
The secondary terminals of potential unit, high frequency coupling terminal and the
earthing terminals shall be brought out separately and housed in a water proof cabinet
outside the main steel chamber.
The capacitor voltage transformer shall be suitable for simultaneous use as measuring
unit, for feeding voltage supply to protective relays and as coupling capacitor for carrier
transmission i.e. for voice communication, carrier protective relays, telemetering,
teleprinting services over one or more carrier channels in the frequency range of 40 to
500KHz.
The capacitors shall be designed for wide frequency band and low dielectric loss.
Their natural frequency shall be considerably higher than the carrier frequency range of
40 KHz to 500 KHz.
The unit capacitors shall be so designed that no damage to internal elements or
change in electrostatic capacitance is resulted by the application of impulse voltage.
Each CVT including its emvt unit shall be filled with insulating oil conforming to IS:335
or equivalent IEC. And shall be hermetically sealed against moisture and dust.
The electromagnetic voltage transformer unit of CVT intended for out-door installation
whose primary is to be fed by the inter-mediate tapping of capacitor divider shall be of
oil immersed, self cooled design and shall be suitable for metering, relaying &
synchronising services. The core of this transformer shall be of high accuracy at
normal & high voltages. The primary winding shall be connected through a
compensating reactor to compensate the voltage increase at inter-mediate tapping,
whatever is the load within range of rated burden.
The design shall be free from corona effect to keep noise level of carrier frequency link
very low. Use may be made of grading rings or Electrostatic screen for this purpose if
required.
The design shall be suitable for rapid reclosing of the circuit and shall be capable of
accurate and proportionate transmission of sudden variation in the primary voltage.
Each CVT shall be provided with a suitable damping device so that ferro resonance
oscillation due to saturation of iron core of transformer or any inductance connected in
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
5.2.11
i)
ii)
iii)
parallel with it and initiated by either over voltages on the net work side or by opening
of the short circuited primary or secondaries, shall be practically zero. Oscillations of
the secondary voltages which may arise as a result of breakdown of primary voltages
due to short circuits shall not affect the proper working of protective relays. This shall
confirm to provisions of clause:42 of IEC recommendations 186-A.
Design of the potential units of the CVT shall be based on the following requirements in
connection with protective relaying.
They must transmit accurately sudden drops of primary voltage.
The CVTs must not enter into sub-harmonic resonance and transient oscillations during
energisation. They must be damped out with sufficient rapidness.
They must have sufficiently low short circuit impedance as seen from secondary.
5.2.12
A device shall be incorporated in a capacitor voltage transformer for the purpose of
limiting over voltages which may appear across one or more of its components and/or
to prevent sustained ferro resonance.
The device may include a spark gap and may be located in several different ways
according to its nature. (Clause 2.12 of IS:3156 (Part-IV)-1978 or IEC-186A Clause
37.12)
5.2.13
5.2.13.1
SECONDARY TERMINAL BOXES:
Suitable terminal boxes with removable gland plate for facilitating the entry of H.F.
Cable & VT control cables shall be provided at an accessible position.
The secondary terminals of 420kV, 245kV, 145kV & 72.5kV CVTs shall be brought out
in two separate weather proof terminal boxes and it shall be provided with a removable
gland plates.
In case of 420kV, 245kV & 145kV CVTs, in the first box, secondary terminals of CoreI & II (i.e. Protection and measurement cores) shall be brought out. For 72.5kV CVT in
the first box the secondary terminals of 1st core (i.e. Protection and measurement core)
shall be brought out.
In the second box the secondary terminals of 3rd core (i.e metering Core) of 420kV,
245kV & 145kV CVTs and 2nd core (i.e metering Core) of 72.5kV CVT shall be brought
out. The Metering secondary terminal box shall be provided with proper sealing facility.
5.2.13.2
5.3
Voltage Transformer (PT):
5.3.1.
5.3.1.1
CORE:
The voltage transformers shall be oil immersed, sealed type and self cooled, suitable
for the services indicated & conforming to the modern practices of designs and
construction. The core shall be of high grade, non ageing, electrical silicon laminated
steel of low hysteresis loss and high permeability to ensure high accuracy at both
normal and over voltages.
5.3.1.2
i)
ii)
The design of PT shall be based on following requirements.
They must transmit sudden drops of primary voltages.
They must have sufficiently low short circuit impedance as seen from secondary.
5.3.2.
5.3.2.1
SECONDARY TERMINAL BOXES:
The secondary terminals of the PTs except 145KV PTs (having 3 cores) & 36kV PTs
(Having two cores) shall be brought out in a weather proof terminal box and it shall be
provided with a removable gland plate.
In case of 145kV & 36kV PTs, two separate weather proof terminal boxes shall be
provided.
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
In the first box, the terminals of core-I & II of 145kV PT and Core-II of 36kV PT shall be
brought out. The terminal box shall be provided with a removable gland plate.
In the second box, the terminals of Core-III of 145kV PT (i.e. metering core) and core-I
of 36kV PT shall be brought out. The terminal box shall be provided with a removable
gland plate and with proper sealing facility.
5.3.2.2
All the fuses and the links shall be provided at the V.T terminal boxes.
5.3.2.3
The primary winding of voltage transformers will be connected phase to ground.
6.0
6.1
6.1.1
TESTS :
TYPE TEST
TYPE TESTS OF POTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS (PT's)
The equipment offered should be fully type tested. In case, the equipment of the type
and design offered has already been type tested, the supplier shall furnish 4 sets of
type test reports alongwith the offer. The type test reports should not be more than
seven years old, reckoned from the date of bid opening and the type test should have
been carried out in accordance with ISS-2705(1992)/equivalent IEC from Govt./ Govt.
approved test house.
However, temperature rise test although covered under type tests will be got conducted
by the supplier on one piece of total ordered quantity of each type, at his premises in
the presence of the inspecting officer of the purchaser, without any extra charges. The
purchaser reserves the right to demand repetition of some or all the type tests in the
presence of purchaser's representative.
6.1.2
TYPE TESTS OF CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (CVT's)
The equipment offered should be fully type tested. In case, the equipment of the type
and design offered has already been type tested, the supplier shall furnish 4 sets of
type test reports of the following tests alongwith the offer.
Tests as per clause No. 12.1, 12.2 & 14 of IEC-358 (1990)and clause 10.1 (b), 10.1 (d),
10.1(e), 10.1(f), 49,51,52 & 53 of IEC-186 (1987) latest addition of IEC's to be
considered.
6.2
i)
ii)
7.0
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
The type test reports should not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date
of bid opening and the type test should have been carried out in accordance with IEC358(1992) and IEC-186 (1987) from Govt. approved test house.
However, temperature rise test although covered under type tests will be got conducted
by the supplier on one place of total ordered quantity of each type, at his premises in
the presence of the inspecting officer of the purchaser, without any extra charges. The
purchaser reserves the right to demand repetition of some or all the type tests in the
presence of purchaser's representative.
ACCEPTANCE AND ROUTINE TESTS :
All acceptance and routine tests as stipulated in the relevant standards shall be carried
out by the Supplier in presence of purchaser's representative, unless dispensed with in
writing by the Purchaser.
Immediately after finalisation of the programme of routine /acceptance testing , the
Supplier shall give sufficient advance intimation to the Purchaser to enable him to
depute his representative for witnessing the testing.
DOCUMENTATION:
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
7.1
All drawings shall conform to international standards organisation (ISO) `A' series of
drawing sheet/Indian Standards Specification IS:11065. All drawings shall be in ink and
suitable for microfilming. If drawings are computerized than all drawings shall be nicely
printed. All dimensions and data shall be in S.I.Units.
7.2
List of drawings:
General outline and assembly drawings of the equipment.
Graphs showing the performance of equipment's in regard to magnetisation
characteristics; ratio & phase angle curves, ratio correction factor curves.
Sectional views showing:
General Constructional Features.
Materials/Gaskets/Sealing used.
The insulation & the winding arrangements, method of connection of the primary /
secondary winding to the primary/ secondary terminals etc.
Porcelain used and its dimensions.
Arrangement of terminals and details of connection studs provided.
Name plate.
Schematic drawing.
Detailed drawing of pressure release device with detailed literature.
Terminal connector drawing.
a)
b)
c)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
NOTE:-
All above drawings should bear a minimum space (14X10cm) for stamping the
approval of drawings by the purchaser.
7.3
The bidder shall submit four sets of final versions of complete and correct equipment
drawings except 7.2 (b) above (actual of which shall be supplied at the time of
inspection) for purchaser’s approval alongwith bid in a sealed envelope. The purchaser
shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within 21
days from the date of issue of LOI. The submission of complete and correct readable
drawings for approval is the responsibility of the bidder/supplier. The supplier shall, if so
required by the purchaser, modify the drawings and resubmit four copies of the
modified drawings for purchaser’s approval within two weeks from the date of
purchaser’s comments. Then, the purchaser shall approve the revised drawings within
two weeks from the date of its receipt.
7.4
The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with the approved
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the
purchaser. All manufacturing and fabrication work in connection with the equipment
prior to the approval of the drawing shall be at the supplier's risk.
7.5
The successful bidder shall also supply one set of nicely bound all the approved
drawings & instruction manual containing handling, installation, testing and
commissioning of equipment at the time of dispatch of material to the consignee with
each equipment for our field staff without which the supply will not be considered
as complete supply. In addition, 5 sets of such bound manuals and final approved
drawings shall be supplied for reference & record in our design office alongwith one
good quality soft copy (CD) of approved drawings and instruction manuals, if
computerized.
7.6
Approval of drawings / work by Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of his
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the
latest revision of applicable standards, rules and codes of practices. The equipment
shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design, workmanship
and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of ordering and purchaser shall
have the power to reject any work or material which in his judgement is not in full
accordance therewith.
NOTE :- 1. In case the equipment offered by the Supplier does not meet with the
requirement of technical specification the offer of the firm shall not be
considered.
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
ANNEXURE- I A (i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 420kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT)
Sl.
Requirement
No.
1. Rated Primary voltage
2. Type
3. No. of Secondaries
4. Rated voltage factor
5. Capacitance (minimum)
6. Rated voltage (volts)
7. Application
8. Accuracy
9. Output burden (VA)
10Percentage voltage error &
phase
displacement
(minutes) for respective
specified accuracy classes.
Note:-
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
Particulars
400/√3kV
Single phase
3
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads
Secondary-I Secondary-II Secondary-III
110/√3
110/√3
110/√3
Metering &
Protection
Metering
Protection
1/3P
3P
0.2
100
50
50
As per ISS/IEC
Each winding shall fulfill its respective specified accuracy requirement within its
specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output
of any value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other
winding in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its
equivalent IEC.
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
ANNEXURE- IB(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT)
Sl.
Requirement
No.
11. Rated Primary voltage
Particulars
220/√3kV
12.
Type
13.
No. of Secondaries
3
14.
Rated voltage factor
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
15.
Capacitance (minimum)
16.
Rated voltage (volts)
17.
Application
Single phase
8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads
Secondary-I
Secondary-II
Secondary-III
110/√3
110/√3
110/√3
Protection &
Protection
Metering
Measurement
18.
Accuracy
1/3P
3P
0.2
19.
Output burden (VA)
100
50
10
20.
Percentage voltage error &
phase
displacement
(minutes) for respective
specified accuracy classes.
Note:-
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
As per ISS/IEC
Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy requirement within its
specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output
of any value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other
winding in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its
equivalent IEC.
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
ANNEXURE- IB(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT)
Sl.
Particulars
No.
1.
Rated Primary voltage
Requirement
2.
Type
Single phase
3.
No. of Secondaries
2
4.
Rated voltage factor
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
5.
Rated voltage (volts)
6.
Application
220/√3kV
Secondary-I
Secondary-II
110/√3
110/√3
Protection &
Protection
Measurement
7.
Accuracy
1/3P
3P
8.
Output burden (VA)
150
50
9.
Percentage voltage error &
phase
(minutes)
As per ISS/IEC
displacement
for
respective
specified accuracy classes.
Note:-
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy requirement within its
specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output
of any value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other
winding in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its
equivalent IEC.
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
ANNEXURE- IC(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT).
Sl.
Requirement
No.
1.
Rated Primary voltage
Particulars
132√3kV
2.
Type
3.
No. of Secondaries
3
4.
Rated voltage factor
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
5.
Capacitance (minimum)
6.
Rated voltage (volts)
7.
Single phase
Application
8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads
Secondary-I
Secondary-II
Secondary-III
110/√3
110/√3
110/√3
Protection &
Protection
Metering
1/3P
3P
0.2
50
25
10
Measurement
8.
Accuracy
9.
Output burden (VA)
10.
Percentage voltage error &
phase
(minutes)
As per ISS/IEC
displacement
for
respective
specified accuracy classes.
Note:-
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy requirement within its
specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output
of any value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other
winding in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its
equivalent IEC.
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
ANNEXURE- IC(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT).
Sl.
Particulars
No.
1.
Rated Primary voltage
Requirement
2.
Type
Single phase
3.
No. of Secondaries
3
4.
Rated voltage factor
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
5.
Rated voltage (volts)
6.
Application
132/√3kV
Secondary-I
Secondary-II
Secondary-III
110/√3
110/√3
110/√3
Protection &
Protection
METERING
Measurement
7.
Accuracy
1/3P
3P
0.2
8.
Output burden (VA)
250
25
20
9.
Percentage voltage error &
phase
(minutes)
As per ISS/IEC
displacement
for
respective
specified accuracy classes.
Note:-
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy requirement within its
specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output
of any value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other
winding in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its
equivalent IEC.
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
ANNEXURE- ID(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
(CVT)S.
Sl.
Requirement
No.
1.
Rated Primary voltage
Particulars
66/√3kV
2.
Type
3.
No. of Secondaries
2
4.
Rated voltage factor
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
5.
Capacitance (minimum)
6.
Rated voltage (volts)
7.
Single phase
Application
8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads
Secondary-I
Secondary-II
110/√3
110/√3
Protection &
Metering
Measurement
8.
Accuracy
9.
Output burden (VA)
10.
Percentage voltage error &
phase
(minutes)
1/3P
0.2
50
10
As per ISS/IEC
displacement
for
respective
specified accuracy classes.
Note:-
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy requirement within its
specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output
of any value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other
winding in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its
equivalent IEC.
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
ANNEXURE- ID(ii)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT).
Sl.
Particulars
No.
1.
Rated Primary voltage
Requirement
2.
Type
Single phase
3.
No. of Secondaries
2
4.
Rated voltage factor
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
5.
Rated voltage (volts)
6.
Application
66/√3kV
Secondary-I
Secondary-II
110/√3
110/√3
Protection &
Protection
Measurement
7.
Accuracy
1/3P
3P
8.
Output burden (VA)
250
25
9.
Percentage voltage error &
phase
(minutes)
As per ISS/IEC
displacement
for
respective
specified accuracy classes.
Note:-
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy requirement within its
specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output
of any value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other
winding in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its
equivalent IEC.
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
ANNEXURE- IE(i)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT) OF 2 CORES.
Sl.
Requirement
No
1. Rated Primary voltage
Particulars
33/√3kV
2.
Type
Single phase
3.
No. of Secondaries
2
4.
Rated voltage factor
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
5.
Rated voltage (volts)
Secondary-I
Secondary-II
110/√3
110/√3
Main metering
Metering & Protection
6.
Application
7.
Accuracy
0.2
1/3P
8.
Output burden (VA)
10
50
9.
Percentage voltage error &
phase
As per ISS/IEC
displacement
(minutes) for respective
specified accuracy classes.
Note:-
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy requirement within its
specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output
of any value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other
winding in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its
equivalent IEC.
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
ANNEXURE-IIA
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
CAPACITIVE VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
1.
Name of manufacturer
2.
Type and model
3.
Rated voltage (kV)
4.
Capacitance :
a)
Primary capacitance C1 (pf)
b)
Secondary capacitance C2 (pf)
c)
Equivalent capacitance C (pf)
5.
Number of secondary windings
6.
Rated secondary windings :
a)
Winding-I (volts)
b)
Winding -Ii (volts)
7.
Rated secondary burden:
a)
Winding - I (VA)
b)
Winding - II (VA)
8.
Accuracy class of each secondary :
a) Winding -I (VA)
b) Winding - II (VA)
9.
Rated voltage factor with rated burden.
10.
One minute power frequency withstand:
Test (Dry) voltage (kV rms)
11.
One minute power frequency withstand test
(wet) voltage (kV rms)
12.
1.2/50 micro second impulse wave withstand
test voltage (kV rms)
13.
One minute power frequency withstand voltage
on secondaries (kV rms)
14.
Total creepage distance (mm)
15.
Creepage factor
16.
Is CVT suitable for carrier
frequency in the range of 40 to 500 KHz? (Yes/No)
17.
Natural frequency of coupling capacitors
18.
Rated Primary
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
burden of potential devices (VA)
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
19.
Temperature rise at 1.2 times rated voltage with rated burden (°C)
20.
Guaranteed value of temp. coefficient.
(percent per °Ce
21.
Guaranteed value of radio interference voltage
in micro-volts at different voltages.
22.
Guaranteed sealing test. The pressure at
which sealing test is to be carried out.
23.
Guaranteed value of the H.F capacitances and
equivalent series resistance at different.
24.
Value of stray capacitance and stray conductance
in the carrier frequency range of 40 to 500 KHz.
25.
26.
Weight of oil and the standard to which it conforms
i)
In capacitor unit (Kg/IS)
ii)
In measuring unit. (Kg/IS)
Total weight (Kg)
27.
Over -all dimensions (mm)
28.
Mounting flange dimensional details
29.
Whether CVT are suitable for
Carrier communication,
carrier protection,
carrier telemetering and
carrier teleprinting services,
metering, relaying protection,
synchronising and interlocking purposes.
30.
Do the CVTs contain built in
compensating reactors and damping
device in P.T. portion?
(Yes/No)
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
ANNEXURE-IIB
POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
1. Manufacturer's type and designation.
2. Type
3. Rated Frequency
4. Rated primary voltage
5. Number of secondary windings
6. Rated secondary windings :
a)
Winding-I
b)
Winding -II
c)
Winding -III
7. Class of Accuracy.
a)
Winding - I
b)
Winding - II
c)
Winding -III
8. Limits of errors.
a) Winding -I
i) Percentage voltage ratio error
ii) Phase displacement. (Minutes)
b) Winding - II
i) Percentage voltage ratio error
ii) Phase displacement (minutes)
c) Winding - III
i) Percentage voltage ratio error
iii)
Phase displacement (minutes)
9. Rated burden.
a) Winding - I
b) Winding -II
c) Winding-III
10.
11.
Temperature rise at 1.2 times rated
applied continuously with
rated burden (°C)
12.
Insulation class of
a) Primary windings
b) Secondary windings
13.
One minute power frequency:
(Dry) withstand Test voltage (kV)
One minute power frequency (wet)
14.
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
Rated voltage factor and time
voltage when
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
withstand test voltage (kV)
E:\DATA AFTER
2012.doc
15.
1.2/50 micro second impulse withstand
test voltage (kV peak)
16.
One minute power frequency withstand
voltage on secondaries (volts)
17.
18.
a) Creepage distance.
c) Creepage factor
Standard to which the equipment conforms
19.
Standard to which the oil conforms
20.
Total weight of the P.T.
21.
Overall dimensions
22.
Mounting details
23.
Weight of the oil
24.
Total shipping weight.
12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-2 PT & CVT-Nov,
HARYANA VIDYUT PRASARAN NIGAM
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 400kV, 220 kV,
132 kV, 66 kV & 33 kV CONTROL AND RELAY
PANEL BOARDS
FOR SUBSTATIONS WITH SUBSTATION
AUTOMATION SYSTEM
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
1
CONTENTS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------CLAUSE NO.
TITLE
PAGE NO.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
SCOPE
STANDARDS
SERVICE CONDITION
PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
TESTS
DOCUMENTATION
3
3
4
5
6
26
26
ANNEXURES
1.
2.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION
FOR
SUBSTATION
AUTOMATION SYSTEM
SIGNAL LIST OF BASIC MONITORING REQUIREMENTS
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CTs, NCTs, PTs & CVTs
TRANSMISSION LINE DATA
SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS FROM THE SPECIFICATION
LINE PARAMETERS
DETAILS OF CARRIER EQUIPMENTS
SAS ARCHITECTURE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR AC KIOSK
29
54
58
63
79
80
81
82
83
84
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
2
1.0
1.1
1.2
1.3
SCOPE:
This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, inspection &
testing at manufacturer's work before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery
at discretion of purchaser of Control & Relay Panels for 400kV,220 kV, 132 kV &
66 kV S/Stns. having Substation Automation System in the state of Haryana.
Unless specifically excluded from the offer, all fittings and accessories, not
specifically stated in this specification but which are necessary for satisfactory
operation of the scheme or to complete the work in a good workman like manner
shall be deemed to have been included in the scope of supply of the Bidder.
CO-ORDINATION :
Circuit Breakers, CT's, PT's/CVT's & Isolating Switches, etc. are being purchased
against separate specification. The particulars of CTs, PTs and CVTs existing/ to
be arranged are listed at Annexure 'B'. The Supplier of control & relay boards shall
be responsible for preparing complete wiring diagram of 33kV,66kV,132 kV, 220
kV & 400kV C&R panel boards and shall also undertake to mount & wire any
equipment received from other supplier. The schematic of breakers & isolators
are required to be incorporated in the panel schematic.
The technical specification of substation automation system provided at the sub
station is enclosed as Annexure-1.The panels to be supplied should be
compatible to the existing automation system at the substation.
1.4
EXPERIENCE:
1.4.1 For 400kV & 220kV C&R Panels:
The supplier of C&R panels shall be manufacturer of relays and all the main
relays on the C&R panels shall be of his make only. However, one of the distance
protection schemes on each 400kV & 220 kV feeder C&R panel can be of
different make in view of the fact that both the distance protection scheme (Main-I
& Main-II) should have different measuring techniques.
1.4.2 For 132kV, 66kV & 33kV C&R Panels:
The supplier of C&R panels shall be manufacturer of relays and all the main
relays on the C&R panels shall be of his make only. The supplier’s own make
relay includes the relays manufactured by their Principals/Associates and they
have their service centre with them.
2.0
2.1
STANDARDS :
The equipment offered shall conform to latest relevant Indian Standards listed
hereunder or equivalent IEC :Sr. No.
1.
2.
Standard
IS: 5
IS: 375
3.
IS: 694
4.
5.
IS: 722
IS:
1248
Part-I& IV
IS: 2419
6.
Title
Colour for ready mix paints.
Marking & arrangements for switchgear, bus bars, main
connections & auxiliary wiring.
PVC insulated cable for working voltage upto and including
1100 V.
AC Electricity meters.
Direct acting indicating analogue electrical measuring
instruments & their accessories.
Dimensions for panel mounted indicating & recording electrical
instruments.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
3
Sr. No.
7.
8.
9.
Standard
IS :3231
IS :8686
IS :2147
Title
Electrical relays for power system protection.
Static protective relays.
Degree of protection provided by enclosures for low voltage
switchgear & control gear.
2.2
The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered,
manufactured, built, tested and commissioned in accordance with the Acts, Rules,
Laws and Regulations of India.
2.3
The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform to latest
issue with all amendments of standard specified above.
2.4
In addition to meeting the specific requirement called for in the Technical
Specification, the equipment shall also conform to the general requirement of the
relevant standards and shall form an integral part of Specification.
2.5
The Bidder shall note that standards mentioned in the specification are not
mutually exclusive or complete in themselves, but intended to compliment each
other.
2.6
The Contractor shall also note that list of standards presented in this specification
is not complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be considered in
conjunction with specific IS/IEC.
2.7
When the specific requirements stipulated in the specification exceed or differ than
those required by the applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall
take precedence.
2.8
Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better
performance than that specified in the standard referred shall also be accepted.
2.9
In case governing standards for the equipment is different from IS or IEC, the
salient points of difference shall be clearly brought out alongwith English language
version of standard or relevant extract of the same. The equipment conforming to
standards other than IS/IEC shall be subject to Employer's approval.
2.10
The bidder shall clearly indicate in his bid the specific standards in accordance
with which the works will be conformed.
3.0
SERVICE CONDITIONS:
3.1
Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:-
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
4
i.
Location
In the state of Haryana
ii.
Max. ambient air temp (°C)
50
iii.
Min. ambient air temp (°C)
-2.5
iv.
Maximum Relative humidity (%)
100
v.
Minimum Relative humidity (%)
26
vi.
Average annual rainfall (mm)
900
vii.
Max. wind pressure (kg/sq. m.)
195
viii.
Max. altitude above mean sea level (meters)
1000
ix.
Isoceraunic level (days/Year)
50
x.
Seismic level (horizontal acceleration)
xi.
Average number of dust storm (days per
annum)
0.3 g
35
Note:-i) Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth.
The climatic conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions.
ii) Air conditioning or any special arrangement for making the control room dust
proof shall not be provided in any of the S/Stn.
3.2
All control wiring, equipment & accessories shall be protected against fungus
growth, condensation, vermin & other harmful effects due to tropical environments.
3.3 AUX. POWER SUPPLY :
i)
A.C. Supply
Voltage variation
Frequency variation
ii)
D C Supply
Variation
:
:
:
:
:
415/240 Volts, 3-phase, 4-wire, 50 Hz
± 10%
± 3%
220 Volts, 2 wire available from S/Stn.
battery(insulated)
±10%.
3.4. 400kV, 220 kV, 132 kV, 66 kV & 33 kV voltages will be three phase having normal
frequency of 50 Hz subject to a variation of ± 3%. Neutrals of the Power
Transformers at the S/Stn. covered in this specification are solidly earthed.
4.0
PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:
The panel shall have the principal dimensions as detailed below:i). Depth of panels
=
610 mm
ii).
a) Height of switchboard above base frame =
2210 mm
b) Height of base frame
=
102 mm
iii). Type of Panels
=
Simplex Control & Relay Panel
Note:- The offer of the bidder not conforming to above requirement shall be out
rightly rejected.
4.1
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
5
4.2
ARRANGEMENT OF PANELS:
The panels shall be fabricated so that even if the serial of panels is changed no
difficulty will be faced in the placement of panels and cabling etc. The sequence of
various panels in a panel board at S/Stn. shall be supplied to successful bidder.
5.0
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:
5.1
MATERIAL & WORKMANSHIP:
All material used in the construction of the panels/relays shall be of the best
quality obtainable of their respective kind and whole of the work shall be of the
highest class, well finished and of approved design and make.
Castings shall be free from blow-holes, flaws, cracks or other defects and shall be
smooth grained and of true dimensions and forms.
The draw out mechanism in respect of draw out relays should be smooth and
convenient so as to give adequate service during their use.
5.2
DEPARTURE FROM THE SPECIFICATION:
Should the tenderer wish to depart from the provisions of this specification either
on account of manufacturing practice or for any other reasons, he will draw
specific attention to the proposed points of departure on the prescribed Performa
(enclosed) at annexure-D in his tender and submit such full information, drawings
and specifications as will enable the merit of his proposal to be appreciated.
In the event of contractor drawings, specification and tables etc. disagreeing with
this specification during the execution of the contract this specification shall be
held binding unless the departures have been fully recorded as required above.
5.3
PAINTING:
All unfinished surfaces of steel panels and frame works shall be sand blasted to
remove rust scale, foreign adhering matter & grease. A suitable rust resistance
primer shall be applied on the interior & exterior of steel which will be followed by
application of an under coat suitable to serve as base for finishing coat. The
finishing coat shall be as under: Stove enameled light grey as per shade No.631 of IS: 5/IEC.
Exterior
Interior
stove enameled white.
Base frame Stove enameled glossy black.
5.4.
TESTING EQUIPMENT AND TESTING FACILITIES ON THE RELAYS:
The tenderer shall recommend suitable testing equipment (alongwith quantity)
required for field testing of protective schemes and other relays offered against
this specification. The actual quantity to be ordered shall be determined by the
Purchaser.
Also adequate testing facilities should be provided on the relay so as to test them
without the necessity of their removal or making any extra connections. The
Bidder will clearly indicate the testing procedure to be followed in respect of relays
offered.
5.5
The transmission lines shall be either in form of overhead conductor or
combination of overhead conductor & underground cable. The tentative
transmission line data in respect of 400kV, 220kV, 132kV & 66 kV lines covered in
this specification is given at Annexure-C.
The standard chart providing the details of per unit values of Z1, Z2 & Z0 on 100
MVA base per 100 km of line for calculating these values for full lengths of lines
are enclosed at Annexure-E.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
6
The tentative details of carrier equipment are enclosed at Annexure-F.
The suitability of distance scheme offered with reference to the above parameters
may be seen.
Guaranteed test sheets as per Annexure A shall be submitted by the tenderer.
Relevant literature shall be supplied along with the bid for proper appreciation of
the offered equipment.
5.6
SUPERVISORY SERVICES:
The tenderer may offer supervisory services, panel wise testing & commissioning
of 400kV, 220kV, 132 kV, 66 kV & 33 kV panel included in the specification. The
tenderer may quote their rates on diem basis category-wise with their terms &
conditions. The rates quoted should be valid for at least three years form the date
of receipt of equipment by us.
5.7
TRANINING OF PERSONNEL:
The contractor will provide free facilities for training the purchaser's technicians
/Engineers at his works, design office and HVPNL's site. He will intimate in
advance the schedule of completion of designs and manufacture of equipment
against the contract (of this specification) or similar equipment to be manufactured
at the works so that the purchaser may depute upto 3 technicians & 3 engineers
for training at the manufacture assembly, testing, operation and commissioning
etc. including testing and commissioning of protective relays, covering training in
detecting faults in static relays complete explanation of the schematic wiring and
wiring schedule of the relays/scheme together with full understanding regarding the
functional modules of the relays/scheme shall be given to the Engineer /
technicians. The topics of CTs & PTs towards relay application shall also be kept
under the scope of training. The training shall be arranged by the contractor at the
works in such a way that the persons under training shall be freely acquainted with
the equipment. The engineers / technicians shall also be provided with
relay/scheme guides/instruction manuals covering drawings of functional modules
of relays/schemes. The period of training will be not exceeding 15 days and all
expenses shall be borne by the purchaser.
5.8
GENERAL DESCRIPTION:
5.8.1. SIMPLEX C&R PANEL BOARDS:
The panels shall be of `simplex' type & consisting of separate cubicles (for each
circuit complete with side covers) made of sheet steel of thickness not less than
10 SWG for the base frame, door frame and front portions of the cubicles and not
less than 14 SWG for door, side, top & bottom portion having provision for
extension at both ends with internal wiring, illumination with door operated off & on
switch. The cubicle shall be suitable for floor mounting with its bottom open. Each
cubicle shall be fitted with flush mounted steel hinged door & lock at the back & all
the equipments will be mounted in front. The supply shall include suitable grouting
bolts and nuts etc. All holes and extension windows shall be blanked and access
doors shall be provided with compressible liners at the edges.
These simplex panels offered may, therefore, match in following respects:i)
Height-wise and depth-wise matching.
The control & relay Panels shall be completely dust & vermin proof. The enclosure
shall provide degree of protection not less than IP-31 in accordance with IS: 2147
and shall be suitable for tropical use.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
7
NOTE:- For testing purpose a small opening with a cap to close the same is
required to be provided to extend the testing leads on front side of the relay
panel.
5.9
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS OF RELAYS:
All relays shall conform to the requirements of IS:3231/IEC-60255/IEC 61000 or
other applicable standards. Relays shall be suitable for flush or semi-flush
mounting on the front with connections from the rear. All protective relays shall be
in draw out or plug-in type modular cases with proper testing facilities. Necessary
test plugs/test handles shall be supplied loose and shall be included in contractor’s
scope of supply.
All main protective relays shall be numerical type and communication protocol
shall be as per IEC 61850. Further, the test levels of EMI as indicated in IEC
61850 shall be applicable to these.
For numerical relays, the scope shall include the following:
a) Necessary software and hardware to up/down load the data to/from the relay
from/to personal computer installed in the substation. However, the supply of PC
is not covered under this clause.
b) The relay shall have suitable communication facility for future connectivity to
SCADA. The relay shall be capable of supporting IEC 61850 protocol (with fibre
optical port) and shall be compatible with existing SAS (may be of other make).
c) Numerical relays should have clock (Real Time Clock) with inbuilt battery back up
having life span of about 10 years.
d) Numerical relays shall have adequate no. of output contacts and LEDs to meet the
specification / Scheme requirement. All numerical relays shall be supplied preconfigured as per specification / scheme requirements / approved drgs.
5.10 CONTROL SCHEME:
5.10.1 CONTROL SWITCH FOR CIRCUIT BREAKER:
5.10.1.1 It shall be possible to close various circuit breakers from the control room. For
this purpose control switches having pistol grip type and of the spring return to
neutral position type non lockable handles with alarm cancellation contacts shall
be provided for `OP' of ckt. breakers. These shall be so designed that after being
operated to `close' a circuit breaker, the operation cannot be repeated until the
switch has been turned to a `trip' position making it impossible to perform two
`closing' operations consecutively.
5.10.1.2 The rating of the control switch contacts shall be suitable for the duty imposed by
the closing & opening mechanism of circuit breakers and shall conform to the
recommendations which may be made by the suppliers of circuit breakers. The
moving & fixed contacts shall be of such a form & material as will ensure good
contact and long service under severe operation duty. All contacts shall be readily
renewable.
5.10.1.3 The number of contacts in the control switches shall be decided by the tenderer
in view of various requirements of this specification. Two pairs of contacts one
normally open and one normally closed shall be kept spare. The total number of
contacts proposed to be provided shall be stated in the tender.
5.10.1.4 Safety against inadvertent operation due to light touch in the control switches
shall be ensured.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
8
5.11
TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY:
The relay shall be capable of monitoring the healthiness of each trip coil and
associated circuit of circuit breaker during "on & off" conditions. The relay shall
have time delay on drop-off of min. 200 milli seconds and shall be provided with
operation indicator.
400kV & 220 kV circuit breakers being procured are generally equipped with 2 trip
coils in each phase/pole of the breaker. For monitoring of trip circuits, both in
`open' & `close' position of the circuit breaker, 6 Nos. automatic trip circuit
supervision relays (one for each pole and each trip coil) are proposed.
For monitoring of entire trip circuit (from control & relay panel terminal to the trip
coil of circuit breaker) both in `open' & `close' position of the circuit, 2 No.
automatic trip circuit supervision relays are proposed for 132kV,66kV & 33kV
panels except 1No. Automatic trip circuit supervision relay is proposed for 33kV
Line & Capacitor Panels.
5.12
D.C. FAIL ALARM RELAY:
A suitable relay for monitoring the Trip Circuit D.C. wiring of the control and relay
panels shall be provided. The relay shall have time delay on drop-off of min. 100
milli seconds and shall be provided with operation indicator.
5.13
VOLTAGE SELECTION SCHEME:
The 400kV, 220kV, 132kV, 66kV & 33kV bus PTs exist on all the phases of both
the 400kV, 220kV, 132kV, 66kV & 33kV buses at substations having double bus
arrangement. Proper voltage selection scheme shall be provided on panels.
5.14 AUTO RECLOSING SCHEME:
5.14.1The protective scheme shall incorporate the necessary equipment to impart
auto-reclosing impulse to the circuit breaker when it has tripped either due to the
operation of the line protection scheme in the first zone or the accelerated
operation of it with the help of carrier equipment. No auto-reclosing impulse shall
be transmitted in the event of a fault cleared by the 2nd, 3rd & 4th zone of line
protection scheme. Auto-reclosing will also be blocked in case the circuit breaker
is tripped manually.
5.14.2The provision of single & three phase auto-reclosing is to be made on 400kV & 220
kV feeder C&R panels.
5.14.3 CHECK SYNCHRONIZING & DEAD LINE CHARGING SCHEME :
Check synchronizing relay and dead line charging equipment shall be provided for
400kV & 220 kV feeder C&R panels. The check synchronizing relay shall compare
the phase angle & frequency of the `incoming' and `running' supplies and allow the
auto-reclose to take place only if the said parameters are within the permissible
limits. The dead line charging equipment shall ensure auto-reclosing a circuit
breaker on to a `dead' line leaving the checking of synchronism of two supplies to
the other end of it.
Synchronizing check relay with necessary auxiliary equipments shall be provided
which shall permit breakers to close after checking the requirements of
synchronizing of incoming and running supply. The phase angle setting shall not
exceed 35 degree and have voltage difference setting not exceeding 10%. This
relay shall have a response time of less than 200 milliseconds when the two
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
9
system conditions are met within preset limits and with the timer disconnected.
The relay shall have a continuously adjustable time setting range of 0.5-3secs.
5.14.4 A four position stay-put non-locking type of auto-reclose selector-switch shall be
provided on each of the 400kV & 220 kV feeder C&R panels and shall have the
following four positions:
a) `Single phase auto’:
In this position, the relay shall allow single shot single pole auto reclosing for
single line to ground fault. For any other fault, the scheme shall allow all the three
poles of the circuit breaker to trip & lock them out.
b) `Single & three phase auto’:
In this position the relay shall allow single shot single pole auto-reclosing for single
line to ground fault and three pole auto-reclosing for other faults such as line to
line, double line to ground and three phase faults.
c) `Three phase auto' :
In this position, the relay shall impart three pole, single shot-reclosing impulse
irrespective of the type of fault.
d) `Non - auto' :
By putting the switch in this position it shall be possible to make the reclosing
scheme totally inactive and all the three poles of the circuit breaker shall trip
irrespective of the nature of a fault.
5.14.5 The reclosing scheme shall automatically reset after any successful reclosure and
shall lock out in case the circuit breaker trips immediately after reclosure. Also the
(reclosing) scheme shall not initiate reclosing upon an unsuccessful attempt to
manually close circuit breaker.
5.14.6 There shall be clear target indications for successful & un-successful operation.
5.14.7 The auto-reclosing scheme shall have continuously variable dead time setting
range of 0.1-2secs for single phase reclosing as well as for three phase reclosing.
The scheme shall have continuously variable reclaim time setting range of 5300secs.
Note:- The auto reclosing scheme in built with numerical distance protection relays
is acceptable provided it is available in both Main -I and Main-II distance
protection schemes and meets the above specification.
5.15
PROTECTION SCHEME:
Note:-1) The Protection Scheme shall be suitable for 5A current (instead of 1A) in
case of 33kV Level.
2) O/C & E/F relay for 11kV T/F Panel has to be provided on LV side i.e. 11kV
VCB Panel as per latest VCB Panel specifications of HVPNL.
5.15.1 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR POWER TRANSFORMERS.
A)
TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION :
The relay shall
i)
Be triple pole numerical type.
ii)
Have 3 instantaneous high set over-current units.
iii)
Have second harmonic restraint or other inrush proof feature and be stable
under normal over fluxing condition.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
10
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
•
•
•
•
a)
•
•
•
b)
•
•
•
•
Xii)
Have fifth harmonic by pass filter or similar other arrangement to prevent
mal-operation of the relay under operating conditions.
Be suitable for rated current of 1A and include necessary ICTs for ratio &
phase angle correction.
Have operating current setting sufficiently low (15% or less) so as to cover
practically the whole of the transformer against all types of faults.
Have adjustable bias setting range of 20- 50%.
Have maximum operating time of 30milli seconds at 5 times the rated
current.
Be provided with necessary terminals & links to measure current in
restraining circuits & in the operating circuits of all the phases under load
without making any wiring changes.
Cover the lightning arrestors (proposed to be provided very close to the
transformer) in the zone of protection.
The Scheme shall have in-built features of disturbance recorder and event
logger.
For disturbance recorder and event logger features, it shall have 8 analog
and 16 digital channels (out of which at least 8 shall be external digital
inputs). It shall have its own time generator and the clock of the time
generator shall be such that the drift is limited to +0.5 seconds/day, if
allowed to run without synchronization. Further, it shall have facility to
synchronize its time generator from Time Synchronization Equipment
having output of following types.
Voltage signal: (0-5V continuously settable, with 50m Sec. minimum pulse
duration)
Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 m Sec.)
IRIG-B
RS232C
The recorder shall give alarm in case of absence of synchronizing pulse
within specified time.
The disturbance recorder shall meet the following requirements:
The frequency response shall be 5 Hz on lower side and 250 Hz or better
on upper side.
Scan rate shall be 1000 Hz/Channel or better.
Pre–fault time shall not be less than 100 milliseconds and the post fault
time shall not be less than 2 seconds (adjustable). If another system
disturbance occurs during one post-fault run time, the recorder shall also
be able to record the same. However, the total memory of acquisition unit
shall not be less than 5.0 seconds.
The event logger shall meet the following requirements:
The time resolution shall be 1milli second.
Cope with up to 40 changes in any one 10milli seconds interval.
The date and time should be printed to the nearest 1milli second followed
by a message describing the point which has operated.
Events occurring whilst a previous event is in process of being printed are
to be stored to await printing.
Display resolution of differential/pickup current should be 0.01A (10mA).
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
11
B)
NON DIRECTIONAL THREE OVER CURRENT+ ONE EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION WITH HIGH SET:
The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units. The
relay shall be single pole inverse definite minimum time lag having definite min.
time of 3 secs. at 10 times settings. Over current relay with a setting range of
50%-200% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting range of
500% to 2000% of 1 Amp. shall be provided. Earth fault relay with a setting range
of 20%-80% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting range of
200% to 800% of 1 Amp. shall be provided. The relay shall be numerical type.
C)
RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT PROTECTION:
It shall be single pole type for the clearance of earth faults in the protected zone.
The relay shall be of high impedance type with a suitable setting to cover at least
90% of the winding & shall have a setting range of 10% to 40% of 1 Amp. or
suitable voltage setting. The relay shall be complete with tuned 50 Hz circuit &
stabilizing resistance. The tuned circuit will help reject harmonics produced by CT
saturation and thus make the relay operative for fundamental frequency only. The
stabilizing resistance may appropriately be set to avoid mal-operation under
through fault conditions. The relay shall be numerical type.
D)
8No. auxiliary relays for various transformer trip functions (Main Buch. Trip,
OLTC Oil Temp. Trip, Winding Temperature Trip, Oil Temp Trip, Pressure Relief
Trip, Surge Relay Trip and two no. spare) shall be provided.
E)
OVER FLUXING PROTECTION:
An over fluxing detecting relay for the protection of the transformer against overfluxing conditions is proposed to be provided on each of the transformer C&R
panels covered by this specification. The relay shall be numerical in design with
adjustable setting so as to avoid its operation on momentary system disturbances.
The relay shall be suitable for 110 Volts. The relay shall have inverse time
characteristics, matching with transformer over-fluxing withstand capability curve.
The relay shall provide an alarm with v/f setting range of 100% to 130% of rated
values and time delay continuously settable from 0.1 to 6 seconds to draw the
operator's attention about the existence of over-fluxing conditions. The tripping
time shall be governed by v/f versus time characteristics to cause tripping of
transformer controlling circuit breaker if the over-fluxing conditions continue to
exist.
Note:- The over fluxing relay in built with the numerical differential protection relay
is acceptable provided it meets the above specification.
F)
OVER LOAD ALARM RELAY:
It is proposed to provide an over current (i.e. single phase) relay for initiating an
alarm during transformer overload condition on the T/F C&R panels. The relay
shall have CONTINUOUS VARIABLE setting range of 50-120% of 1Amp. and
shall be supplemented by a continuously variable timer of 1 to 10 seconds. The
relay shall be arranged to sound an alarm when the transformer exceeds the
setting for a given period of time to draw the operator's attention.
Note:- The over load alarm relay in built with the numerical differential protection
relay or Over current & Earth Fault Protection Relay is acceptable provided
it meets the above specification.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
12
5.15.2 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR LINES:
A)
MAIN- I NON-SWITCHED DISTANCE PROTECTION [FOR 400kV & 220 kV
LINES]:
The scheme shall:i)
be numerical & modular in construction. Relay shall have continuous self
monitoring & diagnostic feature.
ii)
have high speed non-switched distance relays for three phase systems to
clear all type of line faults within the set reach of the relay.
iii)
It should cover at least line sections completely with 20% in hand margin.
iv)
Measure all type of faults without the need to switch the measuring
elements to the faulty phase or phases. Zone switching to extend the reach
of the measuring elements is not allowed. The reach of each zone shall be
independently & individually adjustable and shall have setting in steps of
1%. Memory circuits with defined characteristics shall be provided in all
three phases to ensure correct operation during close-up 3 phase faults
and other adverse conditions.
v)
have a max. operating time up-to trip impulse to circuit breaker (complete
protection time including applicable carrier & trip relay time) under source to
line impedance ratios (SIR) under all possible combinations of fault with PT
being used on the line (with all filters included) at 50% of zone-1 reach :
for SIR 0.01-4:as 40 ms at nearest end & 60 ms at other end of line.
for SIR 4-15 :as 45 ms at nearest end & 65 ms at other end of line.
(carrier transmission time is taken as 20 ms provided that any reduction in
carrier time shall be directly reflected as reduction in maximum operating
time).
vi)
have stepped time-distance characteristics and shall have at least four
independently variable time graded distance protection zones to cover two
adjacent line sections out of which Zone-1, 2 & 3 should be selectable in
forward direction and Zone-4 should be selectable in reverse direction.
vii)
The relay shall have mho or quadrilateral or other suitably shaped
characteristics for zone-1, 2, 3 & 4. The relay shall have an adjustable
characteristics angle setting range of 30 - 85 degree or shall have
independent resistance(R) & reactance(X) setting..
viii)
ensure that this long coverage is consistent with limitations imposed by
heavy loading and sound phase component of fault current. If the
characteristics of starting relays are such that it cannot pick-up because of
very low in-feed, under-voltage relays may also be used as supplementary
relays.
ix)
have two independent continuously variable time setting range of 0-3
seconds for zone-2 and 0-5 seconds for zone-3 & 4.
x)
have a maximum resetting time of less than 35milli-seconds.
xi)
have facilities for offset features with adjustable 10-20% of Zone-3 setting.
xii)
have residual compensation variable from 30-150%.
xiii)
operate instantaneously when circuit breaker is closed to zero-volt 3 phase
fault.
xiv) be suitable for single & three phase tripping.
xv)
have a continuous current rating of two times of rated current. The voltage
circuit shall be capable of operation at 1.2 times rated voltage. The relay
shall also be capable of carrying a high short time current of 80 times rated
current without damage for a period of 1 sec.
xvi) be selective between internal and external faults.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
13
xvii)
have adequate contacts to meet the complete scheme requirements & if
required incorporate three separate high speed self reset trip relays for
single phase faults and a fourth high speed trip relay for multi-phase faults.
xviii) have suitable number of potential free contacts. Multiplication relays, if
required, shall be provided for Carrier aided features, Auto reclosing, Event
Logger, Disturbance recorder & Data acquisition system.
xix) include power swing blocking protection which shall:
a1)
be of triple pole type
a2)
have suitable setting range to encircle the distance protection described
above.
a3)
have a continuously adjustable time delay on pick up of setting range
0-2seconds.
a4)
block tripping during power swing conditions.
a5)
be of numerical type
xx)
include fuse failure protection which shall:
a1)
monitor all the three fuses of PTs/CVTs and associated cable against open
circuit.
a2)
inhibit trip circuits on operation and initiate annunciation.
a3)
remain inoperative for system earth faults.
a4)
be of numerical type.
xxi) be wired for carrier inter-tripping (PUR/POR) & carrier blocking features
selectable at site.
xxii) be suitable for 1 Amp. rated CT secondary, 110V (phase to phase ) VT
supply and 220 V DC supply. Mode of conversation of DC supply from 220
V DC to the voltage level required for their scheme may be mentioned in
detail. Requirement of CTs & VTs for the satisfactory working of the
scheme may also be indicated in the tender.
xxiii) The relay shall be suitable for series compensated line and must have a
current reversal guard feature.
xxiv) The Scheme shall have in-built features of broken conductor detection,
distance to fault locator, disturbance recorder and event logger.
For disturbance recorder and event logger features, it shall have 8 analog
and 32 digital channels (out of which at least 16 shall be external digital
inputs). It shall have its own time generator and the clock of the time
generator shall be such that the drift is limited to +0.5 seconds/day, if
allowed to run without synchronization. Further, it shall have facility to
synchronize its time generator from Time Synchronization Equipment
having output of following types.
• Voltage signal: (0-5V continuously settable, with 50m Sec. minimum pulse
duration)
• Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50 m Sec.)
• IRIG-B
• RS232C
The recorder shall give alarm in case of absence of synchronizing pulse
within specified time.
a)
The disturbance recorder shall meet the following requirements:
• The frequency response shall be 5 Hz on lower side and 250 Hz or better
on upper side.
• Scan rate shall be 1000 Hz/Channel or better.
• Pre–fault time shall not be less than 100 milliseconds and the post fault
time shall not be less than 2 seconds (adjustable). If another system
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
14
b)
•
•
•
•
c)
•
•
•
•
B)
C)
disturbance occurs during one post-fault run time, the recorder shall also
be able to record the same. However, the total memory of acquisition unit
shall not be less than 5.0 seconds.
The event logger shall meet the following requirements:
The time resolution shall be 1 milli second.
Cope with up to 40 changes in any one 10 milli seconds interval.
The date and time should be printed to the nearest 1 milli second followed
by a message describing the point which has operated.
Events occurring whilst a previous event is in process of being printed are
to be stored to await printing. Over 100 such events must be stored.
The distance to fault locator shall meet the following requirements:
Be On-Line type and suitable for breaker operating time of 2 cycles.
The display shall be directly in percent of line length or kilometers without
requiring any further calculations.
Shall have an accuracy of 3% or better for the typical conditions defined for
operating timings measurement of distance relays. The above accuracy
should not be impaired by presence of remote end infeed, predominant
D.C. component in fault current, high fault arc resistance, severe CVT
transients.
Shall have parallel line mutual zero sequence compensation feature.
MAIN -II NON-SWITCHED DISTANCE PROTECTION [FOR 400kV & 220 kV
LINES] :
For Main-II distance protection, scheme shall be numerical and shall have same
features as that of Main-I protection against sub para 5.14.2 (A) above but with
different measuring technique.
NON-SWITCHED DISTANCE PROTECTION SCHEME [FOR 132kV & 66kV LINES]:
The main protection scheme for these lines will be distance scheme working on
definite distance measuring principle both for phase & earth faults. The scheme
shall:i)
be numerical & modular in construction. Relay shall have continuous self
monitoring & diagnostic feature.
ii)
have high speed non-switched distance relays for three phase systems
to clear all type of line faults within the set reach of the relay.
iii)
It should cover at least line sections completely with 20% in hand margin.
iv)
measure all type of faults without the need to switch the measuring
elements to the faulty phase or phases. Zone switching to extend the reach
of the measuring elements is not allowed. The reach of each zone shall be
independently & individually adjustable and shall have setting in steps of
1%. Memory circuits with defined characteristics shall be provided in all
three phases to ensure correct operation during close-up 3 phase faults
and other adverse conditions.
v)
have a max. operating time up-to trip impulse to circuit breaker (complete
protection time including trip relay time) under source to line impedance
ratios (SIR) :0.01-4 as 50ms under all possible combinations of fault at 50%
of zone-1 reach.
vi)
have stepped time-distance characteristics and shall have at least four
independently variable time graded distance protection zones to cover two
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
15
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
xviii)
a1)
a2)
a3)
a4)
a5)
xix)
a1)
a2)
a3)
a4)
xx)
adjacent line sections out of which Zone-1, 2 & 3 should be selectable in
forward direction and Zone-4 should be selectable in reverse direction.
The relay shall have mho or quadrilateral or other suitably shaped
characteristics for zone-1, 2, 3 & 4. The relay shall have an adjustable
characteristics angle setting range of 30 - 85 degree or shall have
independent resistance(R) & reactance(X) setting.
ensure that this long coverage is consistent with limitations imposed by
heavy loading and sound phase component of fault current. If the
characteristics of starting relays are such that it cannot pick-up because of
very low in-feed, under-voltage relays may also be used as supplementary
relays.
have two independent continuously variable time setting range of 0-3
seconds for zone-2 and 0-5 seconds for zone-3 & 4.
have a maximum resetting time of less than 55milli-seconds (including the
resetting time of trip relays).
have facilities for offset features with adjustable 10-20% of Zone-3 setting.
For correct measurement of earth faults necessary equipment for residual
compensation shall be included. It shall have residual compensation
variable from 30-150%.
operate instantaneously when circuit breaker is closed to zero-volt 3 phase
fault.
be suitable for three phase tripping.
have a continuous current rating of two times of rated current. The voltage
circuit shall be capable of operation at 1.2 times rated voltage. The relay
shall also be capable of carrying a high short time current of 80 times rated
current without damage for a period of 1 sec.
have adequate contacts to meet the complete scheme requirements & if
required incorporate separate high speed self reset trip relays.
have suitable number of potential free contacts. Multiplication relays, if
required, shall be provided for Event Logger, Disturbance recorder & Data
acquisition system.
include power swing blocking protection which shall
be of triple pole type
have suitable setting range to encircle the distance protection described
above.
have a continuously adjustable time delay on pick up of setting range
0-2seconds.
block tripping during power swing conditions.
be of numerical type
include fuse failure protection which shall
monitor all the three fuses of PTs/CVTs and associated cable against
open circuit.
inhibit trip circuits on operation and initiate annunciation.
remain inoperative for system earth faults.
be of numerical type.
be suitable for 1 Amp. rated CT secondary, 110V (phase to phase ) VT
supply and 220 V DC supply. Mode of conversation of DC supply from 220
V DC to the voltage level required for their scheme may be mentioned in
detail. Requirement of CTs & VTs for the satisfactory working of the
scheme may also be indicated in the tender.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
16
xxi)
D)
The Scheme shall have in-built features of broken conductor detection,
distance to fault locator, disturbance recorder and event logger.
THREE OVER CURRENT+ ONE EARTH FAULT PROTECTION:
The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units.
It shall include VT fuse failure relays for alarm purposes.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
DIRECTIONAL OVER CURRENT RELAY :
The relay shall
have IDMTL characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at
10 times setting.
have a variable setting range of 50-200% of 1 Amp.
have a characteristic angle of 45 degree lead.
include operatio indicator.
be suitable for 110V VT secondary.
be numerical type.
DIRECTIONAL EARTH FAULT RELAY:
The relay shall
be numerical type.
have IDMTL characteristic with a definite minimum time of 3.0 seconds at
10 times setting.
have a variable setting range of 20-80% of 1 Amp.
have a characteristic angle of 45 degree lag.
include operation indicator.
be suitable for connection across open delta formed by 110/√3 volt rated
secondary of VT.
E)
FEEDER OVER LOAD ALARM RELAY:
It is proposed to provide a single pole over current relay for the purpose of
monitoring the load flow on feeders to sound an alarm whenever load flow
in the line exceeds the setting for a given period of time to draw the
operator's attention. The relay shall have CONTINUOUS VARIABLE
setting range of 50-200% of 1 Amp. and shall be supplemented by a
continuously variable timer of 1 to 10 seconds.
F)
LINE OVERVOTAGE PROTECTION RELAY FOR 400KV :
The relay shall:
monitor all three phases
have two independent stages and stage- 1 & II relay are acceptable as
built in with line distance relays Main I & II both .
have an adjustable setting range of 100-170% of rated voltage with an
adjustable time delay range of 1 to 60 seconds for the first stage.
have an adjustable setting range of 100-170% of rated voltage with a time
delay of 100-200 mill seconds for the second stage.
be tuned to power frequency
provided with separate operation indicators (flag target) for each stage
relays.
have a drop-off to pick-up ratio greater than 95%.
provide separate out-put contacts for each 'Phase' and stage for breaker
trip relays, event logger and other scheme requirements.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
17
Note:-
The Feeder over Load Alarm Relay in-built with numerical distance
protection relay or Over current & Earth Fault Protection Relay is
acceptable provided it meets the above specification.
5.15.3
PROTECTION SCHEME FOR BUS COUPLER:
NON DIRECTIONAL THREE OVER CURRENT + ONE EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION WITH HIGH SET:
The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units.
The relay shall be single pole inverse definite minimum time lag having
definite min. time of 3secs. at 10 times settings. Over current relay with a
setting range of 50%-200% of 1Amp. supplemented with high set units
having a setting range of 500% to 2000% of 1Amp. shall be provided.
Earth fault relay with a setting range of 20%-80% of 1Amp. supplemented
with high set units having a setting range of 200% to 800% of 1Amp. shall
be provided. The relay shall be numerical type.
5.15.4
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
xii.
xiii
xiv.
xv.
xvi.
BUS BAR PROTECTION SCHEME:
The duplicate/ redundant (1+1) busbar protection scheme shall be provided
for each bus system for 400kV having one & a half breaker scheme. One
bus bar protection scheme shall be provided for each main bus for 220kV
having double bus arrangement. Bus bar protection scheme shall:be of numerical, low impedance type and modular in construction. The
scheme shall be complete in all respects to cater the need of at-least 14
feeders/ bays.
have maximum operating time up-to trip impulse to trip relay for all types of
faults of 15milli seconds at 5 times setting value.
operate selectively for each bus bar.
give hundred percent security up-to 40 kA fault level.
incorporate check feature.
incorporate continuous supervision for CT secondaries against any possible
open circuit and if it occurs, shall tender the relevant zone of protection
inoperative and initiate an alarm.
not give false operation during normal load flow in bus bars.
incorporate clear zone indication.
be of phase segregated, triple pole type and provide independent zones of
protection for each bus.
include necessary auxiliary relays for each circuit as required for the
scheme.
shall be biased differential type and shall have operate and restraint
characteristics.
be transient free in operation.
include continuous DC supply supervision for alarm and trip circuits
separately and provide separately non-trip alarm for B/B protection alarm
circuit DC fail & B/B protection trip circuit DC fail conditions.
shall include necessary multi-tap auxiliary CTs for each bay.
include protection 'in/out' switch for each zone.
include necessary CT switching relays. Also provide indication to monitor
`Operate' status of the CT switching relays with a common push button and
shall have CT selection incomplete alarm with adequate time delay when
proper CT switching has not taken place. CT switching relay should have
adequate contacts for selection of trip bus instead of direct isolator contact.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
18
xvii.
xviii.
xix
bus bar protection scheme should cover the blind zone on account of single
CT on B/C circuit.
Include high speed tripping relays for each bay.
The Scheme shall have in-built features of disturbance recorder and event
logger. The disturbance recorder should record the disturbance data baywise (all bays phase and neutral current).
5.15.4.1
LOCAL BREAKER BACK UP PROTECTION SCHEME:
The relay shall be provided to take care of stuck breaker conditions. The
local breaker back up protection scheme will under such conditions,
immediately after the operation of primary / back up protection, transmit the
tripping impulse to all the circuit breakers connected to that bus zone of
which the circuit breaker forms part. The scheme shall be supplemented
with a timer suitable for station DC supply and continuously adjustable
setting of .05 to .5 sec. on pick up.
The relay shall :
i)
be triple pole type with a setting range of 20% -80% of rated current.
ii)
have operating time of not more than 15 m-sec.
iii)
have a resetting time of not more than 15 m-sec.
iv)
be of numerical type.
v)
have a continuous thermal with stand of two times rated
current
irrespective of setting.
Note:- The LBB protection scheme in built with numerical bus bar protection
scheme is acceptable provided it meets the above specification.
5.15.5 PROTECTION SCHEME FOR CAPACITOR C&R PANELS:
A)
NON DIRECTIONAL THREE OVER CURRENT+ ONE EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION WITH HIGH SET:
The 3 O/C & 1 E/F elements shall be either independent or composite units. The
relay shall be single pole inverse definite minimum time lag having definite min.
time of 3 secs. at 10 times settings. Over current relay with a setting range of
50%-200% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting range of
500% to 2000% of 1 Amp. shall be provided. Earth fault relay with a setting
range of 20%-80% of 1 Amp. supplemented with high set units having a setting
range of 200% to 800% of 1 Amp. shall be provided. The relay shall be
numerical type.
B)
TIME DELAY RELAY:A time delay relay must be included with adjustable setting range of 0-5 minutes
to provide a time lag before which the bank shall not be again switched on (to
avoid closing of the circuit breaker on a trapped charge).
C)
UNDER VOLTAGE PROTECTION :One inverse time under voltage relay having setting range of 50% to 90% of
110/√3 volt (Phase-to-neutral) shall be provided to disconnect the capacitor bank
under low voltage conditions.
D)
OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION :One inverse time over voltage relay suitable for operation with 110/√3 volt AC
supply (Phase to neutral) with setting range of 100% to 130% shall be provided.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
19
E)
UNBALANCE PROTECTION :The unbalance protection shall be provided through current unbalance relay
connected to the NCT in neutral of capacitor bank connected in double star. Two
such relays, one each for alarm & trip are required. The setting of the relay shall
be 10% to 40% of the CT secondary (i.e. 1A for 132 kV& 66kV voltage levels and
5A for 33 kV voltage levels) followed by a time delay through a timer of 0.1 sec.
for transient free operation of the protection. The relays shall be numerical type.
The relay should not operate for healthy state spill current in neutral. Number of
units of failure on which alarm shall come and tripping is initiated, be clearly
mentioned for proper setting of the relays.
Note:- The under voltage Relay and over voltage relay in-built with numerical
unbalance protection relay is acceptable provided it meets the above
specification.
5.16
TRIPPING RELAY:
High speed tripping relay shall
i)
be instantaneous ( operating time not to exceed 10 milli-seconds.)
ii)
reset within 20 milli-seconds.
iii)
Be 220 Volt DC operated.
iv)
Have adequate contacts to meet the scheme requirement
v)
Be provided with operation indicators for each element/coil.
5.17
RELAY SETTINGS :
The successful bidder will be responsible for calculating the relay setting of the
protection schemes included in the bid and obtain HVPN's M&P wing clearance
before their adoption. Any data\ information in regard to the power system
required by the supplier for this purpose shall be supplied by HVPN.
5.18
TIME SYNCHRONISATION EQUIPMENT:
i)
The Time synchronisation equipment shall receive the co-coordinated
Universal Time (UTC) transmitted through Geo Positioning Satellite System
(GPS) and synchronize equipments to the Indian Standard Time in a
substation.
ii)
Time synchronisation equipment shall include antenna, all special cables
and processing equipment etc.
iii)
It shall be compatible for synchronisation of Event Loggers, Disturbance
recorders and SCADA at a substation through individual port or through
Ethernet realized through optic fibre bus.
iv)
The synchronisation equipment shall have 2 micro second accuracy.
Equipment shall give real time corresponding to IST (taking into
consideration all factors like voltage & temperature variations, propagation &
processing delays etc).
v)
Equipment shall meet the requirement of IEC 60255 for storage &
operation.
vi)
The system shall be able to track the satellites to ensure no interruption of
Synchronisation signal.
vii)
The output signal from each port shall be programmable at site for either
one hour, half hour, minute or second pulse, as per requirement.
viii) The equipment offered shall have six (6) output ports. Various
combinations of output ports shall be selected by the customer, during
detailed engineering, from the following:
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
20
•
•
•
•
ix)
x)
xi)
Voltage signal: Normally 0-5V with 50milli Seconds minimum pulse
duration. In case any other voltage signal required, it shall be decided
during detailed engineering.
Potential free contact (Minimum pulse duration of 50milli Seconds.)
IRIG-B
RS232C
The equipment shall have a periodic time correction facility of one second
periodicity.
Time synchronisation equipment shall be suitable to operate from 220V DC
as available at Substation.
Equipment shall have real time digital display in hour, minute, second (24
hour mode) & have a separate time display unit to be mounted on the top of
control panels having display size of approx. 100 mm height.
5.19. SMALL WIRING:
a)
All wiring shall be of switch board type consisting of stranded /single
annealed copper conductor insulated with polyvinyl chloride insulation
suitable for 650 volts service and in accordance with IS : 694.
b)
The wiring of the following circuits shall not be less than the size specified
below:
CTs, PTs & CVTs circuits
:
2.5
mm2
Control, alarm & supervision circuits etc. :
1.5
mm2
c)
All wires will be continuous from one terminal to the other and also will have
no tee - junction en-route. The connections shall be securely made with the
help of connecting lugs to ensure non-oxidation of the bare copper
conductor. At the terminal connections, washers shall be interposed
between stud type terminals and holding nuts. All holding nuts shall be
secured by locking nuts. The connection studs shall project at least 6 mm
from the lock nut surface.
d)
Bus wires shall be fully insulated and run separately. MCB’s shall be
provided to enable all the circuits in a panel to be isolated from the bus
wire. Wherever practicable, all circuits in which the voltage exceeds 125
volts shall be kept physically separated from the remaining wiring. The
function of each circuit shall be marked on the associated terminal boards.
e)
All wiring diagrams for the control and relay boards shall be drawn as
viewed from the back of the cubicle and shall be in accordance with IS:375
or equivalent IEC. Multi core cable tails shall be so bound to its cable that
each wire may be traced without difficulty.
f)
All potential bus wiring, non-trip and trip alarm bus wiring, AC & DC control
supply, panel lighting bus wires and such other wiring which runs from
panel to panel within a C&R panel board shall be laid out in gutters and
shall be suitably screened. In case of `simplex' type C&R boards these
common wires will run through bus wire holes.
5.20. TERMINAL BOARDS, TEST BLOCKS & SPARE CONTACTS:
a)
Terminal block connectors built from cells of moulded dielectric and brass
stud inserts shall be provided for terminating the outgoing ends of the panel
wiring and the corresponding tail ends of control cables. Insulating barriers
shall be provided between adjacent connections. The height of the barriers
and the spacing between terminals shall be such as to give adequate
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
21
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
protection while allowing easy access to terminals. Provision shall be made
on each pillar for holding 10% extra connectors.
The terminal blocks shall be suitable for 650 Volts service and for
connection with both copper and aluminum wires.
Terminal boards shall be mounted in such a manner as to afford easy
access to terminations and to enable ferrule numbers to be read without
difficulty. Wire ends shall be so connected at the terminals that no wire
terminal gets marked due to succeeding connections. Terminal board rows
shall be adequately spaced and shall not be less than 100 mm apart so as
to permit convenient access to wires and terminations. Labels in the form
of engraved plastic plates shall be provided on the fixed portion of terminal
boards. No live metal parts shall be exposed at the back of terminal boards.
Switch board type back connected test block with contacts shall be provided
with links or other devices for shorting terminals of CT leads before
interrupting the normal circuit for injection from an external source or for
inserting testing instruments in the circuit without causing open circuit of the
CT. The potential testing studs shall preferably be housed in narrow
recesses of the block, wherever required, shall be placed as close to the
equipments as possible. Test blocks shall be of flush mounting pattern and
the number of test blocks being provided on each control and relay panel
shall be stated in the tender.
The purpose of all the relays (including the auxiliary relays) switches, lamps
& push buttons etc. is required to be indicated just below the respective
equipment through engraving or painting.
Spare contacts of relays are required to be brought on T.B's and shall be
indicated on the drawings.
5.21. BUS WIRES:
The VT, DC, AC, trip alarm , non-trip alarm & DC fail etc. inter panel bus wire
terminals shall be brought on Bus T.B's as well as on T.B's so that any panel
specified herein can be used separately at the Substation specified in this
specification. The said bus wires for the panels specified in case of existing
substations shall be matched with the bus wires of the C&R panels already
available at site, the drawing for matching purposes for which shall be supplied to
the successful bidder. The bus wire terminals shall be indicated on the panel
schematic drawings as well. The bus wire diagram shall also be supplied
alongwith the schematic drawings for each panel.
5.22. FERRULES:
Wire No. shall be indicated on panel schematic and wiring diagrams and
accordingly engraved ferrules with the same numbers and letters as indicated in
the said diagrams shall be provided on the terminal ends of all wires for easy
identification of circuits for inspection and maintenance. Ferrules shall be of strong
& flexible insulating material with glossy finish to prevent adhesion. These shall be
engraved and marked clearly and shall not be affected by dampness. Ferrule
numbering shall be in accordance with IS: 375. The same ferrule number shall not
be used on wires in different circuits on a panel. At those points of interconnection
between the wiring carried for equipments of different suppliers where a change of
number cannot be avoided double ferrules shall be provided on each wire with the
appropriate connection diagram of the equipment.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
22
5.23. SPACE HEATERS:
Tubular space heaters suitable for connection to the single phase 220 Volts AC
supply complete with switches located at convenient positions shall be provided at
the bottom of each control and relay panel to prevent condensation of moisture.
The watt loss per unit surface of heater shall be low enough to keep surface
temperature well below visible heat.
5.24. ILLUMINATION:
The C&R panel shall be provided with 220/240 Volts AC interior lighting. The lamp
shall be free from hand shadows. A door operated button switch shall be provided
in each simplex panel. Each simplex panel shall be provided with one no.
illumination lamp with door switch.
5.25. POWER SOCKET :
Single phase 240 volt AC, 5-Pin, 5/15A power socket with power on/off switch
shall be provided in each simplex panel.
5.26.
SAFETY EARTHING:
Earthing of current free metallic parts or metallic bodies of the equipment mounted
on the switch boards shall be done with bare copper conductor. Copper bus of
size 25 mm x 6 mm extending through entire length of a control and relay board
shall be provided. The earthing conductor shall be connected by Rose Courtney
terminals and clamp junctions.
The neutral point of star connected secondary windings of instrument transformers
and one corner of the open delta connected LV side of potential transformer, if
used shall be similarly earthed with the main earth bar of the switch board earthing
system. Multiple earthing of any instrument transformer shall be avoided. An
electrostatic discharge point shall be provided in each panel connected to earth
bus via 1 Mega Ohm resistor.
5.27. NAME PLATE:
An easily accessible engraved or painted panel name plate shall be provided
inside each panel. It must include G.A. drawing No., purchase order No.,
Contractor's reference No., name of S/Stn. as per purchase order and name of
circuit. In addition to this, an engraved plate indicating the purchase order no.
alongwith name of S/Stn. is required to be affixed on the panel at appropriate
height so that it is readable while standing in front of the panel. These are required
to be indicated on the G.A. drawings also. An engraved label indicating the
purpose of all the relays & switches shall also be provided.
5.28
PANEL DETAILS:
The mountings on various 400kV, 220 kV, 132kV, 66kV & 33kV C&R panels
against various Substations specified herein shall be as under. The bidders shall
give the details of the various panel mountings in the same serial as specified
herein as under for the convenience of checking of the same w.r.t. the provision in
the specification. Any trip relay, auxiliary relay, timers, contact multiplication relay,
ICT, IVT & test block etc. required for the completeness of the scheme shall be
added by the Bidder as per scheme requirements and no cost addition on these
accounts shall be considered at a later date.
The following is the general criteria for the selection of the equipments to be
provided in each type of panel.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
23
(A)
LINE PROTECTION AND CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL: Each Line Protection
and Circuit breaker panel for transmission lines shall consist of following:
S. N.
Description
400kV
220kV
1.
Main-1 Numerical Distance protection
Scheme
Main-2 Numerical Distance protection
Scheme
Over Voltage Protection Scheme
Directional back up Over-current and
E/F protection scheme
Overload alarm scheme
3 phase Trip Relays
1 phase Trip Relays
Voltage selection scheme
Flag relays, carrier receive relays ,aux
Relays, timers etc as per scheme
Requirements
Under Voltage relay for isolator/earth
switch
LBB Protection Scheme
DC supply Supervision scheme
Trip Circuit supervision relays
Auto reclose scheme with check
synchronising and dead line charging
scheme
Bay control unit, Ethernet switch etc. as
per technical specification enclosed as
annex.1
1 Set
1 Set
132
kV 33KV
and 66kV
1 Set
NIL
1 Set
1 Set
NIL
NIL
1 Set
1 Set
NIL
1 Set
NIL
1 Set
NIL
1 Set
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
(with high set)
1 Set
Nil
6 Nos.
1 set
Lot
1 Set
Nil
6 Nos.
1 set
Lot
1 Set
2 Nos.
Nil
1 set
Lot
1 Set
1 No.
Nil
1 set
Lot
2 Nos.
2 Nos.
2 Nos.
2 Nos.
1 set
1 set
6 Nos
1 set
1 set
1 set
6 Nos
1 set
NIL
1 set
2 Nos
Nil
NIL
1 set
1 No.
Nil
1 Set
1 Set.
1 Set.
1 Set.
(B) TRANSFORMER PROTECTION AND CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL: Each
transformer protection and circuit breaker panel shall consist of the following:
S.N.
1.
2.
Description
HV Side
Transformer
Differential
Protection 1 Set
scheme
Restricted Earth fault protection scheme 1 Set
MV/LV side
Nil
1Set @
@
3.
4.
Non-Directional back up O/C and E/F 1 set
scheme with high set feature
Over Fluxing Protection scheme
1 Set
Not applicable
autotransformer
for
1 set
1 Set $
$
applicable
only
for
400/220kV Transformer
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Overload alarm scheme
Three phase trip relays
Voltage selection scheme
Flag relays ,aux .relays, timers etc as
per scheme requirement including
transformer alarms and trip functions
LBB Protection Scheme
DC supply Supervision scheme
Trip Circuit supervision relays
1 Set
2 nos
1 set
Lot
Nil
2 nos
1 set
Lot
1 set
1 set
6 Nos*
1 set
1 set
6 Nos #
*applicable only for 400
kV and 220 kV or 2 No.
for 132 kV, 66 kV & 33 kV
# applicable only for 220 kV
or 2 No. for 132 kV, 66 kV &
33 kV
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
24
S.N.
12.
13.
(C)
Description
HV Side
Special Energy Meter (Main) as per Interutility Nil
Metering System Specification No. HPD/S95/HPM-461/Vol-II/Prot.(July 2015)
Bay Control unit, Ethernet switch etc. as per 1 No.
technical specification enclosed as annex.1
MV/LV side
1 No. **
**applicable only for 33kV
T/F I/C Panels
1 No.
BUS COUPLER PROTECTION AND CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
Each bus coupler Protection and Circuit Breaker Panel shall consist of following:
S.N.
Description
220kV
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Non-Directional Overcurrent and E/F protection scheme with highset
3 phase Trip Relays
LBB Protection Scheme
DC supply Supervision scheme
Trip Circuit supervision relays
Flag relays, aux relays, timers, trip relays as per scheme
requirements
Bay control unit, Ethernet switch etc. as per technical specification
enclosed as annex.1
1Set
2 Nos.
1 set
1 set
6 Nos
Lot
132/66
/ 33kV
1Set
2 Nos.
1 set
1 set
2 Nos
Lot
1 Set.
1 Set.
7.
(D)
S.N.
1.
(E)
BUS BAR PROTECTION AND CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
The bus bar Protection and Circuit Breaker Panel shall consist of following:
Description
Complete bus bar protection scheme as per clause 5.14.4 above
400kV
1Set
220kV
1Set
CAPACITOR PROTECTION AND CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
Each capacitor Protection and circuit breaker panel shall consist of following:
S.N.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Description
Neutral Unbalance protection Scheme
Over Voltage Protection Scheme
Under Voltage Protection Scheme
Non Directional Overcurrent and E/F protection scheme with high set
Time Delay relay
3 phase Trip Relays
Voltage selection scheme
Under Voltage relay for isolator/earth switch
DC supply Supervision scheme
Trip Circuit supervision relays
Flag relays, aux relays, timers, trip relays as per scheme requirements
Bay control unit, Ethernet switch etc. as per technical specification
enclosed as annex.1
Note:- 1)
2)
33 kV
2 set
1 set
1 set
1 set
1 set
1 Nos
1 set
2 Nos
1 set
1 Nos
Lot
1 Set.
The CT secondary current is 5A for 11kV & 33kV in all panels.
O/C & E/F relay for 11kV T/F Panel has to be provided on LV side i.e. 11kV
VCB Panel as per latest VCB Panel specifications of HVPNL.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
25
6.0
TESTS :
6.1
TYPE TESTS :
The equipment offered should be type tested. Type test report of similar
equipment should not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of
bid opening, in respect of the following tests, carried out in accordance with ISS3231(1965)/equivalent IEC from Govt./ Govt. approved test house & shall be
submitted along with bid:
a)
Insulation tests as per IEC 60255-5
b)
High frequency disturbance test as per IEC 60255-22-1 (applicable for all
type of numerical relays).
c)
Fast transient test as per IEC 1000-4, Level-III (not applicable for
electromechanical relays)
d)
Relay characteristics, performance and accuracy test as per IEC 60255.
e)
Tests for thermal and mechanical requirements as per IEC 60255-6
f)
Tests for rated burden as per IEC 60255-6
g)
Contact performance test as per IEC 60255-0-20
h)
Conformance tests as per IEC 61850
The above tests shall be supplied for distance protection, over current and earth
fault protection, restricted earth fault protection, Bus bar protection and
transformer differential protection as per the applicability of the relay alongwith
bid.
The remaining type test reports of above relays & all the type test reports of
remaining relays and type test reports of meters shall be submitted by the
successful bidder within three months of placement of order. These type test
reports will also be from Govt./ Govt. approved test house & should not be more
than seven years old, reckoned from the date of placement of order. The failure
to do so will be considered as a breach of contract.
6.2
ROUTINE TESTS:
All equipment shall be subject to routine tests according to the relevant standards
/ Quality Assurance Program (QAP) and to such other tests as may be required to
ensure that all equipment is satisfactory and in accordance with this specification.
The Purchaser reserves the right to witness all the tests, unless dispensed with in
writing by the Purchaser.
6.3
ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The Supplier shall give sufficient advance intimation (at least 15 days’ notice for
Indian Supplier and 30 days notice for Foreign Supplier) to the Purchaser to
enable him to depute his representative for witnessing the tests. Following tests
shall be carried out at the manufacturer's works after complete assembly:i)
Checking wiring of circuits and their continuity.
ii)
One minute high voltage test.
iii)
Insulation resistance of complete wiring, circuit by circuit with all equipment
mounted on the panel.
iv)
Checking the operation of protection schemes.
7.0
7.1
DOCUMENTATION:
All drawings shall conform to international standards organization (ISO) `A' series
of drawing sheet/Indian Standards Specification IS: 11065. All drawings shall be in
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
26
7.2
ink and suitable for microfilming. If drawings are computerized than all drawings
shall be nicely printed. All dimensions and data shall be in S.I.Units.
The successful Supplier shall submit four sets of G.A. and schematic drawings for
Purchaser's approval within two weeks of the date of placement of order.
The Purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the
Supplier within four weeks of the date of receipt of above drawings. The Supplier
shall, if necessary, modify the drawings and resubmit four copies of the modified
drawings for Purchaser's approval within two weeks from the date of Purchaser's
comments. After receipt of Purchaser's approval, the Supplier shall submit 10
prints of final drawings for each Item/Circuit and one good quality soft copy (CD)
of the following drawings and instruction manuals :i)
Board-wise arrangement drawing (applicable for the panel board at a
Substation having more than one panel).
ii)
G.A. drawing alongwith G.A. legend and foundation details.
iii)
Schematic drawings alongwith legend & internal wiring details of main
relays like transformer differential relay, REF relay, and local breaker back
up schemes, distance protection scheme, bus-bar protection scheme,
voltage selection scheme etc.
iv)
Equipment-wise & wire-wise wiring diagrams.
Each set of drawings shall be bound separately. The final documents shall be
supplied before despatch of equipment.
7.3
The manufacturing of the equipment shall be strictly in accordance with approved
drawings and no deviation shall be permitted without the written approval of the
Purchaser. All manufacturing & fabrication work in connection with the equipment
prior to the approval of the drawings shall be at the Supplier's risk.
7.4
The Supplier shall furnish specified no. of nicely printed and bound volumes of the
instruction manuals in English language, prior to the despatch of the equipment.
The instruction manual shall contain step by step instructions for all operational &
maintenance requirements for all the protective and aux. relays, switches,
instruments etc. mounted on the panel and shall include the following aspects.
i)
Storage for prolonged duration.
ii)
Unpacking.
iii)
Erection.
iv)
Handling at site.
v)
Pre commissioning tests.
vi)
Operating procedures.
vii)
Maintenance procedure.
viii)
Precautions to be taken during operation & maintenance work.
ix)
Catalogue numbers of all the components liable to be replaced during the
life of the panels.
x)
Internal wiring diagrams of all the relays.
7.5
Ten (10) copies of instruction manuals for each Circuit/Item shall be supplied free
of cost before despatch of equipment. Each set of instruction manuals shall be
bound separately. One master set for all the Circuits/Items shall be supplied
with in a week of placement of order to the Design Directorate to facilitate
the checking and approval of drawings.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
27
7.6
Approval of drawings by Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of his
responsibility and liability for ensuring correctness & correct interpretation of the
latest revision of applicable standards, rules & codes of practices. The equipment
shall conform in all respects to high standards of engineering, design,
workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of ordering.
NOTE:- In case the equipment offered by the Supplier does not meet with the
requirements of technical specification, the offer of the firm shall not be
considered.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
28
ANNEXURE-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
FOR
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
29
CONTENTS
Clause No.
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
TITLE
GERNERAL
SYSTEM DESIGN
BAY LEVEL FUNCTIONS
SYSTEM HARDWARE
SOFTWARE STRUCTURE
TESTS
SYSTEM OPERATION
POWER SUPPLY
DOCUMENTATION
TRAINING, SUPPORT SERVICES, MAINTENANCE
AND SPARES
MAINTENANCE
GURANTEES REQUIRED
SPARES
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
Page No.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
30
1.0
GENERAL:
The substation automation system shall be offered from a manufacturer who must
have designed, manufactured, tested, installed and commissioned substation
automation system which must be in satisfactory operation on 220kV system or
higher for at least 2 (Two) years as on the date of bid opening.
1.2
The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be installed to control and monitor
all the sub-station equipment from remote control centre (RCC) as well as from local
control centre.
The SAS shall contain the following main functional parts:
i)
Bay control Intelligence Electronic Devices (IED s) for control and
monitoring.
ii)
Station Human Machine Interface (HMI)
iii)
Redundant managed switched Ethernet Local Area Network communication
infrastructure with hot standby.
iv)
Peripheral equipment like printers, display units, key boards, Mouse etc.
1.3
It shall enable local station control via a PC by means of human machine interface
(HMI) and control software package, which shall contain an extensive range of
supervisory control and data acquisition (SCADA) functions.
1.4
It shall include communication gateways, intelligent electronic devices (IED) for bay
control and inter IED communication infrastructure. An architecture drawing for SAS
is enclosed at Annexure-G.
1.5
The communication gateways shall facilitate the information flow with remote control
centers. The bay level intelligent electronic devices (IED) for protection and control
shall provide the direct connection to the switchgear without the need of interposing
components and perform control, protection, and monitoring functions.
2.0
SYSTEM DESIGN :
2.1
GENERAL SYSTEM DESIGN:
The Substation Automation System (SAS) shall be suitable for operation and
monitoring of the complete substation including future extensions as given in
Section-Project.
The systems shall be of the state-of-the art suitable for operation under electrical
environment present in Extra high voltage substations, follow the latest engineering
practice, and ensure long-term compatibility requirements and continuity of
equipment supply and the safety of the operating staff.
The offered SAS shall support remote control and monitoring from Remote Control
centers via gateways.
The system shall be designed such that personnel without any background
knowledge in Microprocessor-based technology are able to operate the system. The
operator interface shall be intuitive such that operating personnel shall be able to
operate the system easily after having received some basic training.
The system shall incorporate the control, monitoring and protection functions
specified, self-monitoring, signaling and testing facilities, measuring as well as
memory functions, event recording and evaluation of disturbance records.
Maintenance, modification or extension of components may not cause a shutdown
of the whole substation automation system. Self-monitoring of components,
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
31
modules and communication shall be incorporated to increase the availability and
the reliability of the equipment and minimize maintenance.
Bidder shall offer the Bay level unit (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker
and associated disconnector, earth switches and instrument transformer),
bay mimic along with relay and protection panels and PLCC panels (described
in other sections of technical specifications) housed in air-conditioned Kiosks
suitably located in switchyard and Station HMI in Control Room building for
overall optimization in respect of cabling and control room building.
2.2
SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE:
The SAS shall be based on a decentralized architecture and on a concept of bayoriented, distributed intelligence.
Functions shall be decentralized, object-oriented and located as close as possible to
the process.
The main process information of the station shall be stored in distributed databases.
The typical SAS architecture shall be structured in two levels, i.e. in a station and a
bay level. At bay level, the IEDs shall provide all bay level functions regarding
control, monitoring and protection, inputs for status indication and outputs for
commands.
The IEDs should be directly connected to the switchgear without any need for
interposition or transducer.
Each bay control IED shall be independent from each other and its functioning shall
not be affected by any fault occurring in any of the other bay control units of the
station.
The data exchange between the electronic devices on bay and station level shall
take place via the communication infrastructure. This shall be realized using fibreoptic cables, thereby guaranteeing disturbance free communication. The fibre optic
cables shall be run in G.I conduit pipes. Data exchange is to be realized using IEC
61850 protocol with a redundant managed switched Ethernet communication
infrastructure.
The communication shall be made in 1+1 mode, excluding the links between
individual bay IEDs to switch, such that failure of one set of fibre shall not affect the
normal operation of the SAS. However it shall be alarmed in SAS. Each fibre optic
cable shall have four (4) spare fibres.
At station level, the entire station shall be controlled and supervised from the station
HMI. It shall also be possible to control and monitor the bay from the bay level
equipment at all times.
Clear control priorities shall prevent operation of a single switch at the same time
from more than one of the various control levels, i.e. RCC, station HMI, bay level or
apparatus level. The priority shall always be on the lowest enabled control level.
The station level contains the station-oriented functions, which cannot be realized at
bay level, e.g. alarm list or event list related to the entire substation, gateways for
the communication with remote control centers.
The GPS time synchronizing signal (as specified in the section relay & protection)
for the synchronization of the entire system shall be provided.
The SAS shall contain the functional parts as described in Para 1.2 above.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
32
2.3
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS:
The high-voltage apparatus within the station shall be operated from different
places:
i)
Remote control
ii)
Station HMI.
iii)
Local Bay controller IED (in the bays)
Operation shall be possible by only one operator at a time. The operation shall
depend on the conditions of other functions, such as interlocking, synchrocheck,
etc. (see description in”Bay level control functions”).
2.3.1
SELECT-BEFORE-EXECUTE:
For security reasons the command is always to be given in two stages: selection of
the object and command for operation under all mode of operation except
emergency operation. Final execution shall take place only when selection and
command are actuated.
2.3.2
COMMAND SUPERVISION:
BAY/STATION INTERLOCKING AND BLOCKING
Software Interlocking is to be provided to ensure that inadvertent incorrect operation
of switchgear causing damage and accidents in case of false operation does not
take place.
In addition to software interlocking hardwired interlocking are to be provided for:
a)
Bus Earth switch Interlocking
b)
Transfer Bus interlocking (if applicable)
It shall be a simple layout, easy to test and simple to handle when upgrading the
station with future bays. For software interlocking the bidder shall describe the
scenario while an IED of another bay is switched off or fails.
A software interlock override function shall be provided which can be enabled to
bypass the interlocking function.
2.3.3
RUN TIME COMMAND CANCELLATION
Command execution timer (configurable) must be available for each control level
connection. If the control action is not completed within a specified time, the
command should get cancelled.
2.3.4
SELF-SUPERVISION
Continuous self-supervision function with self-diagnostic feature shall be included.
2.3.5
USER CONFIGURATION
The monitoring, controlling and configuration of all input and output logical signals
and binary inputs and relay outputs for al built-in functions and signals shall be
possible both locally and remotely.
It shall also be possible to interconnect and derive input and output signals, logic
functions, using built-In functions, complex voltage and currents, additional logics
(AND-gates, OR gates and timers).
(Multi-activation of these additional functions should be possible).
The Functional requirement shall be divided into following levels:
a) Bay (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker and associated disconnector, earth
switches and instrument transformer) Level Functions.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
33
b) System Level Functions.
3.1
BAY LEVEL FUNCTIONS:
In a decentralized architecture the functionality shall be as close to the process as
possible. In this respect, the following functions can be allocated at bay level:
a)
Bay control functions including data collection functionality.
b)
Bay protection functions
Separate IEDs shall be provided for bay control function and bay protection
function.
3.1.1
3.1.1.1
BAY CONTROL FUNCTIONS:
OVERVIEW:
FUNCTIONS:
i)
Control mode selection
ii)
Select-before-execute principle
iii)
Command supervision:
a) Interlocking and blocking
b) Double command
iv)
Synchrocheck, voltage selection
v)
Run Time Command cancellation
vi)
Transformer tap changer control (for power transformer bays)
vii)
Operation counters for circuit breakers and pumps
viii)
Hydraulic pump/ Air compressor control and runtime supervision
ix)
Operating pressure supervision
x)
Display of interlocking and blocking
xi)
Breaker position indication per phase
xii)
Alarm annunciation
xiii)
Measurement display
xiv)
Local HMI (local guided, emergency mode)
xv)
Interface to the station HMI.
xvi)
Data storage for at least 200 events
xvii) Extension possibilities with additional I/O's inside the unit or via fibre-optic
communication and process bus.
3.1.1.2
CONTROL MODE SELECTION:
BAY:
As soon as the operator receives the operation access at bay level the operation is
normally performed via bay control IED. During normal operation bay control unit
allows the safe operation of all switching devices via the bay control IED.
EMERGENCY OPERATION:
It shall be possible to close or open the selected Circuit Breaker with ON or OFF
push buttons even during the outage of bay IED.
REMOTE MODE:
Control authority in this mode is given to a higher level (Remote Control Centre) and
the installation can be controlled only remotely. Control operation from lower levels
shall not be possible in this operating mode.
3.1.1.3
SYNCHRONISM AND ENERGIZING CHECK:
The synchronism and energizing check functions shall be bay-oriented and
distributed to the bay control and/or protection devices. These features are:
a)
Settable voltage, phase angle, and frequency difference.
b)
Energizing for dead line - live bus, live line - dead bus or dead line – dead
bus with no synchrocheck function.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
34
c)
Synchronizing between live line and live bus with synchrocheck function.
3.1.1.4
VOLTAGE SELECTION:
The voltages relevant for the Synchrocheck functions are dependent on the station
topology, i.e. on the positions of the circuit breakers and/or the isolators. The correct
voltage for synchronizing and energizing is derived from the auxiliary switches of the
circuit breakers, the isolator, and earthing switch and shall be selected automatically
by the bay control and protection IEDs.
3.1.1.5
TRANSFORMER TAP CHANGER CONTROL:
Raise and lower operation of OLTC taps of transformer shall be facilitated through
Bay controller IED.
3.1.2
BAY PROTECTION FUNCTIONS:
3.1.2.1
GENERAL:
The protection functions are independent of bay control function. The protection
shall be provided by separate protection IEDs (numerical relays) and other
protection devices as per section Relay & Protection. IEDs, shall be connected to
the communication infrastructure for data sharing and meet the real-time
communication requirements for automatic functions. The data presentation and the
configuration of the various IEDs shall be compatible with the overall system
communication and data exchange requirements.
3.1.2.2
EVENT AND DISTURBANCE RECORDING FUNCTION:
Each IED should contain an event recorder capable of storing at least 200 timetagged events. This shall give alarm if 70% memory is full. The disturbance recorder
function shall be as per detailed in the technical specification of C&R Panels.
3.2
3.2.1
SYSTEM LEVEL FUNCTIONS:
STATUS SUPERVISION:
The position of each switchgear, e.g. circuit breaker, isolator, earthing switch,
transformer tap changer etc., shall be supervised continuously. Every detected
change of position shall be immediately displayed in the single-line diagram on the
station HMI screen, recorded in the event list and a hard copy printout shall be
produced. Alarms shall be initiated in the case of spontaneous position changes.
The switchgear positions shall be indicated by two auxiliary switches, normally
closed (NC) and normally open (NO), which shall give ambivalent signals. An alarm
shall be initiated if these position indications are inconsistent or if the time required
for operating mechanism to change position exceeds a predefined limit.
The SAS shall also monitor the status of sub-station auxiliaries. The status and
control of auxiliaries shall be done through separate one or more IED and all alarm
and analogue values shall be monitored and recoded through this IED.
3.2.2
MEASUREMENTS:
Analogue inputs for voltage and current measurements shall be connected directly
to the voltage transformers (VT) and the current transformers (CT) without
intermediate transducers. The values of active power (W), reactive power (VAR),
frequency (Hz), and the rms values for voltage (U) and current (I) shall be
calculated.
The measured values shall be displayed locally on the station HMI and in the control
centre. The abnormal values must be discarded.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
35
The analogue values shall be updated every 2 seconds.
Threshold limit values shall be selectable for alarm indications.
Suitable no. of Transducers shall be provided to facilitate the flow of 4-20mA
Analogue signals as per Annexure–II from the bay level equipments (i.e circuit
breaker, AC Kiosks, Transformers, etc.) to its respective C&R Panel BCU and
Station level equipments (i.e. ACDB, DCDB, Battery Chargers, L.T. Transformer,
Generator, etc.) to station auxiliary BCU, as per its respective approved drawings,
for remote control & supervision at Station HMI’s thereof by the successful SCADA
supplier.
3.2.3
EVENT AND ALARM HANDLING:
Events and alarms are generated either by the switchgear, by the control IEDs, or
by the station level unit. They shall be recorded in an event list in the station HMI.
Alarms shall be recorded in a separate alarm list and appear on the screen. All, or a
freely selectable group of events and alarms shall also be printed out on an event
printer.
The alarms and events shall be time-tagged with a time resolution of 1 ms.
3.2.4
STATION HMI:
3.2.4.1
SUBSTATION HMI OPERATION:
On the HMI the object has to be selected first. In case of a blocking or interlocking
conditions are not met, the selection shall not be possible and an appropriate alarm
annunciation shall occur. If a selection is valid the position indication will show the
possible direction, and the appropriate control execution button shall be pressed in
order to close or open the corresponding object.
Control operation from other places (e.g. REMOTE) shall not be possible in this
operating mode.
3.2.4.2
PRESENTATION AND DIALOGUES:
GENERAL:
The operator station HMI shall be a redundant with hot standby and shall provide
basic functions for supervision and control of the substation. The operator shall give
commands to the switchgear on the screen via mouse clicks or keyboard
commands.
The HMI shall give the operator access to alarms and events displayed on the
screen. Aside from these lists on the screen, there shall be a printout of alarms or
events in an event log.
An acoustic alarm shall indicate abnormalities, and all unacknowledged alarms shall
be accessible from any screen selected by the operator.
3.2.4.3
The following standard pictures shall be available from the HMI:
a)
Single-line diagram showing the switchgear status and measured values
b)
Control dialogues with interlocking and blocking details.
This control dialogue shall tell the operator whether the device operation is
permitted or blocked.
a)
Measurement dialogues
b)
Alarm list, station / bay-oriented
c)
Event list, station / bay-oriented
d)
System status
HMI DESIGN PRINCIPLES:
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
36
Consistent design principles shall be adopted with the HMI concerning labels,
colors, dialogues and fonts. Non-valid selections shall be dimmed out.
The object status shall be indicated using different status colors for:
a)
Selected object under command
b)
Selected on the screen
c)
Not updated, obsolete values, not in use or not sampled
d)
Alarm or faulty state
e)
Warning or blocked
f)
Update blocked or manually updated
g)
Control blocked
h)
Normal state
3.2.4.4
PROCESS STATUS DISPLAYS AND COMMAND PROCEDURES:
The process status of the substation in terms of actual values of currents, voltages,
frequency, active and reactive powers as well as the positions of circuit breakers,
isolators and transformer tap-changers shall be displayed in the station single-line
diagram.
In order to ensure a high degree of security against undesired operation, a "selectbefore-execute" command procedure shall be provided. After the "selection" of a
switch, the operator shall be able to recognize the selected device on the screen,
and all other switchgear shall be blocked. As communication between control centre
and device to be controlled is established, the operator shall be prompted to confirm
the control action and only then final execute command shall be accepted. After the
“execution” of the command the operated switching symbol shall flash until the
switch has reached its new position.
The operator shall be in a position to execute a command only, if the switch is not
blocked and if no interlocking condition is going to be violated. The interlocking
statements shall be checked by the interlocking scheme implemented at bay and
station level.
After command execution the operator shall receive a confirmation that the new
switching position has been reached or an indication that the switching procedure
was unsuccessful with the indication of the reason for non-functioning.
3.2.4.5
SYSTEM SUPERVISION & DISPLAY:
The SAS system shall be comprehensively self-monitored such that faults are
immediately indicated to the operator, possibly before they develop into serious
situations. Such faults are recorded as a faulty status in a system supervision
display. This display shall cover the status of the entire substation including all
switchgear, IEDs, communication infrastructure and remote communication links,
and printers at the station level, etc.
3.2.4.6
EVENT LIST:
The event list shall contain events that are important for the control and monitoring
of the substation.
The event and associated time (with1 ms resolution) of its occurrence has to be
displayed for each event.
The operator shall be able to call up the chronological event list on the monitor at
any time for the whole substation or sections of it.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
37
A printout of each display shall be possible on the hard copy printer.
The events shall be registered in a chronological event list in which the type of event
and its time of occurrence are specified. It shall be possible to store all events in the
computer for at least one month.
The information shall be obtainable also from a printed event log.
The chronological event list shall contain:
a)
Position changes of circuit breakers, isolators and earthing devices
b)
Indication of protective relay operations
c)
Fault signals from the switchgear
d)
Indication when analogue measured values exceed upper and lower limits.
Suitable provision shall be made in the system to define two level of alarm on
either side of the value or which shall be user defined for each measure and.
i)
Loss of communication.
Filters for selection of a certain type or group of events shall be available. The filters
shall be designed to enable viewing of events grouped per:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
3.2.4.7
Date and time
Bay
Device
Function e.g. trips, protection operations etc.
Alarm class.
ALARM LIST:
Faults and errors occurring in the substation shall be listed in an alarm list and shall
be immediately transmitted to the control centre.
The alarm list shall substitute a conventional alarm tableau, and shall constitute an
evaluation of all station alarms. It shall contain unacknowledged alarms and
persisting faults. The date and time of occurrence shall be indicated.
The alarm list shall consist of a summary display of the present alarm situation.
Each alarm shall be reported on one line that contains:
a)
b)
c)
d)
The date and time of the alarm
The name of the alarming object
A descriptive text
The acknowledgement state.
Whenever an alarm condition occurs, the alarm condition must be shown on the
alarm list and must be displayed in a flashing state along with an audible alarm.
After acknowledgement of the alarm, it should appear in a steady (i.e. not flashing)
state and the audible alarm shall stop. The alarm should disappear only if the alarm
condition has physically cleared and the operator has reset the alarm with a reset
command. The state of the alarms shall be shown in the alarm list
(Unacknowledged and persistent, Unacknowledged and cleared, Acknowledged
and persistent).
Filters for selection of a certain type or group of alarms shall be available as for
events.
3.2.4.8
OBJECT PICTURE:
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
38
When selecting an object such as a circuit breaker or isolator in the single-line
diagram, the associated bay picture shall be presented first. In the selected object
picture, all attributes like
a)
Type of blocking
b)
Authority
c)
Local / remote control
d)
RSCC / SAS control
e)
Errors
f)
Etc.,
Shall be displayed.
3.2.4.9
CONTROL DIALOGUES:
The operator shall give commands to the system by means of mouse click located
on the single-line diagram. It shall also be possible to use the keyboard for
command activation. Data entry is performed with the keyboard. Dedicated control
dialogues for controlling at least the following devices shall be available:
a)
Breaker and disconnector
b)
Transformer tap-changer
3.2.5
USER-AUTHORITYV LEVELS:
It shall be possible to restrict activation of the process pictures of each object (bays,
apparatus...) within a certain user authorization group. Each user shall then be
given access rights to each group of objects, e.g.:
a)
Display only
b)
Normal operation (e.g. open/close of switchgear)
c)
Restricted operation (e.g. by-passed interlocking)
d)
System administrator
For maintenance and engineering purposes of the station HMI, the following
authorization levels shall be available:
(i)
No engineering allowed
(ii)
Engineering/configuration allowed
(iii)
Entire system management allowed
The access rights shall be defined by passwords assigned during the log-in
procedure. Only the system administrator shall be able to add/remove users and
change access rights.
3.2.6
REPORTS:
The reports shall provide time-related follow-ups of measured and calculated
values.
The data displayed shall comprise:
A.
•
•
•
•
Trend reports:
Day (mean, peak)
Month (mean, peak)
Semi-annual (mean, peak)
Year (mean, peak)
•
•
•
•
Historical reports of selected analogue Values:
Day (at 15 minutes interval)
Week
Month
Year
B.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
39
It shall be possible to select displayed values from the database in the process
display on-line. Scrolling between e.g. days shall be possible. Unsure values shall
be indicated. It shall be possible to select the time period for which the specific data
are kept in the memory.
Following printouts shall be available from the printer and shall be printed on
demand:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
3.2.7
Daily voltage and frequency curves depicting time on X-axis and the appropriate
parameters on the Y-axis. The time duration of the curve is 24 hours.
Weekly trend curves for real and derived analogue values.
Printouts of the maximum and minimum values and frequency of occurrence and
duration of maximum and minimum values for each analogue parameter for each
circuit in 24 hr period.
Provision shall be made for logging information about breaker status like number of
operation with date and time indications.
Equipment operation details shift wise and during 24 hours.
Printout on adjustable time period as well as on demand for MW, MVAR, Current,
Voltage on each feeder and transformer as well as Tap Positions, temperature and
status of pumps and fans for transformers.
Printout on adjustable time period as well as on demand system frequency and
average frequency.
Reports in specified formats which shall be handed over to successful bidder.
Trend display (historical data)
It shall be possible to illustrate all types of process data as trends - input and output
data, binary and analogue data. The trends shall be displayed in graphical form as
column or curve diagrams with a maximum of 10 trends per screen. Adjustable time
span and scaling ranges must be provided.
It shall be possible to change the type of value logging (direct, mean, sum, or
difference) on-line in the window. It shall also be possible to change the update
intervals on-line in the picture as well as the selection of threshold values for
alarming purposes.
3.2.8
Automatic disturbance file transfer
All recorded data from the IEDs with integrated disturbance recorder as well as
dedicated disturbance recording systems shall be automatically uploaded (event
triggered or once per day) to a dedicated computer and be stored on the hard disc.
3.2.9
Disturbance analysis
The PC-based work station shall have necessary software to evaluate all the
required information for proper fault analysis.
3.2.10.
IED Parameter Setting
It shall be possible to access al protection and control IEDs for reading the
parameters (settings) from the station HMI or from a dedicated monitoring
computer. The setting of parameters or the activation of parameter sets shall only
be allowed after entering a password.
3.2.11
Automatic sequences
The available automatic sequences in the system should be listed and described,
(e.g. sequences related to the bus transfer). It must be possible to initiate pre-
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
40
defined automatic sequences by the operator and also define new automatic
sequences.
3.3
3.3.1
Gateway
Communication Interface
(a)
(b)
The Substation Automation System shall have the capability to support
simultaneous communications with multiple independent remote master stations.
The Substation Automation System shall have communication ports as follows:Two ports for Remote Control Centre
Two ports for Regional System Coordination Centre (RSCC)
The communication interface to the SAS shall allow scanning and control of defined
points within the substation automation system independently for each control
centre. The substation automation system shall simultaneously respond to
independent scans and commands from employer's control centres (RCC & RSCC).
The substation automation system shall support the use of a different
communication data exchange rate (bits per second), scanning cycle, and/or
communication protocol to each remote control centre. Also, each control centre’s
data scan and control commands may be different for different data points within the
substation automation system's database.
3.3.2
Remote Control Centre Communication Interface
Employer will supply communication channels between the Substation Automation
System and the remote control centre. The communication channels provided by
Employer will consist either of power line carrier, microwave, optical fibre, VSAT or
leased line, the details of which shall be provided during detailed Engineering.
3.3.3
Interface Equipment:
The Contractor shall provide interface equipment for communicating between
Substation Automation system and Remote control centre and between Substation
Automation system and Regional System Coordination Centre (RSCC). However,
the communication channels available for this purpose are specified in section
project.
In case of PLCC communication any modem supplied shall not require manual
equalization and shall include self-test features such as manual mark/space keying,
analogue loop-back, and digital loop-back.
The modems shall provide for convenient adjustment of output level and receive
sensitivity.
The modem (for both ends) should be standalone type complete in all
respects including power supply to interface the SAS with communication
channel.
The configuration of tones and speed shall be programmable and maintained in
non-volatile memory in the modem. All necessary hardware and software shall also
be in the scope of bidder except the communication link along with communication
equipment between substation control room and Remote Control Centre.
3.3.4
Communication Protocol
The communication protocol for gateways to control centre must be open protocol
and shall support both the telecommunication protocols i.e. IEC 60870-5-101
(Serial) & IEC 60870 – 5 – 104 (TCP/IP) and IEC 61850 for all levels of
communication for sub-station automation such as Bay to station HMI, gateways to
remote stations etc.
4.0
System Hardware:
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
41
4.1
Redundant Station HMI, HMI View Node, Remote HMI and Disturbance
Recorder Work station:
The contractor shall provide redundant station HMI in hot standby mode.
It shall be capable to perform all functions for entire substation including future
requirements as indicated in the SLD. It shall use industrial grade components.
Processor and RAM shall be selected in such a manner that during normal
operation not more than 30% capacity of processing and memory are used.
Supplier shall demonstrate these features.
1.
2.
3.
The capacity of hard disk shall be selected such that the following requirement
should occupy less than 50% of disk space:
Storage of al analogue data (at 15 Minutes interval) and digital data including alarm,
event and trend data for thirty (30) days,
Storage of all necessary software,
20GB space for OWNER'S use.
Supplier shall demonstrate that the capacity of hard disk is sufficient to meet the
above requirement.
4.1.1
HMI (Human Machine Interface)
The VDU shall show overview diagrams (Single Line Diagrams) and complete
details of the switchgear with a color display. Al event and alarm annunciation shall
be selectable in the form of lists. Operation shall be by a user friendly function
keyboard and a cursor positioning device. The user interface shall be based on
WINDOWS concepts with graphics & facility for panning, scrolling, zooming,
decluttering etc.
4.1.2
Visual Display Units/TFT's (Thin Film Technology)
The contractor shall provide three display units, one for station HMI, one for
redundant HMI and one for DR work station. These shall have high resolution and
reflection protected picture screen. High stability of the picture geometry shall be
ensured. The screen shall be at least 21" diagonally in size and capable of color
graphic displays.
The display shall accommodate resolution of 1280 X 1024 pixels.
The HMI shall be able to switch the key board and cursor positioning device, as unit
among all the monitors at a consol vis push button or other controls.
4.1.3
Printer
It shall be robust & suitable for operation with a minimum of 132 characters per line.
The printing operation shall be quiet with a noise level of less than 45 dB suitable for
location in the control room.
Printer shall accept and print all ASCII characters via master control computer unit
interface.
The printer shall have in built testing facility. Failure of the printer shall be indicated
in the Station HMI. The printer shall have an off line mode selector switch to enable
safe maintenance. The maintenance should be simple with provisions for ease of
change of print head, ribbon changing, paper insertion etc.
All printers mounted in the control room shall be provided with a separate printer
enclosure each. The enclosure shall be designed to permit full enclosure of the
printers at a convenient level. Plexiglas windows shall be used to provide visual
inspection of the printers and ease of reading. The printer enclosures shall be
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
42
designed to protect the printers from accidental external contact & each should be
removable from hinges at the back and shall be provided with lock at the front.
All reports and graphics prints shall be printed on laser printer. One dot matrix
printer shall be exclusively used for hourly log printing.
All printers shall be continuously online.
4.1.4
Mass Storage Unit
The mass storage unit shall be built-in to the Station HMI. All operational measured
values and indications shall be stored in a mass-storage unit of CD-ROM / DVDROM with 700 MB or more capacity. The unit should support at least Read (48X),
Write (24X), and Re-Write (10X) operations, with Multi-Session capability. It should
support ISO9660, Rockridge and Joliet File systems. It should support formatting
and use under the operating system provided for Station HMI. The monthly back up
of data shall be taken on disc. The facility of back up of data shall be inherent in the
software.
4.1.5
Switched Ethernet Communication Infrastructure:
The bidder shall provide the redundant switched optical Ethernet communication
infrastructure for SAS. The bidder shall keep provision of 100% spare capacity for
employer use. One switch shall be provided to connect all IEDs in one diameter of
each 765 and 400kV yard and for two adjacent bays of 220kV, 132kV, 66kV & 33kV
yard to communication infrastructure.
4.2
Bay Level Unit
The bay unit shall use industrial grade components. The bay level unit, based on
microprocessor technology, shall use numerical techniques for the calculation and
evaluation of externally input analogue signals. They shall incorporate select-beforeoperate control principles as safety measures for operation via the HMI. They shall
perform all bay related functions, such as control commands, bay interlocking, data
acquisition, data storage, event recording and shall provide inputs for status
indication and outputs for commands. They shall be directly connected to the
switchgear. The bay unit shall acquire and process all data for the bay (Equipment
status, fault indications, measured values, alarms etc.) and transmit these to the
other devices in sub-station automation system. In addition, this shall receive the
operation commands from station HMI and control centre. The bay unit shall have
the capability to store all the data for at least 24 hours.
One no. Bay level unit shall be provided for supervision and control of each 765kV,
400kV, 220kV, 132kV, 66kV and 33kV bay (a bay comprises of one circuit breaker
and associated disconnector, earth switches and instrument transformer). The Bay
level unit shall be equipped with analogue and binary inputs/outputs for handling the
control, status monitoring and analogue measurement functions. All bay level
interlocks are to be incorporated in the Bay level unit so as to permit control from
the Bay level unit/ local bay mimic panel, with all bay interlocks in place, during
maintenance and commissioning or in case of contingencies when the Station HMI
is out of service.
The Bay level unit shall meet the requirements for withstanding electromagnetic
interference according to relevant parts of IEC 61850. Failure of any single
component within the equipment shall neither cause unwanted operation nor lead to
a complete system breakdown.
4.2.1
Input/Output (I/O) modules
The I/O modules shall form a part of the bay level unit and shall provide coupling to
the substation equipment. The I/O modules shall acquire all switchgear information
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
43
(i.e. data coming directly from the switchgear or from switchgear interlocking
devices) and transmit commands for operation of the switchgear. The measured
values of voltage and current shall be from the secondary of instrument
transformers. The digital inputs shall be acquired by exception with 1 ms resolution.
Contact bouncing in digital inputs shall not be assumed as change of state.
4.3
Air-conditioned kiosk (applicable only for 400 kV and 220 kV substations)
The Air-conditioned Kiosk offered shall house Bay level units, bay mimic, relay
and protection panels, PLCC panels etc. one each for a diameter in 765 &
400kVsub-stations, for two adjacent bays in 220kV, 132kV & 66kV Level, for four
adjacent bays in 33kV level of 220/33kV T/F and all 33kV bays of 132/33kV T/F
starting from Bay No.1 as per GELO drg. In case of incomplete diameter the kiosk
shall have necessary space for accommodating the future bay IEDs. The layout of
equipment/panel shall be subject to Owner’s approval. The Kiosk shall be
provided with fire alarm system with at least two detectors and it shall be wired to
SAS. The detailed requirement of Kiosk is enclosed as Annexure-H
The air conditioner provided in Kiosk shall be controlled and monitored from
substation automation system. One additional Kiosk for each voltage level, if
required, shall be provided for housing bus bar protection panels at suitable
location in switchyard.
Note: For 132 kV and 66 kV substations the control and relay panels shall be
housed in the control room building itself.
4.4
Extendibility in future
Offered substation automation system shall be suitable for extension in future for
additional bays. During such requirement, all the drawings and configurations,
alarm/event list etc. displayed shall be designed in such a manner that its extension
shall be easily performed by the employer. During such event, normal operation of
the existing substation shall be unaffected and system shall not require a shutdown.
The contractor shall provide all necessary software tools along with source codes to
perform addition of bays in future and complete integration with SAS by the user.
These software tools shall be able to configure IED, add additional analogue
variable, alarm list, event list, modify interlocking logics etc. for additional
bays/equipment which shall be added in future.
5.0
Software structure
The software package shall be structured according to the SAS architecture and
strictly divided in various levels. Necessary firewall shall be provided at suitable
points in software to protect the system.
An extension of the station shall be possible with lowest possible efforts.
Maintenance, modification or an extension of components of any feeder may not
force a shut-down of the parts of the system which are not affected by the system
adaptation.
5.1.1
5.1.1.1
Station level software
Human-machine interface (HMI)
The base HMI software package for the operator station shall include the main SAS
functions and it shall be independent of project specific hardware version and
operating system. It shall further include tools for picture editing, engineering and
system configuration. The system shall be easy to use, to maintain, and to adapt
according to specific user requirements. Systems shall contain a library with
standard functions and applications.
5.1.2
Bay level software
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
44
5.1.1.1
System software
The system software shall be structured in various levels. This software shall be
placed in a non-volatile memory. The lowest level shall assure system performance
and contain basic functions, which shall not be accessible by the application and
maintenance engineer for modifications. The system shall support the generation of
typical control macros and a process database for user specific data storage. In
case of restoration of links after failure, the software along with hardware shall be
capable of automatically synchronizing with the remaining system without any
manual interface. This shall be demonstrated by contractor during integrated system
test.
5.1.1.2
Application software
In order to ensure robust quality and reliable software functions, the main part of the
application software shall consist of standard software modules built as functional
block elements. The functional blocks shall be documented and thoroughly tested.
They form part of a library. The application software within the control/protection
devices shall be programmed in a functional block language.
5.1.1.3
Network Management System:
The contractor shall provide network management system software for following
management functions:
a.
Configuration Management
b.
Fault Management
c.
Performance Monitoring
This system shall be used for management of communication devices and other
IEDs in the system. This NMS can be loaded in DR work-station and shall be easy
to use, user friendly and menu based. The NMS shall monitor all the devices in the
SAS and report if there is any fault in the monitored devices. The NMS shall
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Maintain performance, resource usage, and error statistics for all managed links and
devices and present this information via displays, periodic reports and on demand
reports.
Maintain a graphical display of SAS connectivity and device status.
Issue alarms when error conditions occurs
Provide facility to add and delete addresses and links
5.1.1.4
The contractor shall provide each software in two copies in CD to load into the
system in case of any problem related with Hardware/Communication etc.
6.0
TESTS
The substation automation system offered by the bidder shall be subjected to
following tests to establish compliance with IEC 61850 for EHV sub-station
equipment installed in sheltered area in the outdoor switchyard and specified
ambient conditions:
6.1
6.1.1
Type Tests:
Control IEDs and Communication Equipment:
Power Input:
i. Auxiliary Voltage
ii. Current Circuits
iii. Voltage Circuits
iv. Indications
a.
b.
Accuracy Tests:
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
45
i. Operational Measured Values
ii. Currents
iii. Voltages
iv. Time resolution
c.
Insulation Tests:
i. Dielectric Tests
ii. Impulse Voltage withstand Test
d.
Influencing Quantities
i. Limits of operation
ii. Permissible ripples
iii. Interruption of input voltage
e.
6.2
Electromagnetic Compatibility Test:
i. 1 MHZ. burst disturbance test
ii. Electrostatic Discharge Test
iii. Radiated Electromagnetic Field Disturbance Test
iv. Electrical Fast transient Disturbance Test
v. Conducted Disturbances Tests induced by Radio Frequency Field
vi. Magnetic Field Test
vii. Emission (Radio interference level) Test.
viii. Conducted Interference Test
f.
Function Tests:
i. Indication
ii. Commands
iii. Measured value Acquisition
iv. Display Indications
g.
Environmental tests:
i. Cold Temperature
ii. Dry Heat
iii. Wet heat
iv. Humidity (Damp heat Cycle)
v. Vibration
vi. Bump
vii. Shock
Factory Acceptance Tests:
The supplier shall submit a test specification for factory acceptance test (FAT) and
commissioning tests of the station automation system for approval. For the
individual bay level IED’s applicable type test certificates shall be submitted.
The manufacturing phase of the SAS shall be concluded by the factory acceptance
test (FAT). The purpose is to ensure that the Contractor has interpreted the
specified requirements correctly and that the FAT includes checking to the degree
required by the user.
The general philosophy shall be to deliver a system to site only after it has been
thoroughly tested and its specified performance has been verified, as far as site
conditions can be simulated in a test lab. If the FAT comprises only a certain portion
of the system for practical reason, it has to be assured that this test configuration
contains at least one unit of each and every type of equipment incorporated in the
delivered system.
If the complete system consists of parts from various suppliers or some parts are
already installed on site, the FAT shall be limited to sub-system tests. In such a
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
46
case, the complete system test shall be performed on site together with the site
acceptance test (SAT).
6.3
Integrated Testing;
The integrated system tests shall be performed as detailed in subsequent clauses
as per following configuration:
(i)
Redundant Station HMI, DR work station, two switches (i.e. for two
diameters) along with all IEDs for the Dia and printers.
All other switches for complete sub-station as detailed in section project shall be
simulated as needed.
6.3.1
Hardware Integration Tests:
The hardware integration test shall be performed on the specified systems to be
used for Factory tests when the hardware has been installed in the factory. The
operation of each item shall be verified as an integral part of system. Applicable
hardware diagnostics shall be used to verify that each hardware component is
completely operational and assembled into a configuration capable of supporting
software integration and factory testing of the system. The equipment expansion
capability shall also be verified during the hardware integration tests.
6.3.2
Integrated System Tests:
Integrated system tests shall verify the stability of the hardware and the software.
During the tests all functions shall run concurrently and all equipment shall operate
a continuous 100 Hours period. The integrated system test shall ensure the SAS is
free of improper interactions between software and hardware while the system is
operating as a whole.
6.4
Field Tests:
The field tests shall completely verify all the features of SAS hardware and software.
7.0
7.1
7.1.1
SYSTEM OPERATION
Substation Operation
NORMALOPERATION
Operation of the system by the operator from the remote RCC or at the substation
shall take place via industry standard HMI (Human Machine interface) subsystem
consisting of graphic color VDU, a standard keyboard and a cursor positioning
device (mouse).
i)
ii)
iii)
The colored screen shall be divided into 3 fields:
Message field with display of present time and date
Display field for single line diagrams
Navigation bar with alarm/condition indication
For display of alarm annunciation, lists of events etc a separate HMI View node
shall be provided.
All operations shall be performed with mouse and/or a minimum number of function
keys and cursor keys. The function keys shall have different meanings depending
on the operation. The operator shall see the relevant meanings as function tests
displayed in the command field (i.e. operator prompting). For control actions, the
switchgear (i.e. circuit breaker etc.) requested shall be selectable on the display by
means of the cursor keys. The switching element selected shall then appear on the
background that shall be flashing in a different color.
The operator prompting shall distinguish between:-
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
47
- Prompting of indications e.g. fault indications in the switchgear, and
- prompting of operational sequences e.g. execution of switching operations
The summary information displayed in the message field shall give a rapid display
of alarm/message of the system in which a fault has occurred and alarm
annunciation lists in which the fault is described more fully.
Each operational sequence shall be divided into single operation steps which are
initiated by means of the function keys/WINDOW command by mouse. Operator
prompting shall be designed in such a manner that only the permissible keys are
available in the command field related to the specific operation step. Only those
switching elements shall be accessed for which control actions are possible. If the
operation step is rejected by the system, the operator prompting shall be supported
by additional comments in the message field. The operation status shall be reset to
the corresponding preceding step in the operation sequence by pressing one of the
function keys. All operations shall be verified. Incorrect operations shall be indicated
by comments in the message field and must not be executed.
The offer shall include a comprehensive description of the system.
The above operation shall also be possible via WINDOWS based system by mouse.
8.0
POWER SUPPLY
Power for the substation automation system shall be derived from substation 220V
DC system. Inverter of suitable capacity shall be provided for station HMI and its
peripheral devices e.g. printer etc. In the event of Power failure, necessary
safeguard software shall be built for proper shutdown and restart.
9.0
DOCUMENTATION
The following documents shall be submitted for employer’s approval during detailed
engineering:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
System Architecture Drawing
Hardware Specification
Sizing Calculations of various components
Response Time Calculation
Functional Design Document
The following documentation to be provided for the system in the course of the
project shall be consistent, CAD supported, and of similar look/feel. All CAD
drawings to be provide in “dxf” format.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
List of Drawings
Substation automation system architecture
Block Diagram
Guaranteed technical parameters, Functional Design Specification and
Guaranteed availability and reliability
Calculation for power supply dimensioning
I/O Signal lists
Schematic diagrams
List of Apparatus
List of Labels
Logic Diagram (hardware & software)
Panel Room Layout drawing
Control Room Lay-out
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
48
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Test Specification for Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
Product Manuals
Assembly Drawing
Operator’s Manual
Complete documentation of implemented protocols between various
elements
Listing of software and loadable in CD ROM
Other documents as may be required during detailed engineering.
Four sets of hard copy and Four sets of CD ROM containing all the as built
documents/drawings shall be provided.
10.0
TRAINING, SUPPORT SERVICES, MAINTENANCE AND SPARES
10.1
Training
Contractor personnel who are experienced instructors and who speak
understandable English shall conduct training. The contractor shall arrange on its
own cost al hardware training platform required for successful training and
understanding in India. The Contractor shall provide all necessary training material.
Each trainee shall receive individual copies of al technical manuals and al other
documents used for training. These materials shall be sent to Employer at least two
months before the scheduled commencement of the particular training course.
Class materials, including the documents sent before the training courses as well as
class handouts, shall become the property of Employer. Employer reserves the right
to copy such materials, but for in-house training and use only. Hands-on training
shall utilize equipment identical to that being supplied to Employer.
For all training courses, the travel (e.g., airfare) and per-diem expenses will be
borne by the participants.
The Contractor shall quote training prices individually for each of the courses as
indicated in BPS.
Employer will have the option to cancel any or all-training courses. In the case of
cancellation, the rate quoted against the respective course will not be paid to the
Contractor.
The schedule, location, and detailed contents of each course will be finalized during
Employer and Contractor discussions.
10.2
Computer System Hardware Course
A computer system hardware course shall be offered, but at the system level only.
The training course shall be designed to give Employer hardware personnel
sufficient knowledge of the overall design and operation of the system so that they
can correct obvious problems, configure the hardware, perform preventive
maintenance, run diagnostic programs and communicate with contract maintenance
personnel. The following subjects shall be covered:
a)
b)
(c)
System Hardware Overview: Configuration of the system hardware.
Equipment Maintenance: Basic theory of operation, maintenance techniques and
diagnostic procedures for each element of the computer system, e.g., processors,
auxiliary memories, LANs, routers and printers. Configuration of all the hardware
equipments.
System Expansion: Techniques and procedures to expand and add equipment
such as loggers, monitors, and communication channels.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
49
(d)
(e)
(f)
10.3
Computer System Software Course
The Contractor shall provide a computer system software course that covers the
following subjects:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
10.4
System Programming: Including all applicable programming languages and all
stand-alone service and utility packages provided with the system. An introduction
to software architecture, Effect of tuning parameters (OS software, Network
software, database software etc.) on the performance of the system.
Operating System: Including the user aspects of the operating system, such as
program loading and integrating procedures; scheduling, management, service, and
utility functions; and system expansion techniques and procedures.
System Initialization and Failover: Including design, theory of operation, and
practice.
Including the execution of diagnostic procedures and the
Diagnostics:
interpretation of diagnostic outputs.
Software Documentation: Orientation in the organization and use of system
software documentation.
Hands-on Training:
One week, with allocated computer time for trainee
performance of unstructured exercises and with the course instructor available for
assistance as necessary.
Application Software Course
The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive application software courses
covering all applications including the database and display building course. The
training shall include:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
10.5
System Maintenance: Theory of operation and maintenance of the redundant
hardware configuration, failover hardware, configuration
control panels
and
failover switches. Maintenance of protective devices and power supplies.
Subsystem Maintenance: Theory of design and operation, maintenance
techniques and practices, diagnostic procedures, and (where applicable) expansion
techniques and procedures. Classes shall include hands-on training for the specific
subsystems that are part of Employer's equipment or part of similarly designed and
configured subsystems. All interfaces to the computing equipment shall be taught in
detail.
Operational Training: Practical training on preventive and corrective maintenance
of all equipment, including use of special tools and instruments. This training shall
be provided on Employer equipment, or on similarly configured systems.
Overview: Block diagrams of the application software and data flows. Programming
standards and program interface conventions.
Application Functions: Functional capabilities, design, and major algorithms.
Associated maintenance and expansion techniques.
Techniques and conventions to be used for the
Software Development:
preparation and integration of new software functions.
Software Generation: Generation of application software from source code and
associated software configuration control procedures.
Software Documentation: Orientation in the organization and use of functional
and detailed design documentation and of programmer and user manuals.
One week, with allocated computer time for trainee
Hands-on Training:
performance of unstructured exercises and with the course instructor available for
assistance as necessary.
Requirement of training:
The contractor shall provide training for two batches for two weeks each for
following courses.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
50
S. No.
1
2
3
Name of Course
Computer System Hardware
Computer System Software
Application Software
11.0
Maintenance
11.1
Maintenance Responsibility during the Guaranteed Availability Period:
During Guaranteed Availability Period, the Contractor shall take continual actions to
ensure the guaranteed availability and shall make available all the necessary
resources such as specialist personnel, spare parts, tools, test devices etc. for
replacement or repair of all defective parts and shall have prime responsibility for
keeping the system operational.
11.2
RELIABILITYAND AVAILABILITY
The SAS shall be designed so that the failure of any single component, processor,
or device shall not render the system unavailable. The SAS shall be designed to
satisfy the very high demands for reliability and availability concerning:
• Mechanical and electrical design
• Security against electrical interference (EMI)
• High quality components and boards
• Modular, well -tested hardware
• Thoroughly developed and tested modular software
• Easy-to-understand programming language for application programming
• Detailed graphical documentation and application software
• Built-in supervision and diagnostic functions
• Security
− Experience of security requirements
− Process know-how
− Select before execute at operation
− Process status representation as double indications
• Distributed solution
• Independent units connected to the local area network
• Back-up functions
• Panel design appropriate to the harsh electrical environment and ambient
conditions
• Panel grounding immune against transient ground potential rise
1)
Outage
Outage
The state in which substation automation system or a unit of SAS is unavailable for
Normal Operation as defined in the clause 7.1 due to an event directly related to the
SAS or unit of SAS. In the event, the owner has taken any equipment/ system other
than Sub-station Automation System for schedule/forced maintenance, the
consequent outage to SAS shall not be considered as outage for the purpose of
availability.
2)
Actual outage duration (AOD)
The time elapsed in hours between
the start and the end of an outage. The time
th
th
shall be counted to the nearest 1/4 of an hour. Time less than 1/4 of an hour shall
th
be counted as having duration of 1/4 of an hour.
3)
Period Hours (PH)
The number of hours in the reporting period. In a full year the period hour are 8760h
(8784h for a leap year).
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
51
4)
Actual Outage hours (AOH)
The sum of actual outage duration within the reporting period
AOH = ∑ AOD
5)
Availability:
Each SAS shall have a total availability of 99.98 % i.e. the ratio of total time duration
minus the actual outage duration to total time duration.
12.0
Guarantees Required
The availability for the complete SAS shall be guaranteed by the Contractor. Bidder
shall include in their offer the detailed calculation for the availability. The contractor
shall demonstrate their availability guaranteed by conducting the availability test on
the total sub-station automation system as a whole after commissioning of total
Sub-station Automation system. The test shall verify the reliability and integrity of all
sub-systems. Under these conditions the test shall establish an overall availability of
99.98%. After the lapse of 1000 Hours of cumulative test time, test records shall be
examined to determine the conformance with availability criterion. In case of any
outage during the availability test, the contractor shall rectify the problem and after
rectification, the 1000 Hours period start after such rectification. If test object has not
been met the test shall continue until the specified availability is achieved.
The contractor has to establish the availability in a maximum period of three months
from the date of commencement of the availability test.
After the satisfactory conclusion of test both contractor and employer shall mutually
agree to the test results and if these results satisfy the availability criterion, the test
is considered to be completed successfully. After that the system shall be taken
over by the employer and then the guarantee period shall start.
13.0
13.1
Spares
Consumables:
All consumables such as paper, cartridges shall be supplied by the contractor till the
SAS is taken over by the owner.
13.2
Availability Spares:
In addition to mandatory spares as listed in section project for SAS, the bidder is
required to list the spares, which may be required for ensuring the guaranteed
availability during the guaranteed availability period. The final list of spares shall
form part of scope of supply and accordingly the price thereof shall be quoted by the
bidder and shall be considered in the evaluation of the bids. During the guaranteed
availability period, the spare parts supplied by the Contractor shall be made
available to the Contractor for usage subject to replenishment at the earliest. Thus,
at the end of availability period the inventory of spares with the Employer shall be
fully replenished by the Contractor.
However, any additional spares required to meet the availability of the system
(which are not a part of the above spares supplied by the Contractor) would have to
be supplied immediately by the Contractor free of cost to the Employer.
14.0
LIST OF EQUIPMENTS
Quantity of equipments shall be decided by bidder in order to achieve guaranteed
reliability and availability as declared by bidder.
i) Station HMI
ii) Redundant Station HMI (in Hot-standby mode)
iii) Bay level units along with bay mimic
iv) Disturbance Recorder Work Station (Maintenance HMI)
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
52
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
Color Laser Printer – 1 No. (For Reports & Disturbance records)
Dot matrix printers - (one each for Alarms and log sheets)
All interface equipment for gateways to RCC and RSCC
Communication infrastructure between Bay level units, Station HMI, Printers,
gateways, redundant LAN etc. as required
ix) Any other equipment as necessary.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
53
Annexure-II
Basic Monitoring requirements are:
-
Switchgear status indication
-
Measurements (U, I, P, Q, f)
-
Event
-
Alarm
-
Winding temperature of Transformers.
-
Ambient temperature.
-
Status and display of 415V LT system, 220V & 48V DC system.
-
Status & Display of Fire protection System and AC System.
-
Acquisition of all counters in PLCC panels through potential free contacts from
PLCC or independently by counting the receive/send commands.
-
Acquisition of alarm and fault record from protection relays Disturbance.
-
Monitoring the state of batteries by displaying DC voltage, charging current and load
current etc.
-
Tap-position of Transformer
List of Inputs
The list of input for typical bays is as below:Analogue inputs
i)
For line
Current
Voltage
R phase
Y phase
B phase
Y-B phase
B-R phase
ii)
For Transformer
Current
R phase
Y phase
B phase
WTI (for transformer)
Tap position (for transformer only)
iii)
iv)
a)
b)
c)
For Bus coupler
Current
R phase
Y phase
B phase
Common
Voltage for Bus-I, Bus-II and Transfer bus wherever applicable
Voltage
R-Y phase
Y-B phase
B-R phase
Frequency for Bus-I and Bus-II
Ambient temperature (switchyard).
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
54
d)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
xviii)
LT system
Voltage R-Y, Y-B, B-R of Main Switch Board section-I
Voltage R-Y, Y-B, B-R of Main Switch Board section-II
Voltage R-Y, Y-B, B-R of Diesel Generator
Current from LT transformer-I
Current from LT transformer-II
Current from Diesel Generator
Voltage of 220V DCDB-I
Voltage of 220V DCDB-II
Current from 220V Battery set-I
Current from 220V Battery set-II
Current from 220V Battery charger-I
Current from 220V Battery charger-I
Voltage of 48V DCDB-I
Voltage of 48V DCDB-II
Current from 48V Battery set-I
Current from 48V Battery set-II
Current from 48V Battery charger-I
Current from 48V Battery charger-I
Digital Inputs
The list of input for various bays/SYSTEM is as follows:
1.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
xviii)
xix)
xx)
xxi)
xxii)
xxiii)
xxiv)
xxv)
xxvi)
xxvii)
xxviii)
xxix)
xxx)
xxxi)
xxxii)
xxxiii)
Line bays
Status of each pole of CB, Isolator, Earth switch
CB trouble
CB operation/closing lockout
Pole discrepancy optd
Trip coil faulty
LBB optd
Bus bar protn trip relay optd
Main bkr auto recloser operated
Tie/transfer auto recloser operated
A/r lockout
Tie/transfer bkr a/r lockout
Direct trip-I/II sent
Direct trip-I/II received
Main I/II blocking
Main I/II-Inter trip send
Main I/II-Inter trip received
O/V STAGE – I operated
O/V STAGE – II operated
FAULT LOCATOR FAULTY
MAIN-I/II CVT FUSE FAIL
MAIN-I PROTN TRIP
MAIN-II PROTN TRIP
MAIN-I PSB ALARM
MAIN-I SOTF TRIP
MAIN-I R-PH TRIP
MAIN-I Y-PH TRIP
MAIN-I B-PH TRIP
MAIN-I START
MAIN-I/II Carrier aided trip
MAIN-I/II fault in reverse direction
MAIN-I/II ZONE-2 TRIP
MAIN-I/II ZONE-3 TRIP
MAIN-I/II weak end infeed optd
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
55
xxxiv)
xxxv)
xxxvi)
xxxvii)
xxxviii)
xxxix)
xl)
xli)
xlii)
xliii)
xliv)
xlv)
xlvi)
xlvii)
2.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
xviii)
xix)
xx)
xxi)
xxii)
xxiii)
xxiv)
xxv)
xxvi)
xxvii)
xxviii)
xxix)
xxx)
xxxi)
3.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
MAIN-II PSB alarm
MAIN-II SOTF TRIP
MAIN-II R-PH TRIP
MAIN-II Y-PH TRIP
MAIN-II B-PH TRIP
MAIN-II start
MAIN-II aided trip
MAIN-I/II fault in reverse direction
Back-up o/c optd
Back-up e/f optd
220V DC-I/II source fail
SPEECH CHANNEL FAIL
PLCC Protection Channel-I FAIL
PLCC Protection Channel-II FAIL
Transformer bays
Status of each pole of CB, Isolator, Earth switch
CB trouble
CB operation/closing lockout
Pole discrepancy optd
Trip coil faulty
LBB optd
Bus bar protn trip relay optd
REF OPTD
DIF OPTD
OVERFLUX ALARM (MV)
OVERFLUX TRIP (MV)
OVERFLUX ALARM (HV)
OVERFLUX TRIP (HV)
HV BUS CVT ½ FUSE FAIL
MV BUS CVT ½ FUSE FAIL
OTI ALARM/TRIP
PRD OPTD
OVERLOAD ALARM
BUCHOLZ TRIP
BUCHOLZ ALARM
OLTC BUCHOLZ ALARM
OLTC BUCHOLZ TRIP
OIL LOW ALARM
back-up o/c (HV) optd
back-up e/f (HV)optd
220v DC-I/II source fail
TAP MISMATCH
GR-A PROTN OPTD
GR-B PROTN OPTD
back-up o/c (MV) optd
back-up e/f (MV)optd
Transformer bays
Status of each pole of CB, Isolator, Earth switch
CB trouble
CB operation/closing lockout
Pole discrepancy optd
Trip coil faulty
LBB optd
Bus bar protn trip relay optd
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
56
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
xviii)
xix)
4
REF OPTD
DIF OPTD
HV BUS CVT ½ FUSE FAIL
OTI ALARM/TRIP
PRD OPTD
BUCHOLZ TRIP
BUCHOLZ ALARM
OIL LOW ALARM
Back-up impedance relay
220v DC-I/II source fail
GR-A PROTN OPTD
GR-B PROTN OPTD
Bus Bar Protection
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
5.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
xi)
xii)
xiii)
xiv)
xv)
xvi)
xvii)
Bus bar main-I trip
Bus bar main-II trip
Bus bar zone-I CT open
Bus bar zone-II CT open
Bus transfer CT sup. Optd
Bus transfer bus bar protn optd
Bus protection relay fail
Auxiliary system
Incomer-I On/Off
Incomer-II On/Off
415V Bus-I/II U/V
415v bus coupler breaker on/off
DG set bkr on/off
Alarm/trip signals as listed in Section: DG set
LT transformer-I Bucholz Alarm & trip
LT transformer-II Bucholz Alarm & trip
LT transformer-I WTI Alarm & trip
LT transformer-II WTI Alarm & trip
LT transformer-I OTI Alarm & trip
LT transformer-II OTI Alarm & trip
PLCC exchange fail
Time sync. Signal absent
Alarm/trip signals as listed in Section: Battery and Battery charger
220v dc-I earth fault
220v dc-II earth fault
NOTE:The exact number and description of digital inputs shall be as per detailed
engineering requirement Apart from the above mentioned digital inputs, minimum
of 200 inputs shall be kept for use in future.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
57
ANNEXURE -A
GUARANTED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
CONTROL AND RELAY PANEL BOARDS FOR SUBSTATIONS
WITH SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM
I.
PANELS.
1.
Dimension of the C&R panels.
i) Depth
ii) Overall height
2.
Dimension of supporting channel.
3.
Thickness of the sheet steel proposed
for fabrication of panels.
II.
1.
2.
3.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
4.
5.
III.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
IV.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
SWITCH BOARD WIRING.
Insulation of wiring.
Material of wiring conductor.
Size of wiring conductor for:
C.T. Circuits.
C.V.T./P.T. Circuits.
D.C. supply circuits.
A.C. Supply Circuit.
Other circuits.
Size of earthing bar for safety
earthing.
Type of terminals used in wiring the
panel.
CONTROL SWITCHES FOR CIRCUIT
BREAKER & ISOLATORS.
Make.
Type.
Type of handle provided.
Number of position .
Whether no. of Normally closed &
Normally open contacts sufficient
for seheme requirements?
(Yes / No).
Whether spring return to neutral or
stay-put type.
Type of lock provided.
Making capacity/breaking capacity at
220 Volt DC for both inductive &
non-inductive current.
Descriptive leaflet number submitted.
OVER CURRENT & EARTH FAULT RELAY.
Make.
Type of relay.
Current coil rating.
Potential coil rating (applicable only
in case of directional relays).
Tap range.
Range of high set elements (wherever applicable).
VA burden.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
58
8.
9.
10.
V.
a) Highest tap.
b) Lowest tap.
Time V/S current characteristics.
Trip contact rating.
Descriptive leaflet No. submitted.
AUXILIARY RELAYS.
Make.
Type.
Capacity of contacts:
i) Continuously.
ii) for 3 seconds.
4.
Operating coil VA burden.
5.
Voltage operated or current operated.
6.
No. of Normally closed & Normally open
contacts sufficient for scheme
requirements (Yes / No).
7.
Contacts hand or self reset type.
8.
Descriptive leaflet number submitted.
1.
2.
3.
VI.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
VII.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
VIII.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL RELAY.
Make.
Type.
Minimum differential current at which
relay operations.
Range & steps of bias setting.
Operating time at twice the relay
setting.
VA burden of the relay.
Descriptive leaflet No. submitted.
TRIP CIRCUIT SUPERVISION RELAY.
Make.
Type
Rating
Minimum voltage for satisfactory
operation (% of rated voltage).
Monitoring of breaker trip coil in both
close & open position provided.
Safety resistors provided to limit
the current if the relay coil is
short-circuited.
No. of Normally closed & Normally open
contacts sufficient for seheme
requirements (Yes / No).
RESTRICTED EARTH FAULT RELAY .
Make.
Type.
Tap range.
Timer setting range.
V A Burden.
Time/Current characteristics
Short time rating of relay.
Descriptive leaflet No. submitted.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
59
IX.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
X.
T/F OVER FLUXING RELAY.
Make
Type.
Rated Voltage (V,AC)
Rated DC Voltage.
Operating principle.
No. of Normally closed & Normally open
contacts sufficient for seheme
requirements (Yes / No).
Contacts self/hand reset.
Burden.
Setting range.
i)
V/F
ii)
Time for alarm.
iii)
Time for tripping.
Whether inverse time operating
characteristics provided.
Whether different time multiplier
settings provided.
Max. operating time of the relay at
i) 1.4 times the rated value of V/F.
ii) 1.25 times the rated value of V/F.
Reset time.
LOCAL BREAKER BACK UP RELAYS .
1.
Make.
2.
Type.
3.
Setting range (% of rating)
a)
Phase faults.
b)
Ground faults.
4.
Operating time (m sec.)
5.
Reset time (m sec).
6.
Burden.
7.
Timer range.
8.
Whether no. of Normally closed &
Normally open contacts sufficient
for seheme requirements? (Yes / No).
XI.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
OVER LOAD ALARM RELAY.
Make.
Type.
Rated Voltage.
Setting Ranges.
Operating time.
Setting range continuously variable.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SELECTOR SWITCHES (AUTORECLOSING IN/OUT, CARRIER
PROTECTION IN/OUT SWITCH,
TRIP TRANSFER SWITCH).
Make.
Type.
Type of handle.
No. of positions.
No. of Normally closed & Normally open
XII.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
60
6.
7.
XIII.
contacts sufficient for seheme
requirements (Yes / No).
Making & breaking capacity of
contacts.
Descriptive leaflet number submitted.
11.
DISTANCE RELAYS.
Make.
Type of relay.
Type of distance measuring elements.
Details of starting units and their
switching sequence, if applicable.
Range of settings (in secondary ohms).
for Zone-I, Zone-2 & Zone-3.
Operating times:
i)
First zone timing.
ii)
Second zone time setting
adjustable between-------- secs
to ------- secs.
iii)
Third zone time setting
adjustable between -------- secs
to ------- secs.
Contacts rating:
i)
First Zone.
ii)
Second Zone.
iii)
Third Zone.
VA burden :
i)
Current circuit of the scheme.
ii)
Potential circuit of the scheme.
Is the VA burden at Sr.No.8 above is
continuous ? (yes/No)
Operating time versus ZS/ZL curves
of the distance scheme.
Descriptive leaflet no. submitted.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
CHECK SYNCHRONIZING RELAY:
Make.
Type.
Rating ( V, ac )
Aux. Voltage ( V, dc )
Permissible voltage difference (%)
Permissible phase angle difference (degree)
Response time of relay (without timer)( m Sec )
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
AUTO RECLOSING :
Make.
Type.
Multi shot or single shot.
Rating (V, dc)
Suitable for 1 & 3 phase.
Dead time setting range (Sec.)
Reclaim time setting range (sec.)
Four position selector switch provided.
Alarm contacts provided for `Auto-reclosed',
`Reclosure unsuccessful'.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7,
8.
9
10.
XIV.
XV.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
61
XVI.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
BUS-BAR PROTECTION
Make.
Type.
Applicable standard.
Rated Voltage/Frequency.
Operating time (maximum).
Resetting time (maximum).
Does the offer meet the
requirements of technical
specification?
Yes/No
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
62
ANNEXURE –B
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS OF CTs, PTs, CVTs & NCTs.
COREWISE DETAILS OF 420 kV CTs
(2000-1000-500/1-1-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES – 5
Core
No.
1
1
2
3
4
5
Application
Current
ratio
Output
burden
(VA)
2
BUS
DIFF
MAIN
BUS
DIFF
CHECK
METERING
3
2000-1000
/1
20001000/1
2000-1000500/1
TRANS.
BACKUP/
LINE
PROTN.
TRANS.
DIFF/
LINE
PROTN.
2000-1000500/1
2000-1000500/1
Accuracy
class
4
Min. knee
Pt. Voltage
Vk
Max. CT sec.
wdg.
Resistance
(ohms)
Max.
Excitation
current at Vk
(in mA)
8
30 on 2000/1 Tap;
60 on 1000/1 Tap
30 on 2000/1 Tap;
60 on 1000/1 Tap
-
-
5
PS
6
2000/1000
7
10/5
-
PS
2000/1000
10/5
10
-
-
-
0.2S
ISF<5 for
500/1A,
ISF<10 for
1000/1A,
ISF<20 for
2000/1A
PS
4000/2000
/1000
10/5/2.5
-
PS
4000/2000
/1000
10/5/2.5
30
on
2000/1
Tap;60 on 1000/1
Tap; 120 on 500/1
Tap
30
on
2000/1
Tap;60 on 1000/1
Tap; 120 on 500/1
Tap
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV Transformer CTs
(450-300/0.577-1-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES - 5
Core
No.
1
1
2
3
4
5
Application
2
DIFFERENTIAL
PROTECTION
REF PROTECTION
Current
Ratio (A)
3
450-300/
0.577
450300/1
OVER CURRENT
450PROTECTION / BUS 300/1
BAR PROTECTION
450BUSBAR
PROTECTION (FOR 300/1
LOW IMPEDANCE
SCHEME)
METERING
450300/1
Output
burden
(VA)
4
Accuracy
class
as per
IEC 185
Formula for
minimum kneepoint voltage
At CT Secondary
resistance at 750C
at 300A tap (Volt)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
I.S.F.
/
A.L.
F
-
5
PS
6
40 (RCT+2)
7
30 @Vk/4
8
-
-
PS
14 (RCT+2)
30 @Vk/2
-
-
PS
40 (RCT+4)
30 @Vk/2
-
-
PS
40 (RCT+4)
30 @Vk/2
-
10
0.2S
-
-
<5
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
63
NOTE : 4th core for bus bar protection has been kept in view of general design being followed in
HVPNL. In case this CT is used on a sub station having high impedance bus bar protection scheme or no
bus bar protection scheme then this core shall be short-circuited at site.
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV LINE CUM BUS-COUPLER CTs
(1200-800-400/1-1-1-1-1 A)
NUMBER OF CORES – 5
Core
No.
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Application
Current
Ratio (A)
2
MAIN–I
DISTANCE
PROTECTION
MAIN–II
DISTANCE
PROTECTION
BUS
DIFFERENTIA
L MAIN
BUS
DIFFERENTIA
L CHECK
METERING
3
1200800400/1
1200800400/1
1200800400/1
1200800400/1
1200800400/1
Output Accuracy Formula for minimum
burden class
knee point voltage At CT
(VA)
as per
Secondary resistance at
IEC 185
750C at 800Atap (Volt)
4
5
6
PS
80(RCT+9)
Maximum Instrument
Exciting Security
Current
factor
(mA)
7
8
80 @ Vk
-
-
PS
80(RCT+9)
80 @ Vk
-
-
PS
100(RCT+4)
30 @
Vk/2
-
-
PS
100(RCT+4)
30 @
Vk/2
-
10
0.2S
-
-
ISF<5 for
ratio
400/1,
ISF<10 for
ratio
800/1,
ISF<20 for
ratio
1200/1
NOTE :
1.
5 cores of 245kV line CT have been kept in view of general design being followed in HVPNL.
2.
In case this CT is used exclusively for bus bar protection purpose on a transformer circuit at sub
station having high impedance bus bar protection scheme then core no 1, 2 & 5 shall be short
circuited at site.
3.
In case this CT is used for feeder circuit on a sub station having low impedance bus bar protection
scheme then core no. 4 shall be short circuited at site and where there is no bus bar protection
scheme core no. 3 & 4 shall be short circuited at site.
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV LINE CTs
(2000-1000/1-1-1-1-1 A)
NUMBER OF CORES – 5
Core
No.
1
1.
Application
2
MAIN–I
DISTANCE
PROTECTION
Current
Ratio (A)
3
20001000/1
Output Accuracy Formula for minimum
burden class
knee point voltage At CT
(VA)
as per
Secondary resistance at
IEC 185
750C at 1000A tap (Volt)
4
5
6
-
PS
1600
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
7
Instrument
Security
Factor/
A.L.F
8
20-40
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
-
64
2.
MAIN–II
DISTANCE
PROTECTION
BUS
DIFFERENTIAL
MAIN
BUS
DIFFERENTIAL
CHECK
METERING
3.
4.
5.
20001000/1
-
PS
1600
20-40
-
20001000/1
-
PS
1600
20-40
-
20001000/1
-
PS
1600
20-40
-
20001000/1
10
0.2S
-
-
ISF<5 for
ratio 1000/1,
ISF<10 for
ratio 2000/1,
NOTE :
1.
5 cores of 245kV line CT have been kept in view of general design being followed in HVPNL.
2.
In case this CT is used exclusively for bus bar protection purpose on a transformer circuit at sub
station having high impedance bus bar protection scheme then core no 1, 2 & 5 shall be short
circuited at site.
3.
In case this CT is used for feeder circuit on a sub-station having low impedance bus bar protection
scheme then core no. 4 shall be short circuited at site and where there is no bus bar protection
scheme core no. 3 & 4 shall be short circuited at site.
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245 kV BUS COUPLER CTs FOR 400KV S/STNS.
(2400-1200/1-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES - 4
Core
No.
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Application
Current
Ratio (A)
Output
burden
(VA)
Accuracy
class
as per
IEC 185
2
O/C
&
E/F
PROTECTION
BUS
DIFFERENTIAL
BUS
DIFFERENTIAL
CHECK
METERING
3
2400-120
0/1
2400-120
0/1
2400-120
0/1
4
15
5
5P
Formula for
minimum knee
point voltage
At CT
Secondary
resistance at
750C at
2400Atap (Volt)
6
-
-
PS
-
2400-120
0/1
10
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
ALF/ISF
7
-
8
10
100(RCT+4)
30 @ Vk/2
-
PS
100(RCT+4)
30 @ Vk/2
-
1.0
-
-
ISF<5
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
65
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245 kV Transformer INCOMER CTs
(900-600-300/1-1-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES - 5
Core Application
No.
1
1
2
3
4
5
Current
Ratio (A)
Output
burden
(VA)
Accuracy
class
as per
IEC 185
4
5
Formula for
minimum knee
point voltage
At CT
Secondary
resistance
at 750C at
900Atap
(Volt)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
6
40 (RCT+2)
7
30 @Vk/4
I.S.F./
A.L.F
2
DIFFERENTIAL
PROTECTION
OVER
CURRENT
&
EARTH
FAULT
PROTECTION
METERING
BUSBAR PROTECTION
MAIN DIFF.
3
900-600-300/1
-
PS
900-600-300/1
15
5P
900-600-300/1
900-600-300/1
10
-
0.2S
PS
40 (RCT+4)
30 @Vk/2
<5
-
BUSBAR PROTECTION
CHECK DIFF.
900-600-300/1
-
PS
40 (RCT+4)
30 @Vk/2
-
-
8
-
-
10
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV NEUTRAL CTs
(450-300/1A)
NUMBER OF CORE - 1
Application
Current
Ratio (A)
1
Accuracy
class
as per
IEC 185
2
REF PROTECTION
450-300/1
Formula for minimum kneepoint voltage at CT Secondary
resistance
at
750C
at
300Atap(Volt)
3
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
4
PS
Minimum
Insulation
Voltage
(kV)
5
14(RCT+2)
30 @ VK/2
6
33
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CT
(750-500/0.577-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES – 4
Core
No.
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Application
2
DIFFERENTIAL
PROTECTION
REF
PROTECTION
OVER
CURRENT AND
EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION
METERING
Current
Ratio (A)
Output
burden
(VA)
Accurac
y Class
as per
IEC 185
Formula for minimum
knee-point voltage At
CT Secondary
resistance at
750C at 500Atap (Volt)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
I.S.F./
A.L.F.
3
4
5
6
7
8
750-500/
0.577
750-500/1
-
PS
40 (RCT+2)
30 @ Vk/4
-
-
PS
90 (RCT+2)
37.5 @ Vk/2
-
750-500/1
15
5P
-
-
ALF10
750-500/1
10
0.2S
-
-
ISF<5
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
66
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV TRANSFORMER CT
(250-150-100/0.577-1-1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 4
Core
No.
1
1.
2.
3.
4.
Application
Current
Ratio (A)
2
DIFFERENTIAL
PROTECTION
REF
PROTECTION
OVER
CURRENT
PROTECTION
METERING
3
250-150100/0.577
250-150100/1
250-150100/1
Accurac
y class
as
per IEC
185
Formula
for
minimum kneepoint voltage
At
CT
Secondary
resistance
at
750C at
100A tap (Volt)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
-
5
PS
6
40 (RCT+1)
7
30 @ Vk/4
8
-
-
PS
20 (RCT+1)
30 @ Vk/2
-
15
5P
-
-
10
0.2S
-
-
ISF<5
Output
burden
(VA)
4
250-150100/1
10
A.L.F.
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV LINE CT AND 145kV BUS COUPLER CT for 132kV
S/STNS.
(600-300-150/1-1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 3
Core Application
No.
1
1
2
3
2
DISTANCE
PROTECTION
OVER-CURRENT
& EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION
METERING
Current
Ratio (A)
3
Output Accura
burden cy class
(VA)
as per
IEC 185
4
5
Formula
for
minimum kneepoint voltage
At CT Secondary
resistance
at
750C at 300Atap
(Volt)
6
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
A.L.F./
I.S.F.
7
8
600-300-150/1
-
PS
120 (RCT+4.5)
80 @ VKP
-
600-300-150/1
15
5P
-
-
ALF 10
600-300-150/1
10
0.2S
-
-
ISF<5 for
ratio 150/1,
ISF<10 for
ratio 300/1,
ISF<20 for
ratio 600/1
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
67
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV NEUTRAL CT
(250-150-100/1A)
No. OF CORE= 1
Core Application
No.
1
Current
Ratio (A)
2
1
REF
PROTECTION
Output
burden
(VA)
Accurac
y class
as per
IEC 185
3
4
5
250-150100/1
-
PS
Formula
for
minimum kneepoint voltage
At CT Secondary
resistance
at
750C at
100A tap (Volt)
6
20 (RCT+1)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
Minimum
Insulatio
n Voltage
(kV)
7
8
30 @ VK/2
15
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV BUS COUPLER CT for 160MVA 220/132kV T/Fs.
(750-500/1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 2
Core Application
No.
1
2
3
Current
Ratio (A)
2
Output
burden
(VA)
3
OVER-CURRENT & EARTH
FAULT PROTECTION
METERING
Accuracy
class as per
IEC 185
5
4
A.L.F./
I.S.F.
8
750-500/1
15
5P
ALF 10
750-500/1
10
1.0
ISF<5
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CT
(1500-1000/0.577-1-1-1A)
NUMBER OF CORES - 4
Core Application
No.
1
1
2
3
4
2
Current
Ratio (A)
Output
burden
(VA)
3
4
Accuracy
class
as per
IEC 185
5
Formula
for
minimum kneepoint voltage
At CT Secondary
resistance
at
750C at
1000A tap (Volt)
6
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
A.L.F./
I.S.F.
7
8
DIFFERENTIA
L
PROTECTION
REF
PROTECTIO
N
OVER
CURRENT &
EARTH
FAULT
PROTECTIO
N
1500-1000/0.577
-
PS
40 (RCT+2)
30 @ VK/4
1500-1000/1
-
PS
14 (RCT+2)
30 @ VK/2
1500-1000/1
15
5P
-
-
ALF 10
METERING
1500-1000/1
10
0.2S
-
-
ISF <5
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
-
68
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV TRANSFORMER CT FOR 66/11kV T/Fs
(300-200-150/0.577-1-1)
No. OF CORES = 3
Core Application
No.
1
1
2
3
Current
Ratio (A)
2
Output Accuracy Formula
for
burden class
minimum knee(VA)
as per
point voltage At
IEC 185
CT
Secondary
resistance
at
750C at 300A tap
(Volt)
4
5
6
3
DIFFERENTIAL
300-200PROTECTION
150/0.577
REF PROTECTION 300-200-150/1
OVER CURRENT
PROTECTION
300-200-150/1
Maximum A.L.F
Exciting
Current
(mA)
7
8
-
PS
40(RCT+4)
30 @ VK/2
-
-
PS
40(RCT+4)
30 @ VK/2
-
15
5P
-
-
10
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV LINE CT AND 72.5kV BUS COUPLER CT for 66kV S/STNS.
Core Application
No.
1
1
2
3
2
DISTANCE
PROTECTION
OVER
CURRENT &
EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION
METERING
Current
Ratio (A)
3
(600-300-150/1-1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 3
Output Accuracy Formula for min
knee point
burden class
voltage At CT
as per
(VA)
Secondary res.
IEC 185
at 750C at 600A
tap (Volt)
4
5
6
Maximum A.L.F./
Exciting I.S.F.
Current
(mA)
7
8
600-300-150/1
-
PS
80(RCT+4)
40 @VK/2
-
600-300-150/1
15
5P
-
-
ALF 10
0.2S
-
-
600-300-150/1
10
ISF<5 for
ratio 150/1,
ISF<10 for
ratio 300/1,
ISF<20 for
ratio 600/1
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCT
(1500-1000/1A)
No. OF CORES= 1
Core Application
No.
1
1
2
Current
Ratio (A)
3
REF PROTECTION 1500-1000/1
Output
burden
(VA)
Accuracy
class
as per
IEC 185
4
5
-
PS
Formula for min
knee point
voltage At CT
Secondary res.
at 750C at
1000A tap (Volt)
6
14
(RCT+2)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
Minimum
Insulation
Voltage
(kV)
7
8
30 @ VK/2
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
15
69
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5 kV NEURAL CT FOR 66/11kV T/Fs
(300-200-150/1)
No. OF CORE = 1
Core
No.
Application
Current
Ratio (A)
Output
burden
(VA)
Accuracy
class
as
per
IEC
185
1
2
3
4
5
Formula
for
minimum
knee
point voltage at
CT
secondary
resistance at 750 at
300A tap (Volt)
6
1.
REF PROTECTION
300-200150/1
-
PS
20 (RCT+1)
Maximum
exciting
current
(mA)
Minimum
Insulation
voltage
(kV)
7
8
30 @ Vk/2
15
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV BUS COUPLER CT for 160MVA 220/66kV T/Fs.
(1500-1000/1-1A)
No. OF CORES = 2
Core Application
No.
1
2
3
Current
Ratio (A)
2
Output
burden
(VA)
4
3
OVER-CURRENT & EARTH
FAULT PROTECTION
METERING
Accuracy
class as per
IEC 185
5
A.L.F./
I.S.F.
8
1500-1000/1
15
5P
ALF 10
1500-1000/1
10
1.0
ISF<5
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CT FOR 40/50MVA
132/33kV T/F AND OTHER RATINGS OF 132/33KV T/Fs WITH 26.3KA STC
(1000-600-400/0.577-5-5-1)
No. OF CORES = 4
Core
No.
1
1
2
3
4
Application
2
DIFFERENTIAL
PROTECTION
REF
PROTECTION
OVER CURRENT
&
EARTH
FAULT
PROTECTION
MAIN
METERING
Current
Ratio (A)
3
Output Accuracy Formula
for
burden class as minimum knee
(VA)
Per IEC
point voltage At
185
CT Secondary
resistance
at
750C at
400A tap (Volt)
4
5
6
1000-600-400/0.577
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(ma)
A.L.F./
I.S.F.
7
PS
40 (RCT+1)
30@VK/4
8
1000-600-400/5
-
PS
100(RCT+1)
75@VK/2
1000-600-400/5
15
5P
-
-
10
1000-600-400/1
10
0.2S
-
-
<5 for
ratio
300/1
<10 for
ratio
400/1
<20 for
ratio
600/1
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
70
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER CT FOR 220/33KV WITH
26.3KA STC
(2000-1000/0.577-5-5-1)
No. OF CORES = 4
Core Application
No.
1
1
2
3
4
Current
Ratio (A)
2
Output
Burden
(VA)
3
DIFFERENTIAL
PROTECTION
REF. PROT.
OVER CURRENT
& EARTH FAULT
PROT.
MAIN
METERING
Accuracy
class
as per
IEC 185
4
5
Formula for
minimum kneepoint voltage At
CT Secondary
resistance at 750C
at 2000A tap (Volt)
6
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
A.L.F.
/ ISF
7
8
2000-1000/
0.577
2000-1000/ 5
2000-1000/5
-
PS
40 (RCT+1)
30@ V K/4
-
15
PS
5P
100 (RCT+1)
-
75@ V K/2
-
10
2000-1000/1
10
0.2S
-
-
For
ratio
1000/1
ISF<5.
For
ratio
2000/1
ISF<10
.
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV LINE CUM CAPACITOR CT for 33kV LINE BAY AND
FOR 20MVAR & 10MVAR CAPACITOR BANKS ON 220/33KV T/F & 40/50MVA
132/33kV T/F WITH 26.3KA STC
(400-300/5-1)
No. OF CORES = 2
Core
No.
Current Ratio
(A) (VA)
Output
Burden
A.L.F.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Accuracy
Class as
per IEC
185
5.
1.
OVER CURRENT & EARTH
FAULT PROTECTION
METERING
400-300/5
15
5P
10
400-300/1
10
0.2S
75
2.
Application
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
6.
71
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCT FOR 40/50MVA
132/33kV T/F AND OTHER RATINGS OF 132/33KV T/Fs WITH 26.3KA STC
(1000-600-400/5)
No. OF CORES = 1
Core Application
No.
1
Current
Ratio (A)
2
1
3
REF
PROTECTION
1000-600-400/5
Output
burden
(VA)
Accuracy
class as
Per IEC
185
4
5
-
PS
Formula
for
minimum knee
point voltage
At
CT
Secondary
resistance
at
0
75 C at
400A tap (Volt)
6
100 (RCT+1)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
Minimum
Insulation
Voltage
(kV)
7
8
75@ VK/2
15
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER INCOMER NCT FOR 220/33KV T/F
WITH 26.3KA STC
(2000-1000/5)
No. OF CORES = 1
Core Application
No.
1
1
Current
Ratio (A)
2
REF
PROTECTION
3
20001000 /5
4
5
Formula for minimum
knee-point voltage At
CT Secondary
resistance at 750C at
2000A tap (Volt)
6
-
PS
100 (RCT+1)
Output
Burden
(VA)
Accuracy
class
as per
IEC 185
Minimum
Insulatio
n Voltage
(kV)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
7
8
75@ VK/2
15
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV BUS COUPLER CT FOR 220/33KV WITH 26.3KA STC
(2000-1000/5A)
No. OF CORES = 1
Core
No.
1
1
Application
2
OVER CURRENT
& EARTH FAULT
PROTECTION
Current
Ratio (A)
3
2000-1000/
5A
Output
Burden
(VA)
4
15
Accuracy class as per IEC A.L.F.
185
5
5P
6
10
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
72
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER CT WITH 26.3KA STC
FOR 4 MVA 33/11kV T/F
(100-50/5-5)
No. OF CORES = 2
Core Application
No.
1
Current
Ratio (A)
2
1
REF
PROTECTION
OVER
CURRENT
PROTECTION
2
Output
burden
(VA)
Accuracy
class as
Per IEC
185
Formula
for
minimum
knee
point voltage
At CT Secondary
resistance at 750C
at
100A tap (Volt)
6
3
4
5
100-50/5
-
PS
100 (RCT+1)
100-50/5
15
5P
-
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
Minimum
Insulatio
n Voltage
(kV)
7
8
75@ VK/2
-
-
10
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV TRANSFORMER NCT WITH 26.3KA STC
FOR 4 MVA 33/11kV T/F
(100-50/5)
No. OF CORE = 1
Core Application
No.
1
1
Current
Ratio (A)
2
REF
PROTECTIO
N
3
Accuracy
class
as per
IEC 185
4
100-50/5
PS
Formula for minimum
knee-point voltage At CT
Secondary resistance at
750C at 100A tap (Volt)
5
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
6
100 (RCT+1)
Minimum
Insulatio
n Voltage
(kV)
7
75@ VK/2
15
COREWISE DETAILS OF 12 kV NEUTRAL CT FOR 25/31.5 MVA T/F
(1800-900/5)
No. OF CORE = 1
Core
No.
Maximum
exciting
current
(mA)
Minimum
Insulation
voltage
(kV)
3
Accuracy
Formula for minimum
class as per knee point voltage at
IEC 185
CT
secondary
resistance at 750 at
1800A tap (Volt)
4
5
6
7
1800-900/5
PS
75@ Vk/2
8.66
Application
Current
Ratio (A)
1
2
1.
REF
PROTECTION
95 (RCT+1)
COREWISE DETAILS OF 12kV NEUTRAL CT FOR 12.5/16 MVA & 16/20 MVA T/F
(1200-900/5)
No. OF CORE = 1
Core Application
No.
1
1
2
REF
PROTECTION
Current Accuracy Formula for minimum
Ratio (A) class
knee-point voltage At CT
as per
Secondary resistance at
IEC 185
750C at 1200A tap (Volt)
3
4
5
1200-900/5
PS
95 (RCT+1)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
6
75@ VK/2
Minimum
Insulatio
n Voltage
(kV)
7
8.66
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
73
COREWISE DETAILS OF 12kV NEUTRAL CT for 4MVA 33/11kV T/F
(300-150/5)
No. OF CORE = 1
Core Application
No.
1
1
2
REF
PROTECTION
Current Accuracy Formula for minimum
Ratio (A) class
knee-point voltage At CT
as per
Secondary resistance at
IEC 185
750C at 300A tap (Volt)
3
4
5
300-150/5
PS
95 (RCT+1)
Maximum
Exciting
Current
(mA)
6
75@ VK/2
Minimum
Insulatio
n Voltage
(kV)
7
8.66
COREWISE DETAILS OF 420kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT)
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Requirement
Rated Primary voltage
Type
No. of Secondaries
Rated voltage factor
5. Capacitance (minimum)
6. Rated voltage (volts)
7. Application
Particulars
400/√3kV
Single phase
3
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads
Secondary-I Secondary-II Secondary-III
110/√3
110/√3
110/√3
Metering &
Protection
Metering
Protection
1/3P
3P
0.2
100
50
50
As per ISS/IEC
8. Accuracy
9. Output burden (VA)
10 Percentage voltage error & phase
displacement
(minutes)
for
respective
specified
accuracy
classes.
Note:- Each winding shall fulfill its respective specified accuracy requirement within its
specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output of
any value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other winding in
line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its equivalent IEC.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
74
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
(CVT)
Sl.
Requirement
Particulars
No.
11. Rated Primary voltage
220/√3kV
12.
Type
13.
No. of Secondaries
3
14.
Rated voltage factor
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
15.
Capacitance (minimum)
16.
Rated voltage (volts)
17.
Application
Single phase
8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads
Secondary-I
Secondary-II
Secondary-III
110/√3
110/√3
110/√3
Protection &
Protection
Metering
Measurement
18.
Accuracy
1/3P
3P
0.2
19.
Output burden (VA)
100
50
10
20.
Percentage voltage error &
phase
displacement
(minutes) for respective
specified accuracy classes.
Note:-
As per ISS/IEC
Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy
requirement within its specified output range whilst at the same time
the other winding has an output of any value form zero to 100% of
the output range specified for the other winding in line with clause
6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its equivalent IEC.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
75
COREWISE DETAILS OF 245kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT)
Particulars
Requirement
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Rated Primary voltage
Type
No. of Secondaries
Rated voltage factor
Rated voltage (volts)
6.
Application
7.
8.
9.
Accuracy
Output burden (VA)
Percentage voltage error &
phase
displacement
(minutes) for respective
specified accuracy classes.
Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy
requirement within its specified output range whilst at the same time
the other winding has an output of any value form zero to 100% of
the output range specified for the other winding in line with clause
6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its equivalent IEC.
Note:-
220/√3kV
Single phase
2
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
Secondary-I
Secondary-II
110/√3
110/√3
Protection &
Protection
Measurement
1/3P
3P
150
50
As per ISS/IEC
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER (CVT).
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Note:-
Requirement
Particulars
Rated Primary voltage
Type
No. of Secondaries
Rated voltage factor
Capacitance (minimum)
Rated voltage (volts)
132√3kV
Single phase
3
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads
Secondary-I Secondary-II Secondary-III
110/√3
110/√3
110/√3
Application
Protection &
Protection
Metering
Measurement
Accuracy
1/3P
3P
0.2
Output burden (VA)
50
25
10
Percentage voltage error &
As per ISS/IEC
phase
displacement
(minutes) for respective
specified accuracy classes.
Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy
requirement within its specified output range whilst at the same time
the other winding has an output of any value form zero to 100% of
the output range specified for the other winding in line with clause
6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its equivalent IEC.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
76
COREWISE DETAILS OF 145kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
(PT).
Particulars
Requirement
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Rated Primary voltage
Type
No. of Secondaries
Rated voltage factor
Rated voltage (volts)
6.
Application
7.
8.
9.
132/√3kV
Single phase
3
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
Secondary-I
Secondary-II Secondary-III
110/√3
110/√3
110/√3
Protection &
Protection
METERING
Measurement
1/3P
3P
0.2
250
25
20
As per ISS/IEC
Accuracy
Output burden (VA)
Percentage voltage error &
phase
displacement
(minutes) for respective
specified accuracy classes.
Note:- Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy requirement within its
specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output of
any value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other winding
in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its equivalent IEC.
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV CAPACITOR VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
(CVT).
Requirement
Particulars
Sl.
No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Rated Primary voltage
Type
No. of Secondaries
Rated voltage factor
Capacitance (minimum)
Rated voltage (volts)
7.
Application
8.
9.
10.
66/√3kV
Single phase
2
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
8800 (+10%, -5%) pico farads
Secondary-I
Secondary-II
110/√3
110/√3
Protection &
Metering
Measurement
1/3P
0.2
50
10
As per ISS/IEC
Accuracy
Output burden (VA)
Percentage voltage error & phase
displacement (minutes) for respective
specified accuracy classes.
Note:- Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy requirement within its
specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an output of
any value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the other winding
in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its equivalent IEC.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
77
COREWISE DETAILS OF 72.5kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
(PT).
Sl.
Particulars
Requirement
No.
1.
Rated Primary voltage
66/√3kV
2.
Type
Single phase
3.
No. of Secondaries
2
4.
Rated voltage factor
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
5.
Rated voltage (volts)
Secondary-I
Secondary-II
110/√3
110/√3
6.
Application
Protection &
Protection
Measurement
7.
Accuracy
1/3P
3P
8.
Output burden (VA)
250
25
9.
Percentage voltage error &
As per ISS/IEC
phase
displacement
(minutes) for respective
specified accuracy classes.
Note:Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy
requirement within its specified output range whilst at the same time
the other winding has an output of any value form zero to 100% of
the output range specified for the other winding in line with clause
6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or its equivalent IEC.
COREWISE DETAILS OF 36kV POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER (PT) OF 2 CORES.
Sl.
Requirement
Particulars
No
1. Rated Primary voltage
33/√3kV
2. Type
Single phase
3. No. of Secondaries
2
4. Rated voltage factor
1.2 continuous & 1.5 for 30 seconds
5. Rated voltage (volts)
Secondary-I
Secondary-II
110/√3
110/√3
6. Application
Main metering
Metering & Protection
7. Accuracy
0.2
1/3P
8. Output burden (VA)
10
50
9. Percentage voltage error
As per ISS/IEC
& phase displacement
(minutes) for respective
specified
accuracy
classes.
Note:Each winding shall fulfil its respective specified accuracy requirement within
its specified output range whilst at the same time the other winding has an
output of any value form zero to 100% of the output range specified for the
other winding in line with clause 6.2.1 of IS 3156 (Part-2 & Part-3) 1992 or
its equivalent IEC.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
78
ANNEXURE-C
TRANSMISSION LINE DATA (TENTATIVE)
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sr.
Name of Circuit
Line
Conductor size
No.
length
Sq. inch ACSR
in KM. Copper equivalent
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------* The line lengths and conductor size shall be supplied to successful Bidder.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
79
ANNEXURE-D
SCHEDULE OF DEVIATIONS FROM THE SPECIFICATION
In the table the Bidder shall set out all deviations clause by clause from the specification of the
equipment offered. The bid shall be deemed to conform to Purchaser's specification in all
respects unless specifically mentioned in this table.
Sr.No.
------
Clause No.
----------
Detailed deviations with justification.
--------------------------------------
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
80
ANNEXURE-E
LINE PARAMETERS (per UNIT)/100 MVA BASE/100 km
WITH CONDUCTOR SIZE & POWER CAPACITY
No.of
Ckt.
Conduct
or
size
(inch2)
Resistan
ce R
Ω
Reactanc
e
X
Ω
Susceptan
ce
Y
Ω
Resistanc
e
R0
Ω
Reactanc
e
X0
Ω
Line
Capacity
(MW )
220
D/C
0.40
0.0088
0.0443
0.2700
0.05109
0.21666
300
220
S/C
0.40
0.0176
0.0886
0.1350
0.05951
0.26180
150
132
D/C
0.20
0.0445
0.1167
0.0970
0.15648
0.64289
112
132
S/C
0.20
0.0890
0.2335
0.0485
0.19776
0.76814
56
66
D/C
0.15
0.2347
0.4637
0.0272
0.71210
2.70857
50
66
S/C
0.15
0.4695
0.9275
0.0136
0.93744
3.20761
25
Volta
ge
(kV)
Remarks:
1. Size of Earth wire for:220 kV =
7/3.15 mm
132 kV =
7/2.5 mm
66 kV
=
7/2.5 mm
2. Resistance of conductor at 20 C.
3. Resistivity of Earth Assumed = 100.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
81
ANNEXURE-F
DETAILS OF CARRIER EQUIPMENT
The carrier terminals available in carrier equipment for feeders are as under:-
CARRIER BOOST
CARRIER SEND
(MAIN-I)
CARRIER SEND
(MAIN-II)
+ VE
+ VE
- VE
DIRECT TRIP
(SEND)
+ VE
- VE
CARRIER HEALTHY
(MAIN-I)
CARRIER HEALTHY
(MAIN-II)
CARRIER SIGNAL
RECEIVE
(MAIN-I)
CARRIER SIGNAL
RECEIVE
(MAIN-II)
DIRECT TRIP
(RECEIVE)
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-3 C&R Panel (with automation) including
SAS Spec..doc
82
HARYANA VIDYUT PRASARAN NIGAM LTD.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
INTERUTILITY METERING SYSTEM AND
COMMON METER READING INSTRUMENT
(CMRI)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR INTERUTILITY METERING SYSTEM
1.0
The specification covers the design, manufacturing, testing, inspection, delivery of interutility
metering system and /or common meter reading instrument (CMRI).
2.0
The energy meters specified herein shall be used for tariff metering for bulk, Inter -utility power
flows in HVPNL/DISCOM. The meters shall be installed on each circuit as a self contained device
for measurement of active energy & reactive energy in each successive 15-minute block and
certain other functions as described in the following paragraphs.
3.0
The meters shall be suitable for being connected through Test terminal blocks to the voltage
transformer having a rated secondary line to line voltage of 110 V, and to current transformers
having a rated secondary current of 1 A. Any further transformer/transducers required for their
functioning shall be in built in the meters. Necessary isolation and / or suppression shall also be
built in for protecting the meters from surges and voltage spikes that occur in the VT/CT circuits
of the switchyards. The reference frequency shall be 50Hz.
4.0
The microprocessor based 3 phase 4 wire meters shall conform to class 0.2S as per IS 14697 for
Indian manufacturers or IEC- 62053-22 (2003) for foreign manufacturers & technical specification
and meter shall be stand alone type. The meters shall bear BIS certification mark, if required as
per Govt. of India Gazette notification. It will be the responsibility of the bidder to get these
meters marked with BIS certification. The BIS certification shall be supplied with the tender.
5.0
Meters shall be supplied with associated TTBs. The Meters shall have following features: -
a)
Meter shall be stand alone type.
b)
For transfer of data, system should have multiple communication ports as described in the
following paragraphs
6.0
The active energy measurement (Wh) shall be carried out on 3 phase 4 wire principle with an
accuracy as per class 0.2S of IS 14697/IEC- 62053- 22 (2003) In the meters the energy shall be
computed directly in CT/VT secondary quantities and indicated in Watt-hours. The meters shall
compute the net active energy (Wh) sent out from the Sub-Station during each successive 15
minute block, and store in its memory along with +/- sign. It shall also display on demand the net
WH sent out during the previous 15 minute block, with a minus sign if it is a net Wh receipt.
7.0
Further, the meter shall continuously integrate and display on demand the net
cumulative active energy sent out from the Sub-Station upto that time. The
cumulative Wh reading at each midnight shall be stored in the meter’s memory. The register shall
move backwards when active power flows backwards into the Sub-Station.
8.0
The meter shall count the number of cycles in VT output during each successive 15-minutes block, and
divide the same by 900 to arrive at the average frequency. This shall be stored in the meter’s memory as
a 2-digit code which shall be arrived at by subtracting 49.5 from the average frequency, multiplying by
100 and neglecting all decimals. For example, 49.89 Hz shall be recorded as 39. In case the average
frequency is less than 49.5 Hz, it shall be recorded as 00. In case it is 50.5 Hz or higher, it shall be
recorded as 99. The average frequency of the previous 15-minutes block shall also be displayed, on
demand in hertz. The accuracy of the voltage measurement / computation shall be at-least 0.5%, a
better accuracy such as 0.2% in the 95-105% range being desirable.
9.0
The meters shall continuously compute the average of the RMS value (fundamental only) of the
three lines to neutral VT secondary voltage as a percentage of 63.51 V and display the same on
demand.
10.0
The meter shall also compute the reactive power (VAR) on 3 phase 4 wire principle. Limits of
error shall be corresponding to class 1.0 as per IS 14697 for reactive energy for Indian
manufacturers or half (50%) of those permitted corresponding to class 2.0 for reactive energy as
per IEC 62053-23 (2003) for foreign manufacturers, and integrate the reactive energy (VARh)
algebraically in 2 separate registers, one for the period for which the average RMS voltage is
103% or higher and the other for the period for which the average RMS voltage is below 97%.
The current reactive power (VAR) with a minus sign if negative, and cumulative reactive energy
(VARh) reading of the 2 registers shall be displayed on demand. The readings of the 2 registers
at each midnight shall also be stored in the meter's memory. In the meter, the reactive power and
reactive energy transmittals shall be computed in VAR/VARh directly calculated in VT and CT
secondary quantities. When lagging reactive power is being sent out from the Sub-Station. VAR
display shall have no sign and VARh registers shall move forward. When reactive power flow is
in the reverse direction. VAR display shall have a negative sign and VARh registers shall move
backwards.
11.0
The meter shall fully comply with all the stipulations of IS 14697/IEC- 60687-2000 (or latest
revision) for class 0.2S for static watt-hour meters except those specifically modified by this
specification. The reference ambient temperature shall be 50 deg. C.
12.0
Error shall be as per IS-14697/ IEC- 62053- 22 (2003) for all power factor angles from 0 deg. to
360 deg.
13.0
Each meter shall have a test output device (visual) for checking the accuracy of active energy
Wh and reactive energy (VARh) measurement using a suitable test equipment. The test output
shall be software configurable for active energy import/export and reactive energy import/export.
14.0
No rounding off to the next higher last decimal shall be done for voltage and frequency displays.
15.0
5)
There shall be provisions of below mentioned Tempers and Events in the Interutility Meters of
0.2S accuracy class:Tempers:Current Reversal/Current Failure/Current Unbalance/Current bypass.
Magnetic Tempering.
Under voltage/Voltage unbalance.
Abnormally Low PF 0.45 (lag or lead) of any of the phases indicative of phase sequence
mismatch in 3-phases.
Power on/off.
15.2
Events:-
1)
Over Voltage:- If any of the phase voltage is more than 110% of rated voltage & it is continuing
for more than 15 minutes, meter records over voltage as an event.
2)
Under Voltage:- The three line to neutral voltages shall be continuously monitored by individual
phase wise LED's, and in case any of these falls below 70%, the normally flashing lamp provided
on the meters front becomes steady. The time blocks in which such a voltage failure
occurs/persist shall also be recorded in the meter's memory. The lamp shall automatically
resume flashing when corresponding VT secondary voltage is healthy again. LCD indication are
15.1
1)
2)
3)
4)
also acceptable. The two VARh registers specified in clause-10 shall remain stay-put while VT
supply is unhealthy. This feature shall be recorded as an event.
16.0
17.0
18.0
19.0
The meters shall operate with the power drawn from the VT secondary circuits, without the need
for any auxiliary power supply. The total burden imposed by a meter for measurement and
operation shall not exceed 10 VA on any of the phases.
An automatic backup for the continued operation of the meter's calendar clock shall be provided
through a long life battery, which shall be capable of supplying the required power for atleast two
years. The meters shall be supplied duly fitted with the battery which shall not require to be
changed for atleast 10 years, as long as total VT supply interruption does not exceed two years.
The battery mounting shall be designed to facilitate easy battery replacement without affecting
PCB of meter.
Each meter shall have a built-in calendar and clock, having an accuracy of 30 seconds per month
or better. The calendar and clock shall be correctly set at the manufacturer's works. The date
(day-month-year) and time (hour-minute-second) shall be displayed on the meter front on
demand. Clock adjustment shall be possible at site using the Meter Reading Instrument (MRI) or
remotely using time synchronization signal through RS 485. For the purpose of getting the
standard time, the computer (s) from where the meter will be read shall be equipped with GPS
signal receiver. This computer and the GPS receiver, however, are not in the scope of this
specification. When an advance or retard command is given, six subsequent time blocks shall be
contracted or elongated by 10 seconds each. The meter shall not accept another clock correction
command for seven days. The meter time shall automatically be corrected every time the remote
computer interrogates it. All clock corrections shall be registered in the meter's memory and shall
be suitably shown on the print out of the collected data
Each meter shall have a unique identification code, which shall be marked permanently on the
front as well as in its memory. All meters supplied to HVPN, as per this specification shall have
their identification code starting with HVPN, which shall not be used for any other supply. HVPN
shall be followed by a dash and a four digit running serial number. The series of four digit running
serial no. indicating the unique identification code of each meter shall be provided by HVPN to
the successful bidder.
The measured value(s) shall be displayed through LED/back-lit LCD display with proper
identification for indication of the following (one at a time) on demand.
19.1
Meter Serial No.
19.2
Date (dd-mm-yy)
'd'
19.3
Time (hr-min-sec)
't'
19.4
Cumulative Wh reading
'c'
19.5
Average frequency of the previous 15-minute block
'F'
19.6
Net Wh transmittal in the previous 15-minute block, with +/- sign 'E'
19.7
Average percentage voltage
'U'
19.8
Reactive power (VAR) with +/- sign
'r'
19.9
Voltage high VARh register reading
'H'
19.10 Voltage-Low VARh register reading
'L'
19.11 Low Battery Indication
20.0
A keypad or scrolling facility shall be provided on the front of the meter for switching on the
display of the meter parameters selected and for changing from one indication to next.
21.(A) Meter shall have a non-volatile memory in which the following shall be automatically stored.
21.1
21.2
21.3
21.4
21.5
21.6
21.(B)
Average frequency for each successive 15-minute block upto second decimal/as a two-digit
code.
Net Wh transmittal during each successive 15-minute block upto second decimal/with plus minus
sign.
Cumulative Wh transmittal at each midnight in 7 digits including one decimal.
Cumulative VARh transmittal for voltage high condition, at each midnight in 7 digit including one
decimal.
Cumulative VARh transmittal for voltage low condition, at each midnight in 7 digit including one
decimal.
Date & time blocks of failure of VT supply on any phase, as a star (*) mark.
Battery backed memory shall not be accepted.
22.0
The meter shall store all the above listed data in their memories for a period of
The data older than 35 days shall get erased automatically.
23.0
CMRI/DCD: To ensure inter operability of system at the meter reading instrument end, the
common meter reading instrument (CMRI) or data collection devices (DCD) confirming to DOS
platform and having min. 16 MB memory shall be used to enable different manufacturers to
download into same hand held terminal & the meters of various makes to be read through the
same hand held terminal. Each CMRI shall be complete with:-
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
35 days.
a lead with optical head for coupling it to the meter,
a lead for plugging it to a personal computer;
an internal battery for powering the devices;
a case for safely carrying it about
a battery charger
The total arrangement shall be such that one (1) operation can carry out the whole operation, in
about five (5) minutes per meter.
Portable Meter Reading Instruments (MRI)/data collection devices (DCD) shall have a key for
starting the data tapping from the coupled meter’s memory, a key to start data transfer to the PC,
and a lamp, which would light up on completion of data collection, remain ‘on’ while the data is
held in the device and would go ‘off’ when all data has been transferred to the PC. Data tapping
operation from CMRI/DCD shall not erase the data from the meter’s memory, or effect the meter
operation in any way. The memory of the CMRI/DCD shall get automatically cleared when the
data has been transferred to the PC only then the CMRI/DCD shall accept data from another
meter. CMRI/DCDs shall also have necessary provision for meter clock correction. CMRI/ DCDs
shall be compatible with earlier supplied meters in regard to data downloading etc.
23.1
Each meter shall have an optical communication port compatible to RS 232 on its front for
tapping all data stored in its memory. In addition to the above each meter shall be provided with a
RS485 port on one of its sides, from where all the data stored in the meter’s memory can also be
tapped. Portable Meter Reading Instruments (MRI)/data collection devices (DCD) of SANDS,
ANALOGIC make have already been provided separately for this purpose, one for each SubStation, to serve as interface between the meters specified above and the local PC. Meter shall
be compatible with earlier supplied CMRI/DCD. Each meter shall be provided with a lead having
optical head for coupling the meter to CMRI/DCD.
23.2
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
Software Package: The existing metering system records all the parameters required for the
Availability Based Tariff. Suitable software for CMRI shall be provided by the bidder for smooth
downloading of the data to/ from the CMRI. For data analysis & billing, the different meter
manufacturers shall provide the meter reading software to interpret the data collected through
CMRI or through RS485 for conversion into a common ASCII format. The Data of the existing
meters is available in the specified ASCII Format; details of which are enclosed at Annexure-II
(Page1 to 3). A similar output in the same ASCII format (space delimited, fixed length values)
shall be made available from the new meters by the successful bidder for future use of data for
generation of BST & ABT Bills/Reports or any other purpose. In addition to this successful bidder
shall make provision to supply load survey data in Excel format as per Annexure-III.The supplier
shall provide above software which would enable a local PC to:accept the data from the CMRI and/or from a interface device connected to the optical port/RS485 port and store it in it’s memory in binary read only format.
Polling feature along with a task scheduler to run the data downloading software at a predesignated date and time repeatedly or by manually selecting a meter. A detailed activity log
shall also be available for each downloading operation.
Display the collected data on PC’s screen on demand as per annexure-II & III in text format, with
forward/backward rolling.
Print out in text format the data collected from one or more meters as per annexure-II & III,
starting from a certain date and time, as per operator’s instructions.
Transmit the collected data, in binary format, through an appropriate communication link to the
central computer, starting from a certain date and time, as per operator’s instructions.
Store the collected data, in binary format, on a floppy disc/CD/Pen drive/DVD.
The above software shall further ensure that absolutely no tampering (except total erasures) of
the collected metering data is possible during its handling by the PC. The software shall be
suitable for the commonly available PCs and shall be supplied to owner in a compatible form to
enable its easy loading into the PC’s available at the various Sub-Stations/Energy Accounting
Centre.
23.3
The overall intention is to tap the data stored in the meter memory at any time from any of the two
ports mentioned above and transmit same to a remote centre computer using communication
links, through the local PC. It should also be possible to obtain a print out (hard copy) of all data
collected from the meters, using the PC. The received/ downloaded meter data should be the
original output from the meter.
23.4
As a part of commissioning the Contractor shall load the software in the PCs at the respective
substations, and fully commission the total meter reading scheme. He shall also impart the
necessary instructions to substation engineers.
24.0
The whole system shall be such as to provide a print out (both from the local PC and the remote
central computer) of the following form:
23
55
+16.28
56
+15.95
55
+15.32
54
+15.66
55
+14.93
55
+14.26
54
+14.85
56
+15.17
HVPNL
****
12345.6
01234.5
00123.4
99-04-28
57
+14.72
56
+13.83
55
+13.57
53
+12.91
01
52
+13.34
51
+12.76
52
+14.11
52
+15.28
25.0
All the meters shall be identical in all respects except for their unique identification codes. They
shall also be totally sealed and tamper proof, with no possibility of adjustment at site except for a
restricted clock correction.
26.0
The meter shall safely withstand the usual fluctuations arising during faults in particular, VT
secondary voltage 115% of rated applied continuously and 190% of rated for 3 seconds and CT
secondary current 150% of rated applied continuously and 30 times of rated applied for 0.5
seconds, shall not cause any damage to or the mal-operation of the meters.
27.0
The meter shall continue to function for remaining healthy phase(s), in case of failure of one or
two phases of VT supply. In case of a complete VT supply failure, the computation of average
frequency (as per 8.0) shall be done only for the period during which the VT supply was available
in the 15-minute block. Any time block contraction or elongation for clock correction shall also be
duly accounted for.
28.0
The harmonics shall be filtered out while measuring the Wh, VAR and VARh and only
fundamental frequency quantities shall be measured or computed.
29.0
VOID
30.0
VOID
31.0
Every meter shall be indelibly marked with connection diagram showing the phase sequence for
which it is intended and shall be attached on the meters. In case of any special precautions need
to be taken at the time of testing the meter, the same shall be indicated alongwith the circuit
diagram.
32.0
VOID
33.0
Sealing arrangement: Sealing arrangement for meters and TTBs shall be provided as under:
33.1
TTBs: Each TTB shall have the provision for two seals.
33.2
Meters: Meter body or cover & meter terminal blocks shall be sealable including each optical
communication port.
34.0
The meters shall be supplied housed in compact and sturdy; metallic or moulded cases of nonrusting construction and/or finish. The cases shall be designed for simple mounting on a plane,
vertical surface such as a control/relay panel front. All terminals for CT and VT connections shall
be arranged in a row along the meter’s lowerside. Terminals shall have a suitable construction
with barriers and cover, to provide a secure and safe connection of CTs and VTs leads through
stranded copper conductors of 4.0 sq. mm. size.
The meters shall also withstand without any damage or maloperation reasonable mechanical
shocks, earthquake forces, ambient temperature variations, relative humidity etc. They shall have
an IP-51 category dust-tight construction, and shall be capable of satisfactory operation in an
indoor, non-air conditioned installation.
The contractor shall be responsible for total installation and commissioning of the meters
(alongwith test blocks, if supplied separately)as per Owner’s advice, including unpacking and
inspection on receipt at site, mounting the meters on existing control and relay panels at an
appropriate viewing height., connection of CT and VT circuits including any required rewiring
(however, supply & installation of 4cx4mm2 control cables (laid through 2.5’ dia HDD PVC Pipe)
from CT, VT to metering system are not in the scope of this specification), functional testing,
commissioning and handing over. The Contractor’s personnel shall procure/carry the necessary
tools, equipment, materials and consumables (including insulated wires, lugs, ferrules, hardware
etc.).
35.0
Inspection & Testing:
35.1
Type Tests:
The meter should be fully type tested as per IS 14697 for Indian Manufacturers or IEC-62053-22
(2003) & IEC-62053-23 (2003) for foreign manufacturers.
35.2
Routine Tests:
All Routine tests as per IS 14697 shall be carried out by the supplier on the meters for
compliance in both directions of power flow.
35.3
Acceptance Tests:
All equipment, after final assembly and before despatch from manufacturer's works shall be duly
tested as per IS 14697 for compliance in both directions of power flow in presence of purchaser's
representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the purchaser. In addition, the following
acceptance tests shall also be conducted:1. Functional checks for display and memory.
2. Accuracy of voltage and frequency measurement.
All DCDs/MRIs after final assembly and before dispatch from Manufacturer’s works shall be duly
tested to verify that they are suitable for supply to the purchaser. In particular, each and every
DCD/MRI shall be subjected to the following acceptance test:1. Functional checks
2. Downloading Meter Data from the Meter(s).
3. Compatibility with PC software
4. Downloading the meter data on PC
5. Functioning of advance and retard time commands.
6. Per meter downloading time verification
7. Capacity of DCD/MRI for data storage.
36.0
Quality Assurance
The quality control procedure to be adopted during installation of the specified equipment shall
be mutually discussed and finalized in due course, generally based on the established and
proven practices.
37.0
Any meter, which fails to fully comply with the specification requirements, shall be liable to be
rejected by the purchaser.
38.0
VOID
39.0
39.1.1
Following technical information shall be furnished by the bidders in their
offers.:
The prospective bidder shall be required to submit complete type test reports
from Govt.
approved laboratory alongwith bid. The type test reports shall not be
more than seven years
old reckoned from the date of opening of part-1 tender.
39.2
Guaranteed Technical Particulars as per Annexure-I.
40.0
SERVICE CONDITIONS
Equipment to be supplied against this specification shall be suitable for satisfactory continuous
operation under the following tropical conditions:i. Location
IN THE STATE OF HARYANA
ii. Max. ambient air temp (0C)
50
iii. Min. ambient air temp (0C)
-2.5
iv. Maximum Relative humidity (%)
100
v. Minimum Relative humidity (%)
26
vi. Average annual rainfall (mm)
900
vii. Max. wind pressure (Kg/sq.m.)
195
viii. Max. altitude above mean sea level
1000
(meters)
ix. Isoceraunic level (days/year)
50
x. Seismic level (horizontal acceleration)
0.3g
Note: Moderately hot and humid tropical climate conducive to rust and fungus growth. The climatic
conditions are also prone to wide variations in ambient conditions. Smoke is also present in the
atmosphere. Heavy lightening also occur during June to October.
Annexure-I
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS FOR THREE-PHASE FOUR WIRE CLASS
0.2S ACCURACY POWER MONITORING SYSTEM.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Maker’s name and country
Type of Meter/Model
Standards to which the meter conform
Accuracy class
Parameters measured
P.F. Range
Overload capacity
Variation of voltage at which system function normally
Minimum starting current
MD reset provisions
Reset count
No. of digits of display
Particulars of readout by CMRI
Non volatile memory retention time in absence of
power
Memory capacity (kb)
Demand integration period
Pulse output for each meters
Metrology indicator for each meters
Communication capability on
a. Local port
b. Remote port
Load survey parameters
Power Consumption per phase
i) Voltage circuit.
ii) Current circuit.
Self diagnostics features, if any (Provide details)
Principle of operation (Provide details)
Foreseen dimensions of proposed meter.
Expected weight of proposed meter
Foreseen dimensions of DCD/MRI.
Expected weight of DCD/MRI.
Dimensions and weight of the test block, if supplied
separately.
Annexure-G
TYPICAL ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING
OF
SUBSTATION AUTOMATION SYSTEM
Router
HMI View Node
Gateway
Station HMI
GPS
DR Work Station
Redundant Managed
Ethernet Station Bus
Clock
IEC 61850
IEC 61850
Switch
for Dia
1
Switch
for Dia.
3
Switch
for Dia.
2
Switch
for Dia.
N
Fibre optic
Connection
IEC 61850
IEDs for
Control &
protection
IEDs for
Control &
protection
IEDs for
Control &
protection
IEDs for
Control &
protection
Note:
1. The redundant managed bus shall be realized by high speed optical bus using
industrial grade components and shall be as per IEC 61850.
2. (Applicable only for 400 kV and 220 kV substations): The IEDs and
switches for each of the dia. of 765kV and 400kV shall have separate kiosk. For
220kV, 132kV, 66kV yards, IEDs for two adjacent bays can be housed in one
Kiosk along with its switch. For 220/33kV T/F, IEDs for four adjacent 33kV bays
can be housed in one Kiosk along with its switches and For 132/33kV T/F, IEDs
for all 33kV bays of a T/F can be housed in one Kiosk along with its switches.
Note: For 132 kV and 66 kV substations the control and relay panels shall
be housed in the control room building itself.
3. Inside the sub-station, all connections shall be realized as per IEC 61850
protocol.
4. For gateway, it shall communicate with Remote Supervisory Control Centre
(RSCC) on IEC 60870-5-101 protocol.
5. The router to Remote Control Centre (RCC) shall communicate on IEC 608705-101 protocol.
6. The printer as required shall be connected to station bus directly and can be
managed either from station HMI, HMI view node or disturbance recorder work
station.
33
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-5 Chapter-5 SAS Arch..doc
SECTION-6
CHAPTER 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 415
VOLTS L.T. SWITCH BOARDS.
1. SCOPE :
This specification covers design, Engineering, manufacture, stage testing, inspection
and testing before despatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of 415 Volts AC LT
Switch Board complete with all fittings, accessories and associated auxiliary equipment
mandatory spares as per Volume II which are required for efficient and trouble free
operation as specified hereunder.
It is not the intent to specify herein all the details of design and construction of
equipments. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to the high standards
of engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in
continuous commercial operation up to the Bidder’s guarantee in a manner acceptable
to the Purchaser. The equipment offered shall be complete with all components
necessary for its effective and trouble free operation along with associated equipment,
interlocks protection schemes etc. irrespective of whether those are specially brought
out in this specification and commercially added or not. All similar parts particularly
movable ones shall be interchangeable.
1.02
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :
The equipment is required to operate satisfactorily under the following site conditions:i.
ii.
iii.
Max. Temperature
Min. Temperature
Relativehumidity
a) Max.
b) Min.
iii.
Average number of rainy days per annum
iv. Average rain fall per year.
v.
Average number of dust storm days per annum
vi. Isoceraunic level
vii. Max. Wind pressures
viii. Altitude above mean sea level
500C
-2.50C
100%
26%
Nearly 120 days
900 mm
35
45
195 kg/sqmt.
Less than 1000 mt.
1.03
STANDARDS:
The metal clad (preferably sheet metal) air break switch to be supplied against this
Specification shall meet with the requirements laid down in IS-4064-1978 (part I & II)
(latest edition). The HRC fuses shall comply with the Is-2208-1962 (latest amended). All
other equipments shall also comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the
respective Indian Standards.
1.04
MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP:
All the materials used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best quality
obtainable of their respective kinds and whole of the work shall be of the highest class,
well finished and of approved design and make of the true form and dimensions.
All machined surfaces shall be true and smooth and well finished.
1.05
INTER CHANGEABILITY:
Corresponding parts of plant and equipment shall be made to gauge or jig and shall be
interchangeable in every respect.
1.06
DOCUMENTATION
The successful bidder shall submit four sets of drawings for HVPNL approval.
NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping the
approval of drawings by HVPNL.
1.07
1.08
FOUNDATIONS AND FIXINGS:
All plants and equipment shall be provided with a complete set of foundation holding
down bolts, washers, nuts plants and other fixtures as may be required and these shall
be supplied by the contractor. These fittings will be fixed by the purchaser on the
foundations unless otherwise specified.
INSTRUCTION AND MARKING PLATES:
All gauge meters, instruments etc. shall have dials or scales calibrated in metric system
of units. All name plates, instruction plate, warning signs and any marking what-so-ever
on the equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in Hindi-English Language,
using idioms, words and meaning as in current use in India.
In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site every part of the plant and equipment
shall be suitably marked.
1.09
PAINTING
The whole of the plant except bright parts, valves and such portions as are finished shall
be painted with two painting coats of approved rust resisting paint in plain colours for
packing and the parts not so painted shall be protected from deterioration during transit.
All the ferrous parts shall be painted with battle ship grey paint by means of spray
painting. The painting should be as per relevant ISS. All the non ferrous parts including
the bus bars, thimbles, jumpers shall be tinned plated and sleeves of proper thickness
and size shall be provided on all the jumpers. After erection at site every painted part
shall be well cleaned filed and chopped and shall then receive two coats of best oil paint
of approved colour, to be supplied by the contractor without any extra cost.
1.10 TESTS:
1.10.1 TYPE TEST
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven
years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in
accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed
by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to
HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
1.10.2 Routine Test
As per quality assurance program (QAP).
1.10.3 Acceptance Test
The following acceptance tests shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of
HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.
i) Dimensional test
ii) Continuity test
iii) Insulation resistance test
iv) High voltage test
v) Inter locking test
1.11
INSTRUCTION BOOKS:
Applicable parts, lists, catalogues and operating instructions in English Language
specially prepared to cover all the equipment furnished under this specification which
may be needed or prove useful in operation, maintenance, repair, dismantling or
assembling and for the repair and identification of parts for ordering replacements shall
be assembled under a common cover and submitted in duplicate for each unit to the
purchaser free of cost.
1.12
REPRODUCIBLE DRAWINGS:
The contractor shall supply two sets of full size reproducible drawings (approved by the
purchaser) along with detailed drawings of various major components/accessories etc.
(showing sectional views, wherever necessary) on oil cloth to prove useful in the
erection, operation maintenance and repair of the equipment. He shall also supply
twenty sets of azo prints of the above mentioned drawings for use in field and design
offices.
1.13
PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM:
The equipment shall be suitable for 415 Volts 50 cycles, 3 Phase 4 wire system with
neutral solidly earthed.
1.14
RISE IN TEMPERATURE:
The equipment shall be operated at maximum ambient temperature of 500C and as such
the temperature rise of its parts should be proportionately below the figure provided in
respective standards.
1.15
EACH SWITCH SHALL COMPRISE OF:
Metal clad floor mounting combination fuse switch board consisting of a suitable bus bar
of 320 Amps rating for 15 Ckts. Triple pole and neutral bus bar chamber, mounted on a
high floor stand arranged and equipped for the circuits given in the schedule of
requirement and mounted above and below the bus bar chamber to form a suitable
arrangement. The bus bar chamber shall have provision for adding two more switch
units as given in the schedule at a later date. The switches shall be quick make and
break type.
The switch boards shall be installed indoors. The enclosing chambers shall be dust-tight
and vermin proof.
All equipments shall be suitable for reception of Alumiium cable rising from the ground.
The details of equipment required for each switch board has been given in the schedule
of requirement.
1.16
BUS BARS:
The bus shall be made of high conductivity copper or Aluminium and shall have
adequate cross section so as to be capable of carrying 300 Amps in phase and 150
Amps. in neutral.
The bus bar shall be so designed and mounted in the separate chamber such that their
expansion or contraction does not subject either the bus bars or their insulation supports
to any stresses.
The bus bar shall be properly spaced so as to provide easy access during maintenance
and inspection etc. There should be no joints in the bus bars.
The current density for copper and aluminium bus bars must not exceed 1 A/cm2 and 87
A/cm2 respectively.
1.17
CONNECTIONS:
All the connections for the tee’s from the bus bars shall be bolted type and suitable
spring washers shall be provided to ensure proper jointing and material of the bolts shall
be of suitable metal. All the connections shall be provided with thimbles of suitable
rating.
1.18
METERING EQUIPMENT
Metering equipment for the station transformer/Incomer shall be located between the
L.T. side of the transformer and L.T. Bus Bars. The metering equipment shall include
300/5 Amps C.T.s having burden 15 VA with accuracy class 1 and 3 phase 4wire
unbalanced load integrating electronic KWH meter. A 100 mm dial flush mounted MISC
(moving iron spring controlled) Voltmeter and a 100 mm dial flush mounted MISC
ammeter both with phase selector switch shall also be provided on each switchboard to
indicate the bus bar voltage and total load on the station transformer/Incomer feeder. All
the meters shall be enclosed in separate chamber to have a flush pattern type
appearance. The meters shall be dust tight.
1.19
EARTHING
Two separate earths shall be run and each and every metallic parts of the
stand/switches/bus bar chambers shall be earthed at two different places independently.
The size of the earthing conductor for the switches and individual parts shall not be less
than No. 8 SWG copper conductor and size of the main for earthing shall not be less
than No. 3 SWG copper conductor.
1.20
BUS BAR CHAMBER
The bus bar chamber shall be made out of angle iron of suitable size as specified below
along with other details: a)
Thickness of sheet steel enclosures, doors, covers
i)
Cold rolled
2mm minimum
ii)
Hot rolled
+2.5mm minimum
b)
Degree of protection
c)
Colour finish shade
i)
Interior
ii)
Exterior
IP-54 as per BS2817/IEC-144
Glossy white
Light grey
Semi glossy shade
d)
Earthing bus material size
Copper 25x6 mm
e)
Purchaser’s earthing conductor
Material
Size
Clearance in air of live parts
Galvanised steel
f)
30x6 mm
1.21
i)
ii)
LABELS:
Phase to Phase
Phase to earth
80 mm
80 mm
Each switch shall be provided with suitable labels paginated on hard plastic sheet and
duly held in boss framed of the size 75x50 mm for the incoming and outgoing feeders.
The hard plastic sheet shall be of white colour and will be painted in black for the
outgoing feeders whereas it shall be painted bright red for the incoming feeders.
1.22
INTERLOCKING
Interlocks must be provided to ensure that the switch cover cannot be opened when the
switch is in the closed position. It should however be possible for competent examiner to
over ride this interlock and operate the switch with enclosure open.
1.23
FIRE HAZARDS
The switch and its associated apparatus shall be arranged to minimize fire hazards.
1.24
CLEARANCES
The clearances between phases and between phases and earth shall be as per IS3072-1975 with latest amendments.
1.25
CONTACTS
All live contacts of the switch shall be adequately shrouded to prevent accidental contact
when the equipment is either in the isolated or normal closed position and shall be silver
plated of suitable thickness. The fixed contacts of the fuse switch unit shall be fully
shrouded with arc resistant material. Material needs to be specified in the tender.
1.26
CABLE AND BOXES:
a) The incoming switch and outgoing switches shall be provided with cable and boxes
of suitable size capacity and rating suitable for PVC cables. Suitable cleating
arrangement shall also be provided for the cables entering the switch fuse units in
the top tier.
The cabling arrangement shall be such that cables outgoing from Isolator unit can be
connected or disconnected easily and safely.
1.27
RUPTURING CAPACITY
The rupturing capacity of the bus bar switchgear/cartridges shall not be lower than 2
MVA at 415 volts.
1.28
The individual fuse switch unit shall be provided in such a way that they can be removed
from the front of the switch board for servicing and maintenance.
1.29
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
MARKING
All the switches shall be clearly marked with the following particulars: Reference to the standard.
Rated voltage.
Rated normal current.
Rated marking capacity.
Breaking capacity.
Type of fuse/links to be used.
Name plate.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.30
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
1.31
Supplier name.
Purchaser
P.O. No.
Rating.
Serial no.
Year of manufacturing.
OTHER PARTICULARS
The Bidder should clearly furnish the following information in their offer: Material and plating of the contacts.
Current density assumed.
Temperature rise under continuous full load over the ambient temp. of 500C.
Temperature rise under short circuit condition.
Guaranteed Technical particulars as required in appendix-A.
List of references if similar L.T. Switch Board already in service/supplied with
complete details shall be furnished.
ANNEXURE ‘A’
SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS
A.
132kV & 66kV Sub-Stations
415 V 3 Phase 4 wire L.T. Switch Board comprising of 15 circuits TP & N switch fuse units
consisting of two incomer of 320 A, 1 voltmeter (0-500V) with suitable CTs and selector switch
and 13 Nos. circuits of outgoing switchgear units and HRC fuses having the following ratings
for 132kV & 66kV S/Stns.
Sr.
No.
L.T.Feeders
1.
Incoming from Station transformer
Switch
rating
(Amps)
320
2.
Alternate Source
320
300
1
3.
Oil filtration set feeder
200
160
1
4.
Colony lighting feeder
160
100
1
5.
Yard lighting feeder
160
100
1
6.
Transformer fans & OLTC feeder
100
63
1
7.
Breakers operation feeder
32
25
1
8.
Outdoor street lighting feeder
32
25
1
9.
Water pump and sewerage pump
63
50
1
10.
Carrier room
32
25
1
11.
Battery charger
32
25
1
12.
Control panel indicator
32
25
1
13.
Spare feeder
160
100
1
14.
Provision for additional switch fuse unit
15.
To be mounted at a later stage.
TOTAL
Fuse
rating No.
(Amps)
(Amps)
300
1
15 Nos.
NOTES:
1. Each circuit as indicated above shall have switch rating, HRC fuse rating and LT feeder
labeling as mentioned against each. It shall include bus bar connections, terminals, cable
glands and cable lugs etc.
2. Each Incomer shall be provided with the following equipment:
i)
One 100mm dial flush mounting moving iron spring controlled (MISC) ammeter of
scale of 0-300A with phase selector switch.
ii)
One No. 100 mm dial flush mounting MISC voltmeter of range 0-500V with phase
selector switch.
iii)
3 Nos. 300/5A CTs having burden 15 VA and accuracy class 1 and instrument
security factor.
iv)
One 3 phase , 4 wire unbalanced load integrating watt hour meter (operatable on
300/5A CTs).
v)
TTB for LT CT meter.
3. Make of each component must be listed in bid..
4. The bus bar shall be designed for 320 A for phase and 150 A for neutral.
SECTION-6
CHAPTER-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
220V (600AH / 200AH & 100AH) AND
48V (800AH / 300AH & 120AH) BATTERY BANKS
1.0
SCOPE:
The scope of this specification covers design, manufacture, assembly, supply,
testing at works, packing, forwarding, dispatch of VRLA batteries along with
necessary accessories, fittings etc. to the destination.
These equipments are to be complete in every respect, details to the functions
designated to the entire satisfaction of the purchaser. It is required that the
supplier accepting the contract agrees to furnish all apparatus, appliances and
material whether specifically mentioned or not but which may be found
necessary to complete, to perform and testing any of the herein specified
equipment (s) for compliance with the requirements implied without extra
charges. The erection/maintenance tools and specific tools if any will also form
part of supply.
2.0
General Technical Requirement
All the materials/components used in Battery Chargers and Valve Regulated
Lead Acid Battery (VRLA) shall be free from flaws and defects and shall
conform to relevant standards and good engineering practices:-
2.0.1 For 400 KV Sub-stations, DC System shall consist of two (2) battery sets for
each of 220V and 48V systems respectively.
2.0.2 For 220 KV, 132 KV & 66 KV sub-stations, DC System shall consist of two (2)
float-cum-boost charger and one (1) battery set for each of 220V and for 48V
system. DC scheme shall consists of one (1) battery.
2.0.3 Bidder shall select number of cells, float and Boost voltage to achieve following
requirement :
System
Voltage
220 Volt
48 Volt
2.1
Maximum Voltage
during Float
Operation
242 Volt
52.8 Volt
Minimum voltage available
when no charger working
and battery fully discharged
up to 1.85 V per cell.
198 Volt
43.2 Volt
Minimum
Nos of Cell
107
23
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
The equipment to be supplied against the specification shall be suitable for
satisfactory continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:
Max. ambient air temperature
500 C
Max. daily average ambient temperature
450 C
Max. yearly weighted ambient temperature
350 C
Min. air temperature
(-) 50 C
Max. humidity
100%
Min. relative humidity
26 %
Average number of thunder storm days per annum
40
Average annual rain fall
15 cm to 100 cm.
Number of months during which tropical monsoon
conditions prevail altitude above MSL
4 months (June to
Sept). Varies from 61 meters
to 815.00 mtrs.
Average number of rainly days per annum.
120 days
Seismic level (Horizontal acceleration)
0.3g.
Degree of pollution
Heavy
Intensity of solar radiation
1.0 KW/sq.m.
Max. Wind load
195 kg/sq.m.
3.0 Battery
3.1 Type
The DC Batteries shall be Normal Discharge type Valve Regulated Lead Acid
(VRLA) and shall conform to IS 15549: 2004/IEC 60896-21 & 22, 2004
standard. These shall be factory filled, charged & suitable for a long life under
continuous float operations and occasional discharges. The 220 V DC systems
should be unearthed and 48V DC system is Positive Earth system.
Battery sets shall be capable of operating at a peak ambient temperature of 50
Deg.C. The offered battery shall be compact and shall require no maintenance.
All safety equipment required for installation shall be provided by the
manufacturer.
3.2 Constructional Requirement
Plates:
Positive plates shall be made of flat pasted type using high corrosion resistant
alloy for durability, maintenance free, long life both in cyclic as well as in float
applications. The Grids are of Semi Radial Squarish grid to reduce internal
Resistance and travel current in shorter time.
Negative plates shall be heavy duty, durable flat plate using lead alloy pasted
Semi Radial Squarish Grid. Negative plates shall be designed to match the life
of positive plates and combination of positive and negative plates shall ensure
long life, durability and trouble free operation of battery.
Computer controlled/PLC operated in house equipment should be deployed for
preparation of lead oxide and paste to ensure consistency in paste quality &
properties. Conventional / manual type of paste preparation will not be allowed.
3.3 Containers & Lids
The container & lids shall be made of polypropylene Copolymer material and
shall have chemical and electro-chemical compatibility along with acid resistant
and shall conform to UL-94/ ASTM-D-2863 standard. The material shall meet all
the requirements of VRLA batteries and be consistent with the life of battery.
The porosity of the container shall be such as not to allow any gases to escape
except from the regulation valve.
The tensile strength of the material of the container shall be such as to handle
the internal cell pressure of the cells in the worst working condition.
The container shall be capable of withstanding the rigours of transport, storage
and handling. The containers shall be enclosed in a steel tray.
For identification each cell / module shall be marked in a permanent manner to
Indicate the Following information.
I. Cell Serial number.
II. Positive and Negative is embossed on the cover
III. Month and Year of manufacturing.
3.4
Cell Covers
The cell covers shall be made of suitable material compatible with the container
material and permanently fixed with container by Hermetic Heat Sealing
technique. It shall be capable to withstand internal pressure without bulging or
cracking. Fixing of pressure regulation Valve & terminals posts in the cover shall
be such that the seepage of electrolyte, gas escapes and entry of electrostatic
spark are prevented.
3.5. Separators
The separators used in manufacturing of battery cells shall be spun glass micro
porous Matrix having high acid absorption capability & resistant to battery grade
Sulphuric acid along with good insulating properties. Sufficient separator overlap
and PVC shield protection to bottom edges of the plates is to be provided to
prevent short circuit formation between the edges of adjacent plates.
3.6. Pressure Regulation Valve
Each cell shall be provided with a pressure regulation valve. The valve shall be
self re-sealable. The vent plug shall be made with suitable grade of fire retardant
plastic material. Each valve opening shall be covered with flame barrier capable in
preventing the ingress of flame into the cell interior when the valve opens and
hydrogen / oxygen gas mixture is released. The valve unit shall be such that it
cannot be opened without a proper tool.
3.7. Terminal Posts
Both the Positive and Negative terminals of the cells shall be capable of proper
termination and shall ensure its consistency with the life of battery. The terminals
shall have adequate solid copper core cross-section to avoid overheating at
maximum current load. The surface of the terminal post extending above the cell
cover including bolt hole shall be coated with an acid resistant and corrosion
retarding material. Terminal posts or any other metal part which is in contact with
the electrolyte shall be made of the same alloy as that of the plates or of a
proven material that does not have any harmful effect on cell performance. Both
Positive and negative terminal posts of VRLA Battery shall be colored Red and
Black to make it unambiguously identifiable.
3.8. Connectors, Nuts & Bolts, Heat Shrinkable Sleeves
The connectors shall be non corroding lead coated copper of suitable size to
enable connections of cells. Copper connections shall be suitably lead coated to
withstand corrosion due to Sulphuric acid/fumes.
Nuts and bolts for connecting the cells shall be made of stainless steel with good
acid resistant characteristics. All inter cell connectors shall be protected with heat
shrinkable silicon sleeves for reducing the environmental impact including a
corrosive environment.
3.9. Flame Arrestors
Each cell shall be equipped with a Flame Arrestor to defuse the Hydrogen gas
escaped during charge and discharge. Material of the flame arrestor shall not
affect the performance of the cell.
3.10. Battery Bank Stand
All batteries shall be mounted in a suitable metallic stand/frame. The frame shall
be powdered coated with acid resistant paint (2 coats) and should have
protection against fungus growth and other harmful effect due to tropical
environment. The suitable insulation shall be provided between stand/frame and
floor to avoid the grounding of the frame/stand. The joining of the frames should
not leave crevices and ensure proper and tight fit.
3.11. Capacity Requirements
When the battery is discharged at 10 hour rate, it shall deliver 80% of C (rated
capacity, corrected at 27º Celsius) before any of the cells in the battery
bank reaches 1.85V/cell.
The battery shall be capable of being recharged from the fully exhausted
condition (1.75V/cell) within 10 hrs up to 90% state of charge. All the cells in a
battery shall be designed for continuous float operation at the specified float
voltage throughout the life.
The capacity (corrected at 27ºCelcius) shall also not be less than C and not more
than 120% of C before any cell in the battery bank reaches 1.75V/cell. The
battery voltage shall not be less than the following values, when a fully charged
battery is put to discharge at C/10 rate:
(a) After Six minutes of discharge: 1.98V/cell
(b) After Six hours of discharge: 1.92V/cell
(c) After 8 hours of discharge: 1.85V/cell
(d) After 10 hours of discharge: 1.75V/cell
Loss in capacity during storage at an average ambient temperature of 35º Celsius
for a period of 6 months shall not be more than 60% and the cell/battery shall
achieve 85% of its rated capacity within 3 charge/discharge cycles and full rated
capacity within 5 cycles, after the storage period of 6 months. Voltage of each cell
in the battery set shall be within 0.05V of the average voltage throughout
the storage period. Ampere hour efficiency shall be better than 90% and watt
hour efficiency shall be better than 80%.
3.12. Expected Battery Life
The battery shall be capable of giving 1200 or more charge/discharge cycles at
80% Depth of discharge (DOD) at an average temperature of 27º C.
DOD (Depth of Discharge) is
defined as the ratio of the quantity of
electricity (in Ampere-Hour) removed from a cell or battery on discharge to its
rated capacity.
The battery sets shall have a minimum expected life of 20 years at float
operation.
3.13. Accessories along with Battery System
Each battery shall be supplied with following accessories and devices:
a) Torque Wrench.
b) Cell Test Voltmeter (-3-0-+ 3) Volts with least count of 0.01 Volt
3.14. Type Test of Battery
The contractor/Supplier shall supply type tested battery per IS 15549: 2004/IEC
60896-21 & 22 over the range of at least one capacity per design and should
have met requirement of Service Life test as per above stated IEC standards
within last seven years. The Contractor/Supplier shall submit necessary
evidences enclosed along with tender documents.
Sr.No
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Description
Gas Emission
High Current Tolerance
Short Circuit Current and DC internal resistance
Protection against internal ignition from external spark source
Protection against ground short propensity
Content & durability of required marking
Material Identification
Valve Operation
Flammability Rating of material
Intercell connector performance
Discharge Capacity
Charge Retention during storage
Float Service with daily discharge for reliable mains power
Recharge behavior
Service life at an operating temperature of 400 C for brief
duration exposure time
Impact of stress temperature of 60oC for brief duration
exposure time with 3 hours discharge test
Abusive Over discharge
Thermal runway sensitivity
Low temperature sensitivity
Dimensional sensitivity at elevated internal pressure &
temperature
Stability against mechanical abuse of units during installation
Test shall be conducted in accordance with IEC 60896-21 & 22,2004
3.14.1 Routine Test of Battery
1. Physical examination test
2. Visual Inspection
3. Dimensions, Mass & Layout
4. Marking & Packing
3.14.2 Acceptance Test of Battery
1. Polarity Marking
2. Verification of Dimensions
3. Test of AH Capacity.
3.15. List of Factory & Site Tests for Battery
Sr.No
Test
Factory Tests
1
2
Physical Verification
C/10 Capacity test on the cell
Yes
Site Tests
Yes
3.16. Installation and Commissioning
Manufacturer of battery shall supervise the installation as recommended in O&M
manual/or relevant standards. All necessary instruments, materials, tools and
tackles required for installation, testing at site and commissioning are to
arranged by battery manufacturer/Contractors.
4.0 MARKING AND PACKING:
4.1 MARKING:
The following information shall be indeligibly and durably marked on the outside
of the cell.
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Nominal Voltage
Manufacturer’s name, type and trade name.
AH capacity at 10 hour rate.
Voltage for float operation at 20 deg. C with tolerance of (+/-) 1%.
Month & year of manufacturer
Country of origin.
S.No. of cell/cell No.
4.1.1
The cells and batteries may also be marked with the ISI certification mark, if
any.
4.2 PACKING:
The cells shall be suitably packed so as to avoid any loss or damage during
transit.
5.0 INSTRUCTION MANUAL:
The manufacturer shall supply one copy of instructions manual for initial charging
(if required)/treatment, and routine maintenance during service, with each and
every battery set. The manufacturer shall supply 5 copies of instructions manual
to the purchaser.
The following information shall be provided on, the instruction cards.
a) Designation of cell or battery
b) Ampere hour capacity.
c) Nominal voltage
d) Manufacturer’s instructions for charging
e) Voltage for float operation at 20 deg.C with tolerance (+/-) 1%.
f) Maintenance instructions
g) Environmental & safety provisions required.
6.0 TESTS:
All the acceptance tests as per relevant standards mentioned shall be carried out
for batteries in presence of our inspecting officer free of cost. Type test
certificates (not older than 7 years from the date of opening of tender) are to be
submitted for approval of purchaser.
7.0 DRAWINGS:
The tenderer will submit the detailed dimensional drawings for battery sets
including stands.
8.0 TYPE TEST CERTIFICATES:
The tenderer will submit the complete type test certificates as per relevant
standards mentioned (not older than 7 years from the date of opening of tender)
for battery sets with their tenders, without which the offers are likely to be
ignored.
9.0 GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICUALRS:
Guaranteed Technical Particualrs for battery sets as per Annexure-A attached
shall be furnished along with the tender.
10.0 ACCESSORIES:
Each battery set shall be supplied complete with all necessary accessories viz.
stand, inter connections, cell no. Plates with sticker, multi meter complete with
leads, spanners.
11.0 BILL OF MATERIAL:
The firm shall also have to furnish the bill of material used in battery set.
SECTION-6
CHAPTER-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR220V DC BATTERY CHARGER WITH 20AMP.
FLOAT AND 30AMP. BOOST
1.
Battery Charger
The DC system for 220V DC is unearthed. The Battery Chargers as well as their
automatic regulators shall be of static type and shall be compatible with VRLA
batteries. All battery chargers shall be capable of continuous operation at the
respective rated load in float charging mode, i.e. Float charging the associated LeadAcid Batteries at 2.13 to 2.27 Volts per cell while supplying the DC load. The chargers
shall also be capable of Boost charging the associated DC battery at 2.28 to 2.32
volts per cell at the desired rate.
Charger shall regulate the float/boost voltage in case of prescribed temperature rise
of battery as per manufacturer’s recommendation to avoid thermal runaway.
Necessary temperature sensors shall be provided in mid location of battery banks
and shall be wired up to the respective charger for feedback control. The
manufacturer shall demonstrate this feature during testing of each charger.
Each of the two chargers in this float-cum-boost charger for float mode & for boost
mode shall be provided with independent transformer & associated circuitary.
1.1
The battery chargers shall be provided with facility for both automatic and manual
control of output voltage and current. A selector switch shall be provided for selecting
the mode of output voltage/current control, whether automatic or manual. When on
automatic control mode during float charging the chargers output voltage shall remain
within + 1% of the set value, for AC input voltage variation of + 1% frequency
variation of + 5% a combined voltage and frequency variation of + 1% and a DC load
variation from zero to full load.
1.2
All battery chargers shall have a constant voltage characteristics throughout the
range (from zero to full load) at the floating value of the voltage so as to keep the
battery fully charged but without harmful overcharge.
All chargers shall have load limiters having drooping characteristics, which shall
cause, when the voltage control is in automatic mode, a gradual lowering of the
output voltage whet eh DC load current exceeds the Load limiter setting of the
Charger. The Load-limiter characteristics shall be such that any sustained overload or
short circuit in DC system shall not charge the Charger nor shall it cause blowing of
any of the Charger fuses. The Charger shall not trip on overload or external short
circuit.
Uniform and step less adjustments of voltage setting (in both manual and automatic
modes) shall be provided on the front of the Charger panel covering the entire float
charging output range specified. Step less adjustments of the Load-limiter setting
shall also be possible from 80% to 100% of the rated output current for Charging
mode.
During Boot Charging, the Battery Charger shall operate on constant current mode
(when automatic regulator is in service). It shall be possible to adjust the Boost
charging current continuously over a range of 50 to 100% of the rated output current
for Boost charging mode.
1.3
1.4
1.5
-1-
The Charger output voltage shall automatically go on rising, when it is operating on
Boost mode, as the Battery Chargers up. For limiting the output voltage of the
Charger, a potentiometer shall be provided on the front of the panel, whereby it shall
be possible to set the upper limit of this voltage any where in the output range
specified for Boost Charging mode
1.6
The Charger manufacturer may offer an arrangement in which the voltage setting
device for Float charging mode is also used as output voltage limit setting device for
Boost charging mode and the Load-limiter of Float charging mode is used as current
setting device in boost charging mode.
1.7
Suitable filter circuits shall be provided in all the chargers to limit the ripple content (
Peak to Peak) in the output voltage to 1% irrespective of the DC load level, when
they are not connected to a battery.
1.8
The charger shall be capable of delivering 20A in float mode & 30A in boost mode
separately at rated voltage.
1.9
MCCB
All Battery Chargers shall have 2 Nos. MCCBs on the input side to receive cables
from two sources. Mechanical interlock should be provided such that only one shall
be closed at a time. It shall be of P2 duty and suitable for continuous duty MCCB’s
should have auxiliary contacts for annunciation.
1.10
Rectifier Transformer
The rectifier transformer shall be continuously rated, dry air cooled (A.N) an of class F
insulation type. The rating of the rectifier transformer shall have 10% overload
capacity.
1.11
Rectifier Assembly
The rectifier assembly shall be fully/half controlled bridge type and shall be designed
to meet the duty as required by the respective charger. The rectifier shall be provided
with heat sink having their own heat dissipation arrangements with natural air cooling.
Necessary surge protection devices and rectifier type test acting HRC fuses shall be
provided in each arm of the rectifier connections.
1.12
Instruments
One AC voltmeter and one AC ammeter along with selector switches shall be
provided for all chargers. One DC voltmeter and DC ammeter (with shunt) shall be
provided for all chargers. The instruments shall be flush type, dust proof and moisture
resistant. The instruments shall have easily accessible means for zero adjustment.
The instruments shall be of 15 accuracy class. In addition to the above a centre zero
voltmeter with selector switch shall also be provided for 220 V Chargers for testing
purpose.
-2-
1.13
Air Break Switches
One DC output switch shall be provided in all chargers. They shall be air break type
suitable for 500 Volts AC/ 250 DC. The contacts of the switches shall open and close
with a snap action. The operating handle of the switch shall be fully insulated from
circuit. ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ position on the switch shall be clearly indicated. Rating of
switches shall be suitable for their continuous load. Alternatively, MCCB’s of suitable
ratings shall also acceptable in place of Air Break Switch.
1.14
Fuses
All fuses shall be HRC Link type. Fuses shall be mounted on fuse carriers which are
in turn mounted on fuse bases. Wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on carriers,
fuses shall be directly mounted on plug-in type base. In such case one insulated fuse
pulling handle shall be supplied for each charger. Fuse rating shall be chosen by the
Bidder depending on the circuit requirement. All fuses in the chargers shall be
monitored. Fuse failure annunciation shall be provided on the failure of any fuse.
1.15
Blocking Diode
Blocking diode shall be provided in the positive pole of the output circuit of each
charger to prevent current flow from the DC battery into the charger.
1.16
Annunciation System
Audio-visual indications through bright LEDs shall be provided in all Chargers for the
following abnormalities:a)
AC Power failure.
b)
Rectifier/chargers fuse blown.
c)
Over voltage across the battery when boost charging.
d)
Abnormal voltage (High/Low)
e)
Any other annunciation if required
Potential free NO contacts of above abnormal conditions shall also be provided for
common remote indication “CHARGER TROUBLE” in Owner’s Control Board.
Indication for charger in float mode and boost mode through indication lamps shall be
provided for chargers. A Potential free contact for float/boost mode shall be provided
for external interlocks.
1.17
Name Plates and Marking
The name plates shall be white with black engraved letters. On top of each Charger,
on front as well as rear sides, larger and bold name plates shall be provided to
identify the Charger. Name plates with full and clear inscriptions shall also be
provided on and inside of the panels for identification of the various equipments and
ease of operation and maintenance.
-3-
1.18
Charger Construction
The Chargers shall be indoor, floor-mounted, self-supporting sheet metal enclosed
cubicle type. The Contractor shall supply all necessary base frames, anchor bolts and
hardware. The Chargers shall be fabricated from 2.0mm cold rolled sheet steel and
shall have folded type of construction. Removable gland plates for all cables and lugs
for power cables shall be supplied by the Contractor. The lugs for power cables shall
be made of electrolytic copper with tin coat. Power cable sizes shall be advised to the
Contractor at a later date for provision of suitable lugs and drilling of gland plates. The
Charger shall be tropicalised and vermin proof. Ventilation louvers, if provided shall
be backed with screens. All doors and covers shall be fitted with synthetic rubber
gaskets. The chargers shall have hinged double leaf doors provided on front and on
backside for adequate access to the Charger’s internals. All the charger cubicle doors
shall be properly earthed. The degree of protection of Charger enclosure shall be at
least IP-42 as per IS: 13947 Part -1.
1.18.1
All indicating instruments, control switches and indicating lamps shall be mounted on
the front side of the Charger.
1.18.2
Each Charger shall be furnished completely wired upto power cable lugs and terminal
blocks and ready for external connections. The control wiring shall be carried out with
PVC insulated, 1.5 sq.mm. stranded copper wired. Control terminals shall be suitable
for connecting two wires, with 2.5 sq.mm stranded copper conductors. All terminals
shall be numbered for ease of connections and identification. Each wire shall bare a
ferrule or tag on each end for identification. At least 20% spare terminals shall be
provided for control circuits.
The insulation of all circuits, except the low voltage electronic circuits shall withstand
test voltage of 2 KV AC for one minute. An air clearance of at least ten (10) mm shall
be maintained throughout for such circuits, right up to the terminal lugs. Whenever
this clearance is not available, the live parts shall be insulated or shrouded.
1.18.3
1.19
Painting
All sheet steel work shall be pre-treated in tanks, in accordance with IS:6005
Degreasing shall be done by alkaline cleaning. Rust and scale shall be removed by
pickling with acid. After pickling, the parts shall be washed in running water. Then
these shall be rinsed in slightly alkaline hot water and dried. The phosphate coating
shall be ‘Class-C’ as specified in IS:6005. Welding shall not be done after
phosphating. The phosphating surfaces shall be rinsed and passivated prior to
application of stoved lead oxide primer coating. After primer application, two coats of
finishing synthetic enamel paint of shade -692 (smoke grey) of IS-5 shall be applied,
unless required otherwise by the Owner. The inside of the chargers shall be glossy
white. Each coat of finishing synthetic enamel paint shall be properly staved. The
paint thickness shall not be less than fifty (50) microns.
1.20
TESTS
1.20.1
Battery Chargers shall conform to all type tests as per relevant Indian Standard
Performance test on the Chargers as per Specification shall also be carried out on
each charger as per specification. Rectifier transformer shall conform to all type tests
-4-
in IS:4540 and short circuit test as per IS:2026. Following type tests shall be carried
out for compliance of specification requirements:i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
1.20.2
1.20.3
1.20.4
Voltage regulation test.
Load limiter characteristics test
Efficiency tests
High voltage tests
Temperature rise test
Short circuit test at no load and full load at rated voltage for sustained
short-circuit.
vii)
Degree of protection test
viii)
Measurement of ripple by oscilloscope.
ix)
Temperature compensation feature demonstration
The contractor may be required to demonstrate to the OWNER that the chargers
conform to the specification particularly regarding continuous rating, ripple free
output, voltage regulation and load limiting characteristic, before despatch as well
as after installation at site. At site the following tests shall be carried out:i)
Insulation resistance test
ii)
Checking of proper annunciation system operation
If a Charger fails to meet the specified requirements, the Contractor shall replace
the same with appropriate Charger without affecting the commissioning schedule
of the Sub-Station, and without any extra cost to the OWNER.
The Contractor shall present for inspection, the type and routine test certificates
for the following components whenever required by the OWNER.
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)
(vi)
(vii)
(viii)
(ix)
(x)
(xi)
(xii)
Switches
Relays/MCCBs
Instruments
DC fuses
SCR
Diodes
Condensers
Potentiometers
Semiconductor
Annunciator
Control wiring
Push buttons and contactors
Makes of above equipment shall be subject to Owner’s approval.
-5-
SECTION-6
CHAPTER 4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF
D.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD.
1.
1.02
SCOPE:
This specification provides for design, Engineering, manufacture, stage testing, inspection and
testing before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site of D.C. Distribution Board,
complete with all fittings accessories and associated auxiliary equipment mandatory which
are required for efficient and trouble free operation as per specified here under.
It is not the intent to specify completely all the details of design and construction of equipment.
However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to the high standard of engineering,
design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous commercial
operation up to the Bidder’s guarantee acceptable to the purchaser. The equipment offered
shall be complete in all component necessary for its effective and trouble free operation along
with associated equipment interlocks protection scheme etc. Such components shall be
deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of whether those are specially brought
out in this Specification and or the commercial order or not. All similar parts particularly
movable ones shall be interchangeable.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :
As per Section-I Vol-II.
1.03
STANDARD:
All material and equipment shall comply in every respect with the requirements of the latest
edition of the relevant Indian Standard IS:1651.
1.04
MANUFACTURE AND WORKMANSHIP:
All the material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best quality
obtainable of their respective kinds and whole of the work shall be of the highest class, well
finished and of approved design and make. Casting shall be free from blow holes, flaws and of
the true form and dimensions.
1.05
1.06
All machined surfaces shall be true and smooth and well finished.
DUTY AND GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS:
The power for the charging apparatus shall be given through an independent 4-core cable
connection from an A.C. 50 cycles 3 phase 415 ± 10% volts switchboard fed from a Station
Transformer. D.C. Distribution shall be through fuse protected rotary switches mounted on a
separate distribution board.
TYPE OF EQUIPMENT:
All equipment shall be located indoors. D.C. Distribution panel are to be mounted on the floor
in the control room adjacent to the Battery room.
Necessary doors and screens shall be provided wherever required. All equipment shall be
vermin proof. The overall design of the entire equipment should be adequate for the duty in
view to ensure trouble free and dependable service.
The various cables for D.C. Distribution circuits, which are to be arranged by the Bidder shall
have P.V.C. insulation. The conductors may be of copper or aluminum. All panel wiring to be
provided by the supplier, shall consist of suitable colored/marked P.V.C. insulated cables.
1.07
BUS BARS AND SUPPORTS:
The bus bars shall be of aluminium having adequate cross-sections. The bus bars shall be so
designed and mounted that their expansion and contraction does not subject, either the Bus
Bars or their supports, to any stresses. All bus bars and connections shall be duly marked and
colored for identification.
-1-
1.08
1.09
1.10
1.11
1.12
INSTRUMENTS:
All instruments shall have 96 sq mm dials and flush mounted on the panels. Moving coil spring
controlled instruments shall be used except those for A.C. which may be of the moving iron
type. The error of indication shall not exceed 1% throughout the effective range of the meter.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR DESIGNS:
The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for co-ordinate and adequate design and shall
conform to the best engineering practice for the operating conditions specified. In case the
equipment covered by this specification is to be co-ordinate with other equipment, the Bidder
shall furnish complete information and data as may be desired by the purchaser.
GROUNDING:
All metal parts should be grounded according to Indian Electricity Rules. Main ground Bus
shall be provided by the purchaser. Special grounding lugs of adequate size shall be provided
by the supplier on the charging equipment.
INTER CHANGEABILITY:
Corresponding parts of plant and equipment shall be made to gauge or jig and shall be
interchangeable in every respect.
DOCUMENTATION
The successful bidder shall submit four sets of drawings for HVPNL approval.
The following drawing shall be supplied with the tender: i)
Outline drawings of all apparatus showing sufficient details to enable the purchaser to
determine whether the design proposed can be installed satisfactorily or not.
NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping the
approval of drawings by HVPNL.
1.13
FOUNDATIONS AND FIXINGS:
All plants and equipment shall be provided with a complete set of foundation holding down
bolts, washers, nuts plants and other fixture as may be required and these shall be supplied
by the Bidder. These fittings will be fixed by the purchaser in the foundations unless otherwise
specified. All foundation bolts, fixtures etc. shall be supplied as soon as possible after the
contract drawings have been approved.
1.14
INSTRUCTION AND MARKING PLATES:
All gauges, meters, instruments etc. shall have dials or scales calibrated in metric system of
units. All name plates, instruction plate, warning signs and any marking what-so-ever on the
equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in Hindi-English Language, using idioms,
words and meaning as in current use in India.
In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site every part of the plant and equipment shall be
suitably marked.
1.15
TROPICAL TREATMENT & PAINT:
All corrodible parts and surfaces shall be of such material and shall be provided with such
paint or other protective finish that no part of the installed equipment shall be injuriously
affected by the atmospheric moisture, heat and fumes. The panels shall be finally painted with
light grey paint having shade No.631 of IS:5 with stove enameled finish.
1.16
PLACE OF MANUFACTURE AND INSPECTION:
The Bidder shall state in his tender the place(s) of manufacture, testing and inspection of the
various portions of the work included in the tender. The purchaser or his duly authorised
agent shall have access to the Bidder's or sub Bidder's work at any time during working hours
for the purpose of inspecting the manufacture and testing of materials, equipment and
completed plant and the Bidder shall provide the necessary facilities for inspection.
TESTS:
Type Tests
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven years old
reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited
1.17
1.17.1
-2-
1.17.2
1.17.3
laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or
another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval
as schedule given in Bar Chart.
i) Verification of constructional requirements
ii) Verification of marking
iii) Verification of dimensions
Routine Tests
As per quality assurance program (QAP).
Acceptance Tests
The following acceptance tests for DCDB shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of
HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.
i) Dimension test
ii) Visual check test
iii) quantative check
iv) Functional checks
v) wiring HV Test
vi) Insulation resistance test
1.17.4
SAMPLING SCHEME AND CRITERIA FOR ACCEPTANCE:
The sampling scheme and criteria for acceptance for cells up to and including 600 AH
capacity shall be in accordance with clause 5 1.4 of IS-8320-1976. The sampling scheme for
cells of higher capacities shall be subject to agreement between the user and the
manufacturer.
1.18 SPARE PARTS :The Bidder shall quote separately in his tender for spare parts as he world recommend for the
main maintenance operation of the equipment for the period of 5 years. Of detailed list of such
spares parts which item wise prices shall be given under schedule of requirement and prices.
The purchaser may order spares subsequently as may be finally decided upon, at the rates
given in the tender. All spares parts shall be interchangeable and shall be of same make
material and both workmanship as the corresponding parts furnished with the main
equipment.
1.19 DETAILS OF TECHNICAL PARTICULARS AND SPECIFICATION:
Details of the technical particulars and specification required have been given in
Appendix (b). Any other particulars considered necessary by the supplier may also be given
in addition to the above listed in Data requirement sheet.
1.20
COMPLETENESS OF EQUIPMENT:
Any fittings, accessories or apparatus which may not have been specifically mentioned in the
specification, but which are usually necessary in the equipment shall be deemed to be
included in the contract and shall be supplied by the Bidder without extra cost.
-3-
APPENDIX 'A'
SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENT
D.C. DISTRIBUTION BOARD:
The D.C. Distribution Board shall be housed in a sheet steel cubicle with adequate ventilation and
it should be vermin proof as far as possible and should be provided with louvers for ventilation
backed by fine wire mesh, which applies to both charging equipment and D.C. Distribution Board.
The DCDB shall match with the battery charging equipment and should be complete with bus bars
of suitable capacity, wiring, rating plates, glands and fixing bolts. The minimum size of cubical
should be 600X700X1600 mm. The following components shall be provided on the D.C.
distribution board:
FOR 200 AH & 100 AH BATTERIES
1.
Double pole ON/OFF rotary switch of 200 Amps. for 200 AH rating Battery with
1 set
2 Nos. HRC fuses of 100 Amps
2.
Moving coil ammeter of 96mm sq. and range 0-200 amps. for 200 AH battery
1 No
for measuring the load on the bus.
3.
Change over contactor :
a) 20 Amps. for 200 AH battery change over contractor AC/DC for switching
1 No
indication over to DC. On failure of AC supply and also for emergency pilot
light in the event of AC failure.
b) 10 Amps HRC fuses for pilot light
4.
2 Nos.
Double pole D.C. Rotary switches with HRC fuses for each of following
feeders:
a) 220 kV closing supply of 50 Amps, capacity
1 No.
b) 132 kV closing supply 50 Amp. Capacity
1 No.
c) 66 kV
-do-
1 No.
d) 33 kV
-do-
1 No.
e) 11 kV closing supply 100 Amps. capacity
1 No.
f & g) spare 100 Amp. Capacity
2 Nos.
h & i) spare 50 Amp. capacity
2 Nos.
5.
Double pole D.C. rotary switch of 10 Amps. rating with 10 Amp. HRC fuses for
each of the following feeders:
a) 11 kV Tripping supply 10 Amp capacity
1 No.
b) 33 kV
-do-
1 No.
c) 66 kV
-do-
1 No.
d) 132 kV
-do-
1 No.
e) 220 kV
-do-
1 No.
f) Carrier telephone 10 Amp. capacity
1 No.
g) 33 kV Relay & Board panel 10 Amp. capacity
1 No.
h) 66 kV Relay & Board panel 10 Amp. capacity
1 No.
-4-
i) 132 kV Relay & Board panel 10 Amp capacity
1 No.
j) 220 kV Relay & Board panel 10 amp. capacity
1 No.
k) Spare 10 Amp capacity
3 Nos.
All the instruments shall be of flush mounted type. The rotary switches shall
also be flush mounted except for the protection portion in the panels. All
switches shall be mounted on the front panel and all the HRC fuses together
with their fuse fittings on the front panel but within a chamber that can be
opened by half doors, to occasion accessibility to the fuses. The various
components shall be of the best quality and from reputed manufacturers. The
layout of components, wiring workmanship reliability etc. shall be of the best
quality. Adequate room should be provided within the charger/DC distribution
board cubicles for easy accessibility of components and also to facilitate
ventilation.
-5-
SECTION-6
CHAPTER 5
FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
1.0
SCOPE
Portable fire extinguishers of Carbon Dioxide type and Dry chemical Powder type
shall be provided in adequate numbers for protection the Control Room Building and
all other Buildings in the sub-stations. The protection shall cover all the rooms/areas
of the buildings. The quantity and location of the extinguishers shall be as per the
requirements of Fire protection Manual (Part-I) issued by Tariff Advisory Committee
of India (TAC) and IS:2190.
1.1
Trolley Mounted fire extinguishers of 22.5 kg Carbon Dioxide type and 22.5 kg Dry
Chemical Powder type shall be used for protection of all 220kV, 132/66kV
Transformers and reactors in the S/Stn. Two DCP type and two CO2 type
extinguishers shall be provided for each transformer/reactor.
2.0
PORTABLE TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:
2.1
2.7
2.8
2.9
This Specification lays down the requirement regarding fire extinguishers of following
types:
a) Carbon Dioxide type
b) Dry Chemical powder type
All the portable extinguishers shall be capable of discharging freely and completely
in upright position.
Each extinguisher shall have the instructions for operating the extinguishers on its
body itself.
All extinguishers shall be supplied with initial charge and accessories as required.
Portable type extinguishers shall be provided with suitable clamps for mounting on
walls or columns.
All extinguishers shall be painted with durable enamel paint of fire red colour
confirming to relevant Indian Standards.
Capacities of each type shall be as indicated in the schedule of quantities.
Carbon Dioxide (CO2 type) extinguishers shall conform to IS:2878.
Dry chemical powder type extinguisher shall conform to IS:2171.
2.10
TESTS AND INSPECTION
2.10.1
All tests required to ensure that the equipment conforms to the Specification
requirements and relevant standards and codes.
A performance demonstration test at site of five (5) percent or one (1) number
whichever is higher, of the extinguishers shall be carried out by the Contractor. All
consumable and replaceable items required for this test would be supplied by the
Contractor without any extra cost to the Purchaser.
Performance listing of extinguishers shall be in line of applicable Indian Standards.
In case, where no Indian Standard is applicable for a particular type of extinguishers,
the method of testing shall be mutually discussed and agreed to before placement of
order for the extinguishers.
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.10.2
2.10.3
-1-
2.11
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The contractor shall guarantee all equipment supplied by him against any defect due
to faulty design, materials and workmanship. The equipment shall be guaranteed to
operate satisfactorily at the rated conditions at site.
2.12
PAINTING
Each fire extinguisher shall be painted with durable enamel paint of fire red colour
conforming to relevant Indian Standards.
3.0
TROLLEY MOUNTED DRY CHEMICAL POWDER TYPE MOBILE FIRE
EXTINGUISHER
The Specification lays down the requirement regarding wheeled fire extinguisher of
dry chemical powder type.
Design, Manufacture, Material of construction and performance of mobile type fire
extinguisher shall comply with the requirements of latest Indian Standards & shall
have BIS approval (ISI marked).
3.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
The capacity of the mobile dry chemical powder type fire extinguisher shall be 22.5
kg which means the total capacity of the container, when powder completely filled to
the specified level shall be 22.5 kg.
The fire extinguishers shall be used for Class ‘B’, ‘C’, and ‘E’ fires.
The extinguishers shall operate in the vertical position, mounted on solid rubber tyre
trolley wheels.
The effective throw during operation of the extinguishers shall not be less than 10
meter.
A carbon dioxide cartridge fitted with valved discharge head, shall provide sufficient
carbon dioxide to expel the dry chemical powder.
3.2
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
The construction of wheeled fire extinguishers shall conform to IS standard and not
be limited to the requirements mentioned here.
The shape of the body of the fire extinguisher shall be cylindrical. It shall have
adequate supporting arrangement.
The balance of the fully equipped assembly shall be so arranged that it can be easily
towed speedily behind a jeep or a car and also wheeled by a single operator.
Two solid rubber tyred trolley wheels shall be fitted to the body of the mobile fire
extinguisher. The rubber tyres shall have an effective life, and less than three (3)
years.
The extinguisher shall be fitted with a discharge hose and nozzle connection. The
hose shall be of rubber or composite construction, having a length of 4.5-meter
minimum. The bursting pressure of the hose shall be minimum 42 kgf/cm (g).
-2-
The design of discharge nozzle shall be such that when the extinguisher is operated
in still air the powder will be thrown in the form of a jet having a range of 10m
(minimum) for a period of 50-60 seconds. The nozzle shall be fitted with a hand
control device.
Provision shall be therefore making a pressure test on the body.
To minimize corrosion, the various components shall be provided with suitable anticorrosive as per the requirement of applicable codes.
Each mobile extinguisher shall be complete with initial charge, discharge fittings and
accessories.
3.3
TESTS AND INSPECTION
Testing at manufacturer’s works.
The manufacturer shall conduct all tests required to ensure that the equipment
furnished will conform to this Specification requirements, relevant Indian Standards
and applicable codes. Everybody shall be capable of withstanding an internal
hydraulic pressure of 25 kgf/cm (g) without leakage or visible distortion, prior to
painting, for a minimum period of 5 minutes.
In destruction tests, if called for, ultimate failure shall occur at a test pressure not less
than 32 kgf/cm (g) and if it occurs below 35 kgf/cm (g) there shall not be damage in
any joint, seam casting of fittings.
A performance demonstration test at site on five (5) percent or one (1) number,
whichever is higher, shall be required to be carried out by the CONTRACTOR. All
consumable and replaceable items required for the test shall be supplied by the
CONTRACTOR without any extra cost to Purchaser.
After conduction tests as in 1.1 and 1.4 the body shall be properly washed and
drained off. After 24 hours, the interior shall be examined and it must be free from
any stain, rust etc.
3.4
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee all equipment supplied by him against any
defect due to faulty design, materials and workmanship. The equipment shall be
guaranteed to operate satisfactorily at the rated conditions at site.
3.5
PAINTING
Each mobile fire extinguisher shall be painted with durable enamel paint of red colour
conforming to relevant Indian Standard. The mobile foam type fire extinguisher shall
be of make approved by Tariff Advisory Committee/NFPA/FOC/UL. Appliances
conforming to the relevant BS/NFPA Standards are also acceptable provided the
construction generally conform to the IS Standards so that spares refills/cartridges of
Indian make conforming to IS Specification can be used after the operation of the
extinguisher.
Spare charge cartridges equivalent to requirements of 2 Nos. extinguishers shall also
be supplied.
-3-
4.0
TROLLEY MOUNTED CARBON-DIOXIDE TYPE MOBILE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
1.1
This Specification lays down the requirements regarding wheeled fire extinguisher of
carbon-dioxide.
1.2
Design, manufacture, material of construction and performance of extinguisher as
specified herein after shall comply with the requirements of latest applicable Indian
Standards IS-2878 or equivalents and shall have BIS approval (ISI marked).
1.3
1.3.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT
The capacity of the extinguisher shall be 22.5 kg of carbon-dioxide when filled in the
container to a filling ratio of about 0.66, 7.
The extinguisher shall be designed for use where larger high intensity fire hazards
are involved requiring versatility of action. These shall be used for Class ‘B’ fire, i.e.
fire in flammable liquid. Class ‘C’ fire i.e. fire in gaseous substances under pressure
and Class ‘E’ fire, i.e. fires in live electrical equipment.
The extinguisher shall be operated in upright position, by releasing a suitable valve.
The range of effective operation of the extinguishers shall be about 4 meters.
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.3.4
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.4.6
1.4.7
1.4.8
1.4.9
1.4.10
1.4.11
1.4.12
DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
The construction of wheeled fire extinguisher, carbon-dioxide type, shall in general
conform to IS:2828 subject to the requirements mentioned hereunder:
The carbon-dioxide gas shall conform to IS:307.
The shape of the body of the extinguisher shall be cylindrical. The body shall be of
steel cylinder. It shall have adequate supporting arrangement so that it can rest on
the wheeled body in upright position and the operator be free to direct the stream.
The balance of the full equipped trolley unit shall be so arranged, that despite its
considerable weight, it can be easily wheeled by one man. It should be capable of
being towed speedily behind a jeep or car.
The cylinder shall be mounted on a trolley fitted with two cushion tyred wheels and
fitted with suitable handle. The overall wheel diameter shall be about 280 mm.
The frame of the trolley shall be made of welded steel section.
The design shall permit easy maintenance and operation with one man service.
The extinguisher shall be fitted with a high pressure flexible hose of about 9 m length
and internal dia to hoses shall not be more than 12 mm.
A discharge horn made of fibre or any material non-conducting to electricity shall be
fitted with a handle made of thermal insulating material capable of protecting
operators hand from freezing effects.
Suitable provision for firmly securing the horn to the body, when it is not in use, shall
be provided. The fixing device shall not interfere with the operation or mobility of the
extinguisher.
The discharge valve or operating head shall be capable of being operated
satisfactorily. It shall be made of material as specified in IS:2878.
There shall be no leakage of CO2 from valve or fitting during the use of extinguisher.
Valve shall be provided with suitable safety device to prevent over pressure in
cylinder.
A seal or device shall be fitted to indicate that the extinguisher has not been used.
Each extinguisher shall be complete with initial charge, discharge fittings and other
accessories as required.
-4-
1.5
TEST AND INSPECTION
1.5.1
The extinguisher at ambient temperature shall expel at least 95% of its content as
continuous discharge with in a maximum of 90 seconds and minimum of 30 seconds.
The extinguisher without its attachment shall be shelved for 21 days after filling and
shall be check weighed at the end of the period. There shall be no loss of mass.
Carbon-dioxide cylinder shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 236 kgf/cm
(g) to prove leak tightness for a period of one hour.
Hose assembly with its coupling shall be hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 315
kgf/cm (g) without failure.
All tests required to ensure that the equipment conforms to the Specification
requirements and relevant standards and codes shall be conducted by the
manufacturer. Adequate time ahead of these shop tests the Purchaser shall be
informed so that if he so desires, his representative may witness the tests.
A performance demonstration test at site on five (5) percent or one (1) number,
whichever is higher, shall be required to be carried out by the CONTRACTOR. All
consumable and rechargeable items required for the test shall be supplied by the
CONTRACTOR without any extra cost to Purchaser.
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
4.5.5
1.5.5
1.6
PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE
The CONTRACTOR shall guarantee all equipment supplied by him against any
defect due to faulty design, materials and workmanship. The equipment shall be
guaranteed to operate satisfactorily at the rated conditions at site.
1.7
PAINTING & MARKING
Each extinguisher shall be painted in red and permanently marked in accordance
with the requirements laid down in IS-2878. besides permanently making on the front
of the extinguisher indicating its purpose, content and usage shall also be provided.
1.7.1
The mobile Carbon-dioxide type fire extinguisher shall be of make approved by Chief
Inspector
of
Explosives,
Nagpur,
India
and
Tariff
Advisory
Committee/NFPA/FOC/UL.
2.
VENTILATION SYSTEM
Mechanical ventilation systems using exhaust fans shall be provided for all the
rooms which are not considered for air conditioning. Capacity of the fan shall be
selected so as to have the minimum air changes in the various rooms as below:
Battery room, Pantry, toilets
Changes/hr.
All other rooms
Changes/hr.
:
15 air
:
12 air
For Battery room, the fan shall be bifurcated type spare proof construction.
-5-
SECTION-6
CHAPTER-6
PART-I
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 66 KV (CROSS LINKED POLYETHYLENE INSULATED
POWER CABLE:
1.1
SCOPE
1.1.1
The scope under this section covers design, manufacturer, testing, packing, supply,
delivery and laying of 66 KV, XLPE, insulated power cable for use with effectively earthed
distribution systems.
1.2
STANDARDS: Unless otherwise specified, the cables shall conform, in all respects, to
IEC-60840 and IS:7098 (Part-III)/1993 with latest amendment or latest edition for cross
linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cable for working voltage of 66KV.
1.3
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
The climatic conditions under which the cable shall operate
satisfactorily are as follows:a)
Location
: IN THE STATE OF HARYANA
b)
Maximum ambient temperature of air in shade
0
:
50
c)
Minimum ambient temperature of air in shade
0
:
-2.5
d)
Maximum daily average ambient temperature
0
:
40
e)
Maximum yearly average ambient temperature
0
C
:
30
f)
Maximum relative humidity
%
:
100
g)
Minimum relative humidity
%
:
26
h)
Average number of thunder storm days per annum
:
35
i)
Average annual rain fall
mm
:
900
j)
Max. wind pressure
kg/m2 :
195
k)
Altitudes not exceeding above MSL
Meter :
1000
l)
Max. soil temp. at cable depth
0
:
30
m)
Isoceranic level days/year
:
50
n)
Seismic level (horizontal acceleration)
:
0.3g
C
C
C
C
-1-
1.4
1.4.1
PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS:
66 kV (E) grade XLPE single core power cable conductor electrolytic grade copper of
single length, with formation of stranded compacted circular conductor for size upto
800mm2 and segmental type for size above 800mm2 as per IEC-60228, tapped with semi
conducting tap, shielded with extruded semi-conducting layer, insulated with cross linked
polyethylene (XLPE) insulation, screened with extruded semi-conducting layer, lapped
with a combination of semi-conducting water swell able tape & copper-woven semi
conducting tape and extruded aluminium sheath with anti-corrosive layer & graphite
coating HDPE outer sheathed, confirming to IEC-60840 for construction and also
confirming to IS:7098 (Part-III)/1993 or any latest amendments thereof.
1.4.2
Outer sheathing should be designed to afford high degree of mechanical protection and
should also be heat, oil chemicals and weather resistant. Common acid. Alkalis and saline
solution should not have adverse effect on the PVC sheathing material used.
1.4.3
The cable should be suitable for laying in covered trenches and/or under ground for
outdoor.
1.4.4 The sheath/screen bonding system shall provide a continuous current path through the
cable sheath and jointing kits and shall be bonded. The bonding ends shall be suitably
earthed with/without SVL as per approved configuration/design. The sheath voltage under
full load condition shall not exceed the voltage specified/allowed in relevant standard for
safety of personal as well as satisfactory working of cable. Sheath shall be solidly
grounded at suitable location with or without SVL. Bidder must indicate details of
configuration proposed along with sufficiency calculation with the bid so as to limit induced
voltage of sheath within 65V.
1.4.5 CABLE PARAMETERS
Sr. No.
Description
66 KV
i)
Voltage Grade (Uo/U)
38/66
ii)
No. of cores
Single
iii)
Size (mm2)
400mm2,630mm2,
800mm2,1000mm2, 1200 mm2
iv)
Nominal system voltage KV
66
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
Highest system voltage KV
System Frequency Hz
Variation in Frequency
Fault level individually for
i)
Conductor
ii)
Cu.Screen/Armour
Maximum allowable temperature
72.5
50
+ 3%
31.5 KA for1sec
31.5 KA for 1sec
a) Design continuous operation at rated full load 90
current, the max, temp. of conductor shall not
0
exceed.
C
b) The conductor temperature after a short 250
circuit for 1.0 sec shall not exceed. 0C
x)
xi)
xii)
Basic insulation level (1.2/50 Micro Second 325 KVP
Wave)
1-min. power frequency withstand voltage (rms)
140 KV
System earthing
Effectively earthed
-2-
1.5
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:
1.5.1
CONDUCTOR: The cable conductor shall be made from electrolytic grade copper with
formation as stranded compacted circular conductor for size upto 800mm2 and segmental
type as per IEC-60228 for the size above 800mm2.The conductor shall confirm to
IS:8130/1984.
CONDUCOTR SHIELD: The conductor having a semi-conducting screen shall ensure
perfectly smooth profile and avoid stress concentration. The conductor screen shall be
extruded in the same operation as the insulation; the semi-conducting polymer shall be
cross-linked.
1.5.2
1.5.3
INSULATION: The XLPE insulation should be suitable for specified 66 kV system voltage.
The manufacturing process shall ensure that insulations shall be free from voids. The
insulation shall withstand mechanical and thermal stressed under steady state and
transient operating conditions. The extrusion method should give very smooth interface
between semi-conducting screen and insulation.
1.5.4
INSULATION SHIELD: To confine electrical field to the insulation, non-magnetic semiconducting shield shall be put over the insulation. The insulation shield shall be extruded
in the same operation as the conductor shield and the insulation by suitable extrusion
process. The XLPE insulation shield should be bonded type. Metallic screening shall be
provided. The metallic screen shall be of copper wire having fault current capacity same
as the conductor (31.5KA for 1-sec).
1.5.5
INNER SHEATH/ARMOUR: The inner sheath shall comprise of a combination of semiconducting water swell able and extruded aluminium sheath with anti-corrosive layer. The
sheath shall be suitable to withstand the site conditions and the desired temperature. It
should be of adequate thickness, consistent quality and free from all defects.
The armour shall be having fault current capacity same as conductor (31.5KA for 1 sec.)
1.5.6
OUTER SHEATH: Extruded HDPE outer sheath confirming to IEC: 60840, shall be
applied over armouring with suitable additives to prevent attack by rodents and termites.
1.5.7 CONSTRUCTION:
1.5.7.1 All materials used in the manufacture of cable shall be new unused and of finest quality.
All materials should comply with the applicable provision of the tests of the specification.
IS, IEC, Indian Electricity Rules, Indian Electricity Act and any other applicable statutory
provisions rules and regulations.
1.5.8
CURRENT RATING: The cable will have current ratings and derating factors as per
relevant standard IEC.
1.5.8.1 The one-second short circuit rating values each for conductor, screen & armour shall be
furnished and shall be subject to the purchaser’s approval.
1.5.8.2 The current ratings shall be based on maximum conductor temperature of 90 deg. C with
ambient site condition specified for continuous operation at the rated current.
1.5.8.3 SIZE:
The different sizes of cable shall be 66 KV Single Core
-3-
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
400mm2
630mm2
800mm2
1000mm2
1200mm2
1.5.9 OPERATION:
1.5.10.1Cables shall be capable of satisfactory operation under a power supply system frequency
variation of plus minus 3% voltage variation of plus, minus 10% and combined frequency
voltage variation of 10% (absolute sum).
1.5.10.2 Cable shall be suitable for laying in ducts or buried under ground.
1.5.10.3 Cable shall have heat and moisture resistance properties. These shall be of type and
design with proven record on transmission network service.
1.5.11
LENGHTS: The cable shall be supplied in standard drum lengths as below:
Size of cable
Standard Drum Length
a) 1c x 400mm2, 630mm2,800mm2,
1000mm2, 1200 mm2
750 meters + 5% tolerance and
+ 2% overall tolerance in total quantity of cable.
1.5.10 INDENTIFICATION MARKING: Identification of cables shall be provided externally at
three meters’ intervals to identify as under:i)
‘Name of Manufacture’
ii)
‘Year of manufacture’
iii)
‘Voltage grade’ to be printed/embossed at the interval of one meter-length. The
identification, by printing or embossing shall be done only on the outer sheath.
Name of purchaser shall also be embossed.
1.6.0 TESTS
1.6.1
Type Tests
The equipment offered should be type tested. Type test report should not be more than
seven years old, reckoned from the date of bid opening, in respect of the following tests,
carried out in accordance with ISS-7098/IEC-871, from Govt./Govt. approved test house,
shall be submitted along with bid:
i) Physical tests for insulation and outer sheath.
ii) Bending test.
iii) Di-electrical power factor test.
iv) Heating cycle test followed by di-electrical power factor as a function of voltage and
partial discharge test.
v) Impulse withstand test.
The remaining type test report as per clause 3 of ISS-7098/IEC-871/IEC-60840 shall be
submitted by the successful bidder within three months from the date of placement of
order. These type test reports shall be from Govt./Govt. approved test house and shall not
be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of placement of order. The failure
to do so will be considered as a breach of contract.
1.6.2
ROUTINE TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS
All routine and acceptance tests shall be carried as per relevant ISS in the presence of
Nigam’s representative.
-4-
1.7
INSPECTION
The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch by an authorised
representative of the Nigam in respect of quality.
The inspecting officer shall also satisfy himself about the correctness of length of cables
as provided in Instruction No. 208 of E.B. Manual of Instruction 1963 Edition amended
vide O/O No. G/BD-33(57) 75 dt. 18.04.75 now HVPNL. In case the supplier is not in a
position to get these tests carried out at his works, such tests may be got carried out by
him at any Govt. recognized test agency at his own expense.
1.8
TEST CERTIFICATES
The supplier shall supply test certificates from a Govt. agency in respect of quality as per
IS:7098(part-II) 1985 with latest amendments thereof for approval of the purchaser.
1.9
PACKING
The cable shall be supplied in non-returnable wooden drum as per IS:10418:1982 so
constructed, as to enable the cable to be transported on each drum. The cable wound on
such drum shall be one continuous length. The ends of cables shall be sealed by means
of non-hygroscopic sealing material.
1.10
MARKING
The marking on the drum shall have the following information: a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
1.11
Reference to Indian Standard & cable code.
Name of the manufacturer & trade name.
Nominal cross section area of conductor for the cables.
Number of core.
Sequential No. at each meter.
Type of the cable & voltage for which it is suitable.
Length of cable on the drum.
Approximate gross weight.
Net weight of the cable.
Drum identification number.
P.O. No. and date.
Consignee’s name with designation.
Year of manufacture.
DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTION MANUAL
The tenderer shall supply the following drawings with the tender: i) Detailed drawing of the cable showing conductor, screening insulation, Armoring, outer
sheath etc.
ii) Detailed drawing showing jointing of cable and sealing of end boxes.
Copies of instruction manuals for testing, installation jointing operation and maintenance of
cables shall also be submitted with the offer for reference of the purchaser.
1.12
TECHNICAL & GUARANTEED PARTICULARS: The tenderer shall furnish guaranteed
technical particulars as called for in appendix-I (Schedule-A) of this specification.
Particulars, which are subject to guarantee, shall be clearly marked. Offer not containing
this information will not be considered.
-5-
PART-II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LAYING, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF 66kV XLPE
UNDERGROUND POWER CABLE
SECTION-1
SPECIFICATION FOR LAYING OF CABLE
1.1
1.1.1
LAYING OF POWER CABLE:
The 66kV(E) XLPE cable shall be installed underground and normally buried directly in the
ground complying with all applicable standards and IS:1255 & their amendments.
1.1.2
The sealing of power cable ends should be made during the storage; execution &
completion of jointing works shall be in the scope of successful tenderer. In no
circumstances, the cable ends shall be kept open.
1.1.3
Three single core cables shall be laid in trefoil formation.
1.1.4
The power cable shall be laid generally at a depth of 1500mm and can vary, if obstacles
like power cable of other rating/telephone cable/water pipe line etc, come in the way of
installation. At least minimum Depth of 1000 mm shall be maintained from nearest road
level.
1.1.5
The cables shall be completely surrounded by a layer of having a low thermal resistivity
(selected sand) sand about 250mm over & below of the cable surface throughout width of
the cable trench at no extra cost. (River sand shall be allowed for surrounding layer).
1.1.6
The extra protection of pre-cost flat RCC slab with proportion 1:2:4 having size 600(L)
X300(B) X 50(Thk) mm shall be provided about 250mm over the power cables for
complete route of the cable.
The RCC slab shall be with proportion not less than 1:2:4 (M-150) and also shall have
steel reinforced of 6/8 mm dia. Steel bar (4 nos. of 300mm side and 5 Nos. on 600 mm
side ) at adequate required distance. The slab shall be given curing time of minimum 15
days.
1.1.7
Normally, the back filling shall consist of the materials earlier excavated, however, bigger
stones or piece of rock should be removed OR if required new soil has to be provided and
used for back filling with no extra cost.
1.1.8
The cable drum must be handled correctly and with care during transport and laying of the
power cables, in order to avoid damage to the cables.
1.1.9
The minimum bending radius of the cable shall be 30xD where D is diameter of the cable.
1.2
CROSSINGS:
1.2.1
a) Where road crossing comes in way of laying power cable, the power cable shall be laid
through NP-4 RCC Hume Pipes.
b) The RCC Hume pipe inner dia-meter shall not be less than 400mm.
-6-
c) The RCC pipes to be laid shall have minimum depth in such a way that the back filling
on top surface of the pipe shall be at least 600mm in depth. The pipe joints shall be
smooth so that cables are not damaged during pulling & operation.
d) During the crossing of utilities like water line, drainage lines, telephone lines, gas lines
etc. sufficient care shall be taken & protection shall be made available so that other utilities
do not damage the cable mechanically and/or electrically or do not effect the performance
of the cable.
e) NALA CROSSINGS/CULVERT CROSSINGS: The Nala crossings are to be made with
separate fly-over bridges of adequate sizes to carry all the cables in required formation.
The bridges are to be made at the sufficient distances from the edge of Nala considering
the further expansions of roads. The strength shall be such that it should not wash away
with the flow of water during heavy rain.
1.3
IDENTIFICATOIN, MARKING AND WARNING:
1.3.1
The identification marker shall be of adequate size fabricated from 3mm thick,
25mmx25mm aluminium strip. The marker shall be embossed with letter as stated below:
“Name of S/Stn” and “Phase R or Y or B" as the case may be .
The marker shall be tightened with nylon thread along with each cable at interval of 3
meters in such a way that it does not damage/penetrate the outer sheath of cable because
of the dead weight of back filled materials OR soil.
1.3.2
A pre-warning PVC yellow tape with size 152 mm (width) x 100 microns thick
(HDDPE)/LLDPF shall also be laid as per following clause of the specification. The
warning tape shall also contain the “WARNING” printed in black letters as under (In
English as well as Hindi).
“CAUTION: 66000 VOLTS HVPNL CABLE”
CABLE”
and “CAUTION: 132000 VOLTS HVPNL
1.3.3
A pre-warning tap as per above clause shall be laid below ground level in the earth about
400/500 mm deep along the route of cable and in jointing bays.
1.3.4
The cable route marker is to be made from R.C.C. blocks duly embossed on all the side as
under:“HVPNL 66 KV CABLE LINE”
The minimum size shall be 600x400x50mm. It shall be at least embedded in ground upto
400mm depth. The exposed portions shall be painted with non-washable paints. The
interval should be minimum 30meters between two markers. It should be put at bends,
curves, road crossing etc. of cable route.
1.4
TEST AFTER INSTALLATION:
1.4.1
Pre-commissioning tests on site, shall include the following:a)
Insulation Resistance of each cable drum length after laying and before jointing.
b)
Tests for detection of damage to outer sheath, if any.
-7-
c)
Serving insulation resistance after laying each cable length shall withstand a
voltage of 10 KV DC for one minute between each reinforcement and external
conducting surface; In addition, the serving insulation resistance shall be measured
and checked with the values obtained during routine factory tests.
d)
On completion of the cable laying and jointing work, the complete installation shall
be checked with a D.C. voltage of 3 Uo applied for 15 minutes between each
conductor and sheath.
e)
f)
Conductor resistance of each cable of each complete circuit.
Test for 5 min. with system voltage applied between the conductor and the screen.
g)
Test for 24 hours with normal operating voltage of the system.
h)
Continuity & phase confirmation.
Note: The pre-commissioning test at (f) or (g) at site to be undertaken as an alternative to
the test (d).
1.5
1)
2)
GENERAL:
The cable laying shall have to be done, as per actual site condition at the time of
execution, and as per the instruction of the engineer-in-charge.
The end of cut pieces of cables left out during executions shall be sealed to prevent
ingress of any moisture in the cable before handing over to consignee.
-8-
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
6.1
6.2
SECTION-6
CHAPTER-7
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR 11 kV CROSS LINKED ETHYLENE INSULATED PVC
SHEATHED SINGLE CORE AND THREE CORE POWER CABLES
SCOPE
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, inspection at manufacturer’s
work, supply & delivery F.O.R. destination of 630mm2 Single Core XLPE insulated PVC
sheathed Cable and three core XLPE cable suitable for solidly grounded system size as per
clause(5) mentioned below.
PARTICULARS OF THE SYSTEM
The cable should be suitable for use on 50 Cycles, 3 Phases solidly earth neutral system &
working voltage of 11kV.
STANDARDS
The cable covered under this Specification shall conform in all respects with the latest
editions of IS-7098 (Part-2) 1985 & IS-8130-1984 & IEC:502 of the latest version thereof.
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
11kV, Single Core under ground XLPE insulated PVC sheathed cable suitable for working
potential of 11kV on earthed system manufactured in accordance with IS-7098 (Part-2) 1985
with latest amendments. The Aluminium conductor shall comply with requirements specified
in IS:8130-1984. The insulation shall be chemically cross-linked polyethylene confirming to
the physical, electrical and ageing property as required in latest edition of IS-7098 (Part-2)
1985. Cable shall be provided with both conductor screening and insulation screening. The
conductor screening shall be non-metallic and shall be consisting of either semi-conducting
tape or a layer of semi-conducting compound or combination of two. The insulation
screening shall consist of non-metallic semi conducting tape of extruded semi conducting
compound layer in combination with non-magnetic metallic shield. Armouring shall be
arranged over the core and it shall be of non-magnetic material. The material for the
Armouring shall be as per relevant ISS. Over the Armouring the cable shall be provided with
extruded PVC outer sheath. The composition of PVC compound shall be type ST-2 of
IS-5831-1984. The colour of outer sheath shall be black or grey.
SIZE
The different size of the cable shall be: a) Single Core 630mm2 .
b) Three Core 400mm2.
c) Three Core 185mm2.
d) Three Core 50mm2.
TESTS
Type Tests
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven years
old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited
laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or
another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for
approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
i) Physical tests for insulation and outer sheath.
ii) Bending test.
iii) Di-electrical power factor test.
iv) Heating cycle test followed by di-electrical power factor as a function of voltage and
partial discharge test.
v) Impulse withstand test.
The remaining type test report as per clause 3 of ISS-7098/IEC-871 shall be submitted by
the successful bidder within three months from the date of placement of order. These type
test reports shall be from Govt./Govt. approved test house OR from reputed Lab Abroad and
shall not be more than seven years old, reckoned from the date of placement of order. The
failure to do so will be considered as a breach of contract.
ROUTINE TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS
All routine and acceptance tests shall be carried as per relevant ISS in the presence of
Nigam’s representative.
-1-
7.
8.
9.
INSPECTION
The material shall be inspected and tested before dispatch by an authorised representative
of the Nigam in respect of quality.
The inspecting officer shall also satisfy himself about the correctness of length of cables as
provided in Instruction No. 208 of E.B. Manual of Instruction 1963 Edition amended vide
O/O No. G/BD-33(57) 75 dt. 18.04.75 now HVPNL. In case the Bidder is not in a position to
get these tests carried out at his works, such tests may be got carried out by him at any
Govt. recognized test agency OR from reputed Lab Abroad at his own expense.
TEST CERTIFICATES
The Bidder shall supply test certificates from a Govt. agency OR from reputed Lab Abroad
in respect of quality as per IS:7098(part-II) 1985 with latest amendments thereof for
approval of the HVPNL.
PACKING
The cable shall be supplied in non-returnable wooden drum as per IS:10418:1982 so
constructed, as to enable the cable to be transported on each drum. The cable wound on
such drum shall be one continuous length. The ends of cables shall be sealed by means of
non-hygroscopic sealing material.
10.
MARKING
The marking on the drum shall have the following information: a)
Reference to Indian Standard & cable code.
b)
Name of the manufacturer & trade name.
c)
Nominal cross section area of conductor for the cables.
d)
Number of core.
e)
Sequential No. at each meter.
f)
Type of the cable & voltage for which it is suitable.
g)
Length of cable on the drum.
h)
Approximate gross weight.
i)
Net weight of the cable.
j)
Drum identification number.
k)
P.O. No. and date.
l)
Consignee’s name with designation.
m) Year of manufacture.
Note: Cable should be marked with ISI Certification mark.
11.
DRAWINGS & INSTRUCTION MANUAL
The tenderer shall supply the following drawings with the tender: i)
Detailed drawing of the cable showing conductor, screening insulation, Armouring,
outer sheath etc.
ii)
Detailed drawing showing jointing of cable and sealing of end boxes.
Copies of instruction manuals for testing, installation jointing operation and maintenance of
cables, shall also be submitted with the offer for reference of the HVPNL.
-2-
SECTION-6
CHAPTER – 8
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR LT TWO CORE, 3½ CORE AND FOUR CORE PVC
INSULATED UNARMOURED CABLE OFF SIZES FOR WORKING VOLTAGE UPTO &
INCLUDING 1100 V, FOR SERVICE CONNECTIONS.
1.
SCOPE:- This specification provides for design, manufacture, inspection at
manufacturer’s works, testing before dispatch, supply and delivery of unarmoured 2
core, 3½ core and 4 core PVC sheathed Aluminium conductor cables for voltage upto
1.1 kV.
2.
STANDARD:- LT distribution unarmoured cables shall be suitable for service voltage of
1100 volts (640 volts to earth) and made from high conductivity Aluminium conductor
insulated with PVC compound and having inner and outer sheathing of PVC compound.
The cables shall be strictly in conformity with ISS-1554/Part-I/1988 with latest
amendments/ edition if any and shall be ISI/ IEC marked. The inner and outer sheathing
shall be carried out as per relevant ISS. However, material manufactured as per any
other International Standard which offers equivalent or materials better in quality and
workmanship as compared to mentioned standards shall also be acceptable. Aluminium
conductor complying with IS:8130-1984 shall be used.
3.
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:- The cable shall work satisfactorily under the following
climatic conditions:i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
Maximum ambient temperature
Minimum ambient temperature
Maximum relative humidity
Minimum relative humidity
Altitude
vi)
vii)
viii)
Average no. of Rainy days per annum.
Average annual Rain fall.
Maximum wind pressure
50oC
-2.5oC
100%
26%
Below 1000 meters above mean
sea level.
120
900 mm
195 Kg/ meter2
4
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:- The cable shall be suitable for use on 50 Hz three phase
AC solidly earthed Neutral power system working voltage of 3 x 240/ 415 Volt.
4.1
Sheathing:a)
4 Core Cables:- The Contractor has the option to provide inner and outer
sheathing of PVC compound by single or separate pressure extrusion process as
per relevant ISS.
b)
3 ½ Core Cables.
c)
2 core cable.
i)
ii)
Inner and outer sheathing shall be provided by separate operation process only.
Where inner and outer sheathing are to be provided with PVC compound (by
separate operation) the sheathing are to be provided by pressure extrusion
process.
-1-
iii)
Where inner sheathing is to be provided with thermo plastic material or proofed
tape which shall not be harder than PVC used for insulating and outer sheathing
shall be provided with pressure extrusion process.
Note:- Cable with sheathing by sleeves extrusion shall not be accepted.
5.
SIZES:- The normal sizes of the cables shall be as per schedule of requirements as per
requirement.
6.
TESTS:-
6.1
TYPE TESTS:The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven
years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in
accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed
by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to
HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
i)
Tensile Test
ii)
Wrapping Test
iv)
Annealing Test
v)
Resistance Test
6.2
ROUTINE TEST
As per quality assurance program (QAP)
6.3
ACCEPTANCE TEST:- The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS8130:1984 shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative,
unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.
a)
b)
c)
d)
Tensile test.
Wrapping test.
Resistance test.
Annealing test.
7.
MANUFACTURER IDENTIFICATION:- HVPNL alongwith brand name, manufacturer
name, voltage rating, size and year of manufacture in English shall be embossed on the
outer sheath of the cable at regular intervals of approximately 1 to 1.5 metre.
8.
INSPECTION AND TEST:- An authorised representative of the HVPNL shall inspect,
examine and test the equipment/ material in respect of quality, size and ratings as per
ISS/ IEC mentioned above at the manufacturer’s works during or after the manufacture
of goods prior to dispatch on receipt of a clear notice of minimum two weeks in advance
to be reckoned from the date of receipt of the same by the HVPNL. No material will be
allowed to be dispatched without prior inspection and approval. The inspecting officer of
the HVPNL may also inspect the material during the course of manufacture. In case,
inspection of any consignment is waived off by the HVPNL, the Contractor will be
required to furnish the requisite test certificates (for acceptance as well as routine tests)
for approval. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to make adequate
arrangements for testing of material at their works without any additional charge to the
HVPNL. All testing instruments and appliances will be made available and material
destroyed/ consumed during testing will be to the account of the Contractor.
-2-
8.1
SAMPLING OF CABLES:a)
Scale of sampling:- Samples shall be taken and tested from each lot for
ascertaining the conformity of the lot to the required specifications.
b)
The number of samples to be selected as per table given below at random (the
randomness of selection, random number tables shall be used as per IS:49051968. No. of drums to be taken permissible number of as sample (a).
S.No. of drums/ No. of coils/
reels in lot.
(n)
Upto 50
51 to 100
101 to 300
301 to 500
501 to above
No. of drums to be taken Permissible number of
as sample.
refectives.
(n)
(n)
3
0
5
0
13
0
20
1
31
2
The inspector shall have the option to take the sample (s) from any point in the
length of any drums selected at random for carrying out various tests and total
length of that particular drum(s) of such two pieces because of this sampling in
such a particular case will be considered as one length.
9.
10.
PACKING:- The cable shall be packed and supplied in non-returnable wooden drums
provided with cast iron bushings to resist any damage during transit. Material offered for
inspection should be duly packed provided with blank lead seals for the purpose of
sealing by the Inspecting Officer. The Contractor will put their own seals also on the two
ends of the cables.
DRUM LENGTH:- The cable shall be supplied in standard lengths as under:Cable upto 185 sq.mm.
=
500 Metres + 5%
Cable above 185 sq.mm.
=
250 Metres + 5%
Non standards lengths not less than 100 metres each shall be acceptable upto 5% of the
ordered quantity. A tolerance of + 5% is permissible allotted to each consignee with
overall + 2% tolerance on the ordered quantity for completion of order.
11.
MARKING:- The marking on the drums shall have the following informations:a)
Trade mark, if any.
b)
Name of the manufacturer.
c)
Nominal cross sectional area of conductor of the cable.
d)
Year of manufacture.
e)
Type of cable and voltage for which it is suitable.
f)
Length of cable on the drum/ reel.
g)
Approximate gross weight.
h)
Number of cores and colour of cores.
i)
Net weight of the cable.
j)
Drum/ reel identification no.
k)
Purchase Order No. and Date.
l)
Consignee’s name with designation.
m)
ISI mark/ IEC mark.
n)
Direction of rotation of drum/ reel (by means of an arrow).
o)
Reference IS:1554/Part-I/1988.
-3-
SECTION-6
Chapter-9
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM
1.00.00
GENERAL
1.01.00
This specification covers supply, installation, testing and commissioning
and handing over to HVPNL of Air Conditioning system for the control
room building.
Air conditioning units for control room building shall be set to maintain the
following inside conditions.
DBT 24.40 C +/- 20 C
1.02.00
The computer room and control room i.e. C&R Panel Room shall be air
conditioned.
1.03.00
Air conditioning requirement of room indicated at clause No. 1.02.00 shall
be met using split AC units. High wall type split AC units of 2TR capacity
each with high wall type indoor evaporator unit shall be used for all
rooms.
1.04.00
Scope
The scope of the equipment to be furnished and services to be provided
under the contract are outlined herein after an the same is to be read in
conjunction with the provision contained in other sections/clauses. The
scope of work under the contract shall be deemed to include all such
items, which although are not specifically mentioned in the bid documents
and/or in Bidder’s proposal, but are required to make the
equipment/system complete for its safe, efficient, reliable and trouble free
operation.
1.04.01
High wall type split AC units of 2TR capacity each complete with air
cooled outdoor condensing unit having hermetically sealed compressor
and high wall type indoor evaporator unit with cordless remote controller.
1.04.02
Copper refrigerant piping complete with insulation between the indoor and
remote outdoor condensers as required.
1.04.03
PVC drain piping from the indoor units upto the nearest drain point.
1.04.04
Power and control cabling between the indoor unit and outdoor unit and
earthing.
1.04.05
MS brackets for outdoor condensing units, condensers as required.
2.00.00
Specification of Split AC units
2.01.00
The split AC units will be complete with indoor evaporator and outdoor
condensing units and cordless remote control units.
-1-
2.02.00
Outdoor unit shall comprise of hermetically sealed reciprocating/rotary
compressors mounted on vibration isolators, propeller type axial flow fans
and copper tube aluminum finned coils all assembled in a sheet metal
casing. The casing and the total unit shall be properly treated and shall be
weatherproof type. They shall be compact in size and shall have
horizontal discharge of air.
2.03.00
The indoor units shall be high wall type. The indoor unit shall be compact
and shall have elegant appearance. They shall have low noise centrifugal
blowers driven by special motors and copper tube aluminum finned
cooling coils. Removable and washable polypropylene filters shall be
provided. They shall be complete with multi function cordless remote
control unit with special features like programmable timer, sleep mode
and soft dry mode etc.
2.04.00
The split AC units shall be of reputed make.
-2-
SECTION-6
CHAPTER-10
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR OUTDOOR NON SEALED TYPE THREE PHASE
11 KV/433V DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS OF 200 & 400 KVA CAPACITIES
1.0
SCOPE:
This specification covers the design, engineering, manufacture, shop testing, supply &
delivery of oil immersed, naturally cooled, three-phase, 50 Hz, double-would, outdoor type
Distribution transformers of 200 &400KVA, capacity for use on systems with nominal
voltages of 11 KV. Any other parts not specifically mentioned in this specification, but
otherwise required for proper functioning of the equipment should be included by the
tenderer in his offer.
Transformers will be plinth mounted
2.0
STANDARDS:
The transformers shall conform in all respect to IS: 1180-1981 & IS: 2026-1977 except
where specified otherwise. Equipment meeting any other authoritative Standards which
ensures an equal or better quality than the standards mentioned above will also be
acceptable. In such cases the copy of standards (English Version) adopted should be
enclosed with the tender.
3.0
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:
As per Vol-II Section-1.
4.0
PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS OF THE TRANSFORMER
The transformer shall be suitable for outdoor service as step down transformer. The
electrical parameters of the transformer shall be as follows:-
5.0
6.0
1)
Rated HV voltage
11 KV
2)
Rated LV voltage
433 volts
3)
Connection (HV)
Delta
4)
Connection (LV)
Star neutral brought out
5)
Vector Group
Dyn11
6)
Material of winding
For 200 KVA Aluminium,
double wound type and for 400KVA
Copper double wound type
7)
Type of cooling
ONAN
8)
Max. current density in
HV & LV Winding
a)
b)
For aluminium wound 200 KVA T/F
1.5A/mm2
For copper wound T/F 400KVA
2.6 A/mm2
9)
Method of system earthing
NO-LOAD VOLTAGE RATIO
The no-load voltage ratio shall be 11000/433V.
TEMPERATURE RISE
Neutral solidly earthed system
The transformer shall be capable of operating continuously at its normal rating without
exceeding the temperature rise limit. The temperature rise shall not exceed the limits of
-1-
500C (measured by resistance) for transformer windings and 400C (measured by
thermometer) in top oil above the ambient temperature when tested in accordance with IS.
The transformer with higher temperature rise shall not be acceptable. Hot spot
temperature shall not exceed 950C when calculated on an annual weighted average
temperature of 350C as per IS:2026.
6.1
The limits of temperature rise mentioned above will have to be satisfied by the
manufacturer by carrying the Heat run test at the lowest negative tap by feeding losses
corresponding to the rated current of the tap.
7.0 (a) Equalization Formula:
The losses at principal tap of each transformer shall be stated in the tender ONAN rating
at full load at 750C.
For the purpose of arriving at comparable prices, the iron, copper and auxiliary losses
shall be capitalized as per capitalization formula given below:
=3,86,700( Wi + 0.45 Wc) Where
Wi = Iron (No load) Losses
Wc= Copper (Load Losses)
The maximum sealing of component and weightage average losses shall be as per clause
7.0 (b) and no positive tolerance shall be allowed on these values
In case losses of the T/F are found to be higher then the specified values at any stage
within three years from the date of commissioning the capitalized value of excess losses,
as compare to the specified value shall be recovered as per following capitalization
formula:Amount recoverable (Rs.)= 3,86,700(Wi + 0.45 Wc)
7.0 (b) Losses:The no load and load losses for 11/0.433 KV shall not exceed the values given in the
following table:KVA
No load losses in Load losses in Watts (Max) At Maximum
Rating
Watts (Max.)
75Deg.C.
Weighted
average
losses (watt)
200
400
3135
1600
400
750
5000
2700
These losses are maximum allowable and there would not be any positive tolerance
However, the manufacturer can offer losses less than above.
The Bidder shall quote No-Load loss in KW at the rated voltage and frequency. The load
loss in KW at principal tap at rated voltage, frequency & out put, for the temperature 75
degree centigrade at full load shall also be quoted. The Bidder shall guarantee these loss
figures.
7.1
Noise level
:
80 dB
Transformer offers shall be rejected if audible sound level is higher than the values
required by the owner.
8.0
IMPEDANCE:
The recommended percentage impedance at 750C is 4.5% for 200KVA and 400KVA T/F
with a tolerance as per IS:2026.
-2-
9.0
9.1
WINDING
The primary (HV) windings shall be connected in Delta and the secondary (LV) winding in
Star (Vector system DYn11) so as to produce a positive displacement of 30 degree from
the primary to secondary vectors of the same phase. The neutral of secondary windings
shall be brought out to a separate insulated neutral terminal. The neutral is to be solidly
earthed in a separate earth pit and the transformer body is to be connected to station
grounding system.
HV windings shall consist of single coil design. The copper wires for coil formation shall be
of sufficient cross-sectional area to impart desired mechanical strength. All delta leads
from HT coils as well as HT line leads should be taken out through DPC. The current
density in these leads should not exceed 0.8A/sq.mm.
9.2
The winding shall be so designed as to produce minimum out of balance forces in the
transformers. Transformers of 200 KVA shall be aluminium wound and sizes above 200
KVA shall be copper wound. The current density for aluminium wound transformer shall be
limited to 1.5A/mm sq. and for copper wound transformer shall be limited to 2.6A/mm.sq.
9.3
The winding design shall ensure that all the coil assemblies are of identical voltage ratio
and shall be interchangeable and repairing of the winding could be made easily without
special equipment.
9.4
The conductor used in the coil shall be best suitable to the equipment and all the
permanent current carrying joints in the winding and leads shall be properly sleeved and
crimped/brazed instead of jointing with solder or welding. All LV coils ends shall be
provided with brazed/crimped lugs and HV coil ends by brazing/crimping.
9.5
Double paper covering shall be used for winding insulation both for HV & LV windings.
Electrical grade epoxy coated insulated paper shall be used for inter-layer insulation of the
HV & LV coils, corrugated cylinder made of pre-compressed board shall be provided
between HV & LV winding. Angle shaped and rings made from pre-compressed board
shall be used between end coil and the core.
OR
For 200 KVA transformers DPC insulation shall be used, Electrical Grade Insulation Kraft
paper in layers of total thickness not less than 4 mm shall be used for interlayer
insulation, DPC and Kraft paper used shall be of uniform density and free from any foreign
particles and shall conform to IS:698/56 and latest amendments thereof. The end turn of
each layer shall be properly and fully covered to avoid interlayer flashover. Corrugated
Cylinder made from pre-compressed insulation board should preferably be used between
LV and HV windings. The insulation of coils shall be vacuum impregnated in oil to develop
full electrical strength in the windings. All material used in the insulation and assembly of
the winding shall be insoluble non catalytic and chemically inactive in the hot transformer
oil and shall not soften or otherwise be adversely effected under operating conditions.
The core and coil assembly shall be fully dried out in ‘Air Drying Oven’ till the coils are
shrunken to the designed level and are completely dried. Only then they will be
impregnated in the transformer oil.
9.6
Minimum gap of 25 mm shall be maintained between the end coils and core.
9.7
The overloading capacity of transformer shall be as per IS-6600.
9.8
The value of unbalance current shall not be more than 2% of the full load current.
10.0
10.1
CORE CONSTRUCTION
The core shall be constructed from high grade, non-aging Cold Rolled Grain Oriented
(CRGO) silicon steel laminations conforming to grade M4 or better. The maximum flux
-3-
density in any part of the cores and yoke at normal voltage and frequency shall be such
that the flux density with + 12.5% voltage variation from rated voltage or frequency
variation of -5% shall not exceed 1.6 Tesla. The bidder shall provide saturation curve of
the core material proposed to be used.
10.2
The design of magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharge development of
short circuit within itself or in the earthed clamping structure.
10.3
Each lamination shall be insulated such that it will not deteriorate due to mechanical
pressure and the action of hot transformer oil.
10.4 a) Core material shall be directly procured either from the manufacturer or through
their accredited marketing organization of repute and not through any agent.
10.4 b) All parts of the core shall be of robust design, capable of withstanding any shock to
which they may be subjected during handling, lifting, transportation, installation and
service including short circuit condition. Clamping of core and winding assembly
with tank should be done by angle iron pieces, bolted to tank wall.
10.4 c) Adequate arrangement shall be provided to enable the core and winding be lifted
by lifting lugs.
Use of seconds CRGO steel for core construction is strictly prohibited.
Bidder can –offer transformer made of other superior (Low, Loss) for material and
they should furnish design details in their bid. Successful bidders should submit
require type test certificates after issue of P.O. but before material offered for
inspection.
Note:
“The core material should be imported directly from the reputed manufacturer.
Core material shall be processed by slitting only. Core cutting/slitting be done in
front of inspecting officers deputed by HVPN.”
The tenderer shall ensure that the CRGO supplier should have BIS certification.
11.0
TANK CONSTRUCTION
11.1
The tank shall be of robust construction in accordance with the best engineering practice.
The main tank of the transformer shall be fabricated from tested quality of mild steel of
adequate thickness i.e. minimum 4.00 mm. (for side walls) and 6.00mm (for top & bottom
plates). The tank shall be valid (V shape welding fillet) inside of tank two outside welding
of tank to bear more pressure to avoid bursting.
11.2
To provide rigidity and to meet the pressure inside the tank, due to short circuit current,
the tank shall be suitably stiffened. The stiffeners wherever applicable are provided on all
the four side walls of the tank, designed not to retain water.
11.3
The tank cover shall be slightly sloping towards HV bushing and shall provide facilities for
draining of water.
11.4
The transformer tank shall be complete with al accessories, lifting lugs and shall be
designed as to allow the complete transformer tank, filled with oil to be lifted by crane or
other means without risk of any damage and transported by Rail/Road without straining
any joint and without causing leakage of oil.
11.5
Bolted inspection covers shall be provide on tank and top cover to inspect core, winding
and have access to the bottom of bushing.
-4-
11.6
The tank shall be capable of with standing the pressure of +/- 1 kg/cm2 without
deformation.
The permanent deflection of plate after pressure has been released shall not exceed the
values given below:
LENGTH OF PLATE
DEFLECTION
750 mm
5 mm
751-1250 mm
6 mm
12.0
FINISH
13.0
The exterior of the transformer tank and other ferrous fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned,
scraped and given a priming coat and two finishing coats of durable oil and weather
resisting paints or enamel. The colour of the finishing coats shall be dark admiralty grey
conforming to No. 632 of IS:5-1961 “Colours for Ready Mixed Paints (second revision)”.
CLEARANCES
The external electrical clearance between phase to phase and phase to earth shall be in
accordance with Clause 7.1 of IS: 2099 shall not be less than the values given below:Voltage
Medium
Clearance Phase to Clearance Phase to earth (mm)
Phase (mm)
11 KV
Air
255
205
433V
Air
75
55
The aforesaid clearances are minimum and no negative tolerance on these clearances
shall be allowed.
14.0
BUSHINGS
14.1
Terminal arrangement: The transformer shall be fitted with three high voltages and four
low voltage outdoor types porcelain bushing of appropriate voltage and current rating.
Each terminal including the neutral shall be distinctly marked and coloured for phase
voltage on both HV and LV sides. The system of marking shall be in accordance with the
latest amendment of relevant IS.
The electrical characteristics of high voltage bushing shall conform to latest version of IS:
2099 and IS: 3347. The low voltage bushing shall conform to latest version of IS: 7421. All
porcelain bushing shall be homogeneous, free from flaws effecting its mechanical strength
or dielectric quality. They should be well vitrified, uniformly glazed, tough and impervious
to moisture. The creepage distance of all the bushing shall be 25mm per KV of highest
system voltage suitable for heavily polluted atmosphere and the protected creepage
distance not less than 50% of total.
14.2
14.3
14.4
Bushing terminals: To avoid bimetallic action at the point of connection to the copper
windings and to the external aluminium cables/conductors, both- HV & LV bushing stems
shall be made of aluminium alloy/copper confirming to the requirement of IS:3347.
The terminal connectors shall receive ACSR on HT side. The terminals shall be directly
screwed on to the stem to secure effective sealing the bushing. The transformers shall be
provided with bimetallic connectors bushings both on HV & LV Side.
15.0
FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
15.1
The transformer shall be fitted with the following fittings & accessories.
-5-
(a)
Two earthing terminals
(b)
Oil level indicator
(c)
Lifting lugs and platform lugs
(d)
Rating, diagram and terminal marking plate(s)
(e)
Silica gel breather of approved design containing min. 0.25kg dehydrated silica get
(f)
Drain-cum-Sampling valve (steel) welded to the tank.
(g)
Thermometer pocket with dial type thermometer on tank cover.
(h)
Air Release Plug
(i)
Pressure relief device in the form of explosion release vent.
(j)
Filling hole having P1-1/4 thread (with cover) on the conservator.
(k)
Filter valve-2 nos. on top and bottom ends of tank at opposite sides.
(l)
Conservator with filling hole and drain plug.
(m)
Porcelain bushings with arcing horns and terminal connectors on HV side.
(n)
Porcelain bushings on LV side and HV side conforming to IS-3347, part-1 and III of
the latest version thereof with brass studs fitted with single gap arcing horns.
(o)
Off load tap changer (for above 200 KVA transformers with tapping range of +3%
to -6% in steps of 3% each with a locking device.
(p)
Bimetallic terminal connector for HV/LV Bushings connecting to ACSR.
(q)
PSR Radiators duly tested for leakage and pressure.
(r)
Plain rollers ( 4 nos. bi-directional) suitable for use on 1000 mm gauge track with
clamping device or base mounting arrangement as required.
Note: (i) The fittings listed above are indicative and any other fittings which are generally
required for satisfactory operation of the transformer are deemed to be included in
the quoted price of the transformer.
16.0
CONSERVATOR
16.1
A conservator shall be provided with each transformer.
The oil level gauge and the plain silica gel breathing device shall be fixed to the
conservator which shall also be provided with a drain plug and a filling hole with a cover
.In addition, the cover of the main tank shall be provided with an air release plug to enable
trapped air to be released unless the conservator is so located as to eliminate the
possibility of air being trapped in the main tank.
16.2
The inside diameter of the pipe connecting the conservator to the main tank shall be within
20 to 50 mm and it should project into the conservator in such a way that its end is
approximately 20 mm above the bottom of the conservator, so as to create a sump for
collection of impurities. The minimum oil level (corresponding to -50C) should be above the
-6-
sump level. Breather pipe should be connected at top of the conservator tank with two
bends at right angles.
17.0
SEALING GASKETS
All sealing washers and gaskets shall be made of oil and heat resistant Nitrile/Neoprene
rubber/synthetic rubber bonded cork type RC-70C Gaskets.
The oil level in the transformer shall be made up to the required level while the transformer
filled with oil is maintained at a temperature of 450C.
All steel screws, nuts and fasteners exposed to atmosphere shall be either galvanized or
cadmium plated.
18.0
TRANSFORMER OIL
The transformer shall be supplied complete with first filling of oil. The insulating oil shall
comply with the requirements of IS:335/1983 with latest version thereof. Oil shall be filled
under vacuum with a vacuum type filtering machine.
19.0
BASE MOUNTING ARRANGEMENT
The under base of all transformers shall be provided to make them suitable for fixing
mounting on plinth.
20.0
RATING AND TERMINAL MARKING PLATES(S)
Each transformer shall be provided with non-detachable rating diagram and terminal
marking plate(s) of weather proof material, fitted in a visible position and showing the
complete information as given under clause 16 of IS:1980 (Part-I)-1981or any authoritative
standards for transformers including the following details:i)
HVPNL order no. & Date
ii)
Date of inspection
iii)
Property of HVPN.
RADIATORS
These shall be made of ERW tubes with minimum side thickness of 18 SWG. These tubes
should be used in vertic formation without any bending and properly welded on both ends
to common headers. These radiators should be individually test for leakage and pressure
tests etc. before welding with the main tank.
21.0
22.0
TESTS AND INSPECTION
All the tests shall be carried out in accordance with clause 16 of IS (Part-I) 1977
22.1
ROUTINE TESTS:
All transformers shall be subjected to the following routine tests at the manufacturer’s
works in accordance with IS 2026 and 1180 (Part-I): a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
22.2
Measurement of winding resistance.
Ratio, Polarity and phase relationship.
Measurement of Impedance voltage/short circuit impedance.
Load losses.
No load losses and no load current.
Insulation resistance.
Induced over voltage withstand.
Separate source voltage withstand.
Oil leakage test.
Magnetic balance test and magnetizing current and low voltage.
TYPE TESTS
The following type tests shall be made on the transformers in addition to the routine tests
from (a) to (f) as indicated in 22.1 above: -7-
i)
Temperature rise test shall be carried out on one unit from each lot as offered for
inspection.
ii)
Air pressure tests: The tank shall be fixed with a dummy cover with all fittings
including bushings in position and shall be subjected to the following pressure
created inside the tank:
a)
0.8 kg/cm2 above the atmospheric pressure for 10 minutes.
b)
A vacuum corresponding to (-) 0.7 kg/cm2 for 10 minutes. Permanent deflection of
flat plate after pressure has been released, shall not exceed the value given below:
LENGTH OF PLATE
i)
ii)
iii)
DEFLECTION
Upto 750 mm
5 mm
751-1250 mm
6 mm
Impulse voltage withstand test on all the three limbs of HT side as per clause 13 of
ISS 2026/1991/Part-II conducted at some recognized/Govt. Test house not more
than 7 years old from the date of bid opening shall required to be submitted. The
dispatches shall only be allowed after successful conductance of this test.
SHORT CIRCUIT TEST: This test shall be made in accordance with the details
specified in IS 2026/1977 conducted at some recognized/Govt. Test house OR
from reputed Lab Abroad not more than 7 years old from the date of bid opening
shall required to be submitted. The dispatches shall only be allowed after
successful conductance of this test. If short circuit tests on unit of similar design of
transformer with capacity as per schedule had been conducted earlier than
certificate shall be produced along with tender and the test need not be conducted.
Unbalance Current Test: The value of unbalanced current indicated by the
ammeter shall not be more than 2% of the full load current.
No supplies will be allowed to be despatched without inspection by the HVPNL/its
representative and without carrying out the impulse and short circuit tests
satisfactorily.
22.3
FLUX DENSITY TEST:
The Bidder shall arrange to conduct the flux density test on one of the cores of the
transformers in each lot so as to ensure that the flux density does not exceed the
maximum specified limit of 1.6 Tesla at normal voltage & frequency.
22.4
OIL TEST
At least two samples of oil shall be drawn out of any two sizeable lots from total ordered
quantity to ensure that the oil used complies with the requirements of the Specification as
per ISS-335. However, inspecting officer can draw oil samples from any number of lots if
considered necessary so as to ensure that transformer oil conforming to ISS is being
used. The despatches for such lots shall be allowed only after receipt of satisfactory oil
test results.
22.5
OIL LEAKAGE TEST:
The air pressure tests provided as a routine test shall be carried out on 10% of the
transformers in each lot. The firm shall ensure to get this test carried out strictly as per
relevant ISS.
22.6
PHYSICAL CHECK ON VARIOUS DIMENSIONS (INTERNAL & EXTERNAL WEIGHT
CLEARANCE ETC.)
One No. transformer from each lot shall be opened for checking of core weight, size and
weight of HT & LT conductor, quantity of oil and various clearances etc.
-8-
22.7
INSPECTION
The inspection shall be carried out by an outside inspection agency to be nominated by
the Nigam’s representative. All tests & inspection shall be made at the place of
manufacturer unless otherwise specifically agrees upon between the manufacturer and
the HVPNL at the time of placing the order. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector
representing the HVPNL all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy himself that the
material is being furnished in accordance with this Specification.
22.8
The HVPNL has the right to have the tests carried out at its own cost by an independent
agency whenever there is any dispute regarding the quality of supply. If the transformer
fails in the tests, the cost shall be borne by the Bidder and if it passes, the cost shall be
borne by the Nigam.
22.9
The purity test of aluminium for winding shall be got conducted on sample of aluminium for
assessing its quality, from two independent NABL accredited laboratories.
23.0
INSULATION RESISTANCE OF WINDINGS:
The minimum insulation resistance values in Mega ohms between winding and earth when
the transformer is filled with oil should be as below: INSULATED RESISTANCE VALUES IN MEGA OHMS BETWEEN WINDING AND
EARTH
11000 Volt(HV)
433 Voltage(LV)
200C
800
400
300C
400
200
400C
200
100
500C
100
50
600C
50
25
The insulation resistance values will be measured with a 2500V, preferably motorized
meggar and of some good standard manufacturer such as M/s Evershed & Vignole make.
24.0
TEST VOLTAGE
Transformers shall be capable of withstanding the power frequency and impulse test
voltages prescribed as below: NOMINAL SYSTEM
VOLTAGE
11KV (rms)
HIGHEST SYSTEM IMPULSE
VOLTAGE
TEST
VOLTAGE
12KV (rms)
75KV (peak)
POWER FREQUENCY
TEST VOLTAGE
28KV (rms)
25.0 TOLERANCE OF ELECTRICAL PERFORMANCE
Tolerance shall be according to clause 11 of IS:2026 (part-I/General:1977).
26.0 DRAWING AND LITERATURE
The bidder shall submit four sets of final versions of complete and correct equipment
drawings for purchaser’s approval along with bid in a sealed envelope. The purchaser
shall communicate his comments/approval on the drawings to the supplier within 21 days
from the date of issue of LOI. The submission of complete and correct readable drawings
for approval is the responsibility of the bidder/supplier. The supplier shall, if so required by
the purchaser, modify the drawings and resubmit four copies of the modified drawings for
purchaser’s approval within two weeks from the date of purchaser’s comments. Then, the
purchaser shall approve the revised drawings within two weeks from the date of its receipt.
-9-
The successful bidder shall also supply one set of instruction manual containing handling,
installation, testing and commissioning of equipment at the time of despatch of material to
the consignee with each equipment for our field staff. In addition, 5 sets of such bound
manuals and final approved drawings shall be supplied for reference & record in our
design office.
One set of all the approved drawings and manual of instructions will be supplied
along with each equipment without which the supply will not be considered as
complete supply.
27.0 PACKING
Transformers shall be delivered suitably packed. Although the method of packing is left to
the discretion of the manufacturer, it should be robust enough for rough handling, that is
occasioned during transportation by rail/road.
- 10 -
SECTION-6
CHAPTER-11
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 13.608MVAR 11KV AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHED
CAPACITOR BANKS AT 66/11KV Power T/F.
1.
SCOPE:
1.1. This specification covers design, engineering manufacture, testing at manufacturer’s
works, supply and delivery, erection, testing and commissioning of 11 KV outdoor
types 3 phase capacitor banks at site for out door installation along with necessary
equipments in all respect. The ratings mentioned in the specification are given as
per minimum requirement. Equipment of higher rating, if required be mentioned
during bidding by the firm, otherwise it will be the responsibility of the firm to install
the capacitor bank as per requirement without any extra cost.
1.2. The specification covers 3 phase, 50 Hz, Out door type automatically switched shunt
capacitor bank intended for installation at 11 KV side of 66/11KV power
transformers in various sub-stations. The equipment covered in this specification
comprises Capacitor banks in steps, 0.2 % Series Reactors, Vacuum contactors, HT
Fuses, RVT, CT, CRCA cubicle etc.
2. Climate Condition:1.
Max. ambient air temperature
2.
Min. ambient air temperature
3.
Average Daily Max. Ambient temperature
4.
Max. yearly weighed average ambient
temperature
5.
Max. altitude above mean sea level
(Meters)
6.
Minimum Relative Humidity (% age)
7.
Maximum Relative Humidity (% age)
8.
Avg. No. of Rainy days/year
9.
Avg. annual rainfall
10.
Maximum wind pressure
3.
500C
- 2.50C
400C
320C
1000
26
100
120
900mm
195 Kg./m Sq.
Applicable Standard:
3.1 Unless otherwise modified in this specification, the capacitor shall comply with latest
version of IS: 13925:1998. The other components such as Vacuum Circuit Breaker,
Isolator, CT, PT, LA, Vacuum Contactors, HT fuses, Series Reactors, Auxiliary
equipment shall comply with the latest version of relevant Indian
Standards/International standards.
A.
Capacitor banks:
The capacitor banks are for use in a 3 phase 50 Hz 11 KV system. Capacitor bank shall
consists series/parallel combination of small units of capacitor cells per phase, each
with an out put rating of 400/200 KVAR, 7.3 KV single phase for 18000KVAR Capacitor
Bank. Capacitor units should be connected in externally star with appropriate number
of capacitors in parallel as per requirement. For Example 3 single units connected in
star to obtain 1200/600 KVAR at 12.65 KV 3 phase or 2 capacitors units in parallel per
phase with 3 phase connection in star to obtain 2400/1200KVAR at 12.65 KV 3 phase.
Necessary number of steps should be provided to meet requirement given in the
schedule.
Table 1.0: Capacitor Bank Rating:
Total
Step
Fixed
Sr. Transformer Capacitor
Configuratio
Bank Rating base
No Rating
configur- n kVAr X No.
at 12.65KV
of units
ation
1
25/31.5MVA,
18000KVAR
3600KVAR 3600KVARx4
3600KVAR+
66/11kV T/F
or
3600 KVAR
1800KAVARx8 x4 (with 400KVAR
Cell) or 3600KVAR
+1800KVARx8
(with 200KVAR
Cell)
Each capacitor unit shall be provided with external HT HRC fuse
12 KV class with suitable current rating. Capacitor shall meet following specifications:
4.
Temperature Category:
The capacitor shall be suitable for operation with upper limit of ambient
0
60 C.
of
temperature
5.
Rated Voltage:
The rated voltage of 3 phase capacitor banks shall be 11 KV (phase to phase) and
maximum operational voltage shall be rated for 12.65 kV.
6.
Rated Output:
The Rated output of 3 phase capacitor banks shall be 3600, 7200, 10800, 14400,
18000KVAR at the maximum operational voltage of 12.65 KV intended for use in suitable
combination on power transformers rating of 31.5 MVA. The standard basic unit rating of
capacitors (single phase) shall be 400KVAR. The unit shall be connected in externally star
formation with floating neutral.
Permissible Overloads:
For capacitor covered in this specification, the maximum permissible overloads with
regard to voltage, current and reactive output shall not exceed the limits specified in
IS:13925.
7.
8.
Power Loss:
The power loss in capacitors shall not exceed 0.2 watt / KVAR (Subject to tolerance
of + 10 %).
The capacitors offered should be built from best material obtainable and should develop
min. losses.
For comparison of various offers, equalization charges on account of differences in losses
of capacitors in various offers shall be made at the rate of Rs. 66676/- per K.W.
9.
Capacitor bank losses should be given at 500 C. The successful bidder shall also be
penalised at the rate given, if during testing measured losses are found to be more than
the guaranteed losses.
Discharge device:
Suitable discharge device shall be connected across the capacitor unit in accordance with
the provision of IS:13925. The discharge device shall reduce the residual voltage
from the crest value of the rated voltage to 50 V or less within 10 Minutes after the
capacitor is disconnected from the source of the supply.
10. Earthing Connections:
The container of each capacitor unit shall be provided with suitable earthing terminal
clearly marked with “Earth” symbol.
11. Protective Fuses:
The capacitor units shall be provided with either internal or external fuses, as per
standard practice of the manufacturer shall supply the external HRC fuses together with
fixing accessories; a set of six spare fuse links shall be supplied along with each capacitor
bank.
12. General Requirements:
The capacitor shall be of non-PCB type, using polypropylene film as the dielectric.
Complete mounting brackets supporting insulators and all other components for
formation of capacitor banks racks shall be supplied along with the capacitor units.
Necessary foundation bolts/nuts shall also be supplied. The outside of the capacitor
container and other structures should have smooth and tidy look and should be coated
with the weather proof, corrosion-resistant paint of white or light grey.
13. Marking:
The capacitor unit shall be provided with a rating plate and terminal markings as
stipulated in IS: 13925.
14. TESTS:
The bidder shall submit the type test report along with the bid. The switched capacitors
shall be subjected to all the type, routine and acceptance test in accordance with IS:
13925.
B. AUTOMATIC CONTROL UNIT
15. Switching Arrangement:
The Automatic control unit shall be provided inside the control room to continuously
monitor total KAVR requirement on secondary side of the transformer and shall
automatically switch ON or switch OFF the capacitor banks through the operation of 12
KV Vacuum Contactor. Overriding provision shall be made for electrical switching ON or
OFF of the capacitor switch by the operator from the ACU control box.
16. Time Delay:
The switching ON operation will take place for period of 10 minutes. The switching OFF
operation of relevant steps will be instantaneous.
17. Switching logic for optimum utilization of capacitor bank shall be submitted by bidder and
shall be got approved from Purchaser. The decision of purchaser in this regard will be
final.
18. Controls:
The Automatic control unit shall instantly switch OFF the incomer VCB of capacitor
bank in the following contingencies occurring in any of the phases.
a) Voltage increased by 10% above the rated voltage of 11 KV.
b) Power transformer current impedance (due to single phasing and for any other
reasons) between any of the two phases exceeding 20 % of the lowest.
c) Current increases in any capacitor unit by 30% above the rated current (only the
relevant capacitor switch will open).
Current between any of the two phases of the capacitor bank differs more than 15%
of the lowest current of the 3 phases (only the relevant capacitor switch will open).
19. Monitoring Facility:
A suitable ammeter with selector switch to indicate the capacitor current in each
phases of the capacitor bank shall be provided on the ACU panel inside the control
room. Indicating lamps will also be provided to indicate ON & OFF
status of each capacitor bank.
20. Control Power:
The DC control voltage for operation of the ACU shall be taken from sub-station
battery. The standard DC control voltage at HVPNL Substations is 220 Volts.
21. Temperature Variation:
The control equipment and associate circuitry shall be suitable for operation at an
o
o
ambient temperature in the range of -5 C to (+) 60 C.
22. Protection of ACU:
Besides in-built protection against lines surges and transient over voltages, suitable
fuses shall be provided for protection against over current. The ACU shall remain fully
functional during and after line surges and transient over voltages.
23. Control Unit Casing:
Except for the terminals, the ACU shall be enclosed in a suitable casing so as to avoid
ingress of dust.
24. SCOPE
This specification covers 11 KV, 50 Hz, out-door type automatic capacitor switches
suitable for switching capacitor banks of 3600 KVAR ratings or any other higher rating
specified.
25. APPLICABLE STANDARDS
Unless otherwise stipulated in this specification the capacitor switch shall comply with
the latest version of IS:9920 (AC Switches for voltages above 1000 V).
26. RATED VOTAGE
The rated voltage for the capacitor switch shall be 12 KV. This represents the highest
system voltage corresponding to the nominal system voltage of 11 KV.
27. RATED CURRENT
The switches shall be suitable for 200A for step configuration of 3600/1800KVAR
Switches.
28. RATED CAPACITIVE SWITCHING CURRENT
Note: The capability of the switch shall also take into account the parallel switching of
capacitor bank steps.
29. RATED SHORT TIME CURRENT
The rated short time symmetrical current for 1 second shall be 10KA (rms A.C.
component).
30. RATED MAKING CURRENT
The rated making current shall be 2.5 times the rms value of the a.c. component of
rated short time capacity.
31. BASIC IMPULSE LEVEL (BIL)
The rated basic impulse level of switch to earth as also across the open terminals
shall be 75 KV.
32. CONTROL SUPPLY
The control power for closing the switch shall be 230 V single phase AC supply. The
closing mechanism shall be suitable for a voltage variation of (+) 10% to (-)20%.
33. DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENSTS
33.1 TYPE
The switches shall be of either vacuum or SF6 type.
33.2. The capacitor switches shall be of three phase construction and shall be suitable
for remote operation.
33.3 The capacitor switch shall be suitable for outdoor installation and shall have sealed
weather proof type construction.
33.4 The capacitor switch shall be provided with a mechanical indicator to show whether
the contact is in open/closed position, locally, as also through indication on the ACU
panel. Provision shall also be made for manual closing and opening.
33.5 The capacitor switch shall be provided with a mechanical indicator to show whether
the contact is in open/closed position, locally, as also through indication on the
ACU panel. Provision shall also be made for manual closing and opening.
33.6 The bushing provided on the switch shall have clamp type of terminals to directly
receive aluminium conductors up to 10mm dia in both horizontal and vertical
directions. The terminal arrangement shall be such as to avoid bimetallic
corrosion.
34. OPERATING MECHANSIM
The operating mechanism shall be either solenoid or motor charged spring for
which the control supply shall be as per clause 32.
35.
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ENDURANCE
The switch shall be capable of performing not less than 10,000 mechanical
operations and 10,000 electrical operations at 200A capacitive current without
getting damaged.
36. MARKING
The capacitor switch shall be provided with a legible and indelibly marked name
plate with the following:
a) Name of utility (i.e. HVPNL)
b) Name of the manufacturer.
c) Type, designation and serial number.
d) Rated voltage and current.
e) Rated frequency.
f) Number of poles.
g) Rated short time current (symmetrical).
h) Rated making current.
i) Rated capacitive switching current.
j) P.O.No.
37.
TESTS
The switch shall be subjected to the following tests in accordance with the IS:9920
(Part-IV).
37.1 Type Tests
a) Tests to verify the insulation level, including withstand tests at power frequency
voltages on auxiliary equipment.
b) Tests to prove that the temperature rise of any part does not exceed the specified
values.
c) Making and breaking tests including tests for the rated capacitive current.
d) Tests to prove the capability of the switch to carry the rated short time current.
e) Tests to prove satisfactory operation and mechanical/electrical endurance.
37.2 Routine Tests
a) Power frequency voltage dry tests.
b) Voltage tests for auxiliary circuits.
c) Measurement of the resistance of the main circuits.
d) Tests to prove satisfactory operation.
D. AUXILARY EQUIPMENTS
38. Isolator:
38.1 The Isolator shall be outdoor type, 11 KV, 1250Amp, Single throw Double Break, off
load type, triple pole, vertical gang operated switch and with earth switch.
38.2
Tests: The Isolator shall be type tested and shall be subjected to routine and
acceptance test in accordance with IS: 1818-1972.
38.3 The bidder shall submit guaranteed technical particulars along with their bid.
39. 11 KV Indoor Vacuum Circuit Breaker with Panel: Already available in 11kV
Panel Board Specification.
40. Current Transformer:
1.0 The current transformers shall be dry type, suitable current ratio and burden for
measuring the capacitor current shall form part of the equipment to be supplied.
These CT’s shall be form an either an integral part of Indoor VCB or integral part of
Capacitor bank enclosure or may be separate outdoor type on structure. The accuracy
class for the purpose of measuring the current shall be1.0.
1.1 Tests: The Current Transformer shall be type tested and shall be subjected to
routine and acceptance test in accordance with IS: 2705.
1.2 The bidder shall submit guaranteed technical particulars along with their bid.
41. Lightning Arrestor:
1.0 The specification covers the supply, delivery, erection, testing & commissioning of 9
KV, 10 KA, station class heavy rating, gapless, metal (zinc) oxide surge arrestors
complete along with clamps, complete fitting and accessories for installation on
outdoor type 11 KV switchgear, transmission lines, transformers etc.
1.1 Tests: The Lightning Arrestors shall be type tested and shall be subjected to routine
and acceptance test in accordance with IS: 3070.
1.2 The bidder shall submit guaranteed technical particulars along with their bid.
42. Residual Voltage Transformer:
1.0 The Residual Voltage Transformer shall be dry type, 11 KV class, 5 Limb, with three
windings i.e. Star/ Star – Open delta. The Primary winding-I in Star, Secondary-I in
Star for metering and Secondary-II in Open delta for protection.
1.1 Tests: The residual Voltage Transformer shall be type tested and shall be subjected
to routine and acceptance test in accordance with IS: 3156.
1.2 The bidder shall submit guaranteed technical particulars along with their bid.
43. Vacuum Contactors:
1.0 The Vacuum contactor shall be 12 KV Class, 200 Amps, Three pole Vacuum
contactors suitable for capacitor switching. It shall be electrically (solenoid) operated
with operational voltage of 230 Volts AC or 220V DC and rated short time
symmetrical current for 1 second shall be 10KA (rms A.C. component).
1.1 Tests: The vacuum contactors shall be type tested and shall be subjected to routine
and acceptance test in accordance with IS/IEC.
1.2 The bidder shall submit guaranteed technical particulars along with their bid.
44. HT HRC Fuses:
1.0 Suitable indoor type 11 KV HRC fuses along with the mounting insulators etc. to
provide proper protection for the entire installation shall form part of the equipment
to be supplied. The rupturing capacity of the fuses shall be 12.5 KA.
45. Series Reactors:
1.0.0.2 % Series reactor per phase per step of capacitor rating for inrush current
restriction to be connected on neutral end as per IS: 5553. The rated voltage shall be
12 KV. The reactor shall be dry type single phase reactors mounted on post insulators
and designed to carry 130 % of rated current continuously without exceeding the
temperature rise & shall be applicable for thermal class of insulation used. The reactor
shall be mounted inside outside the capacitor cubicle on foundation.
1.1 Tests: The series reactor shall be type tested and shall be subjected to routine and
acceptance test in accordance with IS: 5553.
1.2 The bidder shall submit guaranteed technical particulars along with their bid.
46. 11 KV HT Cable (XLPE):
A Power Cable:
1.0 11 KV power cable shall be hot cured XLPE of following size conforming to IS: 7098
(P-II) amended latest.
11 KV Incoming:
Three/Single core 2x400 Sq. MM. 11KV (E). Jointing kit shall be heat shrink type as
per latest relevant IS specification for indoor and out door utilization matching with
the above cables.
[
1.1 Cable Jointing: Jointing should be heat shrink type. All materials required for such type of jointing of
XLPE cable shall be supplied by the contractor. The work shall be carried out only by
licensed/ experienced cable jointer holding necessary license of cable jointing of
appropriate grade. Sufficient surplus cable in the form of loop shall be left on both
sides of the cable.
B
Control cable:
The control cable shall conform to IS: 1554 (Part-I) 1976. All control cable shall be of
copper and armored type. The bidder may furnish cable such schedule after
finalization of sub-station layout, associated cable connection.
47. Capacitor Cubicle:
It shall be free standing outdoor type sheet steel enclosure fabricated from 2 mm.
thick CRCA sheets. Capacitor cubical shall be mounted on mild steel channel frame
and base frame shall be provided with mounting holes for fixing on concrete
foundation. All doors and covers shall be designed to avoid ingress of water,
moisture, dust etc. and shall be provided with suitable gaskets to achieve IP-55
degree of protection. Covers and doors shall be provided with electrical interlocks to
avoid access to live parts. In case some unauthorized person opens the door or
covers, the main incomer breaker should be tripped. Viewing glasses shall be
provided to view inside parts like fuses, contactors. CFL type internal panel lighting
shall also be provided to have proper view in the night. Capacitor enclosure shall be
duly painted with base coat of Epoxy based primer and final coat of polyurethane
paint. FRP canopy shall be provided at the top and which projects about 200 mm
beyond cubicle on all sides. All LT internal wiring shall be fire retardant cable of
2.5sq.mm. All cable entries shall be from bottom through cable glands of suitable
size. HT XLPE cable entry shall be through a cable entry box mounted on cubicle or
fixed separately on foundation and coupled to the cubicle. Necessary Danger plate &
Name plate etc shall be provided at prominent places. All other necessary fittings and
accessories should be provided by manufacturer to ensure safe and smooth operation
of the equipment.
48. SUBMISSION AND APPROVAL OF DRAWINGS:
Following drawings and technical documents shall be submitted along with the bid.
• Technical data sheet
• GA drawings.
• Bill of Material.
• General Technical Particulars.
49. INSTALLATION OPERATION AND MAINTAINANCE:
The supplier shall provide:
1) Necessary manual on installation, operation and maintain ace as also the schedule
for the routine testing or check ups of all the equipments covered by the
installation.
2) List of recommended spares indicating prices and specialized test equipments
required for the routine testing of the system.
50. GUIDANCE FOR PROCUREMENT:
The entire equipment covered under this specification shall be covered as a single
package to avoid the problem of mismatching for maintenance etc.
51. WARRANTY:
The suppler shall guarantee satisfactory performance of the complete capacitor bank
installation for a period of 18 months from the date of supply or 12 months from the
date of commissioning, which ever is earlier. During the warranty period all
repairs/replacements shall be carried out free of cost.
52. INSPECTION:
All tests and inspection shall be made at the place of the manufacturer unless
otherwise especially agreed upon by the manufacturer and the purchaser at the time
of purchase. The manufacturer shall afford the inspector representing the purchaser,
all reasonable facilities, without charge, to satisfy him that the material being
supplied is in accordance with the specification.
The purchaser has the right to get the tests carried out at his own cost from an
independent agency, whenever there is a dispute regarding the quality of the supply.
The manufacturer shall be responsible to pay penalty of Rs 20,000/- for each
occasion at which the fake inspection call has been made or the material is rejected
during testing/inspection by the authorized agency/representative of the Nigam.
This penalty would be in addition to the expenses incurred by the Nigam in
deputing the Inspecting Officer, carrying out such inspection.
53. Challenge Clause:The material offered/received after the inspection by the authorized inspecting officer
may again be subjected to the test for or any parameter from any testing house/inhouse technique of the Nigam & the results if found deviating un-acceptable or not
complying to approved GTP’s the bidder shall arrange to supply the replacement
within thirty (30) days of such detection at his cost including to & fro transportation.
In addition , penalty @10% of cost of the inspected lot of material shall be imposed.
HARYANA VIDYUT PRASARAN NIGAM LIMITED
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF
EXTRUDED FRLS PVC TYPE
COPPER CONTROL CABLE (ARMOURED)
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-6 Chapter-12 Armoured Cont. Cable EXTRUDED FRLS PVC TYPE.doc
-1-
LIST OF CONTENTS
CLAUSE NO
1.01
1.02
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.07
1.08
1.09
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
APPENDIX 'A'
APPENDIX 'B'
DESCRIPTION
SCOPE
STANDARDS
ARMOURING
INSULATION
MATERIAL
PACKING
TEST AND INSPECTION
QUANTITY
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
LIST OF REFERENCES
DEVIATION FROM THE SPECIFICATION
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
MARKING
INSTRUCTIONS FOR STORAGE
PAGE NO.
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENT
GURANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
7
8
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-6 Chapter-12 Armoured Cont. Cable EXTRUDED FRLS PVC TYPE.doc
-2-
1.01
SCOPE :This specification covers the manufacture testing supply and delivery of P.V.C
insulated, extruded FRLS PVC armoured copper control cables. The cables
are required for 66kV voltage level circuits at 66kV Sub Station for the
supervision, control & protection of H.V. power transformers and H.V
transmission circuits. The reliability and long life of the control cable is
therefore of paramount importance. All the control cables offered against this
specification must bear I.S.I. certification mark.
1.02
STANDARDS:Copper control cable to be supplied shall be P.V.C insulated P.V.C Sheathed
(FRLS), galvanized steel wire armoured for indoor and outdoor applications in
air, in ground, in water and in concrete trenches. The control cables shall
conform in all respects to the requirements of the latest edition of IS-1554
(Part-I) 1988 and its subsequent amendment (s), if any.
1.03
ARMOURING:The insulated cores shall be provided with inner sheath armouring and
extruded FRLS PVC outer sheath as specified in standards stated under
point 1.02 above. The control cable offered shall be suitable for use in
systems upto 1100 volts.
The conductors shall be composed of plan annealed high conductivity copper
which before stranding shall be approximately circular in section, smooth,
uniform in quality and free from scale, inequalities, spills, splits and other
defects. The conductors shall conform to appropriate dimensions and
resistance as per IS-1554 (part-I & II) 1988. The armouring shall be arranged
over the inner sheath nominal diameter over the insulation of inner sheath
does not exceed 13 mm. The armour of cable having a specified nominal dia
greater than 13 mm shall consist of either galvanized round steel wires or
galvanized steel strips. The dimension of the galvanized steel wires/strips
shall conform to IS:1554 (part-I) 1988. The steel wires of strips used for
armouring shall confirm to IS-3975-1967. The direction of lay of armour shall
be opposite to that of outer layer of outer layer of cores.
1.04
INSULATION:
The basic material approved as insulating compound shall consist of
compounded polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or suitable co-polymers of which major
constituent shall be vinyl chloride or mixture of polyvinyl chloride and suitable
co-polymers which have been suitable compounded and processed so as to
comply with the requirement of IS-1554 (part-I) 1988.
The PVC compound going into the formation of insulation shall also comply
with the provisions of IS-5831-1978 PVC insulation and sheath of electric
cable. The insulation shall not crack or retract in normal use.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-6 Chapter-12 Armoured Cont. Cable EXTRUDED FRLS PVC TYPE.doc
-3-
The colour code of the cores of control cable shall be as per clause 10.1 of IS1554 (part-I) 1988. However, the outer PVC sheath shall be black or Grey.
The colour coding as employed in the formation of the cables for individual
cores and sheath shall be indicted in the bid. The PVC/co-polymer compounds
going into the formation of the outer sheathing shall afford a high degree of
mechanical protection besides being oil and weather resistant.
1.05
MATERIAL:
All the material used in the manufacture of the cables shall be of the best
available quality with regard to strength durability and shall also be
manufactured according to best engineering practices.
1.06
PACKING:
The cable shall be supplied in reels so constructed as to avoid any damage to
the cable.
The reels should be able to withstand rough handling during transportation
and storage any loss on account of improper design of reel shall be borne by
the supplier. The bidder shall clearly state the standard/lengths which are
cable shall be supplied alongwith tolerance if any in their quotations. The
cable wound on one drum shall be of continuos length and minimum length of
control cable per drum shall not be less than 500 meters + 5%. However, the
variation in total ordered quantity shall be limited to + 2%.
1.07
TEST AND INSPECTION:
1.07.1
TYPE TESTS:
All armoured (FRLS) copper control cables would comply with the requirement
of type tests as per IS-1554 (part-I) 1988 read with its subsequent
amendment(s) if any. The type test report should not be more than seven
years old reckoned from the date of opening of the price bid. However, those
firms who do not possess above mentioned type test report shall have to
submit type test report in the event of order within thirty days of issue of LOA.
1.07.2
ACCEPTANCE TEST:
The control cables would be subjected to tests laid down in para 15.2 of IS1554 (part-I) 1988 before accepting a lot at the time of inspection.
1.07.3
ROUTING TESTS:
Tests laid down in para 15.3 of IS-1554 (part-I) 1988 any other would be
carried out in the presence of HVPN's representative and the test report would
be submitted to the Chief Engineer/MM, HVPNL, Panchkula for approval
before effecting despatch of armoured copper control cables.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-6 Chapter-12 Armoured Cont. Cable EXTRUDED FRLS PVC TYPE.doc
-4-
1.08
QUANTITY:
The required quantity of the cable is as per the schedule of requirement
appendix 'A' to the specification. The length of the cable may be increased or
decreased by 10% at the time of placement of purchase order or thereafter but
in any case before the expiry of the contract. The contract shall supply such
additional cable lengths on the same rates, terms and conditions.
1.09
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:
The bidder shall give in his bid the guaranteed technical particular of the
cables as per Appendix ‘B’ attached. Any additional information considered
necessary by bidder (s) with a view to highlight the technical aspects of his
offer may also be supplied under this head. The bidder(s) shall clearly state
the current rating factors applicable to control cable as per item 23 of appendix
'B'.
1.10
LIST OF REFERENCES:
List of references of similar cable already supplied with complete detail shall
be furnished.
1.11
DEVIATION FROM THE SPECIFICATION:
This should be clearly listed and brought out.
1.12
CLIMATE CONDITIONS:
The control cables are required to operate satisfactorily under the following
site conditions:a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
1.13
Maximum temperature
Minimum temperature
Maximum relative humidity
Minimum relative humidity
Isoceraunic level
No. of rainy days per year
Average rainfall per year
Altitude
50°C
-2.5°C
100%
26%
45
120
900 mm
Below 1000 meters above
mean sea level.
MARKING:
Every cable drum shall be clearly marked with indelible ink of with suitable
weather resistant pain and shall bear the following particulars.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
Manufacturer named and trade mark, if any
Purchase order No. and date
Year of manufacture.
Nominal sectional area of conductor of the cable
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-6 Chapter-12 Armoured Cont. Cable EXTRUDED FRLS PVC TYPE.doc
-5-
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
1.14
No. of cores
Type of cable and voltage for which it is suitable
Length of cable on the drum
Gross weight of the drum
Weight of tare
Direction of rolling the drum.
INSTRUCTION FOR STORAGE:
Detailed instruction in regard to safe and proper storage of armoured control
cables in our stores would be made available by the successful bidder (s) well
before commencing despatch of the material.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-6 Chapter-12 Armoured Cont. Cable EXTRUDED FRLS PVC TYPE.doc
-6-
APPENDIX 'A'
SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENTS
Sr. No.
Description
Qty. (in KMs)
As per indent.
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-6 Chapter-12 Armoured Cont. Cable EXTRUDED FRLS PVC TYPE.doc
-7-
APPENDIX 'B'
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULAR
To be filled in separately for each size of the armoured control cable.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Name of manufacture
Year of manufacture
No of cores
Cross-section of cores
No. and diameter of wires
Shape of conductor
Material of conductor
Current carrying capacity
Insulation resistance
Insulation thickness and material
Thickness & material of inner sheath
Nominal dia over inner sheath
Conductor resistance
Colour scheme of cores
Thickness and material of outer sheath
Test voltages both A.C. and D.C
Type of armouring
Cross section details of the galvanized steel wire/strips
Maximum dia over armouring
Length of cable per drum
Net weight per drum length
Gross weight per drum
Current rating factors based on :a) Variation in ground temperature
b) Variation in ambient air temperature
c) Groups laid direct in ground in horizontal formation
d) Groups laid direct in ground in tier formation
e) Depth of laying in ground
f) Ground laid in covered trenches in horizontal formation.
24. Standard
E:\DATA AFTER 12.07.2011\REC Projects\REC-21D 06.01.2015\REC-21D Technical Document\Section-6 Chapter-12 Armoured Cont. Cable EXTRUDED FRLS PVC TYPE.doc
-8-
SECTION-7
1.0
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR SWITCHYARD ERECTION
GENERAL
This section covers the Technical requirements of various ancillary items and general switchyard
erection practices. All ancillary items under the contractor’s scope of supply shall conform to the
type tests and routine tests as per the relevant standards.
STRING INSULATORS & HARDWARE
GENERAL
The insulators for suspension and tension strings shall conform to IS:731, long rod insulator shall
conform to IEC-433(1980) and composite long rod insulator shall confirm to various standard
mentioned in the specifications. Insulator Hardware shall conform to IS:2486.
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
Suspension and tension insulator shall be wet process porcelain with ball and socket connections.
Insulator shall be interchangeable and shall be suitable for forming either suspension or strings.
Each insulator shall have rated strength marking on porcelain printed and applied before firing.
Porcelain used in insulator manufacture shall be homogeneous, free from Laminations, cavities and
other flaws or imperfections that might affect the mechanical or dielectric quality and shall be
thoroughly vitrified, tough and impervious to moisture.
Glazing of the porcelain shall be uniform brown colour, free from blisters, burrs and other similar
defects.
When operating at normal rated voltage there shall be no electric discharge between conductor and
insulator which would cause corrosion or injury to conductor or insulator by the formation of
substances due to chemical action. No radio interferences shall be caused when operating at
normal rated voltage.
The design of the insulator shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part
of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration. All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanised in
accordance with the latest edition of IS:2629. the zinc used for galvanising shall be of grade Zn-99.5
as per IS-209. the zinc coating shall be uniform, adherent, smooth, reasonably bright, continuous
and free from imperfections such as flux, ash, rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters.
Bidder shall make available data on all the essential features of design including the method of
assembly of discs and metal parts, number of discs per insulators, the manner in which mechanical
stresses are transmitted through discs to adjacent parts, provision for meeting expansion stresses,
results of corona and thermal shock tests, recommended working strength and any special design or
arrangement employed to increase life under service conditions
Insulator Hardware shall conform to the requirements stipulated for clamps and connectors. All
Hardware shall be designed for tensile load with a factor of safety 2.
Insulator Hardware shall be of forged steel. Malleable cast iron shall not be accepted except for
insulator disc cap. The surface of Hardware must be clean, smooth, without cuts, abrasion or
projections. No part shall be subjected to excessive localized pressure. The metal parts shall not
produce any noise-generating corona under operating conditions.
The tension insulator string shall be designed for the required tensile load Earth wire tension clamp
shall be designed for the required tensile load with a factor of safety two (2).
The tension insulator string assembly shall be supplied along with suitable turnbuckle at the rate of
one turnbuckle per string.
All Hardware shall be bolted type.
TESTS
In accordance with the requirements stipulated in section1 and section2, the suspension and tension
strings, insulator discs and Hardware shall be conform to type tests as per relevant IS/IEC and shall
be subjected to the following acceptance tests and routine tests.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS FOR DISC INSULATOR
Visual Examination (IS 2486-1971) Part 1.
Verification of Dimensions : Cl no. 10.5 IS:731-1971
Temperature cycle test: Cl no. 10.6 IS:731-1971
Puncture Test: Cl no. 10.10 IS:731-1971
Galvanising Test: CI no. 10.12 IS:731-1971
Mechanical performance test : IEC:575-1977 Cl.4
Test on locking device for ball and socket coupling IEC:372(2)-1976.
Porosity test Cl no. 10.11 IS:7311-971.
ACCEPTANCE TEST ON HARDWARE FITTING
Visual Examination: CI. 5. 10 IS:2486 (Part-1).
Verification of Dimensions :CI. 5.8 IS:2486 (part-I)-1971.
Galvanizing/Electroplating tests : CI. 5.9 IS:2486 (Part-I)-1971
Slip strength test :CI 5.4 of IS:2486 (Part-I).
-1-
1.3.3
1.3.4
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
Shore hardness test for the Elasto-meters (if applicable as per the value guaranteed by the Bidder).
Mechanical strength test for each component.
The load shall be so supplied that the component is stressed in the same way as it would be in
actual service and the procedure as given in 13.1 (g) above should be followed.
Test on locking devices for ball and socket coupling : IEC:372(2) – 1976.
ROUTINE TEST ON DISC INSULATOR/ LONG ROAD INSULATOR
Visual inspection :Cl. No. 10.13 IS:731-1971.
Mechanical Routine Test : Cl. No. 10.14 IS:731-1971.
Electrical Routine Test: Cl. No. 10.15 IS:731-1971.
ROUTINE TEST OF HARWARE FITTINGS
Visual examination :Cl. 5.10 of IS-2486(I).
Mechanical strength test: Cl. 5.10 of IS-2486 (I).
Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analyzed as per IS:209 - 1966. The purity of
zinc shall not be less than 99.5%.
Chemical Analysis, mechanical hardness tests and magnetic – particle inspection for
malleable casting:
The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for malleable castings will
be as per the internationally recognised procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on
heat number and heat treatment batch. The details regarding tests will be as discussed and mutually
agreed to by the Contractor and HVPNL in Quality Assurance Program.
CHEMICAL ANALYSIS, HARDNESS TESTS AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE FOR FORGINGS
The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for forgings will be as per
the internationally recognized procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat
number and heat treatment batch.
CHEMICAL ANALYSIS, HARDNESS TESTS AND MAGNETIC PARTICLE INSPECTION FOR
FABRICATED HARDWARE:
The chemical analysis, hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for fabricated hardware will
be as per the internationally recognised procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on
heat number and heat treatment batch.
PARAMETERS
DISC INSULATORS
a) Type of insulators
: Anti Fog type
b) Size of insulator units (mm)
: 280 x 145 for 12000 kg.
255 x 145 for 9000/4500 kg.
c) Electro mechanical strength
: 12000/ 9000/ 4500 kg for Twin/
single conductor.
d) Creepage distance of individual insulator units : Markings on porcelain shall be
(minimum and as required to meet total creepage
printed and applied before firing.
distance).e) Markings.
INSULATOR STRING
220 kV
132 kV
66 kV
33 kV
11 kV
Power
frequency
withstand 460 kV (rms) 275 kV
140 kV
75 kV
28 kV (rms)
voltage of the complete string with
(rms)
(rms)
(rms)
arcing horns (dry & wet)
Lightning
impulse
withstand 1050 kV
650 kV
325 kV
170 kV 75 kV
voltage of the complete string with
corona control rings (+ and –
peaks)
Power
frequency
puncture 1.3 times actual wet flashover voltage of the unit.
withstand voltage for a string
insulator unit.
RIV level of the complete string 1000 micro volts
with CC rings at 1.1 U/-3 (max)
Total creepage distance of the ---------------- 25 mm/kV -----------------complete insulator string (mm)
Total no. of discs per strings.
15 S/T
10 S/T
6 S/T
3 S/T
2 S/T
14 S/S
9 S/S
5 S/S
3 S/S
2 S/S
1.4.3
Technical Description of Composite Long Rod Insulators
1.4.3.1
Details of Composite Long Rod Insulators
The insulators of the strings shall consist of composite long rod insulators for a three phase, 50 Hz,
effectively earthed 220kV sub-station application in a very heavy polluted environment. Couplings
shall be ball and socket type.
Bidder shall quote such composite insulators which have proven use under foggy/humid operational
-2-
S.No
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1.4.3.2
1.4.3.3
1.4.3.4
conditions in polluted industrial environment combined with smoke and dust particles. The Bidder
shall furnish evidence in the form of certification from the power utilities that the similar type of
product supplied to them had been performing satisfactory. The Bidder shall also submit certified
test report for an accelerated ageing test of 5000 hours such as that described in Appendix-C of
IEC-61109.
Insulators shall have sheds of the “open aerodynamic profile without any under ribs” with good selfcleaning properties. Insulator shed profile, spacing projection etc. shall be strictly in accordance with
the recommendation of IEC-60815.
The size of long rod insulator, minimum creepage distance, the number to be used in different type
of strings, their electromechanical strength and mechanical strength of insulator string alongwith
hardware fittings shall be as follows:
Mechanical
Type of
*Size of
Min.
No. of
ElectroStrength of
String
Composite
Creepage
individual
Mechanical
Insulator String
Insulator
Distance
Units per
Strength of
String
Insulator Unit
along with
(Core dia x
(mm)
(Nos.)
(kN)
Hardware Fittings
Nominal
(kN)
length) (mm)
2
3
4
5
6
7
FOR 220kV AC yard of substations with AAC Tarantula/ACSR Zebra Conductor
Single
20x2030
7595
1x1
90
90
Suspension
Single
20x2175
7595
1x1
90
90
Tension
FOR 132kV AC yard of substations with AAC Tarantula/ACSR Zebra Conductor
Single
20x1305
4495
1x1
90
90
Suspension
Single
20x1450
4495
1x1
90
90
Tension
FOR 66kV AC yard of substations with AAC Tarantula/ACSR Zebra Conductor
Single
20x725
2248
1x1
90
90
Suspension
Single
20x870
2248
1x1
90
90
Tension
FOR 33kV AC yard of substations with AAC Tarantula/ACSR Zebra Conductor
Single
20x435
1124
1x1
90
90
Suspension
Single
20x435
1124
1x1
90
90
Tension
FOR 11kV AC yard of substations with AAC Tarantula/ACSR Zebra Conductor
Single
20x290
750
1x1
90
90
Suspension
Single
20x290
750
1x1
90
90
Tension
Note: *The core dia of composite insulators mentioned at column No.3 is minimum requirement.
The bidder shall offer composite long rod insulators of suitable core dia to meet specified
E&M strength requirements. For offered core dia, the bidder shall submit documentary
evidence of past supplies & satisfactory operation of the same for minimum period of three
years. However, the overall string length shall be within the limits specified in the drawing.
Pin and Cap
Pin and cap shall be designed to transmit the mechanical stress and develop uniform mechanical
strength in the insulator. The cap shall be circular with the inner and outer surfaces concentric of
such design that it will not yield or distort under load conditions.
The design shall be such as to permit easy removal of replacement of either insulator units or fittings
under the live line conditions.
Ball and Socket Designation
The dimensions of the Ball and Socket shall be of 16mm designation for 90kN Insulator in
accordance with the standard dimensions stated in IEC:120/ IS:2486 (Part-II).
Dimensional Tolerance of Composite Insulators
The tolerances on all dimensions e.g. diameter, length and creepage distance shall be allowed as
follows:
± (0.04d+1.5) mm when d≤300 mm.
± (0.025d+6) mm when d>300 mm.
Where, d being the dimensions in millimeters for diameter, length or creepage distance as the case
may be.
However, no negative tolerance shall be applicable to creepage distance.
-3-
1.4.3.5
Interchangeability
The composite long rod insulators inclusive of the ball & socket connection shall be standard design
suitable for use with the hardware fittings of any make conforming to relevant IEC standards.
1.4.3.6
Corona and RIV Performance
All surfaces shall be clean, smooth, without cuts, abrasions or projections. No part shall be
subjected to excessive localized pressure. The insulator and metal parts shall be so designed and
manufactured that it shall avoid local corona formation and shall not generate any radio interference
beyond specified limit under the operating conditions.
Maintenance
The long rod insulators offered shall be suitable for employment of hot line maintenance technique
so that usual hot line operation can be carried out with ease, speed and safety.
All insulators shall be designed to facilitate cleaning and insulators shall have the minimum practical
number of sheds and grooves. All grooves shall be so proportioned that any dust deposit can be
removed without difficulty either by wiping with a cloth or by remote washing under live line
condition.
Materials
Core
It shall be a glass-fiber reinforced (FRP rod) epoxy resin rod of high strength. Glass fibers and resin
shall be optimized. The rod shall be electrical grade corrosion resistant (ECR), boron free glass and
shall exhibit both high electrical integrity and high resistance to acid corrosion.
Housing & Weather sheds
The FRP rod shall be covered by a seamless sheath of a silicone rubber compound of a thickness of
minimum 3mm. The housing & weather sheds should have silicon content of minimum 30% by
weight. It should protect the FRP rod against environmental influences, external pollution and
humidity. It shall be extruded or directly molded on the core. The interface between the housing and
the core must be uniform and without voids. The strength of the bond shall be greater than the
tearing strength of the polymer. The manufacturer shall follow non-destructive technique (N.D.T.) to
check the quality of jointing of the housing interface with the core. The technique being followed with
detailed procedure and sampling shall be furnished along with the bid. The details for this shall be
finalized during detailed engineering and finalization of MQP.
The weather sheds of the insulators shall be of alternate shed profile. The weather sheds shall be
vulcanized to the sheath (extrusion process) or molded as part of the sheath (injection moulding
process) and free from imperfections. The vulcanization for extrusion process shall be at high
temperature and for injection moulding shall be at high temperature & high pressure. Any seams /
burrs protruding axially along the insulator, resulting from the injection moulding process shall be
removed completely without causing any damage to the housing. The track resistance of housing
and shed material shall be class 1A4.5 according to IEC60587. The strength of the weather shed to
sheath interface shall be greater than the tearing strength of the polymer. The composite insulator
shall be capable of high pressure washing.
End Fittings
End fittings transmit the mechanical load to the core. They shall be made of malleable cast iron
spheroidal graphite or forged steel. They shall be connected to the rod by means of a controlled
compression technique. The manufacturer shall have in-process Acoustic emission arrangement or
some other arrangement to ensure that there is no damage to the core during crimping. This
verification shall be in-process and done on each insulator. The gap between fitting and sheath shall
be sealed by a flexible silicone rubber compound. The system of attachment of end fitting to the rod
shall provide superior sealing performance between housing and metal connection. The sealing
must be humidity proof and durable with time.
Grading Rings
Grading rings shall be used at both ends of each composite insulator unit for reducing the voltage
gradient on and within the insulator and to reduce radio and TV noise to acceptable levels. The size
and placement of the metallic grading rings shall be designed to eliminate dry band arcing/corona
cutting/ exceeding of permissible electrical stress of material. The bidder shall furnish calculations
along with the proposed placement and design of corona ring in support of the above. Grading rings
shall be capable of installation and removal with hot line tools without disassembling any other part
of the insulator assembly.
The supply of grading rings shall be in the scope of the composite insulator supplier.
Workmanship
All the materials shall be of latest design and conform to the best modern practices adopted in the
extra high voltage field. Bidders shall offer only such insulators as are guaranteed by him to be
satisfactory and suitable for transmission lines specified and will give continued good service.
The design, manufacturing process and material control at various stages shall be such as to give
maximum working load, highest mobility, best resistance to corrosion, good finish and elimination of
sharp edges and corners to limit corona and radio interference.
1.4.3.7
1.4.3.8
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
1.4.3.9
-4-
1.4.3.10
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
1.4.3.11
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
The design of the insulators shall be such that stresses due to expansion and contraction in any part
of the insulator shall not lead to deterioration.
The core shall be sound and free of cracks and voids that may adversely affect the insulators.
Weather sheds shall be uniform in quality. They shall be clean, sound, smooth and free from gross
defects and excessive flashing at parting lines.
End fittings shall be free from cracks, seams, shrinks, air holes and rough edges. End fittings should
be effectively, sealed to prevent moisture ingress, effectiveness of sealing system must be
supported by test documents. All surfaces of the metal parts shall be perfectly smooth with the
projecting points or irregularities which may cause corona. All load bearing surfaces shall be
smooth and uniform so as to distribute the loading stresses uniformly.
All ferrous parts shall be hot dip galvanized to give a minimum average coating of zinc equivalent to
600 gm/sq.m. and shall be in accordance with the requirement of ISO:1461 (E) and shall satisfy the
tests mentioned in ISO:1460 (E). The zinc used for galvanizing shall be of purity of 99.95%. The
zinc coating shall be uniform, adherent, smooth, reasonably bright continuous and free from
imperfections such as flux, ash rust stains, bulky white deposits and blisters. The galvanized metal
parts shall be guaranteed to withstand at least six successive dips each lasting for one (1) minute
duration under the standard preece test. The galvanizing shall be carried out only after any
machining.
Equipment Marking
Each composite long rod unit shall be legibly and indelibly marked with the trade mark of the
manufacturer, name of HVPNL and month & year of manufacture. The guaranteed combined
mechanical and electrical strength shall be indicated in kilo Newton followed by the word ‘kN’ to
facilitate easy identification and to ensure proper use.
One 10 mm thick ring or 20 mm thick spot of suitable quality of paint shall be marked on the cap/end
fitting of each composite long rod of particular strength for easy identification of the type of insulator.
The paint shall not have any deteriorating effect on the insulator performance. Following codes shall
be used as identification mark :
For
90 kN long rod unit
:
Orange
Bid Drawings
The Bidder shall furnish full description and illustration of the material offered.
The Bidder shall furnish along with the bid the outline drawing (6 copies) of each insulator unit
including a cross sectional view of the long rod insulator unit. The drawing shall include but not
limited to the following information :
Long rod diameter and ball to ball spacing with manufacturing tolerances
Minimum Creepage distance with positive tolerance
Protected creepage distance
Eccentricity of the long rod unit
Axial run out
Radial run out
Unit mechanical and electrical characteristics
Size and weight of ball and socket parts
Weight of composite long rod units
Materials
Identification mark
Manufacturer's catalogue number
After placement of award, the Supplier shall submit full dimensioned insulator drawings containing
all the details as given in Clause No. 3.2 above, in four (4) copies to Employer for approval. After
getting approval from Employer and successful completion of all the type tests, the Supplier shall
submit 20 more copies of the same drawing to the Employer for further distribution and field use at
Employer's end.
After placement of award the Supplier shall also submit fully dimensioned insulator crate drawing for
different type of insulators.
After placement of award, the Supplier shall submit full dimensioned manufacturing drawing of
composite long rod insulator unit in six (6) copies to the Employer for reference and record.
Tests and Standards
Type Tests
The following type tests shall be conducted on long rod units, components, materials or complete
strings:
On the complete composite Long Rod Insulator String with Hardware Fittings
Power frequency voltage withstand test with corona control
IEC:383-1993/
rings/grading ring and arcing horns under wet condition
Annexure A
Switching surge voltage withstand test under wet condition
IEC:383-1993
Impulse voltage withstand test under dry condition
IEC:383-1993
Corona and RIV test under dry condition
Annexure-A
Mechanical Strength test
Annexure-A
-5-
(f)
(g)
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
(i)
(j)
a)
b)
c)
d)
d)
e)
f)
a)
b)
a)
b)
c)
d)
Vibration test
Annexure-A
Salt-fog pollution withstand test
Annexure-A
On Composite Insulator Units
Tests on interfaces and connections of metal fittings (Tests to be
IEC: 61109
performed on the same samples in the sequence given below)
i)
Dry power frequency voltage test
ii)
Sudden load release test
iii)
Thermal mechanical test
iv)
Water immersion test
v)
Steep front impulse voltage test
vi)
Dry power frequency voltage test
Assembled core load time test
IEC: 61109
i)
Determination of the average failing load of the core of the
assembled unit
ii) Control of the slope of the strength time curve of the insulator
Brittle fracture resistance test
Annexure-A
Test of housing, Tracking and erosion test
IEC: 61109
Tests for the core material
IEC:61109
i)
Dye penetration test
ii) Water diffusion test
Flammability test
IEC:61109
Recovery of Hydrophobicity test
Annexure-A
Mechanical Load Time test and test of tightness between end firings
IEC:61109
and insulator housing
Silicone content test
Annexure-A
High Pressure washing test
Annexure-A
All the type test given in Clause No. 4.1.1 shall be conducted on Single ‘I’ suspension, Double
tension, Double ’I’ suspension & Quadruple tension insulator string along with hardware fittings. All
the type tests given in Clause No. 4.1.1 (a) to (e) shall also be conducted on Single 'I' Pilot
suspension & Single tension insulator string along with hardware fittings.
Acceptance Tests:
For Composite Long Rod Insulators
Verification of dimensions
IEC : 61109
Galvanising test
IEC : 60383
Verification of locking system
IEC : 60383
Verification of tightness of interface between end fittings and IEC : 61109
insulator housing and of specified mechanical load
Recovery of Hydrophobicity
Annexure-A
Tests on interfaces and connections of metal fittings (Tests to be IEC: 61109
performed on the same samples in the sequence given below
i) Dry power frequency voltage test
ii) Sudden load release test
iii) Thermal mechanical test
iv) Water immersion test
v) Steep front impulse voltage test
vi) Dry power frequency voltage test
Silicone content test
Annexure-A
The test 4.2.1.(e) shall be carried out in case total quantity of insulators of a particular rating
exceeds 5000 nos.
The test 4.2.1.(f) shall be done against each lot or against every 5000 nos. of insulators whichever is
less.
In the event of failure of the sample to satisfy the acceptance test(s) specified in 4.2 above, the
retest procedure shall be as per clause 7.6 of IEC 61109.
Routine Tests
For Composite Long Rod Insulator Units
Visual Inspection
As per IEC:61109
Mechanical routine test
As per IEC:61109
Tests During Manufacture
On all components as applicable
Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising
As per Annexure-A
Chemical analysis, mechanical, metallographic test and magnetic As per Annexure-A
particle inspection for malleable castings.
Chemical analysis hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for As per Annexure-A
forgings
Tracking and erosion test on insulating material
IEC 60587
Testing Expenses
-6-
a)
b)
c)
d)
Testing charges for the type test specified shall be indicated separately in the prescribed schedule.
Bidder shall indicate unit type test charges for all type tests covered under Clause 4.1.1 and 4.1.2
separately, in the relevant schedule of Prices as applicable. Charges for each type tests shall be
separately indicated.
For Type Tests which involves the tests on the complete insulator string with hardware fitting, the
Contractor of hardware fittings shall supply the necessary number of sets of hardware fittings at the
place of testing free of cost.
In case of failure in any type test the supplier whose material has failed is either required to modify
the design of the material & successfully carryout all the type tests as has been detailed out in
Clause 4.1 of this specifications or to repeat that particular type test at least three times successfully
at his own expenses. In case of failure of the complete string in any type test, the manufacturer
whose product has failed in the test shall get the test repeated at his cost. The Supplier whose
material has not failed in the test shall be required to supply the requisite quantity of material (that is
insulator or hardware fittings as the case may be) required for repeat testing at the place of testing
and the cost of supply shall be borne by the Supplier whose material has failed in testing.
Bidder shall indicate the laboratories in which they propose to conduct the type tests. They shall
ensure that adequate facilities are available in the laboratory and the tests can be completed in
these laboratories within the time schedule guaranteed by them in the appropriate schedule.
The entire cost of testing for acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture specified
herein shall be treated as included in the quoted Ex-works/CIF Price.
In case of failure in any type test, if repeat type tests are required to be conducted, then all the
expenses for deputation of Inspector/ Employer's representative shall be deducted from the contract
price. Also if on receipt of the Bidder's notice of testing, the Employer's representative does not find
the material or test setup / equipments to be ready for testing, the expenses incurred by the
Employer for redeputation shall be deducted from contract price.
The Bidder shall intimate the Employer about carrying out of the type tests along with detailed
testing programme at least 2 week in advance (in case of testing in India) and at least 6 weeks
advance (in case of testing abroad) of the scheduled date of testing during which the Employer will
arrange to depute his representative to be present at the time of carrying out the tests.
Sample Batch for Type Testing
The Bidder shall offer material for sample selection for type testing only after getting Quality
Assurance Programme approved by the Employer. The Bidder shall offer at least three times the
quantity of materials required for conducting all the type tests for sample selection. The sample for
type testing will be manufactured strictly in accordance with the Quality Assurance Programme
approved by the Employer.
Before sample selection for type testing, the Supplier shall be required to conduct all the acceptance
tests successfully in presence of Employer's representative.
Schedule of Testing
The Bidder has to indicate the schedule of following activities in their bids :
Submission of drawing for approval.
Submission of Quality Assurance Programme for approval.
Offering of material for sample selection for type tests.
Type testing.
Additional Tests
The Employer reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s) of reasonable
nature carried out at Supplier's premises, at site, or in any other place in addition to the aforesaid
type, acceptance and routine tests to satisfy himself that the material comply with the Specifications.
The Employer also reserves the right to conduct all the tests mentioned in this specification at his
own expense on the samples drawn from the site at Supplier's premises or at any other test centre.
In case of evidence of non compliance, it shall be binding on the part of the Supplier to prove the
compliance of the items to the technical specifications by repeat tests or correction of deficiencies or
replacement of defective items, all without any extra cost to the Employer.
Guarantee
The Supplier of insulators shall guarantee overall satisfactory performance of the insulators.
Test Reports
Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in at least six (6) copies along with one original. One
copy shall be returned duly certified by the Employer only after which the commercial production of
the concerned material shall start.
Copies of acceptance test reports shall be furnished in at least six (6) copies. One copy shall be
returned duly certified by the Employer, only after which the material shall be dispatched.
Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the Supplier at his works for periodic inspection
by the Employer’s representative.
Test certificates of test during manufacture shall be maintained by the Supplier. These shall be
produced for verification as and when desired by the Employer.
-7-
1.4.3.12
1.4.3.13
1.4.3.14
Sl. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Inspection
The Employer’s representative shall at all times be entitled to have access to the works and all
places of manufacture, where insulator, and its component parts shall be manufactured and the
representatives shall have full facilities for unrestricted inspection of the Supplier’s and subSupplier’s works, raw materials, manufacture of the material and for conducting necessary test as
detailed herein.
The material for final inspection shall be offered by the Supplier only under packed condition as
detailed in clause No.4.13 of the specification. The Employer shall select samples at random from
the packed lot for carrying out acceptance tests. The lot should be homogeneous and should
contain insulators manufactured in 3-4 consecutive weeks.
The Supplier shall keep the Employer informed in advance of the time of starting and the progress of
manufacture of material in their various stages so that arrangements could be made for inspection.
No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily
inspected and tested unless the inspection is waived off by the Employer in writing. In the latter case
also the material shall be dispatched only after satisfactory testing for all tests specified herein have
been completed.
The acceptance of any quantity of material shall be no way relieve the Supplier of his responsibility
for meeting all the requirements of the specification and shall not prevent subsequent rejection, if
such material are later found to be defective.
Packing and Marking
All insulators shall be packed in suitable PVC/ plastic tubes/any other suitable packing along with
temporary wrap-on shields/shrouds for each insulator unit. The packing shall provide protection
against rodent. The shields/shrouds shall be for protection during transport and for preventing bird
pecking during erection. Further, the shields/shrouds shall be made of opaque, weather proof
material of adequate strength and shall be colour coded. The shields/shrouds shall have smaller
diameter than the insulator to stay in place against winds & weather and shall be designed so as to
leave only the end fittings exposed for attachment of insulator to tower and line hardware until line
construction is complete. The shield/shroud shall have suitable pull off loop for easy detachment just
prior to charging of the line without causing any damage to the insulator. The bidder/Supplier shall
furnish detailed design of the packing and shield/shroud along with attachment and detachment
procedure in this regard. For marine transportation, crates shall be palleted.
The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling during transit, storage at site
and subsequent handling in the field.
Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or spacers shall be provided to prevent damage
or deformation during transit and handling.
The Supplier shall guarantee the adequacy of the packing and shall be responsible for any loss or
damage during transportation, handling, storage and installation due to improper packing.
All packing cases shall be marked legibly and correctly so as to ensure safe arrival at their
destination and to avoid the possibility of goods being lost or wrongly dispatched on account of
faulty packing and faulty or illegible markings. Each case/crate shall have all the markings stenciled
on it in indelible ink.
Standards
The insulator strings and its components shall conform to the following Indian/International
Standards which shall mean latest revision, with amendments/changes adopted and published,
unless specifically stated otherwise in the Specification.
In the event of supply of insulators conforming to standards other than specified, the Supplier shall
confirm in his bid that these standards are equivalent or better to those specified. In case of award,
salient features of comparison between the standards proposed by the Supplier and those specified
in this document will be provided by the Supplier to establish equivalence.
Indian
Title
International Standard
Standard
IS:209-1992 Specification for zinc
BS:3436
IS:406-1991 Method of Chemical Analysis of Slab Zinc
BS:3436
IS:731-1991 Porcelain insulators for overhead Power lines with a
BS:137- (I&II) IEC:60383
nominal voltage greater than 1000 V
IS:2071 Part Methods of High Voltage Testing
IEC:60060-1
(I)- 1993
(Part(II)1991
Part(III)1991
IS:2486
Specification for Insulator fittings for Overhead Power
Part- I-1993 Lines with a nominal voltage greater than 1000V
Part- II-1989 General Requirements and Tests Dimensional
BS:3288
Requirements
IEC:60120
Part-III-1991 Locking Devices
IEC:60372
-8-
6.
IS:26291990
IS:26331992
IS:31881988
IS:67451990
IS:82631990
IS:82691990
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
1.4.3.15
a.
b.
c.
d.
Recommended Practice for Hot, Dip Galvanisation for
iron and steel
Testing of Uniformity of Coating of zinc coated articles
ISO-1461 (E)
Dimensions for Disc Insulators
IEC:60305
Determination of Weight of Zinc Coating on Zinc coated
iron and steel articles
Methods of RI Test of HV insulators
BS:433-1969 ISO:14601973
IEC:60437,NEMA Publn
No.07/1964/ CISPR
IEC:60506
Methods for Switching Impulse test on HV insulators
Thermal Mechanical Performance test and mechanical
IEC: 60575
performance test on string insulator units
Salt Fog Pollution Voltage Withstand Test
IEC:60507
Composite insulators for A.C. Overhead lines with
IEC 61109
nominal voltage greater than 1000V – Definitions, test
methods and acceptance criteria
Guide for the selection of insulators in respect of
IEC:60815
polluted conditions
Tests on insulators of Ceramic material or glass or
IEC:60383
glass for overhead lines with a nominal voltage greater
than 1000V
Characteristics of string insulator units of the long rod
IEC : 60433
type
Tests on Complete Strings with Hardware Fittings
Annexure-A
Corona Extinction Voltage Test (Dry)
The sample assembly when subjected to power frequency voltage shall have a corona extinction
voltage as per ISS/IEC applied line to ground under dry condition. There shall be no evidence of
corona on any part of the sample. The atmospheric condition during testing shall be recorded and
the test results shall be accordingly corrected with suitable correction factor as stipulated in IEC :
383.
RIV Test (Dry)
Under the conditions as specified in Corona Extinction Voltage Test (Dry)(a) above, the insulator
string along with complete hardware fittings shall have a radio interference voltage level below 1000
micro volts at one MHz when subjected to 50 Hz AC voltage as per ISS/IEC applied line to ground
under dry condition. The test procedure shall be in accordance with IS:8263 /IEC : 60437.
Mechanical Strength Test
The complete insulator string along with its hardware fitting excluding arcing horn, corona control
ring, grading ring and suspension assembly/dead end assembly shall be subjected to a load equal
to 50% of the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength (UTS) which shall be increased at a
steady rate to 67% of the minimum UTS specified. The load shall be held for five minutes and then
removed. After removal of the load, the string components shall not show any visual deformation
and it shall be possible to disassemble them by hand. Hand tools may be used to, remove cotter
pins and loosen the nuts initially. The string shall then be reassembled and loaded to 50% of UTS
and the load shall be further increased at a steady rate till the specified minimum UTS and held for
one minute. No fracture should occur during this period. The applied load shall then be increased
until the failing load is reached and the value recorded.
Vibration Test
The suspension string shall be tested in suspension mode, and tension string in tension mode itself
in laboratory span of minimum 30 metres. In the case of suspension string, a load equal to 600 kg
shall be applied along the axis of the suspension string by means of turn buckle. The insulator string
along with hardware fittings and the sub-conductors each tensioned at 43 kN shall be secured with
clamps. The system shall be suitable to maintain constant tension on each sub-conductors
throughout the duration of the test. Vibration dampers shall not be used on the test span. All the
sub-conductors shall be vertically vibrated simultaneously at one of the resonance frequencies of
the insulators string (more than 10 Hz) by means of vibration inducing equipment. The peak to peak
displacement in mm of vibration at the antinode point, nearest to the string, shall be measured and
the same shall not be less than 1000/f1.8 where f is the frequency of vibration in cycles/sec. The
insulator string shall be vibrated for not less than 10 million cycles without any failure. After the test
the insulators shall be examined for looseness of pins and cap or any crack in the cement. The
hardware shall be examined for looseness, fatigue failure and mechanical strength test. There shall
be no deterioration of properties of hardware components and insulators after the vibration test. The
insulators shall be subjected to the Mechanical performance test followed by mechanical strength
test as per relevant standards.
-9-
e.
1.4.3.16
1.4.4
1.4.4.1
1.4.4.2
1.4.4.3
1.4.4.4
1.4.4.5
1.4.4.6
1.4.4.7
1.4.4.8
1.4.4.9
Salt-fog pollution withstand test
This test shall be carried out in accordance with IEC : 60507. The salinity level for composite long
rod insulators shall be 160 Kg/m3 NACL.
Composite Long rod Insulator Units
Brittle Fracture Resistance Test
Assembled core load time test with container that contains1n-HNO3 concentric acid that is applied
at the naked rod. The rod should be held at 80% of SML for the duration of the test.
The rod should not fail within the 96 hour test duration
Recovery of Hydrophobicity Test
The surface of selected samples shall be cleaned with isopropyl alcohol. Allow the surface to dry
and spray with water. Record the HC classification. Dry the sample surface.
Treat the surface with corona discharges to destroy the hydrophobicity. This can be done utilizing a
high frequency corona tester, Holding the electrode approximately 3mm from the sample surface,
slowly move the electrode over an area approximately 1” x 1”. Continue treating this area for 2 – 3
minutes, operating the tester at maximum output.
Immediately after the corona treatment, spray the surface with water and record the HC
classification. The surface should be hydrophilic, with an HC value of 6 or 7. If not, dry the surface
and repeat the corona treatment for a longer time until an HC of 6 or 7 is obtained. Dry the sample
surface.
Allow the sample to recover and repeat the hydrophobicity measurement at several time intervals.
Silicone rubber should recover to HC 1 – HC 2 within 24 to 48 hours, depending on the material and
the intensity of the corona treatment.
Silicone content test
Minimum content of silicone as guaranteed by supplier shall be verified through FT-IR spectroscopy
& TGA analysis or any other suitable method mutually agreed between Employer & Supplier in
Quality Assurance Programme.
High Pressure washing test
The test is to be carried out at 3800 kPa with nozzles of 6 mm diameter at a distance of 3m from
nozzles to the insulator, followed by a dry power frequency voltage test as per IEC 61109.
Tests on All components (As applicable)
Chemical Analysis of Zinc used for Galvanizing
Samples taken from the zinc ingot shall be chemically analysed as per IS:209-1979. The purity of
zinc shall not be less than 99.95%.
Tests for Forgings
The chemical analysis hardness tests and magnetic particle inspection for forgings, will be as per
the internationally recognised procedures for these tests. The sampling will be based on heat
number and heat treatment batch. The details regarding test will be as discussed and mutually
agreed to by the Supplier and Employer in Quality Assurance Programme.
Tests on Castings
The chemical analysis, mechanical and metallographic tests and magnetic, particle inspection for
castings will be as per the internationally recognised procedures for these tests. The samplings will
be based on heat number and heat treatment batch. The details regarding test will be as discussed
and mutually agreed to by the Supplier and Employer in Quality Assurance Programme.
C-WEDGE CONNECTOR
Wedge connector should be FIRED-ON or powder actuated only
The power booster should be colour coded for proper installation of wedge connectors
Wedge connector members- taperd ‘C’ shaped spring member and wedge should be made from a
special Aluminium alloy of high ductility and electrical conductivity. When Installed, it will provide a
tenable electrical and mechanical connection for solid or stranded conductor combinations including
ACSR conductor
The dimensions for the wedge shall be manufactured to close tolerance to ensure repeatability and
reliability of the connection.
All sharp edges and burrs shall be removed.
The wedges shall be burnished to achieve optimum surface roughness for electrical contact.
The wedge connector shall meet the current cycle test requirements as per ANSI C119.4-1998
Class AA. When connected as specified samples shall indicate electrical stability for terminated
connectors. The resistance of connection, when measured as specified shall be stable through out
test. The sample shall be tested to 500on/off current cycle with the control conductor raised between
1750C to 1800C above ambient.
The wedge connector shall meet the mechanical requirements as per ANSI C119.4-1998 Class-3,
minimum tension. When tested as specified or 5% of the rated cable strength of the weaker
conductor.
The Wedge connector shall meet the following thermal shock/salt spray test:a) Hours at 1500C
b) 15 minutes at 0C water, immediately from the oven
c) 30 minutes at 1500C
- 10 -
1.4.4.10
1.4.4.11
1.4.4.12
1.4.4.13
2.0
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6
d) 20.75 hours at room temperature
Salt spray corrosion, samples shall be subjected to a 30 day salt spray corrosion test. Each daily
exposure shall consist of :a) 15 hours in 5% salt spray atmosphere
b) 1 hour in drying over at 1000C
c) 8 hours at room temperature
During installation, the wedge of wedge shall be driven inside the “C” member at high velocity
between the run & tap conductor so as to spread the “C” member to ensure high retentive force on
the conductors. A locking tab, formed balance on the tool should prevent the wedge from loosening
once it has been driven into position
The wedge terminal shall have back up conductor cleaning capability during application. The wedge
terminals should ensure stable & low contact resistance under varying load conditions & the thermal
cycling effects.
An oxide inhibiting compound placed in the wedge & “C” member groove of Wedge Terminals.
CONDUCTOR
AAC TARANTULA CONDUCTOR
DETAILS OF CONDUCTOR
SCOPE
This specification provides for design, manufacture, engineering, inspection, stage testing and
testing before dispatch, packing and delivery at site of All Aluminium conductor specified herein for
its satisfactory operation on various Transmission lines and substations of the State.
AAC Tarantula conductor is to be used as power conductor on single circuit and double circuit
transmission lines and sub-stations of the HVPNL.
STANDARDS
The power conductor shall conform to the following Indian Standards, which shall mean latest
revision, amendments/changes adopted and published, unless otherwise specified herein before.
Sr
ISS
Title
No
1.
IS: 398 Part I to
Specification for Aluminium conductors for overhead Transmission
V (As relevant)
purpose.
2.
IS : 1778
Reels and Drums for Bare conductors
3.
IS : 1841
EC grade Aluminium rod produced by rolling
4.
IS : 5484
EC grace Aluminium rod produced by continuous casting and rolling
PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS
The detail of conductor are tabulated below
Stranding and wire diameter
37/5.23 mm Al.
Code name
AAC TARANTULA
Number of strands per layer of aluminium Wire Central
1
1st Aluminium layer
6
2nd Aluminium layer
12
18
3rd Aluminium layer
Total Sectional area of aluminium (Sq. mm)
795.6 mm2
Overall diameter (mm)
36.61mm
Approximate weight (kg/km)
2198 kg/km
Calculated max. d.c. resistance at 20 Deg. C (ohm/km)
0.03656
Minimum UTS (kN) of conductor
11,600 kg.
Modulus of Elasticity
0.5976x106 kg/cm2
Coefficient of linear expansion (per Deg.C)
23X10-6
The details of aluminium strand are as follows:
Minimum breaking load of strand before stranding (kN)
Minimum breaking load of strand after stranding (kN)
3.08
Maximum D.C resistance of strand of 20 Deg. C (ohm/km)
1.350
Diameter mm (Standard/Max/Min)
5.23/5.28/5.18
Mass (Kg/Km)
59.40
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT
The ACC Tarantula conductor shall be suitable for being installed directly in air supported on
suspension insulator strings or anchored through tension insulator strings at the power cross arms
of single circuit and double circuit transmission line towers.
The conductor shall therefore be suitable for satisfactory operation under the tropical climatic
conditions listed under the Annexure III of Section 1.
Physical constants of materials
Physical constants for Hard-drawn Aluminium
Resistivity
The resistivity of aluminium depends upon its purity and its physical condition. For the purpose of
this specification the maximum value permitted is 0.028264 Ω mm2/m at 20oC and this value has
- 11 -
Note:
2.1.7
2.1.8
2.1.9
2.1.10
2.1.11
2.1.12
2.1.13
2.1.13.1
Note:
2.1.14
Note:
2.1.15
Note:
been used for calculation of the maximum permissible value of resistance.
It is not intended to check the resistivity from the measured values of resistance.
Density
At a temperature of 20oC the density of hard drawn aluminium has been taken as 2.703 g/cm3.
Constant-Mass Temperature Co-efficient of Resistance
At a temperature of 20o C the constant – mass temperature co-efficient of resistance of hard drawn
aluminium measured between two potential points rigidly fixed to the wire, the metal being allowed
to expand freely, has been taken as 0.004 per degree Celsius.
Co-efficient of Linear Expansion
The co-efficient of linear expansion of hard-drawn aluminium at 0oC has been taken as 23.0x10-6 per
deg. C. This value holds good for all practical purposes over the range of temperatures from 0o C to
highest safe operating temperature.
Materials
The conductor shall be manufactured from EC grade aluminium rods suitably hard-drawn on wire
drawing machines. The aluminium rods used shall comply with IS:1841-1978 and IS:5484. The
mechanical and electrical properties of aluminium wire shall comply with the requirements given in
relevant standard. The aluminium wire shall be manufactured from not less than 99.5% pure
electrolytic aluminium rods of E.C. Grade.
Freedom from Defects
The wires shall be smooth and free from all imperfections such as spills, spilts, slag inclusion, die
marks, scratches, fittings, blow-holes, projections, looseness, overlapping of strands, chipping of
aluminium layers etc. and all such other defects which may hamper the mechanical and electrical
properties of the conductor. Special care should be taken to keep away dirt, grit etc. during
stranding.
Wire Sizes
Nominal Size
The aluminium for the stranded conductor covered by this standard shall have diameters specified in
clauses 2.1.3
Tolerances on normal size
Aluminium Wires
A tolerance of + 1% is permitted on the nominal diameter of AAC conductor.
In order to maintain the circularity of the wires the tolerance allowed in 2.1.13.1 shall apply to both
the measurement at right angles taken at the same cross-section as per clause 2.2 of IS:398 (PartII) (Second Revision with latest Amendments).
Joints in wires
Aluminium wires
No joints shall be permitted in the aluminium wires in the outermost layer of the ACSR conductor.
Joints in the inner layers are permitted, in addition to those made in the base rod or wire before final
drawing, but no two such joints shall be less than 15 metres apart in the complete stranded
conductor. Such joints shall be made by cold pressure butt-welding.
Joints are not permitted in the outermost layer of the conductor in order to ensure a smooth
conductor finish and reduce radio interference levels and corona losses on the extra high voltage
lines.
Stranding
The wires used in the construction of all aluminium conductor shall, before stranding, satisfy all the
relevant requirements of this specification.
The lay ratio of the different layers shall be within the limits given in the table below
LAY RATIO OF ALL ALUMINIUM CONDUCTOR
No.
of Lay Ratios for Aluminium Wires
wires
Al.
Outside Layer
Layer Immediately
Innermost Layer of conductor with
beneath out side layer
three Aluminium Wire Layers
Min.
Max. Min.
Max.
Min.
Max.
37
11.25
14
14
21
18
21
For the purpose of calculation, the mean lay ration shall be taken as the arithmetic mean of the
relevant minimum and maximum values given in this table
In all constructions, the successive layers shall have opposite directions of lay, the outermost layer
being right-handed. The wires in each layer shall be evenly and closely stranded.
The lay ratio of any aluminium layer shall not be greater than the lay ratio of the aluminium layer
immediately beneath it.
Standard Length
The standard length of the conductor shall be 500 meters. A tolerance of +5% on the standard
length shall be permitted. All lengths outside this limit of tolerance shall be treated as random
lengths.
Random lengths will be accepted provided no length is less than 70% of the standard length
specified and the total quantity of such random lengths shall not be more than 5% of the total
quantity ordered.
- 12 -
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
2.2.3
i)
ii)
iii)
2.2.4
i)
ii)
iii)
3.0
3.1
a)
b)
c)
d)
Supplier shall also indicate the maximum single length above the standard length, he can
manufacture, in the guaranteed technical particulars.
The conductor shall be supplied in standard drum length of manufacturer as per actual requirement.
ACSR MOOSE/ ZEBRA CONDUCTOR
DETAILS OF CONDUCTOR
The conductor shall conform to IS:398(Part V)-1982 except where otherwise specified herein.
The details of the conductor are tabulated below:
Moose
Zebra
Stranding and wire diameter
54/3.53mm
AL+7/3.53mm 54/3.18mm AL+7/3.18mm steel
steel
Number of strands
core
1
1
1st Layer
6
6
2nd Layer
12
12
3rd Layer
18
18
4th Layer
24
24
Sectional area of Aluminium
528.5 mm2
428.9 mm2
2
Total sectional area
597 mm
484.50 mm2
Overall diameter
31.77mm
28.62 mm
Approximate weight
1998 kg/km
1621 kg/km
Calculated DC resistance at 0.05595 ohm/km
0.06868 ohm/km
20 degree C
Minimum UTS
159.60 KN
130.32 KN
The details of aluminium strand are as follow:
Minimum breaking load of 1.57 kN
1.29 kN
strand before stranding
Minimum breaking load of 1.49 kN
1.23 kN
strand after stranding
Maximum D.C resistance of 2.954 ohms/KM
3.651 ohms/KM
strand at 200C
The details of steel strand are as follows:
Minimum breaking load of 12.86 kN
10.43 kN
strand before stranding
Minimum breaking load of 12.22 kN
9.95 kN
strand after stranding
18-before stranding
Minimum no. of twist to be 18-before stranding
16-after stranding
with stood in torsion test 16-after stranding
when tested on a gauge
length of 100 times diameter
of wire
Tests
The type, acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture, shall be carried out on the
conductor. For the purpose of this clause:
Type tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out to prove the process of manufacture
and general conformity of the material to this specification. These tests shall be carried out on
samples prior to commencement of commercial production against the order. The supplier shall
indicate his schedule for carrying out these tests in the activity schedule.
Acceptance tests shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out on samples taken from each lot
offered for pre-dispatch inspection, for the purposes of acceptance of that lot.
Routine tests shall mean those tests which are to be carried out on each strand/spool/length of the
conductor to check requirements which are likely to vary during production.
Tests during manufacture shall mean those tests, which are to be carried out during the process of
manufacture and end inspection by the Supplier to ensure the desired quality of the end product to
be supplied by him.
Samples for individual wires for tests shall be taken before stranding from not less than ten percent
of the spools in the case of aluminium wires. If samples are taken after stranding, they shall be
obtained by cutting 1.2 metres from the outer end of the finished conductor from not more than ten
percent of the finished reels.
The standards and norms to which these tests will be carried out are listed against them.
For type and acceptance tests, the acceptance values shall be the values guaranteed by the
Supplier in the Performa for “Guaranteed Technical Particulars”, furnished in the Annexure-II or the
acceptance value specified in this specification, whichever is more stringent for that particular test.
Acceptance Tests
Visual and dimensional check
Visual check for joints, scratches etc. and lengths of conductor.
Dimensional check on aluminium strands
Check for lay ratios of various layers
- 13 -
e)
f)
g)
Note:
3.2
a)
b)
c)
d)
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
Breaking load test on aluminium strands
Wrap test on aluminium strands
DC resistance test on aluminium strands
All the above tests shall be carried out on aluminium strands after stranding only.
Routine Tests
Check to ensure that the joints are as per specification
Check that there are no cuts, etc. on the strands.
Check that drums are as per specifications.
All acceptance tests are mentioned in Clause 6.2 above shall be carried out on each coil.
Testing Expenses
The testing charges for the type tests specified shall be indicated separately in the prescribed
schedule.
The supplier shall indicate the type test charges for each type test separately.
In case of failure in any type, the supplier is either required to modify the design of the material or
repeat the particular type test three times successfully at his own expenses. The decision of the
Purchaser in this regard shall be final binding.
Suppliers shall indicate the laboratories in which they propose to conduct the type tests. They shall
ensure that the tests can be completed in these laboratories within the time schedule guaranteed by
them in the appropriate schedule.
The entire cost of testing for the acceptance and routine tests and tests during manufacture
specified herein shall be treated as included in the quoted unit price of conductor, except for the
expenses of the inspector/Purchaser’s representative.
Additional Tests
The Purchaser reserves the right of having at his own expenses any other test(s) of reasonable
nature carried out at Supplier’s premises, at site, or in any other place in addition to the aforesaid
type, acceptance and routine test, to satisfy himself that the material comply with the specifications.
Sample Batch for testing
Samples shall be obtained by cutting 2mtrs. length from the outer end of the finished conductor from
minimum 10% of the finished drums offered for inspection.
The Supplier is required to carry out all the acceptance tests successfully in the presence of
Purchaser’s representative before dispatch.
Test Reports
Copies of type test reports shall be furnished in at least six(6) copies alongwith one original. One
copy shall be returned duly certified by the Purchaser only after which the material will be
dispatched.
Record of routine test reports shall be maintained by the supplier at his works for periodic inspection
by the Purchaser’s representative.
Test Certificates of tests conducted during manufacture shall be maintained by the supplier. These
shall be produced for verification as and when desired by the Purchaser.
Test Facilities
The following additional test facilities shall be available at Supplier’s works
Calibration of various testing and measuring equipment including tensile testing machine, resistance
measurement facilities, burette, thermometer, barometer etc.
Standard resistance for calibration of resistance bridges.
Finished conductor shall be checked for length verification and surface finish on separate rewinding
machine at reduced speed (variable from 8 to 16 meters per minute). The rewinding facilities shall
have appropriate clutch system and shall be free from vibrations, jerks etc. with transverse layering
facilities.
INSPECTION
The Purchaser’s representative shall, at all times, be entitled to have access to the works and all
places of manufacture where conductor shall be manufactured and the representative shall have full
facilities for unrestricted inspection of the Supplier’s works, raw materials and process of
manufacture and conducting necessary tests as detailed herein.
The Supplier shall keep the Purchaser informed in advance of the time of starting and of the
progress of manufacture of conductor in its various stages so that arrangements can be made for
inspection.
No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before it has been satisfactorily
inspected and tests, unless the inspection is waived off by the Purchaser in writing. In the later case
also, the conductor shall be dispatched only after satisfactory testing for all tests specified herein
has been completed and approved by the Purchaser.
The acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Supplier of any of his
responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the specification, and shall not prevent subsequent
rejection if such material is later found to be defective.
At least 10% of the total number of drums subject to minimum of two in any lot put up for inspection
shall be selected at random to ascertain the length of conductor by the following method.
“At the works of the manufacture of the conductor, the conductor shall be transferred from one drum
to another at the same time measuring its length with the help of a graduated pulley & Cyclometer.
- 14 -
4.0
5.0
The difference in the average length thus obtained and as declared by the Supplier in the packing
list shall be applied to all the drums if the conductor is found short during checking.”
DOCUMENTATION
Six sets of type test reports, duly approved by the Purchaser shall be submitted by the Supplier for
distribution, before commencement of supply. Adequate copies of acceptance and routine test
certificates, duly approved by the Purchaser shall accompany the dispatched consignment.
Approval of drawing/work by Purchaser shall not relieve the Supplier of his responsibility and liability
for ensuring correctness and correct interpretation of the latest revision of applicable standards,
rules and codes of practices. The material shall conform in all respects to high standards of
engineering, design, workmanship and latest revisions of relevant standards at the time of ordering
and Purchaser shall have the power to reject any work or material which in his judgement is not in
full accordance therewith.
PACKING & FORWARDING
The conductor shall be supplied in non-returnable, strong wooden drums provided with lagging of
adequate strength capable of withstanding displacement during transit, storage and subsequent
handling and stringing operation in the field. The drums shall generally conform to IS: 1778-1980
except otherwise specified hereinafter.
The drums shall be suitable for wheel mounting and for jetting off the conductor under a minimum
controlled tension of the order of 5 kN.
The Supplier shall submit the proposed drum drawings alongwith the bid. However, the same shall
be in line with the requirements as stated herein. After placement of the Letter of Award, the
Supplier shall submit four copies of fully dimensioned drawing of the drum he wishes to supply , for
Purchaser’s approval before taking up manufacturing of Conductor. After getting approval from the
Purchaser, the Supplier shall submit 30 more copies of the approved drawing to Purchaser for
further distribution and field use at Purchaser’s end.
All wooden components shall be manufactured out of seasoned soft wood free from defects that
may materially weaken the component parts of the drums. Preservative treatment for anti-termite
/anti fungus (Aldrime /Aldruse) shall be applied to the entire drum with preservatives of a quality
which is not harmful to the conductor.
The flanges shall be of two/three ply construction with each ply at right angles to the other and
nailed together. The nails shall be driven from the inside face flange, punched and then clenched on
the other face. The tolerance in thickness of each ply shall be +3 mm only. There shall be at least 3
nails per plank of ply with maximum nail spacing of 75mm. Where a slot is cut in the flange to
receive the inner end of the conductor, the entrance shall be in line with the periphery of the barrel.
The wooden battens used for making the barrel of the conductor shall be of segmental type. These
shall be nailed to the barrel supports with at least two nails. The battens shall be closely butted and
shall provide a round barrel with smooth external surface. The edges of the battens shall be rounded
or chamfered to avoid damage to the conductor.
Barrel studs shall be used for construction of drums. The flanges shall be holed and the barrel
supports slotted to receive them. The barrel studs shall be threaded over a length on either end,
sufficient to accommodate washers, spindle plates and nuts for fixing flanges at the required
spacing. The Barrel studs should be tack-welded with the nuts after tightening.
Normally, the nuts on the studs shall stand proud of the flanges. All the nails used on the inner
surface of the flanges and the drum barrel shall be countersunk. The ends of barrel shall generally
be flushed with top of the nuts.
The inner check of the flanges and drum barrel surface shall be painted with a bitumen based paint.
Before reeling, card board of double corrugated or thick bituminized waterproof bamboo paper shall
be secured to the drum barrel and inside of flanges or the drum by means of a suitable commercial
adhesive material. The paper should be dried before use. Medium grade Kraft paper shall be used
in between the layers of the conductor. After reeling the conductor, the exposed surface of the outer
layer of conductor shall be wrapped with think polythene sheet across the flanges to preserve the
conductor from dirt, grit and damage during transportation and handling and also to prevent ingress
of rain water during storage/transport.
A minimum space of 125mm shall be provided between the inner surface of the external protective
layer and outer layer of the conductor.
Each batten shall be securely nailed across grains as far as possible to the flange edges with at
least 2 nails per end. The length of the nails shall not be less than twice the thickness of the battens.
The nail shall not protrude above the general surface and shall not have exposed sharp edges or
allow the battens to be released due to corrosion.
Outside the protective layer, there shall be a minimum of two binders consisting of hoop
iron/galvanized steel wire. Each protective layer shall have two recess to accommodate the binders.
The conductor ends shall be properly sealed and secured with the help of U-nails on one side of the
flanges. The conductor shall be hinged by use of galvanized steel wire/aluminium wire at three
locations at least 75mm apart or more covered with PVC adhesive tape so as to avoid loosening of
conductor layers in transit and handling.
Only one length of conductor shall be wound on each drum.
- 15 -
Marking
Each drum shall have the following information stenciled on it in indelible ink alongwith other
essential data:
Purchase order number
Name and address of consignee
Manufacture’s name and address
Drum Number
Size of conductor
Length of conductor in meters
Gross weight of drum with conductor
Weight of empty drum with lagging
Arrow marking for unwinding
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
6.0
6.1
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.5.1
GALVANISED STEEL EARTHWIRE
DETAILS OF EARTHWIRE
The galvanised steel earth wire shall generally conform to the Specification of ACSR core wire as
mentioned in IS:398 (Part-II)-1976 except where otherwise specified herein.
The details of the earthing are tabulated below:
Stranding and wire diameter
7/2.50 mm steel
7/3.15 mm steel
7/3.66 mm steel
Number of strands
Steel core
1
1
1
Outer steel layer
6
6
6
Total sectional area
35.30 mm2
54.55 mm2
73.65 mm2
Overall diameter
7.50 mm
9.45 mm
10.98 mm
Approximate weight
271 kg/km
428 kg/km
583 kg/km
Calculated DC resistance at 5.56 Ω/km
3.375 Ω/km
2.5 Ω/km
200C
Minimum ultimate tensile 36 KN
57 KN
68.4 KN
strength
Direction of lay of outer layer Right hand
Right hand
Right hand
WORKMANSHIP
All steel strands shall be smooth, uniform and free of all imperfections, such as spills and splits, die
marks, scratches, abrasions and kinks after drawing and also after stranding.
The finished material shall have minimum brittleness, as it will be subjected to appreciable vibration
while in use.
The steel strands shall be hot dip galvanised and shall have a minimum zinc coating of 275 gms/sq.
m.) after stranding of the uncoated wire surface. The zinc coating shall be smooth, continuous, of
uniform thickness, free from imperfections and shall withstand three and a half dips after stranding in
standard preece test. The steel wire rod shall be of such quality and purity that, when drawn to the
size of the strands specified and coated with zinc, the finished strands shall be of uniform quality
and have the same properties and characteristics in ASTM designation B498-74.
The steel strands shall be performed and post formed in order to prevent spreading of strands while
cutting of composite earth wire. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to galvanization during pre
forming and post forming operation.
To avoid susceptibility towards wet storage stains (white rust), the finished material shall be
provided with a protective coating of boiled linseed oil.
JOINTS IN WIRES
There shall be no joint of any kind in the finished steel wire strand entering into the manufacture of
the earth wire. There shall be no strand joints or strand splices in any length of the completed
stranded earth wire.
TOLERANCES
The manufacturing tolerances to the extent of the following limits only shall be permitted in the
Diameter of the individual steel strands and lay length of the earth wire:
Earth wire
Standard Dia.
Maximum Dia.
Minimum Dia.
7/2.50
2.50 mm
2.56 mm
2.47 mm
7/3.15
3.15 mm
3.20 mm
3.10 mm
7/3.66
3.66 mm
3.75 mm
3.57 mm
Lay length
Earth Wire
Standard
Maximum
Minimum
7/2.50
113 mm
135 mm
90 mm
7/3.15
160 mm
175 mm
145 mm
7/3.66
181 mm
198 mm
165 mm
MATERIALS
STEEL
The steel wire strands shall be drawn from high carbon steel rod and shall conform to the following
- 16 -
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.6
6.6.1
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
6.6.2
a)
b)
6.7
6.7.1
6.8
i.)
ii.)
iii.)
6.9
requirements as to the chemical composition: Element
%Composition
7/2.50 mm steel
7/3.15 mm steel
7/3.66 mm steel
Carbon
0.55 Max.
0.55 Max.
0.55 Max.
Manganese 0.4 to 0.9
0.4 to 0.9
0.4 to 0.9
Phosphorus 0.040 Max.
0.040 Max.
0.04 Max.
Sulphur
0.040 Max.
0.040 Max.
0.04 Max.
Silicon
0.15 to 0.35
0.15 to 0.35
0.15 to 0.35
ZINC
The zinc used for galvanising shall be electrolytic High Grade Zinc of 99.95% purity. It shall conform
to and satisfy all the requirements of IS:209-1979.
STANDARD LENGTH
The earth wire shall be supplied in standard drum length of manufacturer as per actual requirement.
TESTS
In accordance with the requirements stipulated in Section1 and Section2, earth wire shall conform to
type tests as per relevant IS/IEC and shall be subjected to the following acceptance tests and
routine tests:
ACCEPTANCE TESTS
Visual check for joints, scratches etc. and length )
of Earth wire.
Dimensional check
)
Galvanising test
)
Lay length check
)
Torsion test
)
Elongation test
)
Wrap test
)
DC resistance test
)
IS:398 (Part – III) 1976
Breaking load test
)
Chemical analysis of steel
)
ROUTINE TESTS
Check that there are no cuts, fins etc. on the strands.
Check for correctness of stranding.
TESTS DURING MANUFACTURING
Chemical analysis of zinc used for galvanising.
)
Chemical analysis of steel
)
MARSHALLING KIOSK
PRINCIPAL PARAMETERS
The Marshalling Kiosk shall be suitably fixed so as to provide no opening to inside and shall be
sufficiently projected to prevent splash of rainwater to the inside of the Marshalling Kiosk.
The Marshalling Kiosk will be 1400 mm (height) 1200 mm (width) and 550 mm (depth) complete with
double door in front provided with pad-locking facility in the door handle. The Marshalling Kiosk shall
be bolted on the 550 mm high angle-iron frame work made of 35x35x6 mm MS angle braced lengthwise by 35x6 mm MS Flat.
The Marshalling Kiosk shall be equipped with 3 No. earth test links made of tinned copper for CT
circuits.
TERMINAL BLOCK CONNECTORS
Terminal block shall conform to requirements given in Section 2(GTR).
The terminal connector will conform to the following details:
Current & Voltage
30 Amps, 660VAC/900 VDC
Ratings
Capacity
up to three ring-tongue crimped copper wires of 4mm2, cross sectional
area.
disconnecting type terminal blocks for CTs and PTs Terminal connectors for CT/PTs shall have
provision of disconnecting and shortening links for measurement of CT currents without opening the
CTs and isolation of PT circuits.
DISTRIBUTION OF TERMINALS AND THEIR IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS
The no. of terminals required shall be as follows:
220kV-300, 132kV-250 & 66kV-200.
The total number of terminals in the Marshalling Kiosk will be distributed in ten rows. Terminal block
connector row’s shall be adequately spaced and in no case less than 100 mm apart center of the
terminal block so as to permit convenient access to terminations.
Labels in the form of plastic/steel plates carrying numerals for terminal identification shall be so
mounted as to cause no interference with regard to access to terminal nuts. The numerals marked
from top to bottom in ascending order starting from left-hand side as viewed from the front of the
- 17 -
6.10
6.10.1
6.11
6.11.1
6.11.2
6.12
6.12.1
6.13
6.14
6.14.1
6.14.2
a)
b)
7.0
7.1
7.1.1
7.1.2
a)
b)
c)
d)
7.2
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Marshalling Kiosk and a progressively increasing from left hand side to right hand side. The
numbering of Terminals and their arrangement in a 200, 250 and 300 terminals Marshalling Kiosks
shall be as per sketch enclosed (Drg. No. C/ENG/HSEB/MB).
EARTHING CONDUCTORS
GENERAL
All conductors buried in earth and concrete shall be of mild steel. All conductors above ground level
and earthing leads shall be of galvanised steel.
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
GALVANISED STEEL
Steel conductors above ground level shall be galvanised according to IS:2629.
The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 610 gm/sq.m. and minimum thickness shall be 85
microns.
The galvanised surfaces shall consist of a continuous and uniformly thick coating of zinc, firmly
adhering to the surfaces of steel. The finished surface shall be clean and smooth and shall be free
from defects like discolored patches, bare spots, unevenness of coating, spelter which is loosely
attached to the steel globules, spiky deposits, blistered surfaces, flaking or peeling off etc. The
presence of any of these defects noticed on visual or microscopic inspection shall render the
material liable to rejection.
TESTS
Galvanised steel shall be subjected to four one minute dips in copper sulphate solution as per
IS:2633.
SPACERS
GENERAL
Spacers shall conform to IS-10162.
CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES
No magnetic material shall be used in fabrication of spacers except for GI Bolts and nuts.
Spacer design shall be made to take care of fixing and removing during installation and
maintenance.
The design of the spacers shall be such that the conductor does not come in contact with any sharp
edge.
TESTS
In accordance with requirements stipulated in Section1 and Section2, each type of spacer shall
conform to type tests as per relevant IS/IEC and shall be subjected to the following, acceptance
tests and routine tests in addition to those specified in IS/IEC: ACCEPTANCE TEST
The acceptance tests shall be as per IS:10162 (latest revision).
ROUTINE TEST
Visual Examination
Dimensional verification.
EARTHING
The earthing shall be in accordance with requirements given hereunder. The earthmat design shall
be done by the contractor as per IEEE 80. The earthmat shall be connected to the existing earthmat
in case of substations where earthmat is already laid.
GENERAL
Exact location of earthing connections shall be designed to suit the site conditions.
Neutral points of system of different voltages, metallic enclosures and frame works associated with
all current carrying equipments and extraneous metal works associated with electric system shall be
connected to a single earthing system unless stipulated otherwise.
Code of practice for Earthing IS:3043.
Code of practice for the protection of building and allied structures against lightning IS:2309.
Indian Electricity Rules 1956 with latest amendments.
National Electricity Safety Code IEEE-80.
DETAILS OF EARTHING SYSTEM
ITEM
SIZE
MATERIAL
Main Earthing Conductor
40 mm dia MS Rod
Mild Steel
Conductor above ground & 75x12 mm GS Flat
Galvanised Steel
earthing leads (for equipment)
Conductor above ground & 75x12 mm GS Flat
Galvanised Steel
earthing leads (for columns &
aux. Structures)
Earthing of indoor LT panels, 50x6 mm GS Flat
Galvanised Steel
control panels marshalling boxes,
MOM boxes, junction boxes &
lightning panels etc.
Rod electrode
40 mm dia, 3000 mm
Mild Steel
Pipe electrode upto water level
100 mm dia CI pipe with 13 CI
mm thickness
- 18 -
g)
h)
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.6
7.3.7
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.4
7.4.5
7.4.6
7.4.8
7.4.9
7.4.10
7.4.11
7.4.12
7.4.13
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.5.4
Earthing for motors flat
25x3 mm steel
Galvanised
Earthing conductor along
50x6 mm GS Flat
Mild Steel painted with Red
outdoor cable trenches primer
Oxide
EARTHING CONDUCTOR LAYOUT
Earthing conductors in outdoor areas shall be buried at least 600 mm below finished grade level
unless stated otherwise.
Wherever earthing conductors cross cable trenches, underground service ducts, pipes, tunnels,
railway tracks etc. It shall be laid minimum 300 mm below them and shall be re-routed in case it
fouls with equipment/structure foundations
Tap-connections from the earthing grid to the equipment/structure to be earthed, shall be terminated
on the earthing terminals of equipment/structure.
Earthing conductors or leads along their run on cable trench, ladder columns, beams, walls etc. shall
be supported by suitable welding/cleating at intervals of 750 mm. Wherever it passage through
walls, floors etc., galvanised iron sleeves shall be provided for the passage of the conductor and
both ends of the sleeves shall be sealed to prevent the passage of water through the sleeves.
Earthing conductor around the building shall be buried in earth at a minimum distance of 1500 mm
from the outer boundary of the building. In case high temperature is encountered at some location,
the earthing conductor shall be laid minimum 1500 mm away from such location.
Earthing conductor crossing the road shall be laid 300 mm below road or at a greater depth to suit
the site conditions.
Earthing conductor embedded in the concrete shall have approximately 50 mm concrete cover.
EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURE EARTHING
Earthing pads shall be provided by the Contractor of the apparatus/equipment at accessible
position. The connection between earthing pads and the earthing grid shall be made by short and
direct earthing leads free from kinks and splices. In case earthing pads are not provided on the item
to be earthed, same shall be provided in consultation with engineer.
Whether specifically shown in drgs. or not, steel/structure columns, metallic stairs etc. shall be
connected to the nearby earthing grid conductor by two earthing leads. Electrical continuity shall be
ensured by bonding different sections of hand-rails and metallic stairs.
Metallic pipes, conduits and cable tray sections for cable installation shall be bonded to ensure
electrical continuity and connected to earthing conductors at regular. Apart from intermediate
connections, beginning points shall also be connected to earthing system.
Metallic conduits shall not be used as earth continuity conductor.
A separate earthing conductor shall be provided for earthing lighting fixtures, receptacles, switches,
junction boxes, lighting conduits etc.
Wherever earthing conductor crosses or runs along metallic structures such as gas, water, steam
conduits etc. and steel reinforcement in concrete it shall be bonded to the same.
Light poles, junction boxes on the poles, cable and cable boxes/glands, lockout switches etc. shall
be connected to the earthing conductor running along with the supply cable which in turn shall be
connected to earthing grid conductor at a minimum two points whether specifically shown or not.
Railway tracks within switchyard area shall be earthed at a spacing of 30 mm and also by both the
ends.
Earthing conductor shall be buried 500 mm inside the switchyard fence. Every alternate post of the
fence and gates shall be connected to earthing loop by one lead.
Flexible earthing connectors shall be provided for the moving parts.
All lighting panels, junction boxes, receptables fixtures, conduits etc. shall be grounded in
compliance with the provision of I.E. rules.
A continuous ground conductor of 16 SWG GI wire shall be run all along each conduit run and
bonded at every 600 mm by not less than two turns of the same size of wires. The conductor shall
be connected to each panel ground bus. All junction boxes, receptacles, lighting fixtures etc. shall be
connected to this 16 SWG ground conductor.
50 mm x 6 mm MS flat shall run on the top tier and along the cable trenches and the same shall be
welded to each of the racks. Further this flat shall be earthed at both the ends at an interval of 30m.
The MS flat shall be finally painted with two coats of Red Oxide primer and coats of post office and
red enamel paint.
JOINTING
Earthing connections with equipment earthing pads shall be bolted type. Contact surfaces shall be
free from scale, paint, enamel, grease, rust or dirt. Two bolts shall be provided for making each
connection. Equipment bolted connections, after being checked and tested, shall be painted with
anti-corrosive paint/compound.
Connection between equipment earthing lead and main earthing conductors and between main
earthing conductors shall be welded/brazed type. For rust protections, the welds should be treated
with red lead and afterwards thickly coated with bitumen compound to prevent corrosion.
Steel to copper connections shall be brazed type and shall be treated to prevent moisture
ingression.
Resistance of the joint shall not be more than the resistance of the equivalent length of the
conductor.
- 19 -
7.5.5
7.5.6
7.5.7
7.6
7.7
7.7.1
7.7.2
7.7.3
7.7.4
7.7.5
7.7.6
7.7.7
7.8
7.8.1
7.8.2
7.8.3
7.8.4
7.8.5
8.
8.1
8.2
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
9.
10.
10.1
10.2
11.
11.1
All ground connections shall be made by electric arc welding. All welded joints shall be allowed to
cool down gradually to atmospheric before putting any load on it. Artificial cooling shall not be
allowed.
Bending of large rod/thick conductor shall be done preferably by gas heating.
All arc welding with large dia. Conductors shall be done with low hydrogen content electrodes.
POWER CABLE EARTHING
Metallic sheaths and armour of all multi core power cables shall be earthed at both equipment and
switchgear end. Sheath and armour of single core power cable shall be earthed at switchgear end
only.
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT FOR EARTHING SYSTEMS
Each earthing lead from the neutral of the power transformer shall be directly connected to one pipe
electrode in independent treated earth pit up to water level which in turn, shall be buried in cement
concrete pit with a cast iron cover hinged to a cast iron frame to have an access to the joints. One
directly driven three meter MS Rod of 40 mm dia electrode shall also be provided on each neutral. In
one substation minimum four number of independent pipe electrodes up to water level shall be
provided at least one each at every neutral point of all transformer. All the pipe electrodes and rod
electrodes shall be connected to the station main earth grid.
Earthing terminal of each lightning arrester shall be directly connected to two rod electrode which in
turn, shall be connected to station earthing grid.
Capacitor voltage transformer , PT and down conductors of tower with peak etc. shall be directly
connected to rod electrode which in turn, shall be connected to station earthing grid.
Auxiliary earthing mat comprising of closely spaced (300mm x 300mm) conductors of 40 mm dia rod
shall be provided at depth of 300 mm from ground level below the operating handles of the MOM
Boxes of Isolators in area of 1.5m x 1.5m. MOM Boxes shall be directly connected to the auxiliary
earthing mat. The auxiliary earthing mat shall be connected to main earth mat.
Earthing of each Post Insulator base of Isolator and support Insulators of circuit Breakers is required
to be connected with earthing strip.
The earthing strips are required to be connected at the top of support structure on both sides and
not at bottom.
Insulating strings in the gantry beam are required to be connected at the base with common strip.
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
Conductors of the lightning protection system shall not be connected with the conductors of the
safety earthing above ground level.
Down conductors shall be cleated on the structures at 2000 mm interval.
Connection between each down conductor and rod electrodes shall be made via test joint located
approximately 1500 mm above ground level. The bidders shall include the cost of test links in the
erection price component of respective equipment/structure and no extra payment shall be made
for the same.
Lightning conductors shall not pass through or run inside G.I. conduits.
All metallic structures within a vicinity of 2000 mm in air and 5000 mm below ground shall be
bounded to the conductors of lightning protection system.
MAIN BUS BARS
The brief description of the bus switching scheme, bus bar layout and equipment connection already
adopted are indicated in the SLDs enclosed with Section 1.
The bidder shall furnish supporting calculations for the bus bars/conductors to show adequacy of
design parameters for:
Cantilever strength of Post Insulators.
Short circuit forces and spacer location for each span of ACSR conductor stringing.
Earthing design calculations.
Direct stroke lightning protection.
Ampacity calculations.
BAY EQUIPMENT #
The disposition of various bay equipment is shown in single line diagrams and standard section
drawing/layout drawing enclosed with Section 1.
LIGHTNING PROTECTION
Direct stroke lightning protection (DSLP) shall be provided in the switchyard by shield wires. The
layout drawings enclosed indicate arrangement. The final arrangement shall be decided after
approval of the DSLP calculations. Rezvik method of lightning protection shall be followed. Any
additional expenditure resulting from change of layout if required shall be to the firm’s account.
The lightning protection system shall not be in direct contact with underground metallic service ducts
and cables.
TERMINAL POINTS
The terminal points for the scope of work of switchyard are given below: LINE FEEDERS
The transmission line shall terminate on line side gantry structure. The supply and erection of
tension insulator string for line termination and tension clamps for earthwire are included in the
scope of the bidder.
- 20 -
11.2
12.
12.1.1
12.1.2
12.1.3
12.1.4
12.1.5
12.1.6
12.1.7
12.2
13 (A)
a)
b)
Sr. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lightning protection down conductor at this end, tap offs and jumper connections from this dead end
to all equipment in the switchyard are in Contractor’s scope.
EQUIPMENT ERECTION NOTES
All support insulators, circuit Breaker interrupters and other fragile equipment shall preferably be
handled with cranes having suitable booms and handling capacity.
The slings shall be of sufficient length to avoid any damage to insulator due to excessive swing,
scratching by sling ropes etc.
Handling equipment, sling ropes etc. should be tested periodically before erection for strength.
Bending of compressed air piping should be done by a bending machine and through cold bending
only. Bending shall be such inner diameter of pipe is not reduced.
Cutting of the pipes wherever required shall be such as to avoid flaring of the ends. Hence only a
proper pipe cutting tool shall be used. Hacksaw shall not be used.
Muslin or leather cloth shall be used for cleaning the inside and outside of hollow insulators.
All the equipment, instruments and auxiliaries required for testing and commissioning of equipment
shall be arranged at site by the contractor.
STORAGE
The contractor shall provide and construct adequate storage shed for proper storage of equipments,
where sensitive equipments shall be stored indoors. All equipments during storage shall be
protected against damage due to acts of nature or accidents. The storage instructions of the
equipment manufacturer/HVPNL shall be strictly adhered to.
WIRING DIAGRAM AND CABLE SCHEDULES FOR TURNKEY PROJECTS
At 400kV & 220kV Sub-Stations, Armoured Copper Control Cables with 350TB or more (depends
upon control circuit termination) & 300TB MK resp. and at 132/66kV Sub-Stations Unarmoured
Copper Control Cables with 250TB/200TB MKs are used. All cables from each equipment installed
in a bay shall be routed through BMK to Control Room (for S/Stns without SAS). However, for 33kV
voltage level MKs are not provided and Unarmoured Copper Control Cables from each equipment
installed in a bay shall be routed directly to Control Room(for S/Stns without SAS). Further, Control
cables shall be routed directly from equipments to AC kiosks for S/Stns. with SAS except for 400kV
S/Stns. where cables shall be routed through BMKs to AC Kiosks. Voltage level for 400kV is
designated by ‘AA’, 220kV is designated by ‘A’, 132kV is designated by ‘B’, 66kV is designated by
‘C’, 33kV is designated by ‘D’ and 11kV is designated by ‘E’.
As per standard practice in HVPNL, following sizes of copper control cables are being used for
400/220/132/66/33kV voltage levels:3CX2.5Sq.mm, 7CX2.5Sq.mm, 10CX2.5Sq.mm, 16CX2.5Sq.mm, 4CX4Sq.mm, 2CX4Sq.mm,
2CX6Sq.mm and 7CX4Sq.mm and routed as under:-
Size of Cables (Cores
X Sq.mm)
7CX4 & 4CX4
4CX4 & 2CX4
7CX4 & 4CX4
4CX4 & 2CX4
4CX4 & 2CX4
2CX4
2CX4
4CX4 & 2CX4
MK
TB
No.
TB-1
TB-1
TB-1
TB-1
TB-1
TB-2
7.
8.
2CX6
16CX2.5
or 10CX2.5
TB-2
TB-3
9.
TB-3
10.
16CX2.5
or 10CX2.5
16CX2.5 or 10CX2.5
11.
10CX2.5 or 7CX2.5
TB-5
12.
13.
10CX2.5 or 7CX2.5 or
3CX2.5
16CX2.5 or 10CX2.5
TB-6
14.
15.
3CX2.5
16CX2.5 or 10CX2.5
TB-6
TB-7
TB-4
-
Equipment Circuits to be used
For 220kV CT Circuit (from Top)
From MK to C&R Panel
For 132/66kV CT circuits (From Top).
From MK to C&R Panel
For 33kV CT circuit Directly to C&R Panel.
For 220/132/66kV NCT Circuit (Bottom TBs).
For 33kV NCT circuit Directly to C&R Panel.
For 230VAC Supply (From Top).
(3-Phase 4wire & 1-Phase)
For 220VDC Supply (From Bottom).
From top, CB Trip Circuit (DC Supply-1/Auto Reclose /
Remote Close / Remote Tip-1/ Prot. Trip-I / Remote Trip-II /
Prot. Trip-II/ Post-Pre Close Sup. TC-I / Post-Pre Close Sup.
TC-II / DC Supply-II) etc.
For CB Alarm Circuit including spring charge indications (After
CB Trip Circuits)
For all CB N/C Contacts (Semaphore / Auto Trip / Trip Alarm /
Close Indication / Digital Status), etc.
For all CB N/O Contacts (Semaphore / Open Indication /
Digital Status), etc.
For 33kV VCB Tripping Circuit, Alarms and Indication
For Bus Isolator-A N/C Contacts (From Top) For Bus IsolatorB N/C Contacts (From Middle)
For Bus Isolator-A Electrical Interlocking Coil (Bottom).
For Bus Isolator-A N/O Contacts (From Top) For Bus IsolatorB N/O Contacts (From Middle)
- 21 -
16.
17.
3CX2.5
16CX2.5 or 10CX2.5
TB-7
TB-8
18.
19.
3CX2.5
16CX2.5 or 10CX2.5
TB-8
TB-9
20.
21.
22.
3CX2.5
3CX2.5
4CX4
TB-9
TB-10
23.
4CX4
TB-10
3CX2.5
TB-10
24.
2CX4
TB-10
25.
3CX2.5
TB-10
16CX2.5 or 10CX2.5 or TB-10
7CX2.5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
c)
For Bus Isolator-B Electrical Interlocking Coil (Bottom).
For Line Isolator N/C Contacts (From Top) For Earth Switch
N/C Contacts (From Middle)
For Line Isolator Electrical Interlocking Coil (Bottom).
For Line Isolator N/O Contacts (From Top) For Earth Switch
N/O Contacts (From Middle)
For Earth Switch Electrical Interlocking Coil (Bottom).
For 33kV Isolators / Line &Earth Switch semaphore.
In case of Bus Coupler Bay
PT Circuits (From Top)
In case of Line Bay with 3No. CVTs
CVT Circuits (From Top)
KCVT Supply for Electrical Interlocking (From Bottom)
In case of Line Bay with 1No. CVT
CVT Circuits and KCVT Supply for Electrical Interlocking
(From Bottom)
In case of T/F Bay
T/F Tripping Contacts (From Top)
T/F Alarm Circuits (After trip Circuits)
NOTE:In case of transformer and Bus Coupler bays, TB No. 8 & 9 of MK will remain spare since L&E
does not exist.
In case, all CB alarm wires do not get accommodated on Bottom part of TB-3 of MK then shift all
CB alarm wires on Bottom part of TB-5 of MK.
In case of 33kV Bays suitable Terminal Junction Box shall be erected near CTs and wires from
CT will be taken to JB & then to Control Room.
Suitable rating of fuses & links shall be provided for AC & DC Supply by firm.
10% spare capacity of cores shall be kept spare in each size of cables used for each circuit and
intermixing of cables is not allowed for wiring.
As per HVPNL standard practice cable marking be done as given below and Cable ferrule
Numbering shall start from equipment and the numbers will continue in sequential order for
outgoing cables to Control Room for same equipment.
MK TB
Purpose
Cable Numbering
No.
TB-1
CT/NCT Circuit
Starting from 401
TB-2
For AC
AC Supply for Adj. MK / ACDB
-801
AC Supply for C&R Panel
from ACDB -802
TB-2
For DC
DC Supply for Adj. MK /
DCDB -101
DC Supply for C&R Panel
from DCDB -102
TB-2
For AC Supply to 501
The Cable No. from MK to
CB
Control Room in next sequential
TB-3
For CB trip
502
order 5XX.
Circuits.
TB-3
For CB Alarms
503
TB-4
N/C Contacts of
504
CB
TB-5
N/O Contact of
505
CB
TB-8 & 9 N/C and N/O
601
The Cable No. from MK to
Contacts of Line
Control Room in next sequential
Isolator.
order 6XX.
602
TB-8
Electrical
Interlocking Coil
of Line Isolator.
603
TB-6 & 7 N/C and N/O
Contacts of Bus
Isolator-A
604
TB-8
Electrical
Interlocking Coil
of Bus Isolator-A
TB-6 & 7 N/C and N/O
605
Contacts of Bus
- 22 -
TB-8
TB-8 & 9
TB-8
TB-10
TB-10
TB-10
TB-10
TB-10
1.
2.
3.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
d)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
13.(B)
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
Isolator-B
Electrical
Interlocking Coil
of Bus Isolator-B
N/C and N/O
Contacts of Earth
Switch
Electrical
Interlocking Coil
of Earth Switch
KCVT Supply for
Interlocking
For AC Supply
for T/F
For T/F Trip
Circuits
For T/F Alarms
For PT/CVT
Circuits
606
301
302
303
701
The Cable No. from MK to
Control Room in next sequential
order 7XX.
702
703
Starting from 201
NOTE:Incase of Isolators / L&E Switch the cable numbering for AC & DC supply shall be in continuation
to the numberings marked above.
Each cable number is to be followed by respective bay number and same method of cable
numbering is to be followed for 400kV, 220kV,132kV, 66kV and 33kV bays.
Example:- In case of 132kV Bay with Bay No. B-10; cable numbering for AC supply to Circuit
Breaker be done as2C X 4mm2 C.No.501B10
Where,
2C X 4mm2 is Size of Cable.
501 is cable number.
B is Voltage level.
10 is bay number.
Cable termination shall be done as described below.
At MK, LHS of each TBs shall have respective equipment cable ferrule no. / MK TB No. and RHS
shall have MK TB No./ C&R Panel cable ferrule no.
At Each Equipment, LHS of TBs shall have MK TB No./Equipment ferrule no.
At C&R Panel, LHS of TBs shall have respective MK TB No./ C&R panel ferrule no.
In Wiring Diagram, single line Diagram shall have complete TB details of all equipment installed
in a bay with cable core ferrule no. as per approved drawings has to be provided.
Electrical Interlocking Scheme for Double Bus-Bar sub-stations
The main requirement of Electrical Interlocking Scheme for grid sub-stations having Double BusBar sub-stations is as under:The Isolator shall not operate unless the circuit breaker is locked in open position.
The earthing switch shall close only when the line Isolator is open and line is “OFF”.
The line Isolator shall close only when the corresponding Circuit Breaker is open.
The Bus Isolator of Bus Coupler Bay shall operate only when the Bus Coupler Circuit Breaker is
open.
When one Bus Isolator of any bay excepting the Bus Coupler is closed, the other shall close only
when the Bus Coupler Circuit Breaker & its both the Isolators are closed.
A typical Interlocking Scheme satisfying the above requirement is shown in figure – 1 enclosed.
Further, Electrical Interlocking Scheme for Single Bus-Bar sub-stations be prepared in this pattern
accordingly. These schemes shall be provided in respective wiring diagrams and interlinking be
shown in MK.
Note:CS/WD as per above shall be prepared by the bidder after award of contract and submitted in
5sets for consideration and approval to the purchaser.
CABLE TAGS AND MARKERS
Each cable and conduit run shall be tagged with numbers that appear in the cable and conduit
schedule.
The tag shall be of Aluminium with the number punched on it and securely attached to the cable
conduit by not less than two turns of 20 SWG GI wire conforming to IS:280. Cable tags shall be of
rectangular shape for power cables and circular shape for control cables.
Location of cables laid directly underground shall be clearly indicated with cable marker made of
galvanised iron plate.
Location of underground cable joints shall be indicated with cable marker with an additional
inscription “Cable Joints”.
The marker shall project 150mm above ground and shall be spaced at an interval of 30 meters
- 23 -
13.6
13.7
13.7.1
13.7.2
13.7.3
13.7.4
13.8
13.8.1
13.8.2
13.8.3
13.8.4
13.8.5
13.8.6
13.8.7
13.8.8
13.8.9
13.8.10
13.8.11
13.8.12
13.8.13
13.8.14
13.8.15
14.
14.1
14.2
14.3
15.
15.1
and at every change in direction. They shall be located on both sides of road and drain crossings.
Cable tags shall be provided on all cables at each end (just before entering the equipment
enclosure), on both sides of a wall or floor crossing, on each duct/conduit entry and at every
twenty meters (20 m) in cable tray/trench runs. Cable tags shall be provided inside the
switchgear, motor control centers, control and relay panels etc., wherever required for cable
identification, where a number of cables enter together through a gland plate.
CABLE SUPPORTS AND CABLE TRAY MOUNTING ARRANGEMENTS
The contractor shall provide embedded steel insert on concrete floors/walls to secure supports for
by welding to these inserts or available building steel structures, for the purpose of casting in the
control room.
The supports shall be fabricated from standard structural steel members.
Insert plates will be provided at an interval of 750 mm wherever cables are to be supported
without the use of cable trays, such as in trenches, while at all other places these will be an
interval of 1000 mm (as per drg. attached).
Painted lattice type steel trays (with width 300,450 & 600mm) of adequate size i.e. MS angle
50x50x6mm with 50x6mm MS Flat & MS angle 25x25x3mm with 25x25mm MS Flat each MS Flat
at a distance of 300mm as per site requirement for laying control and power cables from panels
(placed on top floor) to GIS & Transformers and for 11kV Outgoing cables & other cables
identified as per site requirement. Further, it should be ensured that lattice type steel trays of
size MS angle 25x25x3mm with 25x25mmMS Flat should not be used for power cables.
CABLE TERMINATION AND CONNECTIONS
The termination and connection of cables shall be done strictly in accordance with cable and
termination kit manufacturer’s instructions, drawing and/or as directed by the HVPNL.
The work shall include all clamping, fittings, fixing, plumbing, soldering, drilling, cutting, taping,
heat shrinking, (where applicable), connecting to cable terminal, shorting and grounding as
required to complete the job.
Supply of all consumable material shall be included in the scope of the contractor.
The equipment will be generally provided with un-drilled gland plates for cables/conduit entry. The
contractor shall be responsible for drilling of gland plates painting and touching up. Holes shall
not be made by gas cutting.
Control cable cores entering control panels /switchgear /MCC / miscellaneous panels shall be
neatly bunched, clamped and tied with nylon strap or PVC perforated strap to keep them in
position.
The contractor shall tag/ferrule control cable cores at all terminations, as instructed by the
HVPNL. In panels where a large number of cables are to be terminated and cable identification
may be difficult, each core ferrule may include the complete cable no. as well
Spare cores shall be similarly tagged with cable numbers and coiled up.
All cable entry points shall be sealed and made vermin and dust proof. Unused openings shall be
effectively closed.
Double compression type tinned/nickel plated brass cable glands shall be provided by the
contractor for all power and control cables to provide dust and weather proof terminations.
The cable glands shall be tested as per BS:6121. They shall comprise of heavy duty brass
casting, machine finished and tinned to avoid corrosion and oxidation. Rubber components used
in cable glands shall be neoprene and of tested quality. The cable glands shall be of approved
make.
The cable gland shall also be tested for dust proof and weather proof termination. The test
procedure has to be discussed and agreed to between the HVPNL and cable glands
manufacturer.
If the cable and box or the terminal enclosure provided on the equipment is found unsuitable and
requires modification, the same shall be carried out by the contractor, as directed by the HVPNL.
Crimping tool shall be of approved design and make.
Cable lugs shall be tinned copper solderless crimping type conforming to IS:8309 and 8394. The
cable lugs shall be of approved make.
Solderless crimping of terminals shall be done by using corrosion inhibitory compound. The cable
lugs shall suit the type of terminals provided.
DIRECTLY BURIED CABLES
The contractor shall construct the cable trenches required for directly buried cables. The scope
of work shall include excavation, preparation of sand bedding, soil cover, supply and installation
of brick or concrete protective covers back filling and ramming supply and installation of route
markers and joint markers. The Bidder shall ascertain soil conditions prevailing at site, before
quoting the unit rates.
The power and control cable between LT station, Control room, shall be laid in the buried cable
trenches. Further, for lighting purposes also, buried cable trench can be used in the outdoor area.
Cable route and joint markers and RCC warning covers shall be provided wherever required. The
voltage grade of cables shall be engraved on the marker.
INSTALLATION OF CABLES
Cabling shall be on cable racks, in built-up trenches, vertical shafts, excavated trenches for direct
- 24 -
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.6
15.7
15.8
15.9
15.10
15.11
15.12
15.13
15.14
15.15
15.16
15.17
15.18
15.19
15.20
burial, pulled through pipes, and conduits laid in concrete ducts, run bare and clamped on
wall/ceiling/steel structures etc. as shown in the drawings in detailed engineering stage. Where
specific cable layouts are not shown on drawings, contractor shall route these as directed by the
HVPNL.
The contractor shall fabricate and install mounting arrangements for the support and installation
of all the cables on angles at 1000 mm spacing in the trenches, as shown in the drawing
enclosed with Specification. These mounting structures/cable racks shall be fabricated from
structural steel members (channels, angles and flats) of the required size. The fabrication,
welding and erection of these structures shall conform to the relevant clauses of Section STR, in
addition to the Specifications given herein.
Cable racks and supports shall be painted after installation with two coats of metal primer
(comprising of red oxide zinc chromate in a synthetic medium) followed by two finishing coats of
Aluminium paint. The red oxide and zinc chromate shall conform to IS:2074. All welding works
inclusive of the consumables required for Specifications given herein.
All inter pole cables (power & control) for all equipment shall be laid in cable trenches/Gl conduit
pipes of NB 50/100 mm diameter, class medium as per IS 4736 which shall be buried in the
ground at a depth of 250 mm. The interpole cabling piping of Breakers shall be laid in cable
trenches. The scope shall include all labour,material, equipment for transporting, laying, burying
etc. including required bends and seals.
Cable shall be generally located adjoining the electrical equipment through the pipe insert
embedded in the floor. In the case of equipments located away from cable trench either pipe
inserts shall be embedded in the floor connecting the cable trench and the equipment or in case
the distance is small, notch/opening on the floor shall be provided. In all these cases necessary
bending radius as recommended by the cable Contractor shall be maintained. Cabling in the
control room shall be done on ladder type cable trays.
Cables from the equipment to trench shall run in GI conduits. Necessary conduits of adequate
sizes and length shall be supplied and installed by the contractor. Flexible conduit should be used
between fixed conduit/cable trays (perforated type) and equipment terminal boxes, where
vibration is anticipated. The flexible conduit shall be as per the relevant IS.
Power and control cables shall be laid in separate tiers. The order of laying of various cables shall
be as follows, for cables other than directly buried:
Power Cable on top tiers.
Control instrumentation and others service cables in bottom tiers.
Single core cables in trefoil formation shall be laid with a distance of three times the diameter of
cable between trefoil centerlines. All power cables shall be laid with a minimum center-to-center
distance equal to twice the diameter of the cable.
Trefoil clamps for single core cable shall be pressure die cast Aluminium (LM-6), Nylon or fibre
glass and shall include necessary fixing GI nuts, bolts, washers etc. These are required at every
2 meter of cable runs. The cost of supply and erecting these clamps shall be made on the unit
rate basis.
Power and control cable shall be securely fixed to the trays/supports with self locking type nylon
ties with deinterlocking facility at every 5 meter interval for horizontal run Vertical and inclined
cable runs shall be secured with 25 mm wide and 2 mm thick Aluminium strip clamps at 2 m.
Cables shall not be bent below the minimum permissible limit. The permissible limits are as
follows:
Table of cable and Minimum bending radius voltage grade
Power cable 12 D.
Control cable 10 D.
D is overall diameter of cable.
The cables are to be laid in single layers on racks and are to be routed through culvert whenever
there is road crossing.
In each cable run some extra length shall be kept at a suitable point to enable one (for LT
cables)/two (for HT cables) straight through joints to be made in case the cable develop fault at
later date.
Selection of cable drums for each run shall be so planned as to avoid using straight through
joints. Cable splices will not be permitted except where called for by the drawings, unavoidable or
where permitted by the HVPNL. If straight through joints are unavoidable, the contractor shall use
the straight through joints kit of reputed make.
Control cable terminations inside equipment enclosures shall have sufficient lengths so that
changing of termination blocks can be done without requiring any splicing.
Metal screen and armour of the cable shall be bonded to the earthing system of the station,
wherever required by the HVPNL.
Rollers shall be used at intervals of about two meters while pulling cables.
All due care shall be taken during unreeling, laying and termination of cable to avoid damage due
to twist, kinks, sharp bends etc.
Cable ends shall be kept sealed to prevent damage.
Inspection on receipt, unloading and handling of cables shall generally be in accordance with
- 25 -
15.21
15.22
15.23
15.24
15.25
15.26
15.26.a
15.26.b
15.26.c
15.26.d
15.27 e
15.27
15.27.1
15.27.2
15.28
15.28.1
15.28.2
15.28.3
15.28.4
15.28.5
15.28.6
15.28.7
15.28.8
15.28.9
15.28.10
15.28.11
IS:1255 and other Indian Standard Codes of practices.
Wherever cable pass through wall openings or other partitions, wall sleeves with bushes
having a smooth curved internal surface so as not to damage the cable, shall be supplied,
installed and properly sealed by the contractor at no extra charges.
Contractor shall remove the RCC/Steel trench covers taking up the work and shall replace all the
trench covers after the erection-work in that particular area is completed or when further work is
not likely to be taken up for sometime.
Contractor shall furnish three of the report on work carried out in a particular week, indicating
cable numbers, date on which laid, actual length and route, testing carried out, terminations
carried out, along with the marked up copy of the cable schedule and interconnection drawing
wherever any modifications are made.
Contractor shall paint the tray identification number on each run of trays at an interval of 10 m.
In case the outer sheath of a cable is damaged during handling/installation, the contractor shall
repair it at his own cost to the satisfaction of the HVPNL. In case any other part of a cable is
damaged, the same shall be replaced by a healthy cable at no extra cost to the HVPNL, i.e. the
contractor shall be paid for installation and removal of the damaged cable.
All cable terminations shall be appropriately tightened to ensure secure and reliable connections.
The contractor shall cover the exposed part of all cable lugs whether supplied by him or not with
insulating tape, sleeve or paint.
Separate racks/trays will be utilised for different voltage levels from switchyard to control room.
All the cable trenches will be constructed as per standard HVPNL design as far as electrical
portion is concerned.
The GI pipe duly lugged at both ends and by providing bends/elbows or trenches will be
provided/constructed from equipment to trenches.
Provision for accommodation of cables of future bays (All bays position marked on the drawing
whether shown dotted or not to be included for future provision in main the trench size) are to be
made in the main trenches.
Power cables should be coated with fire retardant paint such that fire could be controlled
automatically with low or no smoke propagation and no toxic gases should be released.
The fire retardant coating should be such that it should not degrade the insulation
properties of cable and should not degrade the current carrying capacity of cable. Further
the fire retardant paint should confirms to relevant IS/IEC.
TESTS ON CABLE TRAYS
Test for galvanising (Acceptance test) to be done as per relevant standard.
DEFLECTION TEST (TYPE TEST)
A 2.5 meter straight section of all widths cable trays be simply supported at two ends a uniform
distributed load of 76 kg meter shall be applied along the length of the tray. A maximum deflection
at the mid span shall not exceed 7 mm.
CONDUITS, PIPES AND DUCT INSTALLATION
Contractor shall supply and install all rigid conduits, mild steel pipes, flexible conduits, hume
pipes etc. including all necessary sundry materials such as tees, elbows, check nuts, bushing
reducers, enlargers, coupling Cap, nipples, gland sealing fittings, pull boxes etc. as specified and
to be shown in detailed engineering drawing. The size of the conduit/pipe shall be selected on the
basis of 40% fill criterion.
Contractor shall have his own facility for bending, cutting and threading the conduits at site. Cold
bending should be used. All cuts & threaded ends shall be made smooth without leaving any
edges. Anticorrosive paint shall be applied at all field threaded portions.
All conduit/pipes shall be extended on both sides of wall/floor openings. The fabrication and
installation of supports and the clamping shall be included in the scope of work by Contractor.
When two lengths of conduits are joined together through a coupling, running threads equal to
twice the length of coupling shall be provided on each conduit to facilitate easy dismantling of two
conduits.
Conduit installation shall be permanently connected to earth by means of a special approved type
of earthing clamps. GI pull of adequate size shall be laid in all conduits before installation.
Each conduit run shall be painted with its designation as indicated on the drawing such that it can
be identified at each end.
Embedded conduits shall have a minimum concrete cover of 50 mm.
Conduit run sleeves shall be provided with the bushings at each end.
Metallic conduit runs at termination shall have two locknuts and a bushing for connection. Flexible
conduits shall also be suitably clamped at each end with the help of bushings. Bushings shall
have rounded edges so as not to damage the cables.
When embedded conduits turn upwards from a slab or fill, the termination dimensions shown on
the drawings, if any, shall be taken to represent the position of the straight extension of the
conduit external to and immediately following the bend. At least one half of the arc length of the
bend shall be embedded.
All conduits/pipes shall have their ends closed by caps until cable are pulled. After cables are
pulled, the ends of conduits/pipes shall be sealed in an approved manner to prevent damage to
- 26 -
threaded portions and entrance of moisture and foreign material.
15.28.12 For underground runs, contractor shall excavate and back fill as necessary.
15.28.13 Contractor shall supply, unload, store and install conduits required for the lighting installation as
specified. All accessories/fittings required for making the installation complete, including but not
limited to pull out boxes ordinary and inspection tees and elbow, check nuts, male and female
bushings (brass or galvanised steel), caps, square headed male plugs, nipples, gland sealing
fittings, pull boxes, conduit terminal boxes, gaskets and box covers, saddle terminal boxes, and
all steel supporting work shall be supplied by the contractor.
15.28.14 All unarmoured cable shall run within the conduits from lighting panels to lighting fixtures,
receptacles etc.
15.28.15 Size of conduit for lighting shall be selected as per the table given in the attached drawings.
15.28.16 Exposed conduits shall be run in straight lines parallel to building columns, beams and walls.
Unnecessary bends and crossings shall be avoided to present a neat appearance.
15.28.17 Conduit supports shall be provided at an interval of 750mm for horizontal runs and 100 mm for
vertical runs.
15.28.18 Conduit supports shall be clamped on the approved type spacer plates or brackets by saddles or
U-bolts. The spacer plates or brackets in turn, shall be securely fixed to the building steel by
welding and to concrete or brickwork by grouting or by nylon rawl plugs. Wooden plug inserted in
the masonry or concrete for conduit support is not acceptable.
15.28.19 Embedded conduits shall be securely fixed in position to preclude any movement. In fixing
embedded conduit, if welding or brazing is used, extreme care should be taken to avoid any injury
to the inner surface of the conduit.
15.28.20 Spacing of embedded conduits shall be such as to permit flow of concrete between them and in
no case shall be less than 38 mm.
15.28.21 Where conduits are along with cable trays, they shall be clamped to supporting steel at an
interval of 600 mm.
15.28.22 For directly embedding in soil, the conduits shall be coated with an asphalt-base compound.
Concrete pier or anchor shall be provided wherever necessary to support the conduit rigidly and
to hold it in place.
15.28.23 Conduit shall be installed in such a way as to ensure against trouble from trapped condensation.
15.28.24 Conduit shall be kept, wherever possible, at least 300 mm away from hot pipes, heating devices
etc. when it is evident that such proximity may reduce the service life if cables.
15.28.25 Slip joints shall be provided when conduits cross structural expansion joints or where long run of
exposed conduits are installed, so that temperature change will cause no distortion due to
expansion or contraction of conduit run.
15.28.26 For long conduit run, pull boxes shall be provided at suitable intervals to facilitate wiring.
15.28.27 Conduit shall be securely fastened to junction boxes or cabinets, each with a lock nut inside and
outside the box.
15.28.28 Conduits joints and connections shall be made thoroughly water-tight and rust proof by
application of a thread compound which insulates the joints. White lead is suitable for application
on embedded conduit and lead for exposed conduit.
15.28.29 Field bends shall have a minimum radius of four (4) times the conduit diameter. All bends shall be
free of kinds, indentations of flattened surfaces. Heat shall not be applied in making any conduit
bend. Separate bends may be used for this purpose.
15.28.30 The entire metallic conduit system, whether embedded or exposed, shall be electrically
continuous and thoroughly grounded. Where slip joints are used, suitable bounding shall be
provided around the joint to ensure a continuous ground circuit.
15.28.31 After installation, the conduits shall be thoroughly cleaned by compressed air before pulling in the
wire.
15.28.32 Lighting fixtures shall not be suspended directly from the junction box in the main conduit run.
16.
ILLUMINATION SYSTEM
16.1.1 The scope of work comprises of design, engineering, testing, supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of various lighting fixtures complete with lamps, supports and accessories, lighting
panels, lighting complete with distribution boxes, galvanised rigid steel conduits, lighting wires,
G.I. Earthwire receptacles, switchboards, switches, junction boxes, pull out boxes complete with
accessories, lighting transformer & Street steel light poles as per IS: 2713-1980 (Part-II). The
details of area to be illuminated are given below: Control Room Building.
Switch Yard area.
Roads and streets.
16.1.2 The minimum lux levels to be maintained in the different areas shall be as per following: Sr. No.
Area
Lux. Level
i) Switchyard
50 lux on power transformer and 20 lux on other equipment.
ii) Street/Road
20 lux.
Bidder shall submit detailed for reaching the above LUX levels.
16.1.3 Any material, wire, conduits, accessories etc. not specifically mentioned or specified but required
for installation of lighting fixtures are included in the scope of contractor.
- 27 -
All lighting fixtures & accessories shall be designed for continuous operation under atmospheric
conditions existing at site, without reduction in the life or without any deterioration. The lighting
fixtures shall be of Philips or Bajaj or Crompton Greaves of make only.
16.2
TEMPERATURE RISE
All lighting fixtures and accessories shall be designed to have a low temperature rise according to
the relevant Indian Standards, the design average ambient temperature shall be taken as 500C.
16.3
LIGHTING FIXTURES
16.3.1 All fixtures shall be designed for minimum glare.
16.3.2 All lighting fixtures shall be complete with lamps a specified and shall be suitably wired up.
16.3.3 All lighting fixtures shall be complete with accessories. Outdoor type fixtures shall be provided
with outdoor type weather proof box.
16.3.4 Each lighting fixtures shall be provided with an earthing terminal and all metal parts of the
housing shall be constructed so as to ensure earthing continuity throughout the fixture up to the
earthing terminal.
16.3.5 The mounting facility and conduit knock-outs for the fixtures shall be suitable for 20 mm conduit
entry.
16.3.6 The wire shall be of 1100 V grade and PVC insulated with multi stranded copper conductor.
16.4
TESTS
Manufacture’s type and routine test certificates shall be submitted for the fixtures and
accessories.
16.5
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The lighting system shall comprise of the following: 16.5.1
AC NORMAL LIGHTING
All the lights connected to the AC lighting system in different area will be connected to the AC
distribution boards to be supplied.
16.5.2
DC EMERGENCY LIGHTING
DC emergency in Control room, relay and protection room, office, LT switchgear room, D.C.D.B.
room shall be provided to avoid complete darkness in case of complete AC failure. The number of
DC emergency lights to be provided shall be calculated on the basis that at least illumination level
of at least 30 LUX is achieved when DC emergency lights get switched ON.
16.5.3
RECEPTACLES
Adequate number of 5A, 15 A, (single phase) and 32 A (3phase) receptacles shall be provided at
suitable locations to be mutually during the detailed engineering.
16.6
ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF LT PANELS & BATTERY CHARGER
16.6.1 The Contractor shall unload, erect, install, test and put into commercial use all electrical
equipment included in this Specification.
16.6.2 Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workman so that it is level plumb, square and properly
aligned and oriented. Tolerance shall be as established in Contractor’s drawings or as stipulated
by HVPNL. No equipment shall be permanently bolted down to foundations until the alignment
has been checked and found acceptable by the HVPNL.
16.6.3 Contractor shall furnish all supervision, labour tools equipment rigging materials, bolts, wedges,
anchors, concrete insert etc. in proper time required to completely install, test and commission
the equipment.
16.6.4 Manufacture’s and HVPNL’s instructions and recommendations of all equipment.
16.6.5 Contractor shall move all equipment into the respective room through the regular door or
openings specifically provided for this purpose. No part of the structure shall be utilised to lift or
erect any equipment without prior permission of HVPNL.
16.6.6 All switchboards shall be installed in accordance with Indian standards IS:3072 and at HVPNL’s
instructions. Switchboard panels shall be installed on finished surfaces, concrete or steel stills.
Contractor shall be required to install and align any channel sills which from part of foundations.
In joining shipping sections of switchboards together adjacent housing of panel section or flanged
throat sections shall be bolted together after alignment has been completed. Power bus,
enclosures ground and control splices of conventional nature shall be cleaned and bolted
together being drawn up with torque spanner of proper size or by other approved means.
16.6.7 All switchboards shall be made completely vermin proof.
16.6.8 Contractor shall take utmost care in holding instruments, relaying and other delicate mechanism
wherever the instruments and relays are supplied separately they shall be mentioned only after
the associated panels have been erected and aligned. The blocking materials HVPNL for safe
transit of instrument and relays shall be removed after ensuring that panel been completely
installed and to further movement of the same should be necessary. Any damage shall be
immediately reported to HVPNL.
16.6.9 Equipment furnished with finished coats of paint shall be touched by up Contractor if their surface
is specified or marred while handling.
16.6.10 Foundation work for all switchboard panels will be carried out by Civil Contractor. However, minor
modifications shall be carried out by the Contractor at no extra cost.
16.6.11 After installation of panels, power and control wiring and connections, Contractor shall perform
operational tests on all switchboards, to verify proper operation of switchboards/panels and
- 28 -
16.6.12
16.6.12.1
i.
ii,
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
16.6.12.2
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
xii.
xiii.
16.2.12.3
i.
ii,
iii.
iv.
16.2.12.4
i.
ii,
iii.
iv.
16.2.12.5
i.
ii,
iii.
iv.
16.2.12.6
i.
ii. a)
b)
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
16.2.12.6
i.
ii,
iii.
16.7
16.7.1
16.7.2
correctness of all equipment in each and every respect.
COMMISSIONING CHECK TESTS
The Contractor shall carry out the following commissioning check wherever applicable in addition
to the other checks and tests recommended by the manufacturers: GENERAL
Check nameplate details according to the Specification.
Check for physical damage.
Check tightness of all bolts, clamps, joints connecting terminals.
Check earth connection,
Check cleanliness of insulators and bushings.
Check all moving parts for proper lubrication.
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Check alignment of Breaker truck for free movement.
Check correct operation of shutters.
Check control wiring for correctness of connections, continuity and IR values.
Manual operation of Breaker completely assembled.
Power closing/opening operation, manually and electrically.
Breaker closing and tripping time.
Trip free and anti-pumping operation.
IR values, minimum pick up voltage and resistance of coils.
Contact resistance.
Simultaneous closing of all the three phases.
Check electrical and mechanical interlocks provided.
Check on spring charging motor, correct operation of limit switches, and timeof charging.
All functional checks.
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Megger between winding and winding terminals top body.
Polarity test.
Ratio identification checking of all ratios on all by primary injection of current.
Spare CT cores, if any, to be shorted and earthed.
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER
Insulation resistance test.
Ratio test on all cores.
Polarity test.
Line connections as per connection diagram.
CUBICLE WIRING
Check all switch development.
Each wire shall be traced by continuity tests and it should be made sure that the wiring is as per
relevant drawing. All interconnection between panels/equipment shall similarly checked.
All the wire shall be meggered to earth.
Functional check of all control circuit e.g. closing, tripping control, interlock, supervision and alarm
circuit.
RELAYS
Check connections and wiring.
Megger all terminal to body.
Megger AC to DC terminals.
Check operations characteristics by secondary injection.
Check minimum pick up voltage of DC coils.
Check operation of electrical/mechanical targets.
Relays settings.
Check CT and VT connections with particular reference to their polarities for directional relays,
wherever required.
METERS
Check calibration by comparing it with a sub-standard.
Megger all insulated portions
Check CT and VT connections with a particular reference to their polarities for power type meters.
ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF BATTERY BANK
The control shall unload, erect, install, test and put into commercial use already electrical
equipment included in this Specification.
Equipment shall be installed in a neat, workman like manner so that it is level, plumb, square and
properly aligned and oriented tolerance shall be established in Contractor’s drawings or as
stipulated by HVPNL. No equipment shall be permanently bolted down to foundations until the
alignment has been checked and found acceptable by the HVPNL.
16.7.3 Contractor shall furnish all labour tools equipment rigging materials, bolts, wedges, anchors, concrete inserts
etc. in proper time required to completely install, test and commission the equipment.
16.7.4 Manufacturer’s and HVPNL’s instructions and recommendations shall be correctly followed in handling,
testing and commissioning of Battery Bank.
- 29 -
- 30 -
SECTION – 8
STRUCTURES
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
The scope of specification covers fabrication, proto-assembly supply and
erection of galvanised steel structure for towers, latticed griders and equipment
support structure. Towers, girder & equipment support structures shall be as per
HVPN drawing conforming to IS 2062 (latest).
The scope shall include all types of bolts, nuts, step bolts, inserts in concrete,
gusset plates, equipment mounting bolts, structure Earthing bolts, foundation
bolts, spring washers, fixing plates, angles and bolts for structure mounted or
ground mounted marshalling boxes (AC/ DC Marshalling box & equipment
control cabinet) and any other items as required to complete the job.
The connection of all structures to their foundations shall be by base plates and
embedded anchor/ foundation bolts. All steel structures and anchor/ foundation
bolts shall be fully galvanized. The weight of the zinc coating shall be at least
0.610 kg/m2. One additional nut shall be provided below the base plate which
may be used for the purpose of leveling.
2.0
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
2.1
Minimum distance from the hole centre to edge shall be 1.5x bolt diameter.
Minimum distance between center to center of holes shall be 2.5x bolt diameter.
2.2
The minimum bolt diameter shall be 16 mm.
2.3
In order to facilitate inspection and maintenance, the structures shall be provided
with climbing devices. Each tower shall be provided with step bolts not less than
16 mm diameter & 175 mm long spaced not more than 450 mm apart, staggered
on faces on one leg extending from about 0.5 meters above ground level to the
top of the tower. The step bolt shall conform to IS:10238. Ladders on towers with
lighting appliances shall be provided with safety guards.
2.4
If luminaries are proposed to be fixed on gantries/ towers, then the proper
loading for the same shall be considered while designing. Also holes for fixing the
brackets for luminaries should be provided wherever required.
2.5
Foundation bolts/ studs shall be designed for the loads for which the structures
are designed.
3.0
FABRICATION OF STEEL
3.1
The supplier shall bear all the expenditure at all stages on account of loading/
unloading, transportation and other miscellaneous expenses and losses and
damages for all materials upto the fabrication yard/ shop and there after to the
erection site including all other expenses till the erection of work has been
completed and accepted. The unit rates shall be deemed to be inclusive of all
such incidental expenses and nothing extra shall be payable on any account in
this regard.
3.2
The fabrication and erection works shall be carried out generally in accordance
with IS:802. A reference however may be made to IS:800 in case of nonstipulation of some particular provision in IS:802. All materials shall be
completely shop fabricated with proper connection material and erection marks
for ready assembly in field.
4.0
ASSEMBLY
5.0
i)
The component parts shall be assembled in such a manner that they are
neither twisted nor otherwise damaged and shall be so prepared that the
specified camber, if any, is provided. In order to minimise distortion in
member the component parts shall be positioned by using the clamps,
clips, dogs, jigs and other suitable means and fasteners (bolts and welds)
shall be placed in a balanced patten. If the individual components are to
be bolted, paralled and tapered drifts shall bed used to align the part so
that the bolts can be accurately positioned.
ii)
Sample towers, beams and equipment support structure shall be trial
assembled keeping in view the actual site conditions, before erection in
the fabrication shop and shall be inspected and approved by Purchaser
before mass fabrication. Necessary match marks shall be made on these
components in the shop before disassembly and despatching.
BOLTING
i)
Every bolt shall be provided with a spring washer under the nut so that no
part of the threaded portion of the bolt is within the thickness of the parts
bolted together.
ii)
All steel items, bolts, nuts and washers shall be galvanised.
iii)
2.0% extra nuts and bolts shall be supplied for erection.
6.0
WELDING
The work shall be done as per approved fabrication drawing which clearly
indicate various details of joints to be welded, type of weld, length and size of
weld, whether shop or site weld. Symbols for welding on erection and shop
drawings shall be according to IS:813. Efforts shall be made to reduce site
welding so as to avoid improper welding due to constructional difficulties.
7.0
FOUNDATION BOLTS
7.1
Foundation bolts for the towers and equipment supporting structures and
elsewhere shall be embedded in first stage concrete while the foundation is cast.
The Supplier shall ensure the proper alignment of these bolts to match the holes
in the base plate.
7.2
The Supplier shall be responsible for the correct alignment and leveling of all
steel work on site to ensure that the towers/ structures are plumb.
7.3
All foundation bolts for lattice structures are to be supplied by the supplier.
7.4
All foundation bolts shall be fully galvanised so as to achieve 0.61 kg per Sq.m of
Zinc Coating as per specification.
8.0
STABILITY OF STRUCTURE
The Supplier shall be responsible for the stability of the structure art all stages of
its erection at site and shall take all necessary measures by the additions of
temporary bracing and guying to ensure adequate resistance to wind and also to
loads due to erection equipment and their operations.
9.0
GROUTING
The method of grouting the column bases shall be subject to approval of
Purchaser and shall be such as to ensure a complete uniformity of contact over
the whole area of the steel base. The Supplier will be fully responsible for the
grouting operations.
10.0
GALVANISING
10.1
All structure steel works and single pipe supports shall be galvanised after
gabrication.
10.2
Zinc required for galvanising shall have to be arranged by the manufacturer.
Purity of zinc to be used shall be 99.5% as per IS:209 (latest).
10.3
The Supplier shall be required to make arangement for frequent inspection by the
Purchaser as well as continuous inspection by a resident representative of the
Purchaser, if so desired for fabrication work.
11.0
INSPECTION BEFORE DISPATCH
Each part of the fabricated steel work shall be inspected and certified by the
Purchaser of his authorised representative as staisfactory before it is despatched
to the erection site. Such certificate shall not relieve the Supplier of his
responsibility regarding adeqaucy and completeness of fabrication.
12.0
TEST CERTIFICATE
Copies of all test certificate relating to material procured by the Supplier works
shall be forwarded to the Purchaser.
13.0
ERECTION
The Supplier should arrange his own erection plant and equipment, welding set,
tools and tackles, scaffoliding, trestles equipment etc. and any other accessories
and ancillaries required for the work.
14.0
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
The Supplier shall strictly follow at all stages of fabrication, transportation and
erection of steel structures, raw materials and other tools and tackles, the
stipulations contained in Indian Standard Code for erection for structural steel
work – IS:7205.
SECTION-10
CHAPTER-1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLCC EQUIPMENTS & PROTECTION
COUPLER
1.
2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3.
3.1
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
GENERAL:
The manufacturer whose PLCC panels are offered should have designed,
manufactured, tested, supplied and commissioned PLCC panels for the specified
voltage and fault level.
STANDARD:
All the PLCC equipment covered under the package shall conform to the requirements
of the latest addition of the relevant IEC/IS Specification or equivalent National
Standards, except to the extent mentioned by this specification.
The works covered by the specification shall be designed, engineered, manufactured,
built tested and commissioned in accordance with the Acts, Rules, Laws and
Regulations of India.
The equipment to be furnished under this specification shall conform to latest issue with
all amendments of standard specified above.
In addition to meeting this specific requirement called for in the Technical Specification,
the equipment shall also conform to the general requirement of the relevant standards
and shall form an integral part of specification.
The Bidder shall nor that standards mentioned in the specification are not mutually
exclusive or complete in themselves but intended to compliment each other.
The contractor shall note that list of standards presented in this specification is not
complete. Whenever necessary the list of standards shall be considered in conjunction
with specific IS/IEC.
When the specific requirements stipulated in the specification exceed or differ than
required by applicable standards, the stipulation of the specification shall take
precedence.
Other internationally accepted standards which ensure equivalent or better performance
than that specified in the standard referred shall also be accepted.
In case governing standards for the equipment is different from IS or IEC, the salient
points of difference shall be clearly brought out alongwith English language version of
standard or relevant extract of the same. The equipment conforming to standards other
than IS/IEC shall be subject to HVPNL’s approval.
The bidder shall clearly indicates in his bid the specific standards in accordance with
which the works will be conformed.
TRAINING:
As per clause 12 of section I General.
LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT:
The PLCC equipments as specified shall be installed at the respective ends of the
transmission lines.
FREQUENCY PLANNING:
For planning frequency and output power of carrier terminals, bidders may plan for a
minimum receive signal to noise ratio of 25dB for the speech channels without
compander and 15dB for protection signalling & 29dB for data transmission. The details
of line, tower, conductor shall be furnished to the Contractor to carry out the
assessment of signal attenuation. IEC/CIGRE specifications/guidelines shall be
adhered to.
Frequency and output power of PLC terminals for protection shall be planned such that
the protection signal is received with full reliability even when one of the phase is
earthed or is on open circuit on the line side causing an additional minimum loss of 6dB.
Successful Bidder shall be fully responsible for the co-ordination required with
concerned State Electricity Board for finalising the frequency plan.
-1-
4.4
5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
6.
6.1
The frequency plan will be referred to wireless Advisor/DOT Department for clearance
and in case any change in the contractor’s recommended carrier frequency and power
output is proposed by these authorities, the contractor shall have to modify his proposal
accordingly. Change of power output shall however not involve repeater station.
PROPOSED ARRANGEMENT:
The power line carrier communication equipment required by the HVPNL is to provide
primarily efficient, secure and reliable information link for carrier aided distance
protection and direct tripping of remote and breaker and also for speech communication
between sub-station. It shall include separate carrier terminals of multipurpose type for
speech and protection purposes. Provision for super-imposing telex and data signals
shall be made on speech terminals. All carrier terminals including those for protection
shall be suitable for point to point speech communication also. Carrier aided protection
is not being provided on 132kV and below transmission lines in HVPNL.
For security reasons each transmission line shall be protected by Main-I and Main-ii
protections or Main & Backup protections. The features of Direct Trip Send and Direct
Trip Receive shall also be provided in the protection coupler.
The requirement of carrier information on each link covered under this specification is
for speech communication and protection signaling.
The equipment for protection signals shall have high degree of reliability and speed. It
shall be guaranteed to function reliably in the presence of noise impulse caused by
isolator or breaker operation. It shall also be possible to effect direct tripping of breaker
at one end when the other end breaker opens out either manually or by relays such as
Bus fault relay etc.
The time intervals between receipt of a trip command on the transmit side, its
transmission over the carrier link, reception at the far end and giving command to the
trip relays at the distant end shall not exceed 20 m.sec. for permissive inter-tripping and
30m.sec. for direct inter-tripping even for the longest line section. The above timings are
Inclusive of operating time for auxiliary relays and interposing relays, if any, included in
the PLCC equipment.
The requirement of protection signaling channel is such that security against incorrect
signals being received shall be atleast two to three orders higher than reliability against
a signal not being received.
The planning of frequencies for the PLCC terminals shall be done confederating the
existing PLCC network as well as full communication channel requirement detailed
above so that there is no problem of frequency allocation at a later date when the
subsequent section communication requirements come up.
For reasons of security and reliability, phase to phase coupling for S/C lines and intercircuit coupling for D/Clines shall be employed.
The parameters of the equipment quoted shall be such that the mode of wave
propagation on transmission line shall not impose any limitation on the efficient and
reliable performance of information link from protection or communication point of view.
The Bidder shall submit curves illustrating ‘incorrect tripping’ and ‘Failure to trip’
probability plotted against corona noise level in the presence of impulse noise due to
switching of isolator and circuit breaker etc. Detail of Field tests and laboratory tests for
successful operation of his equipment, under such adverse conditions shall be
furnished by the bidder. These are to be related to end-to-end signaling and shall take
into account the type of communication link.
POWER LINE CARRIER TERMINAL:
The offered PLCC equipment should be suitable for carrier transmission in high
frequency of Speech, Facsimile, Telegraphy, RTU data, Teleprotection signals in
frequency range of 40KHz to 500KHz over high voltage overhead power transmission
lines.
The system should have one/two speech channels each of which can be set for full
bandwidth speech cum fax conversations or shared speech cum superimposed date
channels or suitable for high sped 4 wire RTU data channel of 1200/2400 bits per
second. The superimposed data channel can support upto 600 baud (2760-3720 Hz,
-2-
6.2
6.3
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
960 Hz BW or 2280-3360 Hz, 1080 Hz BW) channel as a backup for RTU/SCADA.The
system should be fully field programmable and flexible easy to use and compact
leading to simplified network design, installation and maintenance work.
The system can provide up to 12/6Nos. of 50 baud, 8/4 Nos. of 100 baud or 1 Nos. of
600 baud voice band data for superimposed channels and speech up to 2 KHz/2.4KHz
in VF circuits simply by changing plugin filters provided in channels modem. Optionally
system can be provided to give speech and data only channels (upto 28/13/9 Nos. of
50/100/200 baud or 1 Nos. of 1200/2400 bps ) or Interface for protection coupler signal.
As already indicated the information link shall be provided for speech, protection, telex
and data services. PLC terminals shall be fully co-ordinated to match with the specific
requirements. Because of strict requirement of high speed of operation, security,
reliability and efficient operation of protection channel along with the carrier terminals,
Bidder shall ensure the complete and fool-proof co-ordination of the PLC and protection
equipments. It shall therefore be necessity to have these combinations as one unit
without any mismatch or necessary of any intermediate co-ordination unit.
PLC terminal shall use Amplitude Modulation and shall have single side band
transmission mode. These shall be equipped for fixed frequency duplex working and
shall be fully transistorised, however, this fixed frequency shall be programmable at
site.
Characteristic input and output parameters of the SSB PLC terminals shall be as per
IEC-495, unless otherwise specified.
The features of carrier terminal are detailed out below:
Mode of transmission single side band with Amplitude Modulation
suppressed carrier or reduced carrier.
Carrier frequency range
40 to 500KHz
Nominal carrier frequency band in either direction of 4.0KHz
transmission
Power output (PEP) of HF terminals
20 watt
Frequency difference between a pair of PLC Frequency difference between
terminals
VF signal at the transmitting and
receiving ends will not exceed 2
Hz with suppressed carrier. With
reduced
carrier
frequency
difference shall be zero. This
shall include permissible ambient
temperature variation and supply
frequency and voltage variation
of (+) 15 % and (-)10%
Automatic gain control
For 40dB change in carrier
frequency signal level within the
regulation range, change in VF
receive levels of both speech and
other signals shall be less than
1dB.
Supply voltage
48V DC+15%-10% (Positive pole
earthed).
Nominal impedance
-Carrier freq. Sides
150ohm balanced
-VF sides
600ohm
Return loss within nominal freq. Band:
-Not less than 10dB on Carrier
freq. Transmit side.
-Not less than 14dB on VF side.
Spurious emission at edge of nominal carrier freq. -10dBm(Max)
Band.
-3-
k)
Speech level across 600ohms.
-Four wire transmit
-Four wire receive
-2 wire transmit
-2 wire receive
0dBr to –17dBr
8 dBr to -3.5 dBr
0dBr
-7dBr
l)
Permissible limits for variation of overall loss As per IEC 495/IS 9482
(attenuation) of the speech channel in relation to
800Hz for back to back operation of a pair of
terminals without compander.
m) Voltage withstand requirement D/C Power terminal.
Capable of with standing 500V
When isolated from earth
DC for 1 minute between both
terminals connected together and
earth.
When not isolated form earth.
An impulse voltage of 1000v
1.2/50 applied between.
VF signaling and alarm circuit when free from earth.
500V DC applied for 1 minute
between both terminals of circuit
connected together and earth.
6.4
Following facilities to be provided in the PLC terminals:
1)
Loop test facility for local transmitted and receiver.
2)
Changeover provision of termination of PLC terminals on dummy load.
3)
Position of each module may be marked at the back side of chassis also.
4)
Terminal blocks for power supply, telephone cable and two HF cable sockets.
5)
Channel testing from terminal to terminal.
6.5
All the PLC terminals shall be of multipurpose type. The bidder shall confirm that the
total transmission time for tele protection shall not exceed 20ms for permissive and
30ms for direct tripping signals.
6.6
In the input circuit of PLC terminal protective devices shall be provided in the form of
zener diodes or surge suppressors in order to eliminate an surge transfer through the
coupling device or the surge induced in the connecting path of HF cable.
6.7
To improve voice transmission characteristics for the system, companders and
expanders shall be provided. The companders shall have atleast 2:1 compression ratio
with a corresponding expansion ratio of 1:2. The operating range of compander shall be
compel with the audio power levels specified for 4 wire operation. The improvement
gained by companders shall however, not be taken into account for power allocation
and shall be in-hand reserve.
6.8
Sudden changes in input level to the receiver shall not cause false tripping. The bidder
shall clearly indication in his offer the methods adopted to ensure above phenomenon.
The receiver design shall also provide protection against false tripping from random
noise.
6.9
Fail-safe devices shall be provided, so that a malfunction in one unit or sub-assembly
cannot cause damage elsewhere in the system. All plug-in equipment shall be fitted
with features to prevent improper insertion. The electrical cables shall not be routed
across sharp edges or near sources of high temperature. The adjustments, which are
susceptible to misadjustment for accidental contact/vibration, shall be equipped with
suitable locking devices.
6.10 The PLC set shall be designed to give guaranteed performance from 0 deg. C to 50deg.
C ambient temperature. The thermal capability of the equipment shall be so designed
that the equipment remains operational successful upto 60deg. C ambient temperature.
Any ventilation fans provided for circulation of air inside the cabinets shall conform to
relevant Indian Standards.
6.11 The terminals shall be provided with built-in indicating Instrument to facilitate checking
of important voltages and current values and signal levels in different parts of the PLC
terminals. Protection fuses shall be provided in all important circuits and fuses shall be
so mounted as allow their easy inspection and replacement. All test points shall be
easily accessible.
-4-
The carrier set shall be provided with suitable supervision and alarm facilities Individual
parts of the carrier set should be accessible from front, making it possible to place the
carrier cabinets side-by-side. All components and parts of the carrier sets shall be
suitably tropicalised.
6.12 PLC terminals shall be housed in floor mounting sheet metal cabinets, suitable for
mounting on concrete plinth as well as channel frame by means of nuts and bolts or
welding. The cabinets shall be properly cleaned and spray painted with two coats or
synthetic enamel paint. Exterior of the cabinets shall be painted with smoke-glossy
finish. Interior of the cabinets shall be painted with white enamel paint with glossy finish.
All the panels shall be provided with suitable point for earthling with the earth of the
Grid/S/Stn.. Detailed drawings for earthing connections shall be submitted.
6.13 All cabinets having PLC terminals shall be provided with lamps of sufficient wattage for
interior illumination with switch.
6.14 A name plate shall be provided on the front door of each cabinet indicating channel
function, transmitter frequency and direction etc.
6.15 Bidder shall submit type test & routine test certificate from internationally reputed test
authorities for the quoted PLC terminals in respect of characteristic input and output
parameters of the PLC terminals in accordance with IEC-495 alongwith the Bid.
6.15.1 TYPE TESTS:
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven
years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in
accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed
by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to
HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
I
Carrier frequency side
Nominal impedance, return loss and tapping loss
Balance of ground
Spurious omissions
carrier frequency levels
frequency accuracy
Voice Frequency Side
Automatic gain control
Transmit/receive frequency difference
Noise generated, within the termianls
Harmonic distortion
Selectivity
Nominal impedance and return loss
Balance of ground
Telephone signalling channel
Voltage withstand requirements
Electromagnetic compatibility
II
Standard Equipment
Attenuation distortion
Group delay distortion
Signals above 3400 Hz
III
Speech Plus Equipment
Attenuation distortion
Group delay distortion
-5-
IV
V
VI
7.
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
Multichannel Terminals
Carrier frequency output power
Nominal impedance, return loss
Spurious omissions
Inter channel cross talk attenuation
Common Requirements
AC Power Supply
DC Power Supply
Temperature and humidity
Storage Conditions
Subject to agreement between the manufacturer and the user
Routine Test:
As per quality assurance program (QAP).
ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The following acceptance tests shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of
HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.
i) Carrier frequency levels
ii) Frequency accuracy
ii) Automatic gain control
iv) Transmit/receive frequency difference
v) Voltage withstand requirements
vi) Attenuation distortion
vii) Attenuation distortion
viii) Carrier frequency output power
SPEECH COMMUNICATION:
PLC equipments offered shall provide telephone communication between the stations
where the transmission line equipment shall be suitable for providing the following:
It shall be possible for subscriber at any of the stations to contact the subscriber at all
other stations connected in the system by dialing his call number. To achieve this a 24
lines EPAX with 4 wire interface & remote subscriber units shall be provide/available at
different stations.
The equipment shall contain all normal facilities like ring back tone, dial tone, engage
tone & priority tone and suitable pluses to established and disconnect communication
between subscribers.
The equipment shall be provided with necessary alarm circuits and fuses etc.
The equipment shall be of 4 kHz bandwidth on either direction for providing super
imposed data and be suitable for teleprinter facilities at a later date without major
modifications and high cost. The Bidder shall clearly indicate in his bid the provision
made in his proposal for future development and the extent to which such additional
facilities can be asked at a later date.
Arrangement for over-riding facilities shall be provided by means of priority keys
wherever specified. The over-riding facility shall enable cutting in ongoing calls with the
priority key and ask the concerned parties to finish their conversation. The wanted
number should then get automatically connected without having to redial the number.
All the carrier telephone conversations shall be secret and it should not be possible for
anybody to over hear the conversation going on between any two parties except those
provided with over-riding facilities.
All the relays etc, used in the equipment shall be of roubust design to cope with the duty
imposed on them. Electronic components used in the equipment shall be of long life
type and as far as possible a few types only shall be used.
-6-
(h)
(i)
(j)
(k)
(l)
8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
8.5
The cabinets housing the equipment for EPAX, four wire E/M interface & remote
subscriber units (four wire) shall have mounting arrangement similar to that for PLC
terminals and these cabinets shall also be painted with the same paint similar to that of
PLC terminals.
All the terminals for speech shall be supplied fully wired for addition of VFTs in future.
However, the terminal supplied shall be equipped with programmable transit band pass
filters.
Equipment for speech communication must be fully compatible with HVPNL’s existing
equipment. Any Interfaces required for proper matching
and connection with the
HVPNL’s existing equipment shall be provided by the Contractor.
Terminals for protection shall be suitable between two ends of each transmission line or
on tandem operation basis with back to back connection at the intermediates stations.
Each PLC terminal for speech as well as protection purposes shall be provided with a
plug-in type service telephone and buzzer. Further, 4 wire remote telephone
instruments (parallel to service telephone) shall also be provided on one PLC terminals
for protection for each link. These instruments shall be located in respective switchyard
control room to enable the operator to make emergency calls on point-to-point basis.
Each such instrument shall be equipped, with a buzzer and ‘press-to-call’ key and shall
not require any additional power supply units.
NETWORK PROTECTION EQUIPMENT (PROTECTION COUPLER) :
The bidder shall offer voice frequency transmission equipment which shall work on
frequency shift or coded signal principle for transmission/reception of protection signals
as single purpose channel. The equipment shall be suitable for connection to the power
line carrier terminal mentioned above.
The voice frequency transmission equipment shall not only be insensitive to corona
noise but shall also remain unaffected by impulse type noise which are generated by
electrical discharge and by the opening and closing of circuit breakers, isolators,
earthing switches etc. The equipment shall be made immune to a field strength of
10V/m expected to be caused by portable radio transmitters in the range of 20-1000
MHz . In his offer, the bidder shall clearly explain as to what measures have been taken
to make the equipment insensitive to corona noise, white noise and to impulse noise of
an amplitude larger than the wanted signal and submit full field test and laboratory test
reports. The guarantee on design data shall not be acceptable.
The equipment shall be unaffected by spurious tripping signals. The bidder shall submit
proof as to how this is achieved satisfactorily.
The equipment shall be suitable for transmission of direct and permissive trip signal as
well as blocking signals for protective gear of power system. The equipment shall be
operated in the audio frequency range in speech band or above speech band as
superimposed channel in 4KHz band of SSR carrier. The equipment shall operate with
full duplex frequency shift mode of operation. The protection signaling equipment shall
be solid state design, modular in construction and have a proven operating record in
similar application ever EHV systems. Details regarding application of the equipment
over 220kV systems shall be submitted along with the bid Each protection signaling
equipment shall provide:
Transmission facilities for minimum tow protection signals.
Reception facilities for minimum two protection signals.
Direct trip Send and Direct Trip Receive facility in addition to above two protection
signals.
The equipment shall be designed for remote tripping/blocking on permissive basis and
direct tripping for reactor fault and others. The overall time of PLC.VFT and
transmission path for permissive trip/blocking shall be 20m. sec. or less and for direct
tripping 30m.sec. or less even for the longest line section.
-7-
Operating time lower than specified above may be preferred provided they fulfill
the requirements of security and reliability as mentioned below:
False-trip probability
>10-5
(Noise burst of nay amplitude)
Fall to trip probability
>10-5
For S/N dB In 3.1 KHz Band (while Noise Measurement)
8.6 It may be emphasised that specified time, as mentioned above is composed of
the following:
a)
Back-to-Back signal delay in frequency shift or coded signals protection
equipment.
b)
Back-to-Back delay in PLC terminal.
c)
Delay in transmission line.
d)
Operation time of interposting relay, if any in frequency shift or coding
equipment.
Reference is invited in this regard to the guide lines expressed in
CIGRE Publication “Teleprotection” report by Committee 34-35.
8.7
a)
b)
c)
8.8
The following transfer criteria shall be provided by the equipments:
Transmit side:One number potential free No (normally open) contact of
protective relays (to be supplied by the HVPNL) of under noted rating of
each of the following functions:
i.
Permissive trip command
ii.
Direct trip command
Contact rating.
Maximum voltage
:360volts.
Maximum current rating
:5amps.
Maximum power rating
:1200 w/va.
Receive side:Voice frequency transmission equipment for network protection
shall be provided with one potential free No (normally open) contact of the
under noted rating of each of the following functions:
i.
Permissive trip command
ii.
Direct trip command
Contact rating.
Rated voltage
:250volts DC
Rated current
:0.1ADC.
Other Parameters
:as per IEC-255-0-20
Alarm:In addition, the voice frequency protection terminal shall provide at least
one number potential free change over contact of the following rating for alarm
purposes.
Rated voltage
:250volts DC
Rated current
:0.1ADC.
Other Parameters
:as per IEC-255-0-20
Frequency shift of coded signal protection equipment shall have atleast two
channels. In order to ensure full availability of PLC protections channel,
arrangement of parallel circuiting of these tow channels as main and stand by
channels shall be made. This arrangement is generally shown in relevant
specification drawing. Each arrangement shall be developed by the successful
Bidder in co-ordination with protective relay Contractor. The parallel wiring
should however retain the concept of two protection channels of each type of
protection with each backing up the other 100% during normal operation and
also permit testing without affecting the other. The contractor shall submit
drawings showing Inter-connection between PLCC and protection panels for
approval by the HVPNL.
-8-
8.9
It has to be ensured that under no circumstances protection channel should
share the power. Each protection channel shall be able to transmit power for
which system is designed. For example, a 20 W PLC terminal shall transmit 20
Watt (Max.) for protection channel alone in the event of fault. Speech and
superimposed data channels, in the same protection terminal must get
disconnected momentarily during the operation of protection channels.
8.10
The equipment shall be constructed such that in permissive line protection
system, operational reliability of the protection channel may be checked over
the carrier link by means of a loop test. It shall be possible to carry out the
above test from either end of the carrier link. During healthy condition of the
transmission line, the loop test shall not initiate a tripping command. In the
event of a system fault, while loop test is in progress, protection signal shall
over-ride the test signal.
8.11
The equipment shall be complete with built in counters for counting the number
of trip commands sent and number of trip commands received.
8.12
Contractor shall develop drawings showing inter-connection between protection
panels and PLCC panels and submit the drawings for HVPNL’s approval.
8.13
The voice frequency transmission equipment shall be suitable for 48V (+) 15%
and (-)10% DC power supply.
9.
DOCUMENTATION
1. The successful bidder shall submit six sets of following drawings for HVPNL
approval:2. Outline general arrangement
3. Name and rating plate
4. Face plan
5. Wiring Diagram
6. Terminal connectors
7. Block Diagram
8. Terminal plan
9. Any other drawing required to complete the equipment like bird barrier etc.
NOTE: All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping the
approval of drawings by HVPNL.
10.
ELECTRONIC PRIVATE AUTOMATIC EXCHANGE (EPAX)
10.1
The Electronic private Automatic Exchange (EPAX) wherever specified shall be
provided with 24 subscriber lines and 8 trunk lines. The trunk lines shall be
connected to PLCC channel (speech panels as existing in HVPNL i.e. WSI,
BPL, ABB make). The exchange will have its own ringing current and tone
generator etc. The exchange shall be suitable for working on 48 VDC Power
supply (Positive pole state & of modular construction and shall have multiple
switching lines (minimum 4 routes). It shall be programmable, either to debar or
provide over-riding facility to certain subscribers.
10.2
EPAX shall also be provided with two(2) additional interface units and operate
exclusively with HVPNL’s leased subscriber lines of Department of
Telecommunication (DOT) and compatible with 2 wires full duplex, voice grade
mode of operation. The DOT leased lines shall be coordinated by the HVPNL
with the leasing authority (DOT).
-9-
10.3
The technology of the equipment supplied by the contractor must conform to
C-DOT version.
11.
TELEPHONE SET:
The instrument should be sturdy & compact in form. It should have Tone/Pulse
facility, flash and pause facility, last number redialing, visual ringing indication,
ring volume control and fast dialing facility. It should be compatible with
different types of switching units used in conjunction with PLCC system in
HVPNL and also with the DOT line. It should be able to be feed from exchange
with F 48 V, 2x200 ohm feed bridge or 56 V 2x400 ohms feed bridge.
- 10 -
SECTION-10
CHAPTER-2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR LINE TRAPS
1.
LINE TRAP:
1.1
General:
The manufacturer whose line trap are offered should have designed, manufactured and
tested as per IS/IEC or equivalent standard and supplied the line traps for the specified
voltage and fault level.
All the equipment covered under the package shall conform to the requirements of the
latest edition of the relevant IEC/IS specifications or equivalent National Standards,
except to the extent modified by this specification and shall also be in accordance with
requirements under section I & II.
1.2
Location of equipment:
The line traps as specified shall be installed at the respective ends of the transmission
lines.
1.3
Line trap requirements:
Line traps shall be inserted into Extra-high voltage transmission line to prevent undue
loss of carrier signal for all power system conditions. Its impedance shall be negligible at
power frequency (50Hz) so as not to disturb power transmission but shall be relatively
high over the frequency band appropriate to carrier transmission.
Line trap shall consist of a main coil designed to carry continuously the rated current
without exceeding the limit of temperature rise. It shall be supplemented with a protective
device and tuning device.
Line trap shall be broad band tuned for its entire carrier frequency range form 50 to
500KHz. Resistive component of impedance of the line trap within its carrier frequency
blocking range shall not be less than 570 ohms.
Line trap shall be provided with a protective device in the form of surge arrestors which
shall be designed and arranged such that neither significant alteration in its protective
function nor physical damage shall result from either temperature rise or the magnetic
field of the main coil at continuous rated current or rated short time current. The
protective device shall neither enter into operation nor remain in operation, following
transient actuation by the power frequency voltage developed across the line trap by the
rated short time current. The protective device shall be shunt connected to the main coil
and tuning device.
The lightning arrestor shall be station class current limiting active gap type. Its rated
discharge current shall be 10KA.
The lightning arrestor provided with the line trap of each rating shall fully comply with the
requirements of IEC-99-4. It shall conform to type tests as applicable and type test
certificate for the same shall the submitted by the bidder.
The lightning arrestor provided with the line trap shall be subject to the routine and
acceptance tests as per IEC-99-4.
Line trap shall be equipped with the bird barriers.
-1-
Line trap shall conform to IEC-353 (latest) fulfilling the all technical requirements as
follows:
Technical Parameter
220kV
line
66kV line
Rated power frequency
50 Hz
50 Hz
Rated system voltage
220kV
66kV
Highest system voltage
245kV
72.5kV
Rated continuous, current at 50 degree
C ambient.
1250A
630A
31.5KA
----------
16KA
Broad band
to be indicated by bidder
---------
______
1.0
1.0
Rated short time current for 1 second
Type of tuning
Rated blocking band-width
Minimum resistive component of impedance
within the rated blocking band-width
Rated inductance of main coil (mH)
Radio interference voltage
Not more than 500 micro volt at 187 kV (rms)
The Bidder shall indicate continuous current rating of the line trap at 65 deg. C ambient.
The line trap shall conform in type tests and shall be subjected to routine tests as per
IEC-353, as per following details:
TYPE TEST:
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven
years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in
accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed
by HVPN or another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to
HVPNL for approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
i)
Short time current test.
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
Power frequency voltage test on tuning device.
Impulse voltage test.
Temperature rise test
Measurement of radio influence voltage
Measurement of the rated inductance of the main coil
Measurement of power frequency inductance of the mail coil
Measurement of blocking resistance and blocking impedance
Measurement of tapping loss and tapping loss based on the blocking resistance
Measurement of loss at power frequency.
Routine Test:
As per quality assurance program (QAP).
ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS-8793: 1995 shall be carried
out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing
by the HVPNL.
-2-
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
1.4
Power frequency voltage test on tuning device.
Measurement of the rated inductance of the main coil
Measurement of blocking resistance and blocking impedance
Measurement of tapping loss and tapping loss based on the blocking resistance
LINE TRAP MOUNTING:
The line trap shall be suitable for outdoor suspension mounting and shall be
mechanically strong enough to withstand the stresses due to maximum wind pressure of
260kg/Square meter.
Contractor shall be required to co-ordinate the mounting arrangement with the existing
arrangement at different sub-stations. Non-magnetic suspension hook/link of adequate
length and tensile strength to provide necessary magnetic clearance between the line
trap and suspension hardware shall be supplied by the Contractor.
The line trap shall be supplied compete with disc insulators and hardware fittings. The
disc insulators to be supplied with the line trap shall conform to IS: 731/1971 with latest
amendments. All hardware fittings associated with these insulators shall conform to IS:
2486 (Part-I)/1971 (1st Revision), IS: 2486 (Part-II)/1971 (1st Revision), IS:2486 (PartIII)/1974 and IS:2486 (Part-IV)/1981 with latest amendments & revision. Copies of test
certificates of type tests and routine tests as stipulated in the above quoted ISS shall be
furnished with tender.
1.5
LINE TRAP TERMINAL CONNECTORS:
The line traps shall be suitable for connecting to ACSR single/twin bundle Zebra
conductor as per layout requirements. Necessary connector shall be supplied by the
Contractor.
Terminal connectors shall conform to IS: 5561 and shall also comply with requirements
indicated in Section GTR.
Terminal connectors shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical take off the
conductor.
1.6
Clamps/connectors shall be designed for the same current ratings as line trap and
temperature rise shall not exceed 0.5 deg.C over 50 deg C ambient.
DOCUMENTATION
The successful bidder shall submit four sets of following drawings for HVPNL approval:-
NOTE:
1.
Outline general arrangement
2.
Name and rating plate
3.
line trap mounting arrangement
4.
terminal connectors
5.
Any other drawing required to complete the equipment like bird barrier etc.
All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for stamping the
approval of drawings by HVPNL.
-3-
SECTION-10
CHAPTER-3
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR COUPLING DEVICE
1.
COUPLING DEVICE:
1.1
The coupling devices shall be interposed between the capacitor voltage
transformer/coupling capacitor and coaxial line to the PLC transmitter/receiver and in
conjunction with the capacitor voltage transformer/coupling capacitor shall ensure:
a)
Efficient transmission of carrier frequency signals between the carrier frequency connection
and the power line.
Safety of personnel and protection of the low voltage parts and installation, against the
effects of power frequency voltage and transient over voltage.
b)
The coupling device, in conjunction with the CVT/CC shall form and electric filter of band
pass type.
a)
b)
c)
d)
It shall match characteristic impedance of HT line to impedance of the carrier frequency
connection. Impedance matching between power line and the carrier frequency connection
may be done by a transformer or an auto-transformer.
Galvanic isolation between primary and secondary terminals of the coupling device shall be
performed by the above mentioned transformer.
Power frequency currents derived by the CVT may be drained to the earth by a separate
inductance termed drain coil of suitable rating or through primary of the above transformer.
Voltage surges coming from the power line at the terminals of the coupling device shall be
limited by a non-linear surge arrester of suitable rating in the primary side. Requirement of
a gas type voltage arrester in secondary side of the coupling device shall have to be fully
justified.
The surges Arrester shall have power frequency spark over voltage co-ordinated with the
equipment ahead of it.
e)
For direct and efficient earthing of its primary terminals, the coupling device shall be
equipped with an earthing switch. The coupling device shall be designed such that it shall
not be possible to remove the cover before the earthing switch is operated to the ‘earthed’
position. Further the Earth Switch shall be available for earthing of CVT-HT terminals,
when the coupling filter units are removed from circuit for maintenance/replacement. The
design shall take due regard of requirements for safety in accordance with the Indian
Electricity Rules.
1.2
Two numbers ‘phase to earth’ type coupling filters shall be used to achieve in secure
‘phase to phase’ / ‘Inter-circuit coupling’. Connection between secondaries of the two
phases to earth type coupling device shall be through a balancing transformer/hybrid such
that reliable communication shall be ensured even when one of the coupled phase to
earthed or open circuited on the line side.
a)
Coupling device shall conform to IEC-481/IS-8997 and IS-8998 shall have the following
carrier frequency characteristics as applicable to a phase to earth type coupling device.
Nominal line side
400 ohms for 220kV line Ph-E &
impedance
600 ohms for Ph-Ph
-1-
b)
Nominal line
side impedance
150 ohms (balanced)
c)
Composite loss
Not more than 2 dB
d)
Return loss
Not less than 12 dB
e)
Band width
shall suit the frequency plan between 40
and 500 KHz
f)
Nominal peak envelope
Power
Not less than 650 Watt.
(for inter-modulation product 80 dB down)
The coupling device shall be suitable for outdoor mounting. Temperature of metallic
equipment mounted out door is expected to rise upto 65o C during the maximum ambient
temperature of 50o C specified. The equipment offered by the Bidder shall operate
satisfactorily under these conditions.
The elements of coupling device shall be fitted on a base plate and enclosed in a metal
box.
The HT Terminal of coupling device shall be connected to HF terminal of the CVT by
means of 6mm Sq. copper wire with suitable lugs & taped with 11kV insulation by the
contractor.
Coupling device shall have at least two terminals for carrier equipment connection. Bidder
shall confirm that such a parallel connection to coupling device directly will not result in any
additional attenuation.
The coupling device including the drainage coil, surge arrestor and earthing switch shall
conform to type tests and shall be subjected to routine tests as per IEC-481/IS:8998.
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
TESTS:
Type Tests
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then seven years
old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests carried out in accredited
laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or
another electric power utility and be submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for
approval as schedule given in Bar Chart.
Routine Tests
As per quality assurance program (QAP).
Acceptance Tests
All acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant IS:8998 shall be carried out by the Supplier
in presence of HVPNL representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.
-2-
SECTION-10
CHAPTER-4
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF 48 VOLTS 120AH SMPS BASED BATTERY
CHARGER SUITABLE FOR VRLA MAINTENANCE FREE BATTERY BANK
1.
SCOPE:
This specification provides for design, Engineering, manufacture, stage testing,
inspection and testing before dispatch, packing, forwarding and delivery at site FOR
destination of 48 Volts 300/120AH SMPS based battery charger suitable for indoor
installation, complete with all fittings accessories and associated auxiliary equipment
mandatory which are required for efficient and trouble free operation as per specified
here under.
It is not the intent to specify completely all the details of design and construction of
equipment. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to the high standard of
engineering, design and workmanship and shall be capable of performing in continuous
commercial operation up to the Bidder’s guarantee acceptable to the purchaser. The
equipment offered shall be complete in all component necessary for its effective and
trouble free operation along with associated equipment interlocks protection scheme etc.
Such components shall be deemed to be within the scope of supply irrespective of
whether those are specially brought out in this Specification and or the commercial order
or not. All similar parts particularly movable ones shall be interchangeable.
1.02
1.03
1.04
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS :
The equipment to be supplied against the specification shall be suitable for satisfactory
continuous operation under the following tropical conditions:
Max. ambient air temperature
Max. daily average ambient temperature
Max. yearly weighted ambient temperature
500 C
450 C
350 C
Min. air temperature
Max. humidity
Min. relative humidity
Average number of thunder storm days per annum
Average annual rain fall
Number of months during which tropical monsoon
conditions prevail altitude above MSL
(-) 50 C
100%
26 %
40
15 cm to 100 cm.
4 months (June to
Sept). Varies from 61 meters to
815.00 mtrs.
120 days
0.3g.
Heavy
1.0 KW/sq.m.
195 kg/sq.m.
Average number of rainly days per annum.
Seismic level (Horizontal acceleration)
Degree of pollution
Intensity of solar radiation
Max. Wind load
STANDARD:
All material and equipment shall comply in all respect with requirement of the latest
addition of the relevant IS/IEC/TEC/RDSO. A set of standards adopted, translated in
English, if it is in language other than English, shall also be enclosed with the tender, to
enable due comparison, wherever a standard is specially mentioned in these
specification. It is understood that the corresponding standard amongst the sources
mentioned above shall also apply.
MANUFACTURE AND WORKMANSHIP:
All the material used in the construction of the equipment shall be of the best quality
obtainable of their respective kinds and whole of the work shall be of the highest class,
-1-
well finished and of approved design and make. Casting shall be free from blow holes,
flaws and of the true form and dimensions.
All machined surfaces shall be true and smooth and well finished.
1.05
DUTY AND GENERAL ARRANGEMENTS:
The power for the charging apparatus shall be given through an independents 4-core
cable connection from an A.C. 50 cycles 3 phase 415 ± 10% volts switchboard fed from
a Station Transformer.
1.06
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT:
The battery chargers of 48V/25Amp. in N+1 configuration with ultimate capacity
50Amp/75 Amp/100Amp shall be of SMPS type with positive earth. The system shall
consist of a Distribution/Switching/Alarms arrangement (DSA) and Float Rectifier-cumChargers (FR/FCs) in a rack. It shall employ modular configuration for flexible provision
of DC Power. It shall employ menu driven Micro Processor Controlled Techniques for
DSA as well as module for control, monitoring and alarm to achieve better reliability of
the system. The SMPS battery chargers shall be capable of continuous operation with
float voltage 2.23 to 2.25 Volts per cell (at 27 Deg. C) and 2.3 Volt per cell (at 27 Deg C)
for charge voltage while supplying the constant DC load
1.06.1 The SMPS battery chargers shall have constant voltage characteristics throughout the
range (from zero to full load) at the floating value of the voltage so as to keep the
maintenance free type VRLA batteries fully charged but without harmful overcharge.
The system shall employ a modular configuration to provide flexibility in view the future
load requirements of DC power. The modules shall be accommodated in a rack.
Distribution/Switching/Alarm (DSA) shall be provided in first rack or in a separate rack as
per manufacturer’s design for the ultimate system capacity. All factory wiring for the rack
shall be for the ultimate capacity so that only plugging of FR/FC module shall enhance
the DC power plant output.
1.06.2 Principal Parameters: Input Nominal Voltage
i) 230 Volt +/-10% AC single phase for module of
25Amp.For ultimate capacity of 50Amp
ii) System rack having ultimate capacity of 75 Amp and
125Amp will be provided AC Three phase input power
supply and each module shall operate on individual
phase of three-phase AC input power supply.
Input Voltage Range
165V to 260 V AC
Frequency
48Hz to 52Hz
Power factor
>0.98 at 50% and above load
Efficiency
>0.90 at 50% and above load
Soft Start time
10 sec Min output current ramp up
Output Voltage adj.
48V to 56V DC
Current limit adjustable
For 50Amps SMPS
5 to 50A
Current limit adjustable
For 25Amps SMPS
5 to 25A
Regulation:
1)
Output
voltage +/-5% of DC output voltage for any load of 25% to 100%
over shoot/under shoot
when charger is switched
+/-5% of DC output voltage for any load of 25% to 100%
on
2)
DC output voltage
over shoot for a step
change in AC voltage
-2-
1.07.
165V to 260V single +/-5% of DC output voltage for any load of 25% to 100%
phase
3)
DC output voltage
for a step load change of
25% to 100%
Ripple
<200mV RMS
Load Sharing
Better than +/-5% active current sharing at full load
Cooling
Convection
Main Features of SMPS Charger
1.07.1 CONSTRUCTIONAL FEATURES:
The rack structure shall be made up of rigid frame work of steel profiles and rear door
may be of hinged or removable type. The rear door shall be provided with ventilation
arrangement. Alternate design of aluminum and other rigid structure meeting the
requirements are also permitted.
The rack shall be free of sharp edges or sharp corners. The rack shall be designed for
easy maintenance & installation. The rack mounting arrangement shall be such as to
provide easy access from rear and top for installation and maintenance.
The individual FR/FC module shall be easily mounted to/removed from the front side of
the rack. The FR/FC module shall be designed to slide in to the rack on a suitable
mechanical arrangement. The associated AC input, DC output connections,
control/systems & interface cable connecting the modules shall be connected
/disconnected easily without causing any interruption in the supply and damage to load
or other working module.
Proper thermal engineering of hardware design shall be done by the manufacturer so as
to ensure the uninterrupted use of the equipment. The rack complete with all panels
fitted shall be designed to allow cooling by natural convection.
With the doors in position, all the common visual alarms and meters shall be clearly
visible. However the fixtures on the door shall not restrict the movement of door in any
way.
The FR/FC modules shall be cooled by natural convection. AC input to FR/FC shall be
through locking type arrangement. DC output shall be through hot plug in connector on
the FR/FC side and through lugged termination on the bus bar/termination end. Control
alarm and mentoring connection shall be through connectors. The FR/FC module shall
be removable from the rack only. All AC input, DC output & alarm/control/monitoring
cables interconnecting the modules and rack shall be easily disconnected by plugs or
connectors.
AC Terminations
The input terminal should be single phase or three phases as the case may be cleared
marked as R Y B and N and for AC three phase, L and N for AC single phase.
AC input termination shall be suitably protected against the accidental touch/contact with
the working staff for their protection and shall also have clear and prominent be “Danger”
marking. Screening shall be provided between AC and DC components to prevent
accidents.
The AC input connection to the rectifier module shall be by means of locking type plug
and socket arrangement. All the connection between distribution and FR/FC shall be
through proper rated cables only. Fuses and circuit breakers for each FR/FC shall be
easily accessible and properly rated. Proper termination for the AC input of the circuit
breakers and its output to the FR/FC.
The system racks having ultimate capacity of 100 Amp. will be provided AC three phase
input power supply and each module shall operate on individual phase of three phase
AC input power supply.
-3-
DC Terminations
The output of each rectifier in the negative load shall be taken through full rated ISI
marked MCBs. All the AC, DC control & alarm cabling shall be supplied with the rack.
All DC +ve and - ve leads shall be clearly marked.
Wiring
All insulated conductors except those within the confines of a printed circuit board
assembly shall be of the rating enough to withstand the maximum current and voltage
during fault and overload. All the wires and cables used shall be fire retardant as per IS
1554 with amendment I (June 94).
All wiring shall be neatly secured in position and accurately supported. Where wires
pass through any part of metal or cover the holes through which they pass shall be
suitably bushed.
Earthing: Two power earth terminals shall be provided in the frame of the system.
Mounting off component & layout:
Components mounting and fixing methods shall be secured. Suitable mechanical
structure/ arrangement for holding modules in position shall be provided so that the
module is held firmly by sliding through it.
The FR/FC modules shall be cooled convection. AC input to FR/FC shall be through
locking type arrangement. DC out put shall be through hot plug in connector on the
FR/FC side and through lugged termination on the bus-bar termination end. Control,
alarm and monitoring connections shall be through connectors.
The FR/FC module shall be removable from the front of the rack only. All
AC input, DC output and alarm/control/monitoring cables interconnecting the modules
and racks shall be easily disconnected by plugs or connectors.
1.07.02 Distribution, Switching, Control, alarm & Monitoring (DSA)
The Distribution Switching sub - system of DSA shall preferably be in the modular from
whereas control, alarm &, monitoring sub-system shall only be modular. The Controller
must be Microprocessor based. The distribution switching sub-system 'may be
accommodated in a rack with other FR/FCs or in separate rack. These sub systems
shall be rack mountable. DSA shall preferably be housed in the upper portion of the rack
above the FR/FC modules. The unit shall be equipped to meet the ultimate system
capacity.
1.07.03. Battery Temperature Compensation.
The charger shall be provided with the appropriate circuitry to interface with the
temperature probe assembly. With the probe, the charger shall automatically
compensate gassing and constant voltage setting inversely proportional to the probe’s
temp/ battery ambient temp., so that over charging at high temperature and under
charging at low temperature can be prevented.
1.07.04 Current Limiting (Voltage Drop)
Current Limiting (Voltage" Drop) shall be provided for float/ charge operation. The
float/charge limiting shall be continuously adjustable between 50% to 100% of rated out
put current for out put voltages range of 44.4 to 56 volt. For test purposes upper limit of
100% +5% and lower limit of 50% - 5% shall be acceptable. The float and charge current
limit adjustment shall be provided on the front panel of the rectifier module. The FR/FC
modules shall be fully protected against short circuit. It shall be ensured that short circuit
does not lead to any fire hazard.
1.07.5 Fuses
All fuses shall be HRC Link type. Fuses shall be mounted on fuse carriers which are in
turn mounted on fuse bases. Wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on carriers,
-4-
fuses shall be directly mounted on plug-in type base. In such case one insulated fuse
pulling handle shall be supplied for each charger. Fuse rating shall be chosen by the
Bidder depending on the circuit requirement. All fuses in the chargers shall be
monitored. Fuse failure annunciation shall be provided on the failure of any fuse.
1.07.6 Blocking Arrangements
Blocking arrangement shall be provided in the positive pole of the out put circuit of the
charger to prevent current flow fr9m the DC battery into the charger.
1.07.7 Monitoring, Alarm and Indicating Lamps.
The visual indications/ display such as LEDs, LCDs or a combination of both shall be
provided on each FR/FC module to indicate:
(A)
Functional indications:
The following functional indications shall be provided on FR/FC and DSA:
a) Mains available.
b) FR/FC on Auto Float.
c) FR/FC on Auto charge.
Note: The functional indication (a) shall be provided on both DSA & FR/FC module. While b
and c may be provided either on DSA or both FR/FC & DSA.
(B)
Alarm indications
(i) On FR/FC
(a) FR/FC over voltage, under voltage or output fail.
(b) FR/FC over load (voltage drop)
Functional indications shall be extended as status and alarm. FR/FC fail to distribution /
switching / control & alarm unit.
(ii) On DSA
a)
Load voltage high (above 56v /low (below 45.6 v)
b)
FR/FC fail
c)
Mains out of range
d)
System Over Load
e)
Mains ON/Battery Discharge
f)
Temp. Compensation fail
g)
Battery Fail or No Battery
h)
Battery Isolated from the load
All alarm circuits shall be provided with suitable delay to ensure that they do not operate
to transient. All the protection /alarm shall be within tolerance of O.25v in case of DC
voltage and 10/0 in case of current. For AC voltage it shall be +/- 5V.
Every alarm, condition shall be accompanied with an audio alarm with audio cut off
facility.
Potential free contacts two (one for alarm and one redundant) shall be provided for
extension of alarms to centralized display. .
1.07.8 Radio Interference
The equipment shall be efficiently screened against interference to radio and also other
communication equipment, which may be installed in the same building. All sources of
noise shall be filtered if necessary with suppressors generally in accordant with relevant
standards.
1.07.9 Name plates and marking
The name plates shall be while with Black engraved letters. On top of each charger, on
front as well as rear sides, larger and bold name plates shall be provided to identify the
-5-
charger.
Name plates with full and clear inscriptions shall also be provided on and inside of the
panels for identification of the various equipments and ease of operation and
maintenance.
An etched, engraved or anodizer name plate shall be fitted on each $MPS battery
charger unit having following details inscribed.
Manufacture's name.
P.O . No. & date.
S.No. of SMPS unit
Rating of SMPS charger
Input voltage of SMPS charger
Output voltage of SMPS charger
Year of Manufacture
8.0 RESPONSIBILITY FOR DESIGNS:
The contractor shall assume full responsibility for co-ordinate and adequate design and
shall conform to the best engineering practice for the operating conditions specified. In
case the equipment covered by this specification is to be co-ordinate with other
equipment, the contractor shall furnish complete information and data as may be desired
by the purchaser.
9.0 TESTS & INSPECTION:
The tenderer must furnish test reports carried out on one of the SMPS battery charge
unit which shall pass all the prescribed type tests for conformity of relevant standards.
These type test reports must be issued by a Govt. approved / Govt. recognized/ a Govt.
accredited laboratory and must not be older than 7 years from the date of opening of
tender.
Routine/ acceptance tests shall also be carried out on each SMPS Battery Charger as
per specification. Following type tests shall be carried out for compliance of specification
requirements:
TYPE TESTS:
(I)
(II)
(III)
(IV)
(V)
(VI)
(VII)
(VIII)
9.1
Visual Inspection
Insulation Resistance Test
Applied high Voltage test.
Performance test.
Test for protection device.
Burn in test.
Climatic test.
Vibration test.
ROUTINE & ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
On each of the SMPS battery chargers following routine and acceptance tests shall be
carried out at manufacturer's works before dispatch.
(I)
(II)
(III)
(IV)
(V)
Visual Inspection
Insulation Resistance Test
Applied high Voltage test.
Performance test.
Test for protection device & other tests shall be carried out as per requirement of
-6-
GTP in the presence of inspecting officer.
9.2
a)
b)
c)
d)
INSPECTION:
The inspection of the equipments shall be carried out by the purchaser's representatives
in accordance to the relevant standards.
The purchaser shall have access at all times to the works and all other places of
manufacture, where the equipments are being manufactured and; the supplier shall
provide all facilities for unrestricted inspection of the Supplier's works, raw materials,
manufacture of the material and for conducting necessary tests at any stage.
The supplier shall keep the purchaser informed in advance about the manufacturing
program so, that arrangements could be made for inspection.
No equipments shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture unless the material has
been satisfactorily inspected, tested and cleared.
Inspection and acceptance of any quantity of equipment shall in no way relieve the
Supplier from his responsibility for meeting all the requirements of this specification and
shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such equipment is later found to be defective.
9.3
TESTS AT SITE: The purchaser reserves the right to conduct all the tests on the equipment after arrival at
site and the supplier shall guarantee test certificate figures under actual service
conditions.
10.
DRAWINGS, LITERATURE AND MANUALS:
In addition to any other drawings which the tenderer may like to submit lo show the
arrangement and merits of the offered equipments. The following drawings shall be
supplied with the tender.
General installation layout of SMPS equipments showing position of all associated
equipments.
Detailed dimensional drawings and descriptive literatures of all the associated
equipments separately.
Circuit wiring diagram and schematic diagram.
Literature/ pamphlets / manuals of SMPS and its associated equipments.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
The successful tenderer shall within four weeks of placement of order, submit four sets
of final version of all the drawings of the SMPS Battery Charger for purchaser’s
approval. The purchaser shall communicate his comments/approval on drawings to the
supplier within a period of four weeks. The supplier shall if necessary modify the
drawings and resubmit three copies of modified drawings for purchaser’s approval within
two weeks from the purchaser’s comment, which will be approved within 15 days. After
receipt of purchaser’s approval the supplier shall submit four sets of drawings and
literature containing erection, operating and maintenance instructions per equipment. A
set of reproducibles of the approved drawing too will be supplied for the purchaser use.
11.
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
PACKING & MARKING
All SMPS equipments shall be packed in strong seasoned wooden crates to avoid
handling problem.
The packing shall be of sufficient strength to withstand rough handling during transit,
strong at site and subsequent handling in the field.
Suitable cushioning, protective padding, or dunnage or spacers shall be provided to
prevent damage or deformation during transit and handling.
All packing cases shall be marked legibly with the appropriate caution symbol and
-7-
v.
Each consignment shall be accompanied by a detailed packing list containing the
following information:
a) Name of the consignee.
b) Details of consignment.
c) Destination.
d) Total weight of consignment.
e) Sign showing upper/lower side of the crate.
f) Handling and unpacking instruction.
All gauges, meters, instruments etc. shall have dials or scales calibrated in metric
system of units. All name plates, instruction plate, warning signs and any marking
what-so-ever on the equipment and its parts and accessories shall be in Hindi-English
Language, using idioms, words and meaning as in current use in India.
In order to facilitate sorting and erection at site every part of the plant and equipment
shall be suitably marked.
12.
PLACE OF MANUFACTURE AND INSPECTION:
The tenderer shall state in his tender the place(s) of manufacture, testing and inspection
of the various portions of the work included in the tender. The purchaser or his duly
authorised agent shall have access to the contractor's or sub contractor's work at any
time during working hours for the purpose of inspecting the manufacture and testing of
materials, equipment and completed plant and the contractor shall provide the
necessary facilities for inspection.
13.
DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION:
Should the tendered wish to depart from provision of this specification either on account
of a manufacturing practice or for any other reasons, he will draw special attention to the
proposed points of departure in his tender and submit such full information, drawings &
specifications as will enable the merit of his proposal to be appreciated.
-8-
APPENDIX ‘A’
SCHEDULE OF REQUIREMENT
Battery Charger:
The Battery Charging equipment shall be housed in a sheet steel cabin finished in stove
enameled light grey color conforming to shade of 631 of IS-5 specification. The charger
cabin shall have thickness of 18 gauge or better with adequate ventilation. The minimum
size of cubical should be 585mm Width, 500mm depth and 560mm Height. The rack
shall be free of sharp edges or sharp corners. The rack shall be designed for easy
maintenance & installation. The rack mounting arrangement shall be such as to provide
easy access from rear and top for installation and maintenance. Two power earth
terminals shall be provided in the frame of the system to provide effective earthing to the
system.
The individual Rectifier module shall be easily mounted to/removed from the front side of
the rack. The Rectifier module shall be designed to slide in to the rack on a suitable
mechanical arrangement. The associated AC input, DC output connections,
control/systems & interface cable connecting the modules shall be connected
/disconnected easily without causing any interruption in the supply and damage to load
or other working module. There should be auto/manual change over between float and
boost charger.
Charger Section:
The charger should be suitable for operation from single (230 ± 30% volts, 50Hz) or 3
phase (415 ± 30% volts, 50Hz) AC supply as per the system ultimate capacity and
suitable for charging 24 cell at 2.16 to 2.40 per cell while simultaneously supplying a
continuous load as per requirement at an ambient temp. of 45⁰C. The output of charger
should be stabilized within 1% of the charging voltage. There should be individual MCB
for each module and complete system. The charger section shall comprise of the
following items:
S No. Item Description
Qty
1.
Cabinet
1
2.
Hot Swap Rectifiers Modules 25A/48V
N+1
( N = Load Current +
Battery Charging Current)
The rectifier Modules shall be hot swappable with Individual Alarm Indications for Over
Voltage/ Under Voltage or Output Fail.
3
Dropping Diode
During the Boost charging the full battery voltage should not be reflected on the bus
bars, that is, it should be ensured that the constant voltage is available on DC bus bars
irrespective of the fact whether the battery is on float or on boost charge and at same
time all battery cell should be equally charged. There should be auto/manual change
over between float and boost charger.
4
Voltage monitoring Card
1
5
AC Contactor
1
6
DC Contactor
1
7
Low Voltage Detection Card
1
8
MCB 10A
4
9
MCB 64A
2
10
Lightening Protection Device Class C
1
11
Battery temperature Compensation Probe
2m
12
Microprocessor based Controller
1 No
The controller should be mounted so that it is front accessible , front monitored and
Front Controlled. It shall be installed in such a manner that the LCD panel is visible
without opening and Lock / Door of the unit. The controller should have the following
facilities:
-9-
A. Metering :
a) Load Voltage.
b) Load Current.
c) Battery Voltage.
d) Battery Current.
e) Battery Temp.
f) Voltage and current of Individual module.
B. Alarms and Indications :
a) Load voltage high.
b) Single Rectifier alarm
c) Multiple Rectifier alarm
d) Mains out of range
e) System Over Load
f) Mains ON/Battery Discharge
g) Temp. Compensation fail
h) Battery Fail or No Battery
i) Battery Isolated from the load
All alarm circuits shall be provided with suitable delay to ensure that they do not operate
to transient. All the protection /alarm shall be within tolerance of O.25v in case of DC
voltage and 10/0 in case of current. For AC voltage it shall be +/- 5V.
Every alarm, condition shall be accompanied with an audio alarm with audio cut off
facility.
C. Functional Indications:
a)
Mains available.
b)
Rectifier on Auto Float.
c)
Rectifier on Auto Charge.
d)
Alarm to indicate general alarm condition
13.
Potential free contacts:
Potential free contacts should be provided for extension of alarms to centralized display.
a)
Mains out of range.
b)
Single Rectifier alarm
c)
Multiple Rectifier alarm
d)
Communication Error.
e)
System Over Load.
f)
System voltage high.
g)
System voltage low.
All the components should be of best quality and from reputed manufacturers. The
layout of components, wiring workmanship reliability etc. shall be of best quality.
Adequate space should be provided within the charger section and Distribution,
Switching, Control, alarm & Monitoring section for easy accessibility of MCB, Fuses,
Alarms, protection devices etc. The charging equipment should be complete with the
various component listed above but necessarily limited to the same. The charger shall
also be complete with wiring, glands and fixing bolts.
- 10 -
SECTION-10
CHAPTER-5
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF H.F.CABLE (150 OHMS BALANCED) FOR
CONNECTING POWER LINE CARRIER COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
WITH THE ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT FOR HVPN CARRIER NETWORK
1.
GENERAL:
High frequency cable shall connect the coupling device installed in the
switchyard to the PLC terminal installed indoor. The high frequency cable to be
offered by the bidder shall be suitable for being laid directly in trenches or in
ducts.
The cable shall be tinned copper braided and steel armoured and its outer
covering shall be protected against attack by termites. Bidder shall offer his
comments on method employed by him for earthing of screen and submit full
justification for the same with due regard to safety requirements.
1.1
1.1.1
SCOPE:This specification covers details of H.F. Cable (150 Ohms BALANCED)
required for connecting Power Line carrier Communication terminals with the
associated equipment for HVPN carrier Network.
1.1.2
The scope of supply shall Include design, manufacture, testing at
manufacturer’s works before despatch and delivery of the H.F. Cable for use on
Power Line carrier Communication equipment in HVPN.
1.2
1.2.1
CLIMATIC CONDITIONS:The EHV grid substations (66kV and above) where the HF Cable is required to
be installed are located in the level plains of Haryana. The climatic conditions
are of extreme nature varying from extreme cold to dry and tropical humidity to
hot.
1.2.2
The HF Cable is required to serve satisfactorily
conditions prevailing at site:Maximum ambient temperature
:
Minimum temperature
:
Relative humidity
:
a)
Maximum
:
b)
Minimum
:
Average Nos. of thunder
Storms days per annum
:
Average Nos. of rainy days per annum
:
Average rain fall per annum.
:
Average number of dust storms
days per annum
:
Attitude above mean sea level
:
Maximum temperature in the
:
shade.
Maximum wind pressure
:
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)
viii)
ix)
x)
-1-
under the following climatic
50oC
-2.5oC
100%
26%
45.
120 days
900mm
35
less than1000
45oC.
195 Kg/M2
1.2.3
The atmosphere is to be considered as laden with industrial and town gas and
dust in suspension during dry-months. Fog smoke and mild acid are also
present. Heavy lighting is also present during the months from June to October.
The H.F.Cable is exposed to sunshine, rain, Fog, Hail, Snow etc.
1.3
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:-
1.3.1
All materials used in the construction/manufacture of the H.F.Cable shall be
brand new and of the best quality obtainable of their respective kind and shall
confirm to their respective Indian Standards or other equivalent International
recognized standards whenever applicable. The successful bidder shall
assume full reasonability for coordinated and adequate design.
1.3.2
The workmanship for HF Cable shall be of the highest grade and the entire
construction in accordance with the best modern engineering practice. The HF
Cable shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation under the atmospheric
conditions prevailing at site.
1.4
STANDARDS:
1.4.1
The HF Cable and all its materials covered by this specification shall unless
otherwise stated complete in all respects with the requirements of the latest
edition of IS-5026 and IS-11967 Part-II/Sec-3.
1.5
DEPARTURE FROM SPECIFICATION:Should the bidder wish to depart from the provisions of this specifications either
on account of manufacturing practice for any other reasons he shall draw
special attention to the proposed points of departure a separate sheet(s) in his
tender as per Annexure-III of this specification and shall submit such full
information, drawings and specification so that the merits of his proposal may
be fully understood. This specification shall be held binding unless the
departures have been fully recorded as required above.
1.6
1.6.1
DOCUMENTATION:The successful bidder shall submit four sets of drawings for HVPNL approval.
1.
2.
Drawing showing the inside/inner of the HF Cable and dimensions of its
various components and structures including its weight.
Any other drawing to explain details and merits shall also be submitted.
NOTE:
All above drawings should be a minimum space (14x10cm) for
stamping the approval of drawings by HVPNL.
1.7
TROPICAL TREATMENT:-
1.7.1
The H.F.Cable can be subjected during the service to extremely severe climatic
conditions detailed under Sr. No. 1.2 of this specification. All corrodible parts
and surfaces shall be provided with such protective finishes so that no part of
the installed H.F.Cable shall be injuriously affected by the atmospheric
conditions. The H.F.Cable, if required, may be given special treatments for
tropical conditions.
-2-
1.7.2
All part of the H.F.Cable that are likely to develop corrosion under normal
working conditions shall be effectively protected against corrosion by standard
methods to achieve durable results.
1.8
BIDDER’S EXPERIENCE:-
1.8.1
The bidder (s) shall clearly state in their experience and capability to undertake
design, manufacture, testing and supply of the items similar to that covered in
this specification giving complete information about their establishment i.e.
design office, working personnel, plant and machinery and testing facilities
available at the manufacturer’s works. Details of collaboration, if any, with other
renowned experienced manufacturers shall be stated in the tender.
1.8.2
The bidder shall supply list of purchase orders of similar item executed by them
during the past, giving the name of the purchase, year of supply and place of
installation of the item.
1.8.3
Information regarding satisfactory services/operation of the equipment supplied
in the past be also furnished with the tender.
1.9
RESPONSIBILITY OF DESIGN:The successful bidder shall assume full responsibility for adequate design for
the duty in view to ensure trouble free long service and tropical conditions and
shall use such arrangement and material as to confirm to the best engineering
practice for the operating conditions specified.
Impedance of the cable shall be such as to match the impedance of the PLC
terminal on one side and to that of the coupling device on the other side over
the entire carrier frequency range of 40-500 kHz. The H.F.Cable (150 ohms
balanced) shall meet the following parameters:1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Overall diameter of H.F.Cable shall be between 20-25 mm.
The mutual capacitance at 1 kHz of the H.F.Cable be 34 pf
(Nominal)/meter.
Conductor resistance of cable shall not exceed 12.8 ohm per km at
20oC & dia to be 1.4mm.
The H.F.Cable shall have bending radius of 20 times the overall
diameter of the cable.
Loop resistance of H.F.Cable will not exceed 30 ohms per km at 20oC.
Withstand test Voltage between conductor and outer sheath for one
minute to be 4kV.
The attenuation per km of the cable at various frequencies in the range
of 10 to 500 kHz shall remain in the range of 1 to 5.1 dB/km.
H.F.Cable will be with semi spaced dielectric, polythene string and tube
and annealed tinned braided copper wire with 90% coverage, polythene
inner sheath, GI wire braided armoring and overall PVC sheathed,
preferably grey. The protective armoring provided in the HF cable shall
consist of 0.3 mm (approx) dia of standard GI wire braiding with 70%
coverage.
-3-
1.10
TESTS:Type Tests:
The equipment should be offered type test. Test reports should not more then
seven years old reckoned from date of bid opening in respect of all the tests
carried out in accredited laboratories (based on ISO/IEC) by a reputed
accreditatic body or witnessed by HVPN or another electric power utility and be
submitted by the successful bidder to HVPNL for approval as schedule given in
Bar Chart.
i) Corona extinction voltage
ii) Characteristic impedance Attenuation (insertion loss)
iii) Structural return loss
iv) Capacitance
v) Capacitance Stability
vi) Capacitance unbalance
vii) Transmission unbalance
viii) Mechanically induced noise Voltage
ix) Time delay
x) Ageing stability
xi) Stress-crack resistance
xii) Outer conductor integrity
xiii) Screening efficiency
xiv) Cold bend
xv) Flow
xvi) Dimensional stability
xvii) Contamination
xviii) Bendability
xix) Flammability
xx) Resistance to fluids
xxi) Solderability Weight
ROUTINE TESTS:
As per quality assurance program (QAP).
ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
The following acceptance tests as stipulated in the relevant ISS:11967 (Part2/Sec-3), shall be carried out by the Supplier in presence of HVPNL
representative, unless dispensed with in writing by the HVPNL.
i) Visual and mechanical inspection
ii) Physical dimensions
Iii Marking
iv) Workmanship
v) Characteristic impedance Attenuation (insertion loss)
-4-
vi) Structural return loss
vii) Corona extinction voltage
viii) Capacitance
ix) Capacitance unbalance
x) Transmission unbalance
xi) Mechanically induced noise voltage
xii) Time delay
xiii) Cold dend
xiv) Contamination
xv) Resistance of fluids
xvi) Solderability Weight
1.11
INSPECTION:H.F.Cable shall be inspected by the authorised representative of the HVPNL at
manufacturer’s premises and acceptance test shall be carried out in
accordance with this specification. Inspection report alongwith the routine test
certificates shall be forwarded to the HVPNL for approval before despatch
1.12
PACKING AND DESPATCH :-
1.12.1
After approval of the Inspection/Test Certificates, the H.F.Cable will be
despatched as per the despatch instructions issued by the HVPNL.
1.12.2
The H.F.Cable shall be suitably packed in drum lengths of 500 meters with +
5% tolerance in drum lengths and total ordered quantity for transportation direct
to the consignee and the Contractor shall be responsible for all damages and
losses due to improper packing.
1.13
GUARANTEED TECHNICAL PARTICULARS:-
1.13.1
The bidders shall furnish with his offer Guaranteed Technical Particulars of the
HF Cable offered as per Annexure-I of this specification alongwith his
comments where his specification do not meet or exceed the requirements laid
down in this specification. These guaranteed technical particulars should be
supported by the published literature of the bidder.
Any other additional technical particulars may be supplied by the bidder which
he may like to give to prove the merits of the HF Cable offered by him. Tenders
without Guaranteed Technical Particulars may not be considered.
1.13.2
-5-